BfiHBBRmB IfflSB wBBB&mmm fBBBBBS&Bi m Ban Mb m HP dm Hfl UHBlffi i Bra m m fHHB HI Hffill Han R e -S- r^ «,' -V ^ ' ^ St *p I & * \ Qc U. ^ ^. V * % ■ • '%- ■• cP <** > " J OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE FRENCH LANGUAGE: THE LESSONS DIVIDED INTO SECTIONS OP A PROPER LENGTH FOR DAILY TASKS, AND NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS, ADDITIONS, AND BY V. VALUE. TO WHICH ARE ADDED VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, HIS GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, A NEW INDEX, AND SHORT MODELS OF COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. NEW YORK: D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY. PHILADELPHIA: GEO. S. APPLETON, 164 CHESTNUT ST. M DCCC LI. Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by D. APPLETON & COMPANY, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. 44<>O l 2'2 Notice. — A KEY to the Exercises of this Grammar is pub- lished in a separate volume. PREFACE. In undertaking to edit an improved edition of Ollendorff's French Grammar, I may be allowed to state my personal familiarity and experience with the system which I have practically taught for many years. However, as the Method is called a New Method; if it deserves that title, its active principle must differ from that of the old mode of tuition, and consequently any one, let him be ever so talented, who, without being well acquainted with its modus operandi, would attempt to correct, improve, or compose a work based on that princi- ple, would be as likely to fail, as an experienced stage-driver would be, if he were to endeavor to take the management of a steam or loco- motive engine. It is then incumbent on me to show that I am fully acquainted with the fundamental principle of that New Method. In 1832, before the publication of Ollendorff's or Manesca's System, I published a pamphlet entitled " Experience Consulted; or V. Value's System for teaching Modern Languages." At page 3 of the introduc- tion, is this passage : 1 ' We will merely notice that the principle which furnishes the stu- dent with the means, from the first lesson, of forming his own sentences, or, in other words, of making an immediate and continued use of the words he learns, so as to speak, will appear new to the public, although it has here been acted upon for many years." At page 5, will be found : " Since the means ought always to be made subservient to the end In view, and since immediate is in direct opposition to postponed use, we must reverse the practice usually adopted, and consequently furnish the student with words susceptible of inter- combinations, instead of teaching him such as, not being combinable together, cannot be incor- porated into the same sentence, and must, of course, render his efforts entirely fruitless." This is what Ollendorff has practically carried out ; and, as I have long used his system, its details are perfectly familiar to me. The difference in the extent of the lessons cannot have escaped the notice of teachers and scholars who have practically used the work. Th« 1st, 2d, and 3d are of a proper length for one recitation, even (3) IV PREFACE. with an ordinary capacity ; but from the 4th they begin to assume a size that makes it difficult to learn one, at a single lesson. True, a part only of a lesson may be assigned as a task, but the teacher must then daily ascertain the extent of the lesson, in order to portion it according to the capacity of his class. With a private scholar, even with a private class, that may be done without much inconvenience ; but the case is different when applied to classes in schools, where more regularity and uniformity are required, and where, the scholars having to pass quickly from one study to another, have no time allowed for measuring the fractional part they ought to have for the next reci- tation. With the view of remedying this serious objection, the equali- zation of the lessons was thought expedient. To divide each long lesson into two, three, or four small ones, would in a great measure have destroyed the unity which characterizes each particular and successive lesson in the book. This was thought objec- tionable ; and hence the idea of dividing each lesson, according to its length, into two, three, or four sections, so as to obtain the equaliza- tion of the parts without destroying the unity of the whole. It is what has been accomplished, and which is now presented to the American public. One of the strongest proofs that can be adduced of the superiority of the principle here followed is that, in spite of the numerous faults, inaccuracies, defects, omissions, and errors with which the former book is teeming, scholars learn, and learn well. The half of those errors would destroy the reputation of any other grammar or method, was not the fundamental principle so self-efficient. Those defects are like grades on a railroad : they may partially impede the way, but the moving power of the engine easily overcomes them. We will notice a few of them. At page 24, we find : This or that ox. This or that hay. Ce bceuf. Ce foin. As the three words this or that are translated by ce alone, it is very natural that the student should, in the fourteenth line of the 13th Exercise, translate " Has the peasant this or that ox?" by " Le paysan a-t-il ce boeuf ?" and nothing more ; and the answer, " He has neither this nor that," by "II n'a ni ce," without adding anything else. This is one of those results that experience alone can teach and record ; and which no reasoning a priori could suggest. At the same time it shows how carefully we must weigh and analyse the expres- sions offered to the learner. For, in this instance, the error came not from any fault of his ; but solely from the combination of the three words this or that being carelessly translated by ce. To obviate the difficulty, say : this, that — ce ; this, that ox — ce boeuf. And then, when he comes to : this or that ox, he cannot possibly translate by ce boeuf alone, but he will use Ce bocuf-ci ou cclui-la, &c. Some may consider PREFACE. V this as a trifle. So it is ; but the teacher's or author's business is to give right directions. Below will be found a few of Ollendorff's defects. 1 The e grave has purposely been placed on the e of siege, privilege, &c, to conform to the pronunciation ; although, from mere habit or whim, those words usually have an acute accent, (siege.) Some have found fault, because the feminine was not introduced before the 55th Lesson; but experience proves it to be one of the hap- piest innovations in the Method. The manner here adopted, of forming the subjunctive present from the third person plural of the indicative present, and of placing that third person plural at the head of the tense, will have a tendency to make the acquisition of the tense much more easy. For instance : Boivent, boive, boives, boive, being pronounced in the same way, may be considered as a single word, already known to the student, (since it is the third person plural of the indicative present,) and the first and second persons plural being similar to those of the imperfect, the pupil has in fact nothing new to learn. He actually knows the tense before he comes to it. A great portion of the difficulties attending the subjunctive, arise from the manner of presenting that mood, in the conjugations intended to teach French to the Americans. It is one of the most inaccurate and deficient parts of all grammars. From its nature, the subjunctive being subser- 1 At page 22, we find personne and ne separated by a hyphen (-) — wrong. 30. Porte-feuille, no directions anywhere how to form the plural of compound nouns of this class. 73. What, nominative, que : it should be qu'est-ce qui? (No trifle.) 73. Obs.B. wrong. 60. To, "with whom, for, to whose house : chez qui. 90. Soldier in 71st Exercise, the French given only at 160. 104. Do and Am, for all persons and tenses, should be for the present tense. 112. Obs. A. "wrong, because the preposition does not belong to the se- cond, but to the first verb. The list there given by Ollendorff is transferred to the Synopsis, because the verbs not being introduced in the exercises, uselessly encumber the lesson. 118, 119. Rules on the past participles, not fully explained. The word object, applied both to le, les, and en, show that the author was not aware of their difference in French. 188, 141. How long. No explanation, so that the pupil is constantly at a loss. 169. Je, me, (separated.) Wrong; they should be connected. 183. Rule on the future and note below, wrong. 199. Obs. E. defective. 208. oth and 6th line of Exercise : Has he already kept something from you ? wrongly translated by A-t-il deja gardS quelque chose de vous ? 245. Obs. A. not correct. 273. Obs. A. wrong. 325. Obs. A. wrong 389. Tl s'en faut beaucoup, a knotty poini uselessly presented to the student, who can already translate in several ways the ques- tions there asked, &c. &c 1* VI PREFACE. vient to, or governed by an antecedent, can separately have no specific meaning, and ought consequently never to be used by itself. Now, as in grammars, the subjunctive is mostly given by itself, independently of the governing expression, it follows that the English translation attached to it, is calculated to lead into numerous errors. Let us select a few examples. In the verb, to have, avoir ; to know, savoir ; to go, aller ; the subjunctive present is in all grammars, and in Ollen- dorff's also, given thus: que fate, that I may have; que je sache, that 1 may know ; que faille, that I may go; and as the English is the prototype of the French, the student must necessarily connect the idea of the French subjunctive with that I may, and with no other English. Hence the phrases, William says that I may have his dic- tionary ; She says that I may know my lesson ; He thinks that I may go ; having each the English that I may, which is intimately linked in the student's mind with the French subjunctive, must inevitably lead him to use that mood, and translate by, Guillaume dit que faie son dictionnaire ; Elle dit que je sache ma lecon; II croit que faille. And such translations would hardly be understood by the very authors of the grammars, if unconnected with the English. Now, such modes of expression abound in English: what an inexhaustible source of mis- takes ! ! But this is not all ; it is only one side of the medal ; let us see the reverse. The French subjunctive being connected exclusively with that I may, will never be thought of, when this prototype does not constitute a part of the English phrase: consequently, I must have; unless I know ; he wishes me to go ; cannot by the student be translated by the French subjunctive mood ; for they do not remind him of his English prototype, that I may, which alone can recall the idea of the French subjunctive. Here, then, is another source of innumerable errors. What a sad dilemma is then presented to the student ! Both the presence and the absence of his prototype mislead his steps. He is in an intricate labyrinth, and there is no Ariadne to furnish him with a clew to escape. The unpleasant dilemma in which the student is involved, is avoided by always presenting the subjunctive mood, as I do, in connexion with the expression by which it is governed. All those defects and many others have t)een rectified. The Gram- matical Synopsis will be found to contain many useful explanations, the result of experience. The Preterit, Conditionncl, Imperative, Sub- junctive, the Reflected Verbs, the Negations, arc new and important articles. It was thought preferable to transfer into the Synopsis many of the rules and directions given in the body of Ollendorff's work, so as to have under the same head everything relating to the subject it treats of. V. VALUE. CONTENTS. Preface Page iii System of Pronunciation . . . . ix Directions for using the Method ... xxiii Explanation of the Signs used in this book . . ... xxiv Lessons— 1 to 86 25-456 Grammatical Synopsis . , ... 457 Recueil Epistolaire . . 539 Index ....... . . 547 Idiomatical Expressions . . . . . .575 Directions for using V. Value's System of French Pro- nunciation, by which an accurate knowledge of the sounds of that Language may be acquired in a few Lessons AFTER READING THE DEFINITION OF VOWELS. Teacher. — Please to pronounce the English word, add. Student pronounces it. T. — What is the sound of the letter a in that word ? S. gives it, if he can. If he does not give it correctly, the teacher does it, and tells him to dwell on the sound ; as, aaaa-d, and finally aaa . . . alone, so as to abstract the sound of the vowel a. When done — T. — This is the sound of the French letter a, marked 1 on the 1st column, aaa, a. S. repeats the prolonged sound. T. — Whenever you wish to ascertain the French sound, marked 1 (one), you must recur to the English word add, and you cannot miss it. S. repeats the word, prolongs the sound aaa, and abstracts it, a. T. — The sound of a (with a circumflex accent), marked l 2 (one two, to show that it is the second sound of the same letter a), is found in the word far . .faaa-r ... a. Pronounce the word, dwell upon the vowel Bound, and abstract it. S. tries to do it. If he does not succeed, the teacher must go through the same process as for the a of add. When done — T. — In what English word do you find the French sound marked 1 (one) ? S. gives it. T. — What is the sound ? S. gives it. T. — How is it represented ? S. — By the letter a, in add. T. — In what word do you find l 2 (one two) ? S. gives it. T. — What is the sound ? S. gives it. T. — How is it represented ? S. — By the letter a, with a circumflex. T. —What is the last sound in the word take ? S. tries to give it. If he cannot, the teacher will do it, and tell him to dwell on the sound e e e — ta-ke-e e e. This is in fact the sound heard at the end of every English consonant sounded. The name of this letter (k) is hay ; but its sound in bank, for instance, is not bankay, but bank e e, ending with a prolonged mute sound, which is exactly the sound of the French mute e. It is a very important sound with them ; it is marked 2 (little two), to indicate its faintness. The cough sound, as I have called it (marked 2), is that heard in the French words peu, deux. If, in coughing, both teacher and pupil get that sound, it will be secured ; but if they do not, then the teacher (9) X FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. must make him pronounce either deux or peu, and make him refer the sound to the word he pronounces best, and retain the word as a model. The letter u, marked 6, represents the sound heard immediately after s, in sweet, as it is usually pronounced by Americans. However, some say sooeet. With those, the teacher must devise some way to make them pronounce the u properly. The French nasal sounds are not difficult to acquire ; for the Ameri- cans have many words in which they give to an, in, on, un, the same sound as the French do ; but, in general, they end it by dwelling separately on the n, while the French never do. With the latter it is a simple or a vowel sound ; with the former, a compound one. For instance, the English combination in is pronounced ee-n, having nothing of a nasal nature at the beginning, but ending with the full nasal sound of n, thus presenting two distinct parts, while the French in has but one sound, as heard in the ain of faint, or en of pent. So that, to pronounce the French nasal sound properly, you must retain throughout the sound you begin with, and not dwell separately on the n. ON DIVIDING AND MARKING WORDS. There are, at pages xv, xvi, xvii, xviii, words given to be divided into syllables, and to be marked. When the pupil has learned as far as the words to be divided, (page xv, a very important one,) let him, on some paper or a slate, divide the first word thus : fi-ni, saying Den- tally, the first syllable must be fi, in order to end in a vowel sound, ana because the n being followed by the vowel, I must go with it; the second syllable is ni. The vowel sound of the first is i, like the e in be, marked 4, which is to be put under fi. The vowel sound of the second is also 4 ; so that the word divided and marked will assume this form : fi-ni. The second, me-ne, &c. 4 4 2 3 Let the pupil take but one line here at a time ; then proceed with the rules at xv and xvi, dividing and marking the few words they contain as examples, until he comes to the paragraph (page xvi) of words to be divided and marked, then he must take one line of them, with the one at page xv. When, in going through the other rules, at xvi and xvii, he comes to the paragraph of words (p. xvii) to be divided, let him take one line there also, with those at xv, xvi, &c. This gradual progress by line is essential ; for, the words to be divided and marked, although intended to exemplify the rules under particular heads, contain rules belonging to other sections, which the student is thus enabled to reach just in time to divide and mark them correctly. I have said, one line at a time ; but, although the progress must be gradual, it must vary according to the aptness of the class or scholar; for, in some instances, two lines will hardly be enough ; while, in others, three words would be too much. The teacher must be guided by < irGumstances. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. BY V. VALUE Table I. — Vowel Sounds. Vowels are simple sounds, which can be lengthened without any change in the position of the organs that produce them. The French ^ther combinations. 1 l 2 2 2 2 2 3 32 | 4 5 S 2 6 7 8 9 sounds ew* eu e (acute) e (grave) \ e (circumflex) J 1 u ou an, en in as a in add a, ea. as a in far ea. as e at end of take. as the cough sound f eu, I eu, ceu. as u in bwd f ceu, eu , oeu, 03. as a in gate rai, ei, (er, ez, final.) as e in get f lai, ai, ei. as e in be 1, ] 7 (i grec ). as in no as in nor as in sweet as 00 in good as an in warct as ain in faint 10 on as on in wont 11 un as un in grwrat Table II.- o, au, eau, eo, eo. 6, au, eau, eo, eo. u, u, (eu, in avoir.) ou, ou. am, em, en, aon. {im, in, aim, ain, ein, ym, yn (en, final.) om, eon. um, eun. -Two Irregular Diphthongs. 12. oi sounds like wa in water — or (ou-|-a) (7-f-l 2 ) 01. 13. oin sounds like uain in <\uaint — or (ou-j-in) (7+9). They are irregular, because in those combinations the • and the o change their primitive sounds. As in regular diphthongs each vowel retains its proper sound, they offer no difficulty * There is in peu, deux, heureux, v&ux, Sec, a sound of French eu, ceu, that has no representation in English, except the guttural sound heard in coughing ; heugh ! heugh! (if so spelt.) It is between the u of budge and the final e of the same word. In French it is not guttural, and not difficult to sound. t Rules will be given to determine the sound of these combinations^ 11 Xll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. Every French sound having a representative in an English word, it is evident that the mere recollection of the English word secures the pronunciation of the French sound, and secures it effectually ; for the scholar is expected to be correct in the utterance of his own language. (See Appendix, Note 1.) Table III. — French Consonants differing in Sound from the English 14. g (with a cedilla) like s before a, o, u — sa, so, su. 15. ch, in French words, like sh in show. 16. gn sounds like the gn of mignonette. 17. il, ill (when liquid), sounds like Ui, of briZZmnt. 18. j (and g, which is always soft before e, i, and y), like z, in azure 19. qu like k, — gu like g at the end of %. 20. s like z, when single and between two vowels, — rose, nose. 21. th sounds always like t alone. 22. ti, when in English they sound like sh (as in naft'on, parent, &c), sound in French like the English word see. Table IV. — Consonant Letters. Consonants have no sound without the help of a vowel. Such is the definition; yet, in the word abstract, the b, the s, the t, and the r, &c, are each sounded, and sounded respectively as b in tube ; as s in base ; as t in rate ; and as r in glare ; or else, as if connected with the faint or mute French e, or e at the end of take. So that, any consonant sounded by itself, or at the end of a word, is supposed to be connected with the mute or faint e. Each consonant, in French, as in English, has a sound differing from its name. This distinction is important. Although the French names will be found in this table, yet the student is invited, particu- larly at first, to use the English names, bee, cee, dee, &c, or else the final sound of the English consonants, b, c, d, f, g, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, qu, r, s, t, v, x, z. b (bay), as in English at the end of mob. 1 12 2 2 22 3 3 2 4 5 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ba, ba, be, beu, beu, be, be, bi, bo, bo, bu, bou, ban, bin, bon, bun, boi, boin. *c (say), hard before a, o, u, as the English k in ban&. ca, ca co, co, cu, cou, can, con, cun, coi, coin. c (say), soft, always before e, i, y, like s in so. ce, ceu, ceu, ce, ce, ci, cy, cin. c (say), hard, as k before a consonant or at the end of a word. Ac, cla, ere, creu, creu, cle\ cle, cti, oc, cdo, ctu, clou, cran. crin, cloi, cloin. ^c (with a cedilla), only before a, o, u, like s in so, instead of k. 9a, 9a, ce, ceu, ce, ce, ci, 90, 9U, cou, van, cin, con, 91111, <;oi, 90m. *c, in second and its compounds, sounds like £ hard — segon, — seeondaire, Sec f See Table III. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. Xlll *ch (say, ash), like sh in show, cha, cha, che, cheu, cheu, che, che, chi, cho, cbu, chou, chan, chin, chon, chun — choi, choin. d (day), as in English at the end of lac?. Note. — When final, it sounds like t, if united to the following initial vowel ; as grand ami, pro- nounced gran tami — da, da, de, &c. i as in English in proof. Note. — In neuf (9) it sounds /(eff), j like v, if joined with the following vowel; as neuf ph (pay, ash), j hommes, pronounced, neu-vom — ph, does not — fa, fa, V^ fe, feu, &c. g (zhay,) hard, ax ways before a, o, u, or a consonant, like g hard in the English word bay — garde, fagot, figure, gloire. Note. When final, like k, if joined to the following vowel; as, rang honorable — pronounced, ran-konorable. ga, ga, go, go, gu, gou, gan, gon, gun— goi, goin. *g (zhay), always soft before e, i, y, — like z in azure — gea, gea, ge, geu, geu, ge, ge, gi, geo, geo, — geou, gean — gin, geon, geun — geoi, geoin. *gn (zhay, enn), like gn in mignonette. Note. — If g and n are separated, they sound as in English in magna, mag-na. *gu, like g hard. The u is usually silent. h (ash). This letter, at the beginning of words, is called either mute or aspirated ; but it is never sounded. The word aspirated usually leads the English student to think that the h in French must have the same guttural sound as in English ; but that is not the case. When aspirated in French the h, without being pronounced, pre- vents the elision or cutting off of the preceding vowel. For instance, the h being aspirated in the French word heros (hero), you must write le heros (the hero), and pronounce le ero in two words. On the contrary, when the h is mute, you write Vhomme (the man) and pronounce Vom, in one word. But in both cases the h is entirely silent — ha, ha, he, heu, &c. *f (zhee), always soft, like z in azure, joujou — ja, ja, je, jeu, &c. k (kah), as k in English at the end of pac& — ka, ka, ke, &c. eh (say, ash), when followed by a consonant, like k, as in English. Christ. Note. — It is usually in words of foreign origin. I (ell), as in English, when not liquid, as in until. La, la, le, &c. *l (ell mouille), liquid, always written il, ill, sounds like the lli of the English word briZftant. Examples : Ail, aille, paille, veille, fille, juillet, oeil. — Ilia, ilia, ille, illeu, illeu, ille, ille, illo, illo, illu, illou, illan. illan. illin, illon, illun, illoi, iiloin. m (emm), ) as in English, when not combined with the preceding vowel n (enn), /sound, as in clam, din — ma, me, mo, &c. * See Table 111. XIV FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. P (pay), as in English in pump. Note. — Silent after m, when they are in the same syllable, as prompt, temps. Pa, pa, &c. q (ku), as in English like k. qu (ku-u), like the English k, not the English qu, as quand, Jean ; qui, kee, not kwee. Do not mark qu 6, and i 4, but qui (4) ; qua, qua, que, queu, queu, que\ que, qui, quo, quo, qu, quou, quan, quin, quon, qu'un, quoi, quoin. r (air), as in English in roar — strongly articulated — ra, ra, re, &c. * (ess), hard, like s in so. 1st. At the beginning of words, as sage. 2d. When final and pronounced, as atlas, moeurs. 3d. When doubled, as passer, possession. 4th. Single and preceded by another consonant; as conserver, absolu, observation. Note. — Although the English s fre- quently sounds like a z, after the letter b, as in absolve, observe, &c, it does not in French; — sa, sa, se, &c. *s (ess), soft or like z, when single and between two vowels, as plaesant, rose. Note. — When final, if joined to the following vowel, it sounds like z ; as Us ont, eelzon,f &c. ; — asa, ase, aseu, ase, as6, asi, iso, iso, isu, isou, esan, esin, eson, asun, usoi, usoin. t (tay), as in English in fatf. — ta, ta, te^ teu, teu, &c. *ti (tay ee). Note. — When the ti, in English, sounds like sh, as in nation, patient, minutice, the French ti sounds like see in English. Examples : Na^'on, parent, minute, — tia, tia, tie, &c. *th (tay, ash), like the English initial t. Examples : Thalie, tfAeatre, — tha, tha, the, theu, theu, the, the, &c. v (vay), as in English at the end of drive — va, va, ve, veu, &c. w (doeble vay), as v, or as the vowel ou (7th.) k ks gz x (eeks), like k, ks, gz, s, z ; as ezcepter, extreme, exercice, Bruzelles, z (Brussels), smeme. z (zed), as in phiz. Examples : Zone, azur, amazone. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. This is a very important exercise, and one which should be daily practised for a considerable time, and now and then renewed. In dividing the words, attend to the combination of letters in Tables I., II., III. For instance, in the word hautement, the combination au, being at No. 5 in Table I., take them together and mark them 5 2 . In hua, the combination ua not being in the table, separate them into u and a, and mark them 6 and 1. So with oi, which being in Table VL t * See Table III. f And sometimes before m, as onthousiasme, mesmerisme. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XV is marked 12, whilst io must be separated, because that combination is not in the tables. Ai, in the table ; ia, not in, &c. The apostrophe (') is used to connect two words into one, and takes the place of a vowel suppressed before another. Ueau sounds just like lo ; qu'avez-vous? like kahvayvoo. The end of ant syllable must be a vowel sound. This is an all- important direction. Note. A vowel sound may (as is the case with an, en, in, on, oin, &c.) end with a consonant letter. A consonant, when final or sounded by itself, is supposed to form a compound syllable with the mute or faint e. So chef is separated into che-fe ; avec into a-ve-ke ; fil into fi-le ; ver into ve-re ; porte into po-r-te. Hence each consonant is marked 2 from the faint e. m or n, mm or nn, followed by a vowel, goes with it ; if not, it goes with the preceding. Image separates into i-ma-ge, and not as in Eng- lish (im-age). Note, h after n is always null. Inherent separates into i-nhe-rent, (the h being mute, is null in inherent;) inhumain, becomes i-nhu-main ; inhumaine, i-nhu-mai-ne. Divide and mark : — Fini, mene, promene, amene, ananas. Homme becomes ho-mme ; donne, do-nne ; comme, commune, commere, connu, somme, pomme, adonna, ronde, campagne, enfant, son, mon, pardon, parfum, instrument, commun, commence, innocent, inoui, inhabit^, continental, inharmonieux, immobilite. A final consonant having no vowel connected with it, ought, from its definition, to be silent. It is so in French. Hence it is united to the last syllable, or to a monosyllable ; as, avant becomes a-vant — the final t being silent goes with van, so as to make vant ; four letters, although but three (van) are pronounced. In the French word port the four letters are taken, although only por are pronounced ; but porte becomes por-te, because the last ^causes the t to sound. Divide and mark: — Comment, dents, prudent, prudente, camp, temps, nid, pied. (4-4-3.) Rule. — Final consonants are silent, except c, /, I, and r preceded by a, i, o, u. Sac, avec, lac, vif, actif, sel, miel, fil, car, par, finir, cor, Leur, auteur. See Appendix, Note 2. RULES ON FRENCH E. Letters and Combinations, marked 2 {little two), and pronounced like the e at the end of take.* Any sound marked 2 (little two) is in French called mute or faint ; e (without accent) is mute or faint, in the following cases. Rule 1st. e = 2 at the end of words, as ce, de, traite, pere, donrce, heure. * This is the only vowel sound that is slighted or suppressed in French — a, #, i, o, u, &e., have always their full sounds. XVI FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. Rule 2d. e= 2 before a single consonant not final, (except the con- sonant x, which has usually a compound sound.) Venn, devant, recevoir, demande, redemande. Rule 3d. e= 2 before two consonants, the second of which is I, or r; as in replace, represente, secretement, repliant. Rule 4th. es= 2 at the end of words of more than one syllable, as Bibles,* places, dites, faites. Rule 5th. ent= 2 at the end of the third person plural of verbs ; as chanted, ils jouent, ils disaiew^. When immediately after a vowel, with- out any intervening consonant, they merely lengthen the preceding vowel sound. Rule 6th. 2 is placed over a consonant sounded by itself, either in the body or at the end of a word, for the e mute is supposed connected with it. Examples : pour, pou-r ; corde, co-r-de ; fil, fi-1 ; soldat, so-l-dat. Observation. — E is null, and therefore not marked, when, without an accent, it is before a and o, as George, nageait. It is frequently so in English, as George, pageant, dungeon. It is thus placed to soften the g. When pronounced in French, the e is accented. These constitute what the French call mute syllables. Divide and mark : — Le, me, que, tete, habite, eleve, montagne, revenu, revenant, devoir, repos, repose, reposant, celui, retire, retire", cede, cede, ace able, devant, replace, replagant, repli, replie, une, moine, moins, prenant, refuse, tu refuses, vie, lui, joue, jou6e, petit, petite, il entre, ils entrent (3d pers. pi.) montagnes, ils replacent (3d), voies, Aleves, ils prient (3d), ils disent (3d), poindre, mangea, mangeames, Georgie, col, protocol, sel, chef, il, foin, cordial, plongea, seul, parasol. IMPORTANT REMARK ON E MUTE. When e without accent is mute or faint, it invariably (we may even say universally) lengthens the preceding syllable. In French, in the following cases, it does not merely lengthen, but it likewise alters the sound of the preceding vowel. o, eti, before a mute syllable, is open and marked l 2 : male. e, before a mute syllable, usually takes the grave or circumflex accent, and is marked 3 2 or e open : pere, mere, meme. at, ai y ei, before a mute syllable, are marked 3 2 : aime, connaitre, peine. o, 6, au, eau, before a mute syllable, 5 2 : pgriode, cote, haute. ew = 2 2 , before a mute syllable: rie?/se, mttfte.f The same vowel sounds, viz: a, e, ai, &c, o, &o., cu, are open and marked in the same manner, before tico or more consonants ; as, apre, * See Appendix, Note 3. f See Appendix. Note 4. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XVU ferme, paraitre, faible, autre, noble, heurte. And likewise before a final consonant sounded: ver, fer, air, chef, cor, parasol, leur, seul. Because, in both cases, the following consonant is supposed to be con- nected with the e mute or faint, and may be considered as forming a mute syllable : ve-re, fe-re, ai-re, che-fe, co-re, &c. In these two last situations (before two or more consonants and before a final consonant sounded) the e takes no accent, though marked 3 2 . Divide and mark : — Changea, changeames, ane, hate, diademe, bref, plonge, plongerent (3d), frere, nagea, nageates, 4eve, promene, prome- nera, supreme, rieur, rieuse, haut, haute, cote, cote, cotes, ose, relief, ose, saut, saute, osant, gueux, gueuse, saute, sonne, sonne, liberte, fameux, fameuse, faible, heureux, heureuse, espoir, aube, ode, odeur, preneur, preneuse, sel, mer, sec, bonheur, malheur, eleves, gloire, mouvoir, 6gale, e"gales, e"gout, retirent (3d), seche, sec, compagnes, egalera, entreprises, replantent (3d), bonnes, egalerent, mangeates, petites, pour, mer, noircir, George, lient (3d), jouent (3d), concounr, foui, fouine, neige, neigea, yoient (3d), bel, beau, belle, vendent (3d), vendant, content, content (3d), neigeant, plongea, replongerent (3d), diagonal, replient (3d), moindre. Letters and Combinations marked 3, and pronounced like a in gate, or 6 (close or with acute accent.) Rule 1st. e (with acute accent) called e close, is marked 3. Rule 2d. e=B in the conjunction et (and). The t is never sounded, and never connected with the following initial vowel : un et un (un 6 un) ; et enfin (e enfin). Rule 3d. e = 3 before cc, dd, ff t or any other double consonants not followed by a mute syllable : effacer, dessin, reddition, excellent, terri- toire, paresseux. Rule 4th. e=3 in ex followed by a vowel: exact, eziger. The x sounds then like gz, egzact, egzige. Rule 5th. e2 = 3 when final, or taken in combination at the end of words ; as avez, prenez, nez. Rule 6th. er=3, when final, in words of more than one syllable; and then the r is never sounded, as parZer, pommier.* Rule 7th. ai, eai, ei= 3, when not followed by a mute syllable, and likewise when final : Tax, aimer, to love — aimons, let us love — -je man- geai, I ate — peine, grieved — gai, gay. Divide and mark the following words : — Ete, e'-te' ; alle, a-lle ; e'carte', borde, chante, repete, decide, pile, peigne, et, trois et un, errant, erronne, ecclesiastique, efface, errata, exag^rer, effacer, exactement, essai, ^carter, 6cartez, effort, bouchez, bouches, exister, existez, exil, * See Appendix, Note 5. 2* XVlll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. efFarouche, eflfarouch6, exaction, e*carte, paresseux, paresseuse, tu donnes, effaroucher, donnes, eifarouchez, donnez, donner, causai, et avec, et au, et apres, verrai, prendrai, ain6, la et ici, et avant, peinai, aimant, aimez, aime, neige, neigeant, neiger, mangeai, nous nageons, demangeaison, raison, plaisir, peignant, plein, pleine, peigne, chez, rendez-vous, prendrai, peindrai, effrene, effarouches. Letters and Combinations marked 3 2 , and pronounced like e in get, or e *■ (grave or open) and e. Rule 1st. e (with a grave accent) called e open, and also e, marked 3 2 . Rule 2d. e=3 2 in monosyllables ending with a consonant; as ces, des, est, les, Tnes, ses, tes, &c. Note. — If the consonant is c, f, I, or r, it sounds after the e; as, sec, se-k; chef, che-f ; sel, se-1; ver, ye-r. Rule 3d. e = 3 2 before two or more consonants; as, esperer, restons, liberte. Note. — The consonant that immediately follows the e is pro- nounced separately, and of course marked 2 : as esperer, e-s-pe-rer : restons, re-s-tons. Rule 4th. e=3 2 before double consonants, cc, ff, ss } rr f 11, &c, when the following syllable is mute : as nette, querelle, cesse, terre, richesse, paresse. Rule 5th. e=3 2 before a sounding final consonant; as avec, relief, miel, Oreb, hier,* respect; and in every monosyllable ending in er, as fer, mer. Rule 6th. ais, ait, aient, oient,\ aix, et=S 2 when final: as j'avais, il etait, ils e'taient, ils etoient, paix, objet. Rule 7th. e = 3 2 in ex, followed by a consonant; as extreme, experi- ence. Note. — The x is usually pronounced ks ; ekstreme, eksperience. Rule 8th. ai, eai, ei= 3 2 when followed by a mute syllable ; as aime, ai-je? peine, enseigne. Divide and mark: — Severe, scene, meme, supreme, mes, est, bref, sec, tel, mer, espoir, destitution, fermente, serment, telle, cette, quelle, piece, cachette, richesse, richesses, grief, griefs, miel, fiel, j'avais, tu avais, il donnait, ils portaient, elle joignait, ils jouaient (3d), fait, effet, elles e'taient, objet, sujet, portefaix, ils e'taient (3d), elles priaient (3d), venaient (3d), aime, seme', seme, aiment (3d), ils semerent (3d), peine, peine, peigne', peigne, secret, mene', mene, sain, saine, ancien, ancienne, le mien, les miens, les miennes, boulet, faite, Jeter, jette, baudet, cachet, met, mets, paix, expres, extravagant, extraordinaire, exposerent (3d), fer, ver. * See Appendix, Note 5. f oient ii the termination of the third person plural of the imperfect and condi- tional, old orthography. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XIX VARIOUS EXPLANATIONS. e (without accent) =1, or sounds like French a in the combination emme. Examples : femme (pro. fam) — decemment, de-ce-mment. (3-f-l +8.) en at the end of words =9. Examples: bi-en, well; rien, nothing. Note. — In the words composed from Men, the combination en, although it may no longer be final, retains the ninth vowel sound. Examples : hi-en-tot, soon; bi-era-fe-sant, benevolent. en=9, in the termination tens, when s is the mark of the plural. Examples : mien, miens ; entretien, entretiens. en = 9, in the combinations ten, tens, tent, of the verbs tenir, to hold, to keep ; venir, to come, and their compounds. Examples: je vi-en- drai, I shall come; je tiens, I hold; elle convient, she agrees. en everywhere else, except in the termination ent of the third person plural, (see Rule 5 on e mute, page xiv.) always=8: entends, senti- ment, en. Remarks on the letter y. When the letter y in any word is preceded by a vowel, it .s equiva- lent to t, i. The first i unites with the foregoing vowel, and must be marked accordingly. The second i sounds separately, or unites with what follows. Examples : ayant, ai-i-ant ; citoyen, ci-toi-i-en ; pays, pai-is. The diaeresis (••) separatesHwo letters, which otherwise would sound together. Thus, in Saul, (the apostle's name,) au=5 2 ; but in the name of the Hebrew king Saul, with the diaeresis, a and u are sepa- rated, and pronounced Sa-u-1. (1, 6, 2 .) Of the liquid sounds, ail, eil, il, euil, 03il, ouil, ails, eils, &c. Note. — The sound of Hi in the English word brilliant is similar to the French liquid il, ill. When il or Us final is liquid, the preceding vowel is pronounced separately with its open sound, viz: a = l 2 , e—2> 2 , eu=2 2 , oe=2 2 , and then follows the liquid sound of il or ils= 17. Examples: ail, a-il; reveil, re-ve-il ; seuil, seu-il ; fenouil, fe-nou-il. Note. — azil is pro- nounced like euil. (2 2 , 17.) Those vowels, a, e, i, &c, have a long sound, because the il final is supposed to befolloiued by e mute. aill, eill, ill, euill, oeill, ouill. When folloiced by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel a, e, i, &c, sounds as it does with the final il, as explained above. Examples: pa-ill-e, ve-ill-e, fi-ill-e, feu-ill-e, fou-ill-e. When not folloiced by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is close, XX FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. viz: a=l, e=S, eu=2, #=2. Examples: ma-ill-et, ve-ill-er, pi-ill* a-ge, feu-ill-et, fou-ill-ant, oeillet, ce-ill-et. (2, 17, 3 2 .) cueil, gtteil, when final. In these combinations the u serves only to make the e and the g hard: the e represents the long sound of eu marked 2 2 , and the letters il have the liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-il, o-r-gue-il. ctjeill, gueill, not final. When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel sounds as it does with the final cueil, gueil, as explained above. Example: je re- cue-ill-e. When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is short or close ; that is, e sounds like eu marked 2, and the letters ill have their usual liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-ill-ant, o-r-gue-ill-eux. Stress of the voice. The stress of the voice is placed on every vowel preceding a mute syllable. The faint or mute e is the only slighted sound, all the other vowels receive a full and distinct utterance. Entre ; en, distinct ; tre, faint — entreprise ; en, full ; tre, faint ; pri, full ; se, faint. In communication, every syllable is distinct, and the stress of the voice rests on the last. APPENDIX. Note 1, (page xii.) In this I differ totally from Mr. Charles Picot, who in his excellent system of pronunciation says (page 6): "The English words at, father, &g., are merely given as means of comparison and association, to enable the pupil to proceed from what he knows to what he is to learn, and must be dispensed with as soon as the sounds are well mastered." Far from discarding those words, I strongly recommend the scholar to retain them carefully as unerring guides. If they are useful at first, they must ever be so, and would it not be ungrateful to throw aside those that befriended us in the beginning of our career ? Treasure them up, therefore. Note 2, (page xv.) In French, final consonants are not generally pronounced ; for, not being followed by a vowel, they ought naturally to be silent. Hence the French words port and grand are pronounced as if written por and FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XXI gran; but the t and the d are pronounced as in English, when spelled in French with a final e, as porte, grande. The above observation will sufficiently explain why the final conso- nants are silent in the following Table, exhibiting the sixteen vowel sounds and two diphthongs, as represented at the end of words. No. 1. as, at, ats 12 at, ats. 2 es, (in words of two syllables and more,) ent* 2. eux, eut, oeud, ceuds, oeufs. 2 2 . with this vowel, the next consonant sounds, as bceu/, leur, seuZ ; but the second consonant is silent ; leurs, soeurs, coeurs. 3. aie, ed, eds, ee, ees, es, er, et (conjunction), ez. 3 2 . ais, ait, et, es, ect, ets (and es in monosyllables), aient,* oient,\ 4. id, ie, is, it, ies, ys. lent.* 5. aud, aut, aux, op, os, ot, ots, auds, auts, eaux. 5 2 . with this vowel, the consonant which immediately follows sounds. Examples : fol, Jacob, soc, cor ; but the second con- sonant is silent : socs, cors, mort, port. 6. ue, ues, ut, uts, ud (and in the verb avoir, eus, eut, eue, eues), uent.* 7. oue, oues, oud, ouds, oup, oups, ous, out, outs, oux. ouent* 8. amp, amps, ant, ants, ems, emps, ent, ents, ans, ens. 9. ins, int, ingt, ingts, ains, aint, ainc, aincs, eins, eint, eints, (en, ens.)% 10. ons, ont, ond, onds, amb, ombs, ompt, one, ones. 11. uns, urns. 12. oie, oies, ois, oit, oid, oids, oix, oient.* 13. oing, oins, oint, oints, oings. Note 3, (Page xvi.) The reason why es is marked 2 and pronounced like the faint e, may be stated as follows. In English, the book, the friend, my pen, &c, are expressions used in the singular number. Now, as the and my undergo no change in the plural number, should book, friend, and pen, be spelt and pronounced as before, there could be no distinction between the singular and the plural. To render that distinction sensible, an s is added to the end of each noun, (for the eye,) and is articulated to apprise the ear that the idea of plurality is intended. In French, on the contrary, the articles in the singular, le, la, being changed into les for the plural, mon, ma, * Third person plural of verbs. I oient, old orthography, third person plural of imperfect and conditional. j (en and ens) final, and in the verbs tenir, venir, and their compounds. XXll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. into mes, &c, when those words les, mes, &c, are heard, they at once intimate to the ear that the plural is meant, hence the alteration of the noun becomes useless ; and although the s is added, (for the eye,) it is not pronounced, and of course final es is marked little 2 . Note 4, (page xvi.) The e mute or faint, marked little 2 , after a consonant, has the effect of lengthening and altering the sound of the preceding vowel or syl- lable, in English, as may be seen below. hat, on account of the faint e that follows, becomes hate ; met decomes mete ; bit becomes bite ; hop becomes hope ; tub becomes tube* In French the e mute always lengthens the preceding syllable, but it alters the vowel sound, when it is after a consonant, only in four instances, instead of doing it in every case, as in English. mal (marked 1) becomes male (marked l 2 ). heureux (2, 2), heureuse (2, 2 2 ); cede (3, 3), cede (3 2 , 2 ); haut (5), haute (5 2 , 2 ). Hence the following rule : Silent e lengthens the preceding syllable, and when the vowel has two sounds, that vowel takes the sound marked with double figures ; 2 2 , 3 2 , 5 2 , and likewise l 2 when there is a circumflex on the a ; not other- wise. When the faint e comes immediately after a vowel, no consonant intervening, as ie, ue, ee, eue, &c, it lengthens that vowel without altering its sound. Note 5, (pages xvii and xviii.) The r is sounded only in a few words of two or more syllables. Amer (1, 3 2 , 2 ), bitter; cuiller, cu-i-11-e-r (6, 4, 17, 3 2 2 ), spoon; enfer, hell; fier, proud; hier, yesterday; hiver, winter ; magister, country school-master ; cancer, ether, frater, Alger, Jupiter, Lucifer, Stathouder. DIRECTIONS HOW TO USE THIS METHOD As there is now a System of Pronunciation with this Method, let the first ten or twelve lessons be devoted to acquiring a complete know- ledge of that important branch of a modern language. If that is thorough/y done, the teacher will have no further trouble with the pronunciation, for the pupils will be able to read correctly by them- selves. Each lesson now consists of one, two, three, &c, separate vocabu- laries, each followed by exercises, English at first, but French and English at the Twelfth Lesson; that is, when the student's ear begins to become a little familiar with French sounds. The first vocabulary must be read by the pupils, each taking a line and pronouncing aloud both the English and French, the latter being divided into syllables, and distinctly uttered under the direction of the teacher, who ought, as they proceed, to ask questions respecting the pronunciation. This done, the students are directed : — 1st, to learn for the next recitation, the English and French vocabularies, so as to be able to give the French when the English is mentioned, or the English when the French is given out ; and, 2dly, to write down the translation of the first exercise, to be handed to the teacher, who, directing them to close their books, will, while correcting the errors, give out the English of every question and answer, to be put in French by the students. The correction and translation ended, let the next vocabulary be read, or rather syllabled, slowly and distinctly, and explained by the teacher, if need be, and so on, the vocabularies being learned and the exercises translated. As this method is simple and gradual enough for every capacity, should there be pupils too young to write the translations, let them prepare the exercises and recite them to the teacher, who will do well to make them spell out a number of words at each recitation. (23) EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. The irregular verbs are designated by a (*) star. The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, placed after verbs, denote that they are regu- lar, and indicate the conjugation to which they respectively belong. Idiomatic al expressions are marked thus : f . The verbs taking ttre (to be) as auxiliary, are marked thus ; e . § 1 to 164, refer to paragraphs in the Synopsis, (from p. 457 to 538.) Dir. 1, means first Direction, &c, (p. 457 to 460.) R. 1, means first Rule, &c, (from p. 460 to 461.) Obs. or Ob. 7, means Observation 7th, &c. 24 1 , 24 2 , means 24th Vocabulary, first Section ; second Section. •24 3 , N. 2 ; 24th Vocabulary, Note 2. 28 2 , Ob. 65 ; 28th Vocabulary, Observation 65th. §24— R. 2,^ § 24 — A. 2, > mean the 2d article or rule of 24th paragraph. §24—2, ) 490 — 3, means the article marked 3, at p. 490. Pa. or p. 419, means page 419 ; 405, 6, 7, mean 405, 406, 407. See Pronun. See System of Pronunciation. (24) OLLENDORFF'S FRENCH METHOD. FIRST LESSON, 1st.— Premiere Legon, Ire. Vocabulary. Have you ? Yes, Sir, I have. I. The. The hat. Have you the hat ? Yes, Sir, I have the hat. The bread. The sugar. The broom. The paper. The soap. My. My hat. Your. Your bread. Have you my hat ? Yes, Sir, I have your hat. Have you your bread ? 1 have my bread. Which or what ? Which hat have you ? I have my hat. Which bread have you ? I have your bread. My exercise. VOCABTJLAIRE. 1 Avez-vous ? 2 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai. Je, which becomes j' before a vowel or silent h. (See Pronunciation.) Le. Le chapeau. Avez-vous le chapeau 1 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai le chapeau. Le pain. Le sucre. Le balai. Le papier. Le savon. Mon. Mon chapeau. Votre. Votre pain. Avez-vous mon chapeau? Oui, Monsieur, j'ai votre chapeau. Avez-vous votre pain ? J'ai mon pain. Quel ? (before a noun.) Quel chapeau avez-vous ? J'ai mon chapeau. Quel pain avez-vous ? J'ai votre pain. Mon exercice. First Exercise. 1st. — Premier Exercice. ler. Which exercise have you. Sir ? I have the first exercise. — Have you the bread? Yes ; Sir, I have the bread. — Have you your bread? 1 For rhe manner of teaching the lesson, see Manner of using the Method. 2 When the verb is interrogative the French always put a hyphen (-^ be- tween the verb and the nominative pronoun. (Mind this in writing.) 8 (25) ■ 26 SECOND LESSON. I have my bread. — Have you the broom? I have the broom.—- Have you the soap ? I have the soap. — Have you your soap ? I have my soap. — Which soap have you ? I have your soap. — Have you your sugar 1 I have my sugar. — Which sugar have you ? I have your sugar. — Which paper have you ? I have my paper. — Have you my paper? I have your paper. — Which bread have you ? I have my bread. — Which broom have you ? I have your broom. — Have you your exercise % Yes, Sir, I have my exercise.— Which exercise have you? I have my first exercise. 1 Daily Salutations. Good day, Miss. How do you do, Madam ? Salutations journalieres. Bon jour, Mademoiselle. Comment vous portez-vous, Ma- dame ? Very well, thank you. Tres-bien, merci. Obs. 1. Tris is always connected, by a hyphen, with the following word. Good evening. | Bon soir. 2 SECOND LESSON, 2d.— Seconde Le$on, 2de. Vocabulary. Vocabulaire. '■>• : ^ .«.. '■' . . SLe, before a consonant. It. (Objective pronoun.) \ £ , before a vowel _ &c (Pronun .) I have. I have it. | J'ai. Je l'ai. Obs. 2. Objective pronouns are usually placed before the verb, in French. Instead of: I have it, the French say: I it have. Je Z'ai. Have you my hat ? Avez-vous mon chapeau ? Yes, Sir, I have it. Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. Good. Bad. Bon. Mauvais. Pretty. Ugly. Joli. Vilain. Old. Fine, handsome. Vieux. Beau. My cloth. My fine cloth. Mon drap. Mon beau drap. The salt. The good salt. Le sel. Le bon sel. 1 Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many phrases, in addition to those given in the exercises ; but they must pro- nounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more readily, when required to refer to them in writing their lessons. 2 When no daily salutations are found in some of the lessons, the teacher may introduce some, or else use the preceding ones. SECOND LESSON. 27 The shoe. The old shoe. My wood. Your pretty wood. Your stocking. The ugly stocking. The thread. Your bad thread. The dog. The horse. Not. (See negations in Synopsis.) I have. I have not. I have not the bread. No, Sir. No, Miss. Have you my old hat ? No, Sir, I have it not. Which cloth have you ? I have the fine cloth. What dog have you ? I have my old dog. Of. The thread stocking. Le Soulier. Le vieux Soulier. Mon bois. Yotre joli bois. Votre bas. Le vilain bas. Lefil. Votre mauvais fil Le chien. Le cheval. Ne (before), fas {after Ine verb). J'ai. Je n'ai pas. (See Pron\H.) Je n'ai pas le pain. Non, Monsieur. Non, Mademoiselle. Avez-vous mon vieux chapeau ? Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. Quel drap avez-vous ? J'ai le beau drap. Quel chien avez-vous ? J'ai mon vieux chien. De. Le bas de fil. Obs. 3. As no noun can in French, as it is in English, be used as an adjective to another noun : the preposition, de, is always put between the name of the thing and the name of the substance of which it is made, which latter, in French, is always placed last. The paper hat, [the hat of paper.] The gun. The velvet. The wooden gun, [the gun of wood.] The velvet shoe. Which gun have you ? I have the wooden gun. Which stocking have you ? I have my thread stocking. Have you my velvet shoe ? No, Miss, I have it not. Yes, Miss, I have it. Le chapeau de papier. Le fusil. Le velours. Le fusil de bois. Le Soulier de velours. Quel fusil avez-vous ? J'ai le fusil de bois. Quel bas avez-vous ? J'ai mon bas de fil. Avez-vous mon Soulier de velours ? Non, Mademoiselle, je ne l'ai pas. Oui, Mademoiselle, je l'ai. Second Exercise, 2d. — Second Exercice, 2d. Good day, Miss. — Good day, Sir. — Good day, Madam. — How do you do, Sir? Very well; thank you, Miss. — How do you do, Ma- dam ? Very well, Sir, thank you. — Have you my fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you my old shoe 1 No, Miss, I have it not. — Which dog have you ? I have your pretty dog. — Have you my bad paper? No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you the good velvet cloth? Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you my ugly gun? No. Sir, I have it not. — Which gun have you ? I have your fine gun. — Which stock- ing have you? I have the thread stocking. — Have you my thread 28 THIRD LESSON. stocking? I have not your thread stocking. — Have you my wooden gun ? No ; Sir. I have it not. — Have you the old bread ? I have not the old bread. — Which shoe have you? I have the fine velvet shoe. — Which velvet shoe ? Your velvet shoe. — Which soap have you? I have my old soap. — Which sugar have you? I have your good sugar. — Which salt have you ? I have the bad salt. — Which exercise have you? I have my second exercise. — Have you the first exercise ? No ; Madam, I have it not. — Which hat have you? I have my bad paper hat. — Have you my ugly wooden shoe? No, Sir, I have it not. — What vocabulary have you ? I have the second. — Have you the first ? Yes, I have it. THIRD LESSON, 3d.-— Troisi erne Legem, 3me. Vocabulary. Something, anything. Have you anything ? I have something. Nothing, not anything. Obs. 4. Quelque chose (something, any thing), is never used with a nega- tion. Not .... any thing, as well as nothing, must be translated by ne (before, and) rien (after the verb), and not by ne . . . .pas quelque chose. I have not anything. I have nothing. The wine. My money or silver. The gold. Le, the, becomes Z' before a vowel or silent h. VOCABULAIRE. Quelque chose. Avez-vous quelque chose ? J'ai quelque chose. Ne (before), rien (after the verb). Je n'ai rien. (Not: je n'ai pas quelque chose.) Le vin. Mon argent. L'or. (Pronun.) Obs. 5. The string. The ribbon. The golden ribbon. The button. The cofTee. The cheese. The coat. My coat. The silver candlestick. Are you hungry ? I am hungry. I am not hungry. Are you thirsty ? I am thirsty. I am not thirsty. Any thing or something good. Have you anything good I Nothing or not anything bad. I have not anything (nothing) good. Le cordon. Le ruban d'or. Le cafe. L' habit. (Pronun.) Le ruban. lie bouton. Le from age. Mon habit. Le chandelier d'argent. t Avez-vous faim ? t J'ai faim. t Je n'ai pas faim. t Avez-vous soif ? t J'ai soif. t Je n'ai pas soif. Quelque chose dt bon. Avez-vous quelque chose de ben? Ne. . . . rien de niauvais. .It 1 n'ai rien de bon. THIRD LESSON. 29 Obs. 6. What ? is quel? before a noun, as : Quel bouton avez-vous ? but que t (before a verb.) What ? What have you ? Que ? Qu 1 avez-vous ? Obs. 7. Quelque chose and ne . . . . rierc require de when they are before an adjective ; and so does what ? Examples : Qu' avez-vous de bon ? J'ai le bon cafe. Avez-vous quelque chose de joli ? What have you good ? I have the good coffee. Have you anything pretty? I have nothing pretty. Are you sleepy ? I am sleepy. I am not sleepy. Je ?i'ai rien de joli. t Avez-vous sommeil ? t J'ai sommeil. t Je n'ai pas sommeil. Third Exercise, 3d. — Troisieme Exercice, 3me. What have you'? I have the third exercise. — Have you your second exercise, Miss? Yes, Sir, T have it. — Good evening, Ma- dam, how do you do ? Very well, Sir, thank you. Good morning, Miss. Good morning, Sir. — Have you my good wine 1 I have it.— Have you the gold ? T have it not. — Have you the money? I have it. — Have you the gold ribbon? No. Sir, I have it not. — Have you your silver candlestick ? Yes, Sir, I have it. — What have you ? I have the good cheese. I have my cloth coat. — Have you my silver button ? I have it not. — Which button have you? I have your good gold button. — Which string have you? I have the gold string. — Have you anything ? I have something. — What have you ? I have the good bread. I have the good sugar. — Have you anything good ? I have nothing good. — Have you anything handsome? I have no- thing handsome. I have something ugly. — What have you ugly? I have the ugly dog. — Have you anything pretty? I have nothing pretty, t have something old. — What have you old? T have the old cheese. — Are you hungry? I am hungry. — Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty. — Are you sleepy? I am not sleepy. — What have yon beautiful? I have your beautiful dog. — What have you bad? I have nothing bad. — Which paper have you? I have your good paper. — Have you the fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. — Which shoe have you ? I have my old velvet shoe. — Which stocking have you ? 1 have got your fine thread stocking. Obs. 8. Always translate I have or I have got, by : J'ai. I have not or I have not got, by : Je n'ai pas, 1 &c. Salutations journalieres. — To day. Aujourd'hui. 1 N. B. — The use of the word, got, is condemned by grammarians, but, as it is constantly introduced in common practice, it is perhaps expedient to 3* so FOURTH LESSON. FOURTH LESSON, 4th.— Quatrieme Legon, 4me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. This , that, (with a noun.) This , that book. Of the (before a consonant). Of the dog. Of the tailor. Of the baker. Of the neighbor. That or the one. The neighbor's, or that of the neigh- bor. The baker's, or that of the baker. The dog's, or that of the dog. Or. Have you my book or the neigh- bor's ? I have the neighbor's. Have you my bread or that of the baker ? I have yours. I have not the baker's. Mine or my own. Of mine or of my own. Yours or your own. Of yours or of your own. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Ce (before a consonant, § 34.) Ce livre. Du (genitif) avant une consonne. Du chien. Du tailleur. Du boulanger. Du voisin. Celui. (§ 35.) Celui du voisin. (French way to express the possessive case.) Celui du boulanger. Celui du chien. Ou. Avez-vous mon livre ou celui du voisin ? J'ai celui du voisin. Avez-vous mon pain ou celui du boulanger ? J'ai le votre. Je n'ai pas celui du boulanger. Le mien. Du mien. Le votre. Du votre. Obs. 9. Votre, your, has no circumflex accent. Le votre, yours, has one. Notre, our, has no accent. Le notre, ours, has one. Of ours or of our own. | Du notre. Fourth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quatrieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Have you that book ? No, Sir, I have it not. — Which book have you got? I have that of the neighbor. — Have you my bread or the baker's? I have not yours; I have the baker's. — Have you the neighbor's horse? No, Sir, I have it not. — Which horse have you got 1 I have that of the baker. — Have you the pretty gold string of my dog? I have it not. — Which string have you? I have my sil- insert it now and then. When entirely omitted, pupils, after learning a considerable time, are frequently at a loss how to translate : Have you got my hat ? thinking that they do not know the French of got ; while they would not hesitate to translate : Have you my hat ? &c. FOURTH LESSON. si ver string. — Have you my gold button or the tailor's ? I have not yours ; I have the tailor's. — Which coffee have you ? I have the neighbor's. — Are you sleepy ! I am not sleepy ; I am hungry. — Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty. — Which stocking have you? I have my own or mine. — Have you your thread stocking or mine ? I have not yours ; I have mine. — Which shoe have you ? I have the neighbor's wooden shoe. — What have you ? I have nothing. — Have you anything good ? I have nothing good. Have you any- thing bad ? I have not got anything bad. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am hungry. — Which exercise have you got ? I have the fourth. — Have you your neighbor's exercise ? No, Sir, I have got mine. — Have you our velvet ? I have it not. — Have you our coffee ? I have not ours ; I have the baker's. — Have you the neighbor's golden candlestick? No, Sir, I have got ours. — How do you do to-day? To-day ? Yes, to-day. Very well, thank you. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Are you warm ? I am warm. I am not warm. Are you cold ? I am not cold. Are you afraid ? I am afraid. I am not afraid. The, (before a vowel or h mute). (See Obs. 5, p. 28.) Man. Friend. The friend. The man. Of the, (before a vowel or h mute). Of the friend. That, or the one, of the friend. Of the man. That, or the one, of the man ; the man's. Of the gold or silver. The stick. The thimble. The coal. My brother. My brother's, or that of my brother. Your friend's, or that of your friend. Our gold thimble, or the silver one. The wooden one. The leather one. The leather. Of the leather. Vocabulairb. 2de Section, t Avez-vous chaud ? t J'ai chaud. t Je n'ai pas chaud. t Avez-vous froid ? t Je n'ai pas froid. t Avez-vous peur X t J'ai peur. t Je n'ai pas peur. L' , (avant une voyelle ou un h muet). (Voyez Obs. 5, p. 28.) Homme. Ami. L'ami. L'homme. De P , (avant une voyelle ou h muet), De l'ami. Celui de l'ami. De l'homme. Celui de l'homme. ' De Tor ou de F argent. Le baton. Le de. Le charbon. Mon frere. Celui de mon frere. Celui de votre ami. Notre de d'or, ou celui d' argent. Celui de bois. Celui de cuir. Le cuir. Du cuir. / 82 FIFTH LESSON. Fourth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Quatrieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Have you ray stick, or that of ray friend ? I have that of youi friend. — Have you your thimble, or the tailor's? I have mine or my own. — Have you my brother's coat or yours? I have your brother's. — Have you your dog or the man's? I have the man's. — Have you your friend's money ? I have it not. — Are you cold ? I am cold. — Are you afraid? I am not afraid. — Are you warm? I am not warm. — Have you my coat, or the tailor's? I have the tailor's. — Have you my gold candlestick, or that of the neighbor ? I have yours. — Have you your paper or mine? I have mine. — Have you your cheese or the baker's ? I have my own. — Which cloth have you ? I have that of the tailor. — Have you the old wood of my brother? I have not got it.— Which soap have you got? I have my brother's good soap. — Have you my wooden gun or that of my brother ? I have yours. — Have you your friend's shoe ? Yes, Sir, I have the velvet shoe of my friend. — What have you pretty? I have my friend's pretty dog. — Have you my handsome or my ugly stick? I have your ugly stick. — Have you the second exercise of your good friend ? No; I have the third. — Which soap have you? I have ours. — Have you your friend's bread ? No j I have ours. — Have you the man's? No ; I have it not. — Have you the silver button ? No • I have the golden one, or that of gold.— Have you the first or the second section to-day ? I have the second section. Pretty well, well enough. | Assez bien. Obs 10, Good day, good morning, good afternoon, good evening (and good night, before bed-time), are expressed in French by : bon jour or bon soir FIFTH LESSON, 5th.— Cinquieme Legon, 5me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. The merchant. Of the shoemaker. The boy. The merchant's boy. The pencil. The chocolate. The penknife. The boy's penknife. Have you the merchant's stick, or yours ? Neither. Nor. i have neither the merchant's stick nor mine. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Le marchand. Du cordonnier. Le gar§on. Le garcon du marchand Le crayon. Le chocolat. Le canif. Le canif du garson. Avez-vous le baton du marchand. ou le votre? Ne . . . ni. .... ni. Je n'ai ni le baton du marchand ni le mien. FIFTH LESSON. Have you the shoemaker's leather? ' Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty. Are you warm or cold ? I am neither warm nor cold. Have you the bread or the wine ? I have neither the wine nor the bread. I have neither my thread nor that of the tailor. I have neither yours nor mine. My boy's thimble, [the thimble of . . .] Your brother's penknife. That of mine. That of ours. Miss Rose's velvet. My baker's bread, or that of yours. Avez-vous le cuir du cordonnier ? t Avez-vous faim ou soif ? t Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. t Avez-vous chaud ou froid ? t Je n'ai ni chaud ni froid. Avez-vous le pain ou le vin ? Je n'ai ni le vin ni le pain. Je n'ai ni mon fil ni celui du tailleur. Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. Le de de mon garcon. Le canif de votre frere. Celui du mien. Celui du notre. Le velours de Mademoiselle Rose. Le pain de mon boulanger, ou celui du votre. Fifth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Cinquiemb Exercice. Ire Sec. How do you do to-day? Pretty well, thank you. — How are you this evening; Miss Charlotte? Very well, thank you. Good even- ing. Sir. — Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor thirsty. — Have you my shoe or the shoemaker's? I have neither yours nor the shoemaker's. — Have you your pencil or the boy's? I have neither mine nor the boy's. — Which pencil have you ? I have that of the merchant. — Have you my chocolate or the merchant's? I have neither yours nor the merchant's: I have my own. — Which penknife have you? I have my brother's penknife.— Have you Miss Rose's velvet? No ; Madam, I have it not. — Are you warm, or cold? T am neither warm nor cold; I am sleepy. — Are you afraid? I am not afraid. — What have you? I have Miss Charlotte's fine ribbon. — The velvet ribbon? No. the golden ribbon. — Have you anything. Sir? I have something. — What have you? I have something fine. — What have you fine? I have the shoemaker's fine dog. — Have you my gun or yours ? I have neither yours nor mine. — Which gun have you? I have my friend's. — Have you my velvet ribbon or my brother's? I have neither yours nor your brother's, but ours. — Which string have you? T have my neigh- bor's thread string. — Have you the book of the tailor or that of the boy ? I have neither the tailor's nor the boy's. This morning. This evening. Are you well, Miss Clara ? Not very well. Ce matin. Ce soir. tVousportez-vousbien, Mile. Clara f Pas tres-bien. 34 FIFTH LESSON. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulairb. 2de Section. i t QU' avez-vous ? > Je n'ai rien. t Avez-vous quelque chose ? Non, rien. What have you ? (ails you ?) What is the matter with you ? I have nothing ; or Nothing is the matter with me. Is anything the matter with you ? No. Nothing, or Not anything. Obs. 11. When the verb is understood, nothing, or not anything, is translated not by : ne . . . rien, but by : rien alone ; and no, nothing, by : non, rien. Avez-vous quelque chose de tres- joli? Non, rien. Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain, ou de vieux ? Non, rien. Le chale. Le parasol. Le parapluie. Le dictionnaire. Le coton. Le Fran$ais. Du Fran9ais. Le charpentier. Du charpentier. Le marteau. Le fer. Le clou. Le clou de fer. Have you anything very pretty ? No, nothing. Have you anything ugly, or old ? No, not anything. The shawl. The parasol. The umbrella The dictionary. The Frenchman. The carpenter. The hammer. The nail. The cotton. Of the Frenchman. Of the carpenter. The iron. The iron nail. The golden nail ; that of silver. Le clou d'or ; celui d'argent. Fifth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Cinquieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Are you well this morning'? Yes, Sir 7 pretty well, thank you. — How do you do, Miss Clara? Not very well, Madam. — Are you well, Mr. Robert? Yes, Sir, this evening I am very well.— Have you the fifth exercise 7 ? Yes. I have it. — Have you my dictionary or my book ? I have neither your dictionary nor your book. — Have you your parasol or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine ; I have Clara's. — Which shawl have you? I have the neighbor's. — Have you the iron or the silver nail? I have neither the iron nor the sil- ver nail; I have the gold one. — Have you my hammer or the car- penter's ? I have neither yours nor the carpenter's ; I have ours. — Which nail have you ? 1 have the iron nail. — Which hammer have you? I have the wooden hammer of the carpenter. — Have you anything very fine ? I have something very fine. — What have you? This fine shawl. — Have you the Frenchman's pretty umbrella? No, I have not the pretty one, I have the old one. — The old um- brella? Yes, the old one. — Have you the cotton, or the thread stock- ing ? I have neither the cotton nor the thread stocking. — Have you the book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant? 1 have nei- ther the Frenchman's nor the merchant's. — Which book have you? SIXTH LESSON. 35 I have ours. — What is the matter with you ? Nothing. — Is anything the matter with you, Mr. Robert? No, Miss, nothing. — Are you afraid? No, I am not afraid. Nothing ails me. — Have you the cot- ton, the cloth, or the shawl ? I have neither the cotton, nor the cloth, nor the shawl. — What have you ? I have Webster's Dictionary. J'en suis bien aise. Et vous, Monsieur, comment vou» portez-vous ? I am glad to hear it. I am glad of it. A nd you, Sir, how are you ? SIXTH LESSON, 6th.— Sixieme Le$en, 6me. Vocabulary. The beef, or ox. Of the captain. Of the cook. 1st Section. The biscuit. The mutton. The knife. Have I ? Have I it ? You have. You have got it. You have not. You have not got it. You have nothing, (not got anything). Am I afraid ? You are afraid. Am I ashamed 1 You are not ashamed. Are you ashamed ? I am ashamed. Have I anything ugly ? You have not got anything ugly. What have I got ? What is the matter with me ? (ails me The fine one. The ugly one. Which, meaning which one ? Obs 12. Which is translated by : quel, with a noun, — by : lequel, with- out the noun. ,} Vocabulaibe. Ire Section. Le bceuf. Le biscuit. Du capitaine. Le mouton. Du cuisinier. Le couteau. Ai-je ? L' ai-je ? Vous avez. Vous Vavez. Vous 7i avez pas. Vous ne Vavez pas. Vous n'avez rien, t Ai-je peur ? t Vous avez peur. t Ai-je honte ? t Vous n'avez pas honte. t Avez- vous honte ? t J'ai honte. Ai-je quelque chose de vilain f Vous n'avez rien de vilain. Qu' ai-je? Le beau. Le vilain. Lequel ? Which parasol ? Which one ? Am I afraid or ashamed ? You are neither afraid nor ashamed. You are neither hungry nor thirsty. Quel parasol ? Lequel ? t Ai-je peur ou honte ? t Vous n'avez ni peur ni honte. t Vous n'avez ni faim ni so if. Sixth Exebcise. 1st Sec. — Sixieme Exebcice. Ire Sec. Good evening, Miss; are you well? Very well, thank you. — I am glad to hear it. And you, Mr. Louis, how do you do ? Not very well, to-day. — Are you well, this evening, Madam 1 Pretty well, thank you. — I am glad of it. I have neither the baker's dog / 36 SIXTH LESSON. nor that of my friend. — Are you ashamed? I am not ashamed. — Are you afraid or ashamed? I am neither afraid nor ashamed. — Have you my knife ? Which one ? The fine one. — Have you my beef or the cook's? I have neither yours nor the cook's. — Which (lequel) have you? I have that of the captain. — Have I your bis- cuit? You have it not. — Am I hungry or thirsty ? You are neither hungry nor thirsty. — Am I warm or cold? You are neither warm nor cold. — Am I afraid? You are not afraid. You are neither afraid nor ashamed. — Have I anything good? You have nothing good. — What have I? — You have nothing. — Which pencil have I? You have that of the Frenchman. — Have I your thimble or that of the tailor? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. — Which one have I? You have your friend's. — Which umbrella have I? You have mine. — Have I the baker's good bread? You have it not. — Which dictionary have I? You have your own. — Have you my iron gun? I have it not. — Have I it ? You have it. — Have I your mutton or the cook's ? You have neither mine nor the cook's. — Have I your knife? You have it not. — Have you it? I have it. — Which biscuit have I ? You have that of the captain. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Am I hungry ? You are hungry. You are not hungry. Am I wrong ? You are wrong. You are not wrong. Am I right ? You are not right. You are right. The butter. The grocer. Our grocer. The grocer's butter or that of the cook. Have I the bv.y's penknife ? You have it not, (not got it.) Have I Miss Clara's ? You have neither Miss Clara's nor the boy's. Which one have I ? You have the grocer's. Have I the cook's butter ? You have it not. You have nothing. Have I anything bad or old ? You have neither anything bad nor old. (nothing.; Vocabulaire. 2de Section. t Ai-je faim ? t Vous avez faim.. 1 Vous n'avez pas faim. t Ai-je tort ? t Vous avez tort. t Vous n'avez pas tort. t Ai-je raison ? t Vous n'avez pas raison. t Vous avez raison. Le beurre. L' epicier. Notre epicier. Le beurre de 1' epicier ou celui du cuisinier. Ai-je le canif du garcon ? Vous ne l'avez pas. Ai-je celui de Mile. Clara ? Vous n'avez ni celui de Mile. Clara, ni celui du garcon. Lequel ai-je ? Vous avez celui de l'epicier. Ai-je le beurre du cuisinier ? Vous ne l'avez pas. Vous n'avezrien. Ai-je quelque chose de mauvais ou de veux ? Vous n'avez rien de mauvais ni de vieux. SEVENTH LESSON. 37 06s. 13. You have neither anything had nor old, being a negative sen- tence, must not be translated by : Vous n'avez pas quelque chose de mauvais ni de vieux ; but by : Vous 7iavez rien de mauvais ni de vieux. Have you anything ugly or old ? I have neither anything ugly, nor old, nor pretty. Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain ou de vieux ? Je n'ai rien de vilain, ni de vieux, ni de joli. Sixth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Sixieme Exebcice. 2de Sec Have you the fifth vocabulary to-day ? No, Miss, I ha re the exer- cise. — Which one : the fifth or sixth? I have the fifth to-day. — Sir, have T the sixth vocabulary- this evening'? No. Miss, you have it not. — Which one have I? You have the fifth vocabulary, second section. — Which cloth have 1 ? You have the merchant's. — Have you my coffee or that of my boy ? I have that of your good boy. — Have you your shawl or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine. — What have you? I have my brother's good candlestick. — Am I right? You are right. — Am I wrong? You are not wrong. — Am 1 right or wrong? You are neither right nor wrong; you are afraid. You are not sleepy. You are neither warm nor cold. — Have I the good coffee or the good sugar? You have neither the good coffee nor the good sugar. — Have 1 anything good or bad ? You have neither any- thing good nor bad. — What have I? You have nothing. — What have I pretty ? You have my friend's pretty dog. — Which buttei have I ? You have that of your cook. — Have I your parasol or the merchant's? You have neither mine nor the merchant's. — -Which chocolate have you ? I have that of the Frenchman. — Which shoe have you ? I have the shoemaker's leather shoe. — Which one have I ? You have that of the old baker. — Which one have you? I have that of my old neighbor. — What is the matter with you ? I am afraid. — Have I anything? You have nothing. You are well, I hope ? I am well, perfectly well. I at* no very well. Vous vous portez bien, j'espere ? Je me porte bien, parfaitement bien* Je ne me porte pas tres-bien. SEVENTH LESSON, 7th.— Septieme Legon, 7me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Who ? Has. Who has ? Who has the pencil-case ? The man has the pencil-case. The man has not this pencil-case. 4 Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Qui ? a. Qui a ? Qui a le porte-crayon ? L'homme a le porte-crayon. L'homme n'a pas ce porte-crayon. 8EVENTH LESSON Who has it ? The farmer has it. The farmer has not got it. His or her, (always with a noun,) its. The chicken. His chicken. The chest, trunk, coffer. Her chest. The waistcoat, the vest. His vest. The ship, vessel. The young man. Young. The youth. His rice. He, (or it, nominative case.) He has, it has. He has not. He has got his chest. He has not his waistcoat. He has it. He has it not. Has he or has it ? Has he it ? Has he his old knife ? Has the farmer ? Qui Va ? Le fermier Fa. Le fermier ne Va pas. Son, (to uj ours avec un nom.) Le poulet. Son poulet. Le coffre. Son coffre. Le gilet. Son gilet. Le batiment, le vaisseau. Le jeune homme. Jeune. L' adolescent. Son riz. If. II a. II n'a pas. II a son coffre. II n'a pas son gilet. II F a. line Fa pas. A-t-il? L'a-t-ii? A-t-il son vieux couteau ? Le fermier a-t-il ? Obs. 14. In French, when in the third person, a noun is the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence, begin the question with the noun r and place the pronoun, il, after the verb, as shown above. Notre ami a-t-il ? Ce jeune homme a-t-il ? Le chien a-t-il le mouton ? Has our friend got ? Has this young man ? Has the dog got the mutton ? 06s. 15. The letter (-£-) between a and il, is inserted for the sake of euphony, and must be used whenever the verb ends with a vowel. He has neither . . . nor ... I II n'a ni . . . ni . . . He has neither mine nor yours. | II n'a ni le mien ni le votre. Seventh Exercise. 1st Sec. — Septieme Exercice, Ire Sec. You are well, I hope, Miss? Yes, Sir, I am perfectly well. — And you. Sir, how are you ? Pretty well, to-day, thank you. — I hope you are well, Madam? Yes, Miss, I am very well this morning. I am very glad to hear it. — Are you cold this morning? No, Sir, I am not cold. — Has the youth his chicken ? He has got it. — Who has my waistcoat ? The young man has it. — Has the young man his pretty ship? The young man has it not. — Who has it? The cap- tain has got it. — Has the grocer my knife or yours ? He has neither yours nor mine. — Which knife has he ? Which knife or penknife ? Which penknife ? He has ours. — Has he it? Yes, he has got it. — Has his brother got my gold ? He has not got it. — Have you it ? No, I have it not. — Who has got it? You have it. — Has the youth your waistcoat or mine? He has neither yours nor mine. — Which one has he ? He has the tailor's. — Have you his hammer or his nail ? SEVENTH LESSON. I have neither his hammer nor his nail. The carpenter has the hammer, his boy has the nail. — Have you his umbrella or his stick? I have neither his umbrella nor his stick. — What have you? Not anything. — Has this farmer his horse or his dog ? He has neither this nor that. — Have I the merchant's rice? Which merchant? The old one or the young one ? The young one. — You have it not; the old grocer has it. — Has he his coffee or my sugar? He has neither his coffee nor your sugar. — Has the boy his dictionary, my brother's, or that of the Frenchman ? He has not his dictionary nor your brother's ; he has the Frenchman's. — Who has my pencil-case ? Which pencil-case ? The gold pencil-case or the silver one ? The gold one. I have it. — Has the young captain the old ship of Mr. Henri (Henry) ? He has not Mr. Henry's old ship : he has Mr. Robert's good ship, the Helvetius. How is your friend ? He is not very well. He is better. Vocabulary. 2d Section. What has he ? What has he got ? What ails him, or is the matter with him? What has the farmer ? (ails him ?) He has something. The bird. He has nothing. His bird. His or hers (without the noun.) its. My money or his or hers. My bag or his. (hers.) His bag of rice — of money. This servant. Has his servant your trunk or mine ? He has his own, (no noun being used.) He has neither ours nor jours, he has his own. (its own.) Somebody, anybody. Some one, any one. Has anybody my book ? Somebody (some one), has it. Has any one got it ? No one, nobody, not anybody. Nobody has your stick. No one has it. Is any one hungry, sleepy, or thirsty ? Comment se porte votre ami ? II ne se porte pas tres-bien. II se porte mieux. Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. > Qu'a-t-il? (06s. 4, p. 28.) Qu' a le fermier ? Le fermier qu'a-t-il ? II a quelque chose. II n'a rien. L'oiseau. Son oiseau. Le sien, (sans nom.) Mon argent ou le sien. Mon sac ou le sien. Son sac de riz — d' argent. Ce domestique. Son domestique a-t-il son coffre on le mien ? II a le sien. II n'a ni le notre ni le votre, il a le sien. Quelqu'un, (not used with a nega- tive.) Quelqu'un a-t-il mon livre ? Quelqu'un l'a. Quelqu'un 1' a-t-il ? Personne ne. (Nominatif.) Personne n'a votre baton. Personne ne l'a. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim, sommeil, ou soif? 40 SEVENTH LESSON. Some one is warm, cold, or afraid. I Quelqu'un a chaud, froid, ou peur. No one is ashamed, wrong, nor right. | Personne n'a honte, tort, ni raison. Obs. 16. Never translate : No one, not any one, nobody, not anybody has, by : Quelqu'un n 1 a pas ; but by : personne n'a. Seventh Exercise. 2d Sec. — Septieme Exercice. 2de Sec. You are well, I hope, this evening ? I am not very well, thank you. — And you, Sir, how are you ? I am better, thank you. — How is your brother ? He is perfectly well to-day. — How is Mr. Robert ? He is better. — Who has my trunk? The boy has it. — Is anyone thirsty ? This old servant is thirsty. — Is he hungry ? No, he is not hungry; he has his bread. — Has he the butter ? He has not got it. — What has he \ He has his cheese.— What has the youth ? He has the farmer's fine chicken. — Has he + he knife } No, he has it not; he has the pencil-case. — Is he afraid? He is not afraid. — Is he afraid or ashamed ? He is neither afraid nor ashamed. — Is the grocer right or wrong ? He is neither right nor wrong. — Have I the bag of rice % Yes, Sir, you have it. — Who has the farmer's rice ? My servant has it. — Has your servant my umbrella ? No, he has it not. — Has he yours? No, he has it not. — Which one has he got? He has neither yours nor mine. — Has he his own ? He has it. — What has your friend's boy ? He has my old penknife. — Has your baker my bird or his? He has his. — Who has mine ? The carpen- ter has it. — Is he warm or cold ? He is neither warm nor cold. — Is any one cold ? Nobody is cold. — Is anybody warm ? Nobody is warm. — Has anybody my chicken ? Nobody has it. — Has that servant your vest or mine ? He has neither mine nor yours. — Which one has he got ? He has his own. — Has any one my gun ? Which gun ? The old one, No one has it. — What has the youth ? He has nothing. — Have I your bag or that of your good friend ? No, you have the larmer's bag. — Who has Miss Clara's ? Nobody has it. — Who has her shawl? Which shawl? The cotton or velvet one ? The velvet one. I have it. — Who is afraid ? The tailor's boy is (afraid). — What is the matter with him ? He is afraid of your bad dog. — Has the farmer my money ? He has it not. — Has the captain got it ? He has it not. — Has he anything good ? He has nothing good. — What has he ugly ? He has nothing ugly. — Has your cook his mutton ? He has it. — Have I your bread or your sheese ? You have neither my bread nor my cheese. — Has any one my gold button? No one has it. Is your friend better, this morning ? Votre ami se porte-t-il mieux, ce matin ? Mr. Robert is better. Monsieur Robert se porte mieux. EIGHTH LESSON. 41 EIGHTH LESSON, Sih.—Huitiime Legon, 8me. Ire Section. Vocabulary. 1st Section. This, that handkerchief. This, that ox. This, that hay. This, that friend. Obs. 17. Cet, (before a vowel or h mute.) This, that man. This, that inkstand. My inkstand. Obs. 18. Ce, meaning: this or that : Ce livre, does not offer the nice distinction found in English, between : this book and that book. To obtain the same degree of precision, the French say as follows : VOCABULAIRE. Ce mouchoir. Ce bceuf. Cefoin. Cet ami. (Cet, always before a vowel) Cet, (avant une voyelle ou un h muet). Cet homme. Cet encrier. Mon encrier. Ce livre-ld. Cet encrier -la. This book. That book. I Ce livre-ci. This inkstand. That inkstand. I Cet encrier-ci. Obs. 19. Mind the hyphen (-) before ci and Id. The sailor. This sailor. That tree. The tree. His looking-glass, (or her.) This . . . His (her) pocket-book or portfolio. The mattress. Which mattress ? This garden. That pistol. The stranger, the foreigner. Our. . . This or that glove. Have you this or that book ? I have this one, I have not that one. This one. That one. Obs. 20. Instead of: this or that book, the French say: This book or that, because, that, (a true pronoun in this case) must have an antecedent to agree with. {Mind the construction, and see § 35.) Le matelot. Ce matelot-ci. Cet arbre-la. L'arbre. Son miroir. Ce miroir-ci. Son porte-feuille. Le matelas. Quel matelas ? Cejardin-ci. Ce pistolet-la. L'etranger. Notre etranger. Ce gant. Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui-la ? J'ai celui-ci, je n'ai pas celui-la. Celui-ci. Celui-la. Have I this one or that one ? You have this one, you have not that one. Has the man this or that glove ? (Mind the French construction.) Ai-je celui-ci ou celui-la ? Vous avez celui-ci, vous n'avez pas celui-la. L' homme a-t-il ce gant-ci ou celui- la ? Eighth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Huitieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Good evening. Miss Clara, how do you do ? I am not very well, Sir, thank you. — And you, Sir, are you well? Pretty well, thank you. — I hope your brother is better. Yes, Sir, brother (mon f.) is better. — Which inkstand has the stranger? He has that of the sailor. — Has the sailor my looking-glass 1 He has it not : I have it. — Have you this pistol or that one ? I have this one. — Have you 4* 42 EIGHTH LESSON. the inkstand of my neighbor or that of yours ? I have neither that of your neighbor nor that of mine. — Which one have you ? I have the stranger's. — Which glove have you got ? Which one ? Yes, which one. I have the sailor's. — You have the sailor's glove ? Yes, I have it. — Have you his mattress ? I have it not.— Which pocket-book has the sailor ? He has his own. — Who has my good handkerchief? This stranger has it. — Has he got it? Yes, he has it. — What has he ? He has my pretty handkerchief. — Have I Miss Victoria's handkerchief or pencil-case ? You have neither this nor that. — What have I ? You have not anything. — Who has that pis- tol ? The stranger's friend has it. — What has your servant ? He has the farmer's old tree. — Has he that grocer's old handkerchief? He has not that of the grocer; he has the sailor's. — Has that ox the hay of this horse ? No, it has its own. — Which ox has the farmer? He has that of our neighbor. — Have I your inkstand or his ? You have neither mine nor his; you have your brother's. — Has the foreigner my bird or his own ? He has got that of the captain. — Have you this tree ? I have it not. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty • I am sleepy. — Has the old sailor this bird or that one ? He has not this; he has that. — Has our ser- vant this broom or that one ? He has the ugly one. — Has your cook this or that chicken ? He has neither this nor that ; he has his own. — Am I right or wrong? You are not wrong. — Who is right? No- body. — Have I this or that penknife ? No ; nobody has either this or that. Take a seat and sit down. I thank you. Vocabulary. 2d Section. The note, the billet, the ticket. The garret, the attic, the granary. His corn, his grain, its grain. This copybook. That copybook. Big, bulky, thick, coarse, large. That big tree. Your coarse cloth — thick paper. But. But not. He has not this one, but he has that. He has this one, but not that one. I have that one, but not this one. Have you this or that note ? (Mind the construction in French.) I have not this one, but that one. Prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. Je vous remercie. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Le billet. Le grenier. Son grain. Ce cahier-ci. Ce caAier-la. Gros. Ce gros arbre-la. Votre gros drap — gros papier. Mais. Mais non. Mais non pas. II n'a pas celui-ci, mais il a celui-la. II a celui-ci, mais non celui-la. J'ai celui-la, mais non pas celui-ci. Avez-vous ce billet-ci ou celui-la ? (mais j'ai celui- Je n'ai pas celui-ci, < la. ( mais celui-la. EIGHTH LESSON. 43 I have this one, but not that one. Has my friend my dog or his ? He has mine, but I have his. That or which, (relative pronoun.) Have I the copybook that you have ? (Have I the copybook you have ?) I have not the note which your bro- ther has. (the note your, &c.) That which, the one which. 1 I have not that which you have. I have not that which he has. Have I the glove which you have ? You have not that which I have. • 5 1 n-ci, < VI mais je n'ai pas celui- J'ai celui-ci, \ la. mais non celui-la. Mon ami a-t-il mon chien ou le sien ? II a le mien, mais j'ai le sien. Que, (never understood in French, as it is frequently in English.) Ai-je le cahier que vous avez ? Je n'ai pas le billet que votre frere a. Celui que. (§§ 35, 36.) Je n'ai pas celui que vous avez. Je n'ai pas celui qu'il a. Ai-je le gant que vous avez ? Vous n'avez pas celui que j'ai. Eighth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Huitieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Good evening, Madam, you are well, I hope ? Perfectly well, Sir, I thank you. — I am glad to hear it. And you, Sir, how do you do? Not very well* but take a seat and sit down. Thank you, I have a seat. — Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine ? I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine ; but I have that of our merchant. — Have you the grocer's? No, I have it not. Who has my glove ? That servant has it. — What has this servant ? He has the old farmer's big tree. — Has the farmer this or that ox (mind the French construction.) He has neither this nor that ; but he has the one which the boy has not. — Which boy? The big one or the good one? The big one. — Have you that young horse's corn? I have it not; our servant has it. — Has your brother my note or his? He has neither yours nor his own ; but he has that of the big sailor. — Have you the copybook ? Which copybook ? The big copybook. — The big copybook ? No, I have it not ; but Charles has it. — What have you got ? I have my copybook, yours, his, or hers, and the grocer's. — Have you the chest which I have ? I have not that which you have. — Which handkerchief have you? I have the one which your brother has not. — Which inkstand has our friend's bro- ther ? He has that which the farmer's boy has not. — What copy- book have you ? I have the big one which you have not. — What horse has the shoemaker ? He has that which our brother's farmer has not. — What has the grocer ? He has the bag of rice which I 1 Translate : the one, by celui, except when the one is in apposition to the other. (Less. 15.) 44 NINTH LESSON. have not. — Which waistcoat have you? I have that which my young friend has not got. — Are you cold or hungry ? I am neither cold nor hungry; but Jean (John) is afraid. — Is he afraid ? Yes, he is afraid of that big ox —Who is sleepy ? I am not sleepy, but I am thirsty. — Have you the iron or the wooden ship 1 I have neither this nor that \ but I have that which the big captain has not. T am very sorry to hear it, (or for it.) | J' en suis bien fache. NINTH LESSON, 9th.— Neuvieme Legon, 9me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL.— Formation du Pluriel. As the plural of nouns, in French, is shown by the preceding article or attending word, we will, in the first place, give the plural of those different expressions. Singular. Singulier. Plural for Pluriel pour Masculine. Masculin. both genders. les deux genres. The. Le. The. Les. Of the. • Du (for : de le.) Of the. Des (for : de les.) Obs. 21. Des, (contraction of: de les ; preposition and article plural,) is not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of: de, which, being a preposition, is invariable; but that of : du, (contraction of: de le, preposition and article singular.) My, of my. Mon, de mon. My, of my. Mes, de mes. Your, of your. Votre, de votre. Your, of your. Vos, de vos. His, her, of his. Son, de son. His, her, of her. Ses, de ses. Our, of our. Notre, de notre. Our, of our. Nos, de nos. Their, of their. Leur, de leur. Their, of their. Leurs, de leurs. Whi-.li ? Quel? Which ? Quels ? Whicn one ? Lequel ? Which ones ? Lesquels ? This , that. Ce, cet. These , those. Ces. General Rule for the formation of the Plural. The plural number, as in English, is formed by adding an s to the singu- lar. But, in French, this rule is not only applicable to nouns, but also to articles, adjectives, and pronouns. The books. Of the book. The sticks. Of the sticks. Les livres. Du livre. Les batons. Des batons. Of the copybooks. Des cahiers. The good books. Les bons livres. Of the books. Des livres. The good sticks. Les bons batons. The copybooks. Les cahiers. The pretty copy- Les jolis cahiers. books. NINTH LESSON. 45 The good friends. Les bons amis. Our pretty shawls. Nos jolis chales. My penknives. Mes canifs. Small. Petit. Petits. Which large fans have I ? You have my large fans. Who has the merchant's shawls? Nobody has his shawls, but some one has his pretty parasols and ribbons. Which ones ? The small ones. Have you my leather shoes ? I have not your leather shoes, but your cloth coats. Of the friends. Des amis. Of our shawls. De nos chales. Of his penknives. De ses canifs. Great, large. Grand. Grands. Quels grands eventails ai-je ? Vous avez mes grands eventails. Qui a les chales du marchand ? Personne n'a ses chales, mais quelqu'un a ses jolis parasols et ses rubans. Lesquels ? Les petits. Avez-vous mes souliers de cuir ? Je n'ai pas vos souliers de cuir, mais vos habits de drap. Ninth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Neuvieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. Good evening, Miss, I hope you are well ? Perfectly well, Sir, I thank you. I am glad to hear it. — How is your father 1 He is well, I hope. No, Sir, not very well. I am sorry to hear it. But take a seat and sit down. Thank you. — Have you my gloves'? Yes, Sir, I have your gloves. — Have you the stranger's gloves ? No, Sir, I have not his gloves. — Have I your looking-glasses? You have our looking-glasses. — What has the little sailor? He has the pretty parasols. — Has he my sticks or my guns? He has neither your sticks nor your guns. — Who has the tailor's good waistcoats ? Nobody has his vests ; but somebody has his silver buttons. — Has the Frenchman's boy our good umbrellas? He has not our good umbrellas, but our parasols. — Has the shoemaker the shoes of the strangers ? He has not their shoes. — Has he their bags ? Which bags ? Their leather bags. No, he has neither their shoes nor their leather bags ; but he has the velvet shoes of the merchants. — What has the captain? He has his good sailors. — Which brooms has our servant ? He has the brooms of our grocer. — Of the young or of the old grocer? Of the old one. — Has this man those large fans? He has not those large fans. — Has he your copybook or your friend's? He has neither mine nor my friend's; he has his own. Have you three of the exercises? Of which exercises? Of the exercises of V. Value. Yes, I have three of his exercises. Has your brother the wine which I have or that which you have? He has neither that which you have nor that which I have. — Which wine has he ? He has that of his grocer. — Have you the bag which my servant has? I have not the bag which your servant has. — Have you the chicken which nay cook has or that which the peasant has? I have neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant has.— Ts the peasant cold or warm? He is neither cold nor warm. 40 NINTH LESSON. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Exceptions to the General Rule to form the Plural. 1st Exception. — Nouns ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in the plural ; because those terminations are considered as plural ones. The stockings. The French. The Englishman. Our choice. The nose. Les bas. Les Francais. L' Anglais. Notre choix. Le nez. My mattresses. Mes matelas. Their woods, forests. Leurs bois. The English. Les Anglais. Our choices. Nos choix. The noses. Les nez. 2d Exception. — Nouns ending in au, eu, and some in ou, 1 take x instead of s. The hats. The place. This fire. That jewel. The cabbages. Les chapeaux. Le lieu. Ce feu-ci. Ce bijou- la. Les choux. The birds. The places. Those fires. These jewels. Your toys. Les oiseaux. Les lieux. Ces feux-la. Ces bijoux-ci. Vos joujoux. 1 3d Exception. — Nouns ending in al, 2 or ail, 3 change those terminations into aux. As : The horses. Les chevaux. I General, generals. General, generaux. The work, labor. Le travail. I The works, labors. Les travaux. Obs. 22. There are a few more exceptions in the formation of the plural of nouns and adjectives, which will be separately noted as they occur. The ships. | Les batiments or batimens. Obs. 23. According to some grammarians, nouns of more than one sylla- ble, (polysyllables,) ending in the singular in nt, drop t in the plural, but nouns of one syllable (monosyllables) having this ending, never do. The gloves. | Les gants. 1 The other nouns ending in ou, that take x in the plural, are : le caillou, the pebble ; le genou, the knee; le hibou, the owl. All others that have this termination now follow the general rule, taking s in the plural ; as, le clou, the nail, plut les clous, the nails ; leverrou, the bolt, plur. les verrous, the bolts, &c. 2 Of the nouns ending in al, several follow the general rule, simply taking s in the plural, particularly the following : le bal, the ball ; le cal, the callo- sity ; le pal, the pale ; le regal, the treat ; le carnaval, the carnival, &c. 3 The nouns ending in ail, which make their plural in aux, are particularly the following : le bail, the lease ; le sous-bail, the under-lease ; le corail, the coral; I 'email, the enamel; le soupirail, the air-hole; le travail, the work ; le vantail, the leaf of a folding-door ; le ventail, the ventail. All others having this termination follow the general rule, t. e. take s in the plural; as, Vattirail, the train; le detail, particulars; Veventail, the fan; le gouvernail, the rudder : leportail, the portal ; le serail, the seraglio ; &c. NINTH LESSON. 47 The eye. The scissors. I/ceil. Les ciseaux. Which horses have you ? . I have the fine horses of your good neighbors. Have I his small gloves ? You have not his small gloves, but you have his large hats. Which gloves have I ? You have the pretty glomes of your brothers. Have you the large hammers of the carpenters ? I have not their large hammers, but their large nails. Has your brother my wooden guns ? He has not your wooden guns. Which ones has he ? Have you the Frenchmen's fine um- brellas ? I have not their fine umbrellas, but I have their fine sticks. The oxen. Of my gardens. Of your woods or forests. Have you the trees of my gardens ? I have not the trees of your gardens. Of my pretty gardens. Of my fine horses. Les yeux. Les porte-feuilles. 1 The eyes. The pocket- books. Quels chevaux avez-vous ? J'ai les beaux chevaux de vos bona voisins. Ai-je ses petits gants? Vous n' avez pas ses petits gants, mais vous avez ses grands chapeaux. Quels gants ai-je ? Vous avez les jolis gants de vos freres. Avez-vous les grands marteaux des charpentiers ? Je n'ai pas leurs grands marteaux, mais j'ai leurs grands clous. Votre frere a-t-il mes fusils de bois ? II n'a pas vos fusils de bois. Lesquels a-t-il ? Avez-vous les beaux parapluies des Frangais ? Je n'ai rias leurs beaux parapluies, mais j'ai leurs beaux batons. Les bceufs. (in the plural, f silent.) De mes jardins. De vos bois. Avez-vous les arbres de mes jardins t Je n'ai pas les arbres de vos jardins. De mes jolis jardins. De mes beaux chevaux. Ninth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Neuvieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Are you well. Miss Gertrude ? Yes, Sir ; I am very well, thank you. — And you, Sir, how do you do? Not very well, thank you, Miss. — Indeed! I am sorry to hear it. Take off your shawl and hat, and sit down. — Thank you, thank you. With pleasure, I will. — Have I your pretty pocket-books? You have not my pretty pocket-books. — Which pocket-books have I ? You have the small pocket-books of your friends. — Has the foreigner our good pistols'? He has not our good pistols, but our old sticks. — Who has our ships ? The fo- reigner has our ships. — Who has our fine horses? Nobody has our fine horses; but somebody has our fine oxen. — Has your neighbor the choice of those trees ? Our neighbor has not the choice of those trees; but the great general has it. — Who has the old jewels of Mrs. 1 (§ 140.) For the formation of the plural of compound words. 48 TENTH LESSON. Le Noir ? Her brother has her jewels. — Has the little boy his toys or his birds'? He has his birds, but little John (le petit) has his play- things. — Has the farmer got the horses' hay^? He has not their hay, but their corn. — Has that tailor my fine gold buttons ? He has not your fine gold buttons; but our old silver strings. — Has our friend our big pencils ? He has not our big pencils, but he has the ugly dogs of the generals. — Has little John the choice of those toys'? No, he has not the choice of those toys ; but little Robert has it. — Who has the merchant's fine inkstands'? Nobody has his fine inkstands* but I have his large copybooks. — Who has their coarse handkerchiefs ? The captain's sailor has their coarse handkerchiefs. — Have you the grocer's coal ? No, I have it not. — Have I got it ? You have it not. — Who has his coal? The servants of the generals. — W T hat have you? I have something bad. — What have you bad? I have the bad chocolate. — The grocer's bad chocolate? No, the old sailor's. — Has your friend the small knives of our merchants? He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks. — Have you the big cabbages or the little ones? I have neither the big cabbages nor the little ones. — Which have you ? I have the farm- er's good cabbages. — Have you the choice of the cabbages ? No, I have it not; but my brother has it. — Which choice has he ? He has the first. — Who has the second choice ? I have it not. — What fan have you ? What fan have I ? Yes, what fan have you ? I have not yours, but mine. A sore throat. Mai de gorge. A cold. A bad cold. Un rhume. A headache. Mai de tete. Un mauvais rhume. TENTH LESSON, 10th, Vocabulary. 1st Section. Those. Those of the generals. Have you my dictionaries or those of the general ? I have not yours, I have those of the general. Those which. Have you the handkerchiefs which I have ? I have not those (which) you have. The cloak. Our cloaks. This seat. These seats. Has the tailor this gentleman 1 s cloak ? —Dixieme Legon, lOme. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Ceux. Ceux des generaux. Avez-vous mes dictionnaires ou ceux du general ? Je n'ai pas les votres, j'ai ceux du general. Ceux que. (§ 36.) Avez-vous les mouchoirs que j'ai ? Je n'ai pas ceux que vous avez. Le manteau. Nos manteaux. Ce siege. Ces sieges. Le tailleur a-t-il le manteau de ce Monsieur ? TENTH LESSON. 49 The gentlemen. Ladies. Young ladies. (Used when speaking to them.) Have you my silver knives ? No, I have mine. Les Messieurs. Mesdames. Mesdemoiselles. Avez-vous mes couteaux d'argent? Non. j'ai les miens. Obs. 24. As mine refers to a plural noun, it must be translated by a plural pronoun. Then use : les miens, which is plural, and not the singular: le mien. Mine, my own. Of mine. Yours, * your own. Of yours. His or hers (his or her own.) Of his. Ours, our own. Of our own. Theirs, their own. Of theirs. These substantives. Those nouns. The article. The articles. Which adjective ? Which adjectives ? This verb. Those verbs. The pronoun, — pronouns personal, namely, or viz : I, you, he, it, &c. Also. The catalogue. Singulier. Le mien. Le votre. Le sien. Le notre. Le leur. Pluriel. Les miens, des miens. Les votres. Les siens. Les notres. Les leurs. des votres. des siens. des notres. des leurs. Ces substantifs-ci.^Ces noms-la. L' article. Les articles. Quel adjectif? Quels adjectifs? Ce verbe-ci. Ces verbes-la. Lepronom. Les pronoms personnels, savoir : Je, vous, il, le, et cetera. Aussi. Le catalogue. Tenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dixieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. Good day. Miss, you are well. I hope ? Very well. Sir, I thank you. — And you, how do you do? Not very well, this morning. — Indeed! I am very sorry for it. — What is the matter with yon? I have a bad cold and a sore throat. How is the general? (M. le general?) He is pretty well. — And his brother? He is pretty well also. — Take a seat and sit down. — Have you these or those nouns? I have neither these nor those nouns. — Which ones have you? I have those which little Robert has — namely, (savoir:) handker- chief, inkstand, cloak, dictionary, fan, penknife, &c. — Have you: the eye J Yes, I have : Vail. — Have you the plural of ceil? I have it, and he has got it, also. — Has Charles the catalogue of the verbs which you have ? He has the catalogue of those which I have and that of yours, also. Have you the French of : to give? I have it not: but I have that of, He is better, and that of the places. Have you the horses of the French or those of the English? I have those of the English, but not those of the French. — Which oxen have you ? I have those of the foreigners. — Have )OU the fans which I have? I have not those which you have, but those which your brother has. — Has your brother his biscuits or mine? He has his own and mine also. — Has he got yours or those of the young general? He has neither ours nor those of the young general. — Which horses has 50 TENTH LESSON. your friend's grocer ? He has those which the stranger has not.— Has your farmer my copybooks or theirs? He has neither ours nor theirs, but he has those of the captain. — Have I your vests or those of the tailors'? You have not theirs, you have mine. — Have 1 the large cloaks? No, you have not got the large cloaks. — Which ink- stands have I ? You have not ours, but those of our neighbors. — Have you the birds of the sailors ? I have not their birds, but their fine sticks. — Which jewels has this ugly boy % He has mine. — Have I my shoes or those of the shoemakers ? You have not yours, but theirs. — Which paper has the man ? He has ours. — Has he our coffee ? He has it not. — Have you our big coats, or those of the strangers? I have not anything. — Has your brother this or that lawyer? He has that one. — Have I these or those books? — You have not anything. I hope you are better ? Much better, at your service. The toothache. Vocabulary. 2d Section. This word. Those words. Have you these words or those ? Have you these or those words ? These (plural of : this one.) Those (plural of : that one.) I have neither these nor those. Has he these or those ? He has these ; he has not those. You have neither these nor those. You have neither the one nor the other. You have neither the former nor the latter. Obs. 25. The English phrases : the former or the latter ; the one and the other, are generally expressed by : celui-ci, ceux-ci ; celui-la, ceux-lti ; but in an inverted order : celui-ci, referring to the latter or nearest object ; and celui-la, to the former or more distant one. J'espere que vous vous portezmieux* Beaucoup mieux, a votre service. Mai aux dents. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Ce mot-ci. Ces mots-la. £ Avez-vous ces mots-ci ou ceux-la? Ceux-ci. (pluriel de : celui-ci.) Ceux-ld. (pluriel de : celui-la.) Je n'ai ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. A-t-il ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? II a ceux-ci ; il n'a pas ceux-la. Vous n'avez ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. Have you my guns or yours ? I have neither yours nor mine. I have neither the former nor the latter. Have you not ? Have you nothing ? (not anything.) Nobody, (no one, not any one; (ob- jective.) You have nobody. What have you not ? (or not gof ?) Avez-vous mes fusils ou les votres ? les votres ni les miens. ) Je n'ai ni ( Je n'ai ni i ceux-la, ni ceux-ci. IV' avez-vous pas ? IV' avez-vous ricn ? Ne .... personne. (Regime.) Vous n' avez personne. Que 71 avez-vous pas t TENTH LESSON. 51 Has he ? Has he not ? Has he anything ? Has he nothing ? Has he any one ? Has he nobody ? What has he not ? Has not the man got ? Has not the dog got anything ? Have you my penknife ? Yes, Sir, I have got it. Have you not (got) my penknife ? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you not got it, Miss ? Yes, I have it. A-t-il? N'a-t-il pas ? A-t-il quelque chose ? N'a-t-il rien? A-t-il quelqu'un ? N' a-t-il personnel Que 7t' a-t-il pas ? L'homme n'a-t-il pas ? Le chien n'a-t-il rien ? Avez-vous mon canif? Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. N'avez-vous pas mon canif? Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. Ne P avez-vous pas, Mademoiselle ? Si fait, je l'ai. Obs. 26. When the question is asked negatively, the French answer affirmatively by : Si fait, instead of : Oui. The negative answer remains as usual. Has he nothing ? No, nothing. Yes, he has something. Have you not your money ? Yes, I have it. No, I have it not. Has not the scholar his book ? Yes, he has it. The scholar, pupil, student. N'a-t-il rien ? Non, rien. Si fait, il a quelque chose. N'avez-vous pas votre argent ? Si fait, je l'ai. Non, je ne l'ai pas. Uecolier n'a-t-il pas son livre ? Si fait, il l'a. L'ecolier. Tenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dixieme Exercice. 2de Sec. I hope you are better this evening, Miss. — I thank you. I am much better ) but my young brother has the toothache. — I am very sorry for it. — How is Mr. Charles ? He is not well • he has a bad cold. — Has he a sore throat? No, he has not a sore throat ; but he has a headache. And you, Sir, are you well? I am perfectly well, thank you. — I am glad of it. — Has your carpenter our hammers or those of the scholars, our friends'? He has neither ours nor those of the scholars. — Which nails has he ? He has his good iron nails. — Has any one the fans or shawls of the English? No one has those of the English, but some one has those of the French. — Have you not my cloak? Yes (si fait), I have it. — Have you not the hats of the generals ? Yes, I have the generals 7 hats. — Has not the dog the cook's chickens? Yes, it has his chickens. — Has he not his large knives ? Yes, he has his large knives. — Who has his cheese ? His cheese? He has it. Has he got it? — Who has my old gun? The sailor has it. — Has not the shoemaker the student's old shoe? Yes, he has it. — Has not our cook the stranger's money? No, he has not. — Have you not got that money ? Yes, I have. (1st Direction) — Have I anything? Yes, you have something. — What have I? You have your friend's leather gloves.-— Has not big John something good ? Yes, he has something good. — And little Charles, what has 52 TENTH LESSON. ~N he ? NothiDg. — What have you small ? I have Lamartine's pretty little bird (joli petit.) — Who has our copybooks and his? I have neither these nor those. — Has the generaPs boy nothing? Yes, he has his dictionary of French, his inkstand, his pencil, his copybooks, and his little brother's toys. — Have I that farmer's bags? You have not his bags, but his corn. — Has he your books or her shawls? He has neither these nor those ; but he has the old handkerchiefs. — Is the stranger's brother hungry ? He is not hungry, but thirsty. — Is your friend cold or sleepy? He is neither cold nor sleepy; but he is afraid. — Is he afraid of your dog ? He is not afraid. — Has not the young man the brooms of our servants? He has not their brooms, ^ but their soap. — Which pencils has he not? He has not mine. — Has he not large eyes? Yes, he has large eyes. — What eyes has the bird ? It has small eyes. > t Quel temps fait-il ? t Fait-il chaud ? II fait chaud. II ne fait pas chaud. t II fait beau (mauvais) temps. t II fait froid. Fait-il froid ? Ne fait-il pas froid ? Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Vocabulaire. 3me Section. How is the weather ? What kind of weather is it ? Is it warm ? It is warm. It is not warm. It is fine (bad) weather. It is cold. Is it cold ? Is it not cold ? I wish (or bid) you a good morning. Vocabulary. 3d Section. Who has ? Who has not ? Who has something ? Who has nothing ? Who has some one ? Who has nobody? Who has not got the young bird ? Has he neither this nor that ? Has he neither these nor those ? The comb. These large combs. My glass. Their little glasses. Have you the glasses ? I have them. Them, (objective, § 43.) Has he my fine glasses ? He has them. [He them has.] He has them not. Have I got them ? (Them have I ?) You have thc:m. You have them noi. Have you them not ? (not got them 1) Yes, I have them. Has he not got it ? Yes, he has it. Has not the sailor got my old pistols ? Qui a? Qui n'a pas ? Qui a quelque chose ? Qui n'a rien ? Qui a quelqu'un ? Qui n'a personne ? Qui n'a pas le jeune oiseau ? N'a-t-il ni celui-ci ni celui-la ? N'a-t-il ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la ? Le peigne. Ces grands peignea. Mon verve. Leurs petits verres. Avez-vous les verres ? Je les ai. Les, (regime direct : avant le verbe.) A-t-il mes beaux verres ? II les a. ($ 51, &c.) II ne les a pas. Les ai-je ? Vous les avez. Vous ne les avez pas, Ne les avez-vous pas ? Si fait, je les ai. Ne l'a-t-il pas? Si fait, il l'a. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes vieux pistolets ? TENTH LESSON. 53 He has them not. Yes, he has them. Has he not got them ? Have I it not ? Have I them not ? Yes, you have it. You have them. Have I nobody ? Yes, you have somebody. Have I nothing ugly ? Yes, you have something ugly. Have I neither your gold nor your silver thimble ? Yes, you have them. What have I not? You have not the scissors of silver. Am I neither hungry nor thirsty ? This lawyer. The minister. Has not this lawyer got ? Has our cook got nothing ? Has their neighbor nobody ? What has not the doctor got ? Is not the dog hungry or thirsty ? Is Carnot neither sleepy nor afraid ? Is he not right ? Yes, he is. Is not that minister wrong ? No ; that minister is right. Which lawyer has the stranger ? He has the minister's brother. II ne les a pas. Si fait, il les a. Ne les a-t-il pas ? Ne l'ai-je pas ? Ne les ai-je pas ? Si fait, vous l'avez — vous les avez. N' ai-je personne ? Si fait, vous avez quelqu'un. N' ai-je rien de viiain? Si fait, vous avez quelque chose de viiain. N' ai-je ni votre de d'or ni celui d' argent * Si fait, vous ies avez. Que n' ai-je pas ? Vous n' avez pas les ciseauxd' argent. N'ai-je ni faim ni soif ? Cet avocat. Le ministre. Cet avocat n' a-t-il pas ? Notre cuisinier n' a-t-il rien ? Leur voisin n' a-t-il personne ? Le medecin que n'a-t-il pas ? Le chien n'a-t-il pas faim ou soif? Carnot n'a-t-il ni sommeil ni peur ? N'a-t-il pas raison ? Si fait. Ce ministre-la n'a-t-il pas tort ? Non ; ce ministre-la a raison. Quel avocat l'etranger a-t-il ? II a le frere du ministre. Tenth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Dixieme Exercice. 3me Sec. Mile. Charlotte, I wish you a good morning. — How do you do? Thank you. Sir. I am very well, but very cold. — Is it cold? Yes. it is very cold. — I am sorry for it. How is your young friend? I hope he is better this morning. — Yes, Sir, he is better. — And how is Ma- dame ? Madame is perfectly well. — Mile. Anne is well, I hope? No, not very well. And her brother has a bad cold. — Take a seat and sit down. Thank you. — Is it warm to-day? No, it is not warm. — Have you my fine glasses? I have them. — Have you not the fine horses of the English? I have them not. — Who has them? The old minister has. (Dir. 1st.) — Which sticks have you? I have those of the foreigners. — Who has our small combs? My boys have them. — Which knives has the lawyer's servant? He has those of your friends. — Which (ones) has he not? He has not ours. — Have J not your good guns? No, you have not got them : but the old general has them. — What has the farmer got? He has the grocer's bag of rice. — Has not the pretty young man Miss Claras beautiful 5* 54 ELEVENTH LESSON. handkerchiefs'? He has them not. I have them. — Have you them? Yes, I have them. I have also her velvet shawl, her gold pencil- case, her silver inkstand, her small copybooks, her two large dic- tionaries of French; her fans, and the toys of her friend Anguste. — Who has the fine cloaks of the generals'? The minister's servant has them. — Has the scholar the words which you have 1 He has them not. — Has not the scholar got good dictionaries? Yes, he has good dictionaries of French. — Which playthings has the grocer's little boy? He has little Henry's playthings. — Have you the nouns, adjectives, and pronouns of the (la) ninth lesson? I have those of the ninth vocabulary and those of the exercises. — Has the lawyer or the minister the choice of the farmer's cabbages ? The lawyer has it. — Has he not also the choice of the grocer's cheese ? Yes, he has. — Who has the choice of the merchant's wine ? The minister, 'the lawyer, or the generals? Neither the minister, the lawyer, nor the generals, but the grocer. — Are you not ashamed? No, I am not. — Is the scholar ashamed*? Yes, he is. — Is he right or wrong? He is not wrong, he is right. — Is not the tailor ashamed of his coats? Yes, he is ashamed of his coats. Who is not cold ? I am not. — Who has nothing ugly? Their brother's friend has nothing ugly. — Has the youth Anne's handkerchiefs? Which handkerchiefs? The small ones. — No, he has them not; but he has those of her brother. Who has the cook's mutton ? Nobody has it ; but the carpenter's dog has. (Dir. 1st.) — Has the stranger got the farmer's fine mutton ? He has it not. — Have you my pretty pistols or those of my brothers? I have neither yours nor your brothers', but my own. — Who has these or those nails ? Nobody has either these or those. I am glad to hear it. I am glad to see you. I am sorry to hear that you have the toothache. Out of doors. Pleasant, agreeable. Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. Je suis fache d'apprendre que vous avez mal aux dents. Dehors. Agreable. ELEVENTH LESSON, 11th.— Onzieme Legon, lime. Vocabulary. 1st Section. They. have. They have got. They have not. They have nothing. They have it. They have it not. They have them. They have not got them. The Germans. The Turks. VOCABULAIRE. lis. ont. lis n'ont pas. lis l'ont. lis les ont. lis ne les ont pas. Les Allemands. Ire Section, lis ont. lis n'ont lien, lis ne 1'onl pas Les Turcs. ELEVENTH LESSON. 55 The Germans have. The Turks have not. Have they ? Have they not ? The Italians. The Spaniards. Of the Italians. Those Spaniards, t Have the Spaniards ? Have not the Italians got ? Have they got anything ? Have they nothing ? Have they got it ? Have they them ? What have they ? The fine ones. They have the Spaniard's fine dogs. What have they not ? They have not the general's paper. Article Partitive or Indefinite Adjective Pronoun. Some or any. (H, § 25.) Of some, of any, from some, any. Some or any wine. Bread. Some or any butter. Milk. Some or any books. Buttons. Some or any knives. Men. This steel. Some or any steel. Some or any gold. Silver. Some or any friends. Birds. Have you any wine ? I have (some wine). Has that man any cloth ? He has some cloth, or, He has. Has the scholar any copybooks ? He has some copybooks). Have they any steel ? The English have steel. No, or not any .... (before a noun.) I have no wine. He has no steel. You have no cloaks. Have they no friends ? Obs. 27. Mind that the noun after but merely de or d\ (Or, you put de tiou.) Is anything the matter with them ? Wnat is the matter with them ? (ails them ?) Nothing is the matter with them. What is the matter with the Italians ? Les Allemands ont. Les Turcs n'ont pas. Ont-ils ? N'ont-ils pas ? Les Italiens. Les Espagnols. Des Italiens. Ces Espagnols-la. Les Espagnols ont-ils? (Obs. 14, p. 38.) Les Italiens n'ont-ils pas ? Ont-ils quelque chose ? N'ont-ils rien ? L'ont-ils ? Les ont-ils ? Qu'ont-ils ? Les beaux, lis ont les beaux chiens de V Espagnol. Que n'ont-ils pas ? lis n'ont pas le papier du general. Article Partitif. Singulier. mas. Pluriel, m. et f V Des. De, (not de des.) Du pain. Du lait. Des boutons. Des hommes. De l'acier. De 1' argent. Des oiseaux. J'ai du vin. Du. de I De, (not de du.) Du vin. Du beurre. Des livres. Des couteaux. Cet acier. De l'or. Des amis. Avez-vous du vin ? (Ire Direction.) Cet homme a-t-il du drap ? II a du drap. L'ecolier a-t-il des cahiers ? II a des cahiers. Ont-ils de l'acier? Les Anglais ont de l'acier. Ne pas de (§ 26.) Je n'ai pas de vin. II n'a pas d'acier. Vous n'avez pas de manteaux. N'ont-ils pas d'amis ? a negation, takes, not : du, nor des , before the noun that follows a nega- t Ont-ils quelque chose ? t Qu'ont-ils ? t lis n'ont rien. t Qu'ont les Italiens t 66 ELEVENTH LESSON. Eleventh Exercise. 1st Sec. — Onzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Good day, Miss Amanda, I am glad to see you. You are well, I hope? — Very well, thank you; but my father is not well. — Indeed! I am sorry to hear it. — What is the matter with him 1 He has a bad cold. — I am sorry to hear that he has a bad cold. — Has he a sore throat too? No, but he has a pain in his head. — Is the general well? No, but he is much better. — I am glad to bear it. — Is it cold or warm to-day out of doors? It is neither warm nor cold; but pleasant. I am pleased at it. — Sit down. With pleasure. — Take this seat. Thank you. — Which ships have the Germans? The Germans have no ships. — Have the sailors our fine matti isses? They have them not. — Have the cooks got them? They have them. — Has the captain your big copybooks ? He has no copybooks. — Have I them ? You have them not : but 1 have. — Has the Italian the boys ; steel inkstand ? He has it not. — Have the Turks any steel guns ? They have no steel guns. — Have not the Spaniards got them? Yes, They have them. — Has not the Spaniard the pretty umbrellas of the Germans? Yes, he has them. — Has he them? Yes, indeed, he has them. Have not the two big Italians our pretty thread gloves? They have not. (Dir. 1st.) — Who has? The Turks have them, and they have also our big paper fans. — The pretty ones or the old ones ? The pretty ones. — Have not the tailors our cloth waistcoats or those of your friends? They have neither the latter nor the former; but they have those of the general, of the lawyer, and of little John. — Which coats have they? They have the velvet coats which the Turks have not. — Which dogs have you? I have those which no- body has. — Have I the handkerchiefs that nobody has? Yes, indeed, you have those which nobody has. — Have you not any wood ? — Yes, I have some wood. — Has not your small brother got some soap? No, he has no soap. — Have I not some mutton ? No, you have no mutton, but you have some birds and chickens. — Have I no beef? No, you have no beef. — Who has beef? Nobody has beef. — Have your friends any money? They have money. — Have they no milk? They have no milk, but they have butter. — Have I no wood ? No, you have no wood, but you have some coals, (sing. in. Fr.) — Have the old merchants any cloth ? They have no cloth, but they have cotto* thread, ribbons, and stockings. I wish you a good evening. (I bid you.) How have you been ? I have been pretty well. I have not been very well. Je vous souhaite le bonsoir. Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je me suis assez bien porte. Je ne me suis pas tres-bie a port& ELEVENTH LESSON. 57 Vocabulary. 2d Section. Some or any before an adjective). Some or any good cheese. Some or any fine velvet. Some or any excellent wine. Some or any excellent coffee. Some or any very pretty glasses. Some or any large fans. Some or any old wine. Some or any excellent cabbages. No or not any .... Have you any good butter ? I have no good butter, but some ex- cellent cheese. Has not this man some good books ? He has not any good books. Have the young merchants pTetty gloves and pocket-books ? They have neither pretty gloves nor pocket-books, but fine jewels. The clerk. These clerks. Our bookseller. Their shoe-dealer. Those cloth-merchants, ^drapers.) The milkman — butter-man. This wood (coal) merchant. The painter. The picture. Some coals. What has the baker ? What have the cloth-merchants ? They have excellent clerks. Are the Americans afraid ? The Americans are not afraid. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. De, vnot du nor des.) $ 26.) De bon fromage. De beau velours. D'excellent vin. D' excellent cafe. De tres-jolis verres. De grands eventails. - Du vin vieux. Des choux excellents. De and d 1 ; the adjectives coming beiore the nouns. Repeat it bef. every noun. Du and des; the nouns be- ing before the adjective. Ne .... pas de . . . . Avez-vous de bon beurre ? Je n'ai pas de bon beurre, mais d'excellent fromage. Cet homme n'a-t-il pas de bons livres ? II n'a pas de bons livres. Lesjeunes marchands ont-ils de jolis gants et de jolis porte-feuilles ? lis n'ont ni de jolis gants ni de jobs porte-feuilles, mais de beaux bijoux. Le commis. Ces commis. Notre marchand de livres. Leur marchand de souliers. Ces marchands de drap. Le marchand de lait — de beurre. Ce marchand de bois — de charbon. j Le peintre. Le tableau. I Du charbon, always sing, in Fr.) fLe boulanger qu'a-t-il? (14 et 15 < Obs. p. 38.1 v Qu'a le boulanger ? Qu'ont les marchands de drap ? lis ont d'excellents commis. i Les Americains ont-ils peur ? ! Les Americains n'ont pas peur. Eleventh Exercise. 2d Sec. — Onzieme Exercice. 2de Sec I wish you a good evening, Mr. Charles. — How have you been % I have been pretty well ; and you 7 Miss, how have you been ? I have not been well. I am sorry to hear it. — What kind of weather is it out of doors? The weather is fine enough, (pretty fineV W 58 ELEVENTH LESSON. cold. — Is it very cold? Not very cold, but pleasant. — I hope, Miss Emilie. that you are well ? Thank you. but 1 am not well, I have a sore throat. — And your friend Robert, how is he to-day? He is better, much better. — I am very glad to hear that he is better. — Which exercise have the scholars to-day ? They have the eleventh, the tenth, and the ninth. — -Which ones has the young clerk? He has the fifth, first and second section. — Have the English any silver' 1 They have no silver, but they have excellent iron. ($25.) — Has the grocer any good coffee ? He has no good coffee, but some excellent wine. — Has the bookseller no old dictionaries? Yes, he has those of Boyer and Chambaud. — Has he those which your brothers have? No, he has not those which they have. — Has the milk-man no milk? Yes, he has some milk. — Have the French any good gloves ? They have excellent gloves. — Have they no birds ? No, they have no birds, but they have pretty jewels. — Who has excellent chocolate % The Spaniards have excellent chocolate. — Have they not some fine horses? Yes, they have some very fine horses. — Have not the Germans got large dogs? Yes, they have large dogs and oxen. 1 — Have the Americans large oxen? No, they have little oxen and horses. 1 — -Has your friend's brother got some pretty little fans? Yes, he has some pretty little fans, shawls, and ribbons. 1 — What has he not? He has neither my shoes, nor yours, nor theirs. — Who has those of the French ? They have them and ours also. — Are not the coal-merchants ashamed? No, but they are afraid. — Is the clerk, the lawyer, or the minister wrong? No, they are not wrong; but right. — Have the wine-merchants anything good ? No, they have nothing good. — Have not the Americans something beautiful? Yes, they have the electric telegraph, (telegraphe electrique.) — Has the painter any umbrellas? He has no umbrellas, but he has beautiful pictures. — Has he the pictures of the French, or those of the Italians? Who? the painter? Yes, the painter. — He has neither the latter nor the former. As usual. Better than usual. Not so well as usual. Comme a l'ordinaire. Mieux qu'a l'ordinaire. Pas si bien qu'a l'ordinaire. Is he not better ? Yes, he is a little j N'est-il pas mieux ? Si fait, ou better. I Pardonnez-moi, il est un peu mieux. Obs. 28. Pardonnez-moi, is as frequently used as: Si fait, by the French. (Obs. 26.) I present my respects to you. | J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. 1 Repeat the article and adjective : (et de grands bceufs.) TWELFTH LESSON. 59 TWELFTH LESSON, 12\h.—Douzieme Legon, 12me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Some of it, any of it, of it, some. Some or any of them, of them, some. Have you any wine ? I have some of it — of it some — I have. Have you any coals ? Have you no coals ? I have none, not any — I have not. Have you not any ? Yes, I have. Have you any good steel ? I have some good ... or I have. Have I good cloth and velvet ? You have not any good. Youhavenot Has the grocer any sugar and salt ? He has sugar, but no salt. He has (some). He has not (any). Has he good sugar and soap ? He has (some good). He has not. Have I any bread and butter ? Have I no bread and butter ? You have some bread, hut no butter. You have neither bread nor butter. You have some. You have none. Have you any shoes and stockings ? I have shoes ; I have no stockings. 1 have (some good). I have not (any good). Has the farmer got good horses ? He has (some good ones). He has not. Has he any pretty knives and scis- sors ? Has he no small penknives ? Yes, he has (some small ones). He has not. Have I no gold pencil-cases ? Yes, you have. Who has any ? Who has none ? The clerk has some. The man has none. Who has no clerk ? The lawyer has none. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. * E?i, (before the verb.) (§ 4, $ 25.) Avez-vous du vin ? J'en ai. (Ire direction.) Avez-vous du charbon ? N'avez-vous pas de charbon ? (§ 26.) Je n'en ai pas. N'en avez-vous pas ? Si fait, j'en ai. Avez-vous de bon acier ? J'en ai de bon. Ai-je de bon drap et de bon velours I Vojls n'en avez pas de bon. (Ire dir.) L'epicier a-t-il du sucre et du sel ? II a du sucre ; mais pas de sel. II en a. II n'en a pas. A-t-il de bon sucre et de bon savon ? II en a de bon. II n'en a pas de bon. Ai-je du pain et du beurre ? N' ai-je pas de pain et de beurre ? Vous avez du pain, mais pas de beurre. Vous n'avez ni pain ni beurre. Vous en avez. Vous n'en avez pas. Avez-vous des souliers et des bas ? J'ai des souliers : je n'ai pas de bas. J'en ai de bons. Je n'en ai pas de bons. Le fermier a-t-il de bons chevaux ? II en a de bons. II n'en a pas de bons. A-t-il de jolis couteaux et de jolis ciseaux ? N'a-t-il pas de petits canifs ? II en a de petits. II n'en a pas. N'ai-je pas de porte-crayons d'or ? Si fait, vous en avez. Qui en a ? Qui n'en a pas ? Le commis en a. L'homme n^en a pas. Qui n'a pas de commis ? L'avocat n'en a pas. Twelfth Exercise. 1st bee. — Douzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Mr. Carnot, j'espere que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. — Merci, Madame, je me porte beaucoup 60 TWELFTH LESSON. mieux. — Mais vous, M. Napoleon, comment vous etes-vous porte? Je ne me suis pas bien porte, comme a Pordinaire. Je suis bien fache de Papprendre. Asseyez-vous. Prenez ce siege. — Avez-vous assez chaud? Oui, je vous remercie, je n'ai pas froid. — Avez-vous mal de gorge ? Non, mais mal de tete. — Votre ami se porte-t-il mieux qu'a Pordinaire? Oui, beaucoup mieux. Je suis bien aise d'apprendre qu'il se porte mieux.— Fait-il froid? Non, il fait agre- able. — Mr. Charles, avez-vous mon petit canif ? Non, M., je ne Pai pas. — Qui Pa? Votre ami Jules (Julius) Pa. — Non, Jules n'a pas le mien, il a le votre. — Le mien? Non, je Pai. — Pardonnez-moi, Jules Pa. — Les Espagnols n'ont-ils pas de beaux chevaux? lis en ont de beaux. — Le domestique de Pavocat qu'a-t-il? II a le vieux chapeau du jeune Francais. — Le commis de Pepicier n'a-t il pas mon joli petit chien ? Non, M. il n'a pas de cbien. — Son frere ne Pa-t-il pas? Pardonnez-moi, il Pa. — Avez-vous peur de ce chien-ci ? Oui, j'en ai peur. — Avez-vous peur de celui-la? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. — L'adolescent n'a-t-il pas peur de ce boeuf-la ? Pardonnez- moi, il en a peur. Have you any coal? I have. (1st dir.) — Have you any wood? I have not. — Have you any good beef? I have (some good). — Any young mutton ? I have not. — Have you no good cloth? No, I have none. — No good paper? Yes, I have. — Have I the silver ribbon? No, you have it not. — Which have I ? The velvet one. — Have I the grocer's rice ? You have it not. — Have I any rice? You have (some.) — Has the lawyer any thread handkerchiefs ? He has none. — Who has any? Miss Rose has some very pretty ones. — Has the clerk any money ? He has none. — What has he ? He has not anything. Who? The clerk. — Has the lawyer's servant any old cheese ? He has some. — Have not the Spaniards the scholar's dic- tionary? Yes, they have it. — Have they our books? No, they have them not. — Who has them? Your good friend, the minister, has them. — Has the American any gold ? He has some. — Have the tailors Our vests? No, they have them not. — Have they any vests? They have some. — Have the French the pictures? Which pictures ? — Those of the young painter. — No, the French have them not ; but the Italians have. — What have they ? The young painter's pictures. — Has not the milkman some fine oxen ? Yes, he has some fine ones. — What leather has the shoemaker? He has some excel- lent. — Has the big general any jewels ? He las not any. — Who has playthings? The butterman's son has. TWELFTH LESSON. 61 Vocabulary. 2d Section. The hatter. This joiner. The apothecary. These apothecaries. Have our friends any old cloaks ? They have some old ones;. (1st dir.) They have not (any old . Have they not (any old ones) ? Yes, they have tsome old ones). Have they good or bad books ? They have some good ones. What have they good ? They have good books. Have you any good ones also ? Have you no pretty ones ? Has the hatter any hats ? Has he any ugly ones ? Has he neither ugly nor old ones ? Yes, he has old ones. Have the joiners any hammers ? They have (1st dir.) and the hatters also. Have not the carpenters got some ? Yes, they have, and so have the doc- tors. Are the Spaniards cold ? No, they are not ; they have fire. Have the Italians any ? Are the Turks afraid of the Ger- mans ? No, they are not afraid of them. Are they not afraid of the Russians ? Yes, they are. (1st dir.) Are they neither warm, sleepy, hun- gry, nor thirsty ? No, they are neither warm, sleepy, hungry nor thirsty, but wrong. Are not the hatters ashamed of their velvet hats ? No, they are not (ashamed of them). The Russian's apothecary. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Le chapelier. Ce menuisier. L' apothicaire. Ces apothicaires. Nos amis ont-ils de vieux manteaux? lis en ont de vieux. lis n'en ont pas de vieux. N'en ont-ils pas de vieux? Si fait, iis en ont de vieux. Ont-ils de bons ou de mauvais livres ? lis en ont de bons, Qu'ont-ils de bon ? lis ont de bon livres. En avez-vous de bons aussi ? N'en avez-vous pas de jolis ? Le chapelier a-t-il des chapeaux ? En a-t-il de vilains ? N'en a-t-il ni de vilains ni de vieux ? Si fait, il en a de vieux. Les menuisiers ont-ils des marteaux? lis en ont, et les chapeliers aussi. Les charpentiers n'en ont-ils pas ? Si fait, ils en ont et les medecins aussi. Les Espagnols ont-ils froid ? Non , ils n'ont pas froid ; ils ont du feu. Les Italiens en ont-ils ? Les Turcs ont-ils peur des Alle- mands ? II n'en ont pas peur. N'ont-ils pas peur des Russes ? Si fait, ils en ont peur. N'ont-ils ni chaud, ni sommeil, ni faim, ni so if ? Non, ils n'ont ni chaud, ni sommeil, ni faim, ni soif, mais ils ont tort. Les chapeliers n'ont-ils pas honte de leurs chapeaux de velours ? Non, ils n'en ont pas honte. L' apothicaire du Russe. Twelfth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Douzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. M. Lamartine, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Comment vous portez-vous ce matin, et comment vous etes-vous porte ? Bien : et vous, Mr., j'espere que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. Un peu mieux, a votre service. — Quel temps fait-il? Fait-il chaud ou froid'? II ne fait ni chaud ni froid. mais agreable. — Comment se porte notre 82 TWELFTH LESSON. ministre? II ne se porte pas bien. — Qu 'a-t-il? II aun mauvdis rhume et mal de gorge. — A-t-il aussi mal aux dents'? Non, il n'a pas mal aux dents. — J'en suis bien aise. — Le bon commis a-t-il les eventails de nos marchands? II n'a pas d'eventails, mais il a leurs gants de cuir. — Avez-vous du grain du fermier? Oui, j'en ai. — Augnste a-t-il froid ou faim ? II n'a ni froid ni faim, mais il a chaud, — Le marchand a-t-il quelque chose de joli ? II n'a rien de joli.— N'a-t-il rien de beau ? — Non, il n'a rien de joli ni de beau. — Qu'ai-je ? Vous avez de bon chocolat. — Avez-vous le bois du menuisier? Je ne Pai pas ; mais j'ai son marteau. — Lequel; le grand ou le petit? Pai le grand. — N' avez-vous pas le petit? Si fait, ou pardonnez-moi, je Pai. — Pai celui que vous n'avez pas. — Quels exercices ai-je? Vous avez ceux de Mr. Charles, ceux de Mr. Robert, ceux de ce Mon- sieur-la. {gentleman) et les miens. — Avez-vous le dixieme, le onzi- erne, ou le douzieme? — Je n'ai pas ceux-la, mais le huitieme, et le neuvieme. — Lequel ont les Italiens ? lis ont le septieme. Has the captain any good sailors? He has some good ones.— Have the sailors any fine mattresses? They have not (1st dir.)— Have the painters any very old pictures ? No, they have no old pictures ; but the booksellers have. — Have not the minister and the lawyer got some also? This one has some, that one has none — Who has beautiful shawls, ribbons, and handkerchiefs ? Messrs. Boutilliers and Cowell have some. Has the apothecary's clerk my penknife or his? He has his own penknife, but not yours. — Who has biscuits? The young baker of our big neighbour has. — Who has beautiful ribbons? The French have. — Have not the carpenters some gold and silver nails? No, they have iron nails; but the joiners have gold, silver, and steel nails? What is the matter with their brothers? They are wrong and ashamed. — What is the mat- ter with the foreigners? Which? These or those? Those. — Those are afraid of the general's dogs. — And these ? These ? Nothing is the matter with them. — They are neither cold nor warm, hungry nor thirsty. — Have you Miss Clara's shawl and gloves ? No, I have them not. — Who has them ? I have some, but not hers. — Who has any of the grocer's rice ? The lawyer, the general, the apothecary, and the joiner have some of it. — Have the painters fine pictures and gardens ? They have. — Have not his joiner and his carpenter got some beautiful old wood ? The former has. but not the latter. — Have the hatters good and bad hats ? They have good and bad ones. — Who has no pocket-book ? The milk and butter men have none. — Have you none? I have none. — Has your little clerk got any? No, he has none. — Who has any? The booksellers have some leather ones. — Has the apothecary anything pretty? He has TWELFTH LESSON, not anything pretty, but he has something good. — Who has you* birds'? The farmer has them. — Has he their grain'? He has 11 also. How are they at home ? All well — Everybody is well. Almost all are sick. Vocabulary. 3d Section. Fresh. This fresh butter. Fresh bread. A dry goods store. A journal, daily paper, gazette. To-day's paper, the paper of to-day. A or an (article indefini, § 3). In. into. In a or an. Of a. A horse. One horse. Of a horse, Have you a book ? I have a book. Have you a glass ? I have no glass. Obs. 29. The French use : je n'aipas I have one, (meaning: one of the things spoken of.) Have you a good journal ? I have a good journal. I have a good one — two good ones. I have two good journals. I have three, no, four good ones. Have I an eye ? You have an eye. You have one. You have a large one. You have two large ones. Has your brother a dry goods store ? He has a dry goods store. He has one. He has a small one. He has two. A large and a small one. He has two fine ones — three fine ones. Four — five — six — seven — eight. Has the scholar a paper of to-day ? He has not any (none). Have the gentlemen five good horses? They have six. No ; they have seven or eight. Who has a fine satin umbrella ? Nobody has one. Oh ! yes ; some- body has one. Anna has one. Some or any good fresh butter. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde se porte bien. Presque tout le monde est malade. Vocabulaire. 3me Section Frais (after the noun). Ce beurre frais. Du pain frais Tin magasin le nouveautes. Un journal — Un papier. Le papier d'aujourd 'hui. Un. (mas. sing, before all letters.) Dans. Dans un. D'un. Un cheval. D'un cheval. Avez-vous un livre ? J'ai un livre. Avez-vous un verre ? Je n'ai pas de verre. de . . . in preference to : je7i , aipas un. J'en ai un, (literally : /, of them, havt one. The quantity placed aftei the verb.) Avez-vous un bon journal ? J'ai un bon journal. J'en ai un bon — deux bons. J'ai deux bons journaux. J'en ai trois, non, quatre bons. Ai-je un ceil ? Vous avez un ceil. Vous en avez un. Vous en avez un grand. Vous en avez deux grands. Votre frere a-t-il un magasin de nou- veautes. II a un magasin de nouveautes. II en a un. II en a un petit. II en a deux. Un grand et un petit. II en a deux beaux — trois beaux. Quatre — cinq — six — sept — huit. L' ecolier a-t-il un papier d'aujour- d'hui? II n' en a pas. Les messieurs ont-ils cinq bons che- vaux? Ilsenontsix. Non; ils enont sept ou huit. Qui a ur. beau parapluie de satin ? Perstnne n' en a. Oh ! si fait ; quel qu'un en a un. Anne en a un. De bon beurre frais, (frais, after). 64 TWELFTH LESSON. Twelfth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Douzieme Exercice. 3me Sec. Mr. Louis, f ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde se porte bien, merci. Et chez vous? comment se porte-t-on? Presque tout le monde est malade. Ma- dame a mal de gorge. George a mal aux yeux. Clara a mal aux dents. Le petit Jean a un vilain rhume. Pai un peu mal de tete. En verite. tout le monde est malade. Asseyez-vous, et prenez un peu de cafe. Non. je vous remercie. Have you any fresh butter? I have some; but I \ave no fresh bread. — Which bread have you? I have some old baker's bread. — Have they any coffee? They have not. — Who has any good wine? The grocer has some in his store. — Has the cloth merchant any gold cloth? He has some silver cloth. — Have I not got good sugar? Yes, you have in your chest; but the farmer has not. — What has the clerk got? Which one? The bookseller's. That one has nothing; but mine has something good. — What has he good ? He has, in his bag, some of the good rice of the big stranger. — Have the Germans any fresh cheese? They have none. — Have not the English got any? Yes, they have some good fresh cheese. — Which words have the scholars? They have the words of seven lessons. — Who has those of the eighth? The minister, the lawyer, and Robert have them. — Have they also those of the ninth? No, they have them not. — Have you a pencil ? I have one, and a pencil-case also. — Has the apothecary a young clerk? He has none. — Has not the general a fine satin handkerchief? Yes. he has, and the sailor also. Has the old tailor a satin coat? He has three. — Has the captain a fine dog ? He has two. — Have your friends two fine horses ? They have four. — Has the young man a good or bad pistol? He has no good one. He has a bad and ugly one in his trunk (§ 18.) — Have you a copy-book ? I have six or eight. — Has your servant a pen- knife ? He has. — Have I a friend? You have an old and good one. You have two old ones. He has three ugly small ones. — Has Mr. Cowell a dry goods store? Yes, he has a fine one. — Have not the Germans a cloth store ? No, they have a dry goods store. — Have his carpenter and her joiner iron and steel nails ? They have, and they have also a small silver hammer. — Who has the youths' jour- nals? Nobody has their journals; but somebody has their fans, their satin vests ($ 140), velvet shoes, steel toys, cloth cloaks, and thread gloves. — Has the ugly Turk a young and good cook? He has two; one young, and one old. Have you none of his coffee? Yes, I have some, in my big cotton bag. THIRTEENTH LESSON. 65 THIRTEENTH LESSON, 13th.— Treizieme Legon, 13me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. How much ? How many? (bef. a noun.) How much satin ? How much steel ? How many words ? How many birds ? How much (of it) has he ? (no noun.) How many (of them) has he? Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Combien de l (avant un nom. Dir. 7.) Combiende satin ? Combien d'acier? Combien de mots ? Combien d'oi- seaux ? Combien en a-t-il ? (pas de nom.) Combien en a-t-il ? Of it, of them, being usually omitted, when there is no noun; 06s. 30. eay : How much ? How many ? How many friends have you ? How many has he ? Only, but, (with a noun.) Only, but, (without a noun). Before. After. Only one \oi them). But two. 1 have but one friend. I have but one — but two or three. How many horses has your brother ? He has but one — but two young ones. Much, many, a good deal of, very much, many, a great many, (with nouns.) Much, many, &c. (without a noun.) Much fresh butter (a great deal of). Much gold. Many words. Has he many cabbages ? He has many, — not (many). Have they neither much iron nor steel ? Too much. Too many, (with and without noun). Have you too many words ? I have (too many . I have not. (Dir. 1.) He has neither too much of this one nor of that. Has he many things ? He has too many by far (a great deal too much). Thirteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. Comment! (How!) mauvais mal de gorge Combien en (avant le verbe.) Combien d'amis avez-vous? Combien en a-t-il ? Ne (avant) que, (apres le verbe.) N'en . . . . que .... Avant. Apres. N'en . . . qu'un. N'en . . . que deux. Je n'ai qu'un ami. Je n'en ai qu'un — que deux ou trois. Combien de chevaux a votre frere ? II n'en a qu'un — que deux jeunes. Beaucoup de . . . . (avec les noms.) (Dir. 7.) En .... beaucoup (sans nom). Beaucoup de beurre frais. Beaucoup d'or. Beaucoup de mots A-t-il beaucoup de choux? II en a beaucoup — II n'en a pas beau- coup. N'ont-ils ni beaucoup de fer, ni beaucoup d'acier ? Trop de (avec). En .... trop (sans nom. Avez-vous trop de mots ? J'en ai trop. Je n'en ai pas trop. II n'a ni trop de celui-ci ni de celui- la. A-t-il beaucoup de choses ? II en a beaucoup trop. -Treizieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Vous avez mal de gorge ? Oui 5 f ai un tres- Avez-vous un rhume aussi ? Non, je n'ai pas de rhume. J'espere que votre jeune frere se porte bien. — Oui 7 1 Cardinal numbers answer the question: Combien? How many? Two — Deux, &c. 6* 66 THIRTEENTH LESSON. i] se porte tres-bien. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous? Personne n'est malade. Mr. j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer et j'espere que vous vous portez mieux. — Je me porte beaucoup mieux. je vout remercie. Fait-il chaud? II ne fait pas froid. — Asseyez-vous, pre nez ce siege-ci. Non merci. — Votre cuisinier se porte-t-il mieux '* II se porte bien. Pen suis bien aise. How many friends have you ? I have two good friends. — Have you eight good trunks ? I have nine. — Has our servant three brooms r < He has only one good one. — Has the captain two fine ships? He has only one. — How many sailors has he? He has too many; he has thirteen. — How many hammers have the carpenter and joiner' They have many. — Have they too many ? They have not. (Dir. 1 .)— Have not the shoemakers many shoes? Yes, they have many, bui not too many. — Has not the young man an old copy-book? Yes, he has. — Has the clerk ten fans ? No. he has but seven ; but he has- ten handkerchiefs, nine inkstands, eight combs, and many pencils. — How much money have the Spaniards? They have not much.— Have they not many fine horses ? Yes, they have. — Has your neigh bor much coffee ? He has some. — How many bags has he ? He has only six or seven. — Who has too much grain? Nobody has. — What has he got in his hat? He has some journals. — How many has he? He has three or four. — Has he but three or four? No, he has but three or four. How many good generals have the Americans? They have b great many. — What have the Russians? They have much salt but not too much. — Have the farmers much fresh butter ? They have some old, but none fresh. — Have you brothers? I have but one.— What have the apothecaries got in their stores? — They have man) things. — Have they too many ? Yes, too many by far. — Has the drv goods merchant any satin, cotton and thread ? He has neither satin cotton, nor thread. — What has he got? He has many things. — Ha* he anything pretty? Yes, he has. (Dir. 1.) — Has the scholar a copybook ? No, he has none. Oh ! yes, he has one in his trunk.— What has the grocer got in this and in that bag? In this he hae some clothes. In that, he has cabbages, grain, and fresh cheese.— Has he biscuits? He has. — Is the man afraid? No, he is nc afraid. — Are not the generals cold and hungry? No, but they ap warm and thirsty. — Who is ashamed? The minister's little boy j ashamed. He is wrong. — Who has the electric telegraph? Th- Americans have it. —Has the youth any pretty sticks? He has n< ^retty sticks, but some beautiful birds. — What chickens has ou cook ? He has some pretty chickens. — How many has he? He ha.- six. — Has the hatter any hats? He has a good many. — Has the joiner much wood ? He has not a great deal ; but enough. THIRTEENTH LESSON. 61 Vocabulary 2d Section. Have we ? We have. We have not. Have we not got ? What have we ? is the matter with us? We have nothing, or nothing is. &c. Have we it ? We have them. Hr.ve we anybody ? We have nobody, (not anybody). Whom ? Whom have we ? We have our young and old friends. Are we warm ? We are not cold. Enough. (Dir. 6.) Enough of it, of them. Money enough. Enough knives. We have enough (of it or them). But little, only a little, not much, not many, but few. (Dir. 7.) Who has but little money ? I have not much, or but little. Not much of it, but few of them. Have we not many friends ? We have but few. Have I but few ? You have not many. Has he but little ? The lawyers have but few. Who has but little ? Nobody has much (many). The merit. Some merit. This lawyer has great merit. Little — Little merit. >Dir. 7.) Little of it — He has little of it. A little .... A little of it. A little cloth. He has a little. Nine — ten — eleven — twelve. Courage. Pepper. Some vinegar. Thirteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Avons-nous ? Nous avons. Nous n' avons pas. N' avons-nous pas? Qu' avons-nous ? Nous n'avons rien. L' avons-nous ? Nous les avons. Avons-nous quelqu'un ? Nous n'avons personne. Qui ? Qui avons-nous ? Nous avons nos jeunes et iws vieux amis. Avons-nous chaud? Nous n'avons pas froid. Assez de (av. le nom.). En . . assez. Assez d' argent. Assez de couteaux. Nous en avons assez. JVe . . guere de, or > „„_„, i „^ w ■*r i -, >avantlenom. ive . . pas beaucoup de ) Qui n'a guere d' argent ? Je n'en ai guere — Je n'en ai pas beaucoup. N'en.. guere — N'en. .pas beaucoup. N'avons-nous pas beaucoup d'amis \ Nous n'en avons guere. N'en ai-je guere ? Vous n'en avez pas beaucoup. N!en a-t-il guere ? Les avocats n'en ont guere. Qui n'en a guere ? Personne n'en a guere. Le merite. Du merite. Cet avocat a un grand merite. Peu de av. le n. 1 . Peu de merite. En .... peu — II en a peu. Tin peu de . . . . En . . . . un peu Un peu de drap. II en a un peu. Neuf — dix — onze — douze. Du cceur, (du courage). Du poivre. Du vinaigre. -Treizieme Exercice. 2de Sec. J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer, Mle. Sophie. Monsieur, je vous souhaite le bonjour — Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je vous remercie. Mle., je me suis tres-bien porte, comme a Pordinaire — Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Chez moi? Tout le monde se porte bierij merci — Le menuisier se porte-t-il mieux ? II ne se porte pas mieux. Je suis fache de Papprendre. Qui a mal de tele che2 OO FOURTEENTH LESSON. vous? Personne n*a mal de tete chez moi; mais mon frere a mal aux dents. Have we many notes? We have only a few. — How many notes have we ? We have only three pretty ones. — Have you fresh butter enough I We have not enough. — Have our boys too many ink- stands? They have not too many, but enough. — Has our young friend too much milk ? He has only a little, but enough. — Who has good many words? The scholars have enough, but not too many. — Have they many gloves? Who? The farmers or scholars ($ 15)? The farmers. They have not any. — Has the cook any pepper ( § 25), salt and vinegar? He has not enough vinegar, but he has too much pepper and salt. Have we much soap? We have only a little.— Has the merchant much cloth? He has a good deal. — Who has a good deal of paper? Our neighbors have. — Have these tailors many buttons? They have but few. — Has the painter many gar dens? He has not many. — How many gardens has he? He has but two. — Have we the Germans' knives? We have them. — Have we the captain's fine horses? We have them not; the general has them. — Have we any good and fine ($18) jewels? We have a good many. — What jewels have we? We have gold, silver, and steel jewels (§ 140). What candlesticks have our friends. They have the old iron ones (les vieux de fer.) Have we not Sarah's satin ribbons? No. we have them not. — Have we not any ribbons? Satin ribbons? Yes, satin ribbons? Yes, we have many, but not Sarah's. — Has the clerk any of the grocers chocolate, sugar, coffee, vinegar, pepper, salt, and biscuits (§ 140)? He has not. — Whom have you to-day? We have the minister of merit. — Whom has your brother? He has nobody. — Whom have I? The lawyer who has little merit. — Who has merit? Doctor (Docteur) M has much merit. — Have we neither gold nor silver? Yes, we have. — What have they? They have something fine. — Have you anything bad? Yes, and I am ashamed of it. FOURTEENTH LESSON, Uth.—Quatorzieme Legon, Ume. Vocabulary. 1st Section. A few — Some. i§ 3.) A few books. A few friends. Have you a few esercises ? Some of them). A few of them). A few of They have a few of mine (some of). Have we not a few ? One or a sou. Some sous. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Quelques no de, before the noun). Quelques livres. Quelques amis. Avez-vous quelques exercices? En .... quelques un *. Quelques uns des .... lis en ont quelques uns des miens. N'en avons-nous pas quelques uns? Un sou. Des sous. FOURTEENTH LESSON. Some francs. Half a dollar. Un franc. Un dollar. One or a franc .... A dollar. Obs. 31. In the United States, the French use the word to the ar final, its French sound. A one dollar note. Two dollars. A three, five, or ten dollar note. A two dollar one, or one of two dollars. Other. One or another. Some others. Another dollar. Some other dollars. Have we another franc ? Have we some other francs ? (some more ?) We have another. We have some more. No other horse .... horses (§ 26). Quelques francs. Un demi-dollar. dollar; giving I have no other horse. I have no other. Have they other horses? They have others. We have no others (§ 28). The arm. The foot. The heart. The month. The work. The volume. I have but a few dollars. You have but a few (of them). We have but a few volumes. They have but a few. He has but a few. Un billet d'un dollar. Deux dollars. Un billet de trois, de cinq ou de dix dollars. — Un de deux dollars. Autre. Un autre. D'autras ($ 26). Un autre dollar. D'autres dollars. Avons-nous un autre franc ? Avons-nous d'autres francs ? Nous en avons un autre (d autres). Ne . . . .pas d' autre cheval — d 1 autres chevaux. Je n'ai pas d' autre cheval. Je n'en ai pas d'autre. Ont-ils d'autres chevaux? lis en ont d'autres. Nous n'en avons pas d'autres. Le bras. Le pied. Le coeur. Le mois. L'ouvrage. Le volume. Je n'ai que quelques dollars. Vous n'en avez que quelques uns. Nous n' avons que quelques volumes, lis n'en ont que quelques uns. II n'en a que quelques uns. Fourteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quatorzieme Exercice, Ire Sec. Have you many knives ? I have a few. — Have you many pen- cils? I have only a few. — Has the painter's friend many looking- glasses? He has only a few. — Have your boys a few sous? They have a few. — Have we not a few francs? Yes ; we have. (Dir. 1.) — How many francs have we? We have ten. — Have we but ten? We have but ten. — How many dollars has the Spaniard? He has not many, he has only five. — How many half dollars has he? He hasten. — Who has a ten dollar note? I have a five dollar note; little John has a three dollar one; the clerks have two two dollar notes: the doctor has one of a dollar; but nobody has a ten dollar one. — Who has the beautiful glasses of the Italians? We have them. — Have the English many ships ? They have. — Has the milk- man many horses ? No, he has but two. — What have the Germans ? They have many dollars. — How many have they? They have eleven. — Have we the journals of the English or those of the Ger- 10 FOURTEENTH LESSON. mans? We have those of the former, but not of the latter. — Have we the satin parasols of the Spaniards? We have them not. but the Americans have. — Has the butter man much fresh butter ? He has only a little, but enough. — Have the sailors the cotton mattresses that we have? They have not those which we have, but those which their captains have. — Has the Frenchman many francs? He has only a few, but he has enough. — Has your servant sous enough? He has only a few, but he has dollars enough. Have the Russians dollars, half dollars, francs, and so -is ? No, they have none. — Who has any ? The Americans have dollars and half dollars, and the French have francs and sous. — Have you a ten dollar bill in your pocket-book ? No, but I have two five dollar ones, and a few of one and two dollars. — How many feet have men ? They have two. — How many has that one ? He has but one. — How many has that other one ? Which one ? The big or the tall one ? The big one. He has two. — How many feet have horses, oxen, birds and chickens ? ( § 15.) Horses and oxen have four feet, but birds and chickens have but two. N. B. — Let the pupil try to compose a French exercise on the words of daily salutations, as none is given here. Vocabulary. 2d Section. What day of the month is it ? What day of the month have we ? It is the first. The second. We have the first. The second. It is not the third ; it is but the second. Obs. 32. The cardinal numbers are used in French for dates, though the ordinal be used in English ; except : le premier, for the first of every month. Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. Quel jour du mois est-ce ? Quel jour du mois avons-nous? C'est le premier. C'est le deux. Nous avons le premier. Le deux. Ce n'est pas le trois ; ce n'est que le deux. It is the eleventh. We have the eleventh. It it not the twelfth ? Have we not the twelfth ? C'est leonze (not V onze). Nous avons le onze. N'est-ce pas le douze ? N'avons-nous pas le douze ? Obs. 33. The ordinal numbers are formed of the cardinal by adding ieme, (and when they end in e, this is dropped.) Premier and second are irregular, and used for first and second, but not in compound numbers, such as : tiventy- first, twenty -second ; which are not : vingt -premier, vingt-second ; but vingt et unieme, vingt -deuxieme. Which volume have you? I have the eleventh — the thirty-first. One, Two, un. deux. The first. The second. Quel volume avez-vous ? J'ai le onzieme — le trente et unieme. Singulier. PlurieL Le premier. Les premiers. Le deuxieme, le Lesdeuxiemes, les second. seconds. FOURTEENTH LESSON. 71 Three, trois. Four, quatre. Five, cinq. Nine, neuf. Eleven, onze. Twenty, vingt. The third. The fourth. The fifth. The ninth. The eleventh. The twenty-first. The twenty- second. Thirty, trente, The thirty-first. Hundred, cent. The hundred and first. The last. These last exercises. His last dollar. Le troisieme. Le quatrieme. Le cinquieme. Le neuvieme. Le onzieme. Le vingt et uni- eme. Le vingt -deux - ieme. Les troisiemes. Les quatriemes. Les cinquiemes. Les neuviemes. Les onziemes. Les vingt et uni- emes. Les vingt-deux- iemes. Le trente et unieme. l Le cent-unieme. Les cent-uniemes. Le dernier. Les derniers. Ces derniers exercices. Son dernier dollar. Notre dernier papier ou journal. Le premier et le dernier jour du mois. C'est bon. Ce n'est pas bon. Est-ce son cahier? C'est le sien. Let the pupil try to compose Monday, April fourteenth, 1849. Our last paper or journal. The first and last day of the month. That is right. That's not right. Is this, is that, or is it his copy-book ? It is, this is, that is his. N. B. — No French exercise is given here, one on the words of daily salutations. Fourteenth Exercise, 2d Sec. — Quatorzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. (Lundi, quatorze Avril, mil huit cent c quarante-neuf. How many exercises have we, to-day ? We hare but one. — Have we but one ? No, we have but one. — What day of the month is it % \X is the fourteenth. — Is it the fourteenth, indeed ? Yes, it is (the 14th). — Have you the paper of to-day? To-day's paper? No; but the clerk has it. — Has he but one ? No, he has three. — Is this the iast journal ? Yes, it is. — Is not to-day the fourteenth ? No, it is only the thirteenth. — Indeed ! yes, indeed ! That's right. That's very well. — How many stockings has the merchant? He has but few ) but he has many shawls, gloves and ribbons. — Have you any other biscuits? I have no other. — How many servants has that gen- tleman? He has but three; but these foreigners have five. — Has the general much merit ? He has. — Has W. Irving's last work much merit? Yes, it has. — How many arms has this man? He has one. — How many feet has the captain? He has but one. — How many has 1 Let the learner write the date, before his task. Ex. Lundi, seize Avril, mil huit cent quarante-neuf. Monday, April 16th, 1849. Days of the week — Jours de la Semaine — Sunday, Dimanche ; Monday, Lundi ; Tuesday, Mardi ; Wednesday, Mercredi ; Thursday, Je adi ; Fri- day, Vendredi ; Saturday, Samedi. For the names of the months, ($ 143.) 72 FIFTEENTH LESSON. the general? He has two. — What heart has your boy? He has a good heart. — Have you no other servant ? Yes, I have another. — Has your friend no other birds? Yes, he has. — How many? He has six others. — Have the Spaniards and Italians many trees in their gardens? No ; they have but few; b~at the lawyer of merit has a great many in his. Which volume have you ? I have the first. — Have you the second volume of my work? I have it. — Have you the third or fourth exercise? I have neither the former nor the latter. — Have the boys the fifth or sixth volume? They have the fifth, but we have the sixth. — Which volume has your friend? He has the twenty-first. — Is not to-day the eleventh of this month ? The eleventh of the month? No. It is the twelfth. The twelfth! indeed !— Has the youth much money ? No. but he has our gold. — Who has cou- rage? The baker's little friend. — Have we the nails and hammers of the joiner, or those of the carpenter? We have neither those of the joiner nor of the carpenter, but those of the grocer. — Is this your copy-book? Yes, it is mine. — Is not this Miss Anne's velvet bon- net ? Yes, it is hers. — Has your clerk or mine got the good two dollar note? Mine has it not. — What has he? He has the five dollar one. — Has the minister this or that work? He has but that one. — Who has the other? Nobody has it. It has no merit. — Whom have we to-day? We have our young friends and those of the farmer. — Have the Russians (Jes Russes) pepper? They have but little pep- per, but a good deal of salt. — Have the Turks much wine ? They have not much wine, but a good deal of coffee. — Who has a good deal of milk ? The Germans have a good deal. — Have you no other gun ? I have no other. — Have we any other cheese ? We have some other. — Have I no other pistol ? You have another. FIFTEENTH LESSON, 15th.— Quinzieme Legon, 15me Vocabulary. 1st Section. The tome (volume). The last tome. Have you the first or second tome of my work ? Both, or both the one and the other. I have both. Have you their gold or silver ? I have neither (the one nor the ether). The one and the other, (plural.) Has your brother my gloves or his ? He has {both) yours and his. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Le tome. Le dernier tome. Avez-vous le premier ou le deuxieme tome de mon ouvrage ? L'un et V autre. J'ai l'unet l'autre. Avez-vous leur or ou leur argent ? Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. Les uns et les autres. Votre frere a-t-il mes gants ou les siens ? II a les uns et les autres. FIFTEENTH LESSON. 73 A-t-il les leurs ou ceux des commis ? II n'a ni les uns ni les autres. N'ont-ils ni Tun ni 1' autre ? N'ont-ils ni les uns ni les autres? lis ont l'un mais non pas l'autre. L'Ecossais. Le Hollandais. LTrlandais. Le Suisse. Encore .affirmatif ). Encore du satin. Encore de l'acier. Encore des dollars. Encore quelquea francs. Avez-vous encore du drap ? J'ai encore du drap. J'en ai encore. A-t-il encore de l'acier? II en a encore. Ai-je encore beaucoup de choses? Vous en avez encore beaucoup. Les Hollandais ont-ils encore du poi- vre? lis n' en ont pas ; mais nous en avons. Avez-vous encore assez de vinaigre et de sucre ? Nous avons assez de Tun ; mais pas assez de l'autre. Has he theirs or those of the clerks? He has neither. (Mind Dir. 1.) Have they neither ? sing.) Have they neither ? (plur.) They have the one, but not the other. The Scotchman. The Dutchman. The Irishman. The Swiss. Still, yet, some, or any more, more. Any more satin. Some more steel. Yet some dollars. A few more francs. Have you any more cloth ? I have still some cloth. I have more. Has he any more steel ? He has. Have I yet many things ? You have still many (many more). Have the Dutch any more pepper ? They have not, but we have. Have you yet vinegar and sugar enough ? We have enough of the one, but not enough of the other. N. B. — Let the pupil compose a French Exercise. Fifteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quinzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Tuesday, April .... 1849. Write the date fully in French. Which exercises have these gentlemen to-day? We have two.— Which? The fourteenth and fifteenth. — Have you many words? No, not many. — Which volume of Cuvier's great works has your brother? He has the last. — Has he not the seventh, also ? He has it not. — How many tomes has that work? It has ten. (Dir. 1.) — Have you my work o. my friend's? I have both. — Has the foreigner my comb or your knife ? He has both. — Have the Dutch the fresh bread or cheese ? They have neither the one nor the other. — Have I your penknife or my friend's ? You have neither. — Who has them ? I have. — Has the Dutchman my glass or that of this scholar? He has neither. (Dir 1.) — Has the Irishman our horses or chests? He has both. — What have those Irishmen? They have some one dol- lar notes. — Has the Scotchman our leather shoes or cotton stockings? He has neither. — What has he ? He has the iron guns of the Swiss. — What has the Swiss got? He has the Scotchman's stick. — Have the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards? They have neither. —Which ships have they? They have their own. Has our grocer any more pepper? He has some more. — Has the 7 74 FIFTEENTH LESSON. lawyer's clerk any more half dollars'? He has some more. He has yet four or five. — Has he any more jewels'? He has no jewels. — Is the Swiss warm and hungry ? No, he is neither warm nor hun- gry; but the Irishman is dry and sleepy. — Who is ashamed? No one is ashamed, but the minister is afraid of our big dog. — Is not the Scotchman right? Yes, he is, and the Russian too. — Are not the doctor and the apothecary wrong ? No, they are not wrong. — Have the Irish anything old ? They have. — Who has something ugly 1 No one has. — Have the Americans any more salt % They have, and some fresh butter, too. — Have the painters anything pretty? No, to-day they have nothing. — Have they not one pretty fan ? Oh, yes! They have still one. — How many lawyers have you? We have a great many ; we have also many (Dir. 7) physicians, minis- ters, grocers, gentlemen, apothecaries, and merchants. — Has the youth Miss Anne's shawl? He has, and he has also her velvet bonnet (§ 32), her gold pencil-case, satin bag, handkerchief, and jewels. That's right. — Is this the last journal ? No, it is that of the eleventh. Very well. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Obs. 34. More, affirmative, is encore. But with a negation, use, for : Not any more, no more. No longer C Ne . . .plus de, (avec un nom.) any — no longer any more. \ N en. . . .plus, (sans le nom.) I have no more fire, and he has no more. He has no more rice. He has no more. Have we any more fresh butter ? I have no more (no longer any). We have no more (no longer any). Has the wine merchant any more vinegar ? No, he has no longer any. We have no more of that good coffee. Have the grocers no more of it ? They have no more. I have no more. Have they no more gold nor silver? Yes, they have a little more. Not much more, not many more. Have you much more velvet ? (Dir. 7.) I have not much more. Has the boy many more toys ? He has not many more. One more inkstand. No more ink- stand. A few words. No more words. Je n'ai plus de feu, et il n'en a plua. II n'a plus de riz. II n'en a plus. Avons-nous encore du beurre frais ? Je n'en ai plus. Nous n'en avons plus. Le marchand de vin a-t-il encore du vinaigre ? Non, il n'en a plus. Nous n' avons plus de ce bon cafe. Les epiciers n'en ont-ils plus ? lis n'en ont plus. Je n'en ai plus. N'ont-ils plus ni or ni argent ? Si fait, ils en ont encore un pen. 5Ne . . . plus guere de, (avec un nom.) N'en . . . .plus guere, (sans nom.) Avez-vous encore beaucoup de ve- lours ? Je n'en ai plus guere. Le gargon a-t-il encore beaucoup de joujoux ? II n'en a plus guere. Encore un encrier. Plus d' encrier. Encore quelques mots. Plus de mots. Obs. 35. Plus oV encrier — Plus de mots, which seem to signify: more ink- FIFTEENTH LESSON. 75 ttand — more words, is, however, in French, 9 negative expression. As the verb: / have, he has, &c, is understood, so is the nc, which precedes it. ($ 171, R. 8.) One more cabbage. A few mo*e. Have you a few more dollars ? I have (a few more). Encore un chou. Encore quelques uns. Avez-vous encore quelques dollars ? J'en ai encore (quelques uns). Have I still too many sous? , Ai-je encore trop de sous ? Vous n'en avez pas trop, mais asseg. Combien d'or a-t-il encore ? II en a encore un peu. Combien en a-t-il encore ? Le dernier. Les deux, les trois der- nier s. Le baton du general et ses gants. You have not too many, but enough. How much more gold has he ? He has a little more (yet a little). How much or how many more has he? The last. The last two, three. The general's stick and gloves. ($ 32, N.3.) Fifteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Qutnzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Wednesday, April 1849. Mercredi, Avril, 1849. Have you one more exercise, Messrs. ? We have two more. — Which? The last two. — Has our cook much more fresh beef? He has not much more. — Has he many more chickens? He has not. — Has the farmer much more milk? He has not much more milk; but he has a great deal more butter. — Have the French many more horses? They have not many more. — Has our friend one more umbrella? He has no more. — Has the tailor no more buttons ? He has no more. — Has our carpenter no more nails? He has no more nails: but he has a little more wood. — Has this cook no more fire? Yes. he has a little more. — Have those Spaniards a few more half dollars? They have a few more. — Have you a few more francs? We have no more francs: but some more dollars. — Have the Swiss still vinegar enough ? They have theirs and mine. — Have they ? (Dir. 1.) Yes, they have. — Have we any of the grocer's sugar? No. we have no more. — Has the joiner wood enough? He has enough. — Has he the stranger's wood? He has it not. — Has he his iron and wooden hammers ? He has them not. — Have the sailors got their rice (§ 32). biscuits, beef, bread, and wine? They have them : but they have neither fresh butter nor cheese. How many ships has the little Russian ? These two. — Has he no more ? No, he has but two. — Is this to-day's paper ? No ; it is not. — Which journals has the lawyer? He has the last three. — What day of the month is it? It is the sixth. — How many friends have you ? I have but one good friend. — Has the farmer's horse too much grain ? He has not enough. — Has he not much money ? Yes. he has a great deal. — Has he much iron ? He has still much. — Have we the cotton 76 SIXTEENTH LESSON. or thread stockings of the Americans I We have neither their thread nor cotton stockings. — Is John cold, in the garden 1 No, he is not. — Are you very thirsty ? I am thirsty enough. — Is the Irishman too (trop) warm? Too warm'? No, indeed, he is not too warm. — Who is too warm? Nobody is too warm; but I am too hungry and sleepy. — What ails your young dog? Nothing ails him. — What ails those Dutchmen? They are afraid of the farmer's oxen and dog. (§ 32, N. 3.) — Who has my friend's book and dictionary? I have them not; but we have Edward's (Edouard) penknife, copy-book, and pencil. SIXTEENTH LESSON, 16th.— Seizieme Legon, 16me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Several. Several (of them). Several men. Several children. Several copy-books and pencils. (Dir. 2.) The father. This child. A son ... A cake. Tea. Has this gentleman several sons ? He has several. As much, as many. As much ... as, as many ... as. As much soap as sugar. As many men as children. Have you as much gold as silver ? I have as much of this as of that. I have as much of the one as of the other. Has he as many shoes as stockings ? He has as many of these as of those — as many of the one as of the other. Quite (or just) as much, as many. Quite as much ... as, as many ... as. Have I quite as much velvet as satin ? You have (quite or just as much). Quite or just as much (of it). They have just as much of this as of that. Just as many of these as of those. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Plusieurs, (no de before the noun.) En . . . plusieurs. Plusieurshommes.Plusieursenfants. Plusieurs cahiers et plusieurs cray- ons. Le pere. Cet enfant. Un fits. Un gateau. Du the. Ce Monsieur a-t-il plusieurs fils ? II en a plusieurs. Autant de, (avant un nom.) Autant de . . . que de . . . (avant ies noms.) Autant de savon que de sucre. Autant d'hommes que d'enfants. Avez-vous autant d'or que d'argent ? J'ai autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. J'ai autant de l'un que de l'autre. A-t-il autant de souliers que de bas ? II a autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. — autant des uns que des autres. Tout autant de . . . (avant un nom.) Tout autant de . . . que de (av. Ies noms). Ai-je tout autant de velours que de satin ? Vous en avez tout autant. En . . . tout autant. Us ont tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. Tout autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. SIXTEENTH LESSON. 77 Tout autant de l'un que de 1' autre. Tout autant des uns que des autres. Tout autant du cafe de l'epicier que de son sucre. Quite as much of the one as of the other. Quite as many of the one as the other. Quite as much of the grocer's coffee as sugar. $ 32, N. 3.) Sixteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Seizieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Thursday, April 1849. Jeudi, April, 1849. How many exercises have we, to-day? We have but one. — ■ Which is it? It is this. That's right. — What have you? I have several horses. — Has he several coats ? He has only one. — Who has several looking-glasses? My brother's painter has. (Dir. 1.) — ■ What looking-glasses has he ? He has pretty ones. — Who has our good cakes ? Several boys have them. — Is this your friend's child ? Yes, it is (his child). — Has he several children? Yes, he has.— Is not this his son ? No, it is not (his son). — Have you as much coffee as tea ? I have. — Has this stranger a son ? He has several. — How many sons has he ? He has four. — How many children have the minister and the physician ? Have they as many, the one as the other ? No ; the first has four, and the last six. — Indeed ! Yes, indeed. That is a great many. — Have we as much old cheese as fresh butter? You have as much of the one as of the other. — Have we as many shoes as stockings? We have. (Dir. 1.) — Have I as much good as bad paper? You have. — How many small pistols have the Swiss? They have as many small ones as large ones. — Have you as much of your wine as of mine? I have. Has the ugly cook as much fresh butter as beef? He has not (as much of the one as of the other). Has the carpenter as many sticks as nails? He has just as many of these as of those. — What has the hatter ? He has velvet and satin hats. — Has he not as many of the one as of the other? Yes. he has just as many. — Who has my books, his pencils, your copy-books, Robert's inkstand and pen- knife (j 32. N. 3). and many other things? The little scholar has. — Have you as many biscuits as cakes ? I have not as many of these as of those. — Have the Dutch as many horses as the Germans? No, they have not as many. — What has the Irishman 1 He has another note. — Has your son one more pocket-book ? He has several more. — Have you much money? We have only a little money; but enough bread, beef (repeat the prep. bef. every noun), fresh butter, cheese, and old wine. — Has this boy as much courage as our neigh- bor's son ? He has just as much. — Has the youth many notes 1 He has. — Has the merchant cloth and velvet? (§25.) He has cloth, but no more velvet. (Obs. 35.) — Have the boys your farmer's ox and horse ? They have that one, but not this. 7* 78 SIXTEENTH LESSON. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Tin ennemi, des ennemis. Le doigt. Le pouce. Plus de, (avant un nom.) Plus de pain. Plus d'hommes. Que de, (avant un nom.) Plus de pain que de vin. Plus de couteaux que de batons. Plus de celui-ci que de celui-la. Plus de l'un que de 1' autre. Plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. Plus des uns que des autres. J'ai plus de votre sucre que du mien. II a plus de nos livres que des siens. Moins de, (avant un nom.) Moins de satin que de velours. Moins de canifs que de crayons. Moins de, plus de, (av. un nombre.) J'ai plus de trois dollars. II n'a pas plus de cinq francs. lis n'en ont pas moins de dix. Plus que moi, (avant un pronom.) 1 Plus que lux. Plus que nous. Moins que vous. Moins qu'eux. Eux. Qu'eux. Autant que vous. Tout autant que lux. Autant que moi. Tout autant qu'eux. Tant de. Tant que cela. Pas tant. Pas tant que cela. lis ont six domestiques. En ont-ils tant ? Non, ils n'en ont pas tant que cela. Ils n'en ont que quatre. Sixteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Seizieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Friday, April 1849. Vendredi, Avril, 1849. Have you three exercises to-day, Mr. Charles ? No, Miss, I have not so many. — How many have you % I have got but two. — We have as many as you; but those young scholars have more than we. — Have they five or six? No, they have not so many; they Vocabulary. 2d Section. An enemy, enemies. The finger. The thumb, inch. More, (a comparative adverb.) More bread. More men. Than. More bread than wine. More knives than sticks. More of this than of that. More of the one than of the other. More of these than of those. More of the ones than of the others. I have more of your sugar than of mine. He has more of our books than of his. Less, fewer, not so much or many. Less satin than velvet (not so much . .). Fewer penknives than pencils. ) Not so many penknives as pencils. J Less than, more than, (bef. a number.) I have more than three dollars. He has not more than five francs. They have not less than ten. More than I, (bef. a pronoun.) More than he. More than we. Less than you. Less than they. They. Than they. As much as you. Just as many as he. As much as I. Quite as many as they. So much, so many. So much as that. Not so much. Not so many as that. They have six servants. Have they so many ? No, they have not so many as that. They have but four. 1 Moi, I, instead of: Je Toi, thou, " tu. : l 'Are used in French as no- minative cases, when the verb is understood or separated from the pro- (Eux, they, noun. (§ 38.) J Lui, he, instead of: il. ils. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 79 have only four. Four ? That's a great deal. — Has this lawyer more friends than enemies ? He has more enemies than friends. — Has the farmer as many sheep (moutons) as oxen ? He has just as many. — Have you as many small guns as I ? I have just as many. — Has the ugly foreigner as much courage as we ? He has less than we. — Have our neighbors as much fresh butter as cheese? They have more of the latter than of the former. — Have not your sons as many books as copy-books ? They have not so many of these as of those ; they have fewer of the latter than of the former. — How many noses has that stranger? That small man? Yes. He has but one. — How many fingers has he ? He has several. — Has he ten ? No, he has not so many. — Has he not so many ? No, he has less than ten. — How many has he ? He has but eight fingers and two thumbs. — How many thumbs and fingers has your young scholar? He? (mind the last note.) (Lui?) Yes, he. He has not more than seven fingers and one thumb. — And I ; how many have I ? You have just as many as we (nous). — Very well. Has the minister more children than the lawyer? The minister has more than he, but he. the lawyer, has more than they and we. — How many pistols have you? I have only one; but my father has more than I and they. He has five. — Has he so many, indeed? Yes, he has just as many. — John, have you more than seven dollars? No, I have less than that. I have not so many. — Have my children as much courage as yours? Yours have more than mine. — Have I as much money as you? You have less than T, but more than he. — Have you as many books as I ? I have fewer than you. I have not more than nine. — Have I as many enemies as your father? You have fewer than he; but more than they. — Have the Russians as many children as we ? We have fewer than they. — Have the French as many ships as we ? They have fewer than we. — Have the dogs more feet than the horses? No, they have just as many. — Has not your bird two feet ? Yes, it has two. — Has not this little boy more arms than feet? Yes, he has two arms ; but he has only one foot. — What is the las* < r erb of the last exercise ? It is — What is the last noun of this exercise ? It is SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 17th.— Dix-septieme Legon, 17me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. | Yocaeulaire. Ire Section OF THE INFINITIVE.— Z>e V Injinitif. There are in French four Conjugations, which are distinguished by the termination of the Present of the Infinitive, viz : — 80 SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 1. The first has its infinitive terminated in ER, as : parler, to speak, which will be the model of its regular verbs. 2. The second in IR, its model finir, to finish, to end 3. The third in OIR, " rece voir, to receive. 4. The fourth in RE, " vendre, to sell. 06s. 36. A verb, in French, is regular, when conjugated like the mode, of its conjugation. Irregular, of course, when not conjugated like it. Each verb given, hereafter, will have the number of its class. Those marked with an asterisk (*) are irregular. To buy. Acheter, l. 1 To cut, cut off. Couper, 1. To choose. Choisir, 2. To build. Batir, 2. To perceive. Apercevoir, 3. To owe. Devoir, 3. To wait for Attendre, 4. To render, restore, Rendre, 4. Fear, peur. — Shame, honte. — Time, le temps. — Courage, le courage.- Wrong, tort. — Right, raison. — A mind, a desire, a wish, envie. Obs. 37. These seven words require the preposition {de, of,) after them, when followed by an infinitive. Example.— Are you afraid to speak ? Avez- vous peur de parler ? To work. Have you a mind to work ? I have a mind to work. He has not the courage to speak. Are you afraid to speak ? I am ashamed to speak. Have they time to wait ? They have neither time nor a wish to wait. To cut it, him. To cut them. To cut some. To cut one more. Has he time to cut the bread ? He has (time to cut it). Has he a mind to cut other trees ? He has (a mind to cut others). Seventeenth Exercise. 1st Sec- Saturday April, 1849. Travailler, 1. Avez-vous envie de travailler ? J'ai envie de travailler. U n'a pas le courage de parler. Avez-vous peur de parler ? J'ai honte de parler. Ont-ils le temps d' attendre? lis n'ont ni le temps, ni envie d'at- tendre. Le couper. Les couper. En couper. En couper encore un. A-t-il le temps de couper le pain ? II a le temps de le couper. A-t-il envie de couper d'autres ar- bres? II a envie d'en couper d'autres. -Dix-septieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Samedi Avril mil huit, &c. Have you more than one exercise this morning'? We have no exercise, but we have a vocabulary. — Have you not more than one 1 Questions to be asked and answered in French, on the introduction of a verb. Of what conjugation is it ? De quelle conjugaison est-il ? Of the 1st, 2d, 3d, or 4th. De la Ire, 2de, 3me, ou 4rae. — Why ? Pourquoi ? Be- cause it ends in : er, ir, oir, or re. Parce qu J il finit en : er, ir, oir, ou re.— ■ Is it regular? Est il regulier? It is. Il Vest. — Why? Pourquoi? Be- cause it is conjugated like the model: parler , jinir , recevoir, or vendre. — Parce qu'iZ est conjugue comme le modele : parler, &c. — It is not. Il n« Vest pas. — It is not conjugated, &c. Il n J est pas conjugue, &c. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 81 vocabulary ? No, we have not. (Dir. 1.) That is not much. No, that is not much, but it is enough. — Have you still a mind to buy my friend's horse and sheep? (§ 32. N. 3.) I have still a mind to buy them : but I have no more money. — Have you time to work % I have time, but no mind to work. — Has your brother time to cut some beef or mutton? He has. — Is he afraid to cut any? He is not, but he has no mind to cut any. — Has he got no knife? (§ 26.) Yes. he has one. — Have you time to cut some cheese \ I have. — Has he a desire (a mind) to cut the cabbages ? He has. but he is ashamed to cut them. — Is the tailor of the minister wrong to cut the coarse cloth? He is not wrong in cutting it. — Who has time to cut the trees ? What trees ? The general's big trees. The farmer has time to cut them. — How many trees has he time to cut? He has only time to cut two. — Who has time to cut more than two? Nobody has. — Are the little scholar and the little boy ashamed to speak ? They are not ashamed, but afraid to speak. Am I not right in buying as many cakes as they ? Yes, you are right in buying as many cakes as they. — Is our friend right in buying that ugly old horse V No, he is wrong; but we are right in buying this pretty little dog. — Has any one a mind to speak ? You. he, John, and I, have (469 ; N. 1) a mind to speak ; but we have not courage enough. — Have you the courage to receive those gentle- men ? I have the courage and the wish to receive them. — Is he not wrong to receive that note ? He is right to receive it. Has that sailor the courage to cut off the finger and thumb of this little boy? No. he has not : but the doctor has. — Has the cloth merchant a mind to chpose a few more cloaks? He has a mind to choose a few more, out he has no more money. — Are the carpenters ashamed to build a ship % They are not ashamed to build a small one ; but the captain is afraid to build a large one. — What are they afraid to build? They are afraid to build a great many things. — Is not the lawyer of merit wrong in receiving his young friends in his garden? No, he is not wrong in receiving them in his garden ; but he is not right in choosing those old cakes and that bad wine. Vocabulary. 2d Section. To break. To mend, to repair. Casser. Of what conjugation is it ? Of the first. Why? Because it ends in : er. Is it regular ? Yes, it is. Why ? Because it is conjugated like the model : parler. To pick up. To look for, to seek. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Casser, 1. Raccommoder, 1. De quelle conjugaison e^t-il ? De la premiere. Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il finit en : er. Est-il regulier ? Oui, il Test. Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il est conjugu6 comme le modele : parler. Ramasser, 1. Chercher, 1. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. To buy, purchase. To buy one. To buy some more. To buy two. To buy one or two more. Have you a mind to buy one more horse ? I have a mind to buy two more. Am I not right to pick up that beau- tiful satin shawl ? Yes, but you are wrong to break that pretty paper fan. Is he afraid to mend this cloak ? He is not afraid to mend it. What have they a mind to look for ? They do not. wish to look for anything. Have those children the courage to wait in the garden ? They have (the courage). (Dir. 1.) Is not the young scholar wrong to sell his dictionary ? No, he is not wrong in selling it, be- cause it is an old dictionary. Has the merchant more sugar than the grocer ? He has not so much. Acheter, 1. En acheter un. En acheter encore. En acheter deux. En acheter encore un ou deux. Avez-vous envie d'acheter encore un cheval? J'ai envie d'en acheter encore deux. N'ai-je pas raison de ramasser ce beau chale de satin ? Si fait : mais vous avez tort de casser ce joli eventail de papier. A-t-il peur de raccommoder ce man- teau-ci ? II n'a pas peur de le raccommoder. Qu'ont-ils envie de chercher ? lis n'ont envie de rien chercher. Ces enfants ont-ils le courage d'at- tendre dans le jardin ? lis en ont le courage. Le jeune ecolier n'a-t-il pas tort de vendre son dictionnaire ? Non, il n'a pas tort de le vendre, par- ce que c'est un vieux dictionnaire. Le marchand a-t-il plus de sucre que l'epicier ? II n'en a pas tant. Seventeenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dix-septieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Monday, May 1849. Lundi, Mai, 1849. Have we not the two exercises of the seventeenth lesson (de la) ? Yes, we have the seventeenth lesson. — How many verbs have we in our vocabularies? We have ten. — Have we not more than ten'? Is it not enough ? Yes, it is enough. — Have we any adjectives and nouns? We have several. — Have we not many nouns and pro- nouns? We have more of the last than of the first. — Has the young sailor any more biscuits or bread? He has biscuits, but (Obs. 35) no more bread. — What has the old grocer got? He has fresh cheese, but no more rice. — Who has fresh butter? I have some yet, the physician has a little more, but the lawyer and the minister have no more. What has our tailor a mind to mend ? He has a mind to mend our old friend's (467, N. 1) coats and vests. — Has he not a mind to mend our hats and theirs? No, but the hatter has a mind to mend them. — Has the little shoemaker time to mend our old shoes? He has time, but he has no mind to mend them. — Are you afraid to look for my horse ? I am not afraid, but I have no wish to look for it. — What are the carpenters right in building? They are right in building vessels.- — Are their children afraid to pick up some nails? EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 83 They are not. — Have you a mind to break my jewel? I have a mind to pick it up, but not to break it. — Am I wrong in picking up your leather gloves? You are not wrong in picking them up; but you are wrong in cutting them. — Who has a mind to break our large looking-glass ? Our enemy has a mind to break it. — Has the lawyer more merit than the minister ? The one has no more merit than the other. — Has the big chicken more feet than this little bird ^ No, it has just as many. EIGHTEENTH LESSON, 18th.— Dix-huitieme Legon, 18me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. To make, to do, to perform. To be willing, to wish, to will. Will you ? Do you wish ? Are you willing ? Will you have ? I will, am willing, wish. I will not. Will he ? is he willing ? does he wish ? He will, is willing, wishes. He will not. We will, are willing, wish, will have. You will, are willing, wish, will have. They will, are willing, wish, wu'ZZ have. Who will (have)? Who does not wish? Nobody wishes. Some one wishes. Do you wish to have it ? Does any one wish to make my fire ? I am willing to make it. 1 do not wish to make it. Does he wish to buy your horse ? He wishes to buy it ; does he not i Is it not as I say ? Is it not so ? Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Faire,* 4. Vouloir,* 3. Voulez-vous ? Je veux. Je ne veux pas. Veut-il ? 11 veut. 11 ne veut pas. Nous voulons. Vous voulez. Vous ne voulez pas. lis veulent. Veulent-ils ? Qui veut ? Qui ne veut pas ? Personne ne veut. Quelqu'un veut. Le voulez-vous ? Quelqu'un veut-il faire mon feu ? Je veux le faire. Je ne veux pas le faire. Veut-il acheter votre cheval ? II veut 1' acheter ; n 1 est-ce pas ? + N'est-ce pas ? (Idiom.) 06s. 38. (Important.) This French : N'e*t-cepas? answers to any nega tive interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, as : 1. You are going to write, are you not ? meaning: is it not so t 2. You would write, would you not ? meaning : is it not so ? 3. They wrote, did they not ? meaning : is it not so ? 4. He has the cloth, has he not ? meaning : is it not so f 5. We were reading, were we not ? meaning : is it not so f These five negative interrogations (in the same person as the five pre- ceding affirmations and immediately connected with them) are all translated in French by : n'est-ce pas ? and so are all similar ones, in all moods, tenses, and persons. 84 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. Vous avez le Frangais de : to do, it make ? N'est-ce pas ? Oui, nous l'avons. C'est: faire. Vous avez aussi celui de : to be wil- ling : N'est-ce pas ? Nous l'avons aussi. A Aller,*l. Etre,* 4. Chez Etre chez l'homme. Aller chez I'epicier. Etre chez son ami. Aller chez leur pere. Aller ( c ^ ez mo * — c ^ ez * u *' Etre chez nous. Aller chez nous. Etre -chez vous. Aller chez vous. Eire chez eux. Aller chez eux, Etre chez quelqu'un. N'aller chez personne. A la maison. Aller a la maison. Voulez-vous attendre a la maison 1 Chez qui? Chez qui voulez-vous aller ? Je ne veux aller chez personne. You have the French of: to do, to make ? Have you not ? Yes, we have it. It is : faire. You have also that of: to be willing : have you not ? We have it also. To go. To be. To, at, or in the house of To be at the man's house. To go to the grocer's. To be in one's friend's house. To go to their father's. rp . J my house — his house. To be at, to go to, our house. To be in, to go to, your house. To be at, to go to, their house. To be at some one's house. To go to no one's house. At home. To go home. Will you wait at home ? At, in, or to whose house ? To whose house do you wish to go ? I do not wish to go to any one's. Eighteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dix-huitieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Tuesday, May 1849. Mardi, Mai, 1849. Have you a mind to work? Yes, I have. — What will you do? I wish to do an exercise. — Which ? This one. Very well. — Does the little son of the general wish to break that big stick? No, he does not wish to break it. — Are you willing to look for my son ? I am (willing, &c). (Dir. 1.) — What do you wish to pick up? I wish to pick up the shawl, hat, and gloves, of Miss Clara. — You wish to pick up that dollar, do you not? Yes, I wish to pick it up. — Will you pick up that old pencil ? No, I will not. — Do you wish to go to that man's house ? No, I wish to go to the ministers. — You wish to go to the physician's, do you not? No, I do not wish to go to the physician's, but to the lawyer's and grocer's. — W T ho wishes to go to the doctor's? Nobody wishes to go to his house. — Does our neigh- bor wish to buy these or those combs ? {mind the French construc- tion.) He wishes to buy them. — Does that farmer wish to cut your tree 2 He does not wish to cut mine, but his own. — Which ? The big tree. — What does the shoemaker wish to mend ? He wishes to mend our old shoes. — Does the tailor wish to mend anything? He wishes to mend ($ 25) waistcoats. — He wishes to mend their coats, does he not f He does not. — Do the Swiss wish to wait for your son 1 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 86 They do. — What do they wish to choose ? They wish to choose some coarse cloth. — And their children, what do they wish to choose ? They wish to choose some fine handkerchiefs. — Who has any ? The dry goods merchants have. — Do they wish to sell them ? Yes, indeed ! Is Charles willing to wait for the lawyer's son ? No, he is not. — Robert will wait for him ; will he not ? He ! No, he will not. — Who will do it? Nobody will do it. — Are the Scotchmen willing to wait for the minister at your father's or at the doctor's'? They will wait for him neither at my father's nor at the doctor's, but at the book- seller's. — Am I wrong to go to the hatter's ? No. you are not wrong to go to his house. — At whose house is their father? He is at his friend's, the apothecary. — To whose house do your sons wish to go? They? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. — Will you go to my house ? I will not go to yours, but to my brother's. — Does not this little child wish to go to the cake shop (chez le mar- chand de gateaux)? Yes, indeed, he does. (Dir. 1.) — Why? Be- cause he has two sous, and he wishes to buy two cakes. — Will not your children buy some cakes, too ? No, they do not wish to buy any; they are not hungry. — Have you the French of: a quarter of a dollar? No, I have it not. Do you wish to have it? Yes, Sir. It is : un quart de dollar. — Have you two quarters of a dollar ? I have two. — How many quarters has he ? He has several quarters. — Has Charles his brother's pretty little stick and playthings? (467, N. 1.) He has his pretty little stick, but not his toys. — The general's and doctor's horses are hungry; are they not? No \ but the cook's birds and chickens (§ 140, Art. 2,) are thirsty. Vocabulary. 2d Section. To burn. To warm. To tear. To put, put on. The broth. My linen clothes. Beautiful, superb. Will you put on this satin vest ? I will put it on ; it is beautiful. At whose house is your brother ? \ He is at ours, in ours. Is he at home ? at his house ? He is not at home — in his house. He is at or in yours. Who is at or in theirs ? — at mine ? Nobody is at theirs ; yours ; mine. Are you ? I am. Tired, fatigued. Are ycu, tired ? 8 Vocabulaire. 2de Section Briiler, 1. Chauffer, 1. Dechirer. Mettre*4, (17 1 , N. 1). Le bouillon. Mon linge, (singular.) Superbe. Voulez-vous mettre ce gilet de satin ? Je veux le mettre ; il est superbe. Chez qui est votre frere ? Chez qui votre frere est-il? II est chez nous. Est-il a la maison ? Est-il chez lui f II n'est pas a la maison — chez lui. II est chez vous. Qui est chez eux ? — chez moi ? Personne n'est chez eux ; vous ; moi. Etes-vous ? Je suis. Fatigue. Etes-vous fatigue ? 86 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. Je suis fatigue. Je ne suis pas fatigue*. Je suis un peu fatigue — tres-fatigue. Est-il. II est. II n'est pas. Occupe. II est occupe; n'est-cepas? Sommes-nous? Nous nesommes pas. Sont-ils? lis sont. lis ne sont paa. Sont-ils occupes ? Oui, ils sont oc- cupes. ($ 137.) II est occupe et nous sommes fatigues. Boire* 4. Boire encore un peu. Ou ? Ou voulez-vous aller ? Que voulez-vous faire ? Votre frere que veut-il faire ? Votre frere est-il a la maison ? Les Suisses que veulent-ils boire ? Ils veulent boire du bouillon. Ils veulent boire quelque chose de bon. Ils ne veulent rien boire. Veulent-ils dechirer ce vieux papier ? Ils ne veulent pas le dechirer, mais le bruler. Tout. Est-ce tout ? C'est tout. I am tired. I am not tired. I am a little tired. Very tired. Is he ? He is. He is not. Busy . . . He is busy ; is he not ? Are we ? We are not. Are they ? They are. They are not. Are they busy ? Yes, they are. He is busy, and we are tired. To drink. To drink a little more. Where ? Where do you wish to go ? What do you wish to do ? What does your brother wish to do ? Is your father at home ? What will the Swiss drink ? They wish to drink some broth. They wish to drink something good. They do not wish to drink anything. Do they wish to tear this old paper ? They do not wish to tear, but to burn it. All. Is it, is this, is that all ? It is. Eighteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dix-huttieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Wednesday, May 1849. Mercredi, Mai, 1849. You have the 18th exercise to-day, have you not? No, we have only the 18th vocabulary. — Have you but the vocabulary? Yes, indeed, that's all. Very well. — Miss Caroline, will you put on this or that hat ? I will put on neither this nor that ; but the other. — Which? This ugly old hat {vieux vilain) ? This ugly old hat! It is superb. Superb! indeed. — Will you not put your velvet shawl on? Yes; I will put it on, because I am cold. — Has the young painter any fire? He has. — Does he wish to burn anything? Yes, he has a mind to burn these old papers. — What will you tear? I will tear this coarse handkerchief. — Who is busy ? I am busy. — Who is tired ? I am not tired. — Who is good ? The grocer's little son. — Are you busy, very busy? I am very busy. — Are you not tired ? Yes, I am a little tired. — What does the cook wish to warm ? He wishes to warm our tea, and our father's coffee. — Is that all ? Yes, that is all. — Do you wish to warm my brother's broth and coffee ? I am willing to warm this, but not that. — Is the farmer wil- ling to put some wood in the fire ? Yes, he is. — Will they put any grain in the bag ? No, they do not wish to put any in the bag, but in the granary: that's all. Is not the grocer's clerk willing f;o put your rice in his bag ? Yes, he is willing to put it in his bag. — Am I not right in warming your broth? NINETEENTH LESSON. 87 Yes, you are. — Is not the merchant wrong in tearing the satin ? Yes, he is. — Have we time to go in the garden ? No, we have not time. — What does Charles wish to tear? He does not wish to tear any- thing; but we andAhey (467. N. 1.) wish to (nous voulons) tear the cotton bags. — Is he afraid to tear your coat ? He is not; but to burn it. — What are you willing to put on ? I am willing to put on my coat, (Dir. 2,) vest, shoes, stockings, and gloves: that's all. Very well; that's enough. — Are you tired? I am not tired. — Who is tired ? My brother is tired. — Has the Spaniard a mind to buy as many horses as oxen ? No ; but he has a mind to buy as many birds as you and I. — Do you wish to drink anything? I do not. — How many chickens have you at home ? We have four ; that's all. — Where is your father ? At his friend's house. — Is the physician at the lawyer's ? No ; but the minister is at the lawyer's. — Do the strangers wish to go to the American's or to the Dutchman's? They wish to go neither to the American's nor to the Dutchman's ? — Where do they wish to go? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. — Where are your little friends, Robert and John ? They are at their father's. — That's all. — Is your friend's brother's horse sick? (§ 140, Art. 3.) No, it is not sick. NINETEENTH LESSON, 19th, Vocabulary. 1st Section. Are you going ? do you go ? I am going. I go. I am not going. Are you going to choose a book ? I am going to choose a book. I am not yet going to choose any. I am not going to choose anything. Are you going home ? I am (going there). To it, at it, in it, there, thither. To go thither. To be there. It to it, it in it, him, there, or thither. To take, to carry. To send. To take, to lead, to conduct — him there. To take you there. To take us there. To carry it there. To send him there. To commence, to begin. To proceed. Them, there, or thither. Some of it, there, or thither. To carry them thither. . — Dix-neuvieme Legon, 19me. Vocabulaike. Ire Section. Allez-vous ? Je vais. Je ne vais pas. Allez-vous choisir un livre ? Je vais choisir un livre. Je ne vais pas encore en choisir. Je ne vais rien choisir. Allez-vous chez vous? J'y vais. F, (avant le verbe.) (§ 47.) Yaller,*l. Y etre,* 4. L'y, (avant le verbe.) (§ 57.) Porter, 1. Envoyer,* 1. Mener, 1. L'y mener. Vous y mener. Nous y mener. L'y porter. L'y envoyer. Commencer, 1. Continuer, 1, Les y, (av. le verbe. ^ ($ 57.) Y en, (av. le verbe.) ($ 60.) Les y porter. 88 NINETEENTH LESSON. Y en porter. Voulez-vous l'envoyer chez mon pere? Je vais 1 l'y envoy er. Je ne vais pas#ncore l'y envoyer. Obs. 39. The adverb y always stands before the verb. When there is a pronoun like le, it, him, les, them ; that pronoun stands immediately before the adverb y ; but en, some of it, stands after the y, as may be seen above. To carry some there or thither. Will you send him to my father's ? I am going to send him there. I am not yet going to send him there to my house ? To come. To come to it, thither Are you going to come Will you come {meaning) Are you coming I am coming (going to come) there. When ? To-morrow. To-morrow morning. With. With pleasure. At first, in the first place. Afterwards. What are you going to do first ? First, I am going to the grocer's, and then to the apothecary's. With me — with him— with them — nobody. To study. To recite. Venir,* 2. Allez-vous venir chez moi ? Je vais y venir. Quand ? Demain. Demain matin. Avec. Avec plaisir. D'abord. Ensuite. Qu' allez-vous faire d'abord ? D'abord, je vais chez 1'epicier, et en- suite chez l'apothicaire. Avec moi — avec lui — aveceux — avec personne. iStudier, 1. Reciter, 1. Nineteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dix-neuvieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Thursday, May 1849. Jeudi, Mai, 1849. Have you an exercise or a vocabulary , to-day? We have both. — Are you going to recite the vocabulary first ? Yes, with pleasure ; and then the exercise : will we not ? (won't we ?) — Very well. — Will you begin, Mr. Charlemagne ? Yes, Sir, with pleasure. — What is the French of: I am going? It is — Is it right? Yes, or no {according to the answer). — Do you wish to go home ? I do. (Dir. 1.) — Does your son wish to go with you? He does. — Is your brother at home ? He is. — Where are you going, Mr. Charles ? I am going to the minister's. — Do your children wish to come with me ? They do not (wish to go with you). — To whose house are you going to send this note? I am not going to send it, but I am going to carry (take) it to the general's. — Will your servant take my note to the American's house? He has no time to take it there; but little Henry will take it there. — Will those children take the stranger to the Russian's? They will take him there. — Are you not going to take the painter to the physician's? No, but I am going to send him there. — Is the painter willing to begin that picture, to-day? No, he does not wish to commence it before to-morrow. — To-mor- When the will is not particularly referred to, use vais, instead of mux. NINETEENTH LESSON. row morning? (demain matin?) Yes, to-morrow morning. — What are you going to study first, to-morrow morning? To study? I am not going to study anything. — Are you not going to study the 19th vocabulary ? I am going to study it to-day. Where will the son of my friend take the Swiss-s large dog? — He will not take the Swiss's large dog, but the Scotchman : s pretty little horse. — Where will he take him? He will take him to the cook's house. — When will he take him there ? This evening or to-morrow morning? Neither this evening nor to-morrow, but to-day. — When are you coming to my house ? First, this morning ■ and afterwards, to-morrow. — Will you proceed ? I have no time to proceed, but Carnot has. — Will he proceed? Yes, he will. — Will the shoemaker take the boy's shoes home, to their house? No. he will not, because he is afraid of their bad dog. — That old man is hungry and thirsty ; is he not ? This one is neither hungry nor thirsty, but that one is. — We will first go to the Englishman's, and afterwards to the Italian's; won't we? Yes, we will; but the Dutch will not. — Will your son begin Thiers's work, to-morrow ? No, because he has not yet got it, and because he is going to recite the last vocabulary. — Has he not got it yet ? No, he has not. — Have you it ? Yes, I have it. — When do the Germans wish to go in the farmer's garden ? To- morrow? No, they do not yet wish to go thither (or in it). — Is the doctor very busy? Yes, he is very busy and very tired, this eve- ning. — Are you going to put those trees in your son's garden ? I am ) m but not this evening, because I am too tired and too busy. — What is the student going to drink ? He is first going to drink some coffee and milk, and afterwards some wine. Nineteenth Vocab., 2d Sec. — Dix-neuvieme Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Somewhere, anywhere. Are you going anywhere ? Nowhere, not anywhere (§ 151). I am not going anywhere (nowhere). To write. To write them. Some. To translate. To correct. To read. To copy. Will you read the last vocabulary ? Does he not wish to copy anything ? Will they translate this or that ex- ercise ? Will you not correct it ? Yes, I will. Is he going, does he go ? He goes, is going.) He is not going. Who is going ? Nobody goes, (is going. 8* Quelque part, ^not used with a nega- tion.) Allez-vous quelque part ? Ne . . . nulle part. Je ne vais nulle part. Ecrire,* 4. Les ecrire. En ecrire. Traduire,* 4. Corriger, 1. Lire,* 4. Copier, 1. Voulez-vous lire le dernier vocabu- laire ? Ne veut-il rien copier ? Veulent-ils traduire cet exercice-ci ou celui-la? (§37.) Ne voulez-vous pas le corriger ? Si fait. Va-t-il? (Obs. 15.) II va. II ne va pas. Qui va ? Personne ne va. 90 NINETEENTH LESSON. Is he going to read, translate, and write ? He is going neither to read, translate, nor write. What is he going to do ? He is not going to do anything. Is the teacher going to correct an- other of our exercises ? He is (going to do it). Is he coming going to come) to the teacher's or to the minister's? He is coming neither to this one's house nor to the other's. The teacher, master. French teacher. This professor. Our professor of English. At what o'clock ? At one o'clock. At two o'clock. Half. The or a quarter. At half past one. At a quarter past one. At a quarter past two. At a quarter to (or of, or before) three. At twelve, noon. Half past twelve. At twelve at night, or midnight. Less. Now, at present. Not now. Ready. Are we ready ? I am ready. Ready to. They are ready to go. In a quarter of an hour. an hour. Before half Va-t-il lire, traduire, et ecrire? PI ne va ni lire, ni traduire, ni ecrire. Que va-t-il faire ? II ne va rien faire. Le maitre va-t-il corriger un autre de nos exercices ? II va le faire. Va-t-il venir chez le maitre ou chez le ministre I 1 II ne va venir ni chez Tun ni chez l'autre. Le maitre. Le maitre de Francais. Ce professeur. Notre professeur d' Anglais. A quelle heure ? 2 A une heure. A deux heures. Demi. Le ou un quart. A une heure et demie. 3 A une heure et quart (or et un quart). A deux heures un quart. (Mind the s.) A trois heures moins un quart. A midi. Midi et demi. A minuit. A minuit et un quart. Moins, (comparative of pen, little.) A present. Pas a present. Pret. Prets. (plur.) Sommes-nous prets ? Je suis pret. Pret a — prets a. lis sont prets a aller. Dans un quart d'heure. Avant de- mi-heure. Dix-neuviJime Exerctce. 2de Section. Friday, May 1849. Vendredi, Mai, 1849. Gentlemen, what are you going to do, to-day? Recite the voca- bulary, translate and correct our exercises. — Very well. Will you 1 Va-t-il ve?iir? literally, is lie going to come? Allez-vous venir? &c, are awkward expressions in English, but much used in French, and philosophi- cally so. He is writing, is never used in English for : he is going to write. Why should he is coming be substituted for : he is going to come ? [Ditto of: Sortir, to go or come out, &-c] 2 Heure, hour, is a feminine noun. This class of nouns will be spoken of hereafter. For the present, the learner has only to write them as he sees them written in the lessons. 3 The adjective demie is here in the feminine gender, agreeing with the feminine noun heure. But when this adjective precedes the noun, it does not agree with it in gender and number, as : une demi-keure, half an hour. NINETEENTH LESSOV. 91 begin, Sir? With much pleasure. — What is the French of: some- where ? It is is it not? Yes, or no (as the case may require). Have you the French of: is he going? Yes, we have. — What is it? (quel est-il ?) It is it is right; is it not? Yes, or no. — Is the youth going, in a quarter of an hour, to the Scotchman's or to the Irishman's? He is going neither to the one's nor to the other's house 5 but I am going to take (conduct) him to the young Dutch- man's. — When are you going to take him there? Now. — Is he ready? No, he is not yet ready. — Very well; I will wait for him. (Je vais.) — Do you go to the physician's this evening? No, I do not. — Do you go anywhere? — I go somewhere at seven o'clock. — Will their children go anywhere, in half an hour ? No, they will go nowhere, because they are tired and busy. — Do you wish to go anywhere ? I do not wish to go anywhere,- but my brother's friends have a mind to go to the Englishman's. — Where is the Englishman now ? He is at home. — Are his sons at home ? They are there now. — Are you ready to write and translate ? I am ready to trans- late, but not to write. I have no pencil. — Has the cook any more butter ? No, he has no more : but he is going to buy some.— Where is he going to buy any? He is going to buy some at the milk- man's. — Has he much? He has but little now; but he is going to make some this evening. — At what o'clock? At eight. When will you go with me to the bookseller's? At six o'clock. — I am busy at six o'clock. — Will you go at seven ? No, not before eight or half past eight. — Very well. — When are you coming (going to come) to my house? To-day at noon? Not at twelve, but at half past twelve. — With whom are you coming? With nobody. — [s not the student going to study first, and to recite afterwards ? Yes, he will (va) study first, and recite afterwards. — Is he ready to com- mence ? No, not yet. — Why is he not yet ready ? Because he has but little time, not much time. — Who is going to correct our exer- cises ? The old professor is. — What is the young teacher going to do ? He is going to put on his hat and gloves, and go to his father's. Will you read, translate, and copy your French Tvxth us to-day? 1 am afraid 10 do it. — Are you ashamed also ? No, I am not ashamed ; I am only afraid. — Who has time and courage to copy those two exercises? These, or those? Those. — This little scholar has time, courage, and a desire to copy them. — When will the clerk go to the lawyer's and to the teacher's, to copy something? He will go there first to-day, and then to-morrow also. — Does the grocer wish to buy as many bags of coffee as of rice ? He is going to buy more of the former than of the latter. — We have biscuits; but have we enough? We have not too many. — How many more bags have we? We 02 NINETEENTH LESSON. have yet six. — Have we but six? Have we not eight? Yes, we have eight: and the baker is going to send another. — At what o'clock ? At a quarter to six or at a quarter to seven. — Very well TWENTIETH LESSON, 20th.— Vingtieme Legon, 20rae. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To, in order to, for the purpose of. \ Pour, (avant un infinitif.) Obs. 40. In English, all prepositions {to, excepted) are usually followed by the present participle, as: of coming, without having, &c. In French, all prepositions are followed by the infinitive mood, except en (in), which is followed by the present participle. {Mind this Obs. Rul. 1.) To see. In order to see him. Have you money to buy (or, for the purpose of buying) bread ? I have some to buy some. Are you going to your brother's to (in order to) see him ? I have no time to go there to see him. Has your servant a knife to cut the cheese ? He has none to cut it. To be able, (can.) Can you ? Are you able ? I can. I am able. I cannot. I am not able (unable). Can you read ? Are you able to write ? I can read and write. (Rul. 2.) I can neither read nor write. To sweep. To kill. To salt. To sweeten. Can I ? may I ? Vml able ? Obs. 41. Peux-je? Ne peux-je pas ? are not used interrogatively: say, therefore : Puis-je? Can I? Ne puis -je pas ? Can I not? (of which here- after. Lesson 28th.) Voir,* 3. Pour le voir. Avez-vous de 1' argent pour acheter du pain ? J'en ai pour en acheter. Allez-vous chez votre frere pour le voir? Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller pour le voir. Votre domestique a-t-il un couteau pour couper le fromage ? II n'en a pas pour le couper. Pouvoir* 3. Pouvez-vous ? Je peux (ou je puis). Je ne peux pas (ouje ne puis). Pouvez-vous lire ? Pouvez-vous ecrire ? Je peux lire et ecrire (ouje puis). Je ne puis ni lire ni ecrire. Balayer, 1. Tuer, 1. Saler, 1. Sucrer, 1. Puis-je ? (never peux-je ?) May I or can I see that picture ? You can, or may. You cannot. Can he ? may he ? Can he not ? He can, or may. He is not able. Can we, may we ? Can we not ? We can, are able. We cannot. Can we see the vessels ? Puis-je voir ce tableau-la ? Vous pouvez. Vous ne pouvez pas. Peut-il ? Ne peut-il pas ? 11 peut. II ne peut pas. Pouvons-nous ? Ne pouvons-nous pas ? Nous pouvons. Nousne pouvons pas. Pouvons-nous voir les vaisseaux ? TWENTIETH LESSON. Are we going ? Do we go ? We do. Do we go there ? We do. We are not going. We are not going to it. Are we going to kill the ox ? To try. Allons-nous ? Nous allons. Y allons-nous ? Nous y allons. Nous n' allons pas. Nous n'y allons pas. Allons-nous tuer le bceuf ? Essayer. Twentieth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Saturday, May, 1849. Samedi, Mai, 1849. Are we going to recite our lesson now ? Not now. Mr. V. is not ready. — Where is he? He is at his friend's. — Is he coming (going to come) ? Yes, he is coming. — Very well. — Can you translate to- day's exercise ? We can translate it. — At what o'clock can we com- mence ? We can commence in a quarter of an hour. — Can you, gentlemen, read and correct these exercises? We can commence, and you can continue (or proceed). — Can you cut the bread with the knives that you have ? We are going to try. — Can you mend my gloves ? You may mend them. We are going to look for some thread to mend those of the young professor. — Are you going to the tailor's to look for the old vests? We are not going there to look for them. We have neither the time nor the wish to do it. — Can you put those shoes on? We are going to try them. — Will you try our scissors? No, thank you, I have mine, and mine are very good (are sharp). — Can the tailor make a coat to-day? No, he cannot make any. — Have we glasses to drink our wine ? We have glasses to drink it : but have we any wine ? We can send the servant to buy some. — Can you drink as much coffee as tea? We can drink more tea than coffee, can we not? — Have you any sugar to sweeten the coffee ? I have some to sweeten the coffee, but not the tea. — Has not the young man time to see my brothers child ? Yes, he has time to see him. — Where is he ? He is in the garden. — No, not in the garden, but in the large and beau- tiful vessel of the big captain. How much money have you with 3 r ou? I have a good deal. — Have you a hundred dollars ? I have more than that. More than a hundred dollars? Why have you so much? Because I have a mind to buy a horse. Which one? The general's? Will he sell his ? He will. It is not that (which) I wish to buy ; but the farmer's young horse. — Are we going to take any cakes home ? We are not going to take any. — Can we not take some? No, we cannot. — Can- not the cake-merchant send them to our house? Yes, he can send them there in half an hour. That will do. (C'est bon.)— Will the Swiss send his son to the painter's? No, not to the painter's, but to the bookseller's. — Will he send him there now ? No, he is not going 94 TWENTIETH LESSON. to send him there now, but to-morrow. — Is not to-morrow Saturday? No, it is Sunday. — What day of the month is it? It is the 18th. The 18th, indeed ? — Who is going to read and copy the last vocabu- lary 1 Nobody is. — Is not Mr. Lenoir wrong in going to Mrs. Ver- dier's house ? Yes, he is wrong to go there ; but he will go. — Are you going to put on but one glove? No, because I have but one. Is the servant going to buy a broom to sweep the store (magasin) ? No, he is afraid to sweep it. — Why is he afraid to sweep it ? Be- cause the big dog is there (in it). — Who can sweep it? Little Robert can. — Has he a broom to sweep it? He has a broom to sweep it. — Has the cook sugar enough to sweeten the cakes? He has enough to sweeten them • but he has no more salt to salt the broth, nor the beef. — Is he not going to salt them? Yes, he is; because he is going to the merchant's to buy some salt to salt them. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. To, at, in. 1. To the. 2. To the. I A. 1. AT. 2. Au, aux. Obs. 42. A 1' is used before a vowel or silent h, in the sing. (Obs. 5.) Au (the contraction of: d le, § 9), is used before consonants. Aux (contraction of: d les, § 9), is the plural, before all letters. To the friend. To the man. To the captain. To the penknife. The basket. This carpet. His floor. My cat. To mine. To yours. To him, to her Tome. To the friends. To the men. To the captains. To the penknives. To the basket. To this carpet. To his floors. To my cat. To mine (plur). To ours (plur). indirect object.) To us. To you. To them. Are they able? Can they? May they? They can. They cannot. Cannot these men work ? What can your children do ? To speak to me. To speak to him, (to her.) To write to him, (to her.) To me. To speak to the general and to his friend. To send the grocer a dollar. ($ 51£.) To give, give away. To lend. A l'ami. A l'homme. Au capitaine. Au canif. Le panier. Ce tapis-ci. Son plancher. Mon chat. Au mien. Au votres. Aux amis. Aux hommes. Aux capitaines. Aux canifs. Au panier. A ce tapis-ci. A ses planchers. A mon chat. Aux miens. Aux notres. Lui, (regime indirect av. le verbe.) Me, (regime indirect av. le verbe. $47, &c.) Nous. Vous. Leur. Peuvent-ils ? lis peuvent. lis ne peuvent pas. Ces hommes ne peuvent-ils pas tra- vailler ? Vos enfants que peuvent-ils faire ? Me parler. Peuvent-ils me parler ? Lui parler. lis peuvent lui parler. Lui ecrire. M'ecrire. Parler au general et a son ami Envoyer un dollar a l'epicier. Donner. Preter. TWENTIETH LESSON. 95 To give you — them — us. (§45.) To lend a friend some money. (§ 51 i) Can you write to me ? They can write to you. Can the clerk speak to you ? He cannot speak to us now. Can they not write to your brother ? Yes, they can write to him. Vous donner. Leur donner. Nous donner. Preter de l'argent a un ami. Pouvez-vous m'ecrire ? lis peuvent vous ecrire. Le commis peut-il vous parler ? II ne peut pas nous parler a present. Ne peuvent-ils pas ecrire a votre frere ? Si fait ; ils peuvent lui ecrire. Twentieth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Monday, June 1849. Lundi, Juin, 1849. At what o'clock are you going to recite, to-day ? My brothers cannot recite before twelve o'clock. — Can they not recite at ten ? No, they cannot. — Will you take your big basket to my house? I will not take my basket there, but to the general's. — When ? Now ? No, I will take the basket there to-morrow. — Do your sons wish to take mine to the physician's'? No, they cannot take it there. — Why can they not? Because they have not time enough. — Is the farmer going to kill anything 1 He is going to kill his big ox. — Is he going to kill it now % Yes, he is. — Can they write to me ? They cannot write to you. — Can they speak to you ? They can speak to us. — Can they not wait for their friends? Yes, they can. — Can they not burn as much coal as wood ? No, they cannot burn so much of the former as of the latter. — Have we more friends than the Dutch ? We have more than they. — Has the grocer less coffee than tea ? He has less tea than coffee : but we have more of that than of this. — Who has a cat? The sailors have a cat. — Where is their cat? Their cat is in a small basket of wood. — Can the little servant sweep the carpet? He can. — Can he sweep the garret floor? Yes, he can do it. — Will you lend him a broom to sweep that floor? We cannot lend any to sweep the floor, but we can lend one to sweep the carpet. — Who is going to write to the merchant and to the grocer? The clerks can write to them. Is the professor of English going to write a book? Yes, he is going to write one. He can write a good one; can he not? Yes, he can. He is a man of merit. (§ 39, N. 3.) — Are we not going to Pratt's garden to-night? No, we are not going there to-night, but to-morrow, at nine or ten o'clock. — Will you give a dictionary to your son? Yes, I will give him a good dictionary. — Will they end me their horse ? They cannot lend you their horse, because the old minister has it. — Are we going to lend the lawyer (§ 51 4) anything ? We are going to lend the physician something. — Are 96 TWENTIETH LESSON. you not going to lend many things'? Yes, we are going to lend many things. — What are we going to lend ? We are going to lend, first ; handkerchiefs, shawls, and hats ; and afterwards cloaks, bags, and parasols, to the friends of the lawyer. — Why? Because they have none. You are very good. — Who is busy? The grocer and his clerk, the doctor and his neighbor the minister, the captain and his son, are busy. — Are you not busy, also 1 Yes, we are busy, but not very busy. — Are you ready to go to the garden of the Scotch- man ? I am ready to go, but Charles is not. — Why is he not ready? He is going to the grocer's to buy some good salt. — Is he going to buy much ? He is. — What does he wish to do ? He will salt the beef and the mutton which we have. — Cannot the servants salt them ? No, they cannot, or they will not. Vocabulary. 3d Section. Are they going ? Do they not go ? They are going, or they are. They go, They do not. To the museum. To the wharf. Are they going to the museum ? No, they are going to the wharf. Are the carpenters going to the ship ? They go there to work. They go neither to the wharf, nor the museum. Are they going to see anybody ? They are not going to see anybody. What are they going to do ? They are not going to do anything. Where are they going ? They go nowhere. Do they wish to send the good book to the man ? They are going to send it to him. When are they going to send it to him? They are going to give it to him to- morrow. Can they lend you the old diction- ary ? They can (lend it to me) on Thursday. Cannot your friend lend you one be- fore Thursday ? No, he cannot (lend me one) before Friday or Saturday. Vocabulaire. 3me Section. Vont-ils ? Ne vont-ils pas ? lis vont. lis ne vont pas. Au musee. Au quai. Vont-ils au musee ? Non, ils vont au quai. Les charpentiers vont-ils au bati-^ ment ? Ils y vont pour y travaiiler. Ils ne vont ni au quai, ni au musee. Vont-ils voir quelqu'un? Ils ne vont voir personne. Que vont-ils faire ? Ils ne vont rien faire. Oii vont-ils ? Ils ne vont nulle part. Veulent-ils envoyer le bon livre d Vhommel Ils vont le lui envoyer. Quand vont-ils le lui envoyer ? Ils vont le lui donner demain. Peuvent-ils vous prater le vieux dictionnaire ? Ils peuvent me le preter, jeudi. Votre ami ne peut-il pas vous en preter un avant jeudi ? Non, il ne peut pas m'en preter un avant vendredi ou samedi. For the order in which objective personal pronouns must be invariably connected in sentences, before the verb, ( $ 57), and with the partitive pro noun en ($ 59 and $ 60). TWENTIETH LESSON. 97 Are they going to give me some sugar? They will give you some. Can he lend some money to my brother ? Can he lend my brother any money? iDir. 4, § 51£.) He cannot lend him any. Will they lend us some ? They will not lend you any, but they can lend some to them. Are they going to give me the book ? They are not going to give it to you, but to lend it to you. Are you not going to send it to us ? I am not going to send it to you. Are you going to send it to them ? We are going to send it to them. Will you send the cabbages to the cook ? We will send them to him (to her). Who is going to give the jewels to us ? Our good friends are going to give them to us. Am I going to give them to them ? Can he not lend them to you ? Vont-ils me donner du sucre ? lis vont vous en donner. Peut-il preter de 1' argent a mon frere ? II ne peut pas lux en preter. Veulent-ils nous en preter ? lis ne veulent pas vous en preter, mais ils peuvent leur en preter. Vont-ils me donner le livre ? Ils ne vont pas vous le donner, mais vous le preter. N'allez-vous pas nous Z'envoyer ? Je ne vais pas vous Z'envoyer. Allez-vous le leur envoyer ? Nous allons le leur envoyer. Voulez-vous envoyer les choux au cuisinier ? Nous voulons les lui envoyer. Qui va nous donner les bijoux ? Nos bons amis vont nous les donner. Vais-je les leur donner ? Ne peut-il pas vous les preter ? Twentieth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. 3me Sec. Tuesday, June, 1849. Mardi, Juin, 1849. Who is going to recite to-day? We are going to recite. — Can you copy the vocabulary ? We cannot copy it ; we have not time to copy it; but we can translate it. — Will you try? With pleasure. — Is a le the French of: to the? No, Sir, au is the French of: to the. Very well, that is right. — Can you give me the French of: to the museum? We can give it: it is is it not? (Yes, or no, as the case mt;y be.) — And that of: to the baskets? — Have you that of: Are they going to see any one? Yes, we have. — W T hat is it? It is Is it right ? Yes ; or no — Who is going to the wharf? To which wharf? To Girard wharf (au quai Girard). Our merchant is going there to see his ship. — To see what? His ship. — Is his ship at the wharf? It is there. — Has he many sailors? He has more than ten. — More than what? More than ten. — How many has he ? He has twelve or thirteen. — Has he so many ? Yes, he has. Can you cut me some bread ? I can cut you some. — Have you a knife to cut me some? I have one. — Can you mend my gloves? I can mend them, but I have no wish to do it. Can the tailor make me a coat ? He can make you one. — Will you speak to the physi- cian ? I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to see me in order 9 9o TWENTIETH LESSON. to speak to me ? He wishes to see you in order to give you a dol- lar. — Does he wish to kill me ? He does not wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — Does the son of our old farmer wish to kill an ox ? He wishes to kill two. Who has a mind to kill our cat? Our neighbor's bad boy has a mind to kill it. — How much money can you send me ? I can send you twenty francs. — Will you send me my carpet ? I will send it to you. — Will you send the shoemaker anything? (quelque chose au cordonnier ?) I will send him my shoes. — Will you send him your coats'? No ; I will send them to the tailor. — Can the tailor send me my cloak ? He cannot send it you. — Are your children able to write to me ? They are able to write to you. — Will you lend me your basket? I will lend it you. Have you a glass to drink your wine ? I have one, but I have no wine ; I have only tea. — Will you give me money to buy some ? I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you give me that which you have with you? I will give it you. — Can you drink as much wine as milk ? I can drink as much of the one as of the other. — Has our neighbor any wood to make a fire? (dufeu?) He has some to make one, (pour en f aire,) but he has no money to buy bread and butter. — Are you willing to lend him some ? I am willing to lend him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? I wish to speak to him. — Where is he? He is at. the museum. Very well, I am going to see him and speak to him. Recapitulatory Exercise. Resume. L'adolescent va-t-il venir aujourd'hui? V adolescent va venir pour nous apporter de Pacier et du fer. — Qu ; allons-nous acheter ? Nous n'allons rien acheter que du velours. — N'ai-je pas un bon ami allemand ? Vous n'avez pas d'ami allemand ; mais vous en avez un suisse. — Les marchands de nouveautes n ; ont-ils pas de chales, de rubans, de gants, de bas ; de velours, de drap ? Si fait, ils ont de tout cela; et c 7 est ce que nous allons acheter. — Chez qui allez-vous acheter tout cela? Quelque chose chez celui-ci; quelque autre chose, chez celui-la. — Qui va acheter des livres ? Ces deux ecoliers vont en acheter. — Le ministre et l'avocat ne vont-ils pas en acheter quelques uns aussi? Si fait; mais il ne vont pas en acheter beau- coup. — Chez qui vont-ils les acheter? Chez Appleton. — Le petit garcon de Pepicier ne va-t-il pas y acheter un joli canif de bon acier, un porte-crayon d'argent, un encrier de fer, du papier, et des crayons ? Si fait, il va y acheter tous ces articles. Non, non, pas tous oes articles. (Obs. 34.) II ne veut ni encrier, ni canif.—- TWENTIETH LESSON. 99 A-t-il un canif et in encrier ? II a encore un encrier ; mais pas de canif. — Pourquoi ne veut-il pas en acheter un ? Parce qu'il a celui de son frere. Comment se porte-t-on chez le general ? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Je suis bien aise de Papprendre. — Et chez le ministre ? Chez lui, plusieurs personnes sont malades. — Qu'a Jean ? Jean a mal de gorge. — Charles Fa-t-il aussi? Non ; celui-la a mal aux dents. — Qiront les deux petits? lis ont mal de tete. — Et Sophie ? Sophie n'a rien. J ; en suis bien aise. — Le ministre est-il malade ? Oui, comme a P ordinaire. II a un mauvais rhume. — Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je ne me suis pas bien porte. — Vous vous portez bien, a P ordinaire. n ; est-ce pas % Je me porte parfaitement a P ordinaire, mais pas ce matin. — II fait si chaud, n ; est-ce pas? Oui ; il fait Irop chaud. — Ou allez-vous? Je vais chez Papothicaire. chez le marchand de souliers. — Ou le cordonnier, n'est-ce pas ? Non pas le cordonnier, mais le marchand de souliers. — Est-ce tout J Non, je vais chez le marchand de charbon et au telegraphe electrique. Je vous souhaite beaucoup de plaisir. — J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. — Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Le Russe se porte-t-il mieux ? Oui, un peu mieux. J'espere que votre frere se porte bien ? Tres-bien, je vous remercie. Comment se porte-t-on chez lui ? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Personne ir'y est malade. Votre cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter du bceuf et du mouton? Oui, il en a assez pour acheter Pun et Pautre. — Ya-t-il porter autant de celui-ci que de celui-la ? II va porter plus de celui-la que de celui-ci. — Les matelots ont-ils des billets pour acheter duchocolat? lis n'ont pas de billets; mais, ils out de Por. C ; est assez bon, n-'est-ce pas % — En ont-ils assez pour acheter des poulets, du sel, du poivre, des biscuits, du beurre frais, du pain frais, du bceuf frais, du vin, du sucre, du the, du cafe est-ce tout? Non, ce n'est pas tout. — Des choux, du vieux fromage, du vinaigre, du grain, de la farine. — De la farine ? Quel est Panglais de cela ? N 7 avez-vous pas I'anglais de farine ? Non, nous ne l'avons pas. — Qui Pa? Personne ne Pa. — Votre domestique a un balai pour balayer le plancher du magasin, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il n ; en a pas. — Voulez-vous lui donner un quart de dollar pour en acheter un? Je vais lui en donner un. — Je iven ai pas. Je n'ai que des demi-dol- ars. N*avez-vou> pas un quart de dollar? Non, je n'en ai plus. Quel est P Anglais de : faire? C r e?t: to do. to iv.alcc. C'estbiea, c ? est cela. — De quelle conjugaison est-il ? II est de la conjii- gaison. — Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il (init en : . . . . Est-il regulier ? . . c . Pourquoi? Parce qa-il n : est pas conjugue comme le modele XOO TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. (Le maitre peut faire les memes questions sur quelques autrea verbes, comme : Voir — porter — ecrire.)— Quel est votre dernier vo- cabulaire ? C 7 est le Quelle section ? La Y avez-vous des verbes? Oui ? nous en avons plusieurs. — Quels verbes avez- vous? Les avez-vous dans votre catalogue? Avez-vous des noms dans le vocabulaire ? Combien en avez-vous? Lesecoliers ont-ils des adjectifs dans le leur ? — En avez-vous dans le votre ? — L ? etranger en a-t-il dans le sien ? — Qu'avons-nous dans le notre ? — Prenez mon parapluie pour le preter a Robert. — Ou va-t-il ? II va sortir. — Oui. mais, ou va-t-il ? Ne va-t-il pas au musee ? A quel musee ? Sara, Jean, et Guillaume n'y vont-ils pas aussi ? Pouvez- vous sucrer mon the ? Ne veut-il pas sucrer son cafe ? — N'allez- vous pas mettre du sucre dans le chocolat ? Nous allons y en mettre. Qu 7 allez-vous mettre dans le vin? Je ne vais rien y mettre. — Pouvez-vous ecrire au commis ? .... a Fepicier ? . . . . aux etrangers?. . . .a nos amis?. . . . — Quelqu'un veut-il tuer Poiseau du petit enfant?. . . . . .Le cuisinier a-t-il tue les jeunes ou les vieux poulets ? TWENTY-FIRST LESSON, 21st— Fmgf et unieme Legon, 21me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. PRONOMS INTERROGATIFS. For things. Pour les choses. What ? Qu 1 est-ce qui ? What? Que? Qu'? Quoi? Vocabulary. 1st Section. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. For persons. Pour les personnes. Nominative. Who? Nominatif. Qui? Object direct. Whom? Regime direct, Qui? Objective, with a preposition. To whom ? A qui ? Of or from whom ? De qui ? With whom? {whom . . with?) Avec qui ? For whom ? {whom . .for ?) Pour qui ? Regime indirect, avec une prepo- sition. To what ? A quoi ? Of or from what ? De quoi ? With what ? (what . . with ?) Avec quoi ? For what ? (What . . for ?) Pour quoi ? Qui ? Who ? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinc- tion of sex ; as, who, in English. Que? and Quoi? What? have no plural, and always relate to things. Obs. 43. As direct object, use que before the verb in an interrogative form ; and quoi after the verb, in an affirmative form. After a preposition, use quoi, never que. [Mind that, all those pronouns are not relative, but interrogative.] What have they ? (^'ont-ils? I What will you say?} Que voulez- I What do you mean ? 5 \o\\s dircl TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 101 He will say what ? He means what 1 II veut dire, quoi { II va They have, what ? lis ont, quoi ? What, is he going to reply to ? A quoi va-t-il repondre ? To answer, to reply to. Obs. 44. Repondre, taking d before the noun, coincides with, to reply to, better than with to answer, which has no preposition after, and the scholar is invited mentally to connect repondre d with to reply to, even when to answer is used in the book. He is going to answer what \ repondre, d quoi ? Repondre, 4, (takes d before a noun.) To answer the man, [to reply to.) To answer the men, (to reply to.) Whom do you wish to answer ? (reply to?) I wish to answer (reply to) my brother. To answer (reply to) him, her. To answer (reply to) them. To answer (to reply to) the note. To answer (reply to) it. To it, to them, (usually for things.) To answer the notes. To answer them, (things.) To ask a question of some one, some- body. Will you ask me a question? I am going to ask you one. In French. In English. In German. Repondre a Phomme. Repondre aux hommes. A qui voulez-vous repondre ? Je veux repondre a mon frere. Lui repondre. (§ 47.) Leur repondre, (pour les personnes.) ($ 47.) Repondre au billet. Y repondre. ($ 47.) Y, (generalement pour les choses.) Repondre aux billets. Y repondre, (pour les choses.) Faire une question (fern, noun) a quelqu'un. Voulez-vous me faire une question? Je vais vous en faire une. En Frangais. En Anglais. En Ai lemand. Pouvez-vous me repondre en Fran- gais ? Je crois que oui. A-t-il mon livre ? Je crois que oui. Can you answer me in French ? I believe so. I believe I can. Has he my book ? I believe he has it. ! Obs. 45. — Any affirmative answer after: I believe, may be expressed by: que oui. A negative answer, by : que non. (Dir. 6.) Can they speak German well? I Peuvent-ils bien parler PAllemand? I believe not. I believe they cannot. I Je crois que non. Twenty-first Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingt et unieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Wednesday, June, 1849. Mercredi, Juin, 1849. What are we going to try to-day ? We are going to try to recite. — To recite what? To recite a vocabulary. — Which? This one. — Is it the 20th ? No. it is not the 20th, but the last. — It is the : what? The last, the 21st. — Very well. Will you begin ? With pleasure. — Will you ask us questions in French or in English? I am going to ask you some in English first, and in French afterwards. — We are ready to answer you. Are you ready, indeed? I believe we are, (que oui.) — Can I begin? I believe you can. — To how many notes can you reply (answer) this evening? I can reply to six or seven. — 9* 102 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. Can you answer so many? (a autant que cela?) I believe T can.— • Have you as many brothers as I ? We have just as many as 3^ou ; and more than they. — How many volumes of Irving : s works have they? They have eight. — Have they so many? Yes, indeed, and they are going to buy more. — How many more ? Two more, I believe. — Has Miss Clara as many shawls as Miss Emily (Emilie) ? No, Miss Clara has less of them than Miss Emily. — Have you my copybook? I? No, I believe not. — Has he got it? He? I believe not. — Who has it? I cannot tell you. — Have not those children got it? They? I believe not. — Are you not going to give a handsome fan to Miss Victoria? Yes, I am going to give her one. Will you write to the Italian? I will write to him. — Will your brother write to the English ? He will write to them, but they have no mind to answer him. — Will you answer your friend? I will answer him. — But whom will you answer? I will answer my good father. — Will you not answer your good friends? I will answer them. — Who will write to you ? The Russian wishes to write to me. — Will you answer him ? I will not answer him. — Who will write to our friends? The children of our neighbor will write to them. — Will they answer them ? They will answer them. To whom do you wish to write ? I wish to write to the Russian. — Will he answer you? He wishes to answer me, but he cannot. — Can the Spaniards answer us? They cannot answer us, but we can answer them. — To whom do you wish to send this note ? I will send it to the joiner. — From whom is this boy going to receive a hat? He is going to receive one from his friend, the lawyer. — For whom is this coat? It is for our father. — Whom are these gloves for? They are for our friend's clerk. With whom are your children going to the museum ? They are going there with the old professor. — Are they not also going to the wharf to see the merchant's beautiful vessel 1 Yes, they are going there with the young teacher, the old captain, and the srood sailor. Vocabulary, 2d Section. The play, the theatre. The ball. To or at the play. To the theatres. To the ball. To the balls. The parlor, drawing-room. The storehouse, magazine, warehouse. This counting-house. The market. In, at, to the market. There, thither. To go there ; to be re. To send there. To carry it there. Vocabulaire, 2de Sec. Le theatre. Au theatre. Au bal. Le salon. Le magasin. Ce comptoir. Le marche. Le bal. Aux theatres. Aux bals. Le grand salon. Au marche. Y aller. Y etre. Y envoyer. L'y porter. TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 103 Will they go to the theatre ? They wish to go there. Will you go there ? I will. (Dir. 1.) Are you going now ? I am. Is your cousin in the parlor ? He is ; or, he is there. He is not. My cousin. This cousin. Where is our cousin ? Do you know ? I know not {do not). Do you know the French of: to see? I do. I know it. I do know it. I know something. / know nothing. Do you know the French of: to have ? I do not know it. I will tell you (I am going to). (19 N. 1.) To have, to get. To have got. To have to. Veulent-ils aller au theatre ? lis veulent y aller. Voulez- vous y aller ? Je veux y aller. Y allez-vous a present? J'y vais. Votre cousin est-il dans le salon ? II y est. II n'y est pas. Mon cousin. Ce cousin. Oii est notre cousin? Ou notre cousin est-il? Savez-vous ? Je ne sais pas. Savez-vous le Francois de : to see ? Je le sais. Je sais quelque chose. Je ne sais Hen. Savez-vous le Fran§ais de : to havet Je ne le sais pas. Je vais vous le dire. Avoir. Avoir d. Obs. 46. — When avoir, to have, expresses obligation, use the preposition d, before the following infinitive, and repeat it with each verb. What have you to do ? I have to copy and translate that. I have nothing to recite, nor read. Have your cousins nothing to say ? Yes, they have something to say. What has John to answer (reply to) ? He has to answer our questions. Then. If, if he. If he can. Qu'auez-vous d faire ? J'ai a copier et a traduire cela. Je n'ai rien a reciter, ni a lire. Vos cousins n'ont-ils rien a dire ? Si fait. lis ont quelque chose a dire. A quoi Jean a-t-il a rdpondre ? Jean a a repondre a quoi ? II a a repondre a nos questions. Alors. Si, s'il. S'il peut. 06s. 47. — The i, of si, is cut off, only when followed by il, or Us, but in no other case. If he has, they have ; s'il a; s'ils ont — s'il veut, &c. We are well. ] Nous nous portons bien. Twenty-first Exercise. 2d Sec. — Exerctce 21me. 2de Sec. Thursday, June 1849. Jeudi Juin, 1849. Good morning, ladies and gentlemen! I hope yon are well. Yes, Sir, we are well, thank you. — How is Miss Emily's cousin? Is he better ? I believe he is. — How is your brother's cold ? His cold is better, but he has the toothache. — I am sorry to hear it. — Do you know how the general is ? Yes, I know that he is well • but Captain Henry is sick. — I know it; but he is better; is he not? I cannot tell you. — What have we to do this evening? We have to recite ; as usual. — Who is going to begin? I and he. — Why not he and I ? Very well ; he and I, then. — I am going to ask ( faire) a question of the one and the other, (a Vun et a V autre.) — Will you answer me in French? I am going to try. — What have you got? 104 TWENTY-FKRST LESSON. Nothing. — What have you to do? I have only to write. — What have you to write? I have to write a note — To whom? To the carpenter's cousin. — What have you to give him? We have to give him some fresh bread and butter. — Has your servant anything to drink ? I believe that he has to drink some tea. — Are we not going to drink some, too ? Yes, we are going to drink some. — At what o'clock? At eight. — At half past eight, you mean (vous vou- lez dire). — No, I mean at a quarter to nine. — Have we to send much rice to the cook of Mr. Girard ? s vessel ? Yes, we have to send him much. — Has he any? I believe that he has but little more. — Then, we have to send it to him to-day* have we not? Yes, indeed. — Who is going to take it to him ? Do you know ? Yes, I do. — Who ? The joiner's little boy. When will the lawyer go to the play? He is going only to-mor- row night. — When can his cousin go with him ? He cannot go to the play if he is going to a ball. — To which ball is he going ? To that of the physician. — Is he going to give a grand ball ? Yes, he is, to- morrow evening. — Where is your son ? I believe he is at the counting- room. — Where are they going to take me ? To the counting-room, in their warehouse. — Where are the cook and the grocer going ? If they are going anywhere, they are going to market. — Can I go with them? Yes, you may (Dir. 1), if you have nothing to do. — To which market are they going? To the large one. — Are the farmer and his cousin at market? No, they are in the shoe-store. — Can you come to my house to go to the wharf? I have no wish to go to your house first, and afterwards to the wharf: but I am ready to go to the wharf now. — Have you your hat, gloves, and umbrella? Um- brella? Is it bad weather? Yes, it is. Then, I will not go there, but to the museum, if you wish to go with me. — Are they going, too? Yes, they, also. — Very well; then we may go (y), if you are ready. — Is the picture of the Italian in the parlor ? Yes, it is there. — Is the servant g^ing to sweep the parlor? No, he cannot sweep it now. — Why can he not? Because I believe somebody is in the parlor. — Who is in it (y) ? Madam Vernet and her cousin Frede- rick. — Will you send them some biscuits, fresh butter, and some wine ? I cannot, because the servant is not at home. — If you will send them something, I can take it to them ; can I not? Very well you may, if you wish. — How many biscuits have you? I have only six or seven; is that enough? It is. Mi! Since. I Ah! Depuis. Since last Sunday. Depuis dimanche dernier. Not quite well. < Pas tout-a-fait bien. I am glad to see you, them, him. I Je suis bien aise de vous, les, le voir. TWENTY -SECOND LESSON 105 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON, 22d. — Vingt-deuxieme Legon. 22me, Vocabulary. 1st Section. To, at, or in the corner .... corners. To. at, or in the hole .... holes. In the hole. In the holes. To, or at the bottom. In the bottom of the bag ... of this chest. At the corner of the fire ... of the garden. The office. The lawyer's office. This workshop. The joiner's work- shop. To, or at the end. The road. At the end of the road ... of the roads. That cousin of yours, of mine, of his, of theirs, &c. To send for. To go for, to fetch. To come for. To come for me. To send for me. To go for them. Whom are you going to send for ? I am going to send for nobody. At what o'clock are you coming for him ? (19 2 , N. 2.) Are you going for any one ? I ? No. But John is going for his cousin, who is in our office. Is not the cat in the workshop ? Yes, it is at the end. • These gentlemen are going to send for cakes and wine ; are they not ? Yes, they are going to send for some. Will your boy go for some fresh butter and vinegar for us ? He will not go for any for you. He is very kind (or good), indeed ! Are you not going to send for the doctor, for the clerk who is sick ? Yes, we are going to send for him. He will send for my brothers. No, he has a mind to go for them. Vocabulaire. ire Section. Au coin. Aux coins* Au trou. Aux trous, Dans le trou. Dans les trous. Au fond. Au fond du sac. Au fond de ce coffre. Au coin du feu. Au coin du jardin Le bureau. Cet atelier. Le bureau de l'avocat. L' atelier du menuisier. Au bout. Le chemin. Au bout du chemin . . . des chemins. Votre, mon, son, leur, &c, cousin-. ($ 108.) Envoy er chercher. Alter chercher. Venir chercher. Venir me chercher, M'envoyer chercher. Les aller cher- cher. Qui allez-vous envoyer chercher ? Je nevais envoyer chercher personne. A quelle heure allez-vous venir le chercher ? Allez-vous chercher quelqu'un? Moi ? Non. Mais Jean va chercher son cousin, qui est dans notre bu- reau. Le chat n'est-il pas dans l'atelier? Si fait, il est au bout. Ces messieurs vont envoyer cherchei des gateaux et du vin, n'est-ce pas? Oui, ils vont en envoyer chercher. Votre garcon veut-il aller chercher du beurre frais et du vinaigre pour nous ? II ne veut pas en aller chercher pour vous. II est tres-bon, en verite ! N' allez-vous pas envoyer chercher le docteur pour le commis qui est malade ? Si fait. Nous alions T envoyer cher- cher. II veut envoyer chercher mes l'reres. Non, il aenvie de les aller chercher 106 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. Will you send for more glasses, or have we enough ? I will send for more, because we have only three. Voulez-vous envoyer chercher plus de verres. on en avons-nous assez ? Je veux en envoyer chercher, parce que nous n'en avons que trois. Twenty-second Exercise. 1st Sec. — ViNGT-DEUxiEMEExEnciCE.lreSec. Friday, June 1849. Vendredi, June, 1849. All ! Mr. Robert, I am glad to see you. How have you been since last Monday? I have not been very well. — Ah i indeed! lam very sorry to hear it. — But you are well now, I hope? Not quite, but much better. Thank you. — How is it with you at home ? (Com- ment se porte-t-on chez vous ?) We are all well, at your service. — It is cold, is it not ? Yes, it is. — Where is Samuel going ? T am going to send him for something. — At what o'clock are you going to send him? At half past nine. — Is it not yet half past nine ? No, not quite. It is only a quarter past nine. Then he can wait a quarter of an hour. — What is he going for ? He is going to buy sugar, biscuits, and cheese, if we have no more. — Who is in the garden? The children of our friends are there. — Will you send for the physician % We will send for him. — Who will go for him at the joiner's work- shop? Little Thomas (Thomas) will go for him. — Can he do it? Yes, indeed. — Will you give me my broth? Will you drink some broth now ? I wish to drink a little. — Where is it? It is at the corner of the fire. I will give it to you (vais). Will you give little Thomas three sous to fetch some milk? Is that enough ? It is enough. — Where is he going to buy it ? He can buy it at the market. — Very well. I am going to give him three cents to get milk, and another to buy a cake. You are very good. But I have no money with me ; it is at the counting-house. — Will you go for it ? I am not afraid to go for it. — Will you buy my Web- ster's Dictionary? I cannot; I have no more money. — No more money (plus d') ! No, I have no more with me. — Where is your cat? At the bottom of the garret, in a hole. — In which hole is it? In its hole. — Where is that old man's dog? It is in a corner of the ship. Have the sailors any cats? Yes, they have. — Has not the servant to sweep the office and parlor? He has to sweep them. — Has their cook got a good fire ? He has an excellent fire, because he has to burn the coffee. — Has he not to make tea? He has to make it. — Where is our cat ? I believe it is in Miss Sophia's basket in the parlor. — Is not my Fleming's Dictionary in the parlor? Yes, it is there, and Surenne's also. Have you anything to do? I have something to do. — What have you to do? I have to mend my clothes, and go to the end of the TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 107 road. — Why have you to go to the end of the road? I am going to the grocer's to buy some grain for our bird and chickens. — Is not the professor there with his scholars, the minister, the apothecary, the lawyer, and the physician ? Yes, I believe they are there. — Can you give me as much fresh butter as bread ? I can give you more of the latter than of the former. — Can that cousin of yours (votre) drink as much wine as coffee or tea I He cannot drink so much of the former as of the two latter. Have you to speak to any one ? I have to speak to several men, if I can see them at the end of the road. They are in the work-shop. Very well, 1 will go (19 2 , N. 1) there to say a few words to them. — Have you not to answer this young man's last note ? No, we have not to answer it. (y. Ob. 44.) Yesterday. Yesterday morning. Yesterday evening ; last evening, night. Come in, walk in, go in. For (because) Some (meaning, some of us, you, them). Hier. Hier matin. Hier soir ou hier au soir. Entrez. Quelques uns. Car. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Thou. Thou hast. Hast thou ? Thou hast not. Hast thou my pencil-case 1 Thou art. Art thou ? Thou art not. Art thou not busy and in a hurry ? I am busy, but not hurried. Are the farmers tired ? VocABULAiRE. 2de Section. Tu. 1 Tu as. As-tu? Tun'apas. As-tu mon porte-crayon ? Tu-es. Es-tu? Tun'espas. N'es-tu pas occupe et presse ? Je suis occupe, mais non pas presse, Les fermiers sont-ils fatigues ? Obs. 48. Adjectives agree in number with the nouns or pronouns they qualify. If the noun or pronoun is in the plural, the adjective takes an s. They are not tired but busy. Thou wilt, thou wishest, (art willing.) Canst thou ? Art thou able ? Thou canst, &c. Art thou willing to make my fire ? I am, if I can. Art thou afraid ? cold or hungry ? I am not afraid, but I am cold and hungry. lis ne sont pas fatigues mais occupes* Tuveux. Veux-tu? Tu ne veux rien, Peux-tu ? Tu peux. Tu ne peux pas. Veux-tu faire mon feu ? Je veux le faire, si je peux. As-tu peur ? As-tu froid ? As-tu faim? Je n'ai pas peur ; mais j'ai froid et faim. 1 In addressing one another the French use the second person plural, as in English. The second person singular, however, is employed: 1. In subr lime or serious style, and in poetry; 2. It is a mark of intimacy among friends, and is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives, towards one another : in general it implies iarn liaiity founded on affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt. 108 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. Art thou neither ashamed nor sleepy ? Art thou going ? Thou art not going. Dost thou go there ? Thou art go- ing. Thou art not going. Thou goest to the work-shop, dost thou not ? To be sure ; of course ; without doubt. Immediately. Soon, very soon. To sell something to somebody. . What are you going to sell the Swiss ? We are not going to sell him any- thing. To tell, (to say) something to some one. Wilt thou say a word to Thomas ? Yes, I will tell him one. To tell .... to ... (a before the noun ; de, before the infin.) Will you tell the boy to bring some coals ? I will tell him to do it. (19 2 , N. 1.) Thee, to thee. It to thee. Them to thee. Thy. . . . Thy thimble. Thy thim- bles. Thine. Some to thee, thee some. I can give thee some. In the morning, (meaning) any morn- ing. In the evening, (that is) any evening. Twenty-second Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-deuxieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Saturday, June, 1849. Samedi, Juin, 1849. Bonjour, Mr., entrez, prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. Avec plaisir, car je suis fatigue. — Vous n'etes pas malade, j'espere ? Non ; je ne suis que fatigue. — Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis hier matin'? Tres-bien, comme a P ordinaire. Et vous? Moi aussi. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez-vous? Non, personne n'est malade a la maison depuis dimanche dernier. — Votre cousin Favocat est-il tout-a-fait bien? Non, pas tout-a-fait bien; mais beaucoup mieux. Pen suis bien aise. Who is in the joiner's workshop ? The three boys are there.- What have they to do ? They have a great deal to do. — Can they do it? To be sure. — Have ney as much to do as the carpenter's or the baker's boys? They have just as much. — Hast thou enough to study? To be sure. — Hast thou too much? No, not too much, but enough. —Art thou going to copy thy exercise soon? I am going to N'as-tu ni honte ni sommeil ? Vas-tu ? Tu vas. Tu ne vas pas, Y vas-tu ? Tu y vas. Tu n'y vas pas. Tu vas a 1' atelier, n'est-ce pas ? Sans doute. Tout de suite. Bientot. Vendre quelque chose d quelqu'un. Qu'allez-vous vendre au Suisse ? Nous n'allons rien lui vendre. Dire (* 4) quelque chose d quelqu'un. Veux-tu dire un mot a Thomas ? Oui, je veux lui en dire un. Dire a, .... de ... (a, avant le nom ; de, avant l'infinitif.) Voulez-vous dire au gargon d'appor- ter du charbon ? Je vais lui dire de le faire. Te, t\ Te le. Te les. Ton, sing. Tes, plur. — Ton de. Te§ d<*s. Le tien. Les tiens. T'en. Je peux t'en donner. t Le matin. t Le soir. TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 109 copy it immediately. — What will thy brother do first? He will first read, then translate, and afterwards write. — Canst thou translate well ? Yes, when I wish to do it. — To how many corners is John going? He goes only to thiee. — To how many lawyers hast thou to speak f I have to speak to four. — When hast thou to speak to them? This evening. — At what o'clock ? At a quarter to nine. — Not before ? 1 believe not. — When canst thou go to the office of the big general ? I can go there only in the morning (to-morrow morning). — At what o'clock ? At half past seven. — When wilt thou go to the old French- man's? I am going to his house immediately. — Will thou not go first to the hatter's store, or work-shop, to choose a hat? Oh, yes, I have to go there first, and then to the Frenchman's. — Will thou go to the physician's to-morrow morning, or to-morrow evening? I will go in the morning, at a quarter past ten, if it is fine weather, or at a quarter of eight in the evening. Have you to write as many notes as the Englishman ? I have to write fewer of them than he. — Will you speak to the German? I will speak to him. — When will you speak to him? At present. — Where is he ? He is in his office, at the other end of the wood. — ■ Will you go to the market? I will go thither to (pour) buy some linen. — Do thy neighbors not wish to go to the museum and wharf? They cannot go there * they are fatigued, and too busy to go. (y.) — Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the evening? I have the courage to go thither, but not in the evening. — Are your children able to answer my notes ? They are able to answer them. — What dost thou wish to say to the servant ? I wish to tell him to make the fire and to sweep the warehouse, our office, and the boy's gar- ret. — Wilt th.DU tell thy brother to sell me his horse? I will tell him to sell it to thee. — What do you wish to tell me? I wish to tell you a word. — Whom do you wish to see ? I wish to see the Scotch- man. — Has thou to tell him to send thee some milk? I have to tell him to send me some. — Will you tell your cousin to go to the gene- ral's in the morning, for he wishes to see him. With pleasure. — ■ Which book does my brother wish to sell them? He wishes to sell only thine and his own. — Thou hast the last exercise, hast thou not? Yes, I have it. — My young friend wishes to see me, does he not? I believe he does. — He has a mind to see thee, to tell thee something pretty. 10 110 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON, 23d.— Vingt-troisieme Legon, 23me. VlNGT-TROISIlilME VOCABULAIRE, lve Sec. To go out. To remain, to stay. | Sortir,* 2. Rester, 1. Obs. 49. Sortir, means to leave the place one is in, without any refe- rence to the place one goes to ; when the latter is mentioned, use : aller, and not sortir. As : Are you going out ? Yes, I wish to go out to my friend's. To remain, to stay at home. Here. There. Wilt thou stay here ? . . . stay there ? I wish to stay here. . . . there. Obs. 50. La, ici, require no antecedent ; y requires one. Y must be repeated. Wilt thou go to thy friends ? T am going there, but he is not. The pleasure, the favor. Will you be so kind as (good enough) to read that ? To do a favor. All, every. Every day. Every Sunday. Every morning . . . evening . . . month. All the velvet. All the scholars. Allez-vous sortir ? (going to go out.) (19 2 , N. 1.) Oui,je veux aZZer (not sortir) chez mon ami. Rester d la maison, (fem. noun, of which hereafter.) Ici, y. La, y. Veux-tu rester ici ? . . . rester la ? Je veux y rester. Veux-tu aller chez tes amis ? Vy vais, mais il n'y va pas. Le plaisir. (de avant un infinitif.) Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de lire cela ? Faire un plaisir. Sing. Tout. Plur. Tons. Tous les jours. Tous les dimanches. Tous les matins . . . soirs . . . mois. Tout le velours. Tous les ecoliers. Obs. 51. All of the velvet; all of the scholars; are frequently used in English, but the of must not be expressed in French. [Mind that.] A sore finger. A sore thumb. Is your little finger sore ? My little finger pains me. It is sore. Whose foot is sore ? John's is. Late. It is late. Is it late ? Is it not late ? It is not late. What o'clock is it? It is twelve o'clock, mid-day. Is it not a quarter past twelve? No ; it is but half past twelve. Is it not too late to go out ? No, it is but a quarter to six, or it wants only -i quarter i<> six. Is it hall past one ? Write the date of the month. t Mai au doigt. Mai au pouce. t Avez-vous mal au petit doigt? t J'ai mal au petit doigt. J'y ai mal. t Qui a mal au pied ? Jean y a mal. Tard. II est tard. Est-il tard ? N'est-il pas tard ? II n'est pas tard. Quelle heure est-il ? (quelle is fem. to agree with heure.) (19 2 , N. 2.) II est midi. (Never use douzeheures.) N'est-il pas midi et demi? Non, il n'est que midi et quart. N'est-il pas trop tard pour sortir ? Non, il n'est que six heures moins un quart. Est-il uuc heure et demie I (JN . 3, 19 2 .) Ecrivez le quantieme du mois. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. HI Write it every day. The names of the months are after the numbers. Ecrivez-le tous les jours. (§ 54.) Les noms des mois sont apres les nombres. Twenty-third Exercise, 1st Sec. — Vingt-troisieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Ecrivez ici, en Frangais, le quantieme du mois. Ah ! Mr. Charles, I am glad to see you; come in. Take a seat. Take this one, and sit down. Thank you. I have one here. It is good enough. — How have you been since last month? Quite well ; and how are you all? We are pretty well now. — How is your cousin Samuel? He is not well. He has a bad cold, a sore throat, and the headache. I am sorry to hear that he is sick. — Who is in the parlor ? In the large parlor? No, in the little parlor. Your father, the minister, his young brother, yours, my cousin Louis, Madame Leblanc, her son, and two or three- other persons are there. — Is anybody in the large parlor? No,* nobody is there. — Is the clerk going to stay at home ? No, he is going out (going to go out) to look for steel knives. — Has the Turk's tailor an iron or steel thimble ? He has neither a thimble of iron nor of steel; he has none. Then I will lend him one. (19 2 , N. 1.) — One of silver? No, a steel one. — Which dictionary have you here ? Here, I have Surenne ; s Dictionary, French and English, and there, Webster's. — Art thou going to the theatre ? No, I am not. — Then thou art going to a ball, art thou not? No, I am not (going there). — Where then? To my friend's the doctor. Is that all? — Will you be so kind as to copy that note for me ? I have not time to copy it, but little Robert is going to copy it for you, in his cousin's office. Is it late? It is not late. — What o'clock is it? It is a quarter past twelve. — At what o'clock does the captain wish to go out? He wishes to go out at a quarter to eight. — What are you going to do ? I am going to read. — What have you to read? I have to read a good book. — Will you lend it to me ? I will lend it to you. — When will you lend it to me? I will lend it to you to-morrow, if you have time to come for it then, (venir le chercher.) — Have you a mind to go out? I have no mind to go out. — Are you willing to stay here, my dear (cher) friend? I cannot remain here. — Whither have you to go ? I have to go to the counting-house. — When will you go to the ball? To-night. — At what o'clock? At midnight. — Do you go to the Scotchman's in the evening or in the morning? 1 go there (y) both in the evening and in the morning. — Where are you going to now ? I am going to the theatre. — Where is your son going to? He is going nowhere; he is going to stay al home to (pour) study his French and translate it ; for he has a sore foot. — Where is your brother ? He is in the parlor. — Is he not going to his 112 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. counting-house ! No, he is not going there. — Is he going to stay here ? Yes ; he is. — Why ? Because he has a sore thumb and finger, and he cannot write. — Cannot his clerk write for him ? Yes, he can ; and brother is going to send for him to do it. — Wilt thou come for John at seven f With pleasure. Since I had the pleasure of seeing you, of seeing them, him. I have been perfectly well. Oh ! Will you come in and sit down ? I can neither go in nor sit down. Many thanks. The heat. Too warm, too hot. Vocabulary. 2d Section. i Need. To have need of ... . To have need of it. To want it. To be in want of it. To have use for it. I have need of that. I want that. I I am in want of it. I have need of it. | Have you need of this knife ? Do you want this knife ? (in want of) I do not want it, (have no need for it.) Are we in want of these scissors ? I believe that you have need of them. Do you want them any more ? I do not want them any more. Has he need of money ? He has great need of it. He is much in want of it. Has the merchant need of any ? He does not want any. Who wants or has need of any ? Nobody wants any. They have need of it, of them, of some. Do John and Charles need the horses ? Have J. and C. need of the horses ? They do not want them. Of what ? Of what have you need ? I have need of all that. I want nothing. What is he in want of? What does he want ? What has he need of? (lie wants) nothing, that, everything. To be acquainted with. To know. Depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir, de les voir, de le voir. Je me suis parfaitement porte. Oh ! Voulez-vous entrer et vous asseoir ? Je ne peux ni entrer ni m'asseoir. Je vous rends graces. Le chaud. Trop chaud. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Besoin. Avoir hesoin de . . . . En avoir besoin. ($ 50.) J'ai besoin de cela. J'en ai besoin. Avez-vous besoin de ce couteau? Je n'en ai pas besoin. Avons-nous besoin de ces ciseaux ? Je crois que vous en avez besoin. En avez-vous encore besoin ? Je n'en ai plus besoin. A-t-il besoin d'argent? I II en a grand besoin. Le marchand en a-t-il besoin ? II n'en a pas besoin. Qui en a besoin ? Personne n'en a besoin. Us en ont besoin. Jean et Charles ont-ils besoin des chevaux ? lis n'en ont pas besoin. Dequoi? De quoi avez-vous besoin ? J'ai besoin de tout cela. Je n'ai besoin de rien. De quoi a-t-il besoin ? (§ 95.) De rien. De cela. De tout. Connaitre,* 4. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 113 To be acquainted with Uo know) a Connaitre un homme ; quelqu'un; man; somebody; a good teacher. un bon maitre. To be acquainted with nobody. Ne connaitre personne. Of me, of thee, of him, of it. De moi, de toi, de lui, {en, § 47* Of us, of you, of them. De nous, de vous, d'eux, [en.) Is your father in want of me? \ Votre pere a-t-il besoin de moi ? He is in want of you. Are you in want of these books ? I am in want of them. Is he in want of my brothers ? II a besoin de vous. Avez-vous besoin de ces livres ? V en ai besoin. A-Vil besoin de mes freres ? He is in want of them. \ II abesoin d'eux. (pour les personnes.) II en a besoin. (pers. et cnoses.) Does he want that ? He does (want it.) Whom do I want ? (have I need of?) You want the lawyer's clerk. What else or what more? A-t-il besoin de cela ? 11 en a besoin. De qui ai-je besoin ? Vous avez besoin du commis de l'avocat. Quoi encore ? De quoi encore? Twenty-third Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-troisieme Exerctce, 2de Sec. Ecrivez, en Francais, le quantieme du mois. I am much pleased at seeing you, Miss Clara. Sit down ; take this seat. How do you do, this morning ? I am pretty well ; better than last Tuesday. — I am glad of it. How is your father? I do not know. Father is not here, but he is coming in two or three days. But you, Sir; how have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing you? I have been perfectly well, I thank you. — Is it cold or warm, out of doors'? It is warm, quite warm. — Indeed ! I am sorry for it. — I bid you good morning, Sir. Miss, I present my respects to you. Adieu ! Is the professor going to make us recite (nous faire reciter) im- mediately ? No, not before a quarter of an hour or half an hour. — Then, I may still study my vocabulary ; can I not ? To be sure you can. — But do you not know it yet? Yes, I know it pretty well: but not too well, (trop bien. Obs. 35.) — May I go in the parlor, to study there ? Can you not study here ? I can write, read, copy, and translate here; but I can study better in a corner of the parlor. — If you will stay here, I can ask you (vous faire) a few questions, and then you can ask me some. — Very well, I am going to stay. Will you begin or may I (puis-je ?) ask you the first questions? You may begin, if you are ready; for, I am ready to answer you. — I am not quite ready. I wish first to correct a word there. Now I am ready. You know the date of the month; do you not? I believe I do. And you; do you know it? To be sure. — And he; can he Bay it? I believe not. — Who cannot tell the date of the month? 10* 114 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Robert cannot. — I ? Yes ; I can. Is it not the 8th of May ? Yes, it is (or that's it). Are you going out? (N. 1, 19 2 .) To be sure ; have I not my hat, cloak, and gloves? Yes, you have. — Have you to purchase (buy) anything ? Yes, I have to purchase many things. What ? A large shawl, for Sarah- a pretty little stick, for Henry; some gloves, handkerchiefs, and velvet, for Charlotte. — Is that all? All! No, indeed ! — What else (or more) ? What more ? A great many things. — Have you not to buy something for our little cousin, John ? Yes, I have several things to get for him. First, a wooden gun and other toys; and afterwards some little books. — Is that all for him? To be sure; it is enough; is it not? Yes, indeed. — Have you a catalogue of those things ? No, I have none ; but, will you do me the favor of making one for me ? Yes, with pleasure. — Where is the paper, where is the pencil? The paper is here, and the pencil there. — Have you money enough to buy all that ? I believe so. — What can you lend me? A knife, if you have need of one. — A what? A knife. — Thank you, I have no need of a knife. — What have you need of? I have need of a good gun. — An iron or a steel one? A steel one. — Why do you want it? I want it to kill a cat, a dog, and some birds. — Are you in want of this picture? Which? Our good painter's last picture. I? No; but he wants it. — Who wants it'! This young man does. — How much will he give for it? I do not know how much. — Does your brother want money? He doe& not want any. — Who wants sugar? Nobody wants any. — Oh! yes: I want some, to sweeten my tea. — Has anybody need of pepper ^ Nobody has. — Has the grocer but one eye ? No, he has two ; but he has but one thumb. Always. ($ 170.) A moment, a little while. Toujours. Un moment, un petit moment. TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON, 24th.— Vingt-quatrieme Legon, 24me. Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. INDICATIVE MOOD.— Indicatif. THE PRESENT TENSE.— Temps Present ou Present. For its formation see (§ 144.) That article must be carefully studied. Ohs. 52. The three present tenses: 1 love, I do love, I am loving, will for the present be expressed in French by: faime. (Mind that: am loving, are reading, &c, are never translated literally.) To love, to like, to be fond of. 1 Aimer, 1. (a, avant un infinitif.) T love. I do not love. I J'aime. Je n'aime pas, TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 115 Does he like ? He does. (Dir. 1.) Does he not love ? He does not. Are you fond of? We are fond of). Dost thou love ? Thou lovest tea. Who loves to read ? They like to read. Do you like him ? . . . them ? I do (like him, them). I do not (like him, them). Not at all. I do not like him or it at all. Does he sell his horse ? He does. Do you sell anything ? I do not. Do those farmers sell cabbages ? They do. They do not. Do you finish your task ? \ do. I do not (finish it). What do the pupils finish ? This one finishes his exercise, those finish their tasks. Whom are you waiting for ? I ex- pect the boy whom he expects. Do you receive any notes to-night? Yes ; as many as they receive. Aime-t-il ? II aime N'aime-t-il pas ? II n'aime pas. Aimez-vous ? Aimes-tu ? Qui aime a lire ? Nous aimons. Tu aimes le the. lis aiment a lire. L' aimez-vous ? (* 51.) Je l'aime. Les aimez-vous? Je les aime. Je ne l'aime pas. Je ne les aime pas. Pas du tout. Je ne l'aime pas du tout. Vend-il son cheval ? II le vend. Vendez-vous quelque chose ? Je ne vends rien. Ces fermiers-la vendent-ils des choux ? lis en vendent. lis n' en vendent pas. Finissez-vous votre devoir 1 ? Je le finis. Je ne le finis pas. Que finissent les ecoliers ? Celui-ci finit son exercice, ceux-la finissent leurs devoirs. Qui attendez-vous ? J'attends le garcon qu'il attend. Recevez-vous des billets ce soir ? J'enrecois autant qu'ils enregoivent. Twenty-fourth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingt-quatrieme Ex. Ire Sec. Mettez (put) ici le quantieme du mois en Francais. Are you going to see Mr. Charles, to-day ? I am. — How is he now ? He is better, but not at all well. — How is his old cousin ? He is quite well. — How have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing you at your friend's? I have always been well, as usual. — How are you all at home 1 Every one is well. — Is any one sick at your house ? No, nobody is sick. — Is not your little boy sick % Oh ! yes; he is a little sick ; but not much. — Are you not coming in ? Yes, I am coming in (N. 1, 19 2 ), to sit down a moment. — Come in, come in. Take this seat. — No, thank you; I will (vais) sit here. (N. 19 1 .) Do you always speak French? No, we do not always speak it. — Why do you not always speak it? Because I do not speak it very well, Jules does not speak much better, and the children do not speak it at all. — How many exercises do the scholars copy every day ? They copy two ; one in the morning, the other in the eve- ning. At what o'clock do they copy the morning one ? They copy it at i past 9. — And the evening one ; do they also copy it at i past 9 ? 116 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. They copy it at J- past 7. — When do you correct them? I correct them at two or J of two. Do you not dine (diner) at one ? No, we dine later. — Who dines at one? All our neighbors do. — Why do you not dine at one also ? Because we like to dine later. — Do your children dine, or eat dinner, when you do? No, they dine before us. — Do they like to eat dinner before you? Yes, they do like to do it, because they are always hungry. — Do they like to drink tea or coffee ? They like to drink neither tea nor coffee, but milk. — Do you love your brother? I do love him. — Does your brother love you? He does not love me. — Dost thou love me, my good child? I do love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man? I do not love him. — Whom do you love? I love my children. — Whom do we love? We love our friends. — Do we like any one ? We like no one. — Does anybody like us? The Americans like us. — Do you want anything? I want nothing. — Whom is your father in want of? He is in want of his servant. — What do you want? I want the note. — Do you want this or that note? I want this one. — What do you wish to do with it? (en?) I wish to open it, in order to read it. — Does he receive as many notes as I ? He receives more of them than you. — What do you give me ? I do not give thee anything. — Do you give this book to my brother? I do give it him. — Do you give him a bird ? I do give him one. — To whom do you lend your books ? I lend them to those scholars. — Does your friend lend me a dollar? He lends you one. — To whom do you lend your clothes? (habits?) I do not lend them to anybody. Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED —Le Present Continue. Are you fond of, do you like be gf ? | Aimez-vous le boeuf ? Obs. 53. As the noun beef is here used in its general sense, the French use, not the partitive, but the definite article, le, les, (the.) (§ 15.) Does he like the Prussians ? To eat. To arrange, to set in order. Do you like to eat beef? Aime-t-il les Prussiens ? Manger, 1. Arranger, ranger, 1. Aimez-vous a manger du bceuf ? Obs. 54. As the noun beef is here used to express a portion of beef, not all the beef, the French use the partitive, du, des, (some or any.) Does he like to eat cakes ? ($ 20.) They like to eat some. To eat, eating, we eat. To change, changing, we change. ($ 144, R. 2.) To neglect, neglecting, we neglect. Aime-t-il a manger des gateaux? lis aiment a en manger. Manger, mangeant, nous mangeons. Changer, changeant, nous chan- geons. Negliger, negligsant, nous ndgli- geons TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 117 Do you neglect your French ? We do not neglect it at all. Does he send you the bank-7iote? He does. (§ 144 — 3.) He does not. I send, thou sendest, he sends, they send, who sends ? What does he send ? I sweep, thou sweepest, he sweeps, they sweep, who sweeps ? does he not sweep ? Who sweeps the parlor carpet ? I do not know who sweeps it. Open, to open one, opening. I open, thou openest, he opens. Does he open his chest ? He does. Does he open his eyes ? He does. Neglige z-vous votre Frangais ? Nous ne le negligeons pas du tout. Vous envoie-t-il le billet cle banquet II me l'envoie. II ne me l'envoie pas. J'envoie, tu envoies, il envoie, ils envoient, qui envoie ? Qu'envoie-t- il? Je balaie, tu balaies, il balaie, ils balaient, qui balaie ? Ne balaie-t-il pas ? Qui balaie le tapis du salon ? Je ne sais pas qui le balaie. Ouvrir,* 2, en ouvrir un, ouvrant. J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre. Ouvre-t-il son coffre ? II l'ouvre. tOuvre-t-il les yeux ? II les ouvre. Obs. 55. Use the definite article, le, les, (the,) instead of the possessive, when the sense clearly indicates the possessor. Ses may be used, but les is preferable. To suffer. I cannot bear it, (them.) To put away, to put by, lay up, (put any article in its proper place.) Will you put away your hat, clothes, money, shoes, books, pencils, &c. (Dir. 2.) To shut, to shut up the store. Is the servant shutting up the office ? He does not now, but he is going to shut it in a moment (presently.) This soldier. Some cider. Has the captain more than thirty sol- diers ? He has less than twenty. Often, pretty often, (enough.) What does the American like ? He is very fond of coffee and tea. To dine, to eat dinner, to eat supper. The dinner, at dinner. The supper, at supper. Do they often change their servants ? We often change them. To change something. Soufirir. souffrir. Serrer, 1. Je ne peux pas le (les) Voulez-vous serrer votre chapeau, vos habits, votre argent, vos sou- liers, vos livres, vos crayons, &c. Fermer, 1. Fermer le magasin. Le domestique ferme-t-il le bureau ? II ne le ferme pas a present ; mais il va le fermer dans un moment. Ce soldat-ci. Du cidre. Le capitaine a-t-il plus de trente sol- dats ? II en a moins de vingt. (16 2 .) Souvent, assez souvent. Qu'aime FAmericain ? II aime beaucoup le cafe et le the. {Obs. 53.) Diner. Souper. Le diner, a diner. Le souper, a souper. Changent-ils souvent de domes tiques ? Nous en changeons souvent. Changer de quelque chose, (de.) Twenty-fourth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-quatrieme Ex. 2de Sec. Mettez ici le quantieme en Fran§ais. Ah! Mr. Arago. I am glad to see you. You are well. I hope. Tolerably well, thank you. I am glad to hear it. — Do you know where 118 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Mr. Lamartine is? Yes, he is at home. Thank you, Sir. I have to write to him. — Well ! come in my house and sit down a little. Many thanks. I am not tired. I am ; as usual, in a hurry (presse), for I want to see Mr. Rush who is going to Liverpool at J past 10. Adieu, then; for you have not much time. Adieu. — It is warm, very warm, is it not ? No ; it is not too warm for me. — Not too warm for you! Then you like the heat (le chaud) ) indeed! I do. — Do you not like the heat? Not quite so much as you, I believe. Do you recite this evening at 6 or at 7 o'clock ? We recite only at 7, I believe. — Do you know what vocabulary we recite ! You recite the last one. — Which is the last one ? The ... is it not ? — I believe not. — Which, then? This one. — I know these two. And I also. — Then, I am ready to recite. And you? I also. — What are you looking for (or, do you seek). Miss Charlotte ? Is it your shawl or cloak that you seek (are looking for) ? No, Sir, I am looking foi my copy-book of French, to translate my exercise in it. What do you eat at breakfast ? We eat a little beef or mutton, bread and butter, &c. — Do you like beef at breakfast ? Yes, a little : but I like it very well (beaucoup) at dinner. — Do you like to eat it also at supper? I do not like it so much (tant). As for me (raoz), I do not like it at all. I cannot bear it. — You cannot bear it ? indeed ! No, indeed, I cannot. — Do you eat much cheese? We do not eat much; we do not like it; we cannot bear it. — Do you often change servants (de domestiques) ? Yes, we often change them. We change them every month. — Does not Julius neglect his task often ? Yes, he does; but we do not neglect ours. — What do you neglect? I believe that we do not neglect anything. (Obs. 4.) You are good scholars, then, if you neglect nothing. Thank you. — What are you going to fix or arrange ? When ? To-day. To-day ? We do not fix anything, but these boys set their books in order (fix). — Does your father send you anything? He sends me all I wish. — Does he send you shoes, stockings, and gloves ? No, but he sends me money to buy some. — How much ioes he send you ? He sends me more than ten dollars every month. — Is that all? Yes, and that is enough. — Will you be kind enough to tell Isaac to open the parlor? He is opening it now (l'ouvre). — Very well. Then you need not tell him to open it; but you may tell him to sweep it. I will. (Je vais le faire.) (19*, N. 1.) Do you cut anything? We cut some wood. — What do those mer- chants cut? They do not cut anything: but their clerk cuts some coarse cloth. — Does he not cut the fine cloth too ? No, he is afraid to cut it. — You mean, he is afraid to tear it, do you not? Yes, I mean, TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 119 to tear it. — Does he not tear the cotton ? Yes, he tears it, and the coarse cloth too ; but he tears neither the velvet nor the satin. — When do you receive your notes? I receive them every morning when you receive yours. — Does our neighbor, the lawyer, receive his journals when we receive ours ? I do not know when he receives his. — What does your servant carry? He carries several things in a large trunk. — Does he open it? He does not. — Where is he carry- ing it? He is carrying it home. (Obs. 52.) — Are you waiting for anybody ? Yes, I am only waiting for the little Irishman . — Do you wait for him often? Yes, I do. — Every morning or every evening? Morning and evening. — Are you killing two birds? I am killing only one. — How many chickens does that old cook kill ? He does not kill any. — Who kills them, then ? The farmers kill them. — Do (the) farmers work as much as (the) sailors? They do. — Who works more ? You or your son ? We work as much the one as the other. Very ill. Worse. Much worse. Does the doctor hope yet ? Go (imper. To rest yourself, myself. Good-by. Vocabulary. 3d Section. Tres-mal. Plus mal. Beaucoup p. m, Le docteur espere-t-il encore ? Allez. Vousreposer,merepo. Jevoussalue Vocabulaire. 3me Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED ($ 144.)— Le Prhent Continue. Exceptions to the general rule given in $( 144). This desk. The teacher's desk. What are your brothers doing ? They are doing nothing. Are you not doing an exercise ? No, we do not do one. What are you doing in the office ? We do the task we have to do. Do you say anything to me ? We tell you that they wish to eat. Do you say nothing ? No, nothing. That may be. At the corner of Walnut and 13th. That cannot be. Twenty-fourth Exercise. 3d Sec. Mettez ici le quantieme du mois, en Francais. Mr. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Pouvez-vous me dire comment se porte votre cousin Armand? II est tres-mal. En verite ! Pen suis bien fache. Est-il plus mal que hier ? Oui, il est beaucoup plus mal. Le docteur espere-t-il encore? Oui, il espere encore, parce que Armand est jeune ; mais il est tres mal. — Ce pupitre. Le pupitre du maitre Vos freres que font-ils ? lis ne font rien. Ne faites-vous pas un exercice ? Non, nous n'en faisons'pas. Que faites-vous dans le bureau ? Nous y faisons le devoir que nou- avons a faire. Me dites-vous quelque chose ? Nous vous disons qu'ils veulent manger. Ne dites-vous rien? Non, rien. ($ 151. A. 8.) Cela peut etre. Au coin de Walnut et de la 13me. Cela ne peut pas etre. -VlNGT-QUATRIEME Ex. 3jME See 120 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Prenez un siege. Asseyez-vous. Non, je ne peux pas m'asseoir a present. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous asseoir un petit moment, pour vous reposer? Non, je ne le peux pas- car fai a aller chez Papo- thicaire pour acheter quelque chose. Est-ce pour Armand? Oui, c'est pour lui. Alors, allez ; allez. Adieu ! Je vous salue. Miss Emilie, what are you waiting for ? I am waiting for the scholars. — Are they coming, or do they come ? (Obs. 52.) I be- lieve they are coming. — What are they doing? Who? The shoe- makers. They are making shoes (§ 4). — Are the carpenters making a ship ? No, they are not making one. — What do they do ? They do something, but we do not know what. — Do you know where are my dictionaries ? Which? The French ones. We know where they are. — Will you tell us where they are? No, we will not tell you. You may look for them. — You are very good, indeed ! Do the teachers owe anything to the butter-man ? They do not owe him anything. — Do they not owe something to the tailors ? They owe them something. — How much? Not much. Not more than two or three dollars. — Do they owe more to the joiner? No, they do not owe him so much; for, they owe him nothing. — Nothing at all? No, nothing at all. 1 believe they owe him nothing at all. — I know they owe him something for their last desk. — That may be, (cela peut etre.) Do the Messrs. Cowell & Son keep a dry goods store ? Yes, they keep one. — Where do they keep it? They keep it at the corner of Chestnut and Seventh (de Chestnut et de la 7me). — What do they keep? They keep gloves, ribbons, satin, velvet, fine cloth, and many other things. — Do they receive their satin, velvet, gloves, and ribbons from France (France) ? No, I believe they do not receive them from France ) they buy them (achetent) from our merchants. — What do they receive from France ? They do not receive any- thing. — Do the French take much tea ? No, they do not take much. — They take more coffee than tea ; do they not? Yes, they take a little more. — Do they not take a great deal more of it? No. they do not take a great deal more ; but they take more wine than either tea or coffee, (que de the ou de cafe.) — What do the Italians and Spanish drink? They drink chocolate. — Do they not drink wine also ? Yes, they do. — Do you know that the general's old brother is very sick ? Yes, we know it; and we know also that he is better this morning. — We are glad to hear it. — Do you say anything to me? We do not say anything to you. — Do you tell them anything? We do not say anything to them. — Do you say anything pretty to your good neighbor? We tell him something pretty. — What do you tell him pretty ? We are not going to tell you of it, or it to you. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 121 You have been well. I believe it. At the hour. Before the hour. Punctual. On the way, the road, coming. I think. Dust. It is very dusty. Vous vous etes bien porte*. Je le crois. A l'heure. Avant l'heure. PonctueL En chemin. Je pense. De la poussiere, (femi.) II fait beaucoup de poussiere. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 25th.— Vingt-cinquieme Legon, 25me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED.— Le Present Continue. As the rule given in ($ 144), on the formation of the plural of the present tense, is applicable to irregular as well as regular verbs, it remains now only to point out the present tense singular of a few irregular verbs, to enable the learner to use them in his exercises. They are the following : To do, to make. Doing. I do, thou dost, he does. To drink, drinking. I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks. To come, coming. I come, thou comest, he comes. To write, writing. I write, thou writest, he writes. To see, seeing. I see, thou seest, he sees. To say, tell, saying. I say, thou sayest, he says. To go out, going out. I go out, thou goest out, he goes out. To read, reading. I read, thou readest, he reads. To know, (to be acquainted with,) knowing. I know, thou knowest, he knows. To put on, putting on. I put on, thou puttest, he puts. To sleep, sleeping. I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. To serve, serving. I serve, thou servest, he serves. To take, taking. I take, thou takest, he takes. To translate, translating. I translate, thou translatest, he trans- lates. 11 Faire,* faisant. Je fais, tu fais, il fait. Boire,* buvant. Je bois, tu bois, il boit. Venir,* venant. Je viens, tu viens, il vient. Ecrire,* ecrivant. J'ecris, tu ecris, il ecrit. Voir,* voyant. Je vois, tu vois, il voit. Dire,* disant. Je dis, tu dis, il dit. Sortir,* sortant. Je sors, tu sors, il sort. Lire,* lisant. Je lis, tu lis, il lit. Connaitre,* connaissant. (Je connais, tu connais, il connait. sais, tu sais, il sait. Mettre,* 4, mettant. Je mets, tu mets, il met. Dormir,*2, dormant. Je dors, tu dors, il dort. Servir,* 2, servant. Je sers, tu sers, il sert. Prendre,* 4, prenant. Je prends, tu prends, il prend. Traduire,* 4, traduisant. Je traduis, tu traduis, il traduite 122 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. Vingt-cinquieme Exercice. Ire Sec. Mettez (put) le quantieme, en Fransais, ici. Bonsoir, Mr. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. J'espere que vous vous etes bien porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir. Tres-bien, merci. Suis-je le premier ici, ce soir ? Vous etes pre- mier. Vous Petes assez souvent, mais pas toujours. — Je suis souvent trop occupe pour venir toujours a Pheure. Je le crois, car vous etes bien ponctuel. Oii sont les autres ecoliers? En chemin, je pense, car ils sont ponctuels aussi. Mais pas tant que vous. — Voulez-vous prendre un siege? Non, je vous remercie, pas encore. Je veux d'abord chercher un mot dans le dictionnaire. — Quel mot voulez- vous savoir? Je veux savoir le Francais de : dust. — Que voulez- vous dire en Francais? Je veux dire : it is dusty. Le Francais de it is dusty, est: il fait de la poussiere. A present, je peux vous dire: II fait beaucoup de poussiere. Oui ; je le sais, et la poussiere n 7 est pas agreable. Prenez un siege a present. Merci, je vais en pren- dre un. Dost thou see anything? I do not (see anything). — Does your father see our ships ? He cannot see them at all from there j but we see them very well from here. — How many soldiers do you see? We see a good many; we see more than thirty of them. — The cap- tain expects more soldiers, does he not ? I do not know if he expects any others. — Do you know the captain? No, I believe I do not know him ; but I know the general. — Do you also know the general's cousin? Who? that tall and handsome young man who comes often to the museum to see the pictures? Yes, that one. I do not know him, but I see him very often. — What do these sailors and soldiers drink? They drink wine and cider. — Do they drink more of the latter than of the former ? No, they drink more of the former thaA of the latter. — Do they drink wine every day ? They do ; but they do not drink cider every day. — Why not ? Can they not get some ? (en avoir ?) No, they have not money enough to buy any. — What do we drink? You know that we drink tea, coffee, and wine. — Do we not drink chocolate too ? Yes, we do. We do like it as much as the Italians and Spaniards. — Do we drink as much of it as they ? No, we do not, for they drink it in the morning, at din ner, and supper. — What art thou writing ? I am not writing, I am reading. — Who writes ? (is writing ?) The lawyer is writing. — What is the Prussian doing? He does nothing. Does he not study Eng- lish? Yes, he is studying it. — Does he not write it? He does not. What dost thou say ? I say nothing. I am too sleepy to say any- thing. — Does thy brother say anything ? He is afraid to say a word. — TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 123 Do you say anything ? Yes ; I tell our servant to go to the book- seller's to bring me the last work of Cooper. — Do you like his last work ? Do you not like it? I say that I like it very much. — Who does not like it? Several gentlemen whom (que) I know. (§ 77.) — Do you tell me anything? T tell you something. Yes; but you do not tell me something pretty. — Is it not pretty? No 7 not at all. — Do you do (are you doing) anything for me ? We do not do anything for you; but those boys are (doing something for you). — What are they doing for me ? Do you not see it? No ? I do not see it. — Dost thou see my shawl or gloves? (Dir. 2.) I see neither these nor that. — What dost thou see ? I see nothing. — Who sees them ? Who sees what? My shawl and gloves. Nobody sees them. — Are they not here ? No ; they are not. I see but this old cotton shawl. — What do you say to the tailor and shoemaker? I do not tell them any thing. — What do our friends say to them? They tell the latter to mend their shoes, and the former to make them some coats and vests. — Have they time to do it? They have time and a wish to do it. — What are you doing? I am putting my gloves on. — Is he put- ting on his large hat? No, he puts on the old one. — Do you not put any sugar in your coffee ? Yes ; I put some, for I have not enough. — Do you not put milk in it? No, I do not. — Do you know those Ger- mans? I know one, but not the others. — Who is acquainted with this Swiss ? We know him. — Does he know us? He does. — Whom dost thou know? I know nobody. — Does he not know you. I believe he does, {que si.) Do I look sick ? You do (look sick) You look very well. On the contrary. You do not look well. You look cold, (as if you were cold.) Miss, how have you been? Vous avez Ai-je Pair malade ? Fair malade. Vous avez tres-bon air. Au contraire. Vous n'avez pas tres-bon air. Vous avez l'air d' avoir froid. Mle. comment vous etes-vous portee. (fern.) Vocabulaire. 2de Section. To give something to do to some one. Do you give anything to the dog to eat ? Do you feed the dog ? 1 give it some beef to eat. I give him nothing to eat. What do you give the scholars to translate ? I give them the 25th exercise. To bring. To find. To, at the play. Donner quelque chose d faire a quel- qu'un. Donnez- vous quelque chose a manger au chien ? Je lui donne du bceuf a manger. Je ne lui donne rien a manger. Que donnez-vous a traduire aux ecoliers ? Je leur donne le 25me exercice. Apporter, 1. Trouver, 1. Au spectacle. 124 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) Our butcher. His sheep. What, that which, (relative pronoun, objective case.) Do you bring me what I wish ? I do not bring you what you want, (or what you wish.) Do you find what you look for, (or what you are looking for ?) I find what I look for. (am looking.) He finds not what he seeks. We bring what we find. All, or all that, all that which. They do not find all they look for, (or all that which they seek.) Do you mend all I do not ? (Dir. 1.) I mend it all. We eat all we have. Notre boucher. Son mouton. Ce que, (pronom relatif, regime direct.) ($ 89.) M'apportez-vous ce que je veux? Je ne vous apporte pas ce que voui voulez. Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez ? Je trouve ceque^e cherche. II ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche. Nous apportons ce que nous trouvons. Tout ce que, (pron. rel. reg. direct.) (* 910 lis ne trouvent pas tout ce qu 1 i\s cherchent. Raccommodez-vous tout ce que je ne raccommode pas ? Je le raccommode tout. Nous mangeons tout ce que nous avons. Au lieu de. Au lieu de lire. Instead of. Instead of reading. Obs. 56. Instead of is in English followed by the present participle, but in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, except en. (Rule 1st.) This room, apartment. Put yourself, (imperative.) Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. Cet appartement-ci. Mettez-vous. Pres de. Pres de Mile. Anne. Pris du feu. A present que j'y pense. (§ 50.) Comme vous y pensez, il y pense. Venez,(imper.) voici. S'il vous plait. Finir d'etudier. Moi, du moins. Venez ici. Me S'il lui plaTt. Lui, du moins. Now that I think of it. As you think of it, he thinks of it. Come, (imperative.) (§ 150.) Come here. Here I am. If you please. If he pleases. To finish, to quit studying. At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. Vingt-cinquieme Exercice. 2de Sec. Ecrivez ladateici, en Fran^ais, (the date noun fern., of which hereafter.) Ah ! Mr. Charles, j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Je vois que vous vous portez bien. Tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., etes-vous ma- lade? Ai-je Voir malade? Un peu. Je suis un peu fatigue, mais non pas malade. J ! en suis bien aise. Vous n ; etes pas le premier, ce soir. Non, je vois que Mile. Clara est ici avant moi. Com- ment vous etes-vous portee (fem.), Mile., depuis jendi dernier. Je me suis tres-bien portee, merci. Je n'ai pas Pair malade, j'espere. Oh! non. Au contraire, vous avez tres-bon air, comme a Pordi- Haire. Merci, Mr. Comment est le mal de gorge du general? Son TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 125 mal de gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrez, Mr, Lenoir. Vous avez Fair d'avoir froid. Oui, j'ai froid. Mettez-vous ici, pres du feu et de Mile. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Vous avez bon feu. Le feu est tres-agreable quand vous avez froid, n'est- ce pas. Mr.? Oui, Mile. II est alors tres-agreable. Vous avez parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait tres-froid. — Cormaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaitre et de le voir tres-souvent. II a l'air malade, a present, n'est-ce pas? Mais, je crois que non. A present que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a mal aux dents. Cela peut etre. Si cela est, j'en suis bien fachee. Et moi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de merite, n'est-ce pas? Je le crois. Do you go to the play, in the evening ? I do not. — Why ? What have you to do ? I have to study. — Does your teacher give you any- thing to study in the evening ? Yes, he gives us something to do then. — At what o'clock do you finish studying? We finish at 9 or 10 oclock; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or sleepy, {when we are.) — Does he give you anything to write ? Yes, he always gives us (§ 170) the quarter or the half of an exercise to write • because he says that we know it better then. — Do you know it better when you write it ? To be sure. I do (moi) at least. — Do you copy your father's notes in the evening? We copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them (away). — Do the scholars write all they translate ? No, they do not. — Do they mend all they tear? They do not. — Do they find all they look for? They do. — Does the captain find all he looks for? No, indeed, he does not. — Who finds all he looks for? Nobody does. — What do they wish to find? They wish to find but their books. — Do they not put them away? They do not. — Who puts them away? Nobody does. — Where are they? You know; do you not ? No, not at all. — The Swiss wants something ; do you bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it. — Where dost thou take me to? I take thee to the museum. — Do you not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a mind to take you there, because it is bad weather. Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell? Thoy put away all they do not sell. — At how much does the butcher sell his beef? He sells it at ten cents, or sous. — Does the butcher wish to buy your sheep? He does. — What will he give you for it (en) ? He will give me two dollars and a half for it. — Is it enough ? I think not. — If this butcher will not give you more than that, I know another who can give you more. — Have our butchers 11* 126 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) as many oxen as sheep ? No, they have many more of the latter than of the former. Do they sell as much beef as mutton ? They sell much beef ; but they sell only a little mutton. — What is the old cook looking for ? He is looking for a young chicken, which he does not find. Where can it be ? Who knows? — What is the Ger- man doing in his room? He is reading the journal and feeding his birds. — What does he give them to eat? (what does he feed them with?) He gives them but grain to eat, (feeds them with.) — What journals does he read ? He reads those which your cousin lends him. — Does not your father lend him some, too ? He has three in his desk, which my father lends him ; but he is not reading them now. John, come here. Here I am. — Come with me. Where? Here, near the fire. — Near the fire ? No, indeed ! I am warm enough where I am. — Take that seat. No, I am going to take this one; that one is too big for me. — Very well: take that little one, if you please. — Now that I think of it, go in that apartment to bring me the cake which is in my desk. — Which one of your desks ? The French one. I am going to bring it to you, if you please. — You are going to give me some; are you not? Yes, to be sure. It is to give you some that I tell you to bring it to me. — Have you a knife to cut it? I can cut you a little with my penknife. — You cannot cut me enough with your penknife. — Do you want so much? Yes, I want a great deal; you know that I like it much. Go, then, go, instead of speaking. — Will you go with me to the grocer's ? Here I am, ready to go. — Do you want a basket? Why? To put in it something good, w T hich you are going to buy ; are you not ? Yes, I am going to buy something good, but the grocer can put it in papei bags. Vocabulaire. 3me Section. To play. To listen. Instead of listening — of playing. Do you play instead of studying ? I study instead of playing. That man speaks instead of listening Have you a sore finger ? Thumb ? I have a sore finger. Thumb. Has your brother a sore foot ? He has a sore eye. A sore nose. We have — They have sore eyes. The elbow. The right elbow The right arm. The left arm. The Left knee. The right one. The back. The dog's back. Jouer, 1. Itcouter (sans prepos.) Au lieu d'ecouter — de jouer. Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier? J'etudie au lieu de jouer. Cet homme parle au lieu d'ecouter. tAvez-vousmal audoigt? Aupouce? tj'ai mal au doigt. Au pouce. tVotre frere a-t-il mal au pied ? til a mal a Poeil. Au nez. tNous avons — lis ont mal aux yeux. Le coude. Le coude droit, Le bras droit. Le bras gauche Le genou gauche. Le droit. Le dos. Le dos du chien. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 127 Has the dog a sore back ? It has. Is the dog's back sore ? It is (sore). Is your left arm sore ? It is (sore). It is not. Whose elbow is sore ? Who has a sore elbow? Nobody's. Nobody. SLe chien a-t-il mal au dos ? II y a mal. Avez-vous mal au bras gauche ? J'y ai mal. Je n'y ai pas mal. Qui a mal au coude ? Personne n'y a mal. Are not the child's fingers sore ? ) L , enfimt a * a . t .., mal aux d(ji , Has not the child sore ringers ? 3 They are — He has. Which of his eyes is sore ? The left. Is not my right eye sore ? Yes, it is, or your right eye is sore. This bed. Those beds. Does the servant make the bed ? He makes the fire instead of making the bed. The bedstead. To learn, to learn how, learning. I do learn, thou learnest, he learns. They learn. I learn to read, how to read. They learn to write, how to write. Do they not learn to speak French ? Yes, they do. Do Arthur and his cousin go out ? NeitherArthur nor his cousin does. II y a mal. A quel ceil a-t-il mal ? Au gauche. N'ai-je pasmal al'ceil droit? Si fait, vous y avez mal. Ce lit-ci. Ces lits-la. Le domestique fait-il le lit ? II fait le feu au lieu de faire le lit. Le bois de lit. Apprendre,* 4, apprenant, (il prend o, avant un infinitif.) J'apprends, tu apprends, il apprendL lis apprennent. (§ 144.) J'apprends a lire. lis apprennent a ecrire. N'apprennent-ils pas a parler Fran§ais ? Si fait, ils 1' apprennent. Arthur et son cousin sortent-ils ? Ni Arthur ni son cousin ne sortent. Obs. 57. Neither, connected with nominatives, is : Ni .... ni ... . ne, before the verb. (§ 162, R. 6.) The following verb is usually in the plural :— Ni cet e'colier-ci ni celui-la n'e'tu- dient assez. Le dentiste. Le sofa. Le charpentier raccommode-t-il le bois de lit ? Non, parce qu'il a mal au pouce. tA quel pouce a-t-il mal ? Au droit. Neither this scholar nor that one studies enough. The dentist. The sofa. Does the carpenter mend the bed- stead ? No, because he has a sore thumb. Which of his thumbs is sore ? The right one. Vingt-cinquteme Exercice. 3me Sec. Mettez la date ici, en Frangais. An ! Mr. Letourneur, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde s 7 y porte bien. Personne n'est malade a la maison ; mais chez mon voisin. le ministre, tout le monde est malade. Qu'ont ils? L'un, a mal de gorge, un autre, mal de tete ; celui-ci a un rhume, celui-la mal aux dents. Alors, ils ne sont pas tres malades. Non, mais il fait si mauvais, qu'ils souf- frent beaucoup. Je suis fache d'apprendre qu'ils souffrent. Celui :pii a mal aux dents ne peut pas dormir. Pourquoi ne va-t-il pas 128 TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (3.) chez le dentiste ? II a peur. En verite ! Qui est-ce ? C ; est le jeune Arthur. II a tort d'avoir peur. II le sait, mais il continue a avoir peur. Qui a le rhume ? C'est George. Prend-il quelque chose pour son rhume? Oui, sans doute. Qu 7 est-ce que c'est? Je ne sais pas quoi. Does your father go out ? He does not. — What does he do ? He writes. — Does he write a book? He does. (Dir. 1.) — When does he write it ? He writes it in the morning, in the evening, and when he has time. — He is at home now, then ? To be sure. — Do you wish to see him ? No, because he is too busy. — Does the Prussian go out ? No, neither he nor the Swiss goes out. — Why do they not go out? They have sore feet. — What do they do for their sore feet? They do something, but I cannot tell you what. — Does the shoe- maker bring our shoes ? He does not. — Does he drink ? Does he not work? He does not work, because his left knee is sore. — Has anybody the toothache ? Yes, this youth has it. — Is he not going to the dentist? No, he is not. — Is he going to send for him ? He does not send for him. He does not wish to have the dentist. — Has any- body a sore elbow? I believe so. Let me see. ($ 154.) Yes, the dentist has a sore elbow. ^-Which of his elbows is sore ? The right or his right, (le.) — Who has a sore arm ? I have. — Do you not see it ? No, I do not see it. — Which of your arms is sore ? The left. — Does the minister write now ? No, he cannot yet. — Is not his right thumb better? It is better, but not well. Do you read your pretty book ? I do not. I have a sore eye. — Which of your eyes is sore ? Do you not see ? My right eye is sore. — Let me see it. See it or look at it. (voyez-le.) — Who has sore eyes? The old cooks have sore eyes. — What day of the month is to-day ? It is the . . . — And to-morrow ? The . . . — What is the German doing in his room ? He is learning to read. — Does he not learn to write? Yes, he does. — Does your son learn to trans- late ? He learns to translate, and to copy French. — Does the Prus- sian speak instead of listening? He speaks instead of listening. — What does he do then ? Afterwards he goes to the farmer's to drink milk. — Does the dentist fix (arranger) the teeth of your son ? He does not. — What does he? He makes teeth for the Dutchman > instead of fixing my son's teeth. — Who studies instead of playing ? A few boys study instead of playing; but a great many play instead of studying. — Does our English teacher speak French to us instead of speaking English ? He does often. — Do the children of the Swiss drink wine in the morning, instead of drinking tea or coffee ? They drink neither wine, tea, nor coffee. Can you find the French of: to offer, in this small dictionary? I TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 129 am going to look for it immediately. Very well ; take the dictionary. I have it. — Do you find the word in it ? No, I do not. Indeed ! Let me see. I see why you cannot find it. You are looking for it in the French instead of the English. — What is the grocer putting in that paper bag ? I believe he puts in it salt instead of sugar. — Is that salt. Sir? No, it is sugar, but it looks like (a Fair de) salt, does it not? Yes, it looks like it. (§ 50.) — Let me, let me, I want to say : Let me taste it, but I do not know the French of: to taste. Will you tell me, William? To be sure; it is gouter. Gouter, very well. Now I can say: Let me taste it. Do. (Dir. 1.) Take some and taste it. ( § 54.) — Is it sugar or salt ? You are right, it is sugar. Then we can sweeten what we eat and drink. — Do his little friends receive more books than copy-books ? They receive less of the former than of the latter. — Do you sleep in this pretty little bed ? No, I sleep in that large bed. — Who sleeps in this one? Sophia does. — Do the joiner's boys make sofas, desks, and bedsteads ? Yes, they make sofas, bedsteads, and desks. — Do they work as much as the boys of the carpenter ? They work quite as much. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 26ih.—Vingt-sixieme Legon, 26me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Do you learn French ? Russian ? I do. I do not. The Polish. Russian. Turkish. Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic. Syrian, Syriac. Swedish. Does your son learn Latin ? No, he does not. The Pole. The Roman. The Greek. The Swede. The Arab. The Syrian. To speak French. German. Le Apprenez-vous le Frangais? Russe ? Je Tapprends. Je ne l'apprends pas. Le polonais. Le russe. Le turc. Le latin. Le grec. L'arabe. Le syriaque. Le suedois. Votre fils apprend-il le latin ? Non, il ne I'apprend pas. Le Polonais. Le Romain. Le Grec. Le Suedois. L'Arabe. Le Syrien. Parler Frangais. Parler Allemand. Obs. 58. After the verb, parler, the article (le) is usually omitted before: F angais. Anglais, &c, although it is used after all other verbs. (§ 47£.) Who speaks Swedish ? Not I ; but I am studying Polish. This minister reads Latin well, and translates Greek and Syrian. Are you an Englishman — English ? Qui parle suedois ? Pas moi ; mais j'etudie le polonais. Ce ministre lit bien le latin, et il traduit le grec et le syriaque. Etes-vous Anglais ? Obs. 59. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote qualr lies, the French make use of no article. (§ 38, R. 2. p. 469.) 130 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) No, Sir, I am a Frenchman. French. | Non, Monsieur, je suis Francais. Is he a Turk, a Greek, or an Arab ? Is your cousin a minister ? He ? No, he is an apothecary. Crazy, foolish. Sure, certain. Are they sure they have it ? They are. To take away, pull off, throw off. Take away, off. Well, very well ! Are you tired and sleepy ? Est-il Turc, Grec, ou Arabe ? Votre cousin est-il ministre ? Lui * Non, il est apothicaire. Fou. (plur. s. 92.) Sur. {de avant un infinit.) Sont-ils stirs de 1' avoir ? lis en sont surs. Oter. Otez. Eh bien ! Etes-vous fatigue et avez-vous som- meil? Je suis fatigue et j'ai sommeil. I am tired and sleepy. Obs. 60. Change the verb when the adjective requires a different one. Je vous (lui, leur) suis bien oblige, De rien. I am much obliged to you, (him, them.) You are welcome. It is not worth mentioning. Vingt-sixieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. TFoubliez pas (do not forget) le quantieme en Francais. Quel jour du mois est-ce? C'est le.... De quel mois? Du mois de . . . En etes-vous sur? Oui, j 7 en suis sur. N ? est-ce pas aujourd'hui jeudi? Si fait, c'est jeudi. Eh! bien, le papier dit : jeudi le - . . . N ? ai-je pas raison ? Si fait, je crois que vous avez raison. Je vous remercie. Be rien. Vous etesbien bon. Je suis bien aise de savoir le quantieme, parce que j'ai un billet a ecrire. Avez-vous besoin de papier? Non, je vous suis bien oblige. J ; en ai, je crois ; mais je ne puis trouver raon encrier. Etes-vous sur qu'il n'est pas dans votre pupitre ? Je n'en suis pas tout-a-fait sur, mais je crois, qu ; il n'y est pas. Laissez-moi voir (§ 54) si je ne peux pas l'y trouver. Cherchez. (§ 150.) Eh bien! L'y trouvez- vous? Non, il n'estpasici. Qui peut Pavoir? Votre cousin Arthur, je pense. Car il ecrit son devoir dans son appartement. Puis-je aller le chercher? Non: s 7 il en a besoin, il peut Pavoir. Je vais ecrire mon billet aveo mon crayon. Do you go for anything? I do go for something. — What do you go for? I go for some cider. — Does your father send for anything? He sends for some wine. — Does your servant go for some bread ? He goes for some. — For whom does your neighbor send ? He sends for the physician. — Does your servant take off his coat in order to make the fire? He takes it off in order to make it. — Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money ? I do take them off in order to give yon some. — Do you learn Fiench? I do learn it. — TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 131 Does your brother learn German ? He does learn it. — Who learns English? The Frenchman learns it. — Do we learn Italian? You do learn it. — What do the English learn ? They learn French and German. — Do you speak Spanish ? No. Sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks Polish ? My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbors speak Russian ? They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you? I have an English knife. — What money have you there ? Is it (est~ce) Italian or Spanish money? It is Russian money. — Have you an Italian hat ? No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a Frenchman ? No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek? No, I am a Spaniard. Are these men Germans? No, they are Russians. — Do the Rus- sians speak Polish? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant ? No, he is a joiner. — Are these men merchants ? No, they are carpenters. — Are you a cook ? No, I am a baker. — Are we tailors? No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou crazy ? No, I am not crazy. — What is that m an ? He is a phy- sician. — Does the son of the painter study Greek? No, he studies English before Greek. He is right. — Is he going to learn Greek before Latin ? No, he is going to learn Latin before Greek. — Does the butcher kill anything to-day ? He kills oxen and sheep. — Does he kill some every day ? He does. — Why does he kill some ? He sells the beef and mutton in market. — Do you listen instead of doing your task ? Yes, I do, because what you say is very pretty. — Do they listen also ? No, they neither listen nor study, nor copy ; but they sleep. They do right, if they are tired and sleepy. Afterwards they can work setter. ( § 170.) Vocabulaiee. 2de Section. To wish. I wish you a good morning. Does he wish me a good evening ? He does. What do they wish me ? They wish you much pleasure. The forehead. He has a large forehead. > T , , r_ . , His forehead is large. ( Ob.. 55.) 1 IUle front lar § e He has blue eyes. His eyes are blue Blue. Black. Large. The blue ones. A black one. Round. Square. Long. Souhaiter, 1. t Je vous souhaite le bonjour. t Me souhaite- t-il le bonsoir ? II vous le souhaite. Que me souhaitent-ils ? lis vous souhaitent beaucoup de plaisir. Le front. II a Ies yeux bleus. Bleu. Noir. Large. Les bleus. Un noir. Rond. Carre. Long. 132 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) A great, or large knife. A great man. I Un grand couteau. Un grand homme. 1 A French book. An English penny. | Un livre Francais. Un sou Anglais. Obs. 61. Adjectives of nations, colors, and shapes, come after the noun. Un lit carre. Un arbre rond. Du velours A square handkerchief. A square bed. A round hat. A round tree. Russian money. Italian velvet. A good American sailor. Do the Italians make fine black satin ? To listen to something. To listen to some one, to somebody. Do you listen to what your teacher tells you? I do. Does he listen to what I tell him ? He does. He does not at all. Do you listen to what I tell you ? Do you listen to me ? I do. Whom do you listen to ? Nobody. Do you listen to my brother ? I do not (listen to him). Do you not listen to the men ? Yes, I do disten to them). The exercise. The last exercise. To take, to drink coffee. To take, to drink tea. Obs. 62. With the verbs, to take and to drink, (le) or (du) may be used indifferently, with tea, coffee, and chocolate, but not so with other verba and nouns. Un mouchoir carre Un chapeau rond. De F argent Russe. Italien. Un bon matelot Ame'ricain. Les Italiens font-ils de beau satin noir ? t Itcouterquelque chose, (sans prepos.) t Ecouter quelqu'un. t Ecoutez-vous ce que votre maitre vous dit ? Je l'ecoute. t Ecoute-t-il ce que je lui dis ? t II l'ecoute. II ne l'ecoute pas du tout, t Ecoutez-vous ce que je vous dis ? t M' ecoutez-vous ? Je vous ecoute. t Qui ecoutez-vous ? Personne. \$ 171, R. 8.) t Ecoutez-vous mon frere ? t Je ne V ecoute pas. t N'ecoutez-vous pas les hommes? t Si fait, je les ecoute. Le theme. Le dernier theme, t Prendre, boire du cafe ou le cafe, t Prendre, boire le the ou du the. Will you eat bread ? Will he take the bread ? Do you take (drink) tea ? I do. Do they drink tea every day ? They do take some every day. My father drinks coffee. The French take coffee after dinner. Do they take it at breakfast ? Does her brother take chocolate ? Voulez-vous manger du pain ? ^not le.) Veut-il prendre le pain ? (not du.) t Prenez-vous (buvez) du (le) the ? t T en prends. Je le bois. t Prennent-ils le the* tous les jours ? t lis le prennent tous les jours, t Mon pere prend du cafe\ t Les Francais boivent du cafe* apres dine, t Le prennent-ils a dejeuner ? t Son frere prend-il du chocolat t 1 Un grand homme means a great man, but un homme grand a tall man. A similar distinction is made with respect to the word pauvre, poor, which expresses pitiful, or a want of intellect, when before, and indigent, when after the substantive. Ex. Tin pauvre homme : a sorrowful (pitiful, "miserable) man ; and un homme pauvre, an indigent man. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 133 t II prend le chocolat tous les matins. Votre theme est-il aise aujourd'hui ? II ir est pas tres- difficile, mais il est long. He drinks chocolate every morning. Is your exercise easy to-day ? It is not very difficult, (or it is not) a very difficult one, (or hard one,) but it is long, or it is a long one. ViNGT-sixii:ME Theme. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Fran§ais. Mile. Victoria, j'ai Phonneur de vous saltier, vous vous portez bien, n*est-ce pas'? Oui, Mr., je me porte bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que j'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir au musee ? Je ne me suis pas tres-bien porte, je vous suis tres-oblige. Je suis fache de Papprendre. Mais vous etes mieux, j'espere? Oui, beaucoup mieux: je peux dire: bien a pre- sent. Mais, je vois M. Guillaume. II va entrer. je crois. J'espere que non. Pourqu oi done ? (so?) Ne Paimez-vous pas? Non, je ne peux pas le souffrir. Je vois qu'il n'entre pas. Pourquoi ne pouvez-vous pas le souffrir ? II est trop vain. N ; a-t-il pas raison d'etre vain? N ; est-ce pas un joli jeune homme? Si fait: mais il a tort d'en etre vain. — A present que j'y pense, savez-vous ou est votre ami, Edouard? Oui, il est a Burlington, chez un de ses cou* sins. Va-t-il venir ici bientot ? Je ne peux pas repondre a votre question ; car, je ne sais pas quand il va venir ici. Do you wish me anything? I wish you a good morning. — What does the young Prussian wish me ? He wishes you a good evening. — Where are the children ? They are at your father's. — Why are they there? To wish him much pleasure. — Has the German black eyes? No, he has blue eyes. — Who has black eyes? The Spa- niards, Italians, and Turks have black eyes. — Has not that Greek small feet, a large forehead, and a big nose ? Yes, he has small feet, a large forehead, but he has not at all a big nose. Do you listen to me ? I do, with much pleasure. — Does the lawyer listen to the minister? He does listen to him, in order to answer him, (reply to him.) — Are you going to listen to him ? No, I am going to study my exercise instead of listening to him. I do not wish to know what he is going to say. — Have you your cousin's note? To oe sure I have it. — Have you to answer it immediately? Yes, I have to answer it immediately. — Are you answering it now ? Yes, I am ; but my eyes are sore, and I cannot answer it very well. — Answer it (§ 150, Art. 8) for me; will you? With pleasure, if I can. — Tell me what I have to write. — Tell him first why I do not answer, and then tell him that I send him his round hat, his blue coat, his black satin vest, his black velvet shoes, his French fan, his 12 134 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) Engl.sh gun. and several other articles, by (par) one of my friends, who goes where he is. Listen to what the professor says, instead of speaking. Now, I listen to what he says. — Is the doctor a man of merit ? Listen to him, and then you can say whether (if, si) he is a man of merit. — Do the scholars listen to their English teacher ? Those who are good, listen to him; the bad ones play instead of listening. — Are your gloves French? Yes, they are French gloves. (3. §39.) — Do you give me English or German paper ? I give you neither English (repeat papier) nor German paper; but I give you some fine French paper. — Do you read Spanish well? (§ 170.) I do not read Spanish well, but German. — What book is the soldier reading? He is reading a pretty French book. — Do the sailors drink tea or coffee, in the morning ? Some take coffee, others drink tea. — What do you drink, in the evening? I take tea, then. — You take coffee in the morning; do you not? No, I take tea in the morning, also. — Do you drink no coffee ? No, I do not drink it any more. — Who takes chocolate ? The Spaniards and Italians drink a great deal of it. — Do the French take it also ? They take some, but not so much as the others. — Do the Turks take tea, chocolate, or coffee ? They take neither tea nor chocolate, but they are very fond of coffee. Why so ? Then. t Pourquoi done ? done. How goes it ? Is it possible ? It is true, however. Is it not true ? (First rate.) It is possible. Is it true ? It is not true. Comment va? Celavabien,tres-bien, Est-il possible ? C'est possible. C'est vrai, cependant. Est-ce vrai ? N'est-eepas vrai? Ce n'est pas vrai. TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 27th.—Vingt-septieme Legon, 27me. Vocabulaibe. Ire Section. To show. I show, do show, am showing. He does not show. Dost thou show ? Show him the apartment. To show something to some one. To show one something. Do you show me your gun ? I do. What do you show the man ? I show him my fine clothes. Tobacco. Tobacco, (for smoking.) Montr er, 1. Faire* voir. Je fais voir. Je montre. II ne fait pas voir. II ne montre pas Fais-tu voir ? Montres-tu ? IMontrez-lui ) l'appartement. ( Faites-lui voir} (§ 150.) SMontrer ) quelque chose Faire voir) a quelqu'un. Me faites-vous voir votre fusil ? Je vous le fais voir, (le montre.) Que faites-vous voir a l'homme? Je lui montre mes beaux habits. Du tabac. Du tabac a fumer. TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (].) 135 Snuff. To smoke. To snuff, take snuff. Do you smoke or take snuff? I neither smoke nor snuff. You chew ; do you not ? I neither smoke, snuff, nor chew. Is it possible ! It is wonderful ! To chew. Do not chew, (imperat.) The gardener. This valet. That concert. To the concert of Mr. . . To intend, to intend to. Do you also intend to go to the ball ? I intend to go to it, (going there.) To know, to know how, (bef. a verb.) Dost thou know? Dost thou not know? Does the child know ? He does not. To swim. Swimming. Do you know how to swim ? Can you swim ? Does he read ? He does not know how. A cigar. A Spanish cigar. To think of, [meaning, what is your opinion of.] What do you think of the weather ? Du tabac en poudre, (a priser.) Turner, 1 . Pre?idre* du tabac on priser. Fumez-vous ou prisez-vous ? Je ne fume ni ne prise. ($ 162, A. 6.) Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? Je ne fume, ni ne prise, ni ne chique. Est-il possible! C'est extraordinaire' Chiquer, 1. Ne chiquez pas. Le jardinier. Ce valet-ci. Ce concert-la. Au concert de M. . . . Compter, 1, (sans prepos.) Comptez-vous aussi aller au bal ? Je compte y aller. Savoir* 3. (§ 144, sans prepos.) Sais-tu ? Ne sais-tu pas ? L'enfant sait-il ? II ne sait pas. Nager, 1. Nageant. (§ 144, R. 2.) > Savez-vous nager ? Lit-il ? II ne sait pas lire. Un cigare. Un cigare espagnol. Penser, 1, de . . . . Que pensez-vous du temps ? Vingt-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Francais. Bon soir, Michel, comment vous portez-vous aujourd'hui? Je me porte tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment va? Cela va bien, je vous remercie. Vous voyez que je fume un cigare espa- gnol, en voulez-vous un? Non, je vous suis bien oblige ; mais je ne fume plus. Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas? Non, je ne chique pas. Est-il possible ! Vous ne fumez ni ne chiquez ! C ; est extraordi- naire ! N'est-ce pas? Oui, en verite! Mais vous prisez? Non, r r ous ne chiquez, ni ne fumez. ni ne C'est possible. Ce que je vous dis est je ne prise pas. Quo: ! prisez ? Est-il possible ! vrai. Mais, pourquoi est-ce extraordinaire ? Parce que tout le monde fume ou prise ou chique. Non pas tout-a-fait. Que pensez- vous du temps ? Je pense qu'il est superbe. Quoi ! Ne fait-il pas Urop chaud pour vous? Pour moi? Non, en verite. What does your father want? He wants some tobacco. — Will you go for some? I will go for some. — What tobacco does he want? He wants some snuff. — Do you want tobacco, (for smoking?) T do not want any; I do not smoke. — Do you show me anything? I enow you gold ribbons, (des rubans (Vor.) — Does your father show 136 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) his gun to my brother ? He does show it him. — Does he show him his beautiful birds? He does. — Does the Frenchman smoke? He does. — Do you go to the ball? I go to the theatre instead of going to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden ? He goes to the market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send your valet to the tailor? I send him to the shoemaker instead of sending him to the tailor. — Does your brother intend to go to the ball this eve- ning? He does not intend to go to the ball, but to the concert. — When do you intend to go to the concert? I intend to go there this evening. — At what o'clock ? At a quarter past ten. — Do you go for my son ? I do go for him. — Where is he ? He is in the counting- house. — Do you find the gardener whom you are looking for? — I do. — Do your sons find the gardeners whom they are looking for? They do not. Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? They do. — When do they intend to go thither? They intend to go thither to-morrow. —At what o'clock ? At half past seven. — What does the merchant wish to sell you ? He wishes to sell me some pocket-books. — Do you intend to buy some ? I will not. — Dost thou know anything? I do not know anything. — What does your little brother know ? He knows how to read and to write. — Does he know French ? He does not. — Do you know German ? I do. — Do your brothers know Greek? They do not, but they intend to study it. — Do you know English ? I do not, but intend to learn it. — Do my children know how to read Italian ? They know how to read, but not (mais non) how to speak it. — Do you know how to swim ? I do not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your son know how to make coats ? He does not know how to make any; he is no tailor. — Is he a merchant? He is not, (ne Vest pas.) — What is he ? He is a physician. We are well. We thank you. i Nous nous portons bien. Nous vous remercions. Vocabttlaire. 2de Section. To conduct, conducting. I conduct, thou conductest, he con* ducts. Conduct him to his U7icle' s house. Conduct me there also. I will, willingly, with pleasure. To extinguish, put out, extinguishing. Do you extinguish (put out') the fire ? I do not put it out. Put it out. He extinguishes it. Thouputtest.it out. To light, to kindle, to fire. The gas. This burner. Which burner ? Conduire* 4. Conduisant. Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit. Conduisez'le chez son oncle. Conduisez-y-moi aussi (§ 58.) Volontiers. Eteindre*4, eteignant. Eteignez-vous le feu ? Je ne l'eteins pas. Eteignez-le. II i'eteint. Tu l'eteins. Allumer, 1. Le gaz. Co hec-ci. Quel bee? TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 137 How many burners do you light ? A single gas burner is enough. Put out this burner, and light up the other. Often. As often as you. (§ 170) As often as I. As often as we, thou. Do you often go to the wharf? As often as he. As often as they. As good as he, we, they, I, thou. Not so often. Less often. Do you frequently see my uncle ? I do not see him so often as you. Not so often as I, as they. Oftener, more often. Often enough. Oftener than we, than they. Too often. Does he come too often ? I believe he comes too often. To count. To count in French. The number. The numbers. Do you know this number in French ? What number ? This, 76. To pronounce. Can you pronounce my name? I can try. Well, try. Value. Can I pronounce it? Yes, pretty well. Combien de bees allumez-vous ? Un seul bee de gaz est assez. Eteignez ce bec-ci et allumez l'autre. Souvent. Aussi souvent que vous. Aussi souvent que moi, que nous, que toi. Allez-vous souvent au quai ? Aussi souvent que lui, qu'eux. Aussi bon que lui, nous, eux, moi, toi Moins souvent. Voyez-vous souvent mon oncle ? Je le vois moins souvent que vous. Moins souvent que moi, qu'eux. Plus souvent. Assez souvent. Plus souvent que nous, qu'eux. Trop souvent. Vient-il trop souvent ? Je crois qu'il vient trop souvent. Compter. Compter en Francais. 1 Le nombre. Les nombres. Savez-vouscenombre-cienFrancais? Quel nombre ? Celui-ci. ($ 38.) Prononcer, 1. ($ 144, R. 1.) tSavez-vous prononcer mon nom? Je puis essayer. Eh bien ! essayez. Puis-je le prononcer? Oui, assez bien. Vingt-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date ici, en Francais. Bon jour, Messieurs, comment vous portez-vous ? Nous nous por- tons bien, excepte M. le Blanc, qui n'est pas ici. Va-t-il venir? Non, il ne vient pas aujourd'hui. N 7 est-il pas assez bien pour venir f Non, il n'est pas bien du tout. Qu 7 a-t-il ? Je ne sais pas ; et le Doc- teur ne le sait pas mieux que moi, du moins, je le crois. Lui donne- t-il quelque chose a prendre 1 II lui donne quelque chose. Je suis bien aise, Messieurs, d'apprendre que vous vous portez bien. Nous vous remercions. Le theme que vous avez est-il difficile ? Moi, je le trouve difficile ; mais ces trois messieurs ne le trouvent pas diffi- cile. C'est vrai. au contraire nous le trouvons aise. Que trouvez-vous difficile 1 Je ne peux pas vous le dire en Francais. Vous pouvez 1 The teacher is invited to make the pupils count in French, by the minute — slowly at first ; but when they pronounce the numbers well and regularly, let them count as fast as they can ; not for the mere satisfaction of knowing whether they can count 150 or 170 in a minute, but to give ease and readiness to their utterance. Pupils are generally fond of this exercisa 12* 138 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) essayer, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, sans doute. Ehbien! essayez. Volon- tiers. Nous avons beaucoup de new mots. Ne savez-vous pas le Francais de: new? Je ne le sais pas. Ces autres messieurs le savent-ils? Moi, je le sais. Nous, nous ne le savons pas. Je vais vous le dire, c'est nouveau. Pouvez-vous Pecrire ? Moi, non — moi, oui — n, o, u, v, e. a. u. Comment formez-vous le pluriel ? Avec x, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est vrai ; vous avez raison. Do you wish to drink some cider? I wish to drink some wine: have you got any? No, T have none, but I will send for some. — Has not your uncle got some excellent? Yes, he has. — Conduct me to his house, then. I will, or willingly. Now? No, not now, but very soon. — Do you know how to make tea 1 I know how to make it; but I cannot make coffee. — Who knows how to make chocolate? I * it is not difficult. — Where is your father's dentist going to ? He is going nowhere. He remains at home to fix the teeth of his uncle. — Dost thou conduct anybody? I conduct no- body. — And you, whom do you conduct ? I conduct my son's valet. — Where are you conducting him % I conduct him to the lawyer's office, to show him where it is. — Does your valet conduct this German boy ? He does. — Where to ? He conducts him into the garden to speak to our old German gardener. — Does your old German gardener snuff? No, but he smokes. — Does he work well ? Yes, he does, for he cannot talk (parler a) with the other servants ; and he has to work. Do we conduct any one ? We conduct our children. — Where are your children conducting their uncle ? They are conducting him to the museum, to show it to him. — Conduct me there also. Come with us. — Are they going to show him the theatre ? No, they have no time to show it to him to-day ; they have time only to show him the museum.— Can you pronounce the French of: to extinguish? I believe I can. Let us see, (Voyons, § 150, Art. 2.) Try. Pronounce it is it right? Not quite. Try it again is it better? It is right now. I am very glad of it, for it is a difficult word. — The imperative is not easy. Do you know it ? Yes, I do. — Pronounce it, if you please. With pleasure. — . ... is it right? Not quite. Pro- nounce the gn like gn, in the English word mignonette, gne That is better. Try it again That's right now. — Can you count a little in French? Not much, but I intend to learn. — Will you count? Willingly.— Begin. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6— No, 5—5, 6, 7, 8. No ; do not pronounce the h of huit, say : uit. Uit, 9, 10, 11, 12, &c. (Let the teacher correct, in French, the mistakes as they occur, and note down the number counted in a minute, whenever this exercise takes place.) Eteignez-vous le feu? Je ne Feteins pas, le cuisinier Feteint. TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 139 Qui allume le feu le matin 1 Le cuisinier allume son feu, et mon valet allume le mien. Qui allume celui de votre oncle et de votre cousin ? Us n'ont pas de feu dans leurs appartements, parce qu'ils n'y restent pas. Ou restent-ils ? lis sont avec nous dans le salon quand ils sont a la maison. — Sortent-ils souvent ? Oui. tres-souvent. Vont-ils souvent a Fairmount? Non, pas tres-souvent. Pourquoiy vont-ils? Ils y vont pour voir la machine hydraulique. (the water works.) Vont-ils plus souvent au musee? Oui. ils y vont plus sou- vent. — Sortons-nous aussi souvent que nos voisins a gauche ? Nous sortons moins souvent qu'eux. L'epicier va-t-il aussi souvent au marche que mon jardinier ? Je crois qu'il y va aussi souvent. Al- lumez-vous le gaz tous les jours'? Oui, nous Pallumons tous les soirs. X quelle heure votre domestique Pallume-t-il ? A present, il allume le premier bee a sept heures et demie et les autres plus tard. A quelle heure Peteint-il'? II Peteint a dix heures et demie dans le salon, et dans nos appartements, nous Peteignons a onze heures ou a onze heures et demie. At the beginning (commencement) of the exercise. Unwholesome. It is unwholesome weather. Damp, humid. How goes the tooth- ache ? Since when ? It is better. Excepted. Much obliged. Au commencement du theme. Malsain. C'est un temps malsain. Humid e. Comment va le mal de dents? Depuis quand ? II va mieux. Excepte. Bien oblige. TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 28\li.—Vingt-huitieme Legon, 28me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Obs. 63. Do and Am, when used to interrogate, in the present tense, may be rendered by Est-ce que; which must be used with the first person sin- gular, of those verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would pro- duce an unpleasant or a difficult sound. 1 (Dir. 8.) Do I wish ? Am I willing ? Am I able ? Can I ? Am I doing ? Do I do ? What am I doing ? Est-ce que je veux ? Est-ce que je peux? Est-ce que je fais ? Qu' est-ce que je fais ? 1 Verbs whose first person singular forms only one syllable, as : je sens, I feel ; je pre?ids, I take ; je tends, I tend ; jefonds, I melt : or whose last syllable sounds like je, such as : je mange, I eat ; je venge, I revenge ; je range, I range ; je songe, I dream : and others, such as : j'unis, I unite ; je ve*mets, I permit ; j'offre, I offer ; &c, &c. 140 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) What do I say ? Where am I going to ? To whom do I speak ? Am I going ? Am I coming ? You are. Are you coming ? Do you tell or say ? I do say or tell. He says. He does not say. What does he not say ? What do we not say ? Qu'est-ce que je dis ? Ou est-ce que je vais ? A qui est-ce que je parle ? Est-ce que je vais ? Est-ce que je viens ? Vousvenez. Est-ce que vous venez ? Dites-vous ? Est-ce que vous dites? Je dis. II dit. II ne dit pas. Qu'est-ce qu'il ne dit pas ? Qu'est-ce que nous ne disons pas? Obs. 64. Some verbs, however, ending in e mute in the first person sin- gular, present tense, may be used interrogatively in that person, but then they change e mute into e with the acute accent, followed by je. Do 1 speak ? \ l™ 16 '** ? { P as si hon * ue) ( Est-ce que je parle ? Do I love? 4 £ime-je? Est-ce que j aime ? Connaissez-vous cet homme ? Je ne le connais pas du tout. Votre frere le connait-il ? II le connait beaucoup. Buvez-vous du cidre ? Je commence a boire du cidre, mais mon frere boit du lait. Commencer a, commencant. Je commence a l'aimer. (a av. I' inf.) Commence-t-il a bien etudier ? Je commence a avoir froid — chaud^ II commence a avoir honte — sommeil. Nous commencons a avoir faim et soif. ($ 144. R. 1.) Mai — tres-mal — plus mal — trop mal. Votre oncle parle-t-il bien Anglais ? II le parle mal. lis l'ecrivent bien l'un et l'autre. Une minute, (fern.) Dans quelques minutes. ViNGT-HUiTiisME Theme. Ire Sec. Ecrivez le quantieme au commencement (at the beginning) du theme. Que pensez-vous du temps? Nous le trouvons tr es-desagr Sable. II est froid et humide. Je ne le trouve pas froid ; mais tres-humide. C'est un temps malsain. Tres-malsain, en verite. II n 7 est pas bon pour ceux qui ont des rhumes. Non, et je suis fache de vous dire que Louis en a un tres-mauvais. Depuis quand? Depuis mercredi. — J'ai Phonneur de vous souhaiter le bonsoir. Comment va le mal de dents'? II va mieux, bien oblige. J'en suis bien aise. Are you acquainted with that man ? I am not at all acquainted with him. Is your brother acquainted with him ? He is well acquainted with him. Do you drink cider ? I begin to drink cider, but my brother drinks milk. To begin to ^commence) beginning. I begin to like it. Does he begin to study well ? I begin to be cold — 'to be warm — He begins to be ashamed — sleepy. We commence to be hungry and thirsty. Badly, awkwardly. ($ 170.) Does your uncle speak English well ? He speaks it badly. They both write it well. A minute. In a few minutes. TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, (l.) 141 Comment se porte-t-on chez le general ? Tout le monde s ? y porte bien, excepte le valet irlandais. Qu ; a-t-il? Nous ne savons pas ce que c'est. Est-il tres-mal? Oui, il est oblige de restex dans son lit. Depuis quand est-il malade ? Depuis plusieurs jours. Cependant le Dr. croit qu ? il est un peu mieux. Quand est-il mieux • le ma- tin ou le soir? II est mieux a midi et plus mal le soir. Qu ; a Henri? II a mal a un coude. A quel? Au droit ou au gauche ? Je crois que c'est au gauche ; mais je n ; en suis pas sur. Do I read well? You do. — Do I speak pretty well? You do. — Does my little brother speak French well ? He does. — How does he write German ? He writes it badly. — Who writes it well ? Our young minister does. — Does he write it as well as the Swiss dentist? They both write it well, very well. I do not know who writes the best. — Do we speak badly ? You do not. — Do I drink too much ? You do. — Am I able to make hats? You are not; you are not a hatter. — Am I able to write a note ? You are. — Am I doing my exercise well? You are. — What am I doing? You are doing exercises. — What is my brother doing ? He is doing nothing. — What do I say? You say nothing. — Do I begin to speak? You do begin to speak. — Do I begin to speak well? You do not begin to speak well, (a bien parler,) but to read well, {mais a bien lire.) — Wjiere am I going to? You are going to your friend's. — Is he at home ? — Do I know ? Am I able to speak as often as the son of our neighbor? — He is able to speak oftener than you. — Can I work as much as he? You cannot. — Do I read as often as you? You do not, but you speak oftener than I. — Do I speak as well (aussi bien) as you? You do not speak as well as I. — Do I go to your house, or do you come to mine ? You come to mine, and I go to yours. — When do you come to mine? Every morning, at half past six. Do you know the Russian whom I know ? I do not know the one you know, but I know another. — Do you drink as much cider as wine ? I drink less of the latter than of the former. — Does the Pole drink as much as the Russian? He drinks just as much. — Do the Germans drink as much as the Poles? The latter drink more than the former. — Dost thou receive anything? I do. — What dost thou receive? I receive some money. — Does your friend receive books? He does. — What do we receive ? We receive some cider. — Do the Poles receive tobacco ? They do. — From whom (de qui) do the Spaniards receive money? They receive some from the {dies) English, and from the (des) French. Comptez-vous tous les jours en Francais? Oui, nous comptons. N ; aimez-vous pas a compter? (Let the pupil give his or her own 142 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) answer.) Combien comptez-vous dans une minute 'a minute)? Je compte 125. — Et vous? Moi, je ne compte pas tant. Je ne compte que 98. — Et vous, et votre cousin Armando Nous comptons 128 Est-ce plus que lui? Oui ; c'est plus. Combien de plus? Trois de plus. (30 1 .) C 7 est vrai, vous avez raison. Et vous ? combien comp- tez-vous de moins qu'enx? Je compte trois de moins. Combien de plus que lui ? Je compte 27 de plus que lui. C ; est beaucoup, n ; est-ce pas ? C ? est assez. du moins. A degree, 32°, zero, 75°, 100°, 212o. Thank God. Un degre, 32°, zero, 75°, 100°, 212°. Dieu merci. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Avant, (de, avant un infinitif.) Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? J'ecoute avant de repondre. Obs. 65. As speak and listen have you for nominative, dispense with the second you, and use the infinitive mood after the preposition. (Rule 3.) Before, (previous to.) (R. 1.) Do you speak before you listen ? I listen before I answer. Does he go to market before he breakfasts ? To breakfast. To eat breakfast. He goes (there) before he writes. Do you take off your stockings be- fore you take off your shoes ? To depart, set out, start ; departing. "When do you intend to depart ? I set out to-morrow for Paris. I depart, thou startest, he sets out. Do they go to see their uncle before they start for Charleston? They do. To wet, to moisten, to damp, wetting. Wet, damp, (adjectives.) Are your shoes wet? Yes, they are quite wet. Va-t-il au marche avant de dejeuner ? Dejeuner, 1. II y va avant d'ecrire. Otez-vous vos bas avant d'oter vos souliers ? Partir,* 2; partant. Quand comptez-vous partir ? Je pars demain pour Paris. Jepars, tu pars, il part. Vont-ils voir leur oncle avant de par- tir pour Charleston ? lis y vont. Mouiller, 1. Mouillant. Mouille, (sing.) Mouilles, (plur.) Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles ? Oui, ils sont tout mouilles. Obs. 66. Tout, quite, being an adverb is invariable, that is, does not take an s. To dry, to get to dry. I dry, thou driest, he dries. (§ 144, R. 5.) Dry your shoes. Take a seat near the fire and dry your shoes and feet. It is very warm ; very cold. In use. Much, commonly, greatly, used. Almost, all, always, too much. Secher, 1. Faire secher. Je seche, tu seches, il seche. Sechez vos souliers (better) faites secher, &c. Prenez un siege pres du feu, et faites secher vos souliers et vos pieds. II fait grand chaud ; grand froid. En usage. En grand usage. Presque, presque tout, toujours, trop. TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 143 Vingt-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. Ecrivez le jour du mois au commencement du theme. Mr., nous vous souhaitons le bonjour, et nous esperons que voua vous portez bien. Je vous suis bien oblige, Messieurs, et je vois avec plaisir que vous avez Pair de vous bien porter. Nous nous portons bien, Dieu merci. (thank God,) mais nous avons grand chaud, (very warm.) Je le crois, car, il fait grand chaud. A quel degre est le thermometre ? Le mien est a 80° ; mais celui du voisin est a 82 J. Vous parlez du thermometre de Fahrenheit. iPest-ce pas'? Oui, car c 7 est ici le seul en grand usage. Si ce temps continue je ne peux pas rester ici. Ou allez-vous? A Cape May. Quand p arte z- vous ? Je pars mardi ou jeudi. Partez-vous seul ? Non, je pars avec mon cousin. Pourquoi part-il avec vous? Parce qu : il est malade. Qu*a- t-il ? II a peur d'avoir le tic douloureux. Le tic douloureux ! Je suis bien fache de Papprendre. Nous en sommes tous faches. Je le crois. Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles? Je crois que non. S ; ils le sont, je peux vous en preter d'autres, et vous pouvez faire secher les votres. Non, merci. Vous etes bien bon. II est 8£ heures et Louis n'est pas encore ici. Ce matin il n ; est pas ponctuel comme a Pordi- naire. Mon habit est tout mouille et mon gilet aussi. Changez les et faites-les secher. Ou puis -je les faire secher? Donnez-les au domestique pour les mettre pres du feu. Les souliers et les bas de ce petit enfant sont mouilles. Jean, otez-les et faites-les secher; car le pauvre enfant commence a avoir froid. Oui, Mile. Do I receive as much Spanish money as American ? You receive more of the latter than of the former. — Do I receive as many people {autant de monde) as the Doctor? You do. — Who receives more than he ? more than we ? The apothecary does. — From whom (de qui) do your children receive books? They receive some from me, (de moi,) and from their friends. — Do the English receive as much Turkish as American cotton? They receive more American than Turkish cotton. — Our New Orleans merchants receive more French than English cloth, do they not? I believe they do. — What gloves do we receive? We receive French gloves. — How many books does your neighbor lend you? He lends me three more. (30 1 .) — When does the foreigner intend to depart? He intends to depart to-day. — Depart with him, can you not? Can I not? No, indeed: and you know very well that I am not ready. — But you can soon be ready. Do you think so? (le?) To be sure I do. Does the Swede depart soon ? He departs in a few minutes — Does he depart alone ? No, he takes a valet with him, because he does not speak English well enough to go alone. He is right. — Dost thou set out 144 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) to-morrow ? Dost thou intend to go with, me ? No, for we do not intend to depart before 10 days. Then I have to bid you adieu. Do the Clintons (Les Clinton, (§ 140, Art. 5) answer you imme- diately when you write to them? They usually answer me imme- diately, when they are not sick. Well ; write to them to know if I can go to their house on Saturday, and tell them to answer directly. — Are you not going to read the dentists' note before you answer it? Yes, I am reading it now. Ah! pardon me, (pardonner.) — Does this Irish servant of yours (votre domestique irlandais, § 108) sweep your apartment before he makes your bed? No, he makes the bed before he sweeps the room. — Dost thou drink before thou goest out? I do. — Do you like to go to market before you eat breakfast? I do not, for I am almost always sick when I do it. — Henry, put on your shoes and stockings. No, indeed, I intend to put on my stockings before I put on my shoes. — Dost thou read first and translate after- wards ? Yes, I do so ) but I translate the exercise first, and write it afterwards. You do well; that is right-— Do you go to the Pole's house before you breakfast ? Yes, I do. — At what o'clock do your children breakfast ? They breakfast at seven o'clock. — Do you take snuff before breakfasting ? No, but I smoke after breakfast. — Does your son smoke also after breakfast? He does not smoke at all, and I am glad of it. Does he chew or snuff? No, he does neither. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, 29th.— Vingt-neuvieme Legon, 29me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. The French have two kinds of comparison ; that of equality, formed by autant de before nouns, and aussi, before adjectives or adverbs, and que after them ; (16 1 , 27 2 .) and that of inequality, formed by plus or moins, before, and que after the same parts of speech. The superlative is formed by prefixing to the comparative, not only the definite article le, les, but any of those which we have called articles (§ 1), mon, mes, &c. ce, cet, ces. Positif. Comparatif. Superlatif. Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. Petit, plus petit, mon plus petit. Riches, plus riches, ces plus riches. Pauvres, pluspauvres, mes plus pau- vres. Savant, plus savant, le plus savant Positive. Comparative, Superlative. Great, greater, the greatest. Small, smaller, my smallest. Rich, richer, these richest. Poor, poorer, my poorest. Learned, more learned, the most learned. Quickly, quicker, the quickest. Often, more often, most often. Vite, plus vite, le plus vite. Souvent,plussouvent,le plus sou- vent. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, (l.) 145 This book is small, that is smaller, and this is the smallest of all. This hat is large, but that is larger. Is your hat as large as mine ? It is larger than yours. It is not so large as yours. Bulky, less bulky, the least bulky. Fine, less fine, the least fine. Slowly, not so slowly, the least slowly. Good, not so good, the least good. Are our neighbor's children as good as ours ? {good is sage when applied to children.) They are better than ours. They are not so good as ours, they are the least good of all. Obs. 67. To express the absolute superlative, that is, the highest degree, without comparison, the French, like the English, use one of the adverbs, tres, fort, bien, very; extremement, extremely; i?ifiniment, infinitely. Un tres-beau sofa. De tres-beaux sofas. Ce livre-ci est petit, celui-la est plus petit, et celui-ci est le plus petit de tous. Ce chapeau-ci est grand, mais celui- la est plus grand. Votre chapeau est-ii aussi grand que le mien ? II est plus grand que le votre. II est moins grand que le votre. Gros, moins gros, le moins gros. Beau, moins beau, le moins beau. Lentement, moins lentement, le moins lentement. Sage, moins sage, le moins sage. Les enfants de notre voisin sont-ils aussi sages que les notres ? lis sont plus sages que les notres. lis sont moins sages que les notres, ce sont les moins sages de tous. A very fine sofa. Very fine sofas. A very pretty knife. Very well. To be used to ... . To be used to it. Why do you speak more in English than in French ? Because we are used to it. (Obs. 48.) What are they used to take in the morning and evening ? They are used to take coffee in the morning and tea in the evening. What am I used to ? He is not yet used to it. Tres-bien, Un tres-joli couteau. fort bien. Etre accoutume a . . . . Y etre accoutume. ($ 50.) Pourquoi parlez-vous plus en Anglais qu'en Frangais ? Parce que nous y sommes accou- tumes. Que sont-ils accoutumes a prendre le matin et le soir ? lis sont accoutumes a prendre du cafe, le matin, et du the, le soir. A quoi est-ce que je suis accoutume ? II n'y est pas encore accoutume. Vingt-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. Mettez le quantieme du mois ici en Francais. Faites-nous des questions aujourd'hui, s'il vous plait. Volontiers Quel temps fait-il? Qui peut me repondre ? Nous pouvons tous vous repondre. Commencez, M. Legris. Vous voulez savoir quel temps il fait? Oui, M., s'il vous plait. Je vais vous le dire avec grand plaisir, le plus grand plaisir du monde. Dites-le done, (then.) 13 146 TWENTY -NINTH LESSON. (1.) Laissez-moi voir si j'ai le Francais de unwholesome. Oh! oui; nous Pavons. Alors, il fait un temps humide et malsaiii. Oui, vous avez raison, il fait un temps humide et malsain, depuis deux ou trois jours. N 7 est-ce pas extraordinaire? Si fait: c'est extraordi- naire^ car le temps change tres-souvent. Mais il ne fait pas froid. Au contraire, il fait chaud. II fait presque toujours chaud quand il fait humide, n 7 est-ce pas? Oui, sans doute. Ce temps humide n'est pas bon pour le rhume du petit Robert, qu'en pensez-vous ? Je pense que non, et j 7 en suis fache, car c'est un bon petit garcon- Comment se porte le frere du docteur? II se porte tres-bien a pre- sent. Et comment va le vieux cuisinier du general ? II va mal. II est presque toujours malade, n'est-ce pas? Oui, mais ce n'est pas extraordinaire, car il est tres- vieux. Are you taller (grand) than I? I am taller than you. — Is your young brother taller than you? No, but I believe that he is just as tall. — Is thy leather hat as bad as my father's ? It is better, but not so black as his. — Are the clothes (les habits) of the Italians as fine as those of the Irish ? They are finer, but not so good. — Who makes the finest gloves? The French make them. — Who makes the finest cloth? The French and Spanish do. — Who has the finest horses ? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine, but those of our friends are the finest of all. — Why do the French take wine at breakfast ? Because they are used to it. — See, those poor children have neither shoes nor stockings; are they not cold? No, indeed! they are used to it. — Am I used to write quick or slow ? You are used to write slowly; but your cousin is used to write very quick. — Who is more learned than this old Prussian ? I do not know who js more learned than he. — Is the minister more learned than the druggist? Yes, he is more learned than the druggist; but the law- yer is the mo^ learned of all. — Who is the richest merchant here? Mr. is the richest. — Do we read more books than the Dntch? We read more (of them) than they, but the Prussians read (of them) more than we, and the Russians read the least, (le moins.) Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician ? I have a finer one than he. — Have the Americans a finer telegraph than the other nations ? They have the finest of all. — Are the shawls of this merchant larger and finer than those of that one ? They are larger, but not so fine. — Have we as fine children as our neighbors? We have finer ones. — Is the weather as bad as yesterday? No, it is not so bad ; but it is warmer, and I am not sorry for it. I believe it, for I know that you like the heat. — Do the French speak more quickly than the English, Irish, Scots, and other nations? I believe not. Some (quelqnes uns) speak quickly, but others speak slqwly. ($ 38.) TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 147 —Are your clothes as wet as mine or his ? Yours are more wet than mine j but his are not wet at all. — Do you depart for Washing- ton, soon? I start to-morrow. — Do you go alone? No, cousin William starts with me. — When do you set out? We set out at 3 o'clock. — George, go for some cigars; these gentlemen want some to smoke. — Yes, Sir: but before going, I have to put my shoes on. They are wet, and they are near the fire to dry. — Which of these two children is the better? (sage?) The one (N. pa. 43) who studies is better than the one who plays. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Adjectifs Irriguliers . Bon, meilleur, mon meilleur. Mauvais, pire, le pire. Irregular Adjectives. Good, better, my best. Bad, worse, the worst. Small, little, less, the least. Irregular Adverbs. Well, better, the best. Bad, worse, the worst. Little, less, the least. Much, more, the most. Obs. 68. We may with equal correctness say : plus mauvais, plus mal, plus petit, but never plus bon, plus bien, plus peu. Obs. 69. Never use pire immediately before a noun. Do not say: un pire chien ; but, un plus mauvais chien. Votre chien est _pire que celui-ci is correct, but: plus mauvais, is to be preferred. Petit, moindre, le moindre. Adverbes Irreguliers. Bien, mieux, le mieux. Mal, pis. le pis. Peu, moins, le moins. Beaucoup, plus, le plus. A qui ? (Pronom poss. non relatif.) A qui est ce chapeau-ci ? C'est. C'est le mien — le sien — la votre. (§ 104, &c.) C'est le dictionnaire de mon oncle. A qui sont ces gants de chamois ? Ce sont les votres, les tiens, lesleurs. Ce sont les manteaux des enfants. Whose, (to whom ?) (§ 109.) Whose hat is this ? It is. It is mine — hers — yours. It is my uncle's dictionary, It is the dictionary of my uncle. It is my uncle's. Whose kid gloves are those ? They are ours — thine — theirs. (§ 39.) They are the children's cloaks. Who has the best rice ? Whose rice is the best ? The grocer has it. It is the grocer's. | L'epicier Pa. C'est celui de Pepicier. Who has the smallest feet ? Whose feet are the smallest ? Miss C. has the smallest. Miss C.'s are. That of my father is the finest. Whose ribbon is the handsomer, yours or mine ? Yours is, (so left out.) \ Qui ui a le meilleur riz ? > Qui a les plus petits pieds ? Mile. C. a les plus petits. Ce sont ceux de Mile. C. Celui de mon pere est le plus beau. Quel ruban est le plus beau ? Le votre ou le mien ? Le votre Z'est. Obs. 70. So, in similar sentences, whether expressed or not, is rendered in French, by le or V . 148 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) Does that boy read better than the man? He does so. He does not (do so). Is this grain better than the last ? It is. It is much better. 60 the Swedes write less than the Poles ? They write less than the other na- tions. Who makes most money ? The baker, the butcher, or the milkman ? They all make a great deal. Is your gardener good, or a good one ? He is, but his cousin is not. Here is. Here he is or it is. Here is some. Where are the big knives ? Here thev are. Ce gar§on lit-il mieux que Phomme 1 II le fait. II ne le fait pas. Ce grain-ci est-il meilleur que le dernier ? II Z'est. II est beaucoup meilleur. Les Suedois ecrivent-ils moins que les Polonais ? lis ecrivent moins que les autrea nations. Qui fait le plus d' argent ? Le bou- langer, le boucher, ou le laitier ? lis en font tous beaucoup. Votre jardinier est-il bon ? II Test, mais son cousin ne l'est pas. Void. Le voici. En voici. Ou sont les gros couteaux ? Les voici. Vingt-neuvieme Theme. 2de See. Ici, n'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme, en Frangais. Vous avez Pair d'avoir froid. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait grand froid. A quel degre est le thermometre ? Je n'ai pas de ther- mometre; je ne sais pas a quel degre il est. Mais j'ai froid, ca, (§ 38, N. 6,) je le sais. Comment se porte le medecin ? II se porte plus mal. Son rhume est-il pire? Oui, il Pest. Quelqu'un a-t-il mal de tete 1 Moi, je Pai un pen ; avez-vous quelque chose a me don- ner? Oai, j'ai quelque chose qui est tres-bon pour le mal de tete. Donnez-le-moi. Je Pai dansmon portefeuille. Laissez-moi le cher- eher. Tres-bien, cherchez-le et donnez-le-moi. Je Pai a present. Le voici. Prer.ez-le. Je Pai. Lisez le papier pour savoir comment le preparer (to prepare) et le prendre. Je vous suis bien oblige. Je vais le lire tout de suite pour le preparer et le prendre. Preparez-le bien. Je vais essayer. Est-ce difficile a preparer? Non, ce n 7 est pas difficile a preparer. Adieu : je vais Parranger. Adieu, adieu. Whose big book is this? It is mine. — Whose hat is that? It is my father's. — Is your baker good? (or a good one?) He is good, but yours is better ; and that of the Prussian is the best of all our bakers. — Take some pretty velvet shoes. I have very pretty ones, but my brother has still prettier ones than I. — From whom (de qui) does he receive them? He receives them from his best friend in Paris. — Is your wine as good as mine? Here is some; taste it. anc then you may know, and tell me. Is it better, or as good, or worse ? It is better. — Does your merchant sell good knives? He sells the best. — Do we not read more books than the Irish ? Yes, we read THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 149 more than they ; but the Russians read (of them) more than we. and the Prussians read the most. — Why do they read the most ? Because they wish to be the most learned. — Do the merchants sell more sugar than coffee ? They sell more of the latter than of the former.^ Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine? — He makes more of them than yours. — Can you swim as well (aussi bien) as my son ? I can swim better than he ? but he can speak French better than I. — Does he read as well as you? He reads better than I. — Does the son of your neighbor go to market? No, he remains at home : he has sore feet. — Do you learn as well as our gardener's son ? I learn better than he ; but he works better than I. — Whose gun is the finest ? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one finer children than you ? No one has finer ones. — Does your son read as often as I % He reads oftener than you. — Does my brother speak French as often as you ? He speaks and reads it as often as I. — Do I write as much as you? You write more than I. — Do our neighbor's children read German as often as we? We do not read it so often as they. — Do we write it as often as they? They write oftener than we. — To whom do they write ? They write to their friends. — Do you read English books ? We read French books instead of reading English books. THIRTIETH LESSON, 30th.— Trentieme Legon, 30me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To believe, believing. I believe, thou believest, he believes. I believe that you know it. I believe you know nothing of it. To put, put on. Put, put on, (impera.) Do I put on your kid gloves ? Does he not put on ? is he not putting ? He puts on. He does not. What do you put on ? I put this on. Do they put on anything more ? i Mettent-ils quelque chose dc plus ? Obs. 71. We saw in (Obs. 7,) that : quelque chose; ne . . . .rien and quel require de before the following adjective ; now we add : when a noun, pro* noun, number, or adjective precedes an adverb or past participle, the prepo sition de (as a connecting link) must be put before the adverb. 13* Croire,* 4, croyant. Je crois, tu crois, il croit. Je crois que vous le savez. Je crois que vous n'en savez rien. Mettre. (25 1 .) Mettez, (impera.) Est-ce que je mets vos gants de cha- mois ? Est-ce qu'il ne met pas ? Ne met-il pas? II met. II ne met pas. Que mettez-vous ? Je mets ceci. 150 THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) They put nothing more. Do you go out ? I do. Do you not put on your big shoes ? Yes, I do. I do not go out without putting them on when the weather is bad. Without you, me, him. them, us, thee. Does he go out without taking his umbrella and his cloak ? He does not go out without taking them. To rain. Does it rain ? It does. Is the weather cloudy ? It is (so). Do I go out when the weather is cloudy ? Neither you nor we go out. Early. Early enough. As early as you, as they. He goes out as early as we. Too soon, too early. Too little, (adv.), too small, too great. You speak too little, and he too much Together. We go out together. Later than you. I go out later than you. • Do you go to the play as early as I ? I go thither earlier than you. Ea'Her, (sooner.) Does your father go thither earlier than I ? Try to go as soon as he. lis ne mettent rien de plus. Sortez-vous? Je sors. Ne mettez-vous pas vos gros souliers,? Si fait, je les mets. Je ne sors paa sans les mettre quand il faLt mau- vais temps. Sans vous, moi, lui, eux, nous, toi. Sort-il sans prendre son parapluie et son manteau? (R. 1.) II ne sort pas sans les prendre. Pleuvoir* 3. Pleut-il ? II pleut. Le temps est-il couvert ? II Z'est. Est-ce que je sors quand le temps est couvert ? Ni vous ni nous ne sortons. De bonne heure. D' assez bonne heure. D'aussibo7ine heure que vous.qu'eux. II sort d'aussi bonne heure que nous. Trop tot, de trop bonne heure. Trop peu, trop petit, trop grand. Vous parlez trop peu, et lui trop. Ensemble. Nous sortons ensemble. Plus tard que vous. Je sors plus tard que vous. Allez-vousau spectacle d'aussi bonne heure que moi ? J'y vais plus tot (de meilleure heure) que vous. Plus tot, (de meilleure heure.) Votre pere y va-t-ii plus tot que moi, (de meilleure heure que moi ?) Essay ez J'y aller aussi tot que lui. Trentieme Theme. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas la date ici. Bon jour, M., vous vous portez bien, j'espere ; mais pourquoi avez- vous un parapluie ? Pleut-il ? Non, il ne pleut pas encore ; mais le temps est couvert, tres-couvert, et quand il /'est, je ne sors pas sans prendre un parapluie. Vous avez raison de le faire, car il est tres-desagreable d'etre dehors sans parapluie, quand il pleut. Ne pleut-il pas a present? Si fait, je crois qu'il commence a pleuvoir. Oui, c'est vrai. II commence a pleuvoir, mais pas beaucoup encore. Moi, je suis bien aise de voir lapluie, (the rain,) car nous avonstrop de poussiere. C'est vrai, vous n'avez pas tort; il fait beaucoup trop de poussiere. N ; avez-vous pas mal aux yeux quand il fait de la poussiere 1 Si fait, j 7 y ai souvent mal alors. Pas moi. Comment THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 151 se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde y est assez bien. Per- sonne n'est malade, excepte notre domestique. Qu'a-t-il? II a un gros rhume et un peu mal aux dents. — II pleut, mais il ne fait pas froid, n'est-ce pas ? C'est vrai, il ne fait pas froid, mais tres-humide et malsain. Nous le croyons comme vous. Quand il fait froid et humide ; mettez quelque chose de plus. Et quand il fait chaud, quelque chose de moins, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est cela. C'est le plus prudent. Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ? I put on my French coat to go. — Do you put on your kid gloves before you put on your big sho^s ? I put on my overshoes before I put on my kid gloves. — Does the lawyer put on his round hat before he puts on his blue coat ? He puts on his coat first, instead of putting on his round hat. — Is he not right in doing so ? Yes, he is. — Do you go out early, every morning ? Yes, we do. — Do you go out when your son does ? Yes, we go out together. — Early ? No, not very early. We breakfast first — Do you breakfast together? To be sure. — At what o'clock do you begin to breakfast? We begin at half past 6. (Do you, indeed?) En verite? Then you breakfast early. — Do you eat dinner early, too ? I think we dine earlier than you, for we dine at half past one. — Is it possible? Do you dine as early as that? — We dine then, when we are all at home : but if we wait for those who are absent, (absents,) then we dine together, and later. — Does your uncle write before he breakfasts ? No, he does not. — What does he ? He reads the paper. — Is he fond of reading the paper? Yes, he likes it very much. — When it is cloudy wea- ther, does he go out without his umbrella ? No, he always takes it. — Does he often go to the museum ? He does, often. — Does he go there oftener than your cousin ? No, they always go together. Do you translate your exercise early or late ? I alwaj^s translate it in the morning, as early as I can. — Do you translate it from the book or do you read it, when you recite it to your teacher ? We translate it instead of reading it, when we recite it to him. — Do you begin to like mutton? No, I cannot bear it. — Does your cousin like it? No, he does not; he cannot bear it. — But your uncle William does like it j don't he ? He ! yes, he likes it. — Do you eat supper early? We do not eat supper late. — At what o'clock do they take tea at the doctor's? They take tea quite late. — Later than you do? Yes, much later; but at the general's they take it very early. — Do the Pole and Russian go early to the con- cert ? Yes, they do. — Let us go earlier than they ; will you ? Will- ingly. Let us go before them. — At what o'clock can you be ready? [ can be ready at 6 or J past 6. It is soon enough; is it not? I THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) believe so; for the concert does not begin before 7. — Do you nol put on something more ? No, this is enough : I wish nothing more. — Do I write too much? No, but you talk (speak) too much. — Do I speak more than you? You do, very often, and so does your brother. — Do you count quick ? Yes, in English I count pretty fast. — No, I mean in French. — I do not count very fast in French. — Does he count as fast as you ? Who ? This youth ? Yes, he ; this youth. Do I know ? — How many do you count in a minute ? — How many does he count ? Try. both of you. — We are going to try to count as fast as we can. — Very w r ell ; try to do it. — Must we try anything more ? No, nothing more, now. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Already, yet. Is it already done ? Do you speak already ? Does he start already ? (depart.) Not yet. No, not yet. I do not speak yet. He departs immediately. Do you finish your exercise already ? I finish it at this very moment, {time.) Do you give us anything to do ? Do I not always give you something to do? Obs. 72. We have seen, in the preceding lessons, that when two verbs are joined, the first sometimes requires no preposition 1 to connect itself with the second ; that sometimes it takes the preposition a ; 2 at others de. 3 See lists of those verbs <'§ 156), preceded by a short explanation. The scholar was directed to form for himself lists of those verbs, of nouns, adjectives, &c, as they are presented in the vocabularies. In order to see how he has performed that task, I here insert the model of a dialogue on the subject, which teachers may modify according to circumstances. Deja. Est-ce deja fait ? Parlez-vous deja ? Part-il deja ? Ne . . . pas encore. Non, pas encore. Je ne parle pas encore. II part tout de suite. Finissez-vous deja votre theme ? Je le finis a present mtme. Nous donnez-vous quelque chose a faire ? Est-ce que je ne vous donne pas toujours quelque chose a faire ? Mr. Armand, have you a catalogue of the verbs which govern other verbs without a preposition ? Yes, Sir, I have. Which is the first verb on your catalogue ? It is voulez- vovs ? That is right. But instead of writing down voulez-vous ? make use of the infinitive. Do you know it ? Yes, Sir, I do. It is vouloir, is it not ? Yes, that is it. So, your first verb which governs another M. Armand, avez-vous un catalogue des verbes qui en gouvernent d'au- tres sans preposition ? Ou/ M-. j'en ai un. Quel est le premier verbe sur votre catalogue ? C'est voulez-vous? C'est bien. Mais au lieu d'ecrire, voulez-vous ? faites usage de l'infinitif. Le savez- vous ? Oui, M.,je le sais. C'esl vouloir, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'es/ cela. Ainsi, votre premier verba W18 1 , 19 1 .) 2 (21 2 , 253.) '(17 1 , 22 2 .) THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 153 without a preposition is voutoir, is it not ? Yes, Sir, it is that. In what vocabulary is it ? I do not know, but. I have the folio, (page.) That will do. What is the second verb of your catalogue ? It is allez- vous ? What is its infinitive ? It is oiler. Very well. Make use of aller, instead of allez-vous ? On what page is it ? On the. . . . To hear, to understand. Hearing. I understand. I do not understand. Do you understand me ? I do. I understand you in part. I do not understand you at all. Is it possible ? Do you not understand a single word ? No, not a single one. Obs. 73. The infinitive has no preposition before it when it is used in an absolute sense, or as a nominative case. qui en gouverne un autre sans preposition est vouloir, n'est-ce pas? Oui, M., c'est cela. Dans quel vocabulaire est-il ? Je ne sais; mais j'ai le feuillet. Cela sujfit. Quel est le second verbe de votre catalogue ? C'est allez- vous ? Quel en est Vinjinitif? (§ 31.) C'est aller. Tres-bien. Faites usage de aller au lieu de allez-vous ? A quel feuillet est- il ? Au Entendre, 4. Entendant. T entends. Je n 1 entends pas. M* entendez-vous ? Je vous entends. Je vous entends en partie. Je ne vous entends pas du tout. Est-il possible ? N'entendez-vous pas un seul mot ? Non, pas un seul. To eat too much is dangerous. To speak too much is foolish. To do good to those who have offended us, is a commendable action. Sometimes. Several times. Never mind, no matter. Manger trop est danger eux. Parler trop est imprudent. Faire du bien a ceux qui nous ont offenses, est une action louable. Quelque fois. Plusieurs fois. W importe. Trentieme Theme. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Francois. Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir? Quelque fois bien, quelque fois mal; mais vous. com- ment vous etes-vous porte ? Je me suis toujours bien porte. Je le crois, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le pensez-vous 1 Tout le monde me dit que j'ai Pair malade. Moi, au contraire. je pense que vous avez tres-bon air. Mais, ce petit garcon-la ira pas bon air. C'est vrai, et je crois qu'il est un peu malade. L'etes-vous, mon petit ami? Oui. M., j'ai un peu mal de tete. Depuis quand? Depuis ce matin de bonne heure. Avant dejeuner? Oui, un peu avant. Entendez-vous ce que ce petit garcon dit ? Non, je ne 1 'entends pas bien. L'entendez-vous, vous? Oui, je l'entends parfaitement, parce que je suis accoutume a l'entendre. Et moi, je ne l'entends pas, parce que je n'y suis pas accoutume. Vous avez raison. Voyez- vous quelquefois le cousin du vieux general? Je le vois sou vent: mais savez-vous qu'il part? Pour ou? (where to?) Pour la Cali- 154 THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) fornie. Est-il possible? Quand part-ill Je crois qu'il est deja pret a partir. Dans quel batiment part-in II part dans le .... Est-ce un bon batiment'? Je crois que oui. N'est-ce pas le batiment de M. C ? Non, il n'est plus a Mr. C ; mais a M. H Allons le voir. Oui, allons-y. Mais, voyez do7ic 7 (see there ,) il pleut. N'importe. Prenons nos parapluies. Je n'aUpas le mien ici. N'im- porte. Nous pouvons vous en preter un. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas le vdtre ? Je ne le prends pas toujours quand le temps est couvert. Moi, au contraire, je ne sors pas sans prendre le mien quand le temps est couvert. Vous etes plus prudent que moi. N'importe. Partons. Vous faut-il un mouchoir de plus ? J'en ai un ; c'est assez. Is my Italian hat too large ? It is neither too large nor too small. — Do you speak French oftener than English? I speak the latter oftener than the former. — Do your uncle and cousin buy much New York corn ? They buy but little. — Have I enough fresh bread ? You have only a little, but enough. — Is it late ! Why do you believe it is late ? Because I begin to be sleepy, (a avoir sommeil.) You may be sleepy, but it is not late. — What o'clock is it ? It is only half past nine. — Is it too late to go to your father's? Why do you wish to go to my father's? I wish to return {rendre) him this French book. — Is it, (3, §39,) a pretty book? It is a very pretty book. Will you conduct me there ? Can you not find the way alone ? I believe I cannot in the evening. — I do not wish to go there now. Give me the book, I can return it to him. No; I have to return it to him myself. (Moi-meme, $ 4l£.) Very well. Do it, then. — Does the young Spaniard buy an Arabian horse ? He cannot buy one. — Why ? [s he poor? He is not poor; he is richer than you. Why can he not buy one then ? Because {no Arabian horse can be found here) he cannot find any Arabian horse here. — Is this Swiss as learned as that Pole ? He is just as learned, I believe ; but you are more learned than they and I. — Are you studying already? No, not yet. I am smoking. — Do you smoke so early ? Yes, sometimes ; when I am cold. Do you understand that gentleman ? I do. — Is he learned ? He is. — What is he ? A lawyer ? A minister ? An apothecary ? A mer- chant? Or nothing at all? I believe he is a little of everything, (un peu de tout.) — Is your horse worse than mine ? It is not so bad as yours. — Is mine worse than the Dutchman's? It is worse. It is the worst horse (Obs. 69) that I know, (connaisse* subjunct.) Do you give those men less silver than paper? (Dir. 3.) I give them more of the former than of the latter; for some of them cannot read, and they do not like the paper. — Who receives the most money? The English do. — Cannot your sen write a note in French ? He cannot, THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 155 but he begins to read a little. — Do the Americans write more than we 1 They write less than we • but the Italians write the least. — Are they as rich as the Americans? They are less rich than they. — Are your birds as fine as our neighbor's 1 They are less fine • but never mind, ours are fine enough. Faites du bien ; do you under- stand that, Mr. Charles ? Is it do well ? No, Sir, that's not it, or it is not that. Then I do not understand it all, but in part. And you, Mr. Durand, do you understand it? I believe I do not understand it. Never mind. Who understands it ? I. What is its English ? ( $ 3 1-1.) Do good. That's right. I see that you understand it. I believe I do. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RESUME. L'oiseau a-t-il son grain ? Non, il ne Fa pas. Ne le lui donnez- vous pas tous les matins? Si fait, quand j'y pense; mais aujour- d'hui il n'a pas faim, il ne mange pas, parce qu'il a mal au pied. — Qui a le pistolet de Petranger? Personne ne Pa. — Avez-vous les porte-feuilles de cuir de ces deux matelots? Je n'ai que le porte- feuille de Fun d'eux. Je ne sais pas qui a celui de Pautre. Est-ce celui du grand et vieux que vous avez? Non. c'est celui du jeune et petit que nous avons. N'allez-vous pas le lui rendre ? Si fait, s'il le veut: mais il dit qu'il n'en a pas besoin. N'a-t-il plus d'ar- gent? Je crois que non; du moins, il n ; a plus de billets. — Le bceuf et le cheval ont-ils leur foin ? Oui, ils ont leur foin. Mangent-ils le foin que vous leur donnez? Ils le trouvent bon, car ils le mangent bien. Que mangent-ils encore ? Ils mangent leur grain. — Qu'a ce garcon? Lequel? Le bon garcon. Lui? il a toujours quelque chose de joli. — L'enfant du tailleur a-t-il quelque chose de vieux ou de vilain ? Non, il n'a rien de vieux ni de vilain ; mais il a un joli porte-crayon d'acier. Qu'avez-vous ? Rien. — Qu'a M. Carnot? II n'a rien. — Qu'a son frere? Qui? le frere de Carnot? Oui, son frere. II n' a rien. — Ce jeune homme-la a-t-il faim ? Non, il n'a pas faim, car il a du pain, du fromage, des biscuits, et il n'en mange pas. — Pourquoi faites- vouscela 7 Nous avons honte de vous. Quoi ! Vous avez honte de ce que je fais? Nous en avons honte, pour vous. Vous etes bien bon, en verite ! — Ils ont soif; avez-vous beaucoup de cafe ce soir a leur donner? Je n'en ai guere; mais j'en ai assez pour eux. — Que pensez-vous de Phabit de ce garcon-la? II a trop de boutons, n'est- ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison de le dire, et son gilet n'en a pas assez. Combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a que deux, je crois. — Le fermier n ; a-t-il pas de vieux chevaux ? Non, il n'en a que de jeunes. — Nous avons faim, avez-vous du pain a nous donner? Je n'ai pas de pain mais j ; ai d'excellents biscuits. — Le jeune etranger a-t-il soif? Je croip 156 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, (l.) que oui, car il boit souvent ($ 170 ) II boit quoi? Un peu de kit, un peu de vin. J : ai besoin de savon ; dites-moi ou je puis en trouver de bon ? Vous pouvez en acheter de tres-bon chez M Ou est son magasin? Dans la rue Chestnut, pres de la.... Je vous re- m^rcie. De rien. N 7 avez-vous besoin de rien de plus! Non pas ce matin. — Qui a le gros et grand couteau du cuisinier? En a-t-il besoin pour tuer quelque chose % Je ne sais pas pourquoi il en a besoin • mais il le cherche. L ; avez-vous ? Savez-vous ou il peut le trouver! Non, je n ? en sais rien. — Le Hollandais a-t-il quelque chose a boire 1 Pourquoi? A-t-il soif? Oui, il a soif, et le Prussien, PIrlandais, et FEcossais ont soif aussi. Donnez-leur du vin, s'ils ont soif, et de vieux pain, s ; ils ont faim. — Ce Suisse n'a pas bon air; est-il malade ? Je ne sais pas, et comme il ne parle ni Anglais ni Francais nous ne pouvons pas parler ensemble. Qu'est-ce qu'il parle ? Suisse, je pense. — Quel joli oiseau Mile. Emilie a ! Qu'est-ce que c'est ? Je n 7 en sais pas le nom. Chante-t-il ? Parle-t-il % N'importe. S'il est joli, n'est-ce pas assez? C ; est beaucoup; mais s'il fait quelque chose de plus, c'est encore meilJeur. Madame Leblanc, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde se porte bien, je vous remercie. Entrez; venez vous asseoir. Non, je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. Pourquoi done ? J'ai a aller chez notre epicier pour acheter beau- coup de choses. Qu'avez-vous a acheter'? Je ne peux pas vous dire tout, mais en voici le catalogue. Lisez-le, si vous voulez savoir ce qu ; il nous faut. — Voyons. D'abord : dubeurre. Quoi ! n'achetez- vous pas votre beurre au marche ? Si fait, mais quand nous ne pouvons pas y en trouver de bon, je vais chez cet epicier, ou je suis sure (fem.) d'en trouver de bon, d'excellent. C 7 est bon a savoir. Du sucre blanc, du poivre, des biscuits, du fromage, du vinaigre, du sel, &c, &c. C'est assez. En verite, votre catalogue est bien (very) long. Mais pourquoi n ; achetez-vous pas tout cela pres de chez vous % N'y avez-vous pas des epiciers ? Si fait, nous en avons, mais leurs articles ne sont pas aussi bons que ceux de celui chez qui je vais. THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, 31st.— Trente et unieme Legon, 31me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— Du Participe Passe. The Past Participle is usually placed after the auxiliaries, to have, avoir, and to be, etre, to form the pastor compound tenses. The past participles of regular verbs may be formed by changing the terminations of the infini THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 157 tive, for the first conjugation into e with the acute accent, thus : parler-— parle ; for the second, into i, thus : jinir — -jinx ; for the third, into u, thus : recevoir — regu ; and for the fourth, also into u, thus : vendre — vendu. Examples : — PREMIERE CONJUGAISON. Inf. P. P. Inf. P.P. Aimer, to love, aime. Batir, to build, bdti. Pleurer, to weep, pleure. Gemir, to sigh, gemi. Manger, to eat, mange. Benir, to bless, beni. Commencer, to begin, commence. Choisir, to choose, choisi. TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. Devoir, to owe, du. 1 Vendre, to sell, vendu. Concevoir, to conceive , congu. Rendre, to render, rendu. Recevoir, to receive, regu. Entendre, to hear, entendu Apercevoir, to perceive , apergu. Defendre, to defend, defendu To be, been. Ittre* tie* SECONDE CONJUGAISON. Perfect Tense. Have you been to market ? I have (been there^. I have not. Have I been there ? You have. Have you been there ? Have you not ? Has he been there ? Has he not ? He has been there. He has not. Ever. Never. A bridge. To the iron bridge. The covered bridge. This wire bridge. Have you ever been at the bridge ? I have never been there. Thou hast never been there. He has never been there. You have never been there. Mr. Brunet, have you a catalogue of the verbs which govern other verbs with the preposition a? No, Sir, I have no catalogue of them. Make one, if you please. Write down in French: Verbs with the preposi- tion a. Have you the title now ? Not quite yet, Sir. — Now, I have it. Read it aloud, if you please. Parfait ou Present Compose. Avez-vous ete au marche ? 3 J'y ai e'te. Je n'y ai pas ete. Y ai-je ete ? Vous y avez ete. Y avez-vous ete ? N'y avez-vous pas ete ? Y a-t-il ete ? N'y a-t-il pas ete ? II y a ete. Tl n'y a pas ete. Jamais. Ne. . .jamais. Tin pont. Au pont defer. Lepontcouvert. Ce pont defil defer. Avez-vous jamais ete au pont ? Je n'y ai jamais ete. Tu n'y as jamais ete. II n'y a jamais ete. Vous n'y avez jamais ete. M. Brunet, avez-vous un catalogue des verbes qui en gouvernent d'autres avec la preposition a? Non, M., je n'en ai pas de cata- logue. Faites-en un, s'il vous plait. Ecrivez en Frangais : Verbs with the preposition d. Avez-vous le titre a present ? Non pas tout- a-fait encore. — A present, je l'ai. 1 It will be perceived, that in the third conjugation it is not oir, but evoir, which in the past participle must be changed into u. Irregulars hereafter. 2 The pupil, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail to mark in his list the past participles of those verbs. 3 Avoir He is used for went and did go. 14 158 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) Verbes avec la preposition a. That's it. Now, what is the first verb of that class which you have to set down, do you know ? Not yet, Sir. — You may find it if you look for it. Where can I find it ? In some of the vocabularies. I am going to look for it. I believe it is the verb to have, at the 21st vo- cabulary, 2d section. Lisez-le haut, s'il vous Verbes avec la preposition a. C'est cela. A present, quel est le pre- mier verbe de cette classe (fem.) que vous avez a ecrire ? Le savez- vous ? Non pas encore, M. — Voua pouvez le trouver, si vous le cherchez. Ou puis-je le trouver ? Dans quelques uns des vocabu- laires. Je vais le chercher. Je crois que c'est le verbe Avoir, au 21me vocabulaire, 2de section. Trente et unieme Theme. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme. Bon jour, Messieurs, il fait chaud, n ; est-ce pas ? Pas trop chaud. Pas aussi chaud qu'au commencement du mois. Vous croyez? Oui, je le crois, ou plutot (rather) j'en suis sur, car le thermometre n'est, a present qu'a 78 ou 79 degres, et au commencement du mois, il a ete (was up) a 81 et 82. Je n'ai rien a dire a cela, vous avez raison. Mais comment va ? Cela va assez bien. Se porte-t-on bien chez vous? Pas tout le monde. Qui est malade ? Jules a ete malade, mais il est mieux a present, je puis dire presque bien. Je l'apprends avec plaisir. Jeanne a mal au pied droit, et ne peut pas sortir; Victor a mal de tete depuis trois jours. Je suis bien fache de cela. Ne trouvez-vous pas la poussiere bien desagreable ? Si fait, mais corame le temps est couvert, j'espere que nous allons avoir de la pluie. Je Pespere aussi. Mes amis m'ont dit de vous presenter leurs compliments, {present their compliments to you.) Je leur suis tres-oblige. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de leur pre- senter les miens ? Sans doute. Where have you been 1 I went to the market to buy some fresh butter. — Have you been to the ball? I have. (Dir. 1.) — Did I not go to the bridge with you? Yes, you did. — Hast thou been to the play ? No, I have not. — Has your oldest son ever been to the thea- tre? He has never been there, but his young brother has (been there). — Hast thou already been to my large store? I never was there, (have never been.) — Do you intend to go there ? I do. — When will you go? I will to-morrow, if I can. — At what o'clock? — Why do you wish to know? — Because I wish to be there, if you come. — Very well; at 12 o'clock. — Has your good uncle already been in my large garden ? He has not yet been there. — He intends to see it; does he not? I believe he does. — When can he go there? To- day, may be. — Have you already been to the wire bridge? No. not yet; but I have been to the 3overed bridge. — Have you not been to THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 159 ihe other ? Is it possible ! No, I have not yet ; but I intend to go soon, if I have time to go. — Go there early in the morning ; that is the best time. — I have been somewhere early every morning. Has your uncle been at the lawyer's office ? Yes, he has. — Has he been to the wharf and museum ? He was at the former, but he has not yet gone to the latter. — Are you not going to take your two cousins there? No, they have already been there. — Have the^ indeed ! When did they go? They went yesterday. — Did they gc alone; without you? They did not go alone ; we went together. — How many went together ? Five or six. — Has the Italian been to the workshop of the joiner or that of the painter? He has been neither in the one nor in the other, but he has been all the day with the German dentist. — Is not that German or Prussian dentist in our parlor now? He has been there, but he is no longer (no more) there. — When was he (has he been) there ? This morning, early. — Before breakfast? Yes, before breakfast. — Has the son of our gardener been to market? I believe he is there now. — What does he intend to do there ? He intends first to sell his cabbages and several other things, and then to buy some chickens, corn, (Dir. 2,) wine, cheese, and cider. Is that all he has to buy? No, he has to buy several other articles ; but he is going to buy them at the grocer's. — What other articles is he going to buy? Tea, coffee, sugar, biscuits, cakes, and pepper. Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. Haye you already been at the play ? I have already been there, and he too. You have already been there, have you not ? I have been there seve- ral times. I have not yet been there. Hast thou ever been there alone ? I have neve* been there alone. Where have we never been ? We have never been at the bridge. At which bridge has he been ? He was (has been) at the wire one. We have not yet been there. Thou hast not yet been there. You have not yet been there. He has not yet been there. Have Julius and Lewis ever been at the museum ? (Did they ever go ?) They have not yet been there. Never mind. They may go there this evening or on Tuesday. Avez-vous deja ete au spectacle ? J'y ai deja ete, et lui aussi. Vous y avez deja ete, n'est-ce pas ? J'y ai deja ete plusieurs fois. Je n'y ai pas encore ete. Y as-tu jamais ete seul ? Je n'y ai jamais ete seul. Ou n'avons-nous jamais ete ? Nous n'avons jamais ete au pont. A quel pont a-t-il ete ? II a ete* a celui de fil de fer. Nous n'y avons pas encore 6t6. Tu n'y as pas encore ete. Vous n'y avez pas encore efe. II n'y a pas encore ete. Jules et Louis ont-ils jamais 6te au musee ? lis n'y ont pas encore ete. N'importe. lis peuvent y aller, ce soir ou mardi. 160 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) Where did you go this morning ? I went to (have been in) the garden. Where has thy uncle been ? (Did he go?) He went to the store near the bridge. Did he go there as early as I ? He was there earlier than you. Ou avez-vous ete ce matin ? J'ai €te au jar din. Ou ton oncle a-t-il ete ? II a ete au magasin pres du pont. Y a-t-il €16 d'aussi bonne heure que moi ? II y a ete' de meilleure heure que vous. Obs. 74. Ete, past participle of the verb etre, to be, is in French often employed for alle, past participle of the verb alter, to go. We say fat ete au spectacle, when the meaning is, that I went to the play, and am re- turned from it ; and, il est alle au spectacle, that he is gone to the play, but is not yet returned. Accordingly it is better to say, in the first, and second persons sing, and plur. : Ty ax ete, I have been there ; tuy as ete, thou hast been there; nous y avons ete, we have been there; vous y avez ete, you have been there, — than, fy suis alle t tu y es alle, nous y sommes alles, vous y etes alles, when motion is not particularly to be expressed. To have, to get. Had, got. Have you had my book ? I have had it. I did get it. I have not had it. Have I had it ? You have had it. You had it not. Who has had it ? You had it. I have had it, but I have it no longer. Avoir* 3. eu. 1 Avez-vous eu mon livre ? Je Vai eu, (not j'ai l'eu, § 52.) Je ne Vai pas eu. jL'az-je eu? Vous V avez eu. VousneZ'avezpaseu. Qui Va eu ? Vous Vavez eu. (Dir. 8.) Je l'ai eu, mais je ne l'ai plus. Trente et unieme Theme. 2de Sec. Ecrivez la date en Frangais ici. Mile. Clara, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment vous etes- vous forth (fern.) depuis mardi dernier, jour de notre lecon? Je me suis tres-bien portee, je vous remercie. Je le crois, car vous avez tres-bon air. Comment se porte M. Jean ? Jean n'est pas bien du tout. Alors je pense qu'il ne va pas venir aujourd'hui. Je ne sais pas, car il aime beaucoup a prendre lecon. Aussi, ii apprend bien, car il etudie aussi bien que possible. Les autres ecoliers vont-ils venir ? Pourquoi pas ? II est un peu tard, n'est-ce pas ? II n'est que 5 heures et 3 minutes. Est-ce tout? n'est-il pas 5 heures el 10? Non, j'ai l'heure exacte. Je crois qu'ils sont ici, a present. Oui, c'est vrai, les voici. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer, Messieurs. Ah ! M. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. II fait chaud, n'est-ce pas? Je trouve qu'il fait agreable. Nous avons un air frais (cool) et agre- able. Mais le soleil est chaud. M'entendez-vous? Je n'entends pas tout. J'entends une partie. Vous entendez le mot : chaud, n'est-ce pas? Oui, j'entends cela. Que n'entendez-vous pas alors? 1 Eu. This combination, throughout the verb avoir, sounds like French u. (See Pronun.) THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 161 Un mot au commencement. Est-ce le mot: soleil, que vous n'en tendez pas ? Oui, c'est celui-la. Savez-vous si M. Louis l'entend . Je crois qu'il ne l'entend pas. Je vais vous en dire l'Anglais. C'est: the sun. Entendez-vous la phrase a present? Oui, parfaitement. Je peux vous en donner PAnglais. Faites-le, s'il vous plait. C'est: the sun is warm or hot. Tres-bien, c'est vrai. Have you a mind to write, translate, or study an exercise ? I have a mind to translate and write one. (Dir. 2.) — To whom do you wish to write a note ? I wish to write one to my son. — Does he imme- diately answer your notes, when you write to him ? He does. — Do your brothers answer (reply to) the Swiss ; s notes 1 No, they do not. — Do they not answer them ? No ; I tell you, no, (que non.) — Have your uncle and father already been at museum ? The former has, but not the latter. — Why did not the latter go ? Because he has not had time. — Has he time to go there this afternoon? — At what o'clock? At J past 3. — No, he has no time then; for he has an engagement (un engagement) at 4. — Never mind; he may go another day. — When does your cousin set out? He does not set out yet. — When, then ? He does not set out before Monday.-— Did you not go to the iron bridge, yesterday? Yes, we went (have been) to the iron bridge, near the lawyer's garden. — Is it not a beautiful bridge ? Yes, it is beautiful. — Do you like it as much as the wire bridge ? I like it quite as much. — Did you go to the play, last night ? I ? No, I did not go, because I never go. — Who went to the wharf early this morning? Thomas went there before he break- fasted. — Did you go there together? I did not go with him; he went there alone. — Why did you not go with him? Because I had not time to go then. — What have you had to do? I had (have had) to speak to the gardener. Has our neighbor been at the theatre as often as we? He has been there oftener than we. — Do our friend's brothers go to their counting-house too early? They go too late, sometimes. — Do they go as late as we ? They go later than we. — Has the clerk been as often as you at the dentist's, to-day ? He has been (was) there oftener than I. — Where do your friends Charles and Thomas re- main ? They remain at home, because it is very warm. — Do they not go out? They do not go out before i past 8 in the evening, Decause then it begins to be cool. — Are they sick ? No, but they are afraid of the heat. — Have you had my blue gloves? I have had them. — Have you got them now? No, I have had them, but I have them no longer. — When had you (have had) them ? I had them in the parlor, and I think they are there yet. — Go and get them 14* 162 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) for me, if you please. — Can you not go yourself? ($ 41 J.) No; dc you not see that I am very busy ? Very well ; I am going for them. — Hast thou had my old umbrella? I have not had it. — Have I had your English penknife ? You had it. — When had I it ? (Pai-je eu ?) — Had you it not yesterday, in the garden, to cut a bouquet f Oh ! yes: that's true. I had it then ; but now I do not know where it is. — Can it not be in your apartment? It may be there. — Who has had my Russian stick ? Nobody has had it ; you have had it your- self. (41*.) THIRTY-SECOND LESSON, 32d.—Irente-deuxieme Legon, Z2me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Hast thou had ? Hast thou had it ? Thou hast (had). Thou hast not (had it). Has he had ? Has he had it ? He has had. He has not had it. Hast thou had the coat ? I have not had it. Who has had it ? The tailor has (had it). Somebody has had it. Nobody has. Have you had anything ? I have not had anything, (nothing.) Have we had ? We have not had. As-tu eu ? Tu as eu. L'as-tu eu ? Tu ne l'as pas eu. A-t-ileu? II a eu. As-tu eu l'habit ? eu. Qui Pa eu ? Le tailleur Pa eu. L'a-t-ilieu? II ne Pa pas eu. Je ne Pai pas Quelqu'unPaeu. PersonnenePaeu. Avez-vous eu quelque chose ? Je n'ai rien eu. {Obs. 4.) Avons-nous eu ? Nous n'avons pas eu. N' avons-nous pas eu ? Si fait, nous avons eu. Nous Pavons eu. Les enfants ont-ils eu le fusil ? lis Pont eu. lis ne Pont pas eu. Qu'ont-ils eu ? Have we not had ? Yes, we have had. We have had it. Have the children had the gun ? They have had it. They have not. What have they had ? What have you had ? What was the matter with you ? What has been the matter with him ? What has he had ? He has had a headache. Has anything been the matter with us ? What have we had ? Have I had anything good ? Have you had the books ? Obs. 75. The French past participle, with: avoir, to have, for auxiliary must agree with its direct object (§43) in number, when that object comes jirst, and only then. If the object is plural, the past participle takes an s. i Qu' avez-vous eu? \ Qu'a-t-il eu? II a eu mal de tete. > Qu' avons-nous eu? [ Ai-je eu quelque chose de bon ? I Avez-vous eu les livres ? THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 163 I have had them. I have not had them. Have I had them ? You had them. You have not had (did not get) them. Has he had them ? He had them. Which gloves have you had ? Theirs ? Neither he nor I have had them. Have you had mine ? (obj. after.) Neither they nor you have had them. Have you had bread ? (any.) I have had some. I had 1 none. Have I had any ? You had some. Je les ai eus. Je ne les ai pas eus. Les ai-je eus ? Vous les avez eus, Vous ne les avez pas eus. Les a-t-il eus ? II les a eus. Quels gants avez-vous eus ? Lea leurs ? Ni lui ni moi, ne les avons eus. Avez-vous eu les miens? (obj. apres.) Ni eux ni vous, ne les avez eus. Avez-vous eu du pain ? J'en ai eu. Je n'en ai pas eu. En ai-je eu % Vous en avez eu. Obs. 76. The past participle, with avoir, never agrees with its indirect object, (§ 44,) even when the object comes first. Consequently, when the pronoun, en, which is an indirect object, is before the past participle, the latter does not take an s. You have not had any. Has he had any ? He had none. Have they had any? They have. (Dir. 1.) Who has had any ? We have (had some). What has he had ? He (has) had nothing. What did I get ? You got that. We had somebody. (We have had.) You have had nobody, (had.) Vous n'en avez pas eu. En a-t-il eu ? II n'en a pas eu. En ont-ils eu ? lis en ont eu. Qui en a eu ? Nous en avons eu. Qu' a-t-il eu ? II n' a rien eu. Qu' ai-je eu? Vous avez eu cela. Nous avons eu quelqu'un. Vous n'avez eu personne. Trente-deuxieme Theme. Ire Sec. Mettez ici le quantieme du mois en Francais. Ah ! bon jour, M. George, comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que je irai eu le plaisir de vous voir? Merci, Mile., je me suis fort- bien porte depuis ce temps-Id, (time.) Et vous aussi, j'espere ? Moi aussi, merci. Mais, avez-vous ete absent? Oui, j'ai ete absent presque dix jours. En verite ! Ou avez-vous ete ? J'ai ete a New York, dans le Connecticut, et a Providence. Avez-vous eu beaucoup de plaisir ? Oui, beaucoup. Je suis bien aise de Tapprendre. Com- bien de jours avez-vous ete a New York? Je n'y ai ete que deux jours. — Ce n'est pas beaucoup. — Avez-vous aussi ete deux jours a Providence? Oui, j'y ai ete un peu plus de deux jours. Qu'en pensez-vous? (How do you like it?) Je Paime beaucoup. — Y con- naissez-vous beaucoup de monde? Oui, j J y connais des personnes 1 Had, alone, in English, is frequently used instead of have had ; but in French, ai eu is used when the action is fully past. 164 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) tres-aimables. — A present que j'y pense, votre ami Jules y a-t-il et6 avec vous, comme a Pordinaire? Non, il n'y a pas ete. Qu'avez- vous eu d'agreable ? Beaucoup de choses. Has your brother had my wooden hammer? He has. — Has he had my golden, velvet, and satin ribbons ? (Dir. 2.) He has had the first and the second, but not the third. — Have the English had my beautiful ship ? They have had it. — Who has had my thread stock- ings ? Your servants have had them. — Have we had the iron trunk of our good neighbor? We have had it. — Have we had his fine pistol? We have not had it. — Have we had the mattresses of the foreigners? We have not had them. — Has the American had my good work? He has had it. — Has he had my silver knife ? He has not had it. — Has the young man had the first volume of my work ? He has not had the first, but [mais il a eu) the second.— Has he had it ? Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When has he had it ? He has had it this morning. — Have you had any sugar ? I have had some. — Have I had any good paper? You have not had any. — Has the cook of the Russian captain had any chickens? He has had some. He has had none at all. Has the Frenchman had good old wine? He has had some, and he has some yet. — Hast thou had large cakes? I have. — Has thy brother had any ? He has not. — Has the farmer's son had any fresh butter ? He has had a great deal, has he not? To be sure, he has. — Have the Poles had good Spanish segars and tobacco ? They have had some, because they are very fond of smoking and snuffing. — . Wha/ tobacco do they usually smoke and snuff? They usually smoke Turkish and Polish tobacco; but sometimes they have the best American and Spanish tobacco. — What have the Spaniards had? They have had fine merino sheep, (de beaux moutons meri- nos.) — Who has had courage ? The American sailors and soldiers.— Have the Germans had more friends than the Scotch ? They have had less. — Has your little son had more toys than his big cousin? He has had many more. — Have the Turks had more pepper than corn and tobacco ? They have had less of the former than of these. — Has the Italian painter had anything? He has had nothing at all. — Who has been at the garden of Carr? The garden which is near the covered bridge? Yes, that one. Many of our friends have. — What have you had to do? I have had to write notes. — Had the gardener's son to write notes also? He has had to work in his father's garden. — Have we had to work ? No, we have had to trans- late and copy. — Have the boys sore feet? No, they have had sore feet, but they are well now. — Who has had a sore nose ? The little Russian baker. — Has the tobacco merchant had sore eyes? Hi» eyes are always sore. THIRTY-SECOND LESSON (2.) 165 Vocabulaire. 2de Section. So. So well. Not so often as ... . Have you been hungry or cold ? I have been thirsty and warm. Who has been right, and who wrong ? If John has been wrong, then Julius has been right. No, they have both been wrong. We have been afraid to show any. To take place. The ball will take place. When is the ball in honor of the President going to take place ? Does the concert take place to-day ? > Is the concert to come off to-day? S It takes place. It takes place this evening. It does not take place to-day. When did the grand dinner take place ? It took (has taken) place yesterday. It has not yet taken place, [had place.] The day before yesterday. Where had you a mind to go the day before yesterday ? To Bristol. How many times? Once, (or one time.) Twice, (two times. Thrice, (three times ) Many times, a great many times. Formerly. More than six times. Has the President a bad cold ? No, he has had one, but he is well now. I am glad to hear it. I thought he mas sick. 1 thought you were in New York. I thought they were Prussians. / thought I had your hat. Did you think you had it ? I did. Did you think you knew your lesson ? Did you think you knew that man ? I thought I did, but I see that I do not (know him). Gone. To have gone. To have gone there. Did you go to the concert of V. ? I went or did go. I did not go, He went (there.) Fie did not go (there.) Who has gone? Who went ? Lewis has. Si. Si Men. Ne . . > . pas si souvent que .... Avez-vous eu faim ou froid? J'ai eu soif et chaud. Qui a eu raison et qui a eu tort ? Si Jean a eu tort, alors Jules a eu raison. Non, ils ont Tun et l'autre eu tort. Nous avons eu peur d'en montrer. t Avoir lieu. Le bal va avoir lieu. t Quand le bal en honneur du Presi- dent va-t-il avoir lieu ? t Le concert a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ? t II a lieu. II a lieu ce soir. t II n'a pas lieu aujourd'hui. t Quand le grand diner a-t-il eu lieu ? t II a eu lieu hier. t II n'a pas encore eu lieu. Avant-hier. Ou avez-vous eu envie d'aller avant- hier ? A Bristol. Combien defois ? Tine fois. (adv.) Deux fois. Trois fois. Bien des fois. Autrefois. Plus de six fois. (16 2 .) Le President a-t-il un mauvais rhume ? II en a eu un, mais il se porte bien a present. J' en suis bien aise. Je le croyais malade. Je vous croyais a New York. Je les croyais Prussiens. Je croyais avoir votre chapeau. Croyiez-vous V avoir ? Je le croyais Croyiez-vous savoir votre lecon ? Croyiez-vous connaitre cet homme- la ? Je croyais le connaitre, mais je vois que je ne le connais pas. Alle, etre alle, y etre alle. Etes-vous alle au concert de V. ? J'y ai ete. Je n'y suis pas alio. II y a ete. II n'y est pas alle'. Qui y est alle ? Louis y est alle* 166 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) Has he had a sore arm ? He has. A-t-il eu mal au bras ? II y aeu mal What has been the matter with him ? Qu' a-t-il eu ? He had a sore elbow, and he has it II a eu mal au coude, et il y a encore yet. mal. How many children has the Presi- Combien d'enfantsle President a-t-i] dent had ? (eus, because the object eus 1 (eus, parce que Pobjet est precedes.) avant.) He has had three, I believe. I II en a eu trois, je crois. That is to say, that is, (i. e.) i C'est a dire. Trente-deuxieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Vous continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-ce pas ? Quoi, Madame ! vous etes ici? Je vous croyais a Baltimore. Py ai ete, M. ; mais je suis ici depuis deux jours. Est-il possible ! Et je n'ai pas eu le plaisir de vous voir. Je pense que vous vous por- tez bien, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le President a-t-il ete a Balti- more ? Non, il n ? y a pas ete. Ou est-il alle? II est alle a Richmond pour y voir ses meilleurs amis. N'a-t-il pas ete malade ? Si fait, il Pa ete, mais tres-peu. II a eu un rhume, n ; est-ce pas? Oui, au commencement du mois d'Avril • mais cela n 7 a pas ete grand 7 chose 1 (much — expression constantly used.) Je le croyais encore malade. En verite ! II ne Pest plus, et nous en sommes bien aises. — N ; avez- vous pas eu mal de tete ? Si fait, mais cela n'a pas ete grand' chose. — A present, j'ai mal au pied, mais ce n'est pas grand 7 chose. — Je croyais avoir votre eventail, Mile. Sophie, mais je vois que vous Pavez. — Je Pai, mais il est a votre service. Merci. Si vous n'avez plus chaud, pretez-le-moi un moment, s'il vous plait. Le voici, prenez-le. II est joli et bon. Oh! ce n ? est pas grand' chose. Eu avez-vous besoin, a present? Non, je n'en ai pas encore besom, vous pouvez en faire usage. Votre cousin a-t-il le cheval du fer- mier? Non, le fermier en a eu besoin, lui-meme. (§ 41i.) Have the English had as much sugar as tea? They have had as much of the one as of the other ) but they want more sugar than tea. — Has the physician been cold, this evening? No, he has been warm. — Has he been warm enough? He says that he has been too warm. — Can that be ? Has the Dutchman been right or wrong ? He has been right or wrong. — If he has been right, he has not been wrong. — If he has been wrong, he has not been right. — I believe you are right when you say that. — To be sure. — Have I been right 1 Pas grand'' chose, not much, no great tiling. As chose is feminine, grand 1 chose ought to be spelt : grande chose. But as, in pronouncing those words, the d is not sounded, the French use the apostrophe to show that the e is suppressed and the d silent. So in : grand 1 /aim, grand* soif, grand" mere, &c. Grand' chose is always used with a negative. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 167 in wnting to my brother? You have not been wrong in writing to him.-Have you had a sore finger? I have had a sore eye -Have you had anythmg good? I have had nothing bad.-Md the baU take place yesterday? It did not take place.l-Does it take place to-day? It takes place to-day._When does the ball take place* R ay" ftid^r^-A? V^ 6 P)ace the ** ^fore ;: s te. oay. it did take place.— At what o'clock did it take olac'e * T* took place aeulieu) at eleven o'clock.-Did yonTmlTu) to my brother's? I went thither.-How often have you been' L t^h th'r a,oL h r e id een th6re tWiCe - D ° y- o ^01^ you bee^tuh^re 1 ?^ h^r^eXTce °~ ^ Have you sometimes been at the ball ? I have often been there tlnfher 7 Has rT g ° ne t0 the C ° nCert ? He ha * ™«g£ tnither.-Has your father sometimes gone to the museum* w! went (a ete) there formerly.-Did he go as often as yT* £e went oftener than I.-Dost thou go sometimes into the small garden*! go there often; I go every day, two or three times.-Dofs your' old cook often go to the market ? He does, sometimes "twice in a day -Does he go there oftener than my gardener* He Z>« t T goes there to buy, and your gardener fo til-Hast, g t ££ were at Boston on' that day .- A T y ou L££Lfi£#^ many ttmes.-Are you hungry and thirsty in the monmtg* I \m you go earlier to your ^„ the ££? S^ French mto English as well as English into French? No, tlmy do THIRTY-THIRD LESSON, W -Trente-troisieme Legon, 9ome PERFECT TEN8E.-ParfaU on Prisent Compose. P^Ti:IZ^y a LT t r {eCt t6nSe iS , Jn EngHsh ' ™ = *« the studied.) y " d * e Past P artlc 'Ple. <* 145 to be carefully or i£ NeV6r ,ranS ' ate the P re P osi ti°n «*. when connoted with a d„ 168 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) Perfect. I have studied this day. I have studied this month. Columbus has discovered America. Imperfect. I studied yesterday. I studied last month. Columbus discovered Ame- rica in the year 1492. To make, to do. Made, done. What have you done ? I have done nothing — bad. Has that shoemaker made my shoes ? He has. He has not. He made some. He did not make any. No (nominative) No man has. (§171, R. 6.) No (objective) before a noun. ($171, R. 5.) 1 have done no ill or evil. I have been to no bridge. Has the tailor any of my clothes ? He has 7ione. None. (§171, R. 5.) To put, to put on. Put, put on. Have you put on your shoes ? I have (put them on). I have not. I have put some on. I have put none on. Did we not take off our gloves ? Yes. we took them off, and our vests also. Take off your coat if it is wet. To tell, to say. Told, said. Have you said the word ? the words ? I I have. Have you told me the word ? I have told you the word. I have told it to you, (or told you of if* That, (meaning that thing.) This, (meaning this thing.) That is the very thing. Has he told you that ? He told me this. What have you told them ? Have you told them nothing? We have told them neither this nor that. Have they told you anything ? They have told us nothing. To whom have they told that ? They have said it to nobody. Pai etudie aujourd'hui. J'ai etudie ce mois-ci. Colomb a decouvert l'Amerique. J'ai etudie' hier. J'ai etudie le mois dernier. Colomb a decouvert l'Amerique dans l'annee 1492. Faire* fait. (31 1 .) Qu'avez-vous fait ? Je n'ai rien fait — de mal. Ce cordonnier a-t-il fait mes souliers ? II les a faits. II ne les a pas faits. II en a fait. II n'en a pas fait. Aucun . . . ne (sujet.) Aucun horn me n'a. Ne... aucun (objet.) (avant un nom.) Je n'ai fait aucun mal. Je n'ai 6te a aucun pont. Le tailleur a-t-il aucun de mes habits? II n'en a aucun. N en.. . aucun. Mettre* Mis. (31. J ) Avez-vous mis vos souliers ? Je les ai mis. Je ne les ai pas mis. J 'en ai mis. Je n'en ai mis aucun. N'avons-nous pas ote nos gants ? Si fait, nous les avons otes, et nos gilets aussi. Otez votre habit s'il est mouille. Dire.* Dit. Avez-vous dit le mot ? les mots ? Je l'ai dit. Je les ai dits. M'avez-vous dit le mot ? Je vous ai dit le mot. Je vous l'ai dit. Cela. ($ 38, N. 4.) Ceci. C'est cela meme. Vous a-t-il dit cela? II m'a dit ceci. Que leur avez-vous dit ? Ne leur avez-vous rien dit ? Nous ne leur avons dit ni ceci n5 cela. Vous ont-ils dit quelque chose ? Us ne nous ont rien dit. A qui ont-ils dit cela ? lis ne l'ont dit a personne. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 169 Trente-troisieme Thj&me. Ire Sec. Vous continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-ce pas ? Qu'avez-vous fait ce matin ? Nous avons fait notre devoir. — Quel devoir avez-vous fait ? Nous avons fait celui que vous nous avez donne a faire. L'avez-vous tous fait ? Je sais que j'ai fait le mien * je crois que Charles et Henri out fait les leurs, mais je ne peux pas vous dire si Guillaume afaitle sien. — Le tien est-il fait, Guillaume? Le mien ? sans doute, il est fait. Tous vos devoirs sont done faits. — Alors, asseyez-vous tous, et comme vous avez fait vos devoirs, nous pouvons commencer. M. Jules, quel est le parfait du verbe: donner? C'est: j'ai donne, n'est-ce pas'? C'est cela meme. Com- ment Pepelez-vous ? Je ne vous entends pas, M. Quoi! vous n'en- tendez pas : epelez-vous? Non, je ne 1' entends pas. Et toi, Guillaume, Pentends-tu? Moi, non plus, (I neither, or neither do I, § 162, R. 9.) Et vous, Messieurs, ne Pentendez-vous pas non plus ? (do you not understand it either?) Non, nous, non plus. — Qui Pentendici? Au cun de nous ne Pen tend. Quoi ! Aucun de vous ne sait P Anglais de : epeler ? JEpeler ? Non, aucun de nous ne le sait. Ne vous ai-je pas donne le Francais de : to spell ? Non, M., vous ne nous Pavez pas encore donne. Je croyais vous Pavoir donne P autre jour. Non, nous ne Pavons pas encore eu. Mais vous le savez a present, n'est- ce pas? Je pense que c'est le mot que vous avez dit, n'est-ce pas? C'est cela meme. Prononcez-le encore, si'l vous plait. Volontiers: J&peler. De quelle conjugaison est-il ? De la premiere, parce qu'il finit en er. Tres-bien, c'est cela meme. Alors quel est PAnglais de: Comment Pepelez-vous ? C'est: how do you spell it? C'est cela meme. A present; repondez a ma question: Comment epe- lez-vous : j'ai donne? J' (apostrophe) a, i, d, o, n, n, e, avec un accent aigu. Comment formez-vous le participe passe de: donner? Je change la terminaison, er, en e. Have you anything to do? I have nothing to do. — What hast thou done? I have done nothing. — Have I done anything? You have done something. — What have I done ? You have torn my books. — What have your children done? They have torn their clothes. — What have we done ? You have done nothing, but your brothers have burnt their copy-books. — Has the tailor already made your coat? He has not yet made it. — Has your shoemaker already made your shoes? He has already made them. — Have you some- times made a hat ? I have never made one. — Have our neighbors ei'er made books? They made ( — ont fait) some formerly. — How many blue coats has your tailor made? He has made twenty or thirty. — Has he made good or bad coats? He has made (both) good 15 170 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) and bad. — Has your father put on his coat? He has not yet put it on ; but he is going to put it on. Has your brother put his shoes on ? He has put them on. — Put on your shoes and stockings. (Dir. 2.) We are going to put on neither, (ni ceux-ci ni ceux4d.) — What has the physician taken away? He has taken away nothing. — What have you taken off? I have taken off my large hat. — Have your children taken off their gloves % They have taken them off. — When did the ball take place ? It took place the day before yesterday. — Who has told you that? My servant has told me of it. — What has your brother told you? He has told me nothing. — Did I tell you that ? You did not tell me of it. — Has he told it you? He has told it me. — Who told your neighbor of it ? The English have told him of it. — Have they told it to the French ? They have told them of it. — Who has told it to you ? (or you of it?) Your son has (told me of it). — Has he told it to you? He has told me of it. — Are you willing to tell that to your friends ? I am willing to tell them of it. VOCABULAIRE. Have you told it to me ? (or me of it ?) I have not. I did not. He has told it to me, (or he told me.) He did not tell me, (or me of it.) Have you told (did you tell) him that ? I have. I did. I have not. I did not (tell him so). What have I told you ? You told me that John is sick. You did not tell me anything. Did I say so to you ? (tell you that ?) Yes, you did. You did not. Did we say so to you ? (tell you so ?) You said so to us, (told us of it.) You did not say so to us. What did you tell us ? (to us ?) What did you tell him ? (to him ?) I told you that your horse has a sore foot. I told them that you are here. I told him but a word. You have told him of it. You told us of it. You did not tell them (of it). Did any one tell you of it? Somebody did. Nobody did, 2de Section. Me l'avez-vous dit? (§ 57.) Je ne vous l'ai pas dit. II me l'a dit. II ne me l'a pas dit. Lui avez-vous dit cela ? Je le lui ai dit. Je ne le lui ai pas dit. Que vous ai-je dit ? Vousm'avez dit que Jean est malade, Vous ne m'avez rien dit. Vous 1' ai-je dit ? Oui, vous me l'avez dit. Vous ne me l'avez pas dit. Vous avons-nous dit cela ? Vous nous l'avez dit. Vous ne nous l'avez pas dit. Que nous avez-vous dit ? Que lui avez-vous dit ? Je vous ai dit que votre cheval a maj au pied. Je leur ai dit que vous etes ici. Je ne lui ai dit qu'un mot. Vous le lui avez dit. Vous nous l'avez dit. Vous ne le leur avez pas dit. Quelqu'un vous l'a-t-il dit ? Quelqu'un me l'a dit. Personne ne me l'a dit. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 171 Who told them ? Have you told them of it ? I have. I did. Have you told them the words they wish to know ? I did. I have (told them to them). He told them to me, to us. He has not told them to you, to thee. Have you spoken to the men ? I have spoken to them. To whom did you speak ? I spoke to no one. Qui le leur a dit ? Le leur avez-vous dit 1 Je le leur ai dit. Leur avez-vous dit les mots qu'ila veulent savoir ? Je les leur ai dits. II me les a dits. II nous les a dits. II ne vous les a pas dits, \ne te les.) Avez-vous parle aux hommes ? Je leur ai parle. A qui avez-vous parle ? Je n'ai parle a. personne. Obs. 77. The pronoun le, which is sometimes rendered into English by so, and very frequently omitted, may in French relate to a substantive, an adjective, or even a whole sentence. It changes neither its gender nor num- ber when it relates to an adjective or a whole sentence. (29 2 , Obs. 70.) Are you the brothers of my friend ? We are. (We are so — we are they.) Are they rich ? They are not. Are those men learned ? They are. They are not. Are you and your friend fatigued ? I am not, but he says he is. Is he so indeed ? He says he is. Are our neighbors as poor as they say (they are) ? They are. I believe they are not. Did your brother speak yesterday ? I do not know. He says he did. Etes-vous les freres de mon ami ? Nous les sommes. Sont-ils riches ? lis ne le sont pas. Ces hommes sont-ils savants ? lis le sont. lis ne le sont pas. Vous et votre ami, etes-vous fatigues? Je ne le suis pas, mais il dit qu'il Test. L'est-il, en verite ? II le dit. Nos voisins sont-ils aussi pauvrea qu'ils le disent ? lis le sont. Je crois qu'ils ne le sont pas. Votre frere a-t-il parle hier ? Je ne le sais pas. II le dit. Tkente-troiseeme Theme. 2de Sec. Mettez la date en Frangais. Avez-vous parle a votre rnaitre ? Oui, je lui ai parle. Ou est-il? II est dans son appartement. Pourquoi n'en sort-il pas 1 II est ma- lade. Est-il bien (very) malade ? Non: mais il Pest trop pour donner des lecons aujourd'hui. Le medecin lui a-t-il donne quelque chose a prendre ? Oui, il lui a donne quelque chose. Que lui a-t-il donne ? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il lui a donne. Est-il au lit ? (in bed ?) Non, il n'est pas au lit, il est dans son grand fauteuil. Son fauteail ? Qu'est-ce que c'est? (What is that?) N ; en savez-vous pas TAnglais? Non, en verite. Votre maitre ne vous en a-t-il pas dit PAnglais? Non, je suis sur qu ; il ne me Pa jamais dit. Charles, ne vous Fa-t-il pas dit? Lui, non plus. — Eh! bien, je vais vous le dire. (Pest: arm-chair. Fauteuil: Arm-chair? Est-il possible? C ; est tres-pos- sible, car c'est cela meme. (Pest tout-a-fait different (different) de ''Anglais. (Pest vrai. vous avez raison. 172 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) Have you spoken to my father? I have. — When did you? 1 spoke to him the day before yesterday. — How many times have you spoken to the captain ? To which captain % To the French, no, no, I do not mean the French, but the Greek. I havs not spoken to the Greek captain ; I do not know a Greek one ; bu; ] have spoken to the American. — How many times have you spoken to him ? I spoke to him many times. — Have you ever spoken to his son? I have, often. — To which strangers has your young cousin spoken? He has spoken to these and to those. — To these three and those four? Yes, to them all, {a tous, ou a eux tous.) — Are you the brother of that handsome young man, (ce beau gargon, is as often used as : ce beau jeune homme.) — Is that other young man the minister's cousin ? That one or this ? That one. No, that one is not ; but this one is. — I wish to speak to him. Have you never done it? No, never. And I neither. Are your friends as busy as they say? They are (so). — Are the carpenters as tired as they think ? I believe they are. Is the valet tired because he sweeps the stores? He is. — Does he sweep them often ? He does it as often as he can. — Has the Pole money enough to buy wood or coal ? I believe he has not got any. Give him this three dollar note. — Is the dentist at home ? No, he has gone to the wire bridge. — Has your old cook gone to market? No, he has gone to bed instead of going to- market. — Is he ill? (ma- lade ?) He is not ill, but only tired. — Is he very tired? He is, because he made a great dinner in honor of the uncle of the French minister. — Who is ill? I do not know who is. I am not. — Are you as tall (grand) as I ? I am. — Is your son much taller than you ? He is. — Are these young men clerks? They are. — Are you as busy as your brother ? I am more so than he. — Do you know the name of the English minister? No, I do not. — Does Thomas know it? He neither. Has not Lewis told it to you ? No, he did not. — Did he not tell it to your uncle ? I do not know if he has told it to him. — ■ To whom has he told it? He has told it neither ( § 56, § 64) to him, nor to them, nor to you, nor to me, nor to anybody. Vocabulaire. 3me Section. Iikrire,* e'crit. (Obs. 75.) Quels billets avez-vous Merits ? J'ai ecrit ceux-ci. Quels mots a-t-il ecrits ? To write, written. Which notes have you written ? I have written these. Which words has he written ? He has written those which you see. To drink, drunk. To see, seen. To read, read. Vo be acquainted with, been ac- quainted with. II a ecrit ceux que vous voyez. Boire,* bu. Voir,* vu. Lire,* lu. Connaitre* connu. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 173 Which men have you seen ? I have seer, those. Which books have you read ? I have read those which you have lent me. Have you been acquainted with these men ? I have not. Which ones have you known? Have you seen any sailors ? I have seen some. I have not seen any. To call, to name, (not to call at, upon.) To call at, upon. Call on me. To throw, throw away — them — some. Do you call me ? I do not call you. Quels hommes avez-vous vus ? J'ai vu ceux-la. Quels livres avez-vous lus ? J'ai lu ceux que vous m'avez pretest Avez-vous connu ces hommes ? Je ne les ai pas connus. Lesquels avez-vous connus ? Avez-vous vu des matelots ? J 'en ai vu. Je n'en ai vu aucun. (32 1 , Obs. 76.) Appeler,l. Passer, 1, chez. Passez chez moi. Jeter, 1. Lesjeter, enjeter. M'appeiez-vous ? Je vous appelle. Je ne vous appelle pas. Obs. 78. In verbs ending in eler and eter, as appeler, to call ; jeter, to throw ; the letter I or t is doubled in all persons or tenses where it is fol- lowed by e mute. 1 Who calls me ? Your father calls you. Have you called the men ? I have called them. Do you throw your money away ? I do not throw it away. Who throws away his books ? Have you thrown away anything? I have thrown away my gloves. Have you thrown them away? Qui m'appelle ? Votre pere vous appelle. Avez-vous appele les hommes ? Je les ai appeles. Jetez-vous votre argent? Je ne le jette pas. Qui jette ses livres ? Avez-vous jete quelque chose? J'ai jete mes gants. Les avez-vous jetes ? Trente-troisieme Theme. 3me Sec. Vous mettez le quantieme ici, n'est-ce pas ? Bon jour, mon cher Monsieur, j'espere que vous vous portez bien. Oui, Dieu merci, je me porte parfaitement bien. J ; en suis bien aise, j'en suis charme. Savez-vous que nous attendons le professeur grec ?-— Va-t-il passer chez vous ce matin'? II va passer ici, nous Fattendons a 9 heures. J'en suis charme ; car. j'aigrande envie de le connaitre. Ne le connaissez-vous pas encore ? Non. je n'ai pas encore eu le plaisir de le voir. Comment Pappelez-vous? Je ne sais pas son vrai nom, mais je Pappelle Miaulitz. — Comment epelez- vous son nom? Je Pepelle M, i, a 7 u, 1, i, t, z — mais je ne sais pas s"il Pepelle comme cela. N'importe. s'il vous repond quand vous ,; appelez comme-Qa. Mais, a present que j'y pense, parle-t-il Fran- 1 Custom, however, does not observe this rule with regard to the verb tcheter, to buy, and its compound, racheter, to redeem, to buy again. (25 1 .) 15* 174 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) cais? Sans doute. II le parle bien pourun etranger. Tl parle aussi .alien, allemand, et un peu Anglais. II est done savant? Oui, il Pest. M'est-il pas encore neuf heures? Non, pas tout-a-fait. Je pense que comme il est professeur, il est ponctuel. Je le pense aussi; et comme il est pres de l'heure, je pense qu'il vient et qu'il est en chemin. N'entendez-vous pas quelqu'un? (30 2 .) Si fait, j'entends quelqu'un. Est-ce lui ; croyez-vous? Oui. e'est lui- meme. (441^.) Voyez. Ah! il est bien grand. lVest-ce pas? What have you to tell me ? I have to tell you to call on Professor C . — Does he wish to see me ? He does. — What does he want with me? (me veut-il?) I do not know what he wants with you; he did not tell it to me. When? Immediately after breakfast. — Does he breakfast early? He finishes usually at J of 7 o'clock. — Which exercises has your friend written? He has written those. — Which men have you seen at the wharf? I have seen these. — Which books have your children read ? They have read those which you have lent them. — Have you seen these strangers or those ? I have neither seen these nor those.— Which strangers have you seen? I have seen those to whom (d qui) you have spoken. — Have you been acquainted with these men ? I have been acquainted with them. — With which boys has your brother been acquainted ? He has been acquainted with those of our merchant. — Have I been acquainted with these Frenchmen? You have not been acquainted with them. — Which wine has your servant drunk? He has drunk mine. — Have you seen my brother's pretty little cousins? I have. — Where have you seen them ? I have seen them at their own house, (chez eux.) — Have you ever seen Greeks? I have never seen any. (Obs. 76.) — Has your father seen any? He has sometimes seen some. — Do you call me ? I do call you. — Who calls your brother? My father calls him. — Dost thou call any one ? I call no one. — Have you thrown away your hat 1 I have not thrown it away. — Does your father throw away anything? He throws away the notes which he has read, if they are not important, (importants.) — Have you thrown away your pencils? I have not thrown them away, for I want them. (23 2 .) — Dost thou throw away thy book? I do not throw it away ; I want it to (pour) study French. — Do you translate and write three exercises every day ? No; I translate and write only one. but study ar? ? 3ad several. THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 175 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON, 34th.— Trente-quatrieme Legon, Mnie. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. PARTICIPES PASSES IRREGULIERS. INFINITIES. To extinguish, Eteindre.* To open, To conduct, To take, To believe, To be able, (can,) Pouvoir.* To know, Savoir.* To be willing, Vouloir.* Ouvrir.* Conduire.* Prendre.* Croire.* Extinguished, eteint. Opened, ouvert. Conducted, conduit. Taken, pris. Believed, cru. Been able, (could,) pu. Known, su. Been willing. voulu. NEUTER VERBS.— Verbs Neutres ou lniransitifs. See ($ 158, and Art. 1, &c.) and study it carefully. Obs. 79. Those neuter verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary, itrej in French, and to have, in English, will be marked thus, e . To set out, Partir.* To go out, „ Sortir.* To come, Venir.* Has your father set out ? Have your friends set out ? They have not set out. When did your brothers go out ? They went out at ten o'clock. Did the men come to your father's and to your uncle's ? They did. Which fires have you extinguished ? Which storehouses have you opened, and which shut ? (have you.) Have you conducted them to the storehouse and to the office ? I have. Which books have you taken ? How many notes have you received? I received but one. The same. The same jewel. This secretary. This scrutoire. The secretary of the minister. Upon, on, the scrutoire (writing desk.) Set out, departed, parti e. Gone out, sorti e . Come, venu e . Votre pere est-il parti ? Vos amis sont-ils partis ? II ne sont pas partis. Quand vos freres sont-ils sortis ? lis sont sortis a dix heures. Les hommes sont-ils venus chez votre pere et chez votre oncle ? lis y sont venus. Quels feux avez-vous eteints ? Quels magasins avez-vous ouverts, et lesquels avez-vous fermes ? Les avez-vous conduits au magasin et au bureau ? Je les y ai conduits. Quels livres avez-vous pris ? Combien de billets avez-vous recus ? Je n'en ai recu qu'un. Le meme. Les memes. Le mime bijou. Ce secretaire. Le secretaire du ministre. Sur le secretaire. Le banc. Sur ce banc-la. The bench. Upon that bench. TRENTE-QUATRiiiME ThSme. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Frangais. Quel vilain temps nous avons, n ? est-ce pas? Oui 7 nous avons un ^mps tres-desagreable. II pleut trop; il fait trop humide, et le temps est malsain. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, 176 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) Dieu merci, tout le monde se porte bien ; mais presque tous ont ete malades. — Qu'ont-ils eu 1 Non pas le cholera, j'espere ! Non, pas le cholera. Quoi done? L'un a eu le tic douloureux, Pautre mal aux dents ; celui-ci a eu un violent mal de tete, celui-la quelqu'au- tre chose, en un mot ils ont presque tous ete malades. Je suis charme d'apprendre qu'ils se portent bien a present. Quand avez- vous vn votre ami le jeune secretaire du general? Je Pai vu avant- hier. Comment Pappelez-vous? Je Pappelle Lucien. Lucien est le nom d'un des freres de Napoleon, n'est-ce pas? Oui, ce Pest. Je sais le nom a present. Est-il ici encore, ou est-il parti ? Parti pour ou? Je le croyais a Boston. Le general n'y est-il pas alle ? Non, le general est malade, au lit. Ne sort-il pas? Non, en verite. Qu'a-t-il ? Le medecin dit que e'est la goutte, (gout.) Where are your cousins gone to? They have gone to the bridge. — Have your friends left? (partis?) They have not yet left. — When do they set out? This evening. — Early or late ? At what o'clock? At half past nine. — When did the French boys come to your brother's? They came there the day before yesterday. — Did they come alone, or did their friends come also? They came also. — Has any one come to see us? The Swiss came. — Who came to the Englishman's office ? The French did. — When did you drink any German wine ? We never drank any. — Did you not drink some the day before yesterday and to-day, at the secretary's house ? Is the wine that we drank there German wine? To be sure it is. — Then German wine is very good. — Has the big servant carried my notes? He has. — Where did he carry them ? He carried one to the law- yer's office, the other to the merchant's counting-house. — Did you not carry a pocket-book to the captain's? Yes, I did carry there that which you gave me to carry. — Which papers has the gardener's son brought here? Did he bring any (aucun) here? Yes. he brought here those which you lent to his father. — Where has he put them ? I have not seen them. — I believe he gave them to Jacob, who has put them in the secretary, or under it, in the parlor. Which books has the clerk taken ? He has taken the one which you do not read, and those which you have read. — Have the clerks opened the stores? They have. — Which did they open? They opened those you have seen, under the lawyers offices. — When did they open them ? They did early in the morning. — Did they shut them last night? No, the servants did. — Do they shut them every night, and open them every morning? They do.— Why did they not open them this morning? Because they are busy on the vessel, at the wharf. — Did Jacob conduct the foreigners to the museum ? He did. — Did he not concuct them to the wire THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 177 bridge also ? He did not, but he intends to conduct them there very soon. — Has the cook extinguished the fires? He has not yet extin- guished them. — Who has extinguished the parlor fire ? The Irish servant has. — Have you received any (aucun) bench, sofa ; and arm-chair? We have received some. — Has your brother received his? He has not received them 3 but our friends have received theirs Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Upon it. The shawl is upon it. Under. Under the writing-desk. Under it, (underneath.) Where are my velvet and satin hats ? They are upon the sofa. Are my kid gloves on it also ? No, they are under. I see them. To learn how, learned how. Do you learn how to read and count ? I do learn how to do both. Have you learned how to speak ? I have learned how, (or it.) Gone. Have they gone ? In the stove. In it or within. To get or have . . . mended. Got or had . . . mended. To wash. To have . . . washed. Got . . . washed. To get . . . made, (bespeak,) have . . . made. To have . . . swept. Got . . . swept. To get . . . sold. Had . . . sold. Obs. 80. The two French verbs come together, while the English verbs are separated by some noun. (adv.) Le chale est dessus. Sous *prep.) Sous le secretaire. Dessous (adv.) Oii sont mes chapeaux de velours et de satin ? lis sont sur le sofa. Mes gants de chamois y sont-ils aussi? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les vois. Apprendre* d, appris a. Apprenez-vous a lire et a compter ? J'apprends l'un et l'autre. Avez-vous appris a parler ? Je l'ai appris. Alle e . Sont-ils alles ? Dans le poele. Dedans (adv.; t Faire raccommoder. Fait racco- mmoder. t Faire laver. Fait laver. Lave t Faire faire. Fait faire. t Faire balayer. t Faire vendre. Fait balayer. Fait vendre. To get the coat mended. To have it mended. To get them mended. To get some mended. Are you getting a coat made ? (do you order or bespeak a coat ?) I am getting one made, (I order one.) I have had one made. Has he had his handkerchief washed ? Hv has had it washed. He did not get it washed. I have had my shoes mended. I have had them mended. To wipe, wiped. t Faire raccommoder l'habit. t Le faire raccommoder. t Les faire raccommoder. t En faire raccommoder. t Faites-vous faire un habit ? t J' en fais faire un. t J'en ai fait faire un. t A-t-il fait laver son mouchoir ? t II l'afait laver. t II ne l'a pas fait laver. t J'ai fait raccommoder mes souliers. t Je les ai fait raccommoder. Essuyer, 1, essuye. ($144, R. 3.) 178 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) I wipe, thou wipest, he wipes. Have you not seen my book ? Yes, I have put it away for you. When did you see my brother? I saw him last evening at the bridge. Where did you see my cousins ? I saw them at the museum. J'essuie, tu essuies, il essuie. N'avez-vous pas vu mon livre ? Si fait, je l'ai serre pour vous. Quand avez-vous vu mon frere ? Je l'ai vu hier soir au pont. Ou avez-vous vu mes cousins ? Je les ai vus au musee. Trente-quatrieme Theme. 2de Sec. Ou est le chale de velours de Mile. Clara ? II est sur le sofa, n'est-ce pas? Ne Py voyez-vous pas] Ses gants de fil sont-ils des- sus aussi? Non, ils sont sous le banc. Dessous ! avez-vous dit? Oui, c'est-ce que j'ai dit. Qui les a mis dessous? Je ne sais pas en verite. Ramassez-les done vite, et mettez les sur le sofa avec son chale. — Comme son chape au de satin est sur le grand fauteuil de cuir, je vais mettre ses gants de fil dedans et son chale sur le dos du fauteuil. Tres-bien, faites-le. Mes souliers sont-ils sur le banc ? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les ai mis dessus : Qui les a mis dessous ? Moi. C'est moi qui les ai mis dessous. Je vous remercie. De rien. (26.) — Le charbon est-il dans le coin ou sous le banc'? II est dans le poele. — Avez-vous mis du bois dedans? Oui, d'abord, j ; ai mis du bois dedans, en suite j'y ai mis du feu pour Pallumer, et apres cela du charbon. Brule-t-il ? Oui, le bois et le charbon bru- lent bien. Nous avons bon feu. Si vous avez froid, mettez-vous pres du poele. Je n'ai pas grand froid. J'ai vu un peu de bois dans un coin, est-il tout dans le poele ? II est dedans et brule. Ou sont mes journaux ? Je les ai otes de dessus le poele. parce que je n'ai pas voulu les bruler. Les avez-vous mis sur le secretaire ? Non, ils sont dessous. Avez-vous envoye votre petit garcon au marche ? Je n'ai pas voulu Py envoyer. — Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas voulu Py envoyer? Je n'ai pas voulu Py envoyer, parce qu'il a ete un peu malade. Qu'a-t-il eu ? II a eu un violent mal de tete. Avez-vous ecrit a votre oncle, Papothicaire? Je lui ai deja ecrit. — Vous a-t-il repondu ? II ne m'a pas repondu. — Vous a-t-il envoye Pargent que vous voulez? II ne me Pa pas encore envoye. — Avez-vous deja fait faire un habit? Je n'en ai pas encore fait faire. — Avez-vous fait faire un gilet? Je n'en ai pas fait faire. N'avez-vous rien fait faire ? Non, rien, parce que je veux avoir mon argent avant de faire faire quelque chose. Are you getting your floor swept? I am. — Have you had your office swept? I have not yet had it swept, but I intend to have it swept to-day. — Have you the same servant? The same! No, in- deed, we have not the same. We have changed several times, (en, § 50.) — But you have the same cook: have you not? Yes. we have the same yet. — Have you wiped your feet ? I have. — Where did THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 179 you wipe them ? I wiped them on the old carpet. — Have you had your benches, your sofas, and arm-chairs wiped 1 I have (had them wiped). — What does your little valet wipe ? He wipes the big and small knives. — Have you ever seen a Syrian ? I have already seen two or three. — Have you ever shown one to your cousin? I have already shown him one at the museum. — Has he ever seen a Turk ? He saw one before I did, (moi.) — Have you ever lent anything to anybody ? Yes, indeed, I have many times lent something to a great many persons, (beaucoup de monde.) — Does the joiner's son know how to read ? He does. — Is he learning how to write ? No, he does not ; he is too young yet to learn how to write. When is the great caucus going to take place ? It has already taken place. — Did you go ! I did not. — Miss Charlotte wishes to know if Mrs. B ; s concert has taken place % It took place last Tuesday. — Did the gentlemen go to it ? They did. — Have we yet the same milkman ? Yes, we have the same. We have not changed, (en,) because his milk is good, and he is punctual ; but we have neither the same baker, nor the same butcher, nor the same grocer. — Does the lawyer get his office w T ashed? Yes, he gets it washed every Saturday. — Get yours washed to-day; will you ? No, I cannot get it washed to-day ; I am too busy, I have too much to write. — Hast thou ever had thy shoes mended? I have sometimes had them mended. — Has the little Dutchman had his vessel sold ? He had it sold last Wednesday. — W T hy has he had it sold ? He had it sold because he is going to California. — Have his cousins gone there ? Yes, they have. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON, 35th.— Trente-cinquieme Legon, 35me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To promise, promised. (Promettre est comme son primitif, mettre.) To promise some one to come. To compose, to compound, composed. Compound Tenses. Thus, so. Promettre,* 4, promts, (prend. a avant le nom ; de, avant 1'inO Promettre a quelqu'un de venir. Composer, 1, compose. Les Temps composes. Ainsi. Obs. 81. Les verbes composes sont conjugues comme les primitif s. Ainsi, Promettre est comme mettre ; Apprendre, comme prendre. (24 3 , 25 1 , S3 1 , 34 2 .) To forget, forgotten, forget, (impera.) Oublier, 1. Oublie. Oubliez, (imper.) de avant l'inf. C forgot, to take that, to the dentist. J'ai oublie de porter tela au dentiste. 180 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) How ? So, so. In this manner, (way.) Like that. Do you promise me to come ? I do promise you. What have you promised the man ? I have not promised him anything. Have you ever learned French ? I learned it formerly. To wear out. To spell. To refuse. How has your brother written his exercise ? He has written it well. To put to dry, put to dry. Do you put your vest to dry ? I have already put it to dry. How old are you ? I am twelve years old. How old is your brother ? He is thirteen years old. Almost, hardly ever. He is almost fourteen years old. About, about sixteen years and £. I am about fifteen years old. Nearly, -before numbers.) He is nearly fifteen years old. Hardly. Scarcely. Scarcely nine. You are hardly seventeen years old. Not quite eleven years and two months. I am not quite sixteen years old. Art thou older than thy brother ? I am younger than he. I cannot tell you how old I am. There is, there are. How many francs are there in a crown ? Three. There are five centimes in a sou. There are twenty sous or a hundred centimes in one franc. A, or one hundred. The centime. How many francs are there in a dollar ? There are 5 francs and 7 sous. | Comment ? t Comme cela. t De cette maniere. Comme cela, Me promettez-vous de venir ? Je vous le promets. Qu'avez-vous promis a l'homme ? Je ne lui ai rien promis. Avez- vous jamais appris le Francais t Je l'ai appris autrefois. User, 1. Epeler, 1. (Obs. 78.) Refuser, 1, (de, avant l'inf.) Comment votre frere a-t-il ecrit son theme ? II T a bien ecrit. Mettre a secher, mis a secher. Mettez-vous votre gilet a secher ? Je l'ai deja mis a secher. t Quel age avez-vous ? t J'ai douze ans. t Quel age votre frere a-t-il ? t II a treize ans. Presque, presqut jamais. t II a presque quatorze ais.s. Environ, environ seize ans et demi. t J'ai environ quinze ans. Pres de, (avant les nombres.) t II a pres de quinze ans. A peine. A peine neuf. t Vous avez a peine dix-sept ans. Pas tout-a-fait onze ans et deux mois. t Je n'ai pas tout-a-fait seize ans. Es-tu plus age que ton frere ? Je suis plus jeune que lui. Je ne puis pas vous dire quel age j'ai. 11 y a. Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un ecu ? Trois. II y a cinq centimes dans un sou. II y a vingt sous ou cent centimes dans un franc. Cent. Le centime. Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un dollar ? II y a 5 francs et 7 sous. Trente-cinquieme Th£me. Ire Sec. Si vous oubliez de mettre le quantieme an commencement du theme, vous pouvez le mettre a la fin, end fem.^ Bon jour, mon cher ami, j'ai recu votre billet et je vois avec plaisii que vous me promettez de venir a none petit concert. Je vous le THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 181 promets, si je me porte bien. Je suis sur de vous avoir, car vous vous portez toujours bien. Non, je vous assure (assure you), car hier j'ai en mal de tete. — Vous ai-je promis quelque chose? Vous ne rrravez rien promis. Je croyais vous avoir promis d'aller quelque part avec vous. Si vous me Favez promis, je Fai oublie. Qu"est-ee que mon pere vous a promis? II a. promis de rrracheter un beau livre. Donnez-moi ce que vous m'avez promis. — Je ne peux pas vous le donner avant apres-demain. — Votre ami a-t-il recu beaucoup d'argent? II n'en a guere recu. — Combien a-t-il recu ? II n'a recu qu'un dollar et un ecu. — Combien avez-vous donne a mon fils ? Je lni ai donne six dollars, ce qui fait un peu plus de trente francs. — Est-ce tout ce que vous lui avez promis? Oui, c'est tout ce que je luiai promis. Avez-vous de Pargent Francais? J'en ai. Avez- vous des francs, des sous, et des centimes? Oui, j'en ai. — Combien de sous y a-t-il (are there) dans un franc? II y en a vingt. — Avez- vous quelques centimes? J'en ai quelques uns. — Combien de centimes y a-t-il dans un sou? II y en a cinq. — Et combien y en a-t-il dans un franc? Cent. — Avez-vous un habit a preter a ce pauvre homme? A lui preter? Ou a lui donner. J'ai un habit qui est un peu use, il peut Pavoir. Are your shoes worn out? They are almost worn out. but not quite. — Are you going to have them mended ? The shoemaker has them to mend. — Have you anything to lend to cousin Charles? I have. — To whom have you lent your hat ? I have not lent it; I have given it away, because it is almost worn out. — To whom have you given it away? I have given it to a pauper, (d un pauvre.) Does your little brother already know how to spell ? He does. — Does he spell well ? He does. — How old is he ? He is six years old. —Let me hear him. Robert, come here to spell. — How has the doctor's little boy spelt ? He has spelt so so. — Is he as old as Robert ? He is older. — How have their children written their exercises ? They have written them badly, as usual ; but they are young, they are only ten. — Has my neighbor lent you his gloves ? He has refused to lend them to me. — Do you know Spanish? No, I do not like it. I have refused to learn it. Does the secretary's son speak Italian ? He speaks it well. — Does he speak it with every Italian he sees? (§78.) He does usually, but yesterday he refused to speak to a stranger. — How old are you. my young boy? I am eleven nearly. — How do our friends speak? They do not speak badly. — Do they listen to what you tell them? They do almost always. — How hast thou learned Italian ? I have learned it in this manner. — As you understand it well, I suppose it 16 182 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) is a good way, (une bonne maniere,) is it not? I believe it is; at least, I like that way. — Have you called me ? I have not called you; but I have called your brother to tell him to prepare his clothes (habits) to start to-morrow for Boston. — To start so soon? Yes, I want to send some one to Boston, and he has time to go. — Is he come? No, he has not yet come. Do you know where he has gone? He has gone to the tailor's to bespeak a coat and a vest. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. To understand, to comprehend. To hear, to understand. To wait for, to expect. To lose. Do you understand me ? I do. Have you understood the man ? I have understood him. I hear you, but I do not understand you. The noise. The wind. The noise (roaring) of the wind. Do you hear the roaring of the wind ? I do. I do not. To bark. What (21 M barks ? Dogs bark. {% 15.) The barking. Have you heard the barking of the dogs ? I have. I have not. To wait for some one or somethin To expect some one or something Are you waiting for my brother ? I am waiting for him. Do you expect some friends ? 1 do expect some. How much has your brother lost ? He has lost about a crown. I have lost more than he. To remain, to stay, to dwell. Comprendre,* 4, (conjugue comrae prendre. (24 3 , 25 1 , 342.) Entendre, 4. Attendre, 4. Perdre, 4. Me comprenez-vous ? M'entendez- vous ? Je vous comprends. Je vous entends, Avez-vous compris l'homme ? Je l'ai compris. mais je ne vous Le vent. Je vous entends comprends pas. Le bruit. Le bruit du vent. Entendez-vous le bruit du vent ? Je Pentends. Je ne l'entends pas. Aboyer. (§ 144, R. 3.) Q^est-ce qui aboie ? Les chiens aboient. L? aboiement. Avez-vous entendu l'aboiement des chiens? Je l'ai entendu. Je ne l'ai pas entendu. . > Attendre quelqu'un ou quelque . > chose. Attendez-vous mon frere ? Je l'attends. Attendez-vous des amis ? J'en attends quelques uns. Combien votre frere a-t-il perdu ? II a perdu environ un ecu. J'ai perdu plus que lui. Hester, 1, (prend plus souvent etre que avoir pour auxiliaire.) 1 1 This verb takes avoir when it signifies to live in, and etre, when it Bignifies to remain. Ex. JTai reste sept mois a Colmar sans partir de ma chambre, (Voltaire;) I remained (lived) seven months at Colmar without leaving my room. Je I' at ten dais a Paris, mais il est reste a Lyon, (The French Academy ;) I waited for him in Paris, but he remained at Lyons. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 183 The nobleman. Le gentilhomme. Noblemen. j Les gentilshc-mmes. (§ 140—7.) Obs. 82. Quand un mot est compose d'un nom et d'un adjectif, Tun et l'autre prennent la marque (the mark) du pluriel 1 Genteel, pretty. Genlil. Where has the nobleman remained ? He has remained at home. Have you remained with him ? Ou le gentilhomme est-il reste ? II est reste a la maison. Etes-vous reste avec lui ? Trente-cinquieme Theme. 2de Sec. Si vous ne mettez pas la date ici, mettez-la a la fin du theme. Ou avez-vous mouille vos habits de cette maniere ? Un des gar- cons ra'a mouille comme cela. N ; importe. Otez vite votre habit, vos souliers, et vos bas, et mettez-les pres du feu ; a secher. Je ne le peux pas, j'ai besoin d'etre a la maison a six heures et demie. et il est presque six heures et quart a present, ainsl vous voyez que je n ; ai pas assez de temps pour faire secher mes habits. Vous avez raison. Alors. allez chez vous. changez-y d'habit, de bas et de souliers, aus- sitot que possible. Mais quel est le garcon qui vous a mouille ? C'est celui qui a mouille le petit Jules Pautre soir. Le meme ! Oui. le meme, en verite. C ; est done un mauvais garcon ! Oui, je vous assure. Quel age a-t-il? II a a peine dix cms. Me comprenez-vous? Je vous comprends. Qu J est-ce qui a fait ce bruit-la? Jepense que c'est le domestique dans le salon. Quel age a notre voisin ? II n 7 a pas tout-a-fait trente ans. — Nos amis sont-ils aussi jeunes que nous? lis sont plus vieux que nous. Quel age ont-ils? L 7 un a a peine dix- neuf ans. et Pautre en a pres de vingt. — Votre oncle est-il aussi age que le mien ? Quel age a le votre ? Le notre a environ cinquante- sept ans et demi. Combien le votre a-t-il ? II a a peu pres le meme age. How old are you 1 I am hardly eighteen years old. — How old is your brother? He is about twenty-one. — He is then older thai] you? To be sure. But as you are much taller, I thought you were older. No, he is 3 years older than I, (il a 3 ans de plus que moi.) — How old art thou? I am not going to tell you how old I am. — Do you understand me? I do. — Does the Frenchman understand us? He does. — Do you understand what (ce que) we are telling you ? We do understand it. — Dost thou understand French? I do not yet. but I am learning it. — Do we understand the English? — We do not un- derstand them. — Do theEnglish understand us? They do. — Do we understand them ? We hardly understand them. — Do you hear any 1 Except the adjective demi, half, which does not take it. (19 2 , N. 3.) 184 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) noise ? I hear nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the wind % I have heard it. What do you hear } I hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose (29 2 ) dog is this? It is the dog of the Scotchman. — Have you lost your stick? I have not lost it. — Has your servant lost my bank-notes? (billets de banque ?) He has lost them. — Did you go to the ball? I did not. — Where did you remain ? I remained at home. — Where did the noblemen remain ? They remained in the garden. — Has your father lost as much money as I ? He has lost more than you. — How much have I lost ? You have hardly lost a crown. — Did your friends remain at the ball? They remained there. — Do you know as much as the English physician? I do not know as much as he. — How many books have you read? I have hardly read two. — Do you wait for any one ? I wait for no one. — Are you waiting for the man whom I saw this morning ? I am waiting for him. — Art thou waiting for thy book ? I am waiting for it. — Do you expect your father this evening? I do. — Do you expect some friends? I do. THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, 36ih.—Trente-sixicme Legon, 36me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To heat, beaten, beat. To bite, bitten, bite. Why do you beat the dog ? I beat it because it has bitten me. To owe, owed. How much do you owe me ? I owe you fifty crowns. How much does the man owe you ? He owes me sixty francs. Do our neighbors owe as much as we? We owe more than they. How much dost thou owe ? Eighty francs. Two hundred crowns. Eighty-three francs. Two hundred and fifty francs. Battre, 4, battu, battez. Mordre, 4, mordu, mordez. Pourquoi battez-vous le chien ? Je le bats parce qu'il m'a mordu. Devoir, du. Combien me devez-vous ? Je vous dois cinquante ecus. Combien l'homme vous doit-il ? II me doit soixante francs. Nos voisins doivent-ils autant que nous? Nous devons plus qu'eux. Combien dois-tu ? Quatre-vingts francs. Deux cents ecus. Quatre-vingt-trois francs. Deux cent cinquante francs. Obs. 83. As seen above, quatxe-vingt and cent take s when they are fol- lowed ^y nouns; but they have no s when followed by another numeral. Are you to .... ? I am to ... . t Devez-vous . . . ? t Je dois .... Where are you to go this morning | t Ou devez-vous aller ce matin afier breakfast ? apres dejeuner! THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, (l.) 185 I am to go to the store. . t Je dois aller au magasin. Is your brother to come here soon ? | t Votre frere doit-il venir ici bientot ? He is to come here very soon. \ t II doit venir ici bientot. Obs. 84. Are you to . . . ? I am to . . ., &c, not being used here in their natural or literal sense, but expressing duty, obligation ; the French translate them by the verb to owe, viz. devez-vous . . . ? Je dois . . ., il doit . . ., &c. To return, (to come back.) (It is also translated by retourner, 1.J Revenir* 2, revenue (conjugue comme son primitif, venir. (24 3 ^ 25 1 , 25 2 , 34 1 .) A quelle heure revenez-vous du marche ? Ten reviens a midi. En. Le domestique revient-il de bonne heure du magasin ? II en revient a six heures du matin. t A neuf heures du matin, t A cinq heures du soir. t A onze heures du soir At what o'clock do you return from the market ? I return from it at twelve o'clock. From it, from there, thence. Does the servant return early from the warehouse ? He returns from it at six o'clock in the morning. At nine o'clock in the morning. At five o'clock in the evening. At eleven o'clock at night. Trente-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme ou (either) ici ou a la fin du theme. Bon jour, mon cousin, comment va, ce matin ? Bien • et vous . Moi aussi. Avez-vous bien dormi. (slept.) Oui, j'ai tres-bien dor- mi. Savez-vous si le dejeune est pret? Pret! Avez-vous deja faim ? Oui, j'ai grand'faim, je vous assure. Tres-bien. Je vais voir si le cuisinier est revenu du marche. Allez, et revenez vite : ou, plutot (rather) laissez-moi aller avec vous. — Bien, allons ensemble voir si le cuisinier a ete au marche, et s'il en est revenu, et en (at the) raerae temps, savoir quand il peut nous donner a dejeuner. Allons, venez, (come, let us go.) Allez-y, mes enfants. — Moi, je vais compter les i et les i de dollars que mon vieux fermier m'a apportes— 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 — 20 quarts de dollar, font 5 dollars. C ; est bien. A present, comptons les i dollars. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, et 1 font 19. J ; ai mal compte. Comptons encore. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, et 2 font 20. West juste, (that's right.) Ah ! vous voila, Messieurs, et bien, le cuisinier a-t-il ete au marche et en est-il revenu? Oui, il en est revenu, et le dejeuner va etre pret dans un instant. J'en suis charme. car je commence aussi a avoir faim. Tenez ! (hear!) Le domestique a donne le signal ; le dejeuner est pret. Allons dejeu- ner. — Donnez-moi mon mouchoir qui est sur le dos du fauteuil. Le voici. — Devez-vous diner en ville? (in town?) Oui, je dois diner avec Pavocat de mon oncle. A quelle heure devez-vous y aller I 16* 186 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Mori cousin et moi, nous devons y aller a 2 heures J. Doit-il y aller avec vous ? Oui, il doit y venir avec moi. — Nous devons tous deux diner avec l'avocat. Why does your neighbor beat his dog? Because it has bitten his boy. — How many times did it bite him? It has bitten him only once; and that is enough, is it not? — Is your farmer returned from market ? He is not yet returned from it. — At what o'clock did your brother return from the ball ? He returned from it at one o'clock in the morning. — At what o'clock didst thou come back from thy friend's? I came back (en) at eleven o'clock in the morning. — Didst thou remain long with him? I remained with him about an hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? I intend 4 o remain there a few minutes. — How long did the Frenchman remain with you? He remained with me for two hours. — How long did the Prussians remain in town ? They remained there during three months. Do you intend to remain long with us ? I intend to remain with you 8, 10, or perhaps 15 days, (a fortnight.) — How much do I owe you? You do not owe me much. — How much do you owe your tailor ? I owe him eighty francs, or about sixteen dollars. — How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? I owe him already eighty-five francs, that is, about seventeen dollars. — Do I owe you anything ? You owe me nothing. — How much does the Englishman owe you? He owes me more than you. — Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards ? Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother? You owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we? They owe me less than you. — How much do they owe you? They owe me two hundred and fifty francs. — How many dollars is that? How much do we owe you ? You owe me three hundred francs, that is, about 60 dollars. VOCABULAIRE How long ? During, for. Whilst. Whilst I am here. How long has he remained there ? A minute. An hour. A day. A month. A year. The summer. The winter. 2de Section. Combien de temps ? Pendant. 1 Pendant que. Pendant que je suis ici. Combien de temps y est-il reste ? Pendant 1 une minute. 2 Pendant une heure. 2 Pendant un jour. Pendant un mois. Pendant une annee. 2 L'ete\ L'hiver. 1 The adverb pendant, when it signifies for, may be omitted in French as well as in English. 2 Minute, heure, annee, and rue, are feminine nouns, of which the in- THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 187 Obs. 85. Les noms des saisons, (seasons,) des mois, et des jours, sont masculins, excepte Vautomne, autumn, qui est masculin et feminin. During the summer. Last winter. To dwell, to live, to reside, to remain. Where do you live ? I live in William street, number twenty-five. Where did your brother live ? He lived in Rivoli street, number forty-nine. Post thou live at thy brother's house ? I do not live at his, but at my father's house. Does your friend still live where I lived. He lives no longer where you lived. No longer. Number, at number. How long were you speaking to the man? I spoke to him for two hours. Did you remain long with my father ? I stayed there a long time. I remained with him an hour. A long time, long. Pendant Pete. L'hiver dernier. Demeurer, l. 1 Ou demeurez-vous ? Je demeure (dans la) rue 2 Guillaume, (au) numero vingt-cinq. 2 Ou votre frere a-t-il demeure ? II a demeure (dans la) rue de Rivoli, (au) numero quarante-neuf. 2 Demeures-tu chez ton frere ? Je ne demeure pas che:- hii 5 jjnais chez mon pere. Votre ami demeure-t-il encore ou j'ai demeure ? II ne demeure plus ou vous avez demeure. Ne . . plus. Numero, au numero. Combien de temps avez-vous parle a l'homme ? Je lui ai parle pendant deux heures. Etes-vous reste long-temps chez mon pere ? J'y suis reste long-temps. J'y suis reste une heure. Long-temps, never un long-temps.) Trente-sixieme Th^me. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme ici, ou au bout du theme. Avez-vous dit qiril y a dans le bureau quelqu'un qui veut me voir? Oui. je vous Pai dit. Quand est-il verm? II y a un moment. Qui est-ce? Le connaissez-vous? Non, je ne le connais pas. Je ne Pai jamais vu. Je ne peux pas le voir a present, parce que je dois etre au quai ahuit heures et demie. et il est deja huit heures et vingt-cinq minutes. — Dites-lui de revenir ; cet apres-midi. Non, n'importe, je vais le lui dire moi-meme. Combien de temps avez- vous lu? J'ai lu environ trois quarts cPheure. — Combien de temps definite article is une, a, one, and the definite la, whose plural (les) is the same as that of le. Feminine nouns take, like masculine nouns, an s in the plural, as will be seen hereafter. 1 The verb demeurer takes avoir for its auxiliary when it means to live in, and etre when it signifies to remain. Ex. II a demeure a Paris, he has lived in Paris ; il est demeure court en haranguant le roi, he stopped short •rfi haranguing the king. 2 Vans la before rue, and au before numero, have been put between parentheses, because they are generally omitted. 188 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) le fermier a-t-il attendu? II n'a pas attendu long- temps. — Jean a-t-il etudie long-temps? Non, pas tres-long-temps. — Combien de temps a-t-il etudie 1 Pres d'une demi-heure, (19 2 , N. 3.) Qu'a-t-il fait pen- dant le reste du temps? II a dormi. Quoi ! II a dormi une heure et demie, et il n ; a etudie qu'une demi-heure ? C ; est comme je vous le dis. A-t-il fait son devoir? II dit qu'il Pa fait. — C ? est bon. Cela sufflt. N'avez-vous pas promis a M. P. dialler a son concert ? Si fait, je le lui ai promis, s ; il a lieu pendant que je suis ici. Partez- vous bientot ? Oui, dans quelques jours. Voyez-vous le soldat qui est malade? Non ; mais je vois celui qui Pa ete. Combien de temps Pa-t-il ete? II Pa ete pendant quinze jours, (a fortnight.) Votre cousin ne va-t-il pas a Charleston pendant Phiver ? Si fait, il y va. Y reste-t-il pendant Pete ? II n'y reste pas pendant Pete. Ou va-t-il alors? II en revient, pour rester avec nous. Combien de temps avez-vous demeure dans la rue Chestnut? Nous y avons demeure long-temps. Le chien est-il reste pres du feu pendant deux heures? II n'y est reste qu'une heure, parce qu'il a mal au dos. How much have you given for that English horse ? I gave 220 dollars for it. — Did not your little son give something to that poor little boy ? Yes, he has given him 5 cents. — Do you owe anything to the grocer? No, I believe I owe him nothing. — Does your neighbor take bread from your German baker? He does. — Does he owe him anything? I believe he does. — Does he owe the butcher? I do not know if he owes him anything. — Do you see the sailor who is in the ship ? I do not see the one ($ 87) in the ship, but the one on the wire bridge. — Do you know his name? I do not. — Where are you to go? I am to go to the old bridge. — Is your friend's uncle to come here to-day ? He is. — At what o'clock is he to come ? He is to come very soon. — When are your sons to go to the play ? They are to go to-night, (ce soir.) — When are they to return from it? They are to return from it at half past ten. — When are you to go to the physician's? I am to go at ten o'clock at night. — When is your son to return from (de chez) the painter's ? He is to return at five o'clock in the evening. — Where do you live ? I live in Rivoli street, number forty-seven. — Where does your father live ? He lives at his friend's house, in Walnut street, (rue Walnut,) No. 251. — Where do your brothers live ? They live in William street, number one hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy brother's house? I live at his house. — Do you still live where you did? I live there still. — Does your friend still live where he did ? He no longer lives where he did. — Where does he live at present? He lives at his father's house THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 37ih.—Trente-septieme Legon, 37me Vocabulaire. Ire Section. Till, until Till, until noon, (twelve o'clock.) Till to-morrow. Till this evening Till the day after to-morrow. Till Sunday. Till Monday. Till evening. Till morning. Until the next day. Until the day before yesterday. Till to-day. Until this moment — that moment. Till now — hitherto. Until then. How long ? Until what time ? What hour ? — What period ? Jusque, (followed by a preposition and its objective case.) Jusqu'a midi. Jusqu'a demain. Jusqu'a ce soir. Jusqu'apres demain. Jusqu'a dimanche — a lundi. Jusqu'au soir. Jusqu'au matin. Jusqu'au lendema'tz.* Jusqu'avant hier. Jusqu'a aujourd'hui. Jusqu'a ce moment-ci — moment-la. Jusqu'a present — jusqu'ici. Jusqu'alors. > Jusqu'a quand ? Jusques a quand ? Obs. 86. How long, meaning, until what time, what hour, or period, must be translated by jusqu'a quand. But when it means, How many hours, days, &c, or what length of time : (36 2 ) translate by Combien de temps ? or Combien ? For instance : How long did you stay in New York ? may mean : Until what o'clock did you stay in New York, or in other words, when did you leave or quit it ? The answer might then be : At six o'clock^ or on Tuesday, &c. Or else it may mean, How many hours or days, &c, did you stay there? The answer might then be, six hours, three days, &c. Hence, when How long is used, consult the answer to know exactly the meaning of the question. Until what hour do you take lessons ? We take them till one o'clock, (we quit at 1.) Tuesday, on Tuesday — Wednesday. On Thursday — Friday — Saturday. Till I return, (till my return.) Till my brother returns, (till my bro- ther's return.) Till four o'clock in the morning. Till midnight, (till 12 at night.) The return or coming back. How long did you remain at my fa- ther's house ? I remained at his house till eleven o'clock at night. To be able, (can,) been able, (could.) Has the boy been able to read it ? He was able to read it. He could not. Could you find the word ? Yes, I found it immediately. Jusqu'a quand prenez-vous lecons ? Nous iesprenonsjusqu'auneheure. Mardi. Mercredi. (On is not trans- lated.) Jeudi. Vendredi. Samedi. (32 2 , N. 1.) Jusqu'a mon retour. Jusqu'au retour de mon frere. Jusqu'a quatre heures du matin. Jusqu'a minuit. Le retour. Jusqu'a quand etes-vous reste chez mon pere ? J'y suis reste jusqu'a onze heures du soir. Pouvoir,* pu. (20 1 , 24 3 , 34*.) Le garcon a-t-il pu le lire ? (§ 148.) II a pu le lire. II n'a pas pu. Avez-vous pu trouver le mot ? Oui, je l'ai trouve tout de suite. 190 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) Trente-septieme Th^me. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme du mois ici ou a la fin. Mon cher Lucien, je suis charme de vous voir. Je vous croyais absent. Depuis quand etes-vous revenu ? Je suis revenu samedi dernier. Jusqu'a quand allez-vous rester ici? (How long or until what time.) Je vais y rester jusqu'au retour de mon oncle, et peut- etre plus long-temps. L'attendez-vous bientot ? Je l'attends dans 8 ou 10 jours. Demeurez-vous avec votre cher cousin'? Non, je ne demeure plus avec lui. — Avec qui demeurez-vous ? Je ne demeure avec personne. Je suis dans un hotel. Allez-vous y rester jusqu'au retour de votre oncle 1 Je pense que oui. Laissez votre hotel et venez demeurer avec nous. Je vous suis bien oblige. Jusqu'a quand le commis du marchand de livres est-il reste au musee ? II n'y est reste que jusqu'a midi. Pourquoi done ? (so.) Parce qu'il n'a pas pu. Et pourquoi n'a-t-il pas puy rester jusqu'a deux heures comme les autres ? II n'a pas pu, parce que son pere dine de bonne heure. Allez-vous a Lancastre cet ete ? Non, je n'y vais pas. Et vous, Jules, y allez-vous? Moi non plus. Et Charlotte et son frere, y vont-ils ? Eux non plus. — Le professeur y va-t-il? Lui non plus. Qui y va? Personne n'y va. — Combien de temps etes-vous tous restes a Bordeaux'? Mon oncle y a demeure pendant 6 ans, mon cousin pendant trois ans, moi pendant six mois; mais ces jeunes garcons n'y sont restes que quelques jours. Until what time do the carpenters work at noon ? They work till twelve. — When do they leave off work in the evening? (or, until what hour do they work?) Until 6 o'clock, or rather J to 6. — How long did I work? (or, until what? &c.) You worked till 4 o'clock in the morning. — Has the physician still long to wait? (encore pour long-temps ?) He has. — Am I to remain long here ? You are to remain here till Sunday. — Is my brother to remain long with you ? He is to remain with us till Monday. — How long (until what time) are we to work ? You are to work till the day after to-morrow. — Have you still long to speak ? I have still an hour to speak. — Did you speak long? I spoke (ai parte) till the next day. — Did you remain long in my counting-house ? I remained in it till this mo- ment. Have you still long to live af the Frenchman's house ? I have still long to live at his house. — How long (till what time) have you still to live at his house ? Till winter. — Has he swept the floor ? He has swept it. — How long did he remain here? Till noon, (midi.) — Does your friend still live with you ? He lives with me no longer. — How long did he live with you? He lived with me only a year. — - THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 191 How long (till what time) did you remain at the ball? I remained there till midnight. — How long (what time) did you reirain in the ship? I remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden till now % I have remained there till now. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. One, some or any one, people, (and they , we, you, in an indefinite sense.) Have they brought my shoes ? They have brought them. They have not brought them yet. What have they said ? They have said nothing. What have they done ? They have done nothing. To be willing, been willing. Has one wished to burn my coat ? No one would burn it. (§ 148 — 4.) Could they find the books ? They could not find them. Can they do what they wish ? They do what they can ; but they do not do what they wish. What do they say ? Nothing new. What do they say new ? They say nothing new. Something or anything new. New. My new coat. My new horse. My handsome horse. My new friend. My handsome coat. On, (pronom indefini, toujours singu lier. § 38.) A-t-on apporte mes souliers ? On les a apportes. On ne les a pas encore apportes. Qu'a-t-071 dit ? On n'a rien dit. Qu'a-t-0% fait? On n'a rien fait. Vouloir,* voulu. (18 J , 24 3 , 34 1 .) A-t-on voulu bruler mon habit ? On n'a pas voulu le bruler. A-t-on pu trouver les livres ? On n'a pu les trouver. Teut-on faire ce qu'on veut ? On fait ce qu'on peut ; mais on ne fait pas ce qu'ow veut. Que dit-on ? Rien de nouveau. Que &\l-on de nouveau ? (Obs. 7.) On ne dit rien de nouveau. Quelque chose de nouveau. Neuf, nouveau, (before a vowel or h mute, nouvel.) 1 Mon habit neuf. Mon nouveau cheval. Mon beau cheval. Mon nouvel ami. Mon bel habit. 2 1 Nouveau {nouvel before a vowel or h mute) is used for things which are new from nature or invention, as : du vin nouveau, new wine ; un nouveau commis, a new clerk ; un nouvel ami, a new friend ; un livre nouveau, a book just published. Neuf, on the contrary, is used of things made by men, as : un habit neuf, a new coat ; un livre neuf, a new book, (which ha3 been printed long ago, but has not been used.) Thus we may say: Ce livre neuf est-il nouveau ? Is this new book a new publication ? Neuf figuratively means inexperienced. Ex. Ce valet est bien neuf, this valet is very inexperienced. 2 Bel and nouvel are used only before masculine substantives beginning with a vowel, or h mute, as may be seen from our examples. But in the plural the adjectives remain beau and nouveau. Ex. Ces beaux arbres, these fine trees ; mes nouveaux amis, my new friends. 192 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) To brush, brushed, brush. This fine -looking man. These fine-looking men. This fine tree. Those fine trees. My new friends. Do they believe that ? They do. They do not believe it. Do they speak of that ? They do speak of it. They do not speak of it. Brosser, 1, brosse, brossez, (impera.) Ce bei homme. Ces beaux homines. Ce bel arbre. Ces beaux arbres. Mes nouveaux amis. Croit-on cela ? On le croit. On ne le croit pas. Parle-t-on de cela ? On en parte. On ^en parle pas. Trente-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. Quel est le quantieme ? Apprenez-le et mettez-le ici. Que faites-vous ce matin ? Je lis. Que lisez-vous ? Le journal d'aujourd'hui, Avez-vous deja vu quelque chose de nouveau? Je n 7 ai encore rien lu de nouveau. Je n ; ai lu qu'un article. Que dit-on du cholera? Pas grand 7 chose encore. Parle-t-on de Por de la Cali- fornie 1 Je crois qu'on en parle j mais laissez-moi lire, et alors jf* peux vous dire ce qu 7 on dit de nouveau. Eh ! bien. Lisez. — Tra vaillez avant de dejeuner. Non, je ne peux pas travailler avant de dejeuner. Je n'ai jamais pu. Moi, je peux, et j'en suis bien aise. — George a-t-il lu et ecrit? II n'a voulu ni lire ni ecrire. Qu'a-t-il fait? II n ? a rien voulu faire. C'est extraordinaire ! Est-il malade ? Non, il se porte tres-bien au contraire, car il a tres-bien dejeune. Pourquoi n'a-t-il pas voulu etudier comme a Pordinaire ? II a dit : Je veux jouer au lieu de travailler. A-t-il perdu son livre ? Non ; je le lui ai donne • mais au lieu de Pouvrir, il Pa serre dans son pupitre. Le voisin vous a-t-il prete son cheval ? Non, il a refuse de me le preter. Le fermier vous a-t-il prete le sien ? Non, il a aussi refuse, parce qu'il en a besoin pour aller en ville. Ah ! Mile., je suis charme d'avoir le plaisir de vous voir. Otez votre chale et votre bonnet, et asseyez-vous dans ce fauteuil. Ce fauteuil de velours est trop chaud, je vais prendre ce siege. Je veux voir Charlotte. Charlotte n 7 est pas ici. En verite. Alors, je vais partir. Adieu, M. Adieu, Mile. Has the shoemaker been able to mend my shoes? He has not been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them? Because he has had no time. — Have they (on) been able to find my gold buttons ? They have not been able to find them. — Why has the tailor not mended my coat? Because he has no good thread.— Why have you beaten the dog ? Because it has bitten me. — Why do you drink? Because I am thirsty. — What have they wished to say ? They have not wished to say anything. — Have they said any- thing new ? They have not said anything new. — What do they (on) THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 193 say new in the market? They say nothing new there. — Did they kill any dogs this morning ? They killed more than 65. — Do they believe that? They do not believe it. — Do they speak of that? They do speak of it. — Do they speak of the man that has been killed? They do not speak of him. — Can people do what they wish ? They do what they can • but they do not what they wish. — What have they brought? They have brought your new coat. — Has my new servant brushed my fine carpets ? He has not yet brushed them. — Have you bought a new horse ? I have bought two new horses. — How many fine trees have you seen ? I have seen but one fine tree. — Have you seen a fine-looking man ? I have seen several fine-looking men. — Have you a new friend? I have several. — Do you like your new friends ? I do like them. THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 38th.—Trente-huitieme Legon, 38me, Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To. How far ? Up to, as far as. To, or as far as my uncle's This far, as far as here, hither. That far, as far as there, that ; thither. As far as London. Paris. Rome. To, at, or in Paris. To, at, or in Berlin. Jusqu'oii ? (adv.) Jusque. Jusque chez mon oncle. Jusqu'ici. Jusque la. Jusqu'a Londres, a Paris, a Rome. A Paris. A Berlin. Obs. 87. Mettez (a) avant les noms des villes—Ze Havre, to Havre, au Havre, (§ 12), et mettez (en) avant ceux des pays, (countries,) — To Hungary, en Hongrie. To, at or in France — England. As far as England. As far as Spain. As far as France. As far as Italy. As far as my house. As far as the warehouse. As far as the corner. As far as the end of the road. As far as the middle of the road. Up stairs. Down stairs. As far as above. As far as below. As far as the other side of the road. This side, on this side. That side, on that side. Germany. In America. Holland. Hungary, (to.) En France — en Angleterre. Tusqu'en Angleterre. Jusqu'en Espagne. Jusqu'en France. Jusqu'en Italic Jusque chez moi. Jusqu'au magasin. (§ 13.) Jusqu'au coin. Jusqu'au bout du chemin. Jusqu'au milieu du chemin. En haut. En has. Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. Jusqu'a l'autre cote du chemin. De ce cote-ci. De ce cote-la. L'Allemagne. En Amerique. LaHollande. 1 La Hongrie, 1 (en.) 1 In Hollande the letter h is aspirated ; therefore we say la Hollande. 17 194 THIRTY-EIGHTH LE3S0N. (1.) Obs. 88. The names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces, are generally feminine when they end in e mute, and masculine, when they do not. The middle. The well. The cask. The castle To travel. Do you go to Paris ? £ Allez-vous a Paris ? Do you travel to Pans ? Le milieu. Le puits. Le tonneau. Le chateau. Voyager, 1. J'y vais. Est-il alle en Angleterre ? II y est alle. Jusqu'ou est-il alle ? Jusqu'ou a-t-il voyage ? II est aJle jusqu'en Amerique. I do travel (or go) thither. Is he gone to England ? He is gone thither. How far is he gone ? How far has he travelled to ? He is gone as far as America. Trente-huitieme Theme. Ire Sec. Si vous ne savez pas le quantieme, apprenez-le et ecrivez-le ici. Ah ! vous voild, M. Henri. Je vous croyais a voyager. Je sisia revenu depuis un mois environ. — Jusqu'ou avez-vous ete ? J'ai et6 jusqu'en Allemagne. Ainsi, vous avez voyage en Angleterre et en France ? Oui, j'y ai voyage, et en Italie aussi. Avez-vous ete jus- qu'en Hongrie? Non, je n'ai pas eu le temps d'y aller; parce que j'ai reste trop long-temps a Paris. Combien de temps y etes-vous reste? J'y suis reste un mois. Ce n'est pas grand' chose. Pardon- nez-moi, c'est beaucoup quand vous avez beaucoup de pays a voir. Vous avez raison. — Avez-vous voyage seul? Non, mon cher ami Francois a voyage avec moi, et nous avons ete ensemble tout le temps. — Le pere Matthieu est-il venu jusqu'en Amerique ? Oui ; il y est venu. Qui est le pere Matthieu ? Le grand champion Irian- dais de la temperance. — Jusqu'ou les Espagnols sont-ils alles? lis sont alles jusqu'a Londres. — Jusqu'ou ce pauvre homme est-il venu? II est venu jusqu'ici. Est-il venu jusque chez vous? II est venu jusque chez mon pere. — Combien a-t-il perdu? II a perdu tout son argent. Mon ami est-il alle de ce cdte-la? Oui. il est alle de ce cdte-la. Je croyais qu'il etait (§ 147) alle de ce cote-ci. Non, personne n'est alle de ce cote-ci. — Voila votre garcon, ou etak-Ht II etait avec moi. — Et ou etiez-vous? Moi? fetais en haut. — Vous etiez en haut, et moi fetais en bas. Qui etait en bas avec vous? Personne n'etait en bas avec moi, j'y etais seul. How far did you wish to go ? I wished to go as far as the wood. Have you gone as far as there ? I have not gone as far as there. — How far does your brother wish to go ? He wishes to go as far as the end of that road. — How far does the wine go? It goes to the middle of the cask. — Where art thou going? I am going to the THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 195 bridges. — How far are we going ? We are going as far as the thea- tre. — Are you going as far as the well % I am going as far as the castle. — Has the carpenter drunk all the wine? He has drunk it. — Has your little boy torn all his clothes'? He has torn them all. — Why has he torn them ? Because he does not like them. — How much have you lost ? I have lost all my money. — Do you know where my father is? I do not know. — Have you not seen my book? I have not seen it. — Do you know how tnis word is written? It is written thus. — Do you travel sometimes? I travel often. — W T here do you intend to go to, this summer ? (eel ete?) I intend to go to Paris. — Do you not go to Italy ? I do go thither. — Hast thou sometimes travelled? I have never travelled. — Have your friends a mind to go to Holland ? They have a mind to go thither. — When do they intend to depart? They intend to depart the day after to- morrow. — Where is General Lewis going? He is going as far as Hungary. VOCABULAIRE To steal, to rob, commit a theft. To steal something from some one. Have they stolen your hat from you? They have stolen it from me. Has the man stolen the books from thee? He has stolen them from me. What have they stolen from you ? They have stolen gloves from me. Did they steal many ? They did. How do you spell this word ? How is this word written ? It is written thus. To dye or colour, dyed, dye. I dye, thou dyest, he dyes ; dyeing. To dye black. To dye red. To dye green. To dye blue. To dye yellow. Is that brown cloth French, Ame- rican, or English ? It is French. Is not that blue velvet beautiful ? Yes, it is superb. This round white hat. Do you dye your coat blue ? I dye it green. How does he dye his satin ? 2de Section. Yoler, vole, ne volez pas, (impera.) t Voler quelque chose a quelqu'un, t Vous a-t-on vole votre chapeau ? t On me l'a vole. t L'horame t'a-t-il vole les livres ? t II me les a voles, t Que vous a-t-on vole ? On m'a vole des gants. Vous en a-t-on vole beaucoup ? On m'en a vole beaucoup. Comment e'pelle-t-on ce mot? Comment ecrit-on ce mot? On l'ecrit ainsi, (de cette maniere.) Teindre,* 4, teint, teignez (impera.) Je teins, tu teins, il teint; teignant. t Teindre en noir. t Teindre en rouge. t Teindre en vert, t Teindre en bleu, t Teindre en jaune. Ce drap brun est-il Francais, Ame- ricain, ou Anglais ? II est. Frangais. Ce velours bleu n'est-il pas beau ? Si fait, il est snperbe. Ce chapeau rond et blanc. (Obs. 61.) t Teignez-vous votre habit en bleu! t Je le teins en vert, t Comment teint-i son satin ? 196 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) He dyes it blue. The dyer. To get dyed, got dyed. What colour have you had your white hat dyed ? I have got it dyed black. Red. Brown. Gray. Pi?ik. Spring. In (in the) spring. Last spring. Next spring. Clear, light. Dark, deep. Light blue. Dark pink. Gray, light brown, and pink, are good for spring. t II le teint en bleu. Le leinturier. t Faire teindre, fait teindre. t Comment avez-vous fait teindre votre chapeau ? t Je l'ai fait teindre en noir. Rouge. Brun. Gris. Rose. Le print emps. Au printemps. Le printemps passe — prochain. Clair. Fonce. Bleu clair. Rose fonce. Le gris, le brun clair, et le rose, sont bons pour le printemps. Trente-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. Savez-vous le quantieme ? Oui, je le sais. Mettez-le ici. Achetez-vous un chapeau blanc ou noir ce printemps? Pen achete un blanc. Le noir est bon pour l'automne. Allez-vous serrer le noir? Sans doute. Votre chale est trop fonce pour le printemps, n ; allez-vous pas en mettre un autre ? Je n'en ai pas d'autre ici. — Vous a-t-on vole une partie de votre linge ? Non, on ne m'a hen vole ; mais on a vole quelque chose a mon frere. — Que lui a-t-on vole ? On lui a vole son parapluie et ses gants neufs. — Ou les lui a-t-on voles ? On les lui a voles dans le bureau de son cousin. Je suis bien fache de Fapprendre. Mais si vous n ; avez pas d'autre chale, Victoria peut vous en preter un plus clair. Trouvez-vous le mien trop fonce ? Oui, je le trouve trop fonce. Votre chapeau est beaucoup plus clair, n'est-ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison. — Victoria, pretez-moi un de vos chales. Lequel voulez-vous? J ; en veux un moins fonce que celui-ci; en avez-vous de moins fonce? Oui, j'en ai un plus clair, un peu plus clair que le votre. Laissez-moi Taller chercher. Allons-y ensemble. Allez-vous voyager le printemps prochain? Non pas le printemps prochain, mais Pautomne pro- chain. Have they stolen anything from you ? They have stolen all the good wine from me. — Have they stolen anything from your father? They have stolen all his good books from him. — Dost thou steal any- thing? I steal nothing. — Hast thou ever stolen ai^thing? I have never stolen anything. — Have they stolen your good clothes from you? They have stolen them from me. — What have they stolen from me ? They have stolen all the good books from you. — When did they steal the money from you? They stole it from me last spring. — Have your servants ever stolen anything from us? They have never stolen anything from us. — Does your son get his white vest dyed? He does get it dyed. — Does he get it dyed red? He THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 197 gets it dyed gray. — What color have your friends got their coats dyed ? They have got them dyed green. — What color have the Italians had their hats dyed ? They have had them dyed light brown. — Have you a white hat? I have a black one. — What hat has the nobleman? He has two hats: a white one and a black one. — What hat has the American? He has a round black hat. — - Have I a white hat? You have several white and black hats. — Has your dyer already dyed your cloth ? He has dyed it. — What color has he dyed it ? He has dyed it green. THIRTY-NINTH LESSON, 39th.— Trente-neuvume Legon, S9me. Vocabulaike. Ire Section. To be necessary — must. [ Falloir,*3 (verbe irre'gulier, defectif, et unxpersonnel;, p. passe fallu. S itn T C t M " I T l u v. J Faut-il! Ne faut-il pas? Must I, thou, he, she, we, you, they ? ) It is necessary. I, thou, he, &c, must. | II faut. II ne faut pas. Obs. 89. All verbs expressing necessity, obligation, or want, as, to b& obliged, to want, to be necessary, must, are in French generally rendered by falloir. Is it necessary to go to the market ? It is not necessary to go thither. What must be done to learn French ? It is necessary to study a great deal. What must /do? Faut-il aller au marche ? II ne faut pas y aller. Que faut-il faire pour apprendre le Francais ? II faut etudier beaucoup. Que me faut-il faire ? Obs. 90. Faut (as all unipersonal verbs) can have no other nominative but il. Hence, the English subject of must, is to be rendered in French by the indirect object : (§ 47,) me, te, lux, nous, vous, or leur. You must stay still. Whither must he go ? He must go for his book. What must they buy ? They must buy some beef. What must we read ? What must you have ? II vous faut rester tranquille. Ou lux faut-il aller ? II lux faut aller chercher son livre. Que leur faut-il acheter ? II leur faut acheter du bceuf. Que nous faut-il lire ? Que vous faut-il ? Ohs. 91. The verb have, following in English the verb must, is not ren- dered in French. /must have some money. Must you have a sou? Must you have a great deal ? /must have a great deal. 17* II me faut de 1' argent. Vous faut-il un sou ? Vous en faut-il beaucoup ? II m'en faut beaucoup. 198 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (I.) II ne me faut qu'un sou. t Ne vous faut-il que cela ? t II ne me faut que cela. I want only one sou. Is that all you want ? That is all /want. How much must thou have ? ) Combien u faut . il? How much dost thou want ? 3 / want only a franc. How much must your brother have ? He wants only two francs. Have you what, you want ? I have what /want. He has what he wants. They have what they want. More. II ne me faut qu' un franc. Combien faut-il a votrefrere? II ne lux faut que deux francs. Avez-vous ce qu'il vous faut ? J'ai ce qu'il me faut. II a ce qu'il lui faut. lis ont ce qu'il leur faut. Davantage. Obs. 92. This adverb has the same signification as plus, with this differ- ence only, that it cannot precede a noun. No more (of it, them). Do you not want more ? I do not want more. He does not want more. W en pas davantage. Ne vous en faut-il pas davantage ? II ne m'en faut pas davantage. II ne lui en faut pas davantage. Tkente-nettvieme Theme. Ire Sec. Cherchez le quantieme et mettez-le ici. Faut-il envoyer au marche* ? Oui, il faut y envoyer. Pourquoi faut-il y envoyer ? II nous faut du beurre, du baeuf, et du lait. Du lait? Le laitier n 7 en a-t-il pas apporte ce matin 7 ? Non, il nous a oublies, ou il est malade. N'importe. Comme vous dites, il nous faut du lait. — Le cuisinier a-t-il assez d 7 argent pour acheter tout ce qu ; il nous faut? Ne lui avez-vous pas donne un billet de deux dol- lars? II n ; a pas voulu le prendre, et je ne lui ai donne que trois quarts de dollar. S"il n ; a pas davantage, je crois que ce n ; est pas assez. Alors, il faut lui en donner davantage. Combien davantage? Un demi-dollar. En avez-vous un? Oui, en voici un. Donnez-le- lui. Qui fait ce bruit-la ? C ; est Francois. Qu'a-t-il? Que lui faut- il ? II a mal a Pceil. Dites-lui de rester tranquille. II ne peut pas rester tranquille. II lui faut rester tranquille, et dormir. Ce n ? est pas difficile a dire ; mais c'est plus difficile a faire. Is it necessary to go to the market ? — It is not necessary to go there. — What must they buy ? They must buy some gloves. — Must I go for some salt? You must go for some. — Am I to go to the ball? You must go. — When must I go ? You must go this evening. — - Must 1 go for the carpenter? You must go for him. — What must be done to learn Russian ? It is necessary to study a great deal. — Is it necessary to study a great deal to learn German ? It is. (Dir. 1.) — What must I do? You must buy a good book. — What is he to do ? He must stay still. — What are we to do ? You must not stay THIRTY-NINTH LESSCN. (2.) 199 gull, but work. — Must you work much in order to learn the Arabic % I must work much to learn it. — Why must I go to the wharf? You must go there to bring the sailors here. Must I go anywhere ? Thou must go into the garden. — Must I send for anything ? Thou must send for some wine. — What must I do? You must write an exercise. — To whom must I write a note? You must write one to your friend. — Do you not want any shoes ? I do not want any. — Dost thou want much money % I want much. — How much must thou have ? I must have five crowns. — How much does your brother want ? He wants but six sous. — Does he not want more ? He does not want more. — Does your friend want more? He does not want so much as I. — What do you want? I want money and clothes. — Have you now what you want ? I have what I want. — Has your father what he wants ? He has what he wants. Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. Vous a-t-il fallu travailler beaucoup pour apprendre le Frangais ? Have you been obliged to work much to learn French ? I have been obliged to work much. What am I to do ?, You must work. Am I to go thither ? You may go thither. To be worth — been worth. How much may that horse be worth ? It may be worth a hundred crowns. Are you worth ? I am worth. Thou art worth. Pie is not w T orth. We are worth — they are worth. How much is that gun worth ? It is worth but one crown. How much is that worth? That is not worth much. That is not worth anything. This is worth more than that. The one is not worth so much as the other. To be better. Am I not as good as my brother ? You are better than he. 1 am not so good as you. To give back, to restore. Does he restore you your book ? He does restore it to me. Has he given you back your gloves ? He has given them back to me. II m'a fallu travailler beaucoup Que dois-je faire ? Vous devez travailler. Faut-il y aller ? Vous pouvez y aller. Valoir* 3 — valu. Combien ce cheval peut-il valoir ? II peut valoir cent ecus. Valez-vous ? Je vaux. Tu vaux. II ne vaut pas. Nous valons — ils valent. Combien ce fusil vaut-il ? II ne vaut qu'un ecu. Combien cela vaut-il ? Cela ne vaut pas grand' chose. Cela ne vaut rien. Celui-ci vaut plus que celui-la. L'un ne vaut pas autant que 1' autre. Valoir mieux. Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant que mon frere ? Vous valez mieux que lui. Je ne vaux pas autant que vous. Rendre, 4. Rendu. Rendez. Vous rend-il votre livre ? II me le rend. Vous a-t-il rendu vos gants ? II me les a rendus. 200 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) Has your brother already commenced his exercises ? Not yet. He has not yet commenced them. The gift. The present. Have you received a present ? I have received several. Have you received the books ? I have received them. From whom ? From whom have you received pre- sents ? From my friends. Whence ? Where from ? Where do you come from ? I come from the garden. Where is he come from ? He is come from the theatre. Where did they come from ? Votre frere a-t-il deja commence ses themes ? Pas encore. II ne les a pas encore commences. Le don. Le present. Avez-vous regu un present ? J' en ai regu plusieurs. Avez-vous regu les livres ? Je les ai regus. De qui ? De qui avez-vous regu des presents ? De mes amis. D'ou? D'ou venez-vous ? Je viens du jardin. D'ou est-il venu ? II est venu du theatre. D'ou sont-ils venus ? Trente-neuvieme Th^me. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas d'e*crire la date ici ou a la fin du theme. Voulez-vous sortir avec moi? Pourquoi sortez-vous? Je sors pour acheter quel que chose. Que vous faut-il? II me faut plu- sieurs articles. Allons — allons — sortez-vous sans chapeau? Je croyais Pavoir. — Je Pai a present. Etes-vous pret, vous-meme'! ( § 41j.) Je crois que oui. Non, non, attendez, attendez. Je n 7 ai pas pris mon portefeuille. Ainsi vous n'avez pas d'argent. C'est une bonne maniere dialler acheter. Chez qui allons-nous'? D'abord chez le marchand de drap. Vous faut-il du drap pour un habit ? Oui, il m'en faut. Vous en faut-il du bleu, du vert, du noir, ou du gris? Je n 7 ai pas encore fait de choix. Nous sommes pres du magasin. Entrons. Bon jour, M. Bertrand. Messieurs, j'ai Phon- neur de vous saluer. Vous faut-il quelque chose ce matin'? Du drap, du velours, du satin ? Quoi ? II faut du drap a Monsieur. Et vous, M., ne vous faut-il rien? Non pas aujouixPhui. Vous savez qu'avant-hier j'ai achete plusieurs articles chez vous. C'est vrai : vous avez raison. What do you want, Sir? I want some cloth. — How much is that hat worth ? It is worth four crowns. — Do you want any stockings'? I want some. — How much are those stockings worth? They are worth two francs. — Is that all you want? That is all. — Has your little boy received a present? He has received several. — From whom has he received any ? He has received some from my father and from yours. — Have you received any presents? I have received FORTIETH LESSON. (1.) 201 some. — What presents have you received ? I have received fine presents. — How much may that horse be worth? It may be worth five hundred crowns. Is this book worth as much as that? It is worth more. — How much is my gun worth ? It is worth as much as that of your friend. — Are your horses worth as much as those of the English ? They are not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth? It is worth nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ? He is better than yours. — Are you as good as your brother? He is better than I. — Art thou as good as thy friend? I am as good as he. — Are we as good as our neighbors ? We are better than they. — Is your um- brella worth as much as mine ? It is not worth so much. — Why is it not worth so much as mine ? Because it is ;iot so fine as yours. — How much is that gun worth? It is not worth much. — Do you wish to sell your horse ? I do wish to sell it. — How much is it worth ? It is worth two hundred crowns. FORTIETH LESSON, 40th.— Quarantieme Le$on, 40me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. After breakfast — dinner — supper. After me, him, you, them, my friend. After having spoken. After having sold (selling) his horse. After having been (being) there. I put away the knife after cutting (or having cut) the beef. We took tea after dining. We ate a late supper. To pay. ($ 144—3.) To pay a man for a horse. To pay the tailor for the coat. Do you pay the shoemaker for the shoes ? I pay him for them. Does he pay you for the knife ? He does pay me for it. I pay what I owe. To ask, to ask of, to ask for. Ask for. Apres dejeune — apres dine — soupe. Apres moi, lui, vous, eux, mon ami. t Apres avoir parle. (Rul. 1, N. 1.) t Apres avoir vendu son cheval. t Apres y avoir ete. t J'ai serre le couteau apres avoir coupe le bceuf. t Nous avons pris le the apres avoir dine, t Nous avons soupe tard. Payer, 1, paye, payez (impera.) t Payer un cheval a un homme. t Payer l'habit au tailleur. t Payez -vous les souliers au cor donnier? t Je les lui paie. t Vous paie-t-il le couteau ? t II me le paie. Je paie ce que je dois. Demander, 1. demandez, (impera.) Obs. 93. The English verbs : to pay and to ask, require the preposition for. before the object. In French, the object has no preposition, but the person takes a. When the verb payer, however, has no object, do not use « before the person. 202 FORTIETH LESSON. (1.) I have paid the tailor. I have paid him. Have you paid the shoemaker ? I have paid him. Ask Lewis for some money. I ask my father for some money. Ask him for some. Do you ask me for your hat ? I do ask you for it. To ask him for it. To ask him for them. What do you ask me for ? I ask you for nothing. Ask (of) John if he has my pencil. I did (ask him, or ask it of him). What did you ask of the clerk ? I asked him to copy that. He does not ask you to come. J'ai paye le tailleur. Je l'ai paye. Avez-vous paye le cordonnier ? Je l'ai paye. t Demandez de 1' argent a Louis. t Je demande de V argent a mon pere. Demandez-lui-en. t Me demandez-vous votre chapeau ? t Je vous le demande. t Le lui demander. t Les lui demander. t Que me demandez-vous ? t Je ne vous demande rien. t Demandez a Jean s'il a mon crayon. t Je le lui ai demande. t Qu' avez-vous demande au com- mis ? t Je lui ai demande de copier eel a. t II ne vous demande pas de venir. Quarantine Theme, Ire Sec. Qui est la? C'est le boulanger. — Lui avez-vous demande trois pains? (loaves?) Non, je ne lui en ai demande que deux, comme a Pordinaire. Demandez-lui-en un autre. Je vais le lui demander. Quel pain faut-il lui demander? Un rond ou un tortillon? (a twist loaf?) Demandez-lui un tortillon. et s'il n'en a pas, prenez-en un rond. — Faut-il lui payer cet autre pain? Oui. voici cinq sous, payez-le. — Le laitier est-il venu? Non, pas encore, il vient, a Pordi- naire, apres le boulanger. S'il a assez de lait. achetez-en pour 3 sous de plus qu'a Pordinaire. II n'en a jamais assez. Alors dites-lui d'en apporter davantage, un peu plus, cet apres-diner. Faut-il le payer? Non, n'importe. Le marchand me demande un dollar et un quart pour ce parapluie, vaut-il cela? Je crois qu'il ne vaut pas tant. — Quel age as-tu, mon enfant? Je n'ai pas encore dix ans. — Et ton frere, quel age a-t-il ? II n'en a que huit. Apprenez-vous deja le Francais tous deux ? Je Papprends deja, mais il ne Papprend pas encore. Pourquoi done ? Parce que notre pere croit qu'il est trop jeune. N'ecrit-il pas? Non, il n'ecrit pas. — Et toi? Moi, j'ecris. Have you paid for the new gun ? I have paid for it. — Has your uncle paid for the satin and the velvet? He has. — Have I not paid the tailor for the clothes? Yes, you have (paid him for them). — What is he asking for, then ? He is not asking you to pay him for the clothes, but for the handkerchiefs and gloves. He is right. I have not yet paid him for them. — Have we paid for our cloaks? FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 203 We have. — Has our cousin already paid for his shoes'? He has not yet paid for them. — Does my brother pay you what he owes you ? He does pay it me. — Do you pay what you owe ? I do pay what I owe. — Have you paid the old baker? I have. — Has your uncle paid the butcher for the beef? He has. — Who has broken my knife ? I have broken it after cutting the bread. Has your son broken my pencils'? He has broken them after writing his notes. — Have you paid the merchant for the wine after drinking it ? I have paid for it after drinking it. — What did you do after finishing your exercises'? I went to my cousin's, in order to conduct him to the museum. — What do you ask this man for? I ask him for the money he is to pay me. — What does this boy ask me for? He asks you for some money. — Do you ask me for any- thing? I ask you for a crown. — Do you ask me for the bread? I do. — Which man do you ask for money ? I ask it of the one who owes me some. (8 2 ? N. 1.) — Which merchant do you ask for gloves? I ask for some from those who live in William street. What do you ask the baker for? I ask him for some fresh bread. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. Must I try to do that ? Yes, try to do it and to do it well. You must try to do better. To hold, held, hold. (24 s .) I hold, thou holdest, he holds, (one.) Do you hold my dictionary ? I do. I do not. Who holds the horse ? The valet does. Do we not hold them ? We do not, but they do. They hold what ? The ladies' fans. 06s. 94. I say ! here! stop! wait attract the attention of the person one See ! here ! see here ! Is it what you seek? No, I am looking for my thimble. Here ! Is that it ? No, but there, that is it. My relation. All my relations. My parents, (mean exclusively my father and mother.) A brother of mine. (% 107.) A cousin of yours. t Me faut-il essay er de faire cela ? Essayez de le faire et de le bien faire. t II vous faut essayer de mieux faire. Tenir,* 2, te?iu, tenez, (impera.) Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, on tient. Tenez-vous mon dictionnaire ? Je le tiens. Je ne le tiens pas. Qui tient le cheval? Le valet le tient. Ne les tenons-nous pas ? Nous ne les tenons pas, mais ils les tiennent. lis tiennent quoi ? Les eventails des dames. ! there ! or any interjection used to speaks to, is . . . Tenez. Tenez ! Est-ce ce que vous cher- chez? Non, je cherche mon de. Tenez! Est-ce cela ? Non, mais tenez, le voila. Mon parent. Tous mes parents. Mes parents, (mean all my relations, including father and mother, ,) t Un de mes freres. t \Jn de vos cousins. 204 FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) A relation of his, (or hers.) A friend of ours. A neighbor of theirs. He tries to see you. Does he try to see me ? He tries to see an uncle of his. To try to To inquire after some one. After whom do you inquire ? I inquire after a friend of mine. They inquire after you. Do they inquire after me ? Properly. You write properly. They do their duty properly. Try to do your task or duty. We have done it properly. ($ 170.) A glass of wine. A piece of bread. t Un de ses parents. t Un de nos amis. t Un de leurs voisins. II cherche a vous voir. Cherche-t-il a me voir \ II cherche a. voir un de ses on ilea. Chercher d . . . . t Demander quelqu'un. t Qui demandez-vous ? t Je demande un de mes amis. t On vous demande. t Me demande-t-on ? Comme ilfaut. Vous ecrivez comme il faut. lis font leur devoir comme ii faut. Cherchez a faire votre devoir. Nous 1'avons fait comme il faut. Un verre de vin. Un morceau de pain. Quarantine Th&me. 2de Sec. Bon jour, Monsieur. Comment ai-je prononce cela? Vousn'avez pas prononce : bon, comme il faut. Comment faut-il le prononcer ? Comme ceci : bon, sans continuer le so7i de Pn 3 (sound of the n.) Je vais essayerde le prononcer comme il faut. — Le sondel'n Franc ais est difficile, n 7 est-ce pas? Non, ce son-la n 7 est pas tres-difficile. Comme je vous Fai dit: il ne faut pas le continuer long-temps. Comment est-ce que je le prononce a present ? bon : Vous le pro- noncez mieux, presque comme il faut. — Comment mon cousin a-t-il ecrit son theme ? II Pa ecrit et traduit comme il faut. — Mes enfants ont bien fait leurs devoirs, j'espere? Oui, ils les ont faits comme il faut. — Ce general ne fait-il pas son devoir'? Si fait, il le fait tou- jours comme il faut, et il ne peut pas faire davantage. — Ces deux jeunes soldats font leur devoir, n ; est-ce pas'? Ils le font aussi bien qu'ils le peuvent. — Faites toujours votre devoir. Je le fais aussi bien que je peux, c'est-a-dire, j'essaie. At whose house do you dine to-day ? My cousin and I (we) dine at the house of a friend of mine, in Walnut street. — With whom did you take tea yesterday, that is to say. the day before yesterday'? Must you know it ? If you will tell me. I will (N. 19 1 ) tell you. I took ea at the house of a relation of yours. The one w r ho has so much merit. That very one. (celui-la mime, ou lui-meme.) — Where are you going'? I am going to the house of a relation of mine, in order to breakfast with him. — Art thou willing to hold my gloves? I am willing to hold them. — Who holds my hat? Your FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 205 son holds it. — Dost thou hold my stick? I do. — Do you hold any- thing? See, I hold your gun. — Who has held my book? Your servant has. — Will you try to speak well ? I will try. — Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises ? He has tried. — Have you ever tried to make a hat ? I have never tried to make one. — Whom are you looking for? I am looking for the man who has sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any one? He is looking for a friend of his. — Are we looking for any one ? We are looking for a neighbor of ours. — Whom dost thou look for? I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of mine ? No, 1 am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to speak Spanish to your uncle ? I have tried to speak Italian to him. — Have you tried to see my father? I have tried to see him. — Has he received you? He has not. — Has he received your brothers ? He has. — Have you been able to see your relation ? I have not. What did you do after writing your exercises? I wrote my note after writing them. — After whom do you inquire ? I inquire after the tailor. — Does this sailor inquire after any one? He inquires after you. — Do they inquire after you ? They do inquire after me. — Do they inquire after me ? They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of yours. — Do you inquire after the physician ? I do inquire after him and after the lawyer. — What does your little brother ask for? He asks for a small piece of bread. — Has he not yet breakfasted? He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — What does your uncle ask for? He asks for a glass of wine. — Has he not already drunk? He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. Then give him a glass of wine. — Must I give a piece of old bread or of fresh bread to my little brother ? Give him neither a piece of old bread nor of fresh bread ; but give him a small piece of the cake which the cook made last evening. — If he wants a glass of new milk, can I give him one ? No, do not give him a glass of milk so soon after breakfast. — What has the clerk got there ? He has his thread gloves. — Has he had them dyed ? He has. — How has he had them dyed ? He had them dyed yellow. Light or dark? Neither light nor dark. — Did you ask the butcher for beef or mutton ? I asked him for beef. I do not like mutton. (Obs. 53.) Resume pour la 40me Lecon. Les chevaux n"ont-ils pas assez de foin ? Si fait, ils en ont assez. mais nos petits oiseaux n ; ont pas assez de grain. — N ; avons- nous ni poivre, ni vinaigre ? Nous avons du poivre, mais nous n'avons pas de vinaigre. Le jeune etranger n 7 a-t-il pas beau- coup d'argent? Si fait, il en a beaucoup ; mais le commis du grand 18 206 . FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) marchand n'en a pas beaucoup. N ? avons-nous pas de lait ? Si fait, nous eu avons un peu. En avons-nous assez? Nous iPen avons guere, mais assez. — Le garcon du cuisinier a-t-il le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin? Non, il ne Pa pas. Que n 7 a-t-il pas'? II iPa pas le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin. — Le petit garcon n ; a-t-il pas les bas de coton ? Quels bas de coton ? Ceux du jeune avocat. II ne les a pas. — Avez-vous du fromage de Pepicier? Pen ai un peu. En avez-vous assez 1 Je n'en ai pas assez. — Avez-vous peur de ce jeune homme-la ? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. — Qui a soif ? Nous avons soif, et nous avons sommeil. — Le menuisier a-t-il peur du chien ? Non, le chien a peur du menuisier. — N 1 avons-nous pas le parapluie de coton du chapelier? Non, nous ne P avons pas, mais nous avons les gants de fil de son ami. Combien de boeufs avons-nous'? Nous en avons trois. Combien en a-t-il? II n"en a qu'un. Combien les Allemands en ont-ils, ou, Les Allemands, combien en ont-ils ? lis en ont cinq. N 7 en ont-ils pas six? Non, ils n'en ont que cinq. — Qui a du courage? Notre jeune commis en a. En a-t-il trop ? Non ; il n 7 en a pas trop, mais assez. — Ce petit garcon-la a-t-il du cceur? II n 7 en a guere. — Les peintres ont-ils beaucoup d'argent? Non, ils n 7 en ont guere. En avez-vous beaucoup ? Je rPen ai qu ; un peu. Qui en a beaucoup ? Nous en avons beaucoup. — Qu 7 avons-nous? Nous avons beaucoup d'or et d'argent. En avons-nous trop ? Nous n ? en avons pas trop, mais assez. — Les domestiques de Pepicier combien de verres ont- ils ? Ils en ont sept ou huit. N 7 en ont-ils pas neuf ? Si fait, ils en ont neuf. N'en ont-ils pas dix ? Ils n ? en ont que neuf. N'en ont- ils pas assez ? Pardonnez-moi, ils en ont assez. — Combien d'yeux cet homme-ci a-t-il ? II en a deux. Et celui-la, combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a qu'un. — N'avez-vous qu ; un oiseau ? Pardonnez-moi, j ? en ai deux. — Ces garcons ont-ils beaucoup de batons ? Quels garcons ? Ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? Ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la, mais ceux du menui- sier. Ils n ? en ont pas beaucoup. Avez-vous le dernier papier? Non, je ne Pai pas. — Avez-vous un papier ? Non, je n ; en ai pas. — Le ministre a-t-il le journal de hier? II en a un. — Votre frere a-t-il le parapluie du president? Non, mais il a le baton du gouverneur, (governor.) — Qui a le cheval du gouverneur? Notre vieux matelot Pa. A-t-il les gants du pre- sident? Non. \e president lui-meme les a. — Le lieutenant-gouver- neur a-t-il les billets du prefet? 11 ne les a pas. 11 n ; a pas quoi? II n'a pas les billets du prefet. Je les ai. — Combien de francs le president du Senat a-t-il? II n 7 en a pas; mais il a des dollars. Combien en a-t-il ? II en a beaucoup. En a-t-il trop ? II n ; en a pas trop. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons pas assez. Les FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 207 Americains n ? en ont-ils pas assez ? lis rr'en ont pas trop. Qui en a trop ? Personne n ? en a trop. — Le president et le vice-president ont- ils beaucoup d ; amis ? lis en ont beaucoup ; mais le prefet n'eb a guere. N ? en avons-nous pas beaucoup ? Si fait, nous en avons beaucoup. Qui en a peu ? Le Russe en a peu. Avez-vous quelques sous? Oui. j'en ai quelques uns. — Ai-je quelques ecus? Vous n J en avez pas, mais vous avez des francs, et des billets de ban que. Combien en ai-je ? Vous en avez dix — N'ai- je pas deux billets de dix dollars'? Non, vous n ; en avez qu ; un, mais vous avez trois billets de cinq dollars. — Jean a le premier volume de Pouvrage de Thiers, n J a-t-il pas le second ? Non. il n'a que le premier. L'Americain n'a-t-il pas le dernier volume ? Non, il ne Pa pas. Qui Pa? Personne ne Pa. — Quelqu'un a le journal du cinq de ce mois-ci, n'est-ce pas? Le Russe a celui dn six, du sept et du huit, mais non pas celui du cinq. — Quels papiers le jeune chapelier a-t-il? II a ceux que vous n'avez pas. — Les Allemands iP ont-ils pas froid ? Non, ils ont chaud et soif. — Le menuisier et Pepicier n'ont-ils pas tort? Non, ils ont raison. — Notre cordonnier n ; a-t-il pas les souliers de cuir du gouverneur ? II a ceux du lieu- tenant-gouverneur. — J ; ai le douzieme exercice, mon ami Charles a le treizieme, les avocats ont le quatorzieme, qui a le quinzieme? Personne n ; a le quinzieme, mais nous avons le seizieme et le dix- septieme. — Quel cahier avez-vous? Pai le mien. — Le fils de P'ami de votre maitre est-il ici ? Non, il est a Boston. FORTY-FIRST LESSON, 41st- VOCABULAIRE. Tht one who, he who, him who. Those who. They who. To perceive, perceived, perceive. Do you perceive the scholar who comes? I do perceive the one who is coming. The one on . . . Those in . . . (§ 87.) I do not like the one (those) coming. Does your uncle perceive the soldiers who are going to the covered bridge ? He does not perceive those who go. Whom do the children perceive ? They perceive r.obody. Quarante et unieme Lecon, 41me. Ire Section. Celui qui. f§ 40.) Ceux qui. Apercevoir, apercu, apercevez, conju- gue comme recevoir. (24 1 , 24 3 , 31 l .) Apercevez-vous l'ecolier qui vient ? J'aperc^ois celui qui vient. Celui qui est sur . . . Ceux qui sont dans . . . Je n'aime pas celui qui vient, ceux qui viennent. Votre oncle apergoit-i\ les soldats qui vont au pont couvert ? II n'apergoit pas ceux qui y vont. Qui les infants opergoivent-ils? Ils n'apfirgoivent personne. 208 FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) How was the weather yesterday ? What kind of weather was it yest. ? What weather had we yesterday ? Was it fine weather yesterday ? It was bad weather yesterday. It is fine weather this morning. It is neither cold nor warm, but plea- sant and dry. Dark, obscure. Clear, light. Dusky, gloomy. Dry. Wet, damp. Is the weather damp ? It is not damp, but dry. The weather is too dry to be pleasant. The moonlight, moonshine. The sun. Is it moonlight ? It is. Have we too much sun ? Is it too sunny ? It is too sunny. It is not. This syrup. His vinegar syrup. Have you tasted this vinegar syrup ? I have. I have not. How do you like it ? > t Quel temps a-t-il fait hier ? Quel temps avons-nous eu hier ? t A-t-il fait beau temps hier ? t II a fait mauvais temps hier. t II fait beau temps ce matin. t II ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais agreable et sec. Obscur. Clair. Sombre. Sec. Humide. t Fait-il humide ? t II ne fait pas humide, mais sec. t II fait trop sec pour etre agreable. t Le clair de lune. Le soleil. t Fait-il clair de lune ? II fait clair de lune. t Fait-il trop de soleil ? t II en fait trop. II n'en fait pas trop. Ce sirop. Son sirop de vinaigre. Avez-vous goute" ce sirop de vinaigre ? Je l'ai goute. Je ne l'ai pas goute. t Comment le trouvez-vous ? Obs. 95. The French seldom use aimer in similar cases. What do you think of it ? I like it pretty well. I do not like it at all. To learn by heart. Learned by heart. Learn every day something by heart. I learn by heart. What have you learned by heart ? We learned our exercises. Who likes to learn by heart ? This fish. Do you like fish ? ( Obs. 53.) t Qu'en pensez-vous ? t Je le trouve assez bon. Je l'aime assez. t Je ne le trouve pas bon du tout. Apprendrepar cceur. Appris par cceur. Apprenez tous les jours quelque chose par cceur. J'apprends par cceur. Qu' avez-vous appris par cceur ? Nous avons appris nos themes par cceur. Qui aime a apprendre par cceur ? Ce poisson. Aimez-vous le poisson ? Quarante et unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Comment est le temps aujourd'hui? II fait tres-beau temps. — A-t-il fait beau hier? U a fait mauvais hier. Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin ? 11 a fait mauvais, mais a present il fait agreable. Fait-il chaud? II fait tres-chaud. Le thermometre est a 81 degres et i. II ne fait pas froid, alors. Non, en verite, il ne fait pas froid, mais tres-chaud, au contraire. — Avez-vous deja ete au nouveau jardin de M ? Non, je n'"y ai pas encore ete. Pourquoi done? Parce que nous avons eu mauvais temps. Avez-vous peur du mauvais temps? Je n'en ai pas peur quaud je suis oblige de sortir: mais je FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 209 iPaime pas a sortir quand il pleut. Mais il n'a pas fait de pluie depuis plusieurs jours. Vous avez oublie ; car, il en a fait hier, avant-hier, et le jour avant. C'est-a-dire : jeudi ; mercredi, et mardi. Oui ; vous avez raison. Do you perceive the man who is coming? I do not perceive him. — Do you perceive the soldier's children ? I do perceive them. — Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? I do not per- ceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going to the market. — Does your brother perceive the man who has lent him money ? He does not perceive the one who has lent him, but the one to whom he has lent some. — Dost thou see the children who are studying? I do not see those who are studying, but those who are playing. — Dost thou perceive anything? I perceive nothing. — Have you perceived my parents' warehouses ? I have perceived them. — Where have you perceived them? I have perceived them on that side of the road. Allez-vous manger de ce poulet ou de ce poisson? De ce poulet, s'il vous plait. Je n'aime pas le poisson. Quel morceau voulez- vous? N'importe. Donnez-moi le premier venu. N'avez-vous pas de choix ? Non, je n ; ai pas de choix. Tenez, voici un bon morceau; du moins, je Paime. L ; aimez-vous aussi? Je crois que oui, car, je mange de tout; j'aime tout. Voulez-vous un verre de vin ou un verre de sirop ? Donnez-moi un verre de sirop ; mais n ; y mettez pas beaucoup de sirop. Mettez-Py vous-meme. Donnez-le-moi. Je vais y en mettre un peu. Tenez, voila le verre. Mettez-y le eirop qu'il vous faut. Qui est ce petit Monsieur? C'est mon plus jeune frere. En verite ! Est-ce un bon enfant? Etudie-t-il comme il faut ? II fait assez bien son devoir. Aime-t-il a apprendre par cceur? Oui, il apprend tous les jours quelque chose par cceur. Les ecoliers n ; aiment-ils pas generalement (generally) a apprendre par coBur? II y en a qui aiment a le faire : mais beaucoup aiment a etudier. mais non pas a apprendre par cceur. Do you intend going to see the new vessel of Mr. Tessier? I do. — When? to-morrow, or the day after? The day after to-mor- row, if the weather is fine. Is it light enough in your counting- house ? It is not light in it. — Do you wish to work in mine? I do wish to work in it. — Is it light there ? It is very light there. — Why cannot your brother work in his warehouse? He cannot work there, because it is (il y fait) too dark. — Where is it too dark? In his warehouse. — Is it light in that hole? h is dark there. — Is the wea- ther dry? It is very dry. — Is it damp? It is not damp. It is too dry. — Is it moonlight? It is not moonlight; it is very damp. — Of 18* 210 FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) what does your uncle speak? He speaks of the fine weather. — Of what do those men speak ? They speak of fair and bad weather. — Have you tasted that wine ? I have tasted it. — How do you like it ? I like it well. — How does your cousin like that cider? He does not like it. — Which wine do you wish to taste ? I wish to taste that which you have tasted. — Will you taste this tobacco ? I have tasted it already. — How do you like it? I like it well. — Why do you not taste that cider ? Because I am not thirsty. — Why does your friend not taste this beef? Because he is not hungry. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. The pupil. Once a day. Thrice, or three times a month. So much a year. So much a head. So much a soldier. Six times a year. Early in the morning. We go out early in the morning. When did your father go out ? To speak of some one or something. Of whom do you speak ? We speak of the man whom you know. Of what are they speaking ? They are speaking of the weather. To be pleased, content, satisfied with. Obs. 96. To be pleased, cannot be translated literally in French ; because the verb plaire is intransitive, and cannot be used in the passive form. L'eleve. t Une fois par jour. t Trois fois par mois. t Tant par an. t Tant par tete. (La tete, the head, est un nom fern.) Tant par soldat. Six fois par an. Le matin de bonne heure. Nous sortons le matin de bonne heure. Quand votre pere est-il sorti ? Parler de quelqu'un ou de quelque chose. De qui parlez-vous ? Nous par Ions de l'homme que vous connaissez. De quoi parlent-ils ? lis parlent du temps. Eire content de. . . . Are you satisfied with this man ? I am pleased with him. Are you pleased with your new coat ? I am pleased with it. What are you pleased with ? Displeased, discontented. I am displeased with him, or it. They speak of your friend. Do they ? What do they say of him ? Are they speaking of your book ? They are. They are not. Not. ($171, N. 2.) The teacher and his pupil have not gone out. Be satisfied with what you have. Etes-vous content de cet homme-ci ? J'en suis content. Etes-vous content de votre habit neuf? Ten suis content. De quoi etes-vous content ? Mecontent. J 1 en suis mecontent. On parle de votre ami. En parle-t-on ? Qu'en dit-on ? Parle-t-on de votre livre ? On en parle. On n'en parle point. Ne point (nearly synonymous to . . . pas.) Le maTtre et son eleve ne sont point sortis. Soyez content de ce que vous avez. FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 211 1 am not dissatisfied with it. Do they speak of the cholera? They do. What do they talk of? (or about ?) Nothing is spoken of. Water. The water. Some water. Wine and water. Syrup and water. A glass (or drink) of water. A drink of cider. A glass of wine and water — of mine- ral water. Je n'en suis point mecontent. Parle-t-on du cholera ? On en parle. De quoi parle-t-on ? On ne parle de rien. Eau, (feminin.) U eau. De V eau. Du vin et de l'eau. Du sirop et de l'eau. Un verre d'eau. Un verre de cidre. Un verre de vin et d'eau — d'eau minerale. QUARANTE ET UNIEME Th^ME. 2de Sec All ! vous avez un morceau de pain et de beurre. Allez-vous le manger, ou le donner a quelqu'un? Je vais le manger, car j'ai grand'faim. — Comment ! Vous avez deja faim ? II n ; est pas tard cependant. Combien de fois mangez-vous par jour? Nous man- geons quatre fois. — Combien de fois vos enfants boivent-ils par jour? lis boivent plusieurs fois. — Buvez-vous aussi souvent qu'eux? Je bois plus souvent. — Combien de fois par mois allez-vous au theatre ? Je n ; y vais qu'une fois par mois. — Les eleves y vont-ils ? lis n'y vont point. — De quoi parlent-ils ? lis parlent de leurs lecons. Font- ils trois themes par jour? lis n 7 en font que deux, mais ils les font comme il faut. — Avez-vous pu lire le billet qu ; on vous a ecrit? Je n 7 ai pas pu le lire tout. Est-ce qu"il est mal ecrit? Oui, je vous assure; voyez, vous-meme. C ; est vrai. Soyez le bien veuu, M. — Allons prendre un verre d'eau minerale. J ; y mets toujours du sirop; et vous ? Moi, non. How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball ? He goes two or three times during the winter.— Do you go there as often as he ? I am not used to go. — How oftei does your cook go to market? He goes generally once a day: sometimes twice. — Then he goes every day, except (excepte) Sunday; does he not? Yes, he does. — Whom are you inquiring for? I inquire for your English cousin. Is he at home? No, he is not. — Do you like a large hat ? I do not like a large hat, but a large umbrella. — What do you like to do? I like to write. — Do you like to see these little boys? I like to see them. — Do you like mineral water, with syrup? I do. — Does your brother like cider? He does. — What do the soldiers like? They like wine. — Dost thou like tea or coffee? I like both. — Do these children like to study? They like to study and to play. — Do you like to read and to write? I like to read and to write. How many times a day do you go out? I go 212 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) out as often as I need to go out. — Do you often go to my uncle's? 1 go there six times a year. — Do you understand the man who is speaking to you ? I do not. — Why do you not? Because he speaks too badly. — Does this man know French ? He knows it, but I do not know it. — Why do you not learn it? I have no time to learn it Of whom have they (on) spoken ? They have spoken of your friend. — Have they not spoken of the physicians? They have not spoken of them. — Do they not speak of the man of whom we have spoken ? They do speak of him. — Have they spoken of the noble- men ? They have spoken of them. — Have they spoken of those of whom we speak? They have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken of others. — Have they spoken of our children or of those of our neighbors? They have spoken neither of ours nor of those of our neighbors. — Of which children have they spoken? They have spoken of our master's. — Do they speak of my work? They do speak of it. — Are you satisfied with your pupils? I am satisfied with them. — How does my brother study? He studies well. — How many exercises have you studied ? I have already studied forty-one. — Is your master satisfied with his scholar? He is satisfied with him ; and with the presents he has received. FORTY-SECOND LESSON, 42&.—Quarante-deuxieme Legon, 42me. Vo cab ul aire. Ire Section. OF PASSIVE VERBS.— Des Verbes Passifs. Passive verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from others the action expressed by the verb. In French, as in English, they are con- jugated by means of the auxiliary verb ttre, to be, joined to the past par- ticiple of the active verb. Thus any active verb may be changed into the passive voice. The past participle agrees with the nominative. (§ 159.) Active voice. I love. Thou conductest. He praises. We hear. Passive voice. I am loved. Thou art conduct- ed. He is praised. We are heard. You punish. They blame. To praise, To punish, To blame," By me, You are punished. They are blamed. praised, praise, punished, punish, blamed, blame no one. By. By us. Voix active. J'aime. Tu conduis. II loue. Nous entendons. Vouspunissez. lis blament. Loner, 1, loue, Punir, 2, puni, Blamer, 1, blame, sonne. Par or de. De or par moi, de or par nous. Voix passive. Je suis aime\ Tu es conduit. II est loue. Nous sommes entendus. Vousetespunis. lis sont blames. louez, (imperaJ funissez. Ne bldmez per- FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 213 By thee, by you. By him, by them. By whom is the naughty punished He is punished by his father. By whom is the good loved ? He is loved by everybody. Obs. 97. Par is used for physical or mental actions affections of the heart or soul. Which man is praised, and which is blamed ? Naughty, wicked. The naughty. Skilful, clever. Diligent. Assiduous, industrious, studious. Idle, lazy. Ignorant. The idler, the lazy fellow. To reward. To esteem. To despise. De or par toi, de or par vous. De or par lui, d' or par eux. Par qui le mediant est-il puni ? II est puni par son pere. Be qui le bon est-il aime ? II est aime de tout le monde. De relates to the To hate, hating, hated. I hate, thou hatest, he hates. Good, (wise.) These children are loved, because they are studious and good. To travel (to go) to a ... . (to the.) Where has he travelled to ? He has travelled to Vienna. Is it good travelling ? It is good travelling. It is bad travelling. In the spring. It is bad travelling in the winter. Quel homme est loue, et lequel est blame ? Mechant. Le mechant. Habile. Diligent. Assidu, industrieux, studieux. Paresseux. Ignorant. Le paresseux. Recompenser, 1. Eg imer, 1. Me- priser, 1. Hair,* 2, haissant, hai. (24 1 .) Je hais, tu hais, il bait, (le sing, est irregulier.) Sage, (said only of children.) Ces enfants sont aimes, parce qu'ils sont studieux et sages. Aller,* 1, a . . . (au) (avant un nom.) Ou est-il alle ? II est alle a Vienne. t Fait-il bon voyager ? t II fait bon voyager, t II fait mauvais voyager. Dans le printemps, au printemps. II fait mauvais voyager dans l'hiver. Quaraxte-detjxieme Theme, Ire Sec. De qui avez-vous parle ? Nous avons parle de vous. M'avez- vous loue ? Nous ne vous avons pas loue, au contraire ; nous vous avons blame. Pourquoi m/avez-vous blame? Parce que vous n'etudiez pas bien. — Votre frere vous a parle de quoi? II a parle de ses livres, de ses chevaux et de ses chiens. — Pourquoi ses enfants sont-ils aimes?- Parce qu'ils sont bons, ils sont aimes. Sont-ils plus sages que nous? Ils ne sont pas plus sages que vous, mais ils sont plus studieux. Votre cousin est-il aussi assidu que le mien? II est aussi assidu que le votre. mais le votre est plus sage que le mien. Fait-il bon voyager au printemps ? II fait bon voyager au printemps et dans Pautomne ; mais il fait mauvais voyager dans Pete et dans l'hiver. — Aimez-vous a voyager? Avez-vous quelque fois voyage en hiver? J : aime assez a voyager, et j'ai souvent voyage en ete. mais 214 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) pas en hiver. — Le general est souvent rnalade, vous savez qu 7 il a lt% goutte. Pourquoi ne voyage-t-il pas ? II dit que le printemps est trop humide, Pete trop chaud, et Phiver trop froid. Et que dit-il de Pau- tomne ? II dit qu'alors il est trop occupe pour voyager. Are you loved? I am loved. — By whom are you loved? I am loved by my uncle. — By whom am I loved ? Thou art loved by thy parents. — By whom are we loved ? You are loved by your friends. — By whom are those boys loved ? They are loved by their neigh- bors. — By whom is this man conducted ? He is conducted by me. — Where do you conduct him to? I conduct him home. — By whom are we blamed ? We are blamed by our enemies. — Why are we blamed by them ? Because they do not love us. — Are you punished by your master? I am not punished by him, because I am good and studious. — Are we heard? We are. — By whom are we heard? We are heard by our neighbors. — Is thy master heard by his pupils ? He is heard by them. — Which children are praised ? Those that are good. — Which are punished ? Those that are idle and naughty. — Are we praised or blamed ? We are neither praised nor blamed. Is our friend loved by his masters ? He is loved and praised by them, because he is studious and good; but his brother is despised by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is he sometimes punished? He is (il Vest) every morning and every evening. — Are you some- times punished? I am (je ne le suis) never* I am loved and rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children never punished? They are (Us ne le sont) never, because they are studious and good; but those are so (le sont) very often, because they are idle and naughty. — Who is praised and rewarded? Skilful children are praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed, despised, and punished. — Who is loved, and who is hated ? He who is studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is hated. — Must one be (faut-il etre) good in order to be loved ? One must be so, [ilfaut Vetre.) — What must one do (que faut-il fair e) in order to be loved? One must be good and assiduous. — What must one do in order to be rewarded? One must be (ilfaut etre) skilful, and study much. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. To drive, to ride in a carriage. To ride (on horseback). To go on foot, to walk. Do you like to ride on horseback ? I like to drive. To live, lived, living. I live, thou livest, he .ives. Aller en voiture, . Aller a cheval, Ct aketh eaux- ' ) take th C iliar) Aller a pied, ) illar y ilre ' Aimez-vous a. monter a cheval ? J'aime a aller en voiture. Vivre,* 4, ve'cu, vivant. Je vis, tu vis, il vit. FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 215 Is it good living in Paris ? Is the living good in Paris ? It is good living there. The living is good there. Dear. Is the living dear in London ? Is it dear living in London? The living is dear there. Thunder. The thunder roars. This storm. This fog, mist. Is it windy ? Does the wind blow ? It is windy. The wind blows. It is not windy. It is very windy. Does it thunder ? Is it foggy ? It is stormy. It is not stormy. Does the sun shine ? It thunders very much. As soon as, as soon as I, as they. As soon as I have eaten, I drink. As soon as I have taken off my shoes I take off my stockings. What do you do in the evening ? Do I sleep ? Thou sleepest. Who sleeps ? Does the child sleep ? He still sleeps. Without money. Without speaking. Without saying anything, ;a word.) At last. To arrive. Arrived. Has he arrived at last ? He has not arrived yet. Is he coming at last ? To be sure, he is. And then. As soon as he has supped, he reads, S t Fait-il bon vivre a Paris ? > t II y fait bon vivre. | Cher. > t Fait-il cher vivre a Londres? t II y fait cher vivre. Le tonnerre. Le tonnerre gronde. Cet orage. Ce brouillard. t Fait-il du vent ? t II fait du vent. t II ne fait pas de vent. t II fait beaucoup de vent. t Fait-il du tonnerre ? t Fait-il du brouillard ? t II fait de l'orage. t II ne fait pas d'orage. t Fait-il du soleil ? t II fait beaucoup de tonnerre. Aussitot que, aussitot que moi, qu'eux. Aussitot. que j'ai mange, je bois. Aussitot que j'ai ote mes souliers, j'ote mes bas. Que faites-vous le soir ? Est-ce que je dors ? Tu dors. Qui dort? L'enfant dort-il ? II dort encore. Sans argent, t Sans parler. (Dir. 1.) t Sans rien dire, t Sans dire un mot. En fiji . Arriver, 1. Arrive e . (e^repour auxil.) Est-il enfin arrive' ? II n'est pas encore arrive. Vient-il enfin ? Sans doute, il vient. Puis, et puis. Aussitot qu'il a soupe, il lit, puis il dort. and then he sleeps. Quaeaxte-deuxieme Th£me. 2de Sec. Aimez-vous a monter a cheval le matin'? Non ; mais j*aime a monter a cheval le soir. Pourquoi? Parce que le soir. il fait plus frais. et vous dormez mieux apres votre retour. Je crois que vous iivez raison. et cependant on monte plus a cheval le matin que le soir. Votre frere a-t-il jamais monte a cheval? II ivy a jamais monte. Votre oncle monte-t-il a cheval aussi souvent que votre pere? lis vont souvent a cheval Pun avec Pautre. — Avez-vous ete en voiture au pont de fil de fer ? Oui, nous y avons ete plusieurs fois. Y avez-vous deja ete a cheval ? Non ; je my ai jamais ete a cheval. 216 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) Allons-y cet apres-midi. A cheval ou en voiture ? A cheval. Non, mais a pied, si vous voulez. — Aimez-vous a aller a pied ? Oui, j'aime beaucoup a aller a pied, il fait trop de poussiere pour y aller a cheval. Have you been in London? I have been there. — Is the living good there ? The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living in Paris ? It is good living there, and not dear. — Do you like travel- ling in France % I like travelling there, because one finds good peo- ple (de bonnes gens) there. — Does your friend like travelling in Hol- land ? He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. — Do you like travelling in Italy ? I do like travelling there, because the living is good there, and one (et qu'on y) finds good people there ; but the roads are not very good there. — Do the English like to travel in Spain ? They do like to travel there • but they find the roads there too bad. — How is the weather % The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday ? It was very stormy, (un grand orage.) Do you go to the market this morning? I do go thither, if it is not stormy. — Do you intend going to France this year? (cette annee?) I intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. — Do you like to go on foot ? I do not like to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (quand) I am travelling. — Will you go on foot ? I cannot go on foot, because I am tired. What sort of weather is it? It thunders. — Does the sun shine? The sun does not shine* it is foggy. — Do you hear the thunder? it roars. Yes, I hear it: it roars much.-^Is it fine weather? Th.t* wind blows hard, and the thunder roars much. — What do you do in the evening ? I work as soon as I have supped. — And what do you do afterwards? Afterwards I sleep. — When do you drink? I drink as soon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep ? I sleep as soon as I have supped. — Have you spoken to the merchant ? I have spoken to him. — What has he said? He has left (parti e ) without saying anything. — Can you work without speaking? I can work, but not (non pas) study French without speaking. — Wilt thou go for some wine ? I cannot (point) go for wine without money. — Have you bought any horses ? I do not buy without money. — Has your father arrived at last ? He has arrived. — When did he arrive ? This morn- ing at four o'clock. — Has your cousin set out at last ? He has not set out yet. — Have you at last found a good master ? I have at last found one. — Are you at last learning German ? I am at last learning it. — Why have you not already learned it ? Because I have not been able to find a sood master. FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 217 To cut yourself. To cut myself. To cut ourselves. Vous couper. 31 e couper. Nous couper. * se couper. FORTY-THIRD LESSON, 43d.— Quarante-troisieme Legon, 43m*. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. OF REFLECTIVE VERES.— Des Verbes Rejlechis ou Pronominaux. See ($ 180), and study it carefully. To cut himself. ^ To cut herself. To cut itself. To cut one's self. ./ Vous brulez-vous ? Je ne me brule point. Vous ne vous brulez pas. Je me vois. Je ne me vois point. Est-ce que je me vois ? II se voit. II ne se voit point. Nous nous voyons. lis se voient. lis ne se voient point. Voulez-vous vous chauffer ? Je veux me chauffer. Veut-il se chauffer ? II veut se chauffer. Us veulent se chauffer. Do you burn yourself? I do not burn myself. You do not burn yourself. I see myself. I do not. Do I see myself? He sees himself. He does not. We see ourselves. They see themselves. They do not. Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm myself. Does he wish to warm himself? He does wish to warm himself. They wish to warm themselves. To enjoy, to divert, to amuse myself.' ) M , amuser; j (i avant Vm fmiiii.) lo pass or spend my time. ) ■ spend my 1 Let me amuse myself. Amuse your- self. Enjoy yourself, but do not neglect your duty. How do you spend or pass your time ?i I pass it in reading. He passes his time in playing. Each. Each one. Each man. Each of those men. Each man amuses himself as he likes. Laissez-moi m' am user. Amusez- vous. Amusez-vous, mais ne negligez point votre devoir, t A quoi vous amusez-vous? t Je m' amuse a lire, t II s' amuse a jouer. Chaque (avec le nom.) Chacun (sans nom.) Chaque homme. Chacun de cea hommes. Chaque homme s' amuse comme il veut. Chacun s' amuse de son mieux. Le gout. Le bon gout. Chaque homme a son gout. Le mien est d'etudier. Each one amuses himself in the best way he can. The taste. The good taste. Each man has his taste. Mine is to study. Obs. 98. Translate is to, meaning, consists in, by est de $ ipii?id the prepos.) 1 Vous amusez-vous ? which is much used by the French, is rendered in English, not by : do you amuse yourself? but by, pass or spend your time, as above. 19 218 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) Quarante-troisieme Th&me. Ire Sec. Ah ! vous voila, enfin ! Je vous ai attendu long-temps. Je sura fach.e de vous avoir fait attendre; mais je n'ai pas pu (§ 148) venir plutot. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, mais .... N'im- porte. Paiions de votre nouveau cheval. Vous plait-il? (are you pleased ?) II ne me plait pas beaucoup. Pourquoi done ? II est bon, il va bien 5 mais il est si grand ; si grand que j'ai Pair d ; un enfant quand je suis dessus. L'avez-vous essaye deja? Oui, deux fois. — Est-il difficile a monter? Non, pas du tout. — Joseph. Joseph! On m'appelle. Je crois que e'est mon oncle qui a besoin de moi Allez, alors. Adieu. Attendez. Je veux vous demanaer quelque chose. Quoi? Voulez-vous revenir ce soul: Ce soir? Je crois que non. Je suis tres-occupe. Mais vous-meme, venez me voir. Et pourquoi? Si vous etes si occupe, nous ne pouvons ni parler ni nous amuser ensemble. Vous avez raison; mais, il me faut partir. Adieu, au plaisir. Au plaisir. Who kindles your fire ? Our servant does. — Does he kindle it well? He burns himself sometimes. — Does he make your coffee? Yes, and he does it first-rate, (excellent.) Yon have been in Eng- land, have you not? Yes, I have. And in Ireland too? No, I would not (did not wish to) go there. — Were you afraid to go ? Yes, a little. — How is the living there? (y vit-on?) So, so; not so well as in England and France. — Where is the living dearer, in Paris or in London ? It is dearer in Paris, no, I mean in London. — Do peo- ple despise the lazy and the wicked ? Yes, people despise them. — What is esteemed? Merit is. — Do scholars love or hate their teachers? Some love and esteem them; others hate them. The studious is generally esteemed, is he not ? Yes, he is. by every- body. — Do parents punish their bad children ? Yes, they do, when these do something wrong, (mal.) Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass ? I see myself in it. — Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass ? They can see themselves therein. Why does your brother not light the fire ? He does not light it, because he is afraid of burning him- self. — Why do you not cut your bread ? I do not cut it, because I fear to cut my finger. — Have you a sore finger? I have a sore finger and a sore foot. — Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm myself, because I am very (grand) cold. — Why does that man not warm himself? Because he is not cold. — Do your neighbors warm themselves ? They warm themselves, because they are cold. — How do you pass your time ? I pass it in the best way I can. — How do your children pass their time ? They pass it in studying, writing, and playing. — How does your cousin spend his? He amuses him- FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 219 self in reading good books and in writing to his friends. — What do you do when you have nothing to do at home ? I go to the play, and to the concert. — I often say, " Every one amuses himself as he likes."' — Every man has his taste • what is yours? Mine is to study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, and the ball, and to ride. His, is to do nothing. Theirs, is to have fine dogs. Vocabxjlaire. 2de Section. Each of you, us, them. The world, (the people.) Genteel people. Every one, everybody, says and be- lieves so. Everybody speaks of it, them, you, &c. Every one (any one) is liable to make a mistake. To be subject to (plagued with) the toothache. We are all liable to make mistakes. To mistake, to be mistaken. Do not make a mistake (impera.) Are you mistaken ? I am. Is he mistaken ? He is not. To deceive, to cheat. He has cheated me. He has cheated me francs. You cut your finger. of a hundred Chacun de vous, de nous, d'eux. Le monde. Le beau monde. Tout le monde le dit et le croit. Tout le monde (chacun) en parle. Tout homme (chaque homme) est sujet a se tromper. Etre sujet au mal de dents. Nous sommes tous sujets a nous tromper. t Me, te, se, nous, vous tromper, 1. t Ne vous trompez pas. (§ 55.) t Vous trompez-vous ? Je me trompe. t Se trompe-t-il ? II ne se trompe point. Tromper, 1. II m'a trompe. II m'a trompe de cent francs. Vous vous coupez le doigt. Obs. 99. When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself, the verb is made reflective. I cut my nails. A hair. To pull out, pluck out, extract, snatch. He pulls out his hair. He cuts his hair. The dentist extracts one of his teeth. To go away, (tear or take one's self away from a place.) Obs. 100. Je rrien vais, is equivalent to : I take myself from here. Je me coupe les ongles. Un cheveu, (plur. x.) Arracher, 1. II s'arrache les cheveux. II se coupe les cheveux. Le dentiste arrache une de ses dents. t M', t', s', nous, vous en oiler * 1. Are you going away ? I am. I am not. Is he going away ? He is not. Is he not going away ? He is. Am I going '( You are. t Vous en allez-vous ? Je m'en vais. t Je ne m'en vais pas. t S'en va-t-il ? II ne s'en va point, t Ne s'en va-t-il point ? II s'en va. t M'en vais-je ? Vous vous en allez. 220 FORTY-THIRB LESSON. (2.) Are we not going away ? Yes, we are. Are these pupils going away ? They are not. To feel sleepy. Do you feel sleepy ? I do feel sleepy. To soil. Do not soiL To fear, dread, feared, fear nothing. Not to fear. (§ 171—7.) I dread. He fears he has nothing. He fears to soil his fingers. Do you dread to go out I I do dread to go out. He is afraid not to go there. Do you fear that man ? I do not fear him. What do you fear ? Nothing. Whom do you fear ? Nobody. I fear nobody. t Ne nous en allons-nous pas I t Si fait, nous nous en allons. t Ses eleves s'en vont-ils ? t lis ne s'en vont pas. t Avoir envie de dormir. t Avez-vous envie de dormir ? t J'ai envie de dormir. Salir, 2. Ne salissez pas. Craindre* 4, craint. Ne craignea rien. Ne pas craindre (de av. l'infin.) Je crains. II craint de ne rien avoir. II craint de se salir les doigts. Craignez-vous de sortir ? Je crains de sortir. II craint de ne pas y aller. Craignez-vous cet homme ? Je ne le crains pas. Que craignez-vous ? Rien. Qui craignez-vous ? Personne. Je ne crains personne. Quarante-troisieme ThSme. 2de Sec. Vous avez Pair d'avoir chaud, prenez un verre de sirop. Avez- vous de l'eau minerale ici ? Non, nous n'en avons point ; mais nous pouvons en envoyer chercher, ou plutot, allons-en boire, chacun un verre, chez l'apothicaire du coin. Volontiers. Allons-y. Venez aussi, Frederic, ne voulez-vous pas? Non, je n'aipas soif ; mais j'ai faim. Ainsi, a votre retour, apportez-moi un ou deux gateaux. Ou pouvons-nous en acheter? Vous pouvez en trouver chez le mar- chand de gateaux. Demeure-t-il au coin? Non ; il demeure au milieu de la rue. De quel cote ? De ce cote-ci. N 7 avez-vous jamais rien achete chez lui ? Non, je n'achete jamais de gateaux. Pour- quoi done ? Ne les aimez-vous pas? Si fait ; je les aime beaucoup 7 au contraire, mais je n'ai pas souvent faim avant diner. Avant de vous en aller, pretez-moi votre canif. Pour faire quoi? (ou mieux: pourquoi faire ?) Pour me couper les ongles. Ne vous coupez- vous pas les ongles avec des ciseaux? Non ? je ne peux pas me couper les ongles avec des ciseaux. N'avez-vous pas de canif? Si fait, j'en ai un; le voici* mais il ne coupe pasassez, pour me couper les ongles. Do you cut your hair ? (les cheveux.) I do cut my hair. — Does your friend cut his hair ? He cuts his nails, but not his hair. — Why does that man pull out his hair? Is he crazy? Yes, he is. — Why does not your cousin brush his coat ? He does not brush it ; becausa FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 221 he is afraid of soiling his fingers. — What does my neighbor tell you? He tells me that [que) you wish to buy his horse; but I know that (que) he is mistaken, because you have no money to buy it. — What do they (on) say at the market? They say that (que) the enemy is beaten. — Do you believe that? I believe it, because every one says so. — Why have you bought that book? I have bought it, because I want it to learn French, and because every one speaks of it. and praises it. — Are your friends going away? They are. — When are they going away? They are going away to-mor- row. — When are you going away? We are going away to-day. — Am I going away ? You are going away, if you like, (si vous vou- lez.) — What do our neighbors say ? They are going away without saying anything. — How do you like this wine ? I do not like it. What is the matter with you? I feel sleepy. — Does your frie jd feel sleepy? He does not feel sleepy, but he is cold. — Why does he not warm himself? He has no wood to make a fire. — W T hy does he not buy some wood ? He has no money to buy any. — Will you lend him some? If he has none I will lend him some. — Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty, but very hungry, (grand 1 f aim.) — Is your servant sleepy ? He is sleepy. — Is he hungry ? He is hungry. — Why does he not eat? Because he has nothing to eat. — Are your children hungry? They are hungry, but they have nothing to eat. — Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink. — Why do you not eat ? I do not eat when (quand) I am not hungry. — Why does the Russian not drink? He does not drink when he is not thirsty. — Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening? He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread. — Did he not drink ? He also drank. — What did he drink ? He drank a glass of wine and water, and some syrup and water. FORTY-FOURTH LESSON, 44th.-— Quarante-quatrieme Legon, Ume. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. PERFECT OF REFLECTIVE VERBS.— Parfait des Verbes Beflechis, Vous etes-vous coupe ? ($ 180 — 2.) Have you cut yourself? I have cut myself. Have i eut myself? You have cut yourself. You have not cut yourself. Hasi thou cut thyself? I have not cut myself. Has your brother cut himself? 19* Je me suis coupe. Me suis-je coupe ? Vous vous etes coupe. Vous ne vous etes pas coupe. T'es-tu coupe? Je ne me suis pas coupe. Votre frere s'est-il coupe ? 222 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) He has cut himself. Have we cut ourselves ? (§ 180 — 2.) We have not cut ourselves. Have these men cut themselves? They have not cut themselves. To walk, take a walk, a stroll. To go a walking, to stroll. To take an airing in a carriage. The coach. A new coach. To take a ride. Do you take a walk ? I do take a walk. Does he take a walk ? He does. We take a walk. Thou wish est to take an airing. They wish to take a ride. To walk a child. Do you take your children a walk- ing ? I take them a walking every morn- ing. To go to bed, lie down. Go to bed. To go to bed, to get in bed. Go to bed. Get in bed, (impera.) To get up, to rise. Get up, rise. Do you rise early ? I rise at sunrise. I go to bed at sunset. The (or at) sunrise. The (or at) sunset. Gentlemen, at what time did you go to bed ? At three o'clock in the morning. At what o'clock did he go to bed yesterday ? He went to bed late. II s'est coupe. Nous sommes-nous coupes ? Nous ne nous sommes pas coupes. Ces hommes se sont-ils coupes? II ne se sont pas coupes. t Me, te, se, nous, vous, promener, t Aller me, te, &c, promener. t Se promener en carrosse. Le carrosse. Un carrosse neuf. t Se promener a cheval. Vous promenez-vous ? t Je me promene. (§ 144 — 4.) t Se promene-t-il ? II se promene. Nous nous promenons. Tu veux te promener en carrosse. lis veulent se promener a cheval. Promener un enfant. Promenez-vous vos enfants ? Je les promene tous les matins. t Se coucher, 1. Couchez-vous. t Aller se coucher, se mettre au lit. t Allez-vous coucher. Mettez-vous au lit. t Se lever, 1. Levez-vous. Vous levez-vous de bonne heure ? Je me leve au lever du soleii. Je me couche au coucher du soleii. Le (ou au) lever du soleii. Le (ou au) coucher du soleii. Messieurs, a quelle heure vous etes- vous couches ? ($ 180 — 2.) A trois heures du matin. A quelle heure s'est-il couche hier? II s'est couche tard. Quarante-qitatrieme ThIme. Ire Sec. Je n'ai pas vu George, ce matin, ou est-il? II est alle chez le dentiste. — Pourquoi? A-t-il mal aux dents'? Oui ; il Pa eu toute la nuit, (all night.) Va-t-il se faire arracher une dent? (feminin.) Oui, si le dentiste veut P arracher. — N'arrache-t-il pas toujours les dents quand on le veut ? Non, je vous assure. Pourquoi done ? Parce que quelque fois ce n 7 est pas necessaire. — Avez-vous jamais eu une dent arrachee? Non. jamais encore. Que vous a dit le jardinier? II ma dit qvPon a arrache un de ses petits arbres. En verite ! Qui peut Pavoir arrache? II n'en sait rien. J ; ai oublie de vous rendre FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 225 votre canif, mais le voici, tenez, prenez-le. Merci. C'est moi qui vous reraercie. Qu'avez-vous au doigt? Je me suis coupe. — Avec quoi ? Avec un des couteaux du cuisinier. Qu'avez-vous mis des- sus ? Rien encore. N'allez-vous rien y mettre ? Pardonnez-moi. Un peu d?eau de Cologne et un morceau de linge. Have you cut your hair ? I have not cut it (myself), but I have had it cut, (me les suis fait couper.) — What has this child done? He has cut his foot. — Why did they give him a knife ? They gave him one to {pour) cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his foot. — Do you go to bed early ? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep when I go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock do your children go to bed % They go to bed at sunset. — Do they rise early? They rise at sunrise. — At what o'clock did you rise to-day 1 To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday evening, (hier au soir.) Does your son rise late 1 He rises early, for he never goes to bed late. — What does he do when he gets up ? He studies, and then breakfasts. — Does he not go out before he breakfasts? No, he studies and breakfasts before he goes out. — What does he do after breakfasting ? As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to my house, and we take a ride. — Didst thou rise this morning as early as I ? I rose earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise. — Do you often go a walking ? I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to take a walk ? I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. — Has your brother taken a ride ? He has taken an airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? They go a walking every morning, after breakfast. — Do you take a walk after dinner i After dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk. VOCABULAIRE. To rejoice at something. I rejoice at your happiness. At what does your uncle rejoice ? I have rejoiced. They have rejoiced. You have made a mistake. We have made a mistake. To hurt somebody. The evil, the pain, the harm. Have you hurt that man % I have hurt that man. Why did you hurt that man ? 2de Section. t Se rejouir 2 de quelque chose. Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. De quoi votre oncle se rejouit-ii ? Je me suis rejoui. lis se sont rejouis. t Vous vous etes trompe. t Nous nous sommes trompe's. t Faire du mal a quelqu'un* Le mal. t Avez-vous fait du mal a cet homme ? t J'ai fait du mal a cet homme. t Pourquoi avez-vous fait du mal a cet homme ? 224 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) I have not hurt him. Does that hurt you ? That hurts me. To do good to anybody. Have I ever done you any harm ? No ; on the contrary, you have done me good. I have never done harm to any one. t Je ne lui ai pas fait de mal. t Cela vous fait-il du mal ? t Cela me fait du mal. t Faire du bien a quelqu J un. t Vous ai-je jamais fait du mal ? t Non ; vous m'avez au contraire fait du bien. t Je n'ai jamais fait de mal a per- sonne. t Vous ai-je fait mal ? t Vous ne m'avez pas fait mal. Cela me fait du bien. Faire de. Le domestique que fait-il de son balai ? t II balaie le plancher avec. t Que veut-il faire de ce bois ? II n'en veut rien faire. Have I hurt you ? You have not hurt me. That does me good. To do with, to dispose of. What does the servant do with his broom ? He sweeps the floor with it. What does he wish to make of this wood? He does not wish to make anything of it. Obs. 101. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, &lc, use the verb in the passive voice, and say : 1 was told, instead of, They told me ; He is flattered, instead of, They flatter him ; It was given to me, instead of, They gave it to me. This is always expressed in French by means of the indefinite pronoun on, one. Ex. He is flattered, but he is not beloved, i On le flatte, mais on ne l'aime pas. I am told that he is arrived. | On me dit qu'il est arrive. Quarante-quatrieme Theme. 2de Sec. Qui est cet enfant que vous louez tant ? C 7 est Albert, le plus jeune fils de notre epicier. Ne le connaissez-vous pas? Non, je ne le connais pas. Ne Pavez-vous jamais vu dans le magasin de Pepicier ? C ; est possible. Mais pourquoi Pavez vous tant loue? On Pa loue parce qu ; il a bien etudie. Mais il n 7 a fait que son devoir. Faut-il le louer pour cela ? Sans doute. Je ne croyais pas cela necessaire. Quand on le loue, il etudie mieux. C'est different. Pourquoi cet autre enfant a-t-il ete puni ? Pourquoi punit-on les enfants gene- ralement? Parce qu'ils sont mechants et paresseux. C'est pour cela meme qu'on a puni cet autre. — Et celui-ci, Pa-t-on recom- pense? On Pa recompense parce qu'il a bien travaille. — Que faut-il faire pour ne pas etre meprise ? II faut etre studieux, diligent, et sage. — Ah ! Louis, vous vous etes fait couper les cheveux, vous avez mis un habit neuf, un joli gilet de satin noir, vous avez Pair d ? un autre garcon. Je vous ai a peine connu. Que pensez-vous de mon habi* neuf? Je le trou\e superbe. FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 225 What have you done with your money ? I have bought a book with it. — What has the joiner done with his wood ? He has made a bench of it. — What has the tailor done with the cloth which you gave him ? He has made clothes of it for (pour) your children and mine. — Has that man hurt you? No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — What must one do in order to be loved? One must do good to those that have done us harm. — Have we ever done you harm? No ; you have on the contrary done us good. — Do you do harm to any one? I do no one any harm. — Why have you hurt these children? I have not hurt them. — Have I hurt you? You have not hurt me, but your boys have, (m?en ont fait.) — What have they done to you? They have beaten me. — Is it (est-ce) your brother who has hurt my son? No, Sir, it is not (ce n'est pas) my brother, for he has never hurt any one. Have you drunk that wine ? I have drunk it. — How did you like it? I liked it very well. — Has it done you good? It has done me good. — Have you hurt yourself? I have not hurt myself. — Who has hurt himself? My brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his finger. — Is he still ill. (malade ?) He is better, (mieux.) — I rejoice to hear that he is no longer ill. for I love him. Why does your cousin pull out his hair? Because he cannot pay what he owes. — Did your father rejoice to see you? He did rejoice to see me. — What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friend s.- What was your uncle delighted with, (s'est il rejoui?) He was delighted with the horse which you have sent him. — What were your children delighted with ? They were delighted with the fine clothes which I have had made for them, (que je leur ai fait f aire.) Vocabulaire. 3me Section. On lui a donne un couteau pour cou- per son pain, et il s'est coupe le doigt. Flatter 1 quelqu'un. Se flatter, (takes de before the infini- tive.' t II se flatte de savoir le Fran$ais. Ne . . . que. II n'a que des ennemis. Devenir,* 2, p. passe devenu e , (con jugue com me Venir. (25 1 , 34 1 .) t II s'est fait soldat. t Vous etes-vous fait marchand ? A knife was given him to cut his bread, and he cut his finger. To flatter some one. To flatter one's self. He flatters himself that he knows French. Nothing but. He has nothing but enemies. To become. {Devenir does not take de after it.) He has turned a soldier. Have you turned a merchant ? I have turned become) a lawyer. t Je me suis fait avocat. \T7u . l u j- u *u » S t Votre frere qu'est-t'Z devenu ? What has become of your brother? < . _ , , H 4 r, ; ( t Qu est devenu voire frere? 226 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) What has become of him ? I do not know what has become of him. To enlist, to enroll. He has enlisted. t Qu'est-t7 devenu ? t Je ne sais pas ce qu'iZ est devenu, S'enroler, 1, se faire soldat. '[ t II s'est enrole. ( t II s' I cannot pay you, for I have no money. He cannot give you any bread, for he has none. To believe some one. Do you believe that man ? I do not believe him. Obs. 102. The verb croire governs the accusative ; we say, however To believe in God. I Croire en Dieu. I believe in God. I Je crois en Dieu. est fait soldat. Je ne puis vous payer, car je n'ai pas d' argent. II ne peut pas vous donner de pain, car il n'en a pas. Croire* 4 quelqu'un. Croyez-vous cet homme ? Je ne le crois pas. Mentir* 2; past part, menti, pres. part, mentant. Ne mentez pas. Je mens, tu mens, ii ment. Le menteur. To utter a falsehood, to lie. Do not lie, (impera.) I lie, thou liest, he lies. The story-teller, the liar. Qttarante-quatrieme Theme, 3me Sec. Promenez-vous souvent vos enfants? Je les promene tous les matins et tous les soirs, quand le temps le permet. C 7 est-a-dire, quand il fait beau temps'? Non; mais quand il ne fait pas trop mauvais. — Les menez- vous promener quand le temps estcouvert ou humide? Sans doute. Et quand il pleut? Oui, s'il ne pleut pas beaucoup. Quand le tonnerre gronde? Oui, meme quand le ton- nerre gronde, s'il ne fait pas de pluie. Allez-vous les mener prome- ner ce soir ? Non. il fait trop de pluie et de vent. N ; entendez-vous pas le bruit du vent ? Si fait, je Pentends. Et le bruit de la pluie sur la maison ? Oui, je Pentends aussi. On ne peut pas promener avec plaisir pendant un orage comme celui-la. Vous avez raison, je pense comme vous. — Croyez-vous ce petit garcon avec les che- veux noirs } Oui, c'est un bon petit garcon, mais cet autre-la est un grand menteur. Sait-il quand il ment ? En verite, je crois que non. — Pourquoi n'entrez-vous pas? Avez-vous peur d ; etre mordu par notre petit chien blanc ? Mord-il aussi bien qu'il aboie ? II aboie beaucoup, mais il ne mord pas. What has become of your friend ? He has become a lawyer. — What has become of your cousin? He has enlisted. — Has your neighbor enlisted? He has not enlisted. — What has become of him ? He has turned a merchant. — What has become of his children ? His children have become men. — What has become of your son ? He has become a great man. — Has he become learned ? He has FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 227 become learned. — What has become of my book ? I do not know what has become of it. — Have you torn it ? I have not torn it. — What has become of our friend's son ? I do not know what has become of him. — Is he in England or Italy? I cannot tell you. — I believe his father does not know what has become of him. — Whom did he go travelling with? He went with his cousin. — Do they know what has become of the latter? Oh! yes; he has returned, and he is studying to become a doctor. It is extraordinary. — Why does this man rejoice so much? (tant }) Because he flatters himself he has good friends. — Is he not right in rejoicing ? He is wrong, for he has nothing but enemies. — Is he not loved ? He is flattered, but he is not beloved. — Do you flatter yourself that you know French? I do flatter myself that I know it; for I can speak, read, and write it. — Has the physician done any harm to your child? He has cut his finger, (lui a coupe le doigt,) but he has not done him any harm, so (et) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. — Why do you listen to that man? I listen to him, but I do not believe him • for I know that he is a story-teller. — How do you know that he is a story-teller ? He does not believe in God ; and all those (tous ceux) who do not believe in God are story-tellers. FORTY-FIFTH LESSON, 45th.— Quarante-cinquieme Legon, 45me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.— Verbes Uniper sonnets. We have already seen (41 l , 42 2 ,) some idiomatical expressions with faire, all of which belong to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no deter- minate subject, are conjugated only in the third person, by means of the pronoun il, it. Ex. To rain, it rains. Pleuvoir,* 3. il pleut, past part. plu. To snow, it snows. Neiger, 1. il neige. To hail, it hails. Greler, 1. il grele. The substantives belonging to these three verbs are feminine, as will be seen when we come to treat of feminine nouns. To lighten. Does it lighten ? It does. The lightning. It lightens. It does not lighten. It lightens much. Does it rain ? It rains very hard. Does it snow ? It snows hard. t Faire des eclairs, t Fait-il des eclairs ? II en fait. L' eclair, t II fait des eclairs, t II ne fait pas d'eclairs. (Obs. 27.) t II fait beaucoup d'eclairs. t Pleut-il ? II pleut d verse. t Neige-t-il ? II neige fort, (beau- coup.) 228 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) It hails much. The hail. The snow. The sun does not shine. The sun is in my eyes. To thunder, — it thunders. To shine, to glitter, shining, shined. The shutters. It hails, shut the shutters quick. Is the walking good ? It is good (bad) walking. This country. In that country. He has made many friends in that country. Of which, of whom, whose. I see the man of whom you speak. I have bought the horse of which you spoke to me. I see the man whose brother has killed my dog. I see the man whose dog you have killed. Do you see the child whose father set out yesterday ? I see it. Whom have you seen ? I have seen the merchant whose warehouse you have taken. I have spoken to the man whose warehouse has been burnt. II fait beaucoup de grele. La grele. La neige. (noms feminhm t II ne fait point de soleil. t Le soleil me donne dans la vue. Tonner, 1, — il tonne. Luire,* 4, luisant, lui, (p. passe.) Les volets. II grele, fermez vite les volets, t Fait-il bon marcher ? t II fait bon (mauvais) marcher. Ce pays-ci. Dans ce pays-la. t II s'est fait beaucoup d'amis dans ce pays-la. Dont, spronom relatif. § 86^ Je vois l'homme dont vous parlez. J'ai achete le cheval dont vous m'avez parle. Je vois l'homme dont le frere a tue mon chien. Je vois l'homme dont vous avez tue le chien. Voyez-vous l'enfant dont le pere est parti hier ? Je le vois. Qui avez-vous vu ? J'ai vu le marchand dont vous avez pris le magasin. J'ai parle a l'homme dont le magasin a ete brule. Quarante-cinquieme Theme. Ire Sec. Quel mauvais temps il fait aujourd'hui ! II pleut a verse ; il fait des eclairs, le tonnerre gronde Ne grele-t-il pas aussi ? Je le croyais il y a un moment, (a minute ago.) Ne vaut-il pas mieux faire fermer les volets ? (have .... shut 1) Je crois qu'il vaut mieux les faire fermer. Car s'il grele encore, la grele peut casser nos car- reaux de vitre. (panes of glass.) Dites a Salomon de venir fermer les volets. Ou est Salomon ? Appelez-le, si vous ne pouvez pas le trouver. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce bruit ? N ; est-ce pas la grele qui vient contre les vitres? Salomon, fermez vite ces volets. N ; y a-t-il pas un carreau de casse? (30 1 , Obs. 71.) Non. M., je n'en vois pas de casse. Voici un volet de ferme. Fermez vite Pautre, car je crains pour nos carreaux. Have you seen the gentleman from whom T have received a pre- sent? I have not. — Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoke to you? I have. — Has your uncle seen the books of which you spoke to him ? He has. — Hast thou seen the man whose children FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 229 have been punished ? I have not seen him. — To whom have yon been speaking in the theatre? I have been speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. — Have you seen the little boy whose father has become (s' est fait) a lawyer? I have seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ? I saw the farmer whose horses you bought (§88), and the men whose coach you had a mind to buy. — Whom do you see now ? I see the man whose servant has broken my looking-glass, and my two panes of glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent me English money ? I have not. — Whom have you heard? I have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. Hast thou brushed the coat of which I spoke to thee ? I have not yet brushed it. — Have you received the money which you have been wanting? I have. — Have I the brown paper of which I have need? You have it. — Has your brother the Italian books of which he has need ? He has. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose warehouse we have taken? We have spoken to them. — Have you spoken to the physician whose son has studied German ? I have. — Hast thou seen the poor men whose warehouses have been burnt? I have. — Have you read the books which we have lent you? We have. — What do you say of them? (en?) We say that they are very fine. — Do you give anything to the children who are idle ? We give them nothing. — Did it snow yesterday ? Yes ; it did hail, lighten, and snow last evening and all night. I am very sorry for it. W 7 hy ? Because we are going to have bad walking for a few days. Aie we not? Vocabulaire. 2de Section. That of which. (No antecedent.) Ce do?it, (n'a point d' antecedent.) That of- which > (w i,h antecedents.) ° elui *""• \ (ont des antecedents.) I hose ot which. > Oeux dont. > 1 have that of which I have need. ) J>ai cg dmty ^ begoin I have what I want. S He has what he wants. Have you the book of which you have need ? I have that of which I have need. Has the joiner the nails of which he has need ? He has those of which he has need. Which men do you see ? I see. those of whom you spoke. II a ce dont il a besoin. Avez-vous le livre dont vous avez besoin ? J'ai celui dont j'ai besoin. Le menuisier a-t-il les clous dont il a besoin ? II a ceux dont il a besoin. Quels hommes voyez-vous ? Je vois ceux dont vous avez parle. Obs. 103. The relative, dont, of which, &c, being an indirect, not a direct object, or regime,) has no influence on the past participle. (32 1 , Obs. 75, 76.) 20 230 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) Voyez-vous les Aleves dont je vous ai parle ? Je les vois. A qui, (relatif.) aux quels, (mas. plur.) Je vois les enfants d qui vous avez donne' des gateaux. A quels eleves parlez-vous ? ($ 79.) Je parle a. ceux auxquels (a qui) voua vous etes adresse. A quels chiens donnez-vous a man- ger? A ceux auxquels vous n'avez rien donne. Auxquels, for persons and things. >S" adresser, 1 , a . . Adressez-vous d . . . Adressez-vous au ministre. Je me suis adresse a lui. (§ 64.) Rencontrer, 1, (transitif.) J'ai rencontre les hommes a qui (aux- quels) vous vous etes adresse. De quels hommes parlez-vous ? Je parle de ceux dont les enfants ont ete studieux et obeissants. Obeissant, desobeissant. Complaisant. Desobligeant. De sorte que, (conjunction.) J'ai perdu mon argent, de sorte que je ne puis vous payer. Je suis maiade, de sorte que je ne puis sortir. Quarante-cinquieme Theme. 2de Sec. Vous tenez votre chape au ! Mettez-le, (put it on.) Non, merci. Alors, donnez-le-moi, je vais le mettre sur le porte-chapeau, (hat- stand.) Vous etes bien complaisant. Le voila surun fauteuil. Eh! bien, que pensez-vous du tableau dont nous avons parle hier matin, et que vous avez sans doute vu hier apres-midi? (doubtless?) Je suis fache de vous dire que je ne Pai pas encore vu. Est-il possible % Hier, j'ai ete tres-occupe. de sorte que je n'ai pas pu le voir. Dites que vous n'avez pas voulu le voir. Non, vous vous trompez : vous avez tort de croire cela. Car, je vous assure que j'ai grande envie de le voir, fites-vous encore tres-occupe ? Oui, et tres-presse, (in a great hurry ,) parce que mon batiment va partir (19 2 , N. 1) dans un jour ou deux. Cependant, je veux essayer de voir le tableau dont nous avons parle. Comme vous etes presse, je vais nren aller. Adieu, au plaisir. J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Have you at last learned French ? I was ill, so that I could not Do you see the pupils of whom I have spoken to you ? I do. To whom, (relative), to which. I see the children to whom you have given some cakes. To which pupils do you speak ? I speak to those to whom you have applied. Which dogs do you feed ? Those to which you gave nothing. Obs. 104. A qui, for persons only. To apply to Apply to ... . Apply to the minister. I did, (or, I applied to him.) Tb meet with. I have met with the men to whom you have applied. Of which men do you speak ? I speak of those whose children have been studious and obedient. Obedient, disobedient. Kind, complaisant. Unkind. So that. I have lost my money, so that I can- not pay you. I am ill, so that I cannot go out. FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 231 learn it. — Has your brother learned it ? He has not learned it, be- cause he has not yet been able to find a good master. — Do you go to the ball this evening? I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. — Did you understand that German'? I do not know German, so that I could not understand him. — Have you bought the horse of which you spoke to me ? I have no money, so that I could not buy it. — Have your children what they want? They have what they want. — Of which man do you speak ? I speak of the one whose brother has turned soldier. — Of which children have you spoken ? I have spoken of those whose parents are learned. — Which new book have you read ? I have read that of which I spoke to you yesterday. — Which paper has your cousin? He has that of which he has need. — Which fishes has he eaten? He has eaten those which you do not like. Of which books are you in want? I am in want of those of which you have spoken to me. — Have you need of those which I am reading? I have not. — Do you see the children to whom I have given cakes? I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, but those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given any French money ? I have given some to those who kave been skilful. To which children must one give presents ? One must give some to those who are good and obedient. — To whom do you give to eat and to drink? To those who are hungry and thirsty. — Have the captains at last listened to that man? They have refused (35 1 ) to listen to him ; all those to whom he applied have refused to hear him. — With whom have you met this morning? I have met with the man by whom I am esteemed. — Have you given any cakes to your pupils ? They have not studied well, so that I have given them nothing. You did right. FORTY-SIXTH LESSON, mh.—Quarante-sixieme Legon, 46me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. OF THE FIRST FUTURE.— Du Futur, ou Futur Simple. See (§ 146) and study it carefully. — Among the exceptions (of which we will soon treat) are the auxiliaries, and the following : — To have. I shall or will have. To be. I shall or will be. To go. I shall or will go. To send. I shall or will send. Shall or will he have money ? Avoir,* 3. J'aurai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Etre,* 4. Je serai. Aller,* 1. J'irai. ) The only two . > irre?. verbs of Envoyer, 1. J enverrai. ) thP i stc0 nj. Aura-t-il de l'argent ? 232 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) He will have some. He will not. Shall you soon have done writing ? I shall (soon have done). He will soon have done his task. Shall we have the bird ? No, but they shall have it. II en aura. II n'en aura pas. t Aurez-vous bientot fini d'ecrire ? J'aurai bientot fini. (§ 170.) II aura bientot fini son devoir. Aurons-nous l'oiseau ? Non, mais ils l'auront. Quarante-sixieme Th&me. Ire Sec. Comment formez-vous le futur des verbes en Francais ? Faut-il vous repondre en Francais? Sans doute. Le puis-je ? Essayez. Est-ce que je sais tous les mots necessaires pour cela ? Je crois que oui. Je vais essayer. Attendez. Savez-vous le Fran pais de : final? Je ne suis pas sur du (about the) Francais de: final. Est-ce le meme que 1 ? Anglais? Oui, c 7 est le meme. Vous savez traduire: changing? n 7 est-ce pas? C'est: changeant. — C est cela. Com- mencez. Je vais repeter la question. — Je pense que : repeter est to repeat , n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est cela meme. Comment formez- vous le futur des verbes Francais? En changeant (R. 1), IV final de la Ire et 2de conjugaison, le oir, de la 4me ; non, je me trompe, je veux dire : de la 3me et le re de la 4me, en rai. C'est cela. Pou- vez-vous me dire le futur de : former ? Oui, c ; est : formerai. Quel est celui de : devoir ? C 7 est devoirai. Non, vous vous trompez. Ici, il faut changer oir en rai : alorsc'est: devrai. Tres-bien. Quand vous avez la premiere personne, pouvez-vous former les autres? Oui: car le futur fmit toujours en : rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Shall you have any books ? I shall have some. — Who will give you any? My uncle will give me some. — When will your cousin have money ? He will have some next month. — How much money shall you have ? I shall have thirty-five francs. — Who will have good friends? The English will have some. — Will your father be at home this evening ? He will be at home. — Will you be there ? I shall also be there. — Will your uncle go out to-day? He will go out, if it is fine weather. — Shall you go out ? I shall go out, if it does not rain. — Will you love my son? I shall love him, if he is good. — Will you pay your shoemaker? I shall pay him, if I receive my money. — Will you love my children ? If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them ; but « if they are idle and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. — Am 1 right in speaking thus? You are not wrong. — Is your friend still writing? He is still writing. — Have you not done speaking? I shall soon have done. — Have our friends done reading? They will soon have done. — When will you send me the money which you owe me ? I shall send it to you soon. — Will your brothers send me the books which I have lent them ? They will send them to you. — VVhen will they send them to me ? They will send them to you next month. TORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 233 VOCABULAIRE. To hold, keep. I shall or will hold. To come. I shall or will come. To sit down. I shall or will sit down. To be necessary. It will be necessary. To provide. I shall provide. To be able. I will be able. To foresee. I shall or will fore- see. To know. I shall or will know. To suspend. I shall suspend. To be worth. I will be worth. To see. I shall or will see. To be willing. I shall be willing. To do. I shall or will do. When shall you do your exercises ? I will do them soon, (ere long.) My brother will do his exercises to- morrow. Next Monday. Next Tuesday. Last Wednesday. Last Thursday. Next month. This month. That age, century. When will your son go to the bridge ? He will go next Tuesday. Shall you go anywhere ? We shall go nowhere. Will he send me the book ? He will send it you if he has done with it. Shall you be at home this evening ? 2de Section. Tenir,* 2. Venir,* 2. S'asseoir,* 3. Falloir,* 3. Pourvoir,* 3. Pouvoir,* 3. Pre'voir,* 3. Savoir, 3. Surseoir,* 3. Valoir,* 3. Voir,* 3. Vouloir,* 3. Faire,* 4. Je tiendrai. Je viendrai. Je m'asseierai Je m'assierai. II faudra. Je pourvoirai. Je pourrai. Je prevoirai. Je saurai. Je surseoirai. Je vaudrai. Je verrai. Je voudrai. Je ferai. Quand ferez-vous vos themes ? Je les ferai bientot. Mon frere fera ses themes demain. Lundi prochain. Mardi prochain. Mercredi passe. Jeudi dernier. t Le mois prochain. Ce mois-ci. Ce siecle-ld. Quand votre fils ira-t-il au pont ? II ira mardi prochain. Irez-vous quelque part ? Nous n' irons nulle part. M'enverra-t-il le livre ? t II vous l'enverra s'il l'a fini. Serez-vous chez vous (a la maison) ce soir ? J'y serai. Votre pere sera-t-il chez lui ? II y sera. They Vos cousins y seront-ils? lis y seront. Obs. 105. (Important.) When a verb, in the future tense, is connected with another by the conjunction if, si, 1 the French verb following si must be in the indicative mood, present tense, although, in English, it may be in the future tense, or subjunctive mood. Will John go to the concert? Yes, I Jean ira-t-il au concert? Oui, si if you go, or will go, or should go. | vous y allez. 1 Si. (if, meaning granting, supposing that.) But when si means whether, the following verb must be in the future tense : I do not know whether he will go or not, Je ne sais pas s'il ira ou non. 20* I shall be there. Will your father be at home ? He will be there. Will your cousins be there ? will. 234 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) QUARANTE-SIXIEME ExERCICE. 2de Sec. Allez-vous a Washington aujourd'hui ? Non, je n ; ai pas le temps d'y aller aujourd ; hui. Quand irez-vous? J'irai jeudi ou samedi prochain. Aurez-vous le temps de venir nous voir? Sans doute que je Paurai. (Dir. 6.) Quand viendrez-vous ? J ; irai demain. Non, je me trompe, apres-demain. Vraiment? Om, vraiment. — Enver- rez-vous du tabac en France? Oui, j 7 y en enverrai. Par quel bati- ment l'enverrez-vous ? Je Py enverrai par le meme que M. Lippard. — Y en enverra-t-il ? Oui, il y en enverra. Y en enverra-t-il beau- coup ? II y enverra tout ce qu ? il a. — Qui tiendra le magasin du coin ? Je ne sais pas qui le tiendra. N'est-ce pas le petit marchand qui le tiendra? Lui et ses freres le tiendront. Tiendront-ils des nou- veautes? lis ne tiendront que du drap. Quand Fouvriront-ils ? lis Fouvriront dans quinze jours. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non, je vous assure. — Vos cousins viendront-ils bientot? II ne viendront pas avant quinze jours. Votre oncle viendra-t-il avec eux? II viendra, si le capitaine ne vient pas. Croyez-vous que le capitaine viendra? II viendra s'il n'a pas la goutte. — Quand saurez-vous votre theme? Je le saurai dans un quart d ; heure. Croyez-vous que vous le saurez si-tot? Oui, je le saurai. Frederic saura-t-il le sien ? II le saura. Les nouveaux ecoliers sauront-ils les leurs ? lis les sauront. Nous les saurons tous. Has the tailor made my coat ? He has not made it yet ; but he will soon make it. — When will he make it? When he shall have time. — When will you do your exercises? I shall do them when I shall have time. — When will your brother do his? He will do them next Saturday. — Wilt thou come to me? I shall come. — When wilt thou come ? I shall come next Friday. — When have you seen my uncle ? I saw him last Sunday. — Will your cousins go to the ball, next Tuesday ? They will go. — Will you come to my concert ? I shall come, if I am not ill. — Will you be able to pay me what you owe me ? I shall not be able to pay it you, for I have lost all my money. — Will the American be able to pay for his shoes? He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to pay for them. — Will it be necessary to send for the physician ? No- body is ill, so that it will not be necessary to send for him. — Will it be necessary to go to the market, to-morrow? It will be necessary to go there, for we want some beef, some bread, and some wine. — Shall you see your father, to-day ? I shall see him. — Where will he be ? He will be at his counting-house. — Will you go to the ball to-night? I shall not go, for I am too ill to go to it. — Will your friend go ? He will go if you will. FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 235 Vocabulaire. 3me Section. Obs. 106. (Important.) When a verb in the future tense is connected with another by the word when, quand ; the French verb following quand must be in the future tense, although the present is then used in English. As, Will he go when I go ? (or I do.) He will go when you do. He will write it if you will. He will write it when you do. Will he send some white paper to my counting-house ? He will, if you will have some. He will, when you want some. Shall you be able to pay the shoe- maker if he send his bill ? I will pay him when he sends it. Who will hold my parasol ? Give it to me, Miss, I will (hold it). He will hold it, or they will. Will your cousin's friend come to my concert ? He will. Shall you come ? I will be there. To employ, use. I will employ. To try. I shall or will try. What will you use to do it ? I will use this. Will you try soon ? I will. Will he not try also ? Yes, he will, but they will not. You are mistaken, they will try also. To acquire. I will acquire. To run. I shall or will run. To gather, pick. Will I gather ? To die, dose life.) Who shall not die ? What will you acquire ? I will acquire what I can. Ira-t-il quand firai? II ira quand vous irez. II Vecrira si vous V ecrivez. (Obs. 105.) II l'ecrira quand vous l'ecrirez. Enverra-t-il du papier blanc a mon comptoir ? II y en enverra si vous en voulez. II y en enverra quand vous en vou- drez. Pourrez-vous payer le cordonnier, s'il envoie son memoir e ? Je le paierai quand il l'enverra. Qui veut tenir mon parapluie ? Donnez-le-moi, Mile., je le tiendrai. II le tiendra, ou ils le tiendront. L'ami de votre cousin viendra-t-il a mon concert ? II ira. Y viendrez-vous ? J'y serai. Employer. J'emploierai.) ,&-iaa ,3 \ Essayer. J'essaierai. y Qu'emploierez-vous pour le faire ? J'emploierai ceci. Essaierez-vous bientot ? J'essaierai. N'essaiera-t-il pas aussi ? Si fait, il essaiera, mais ils n'essaie- ront pas. Vous vous trompez, ils essaieront aussi. Acquerir,* 2. J'acquerrai. 1 Courir,* 2. Je courrai. Cueillir,*2. Cueillerai-je ? Mourir,* 2. Qui ne mourra pas ? Qu'acquerrez-vous ? J'acquerrai ce que je pour rax. Obs. 107. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce que ; as soon as, aussitot que, des que ; after, apres que ; as, comme ; where, ou ; connect the English verbs, use the future tense after the 2d verb in French. Will you run as soon as he runs f We will run after he has run, and where he has run. Courrez-vous aussitot qu'iX courra ? Nous courrons apres qu'ilaura couru, et ou il aura couru. 1 These 4 verbs, and the lists given in 1st and 2d sections, amounting (the auxiliaries included) to 21, are the most important exceptions. 236 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) Qttarante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. Si je viens samedi prochain, votre fils viendra-t-il ? II viendra quand vous viendrez. Fera-t-il ce que je feral? II fera ce qu'il pourra. Iront-ils ou vous voudrez ? Non, ils iriront pas ou je vou- drai, mais ou ils voudront. — Quand cueillerez-vous mon bouquet? Je le cueillerai quand et ou vous voudrez. En cueillerez-vous aussi un pour Emma'? Je lui en cueillerai un aussi, des que vous me le direz. — Acquerra-t-il de Phonneur s'il fait son devoir? II en ac- querra des qu'il fera ce qu ; il a a faire. — Courrez-vous si je cours? Oui, ^e courrai quand vous courrez, ou aussitot que vous aurez couri . — Comment est le vieux soldat? II est bien malade. Croit- on qu'il en mourra? Oui ; on croit qu'il en mourra. Et le matelot? II est mieux, on espere qu'il n ; en mourra pas. — Qu'acquerront ces ecoliers? Ils acquerront de Phonneur. — Ce jeune cheval vaudra-t-ii deux cents dollars, quand il aura quatre ans ? Je crois qiril vaudra plus que cela. Vraiment ! Will the farmer gather his corn to-day ? No, he will gather it only to-morrow, or the day after. — Will he be ready then ? He will be ready, we shall be ready, and our friends will also be ready. — Where will our young neighbors go ? They will go nowhere ; they will remain at home, for they will have a great deal to do. — What will they have to do ? They will have to cut their grain and to put it in their granary. You will lose your money, if you do not keep your pocket-book shut up, (ferine.) — Will your cousin keep an apo- thecary store ? He will keep one. — Where will he take a store ? He will take one near the museum. — Will he be able to get one there, (y en trouver un?) He hopes so. — When will he come? He will come when his father gives him (Obs. 106) the two thousand dollars which he has promised him. — Will he give them to him soon ? He will receive them in a few days. — Will he receive any money from you? Yes, I will lend him some. — Will he pay you back ? (repaiera-t-il ?) He will, for he is diligent, assiduous, and he will without doubt do his duty. I hope that you are not mis- taken. FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 47th.— Quarante-septieme Legon, 47me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. To belong. (24 3 , 40 2 , 46 2 .) Do you belong ? I do. Does that horse belong to your bro- ther? It does (belong to him). Appartenir,* 2. (conj. comme tenir.) Appartenez-vous? J'appartiens. Ce cheval appartient-il a votre frere I II lui appartient. J FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 237 To whom do these gloves belong ? They belong to the captains. Do these horses belong to the Ame i ican generals ? They will soon belong to them. (§ 170.) To suit, (24 3 , 25 1 , 252, 462.) suited. ( Used principally in the 3d person.) Did that cloth suit your brother ? It did not. Do these shoes suit your children ? They will suit them. Does it suit you to do that ? It will suit me to do it. Does it suit your cousin to come with us? It will not suit him to go out. To succeed, succeeded. Do you succeed in learning French ? I do (succeed in it). I do succeed in learning it. Do these men succeed in selling their horses ? If they have not yet suc- ceeded, they will succeed in it. To succeed, succeeding, succeeded. Do you succeed in doing that ? I do ; but he does not. Did you succeed ? I did. (§50.) To clean. Immediately, directly. This instant, instantly. I am going to clean it presently. I will do it immediately. I am going to work. A qui appartiennent ces gants ? lis appartiennent aux capitaines. Ces chevaux appartiennent-ils aux generaux Americains ? lis leur appartiendront bientot. Conve?iir,* 2.(comme venir) convenu. (aavantle nom ; de, avantl'infini." Ce drap a-t-il convenu a votre frere ? II ne lui a pas convenu. Ces souliers conviennent-ils a vos enfants ? lis leur conviendront. Vous convient-il de faire cela ? II me conviendra de le faire. Convient-il a votre cousin de venir avec nous ? II ne lui conviendra pas de sortir. Parvenir,* 2, d. (comme venir) par- venu e . t Parvenez-vous a apprendre le Fran- cais ? t J'y parviens. t Je parviens a l'apprendre. t Ces hommes parviennent-ils a ven- dre leurs chevaux ? S'ils n'y sont pas encore parvenus, ils y par- viendront. Reussir, 2, d. reussissant, reussi. Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? J'y reussis ; mais il n'y reussit pas. Y avez-vous reussi? J'y ai reussL Nettoyer, 1. Tout de suite. A l'instant, sur le champ. Je vais le nettoyer tout d Vheure. Je vais le faire tout de suite. Je vais travailler. Quarante-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. J'ai trouve des gants. A qui appartiennent-ils? Sont-ce des gants de chamois'? Oui. Ce sont des gants de chamois. Ils m'appartiennent alors. Donnez-les-moi. Attendez un instant, s'il vous plait. Sont-ilsblancs ? jaunes ; verts ; ou bleus ? Les miens sont plutot bruns que jaunes. Alors les voici. Ils vous appartiennent. Je vous remercie. De rien, (you are welcome.) Avez-vous achete quelque chose? Oui. Qu'est-ce qui (21 1 ) vous a convenu? Ceci m'a convenu, et cela conviendra a mon frere. Cela lui conviendra- t-ill Oui. j'en suis sur. Le cousin de Favocat a-t-il ete au musee avec vos amis ? II ne lui a pas convenu d 7 y aller, de sorte qu'il a 238 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) refuse d ? y aller avec eux. Parvenez-vous a faire votre devoir tous les jours? J'y parviens souveut. — Le menuisier est-il parvenu a raccommoder votre pupitre ? Oui, il y est parvenu tout de suite. Est-il aussi parvenu a raccommoder le secretaire ? Non, il n ; a pas reussi a le faire. A-t-il mieux reussi avec le fauteuil ? Oui, il y a parfaitement reussi. — Qui a nettoye votre gilet de satin? Notre nouveau domestique Pa nettoye. N'a-t-il pas bien reussi ? Vrai- ment, oui. — Vos souliers sont-ils nettoyes? lis le sont. Je me trompe, on les a pris pour les nettoyer. To whom does that horse belong ? It belongs to the English captain, whose son has written a note to you. — Does this money belong to you? It does belong to me. — From whom h^re you received it? I have received it from the men whose children you have seen. — Whose horses are those? They are (ce sont) ours. (§ 39, N. 3.) — Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him here? I have forgotten to tell him so, (le.) — Is it (est-ce) your father or mine who is gone to Berlin ? It is mine. — Have you brought me the book which you promised me ? I have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he promised you? He has forgotten to bring me them. — Have you already writ- ten to your friend ? I have not yet had time to write to him. — Have you forgotten to write to your relation? I have not. — Does this cloth suit you ? It does not suit me ; have you no other ? — I have some other : but it is dearer than this. — Will you show it to me ? I will show it to you. — Do these shoes suit your uncle ? They do not suit him, because they are too dear. — Are these (sont-ce) the shoes of which (dont) you have spoken to us? They are (ce sont) the same, (les memes.) — Whose shoes are these? Thej^ belong to the nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse. Vocabulaike. 2de Section. Is there ? Are there ? There is not. There is nothing- There is. There are. There are not. -nobody. t Y a-t-il ? II y a. Will there be ? There will be — not be. What is there ? — the matter there ? Was there, or has there been ? There was. There has been nothing. Nothing has taken place. Is there wine ? syrup ? There is some. There is nc more. Are there men of merit ? tlln'yapas. II n'y a point. t II n'y a rien — personne. t Y aura-t-il ? II y aura. II n'y aura pas. t Qu'y a-t-il la ? Qu'est-ce qu'il y a la? t Y a-t-il eu ? II y a eu. > til n'y a rien eu. t Y a-t-il du vin ? du sirop ? t II y en a. II n'y en a plus, t Y a-t-il des hommes de merite ? FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 239 Obs. 108. The interrogative : What is ? followed by a preposition, is The relative : What is, by: Ce qu'il t Qu'y a-t-il dans le bariZ ? (1 mute.) t Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans. Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de monde au bal de Mme. Rush ? II doit y en avoir beaucoup. Le credit. A credit. Vendre a credit Argent comptant. En argent comp tant. Acheter comptant. Vendre comptant. Payer comptant. Voulez-vous acheter argent comp tant ? Vous convient-il de me vendre a credit ? t Aller bien. t Cet habit me va-t-il bien? t II vous va bien. t Ce chapeau ne va pas bien a votre frere. t II ne lui va pas bien. t Ces souliers vous vont-ils bien ? t lis me vont bien. t Cela vous va fort bien. Garde r, 1. Garderez-vous le cheval ? Je le garderai. II ne faut pas garder mon argent. Qttarante-septieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Quand vous serez en Europe, irez-vous en Allemagne ? Je crois que j'irai* du moins, j ; ai grande envie d'y voyager. Y voyagerez- vous a pied ? Non ; il ne me convient pas d'y voyager a pied : de sorte que j'irai en voiture. En voiture, ou en diligence? (public coach.) Quelque fois en voiture ; quelque fois en diligence. Croy- ez-vous que vous aimerez a voyager en Allemagne autant qu ; en Italie 1 Je n'en sais rien, en verite, (I do not know anything about it.) — Le marchand que vous connaissez a Amsterdam a-t-il beau- coup de credit ? Oui. c'est un des premiers marchands de la ville. Comment Pappelez-vous? On Pappelle. . . . — Vous avez un habit qui vous va bien; Pavez-vous fait faire ici? Non, je ne Pai pas fait faire ici. Ou done ? Nulle part. Je Pai achete tout fait, (ready made.) Pourquoi ne dites-vous pas: dejdfait? pour, already made 2 translated by : Qu'y a-t-il ? ($ 118.) y a. {% 87—4.) What is in the barrel 1 I do not know what is in. Are there to be many people at the ball of Mrs. Rush ? There are to be a great many. The credit. On credit. To sell on credit. Ready money. In ready money. To buy for cash. To sell for cash. To pay down. Will you buy for cash ? Does it suit you to sell me on credit ? To jit. Does that coat fit me ? It fits you. That hat does not fit your brother. It does not fit him. Do these shoes fit you ? They fit me. That fits you very well. To keep. Will you keep the horse ? I shall keep it. You must not keep my money. 240 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) Parce que les Francais ne Pemploient point. Vraiment, il vous va aussi bieri que possible. — Je vous ai prete mon canif, n'est-ce pas? L 7 avez-vous garde ? Je Pai garde, et je le garderai encore, car j'en aurai besoin tout a Pheure. Does this merchant sell on credit ? He does not sell on credit. — Does it suit you to buy for cash? It does not suit me. — Where did you buy these pretty knives? I bought them at (chez) the mer- chants whose warehouse you saw yesterday. — Has he sold them to you on credit ? He has sold them to me for cash. — Do you often buy for cash ? Not so often as you. — Have you forgotten anything here ? I have forgotten nothing. — Is there any wine in this barrel ? There is some in it. — Is there any vinegar in this glass ? There is none in it. — Is wine or cider in it ? {dedans ? ) There is neither wine nor cider in it. — What is there in it? There is vinegar. Are there any men in your warehouse ? There are some there. — Is there any one in the office? There is no one there. — Were there many people in the theatre ? There were many there. — Will there be many people at your ball ? There will be many there. — Are there many children that will not play ? There are many that will not study, but all will play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — Do you intend buy- ing an umbrella? I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me on credit. — Do you intend to keep mine ? I intend to give it you back, if I buy one. — Have you returned the book to my brother ? I have not yet returned it. Vocabtjlaiee. 3me Section. You had better . . . I had better . . . He had better . . . Instead of keeping your horse, you had better sell it. Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- ter keep it. To please, pleased, please. I please, thou pleasest, he pleases. To please some one, (transitive.) t Vous ferez mieux de . . . t Je ferai mieux de . . . t II fera mieux de . . . t Au lieu de garder votre cheval, vous ferez mieux de le vendre. t Au lieu de vendre son chapeau, il fera mieux de le garder. Plaire,* 4, a ; p. p. plu, imper. plaisez. Je plais, tu plais, il plait. Plaire d quelqu'un, (intransitif.) Obs. 109. Plaire, etant intransitif, ne pent pas etre employe au passif. Ainsi, il nefaut pas traduire : Are you pleased with this book? par, etes- vous plu avec ce livre ? mais par Vunipersonnel. Does this book please you ? Ce livre vous plait-il ? I am very well pleased with it, but he is not much pleased with it. II me plait beaucoup, mais il ne lui plait guere. FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 241 II plait beaucoup a Charles. Qu'est-ce qui (21 1 ) vous plait tant ? Ceci. Charles is delighted with it. What are you so much delighted with ? This. I will do what you please. j t Je ferai ce qu'il vous piaira. You are pleased to say so. You joke. I t Cela vous plait a dire. What is your pleasure ? ) + r\ 1 ** -i * \TTU . A +>> i * ^ Ue V0US Plait-ll? What do you want ? ) What do you say ? To delight in, to be pleased. How are you pleased here ? I am very well pleased here. t Plait-il ? t Se plaire,* 4. (&, avant un infin.) t Comment vous plaieez-vous ici ? t Je m'y plais beaucoup. Obs. 110. The impersonal it is, is rendered by c' est for the singular, and by ce sont, when followed by a 3d pers. plur., and only then. ($ 38, N. 3.) Whose book is this ? It is his. Whose shoes are these ? They are ours. It is they who have seen him. It is your friends who are right. A qui est ce livre ? C'est le sien. A qui sont ces souliers ? Ce so7it les notres. Ce sont eux qui l'ont vu. Ce sont vos amis qui ont raison. Quarante-septieme Theme. 3me Sec. Fait-il du soleil ce matin ? Oui, il en fait. Alois je ferai bien de prendre mon parasol, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, vous ferez bien de le pren- dre. — Fait-il beaucoup de soleil en Angleterre ? Non, le temps y est presque toujours couvert. Y tonne-t-il souvent? Non, il n'y fait pas beaucoup de tonnerre. Avez-vous peur du tonnerre? Non, mais Le petit chien blanc en a peur. Plait-il ? Ne me comprenez-vous pas? Si fait; mais, je n'ai jamais vu un chien craindre le tonnerre. Celui-la en a peur ; je vous assure. — Vous plaisez-vous ici % Oui, beaucoup, beaucoup, (very much.) Cela vous plait a dire. Non, vraiment. Je m'y plais beaucoup. — Que pensez-vous du dernier o avrage de C. D 1 Je ne l'aime pas du tout. Cela vous plait a dire, car il plait a tout le monde. S ; il plait a tout le monde, je vous assure qu'il ne me plait pas. — Quel parapluie voulez-vous? C'est celui-ci que je veux. Et quels gants vous faut-il ? Ce sont ceux-la qu'il me faut. — Que faut-il a votre cousin 1 II a ce dont il a besoin. Alors, vous pouvez vous en aller. Nous allons nous en aller dans un instant. Adieu, au plaisir. Je m'en vais aussi. Au plaisir, done. What is your pleasure, Sir? I am inquiring after (40 2 ) your father. — Is he at home? No, Sir, he is gone out. — What do you gay*? (Plait-il?) I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you sit down and wait till he comes back ? When do you expect him ? When rfl he come back? I do not know exactly. He may return in a quarter of an hour or less; he may return only for dinner. That is, between (entre) 2 and 3 o'clock, I suppose, (supposer.) Not between 2 and 21 5J42 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 3, as you suppose, but between 1 and 2. — Never mind. I have no time to wait now, so that I had better call again. As you please. — What name shall I tell him? Give him this note; he will find my name in it. I will give it to him. Good morning. — Is it our baker or the doctor's, who has sold you bread on credit ? It is ours. Is that your son? He is not mine; he is my friend's neighbor's son, (le fits du voisin de mon ami. § 140 — 2.) — Where is yours? He has become a traveller , (voyageur ;) he is now in Paris. No, I am mis- taken, in Bordeaux. — Do you intend to sell your coat? I intend keeping it, for I want it. — Instead of keeping it, you had better sell it. — Do you sell your horses ? I do not sell them. — Instead of keep- ing them you had better sell them. — Does our friend keep his para- sol ? He does keep it ; but instead of keeping it he had better sell it, for it is worn out. — Does your son tear his book ? He does tear it ) but he is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he had better read it. FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 48th.— Quarante-huitieme Le$on, 48me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. When will you go away ? (43 2 .) I will go soon. By and by. He will go away soon, (by and by.) We will go to-morrow. They will go to-morrow. Thou wilt go immediately. When, (conjonction adverbiale.) What will become of you if you lose your money ? (44 3 .) I know not what will become of me. What will become of him ? What will become of us ? What will become of them ? I do not know what will become of them. The turn, my turn, in his, in my turn. In my brother's turn. Each in his turn. When it comes to your turn. Our turn will come. To take a turn, (a walk.) He is gone to take a walk, Quand vous en irez-vous ? Je m'en irai bientot. Tout a 1'heure. II s'en ira tout a 1'heure. Nous nous en irons demain. lis s'en iront demain. Tu t'en iras sur le champ. . Lorsque, (never used interrogatively.) t Que deviendrez-vows si vous perdez votre argent? (Obs. 105.) t Je ne sais pas ce que je deviendrai. t Que deviendra-t-?7 ? t Que dexiendtons-nous ? t Que deviendront-i7s ? t Je ne sais pas ce qu'ils deviendront. Le tour, mon tour, a son, d mon tour, Au tour de mon frere. Chacun a son tour, t Quand votre tour viendra. t Nous aurons notre tour. Faire un tour. Faire un tour de promenade. II est alle faire un tour. II est alld faire un tour de prome nade. I FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, (l.) 243 To walk round the garden. To run, to harry. I run, thou runnest, he runs. Do you run ? I do. I do not. Shall I run ? (46 3 .) You shall not. Behind, behind him, them, me. Has that man gone away ? He has gone away. Have your brothers gone away ? They have gone away. They have not gone away. Have they gone away ? They were not willing to go away. t Faire un tour rfejardin. Courir,* 2, p. passe couru. (impera.) courez. Je cours, tu cours, il court. Courez-vous ? Je cours. Je ne cours pas. Courrai-je ? Vous ne courrez point. Derriere, derriere lui, eux, moi. Cet homme s'en est-il alle ? II s'en est alle. Vos freres s'en sont-ils alles ? lis s'en sont alles. lis ne s'en sont pas alles. S'en sont-ils alles? lis n'ont pas voulu s'en aHer. Quarante-hititieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Comptez-vous acheter un cheval ? Je ne peux pas en acheter un, car je n'ai pas encore recu rnon argent. — Me faut-il aller au theatre ? II ne vous faut pas y aller. Ce n ; est pas votre tour d'y aller, et il fait mauvais temps. — Pourquoi n'allez-vous pas chez mon frere ? Ce n'est pas mon tour d'aller chez lui. — Est-ce que c 7 est son tour de venir vous voir? Oui, e'est son tour, et je n'irai chez lui qu'apres qu'il sera venu chez moi. Comme il vous plaira. — Le quel de ces deux eleves commence a parler ? Est-ce le plus grand ou le plus petit ? Le plus age ou le plus jeune ? Ce n ; est pas cela qui fait la difference, (the difference, nom fern.) Quoi done ? Celui qui est studieux apprend et commence a parler. Et que fait celui qui ne Pest pas ? II apprend a lire et a traduire un peu • mais non a parler; et il n'apprendra jamais, s'il ne devient pas (06s. 105) plus studieux. J ; espere qu'il le deviendra. Je Tespere aussi. Are you going away already ? I am not going yet. — When will that man go away? He will go presently. — Will you go away soon ? I shall go away next Thursday. — When will your friends go away ? They will go away next month. — When wilt thou go away ? I will go away instantly. — Why has your father gone away so soon? (si tot ?) He has promised his friend to be at his house at a quarter to nine, so that he went away early in order to keep what he has promised. — When shall we go away ? We shall go away to-mor- row. — Shall we start early? We shall start at five o'clock in the morning. — When will you go away? I shall go away as soon as I have done writing. — When will your children go away ? They will go as soon as they have done their exercises. Will you go when (lorsque) I shall go? I shall go away when you go, (quand vous vous en irez.) — Will our neighbors soon go 244 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) away ? They will go away when they have done speaking. — Wha; will become of your son if he does not study ? If he does not study he will learn nothing. — What will become of you if you lose your money ? I do not know what will become of me. — What will be- come of your friend if he loses his pocket-book? I do not know what will become of him if he loses it. — What has become of your son ? I do not know what has become of him. — Has he enlisted ? He has not enlisted. — What will become of us if our friends go away? I do not know what will become of us if they go away. — What has become of your relations ? They have gone away. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. A blow, a kick, a knock, a stab. A clap, a slap. Have you given that man a blow ? I have given him one. A blow with a stick. A kick, (with the foot.) A blow with the fist. A stab of a knife. A shot, or the report of a gun. The shot of a pistol. A glance of the eye. A clap of thunder. To give a cut with a knife. To give a man a blow with a stick. To give a man a kick, (with the foot.) To give a man a blow with the fist. To pull, to draw. To shoot, to fire. To fire a gun. To fire a pistol. To fire at some one. I have fired at that bird. I have fired twice. I have fired three times. I have fired several times. How many times have you fired ? How many times have you fired at that bird ? I have fired at it several times. > Un coup. Avez-vous donne un coup a cet homme ? Je lui en ai donne un. Un coup de baton. Un coup de pied. Un coup de poing. Un coup de couteau. Un coup de fusil. Un coup de pistolet. Un coup d'ceil. Un coup de tonnerre. Donner un coup de couteau. Donner un coup de baton a un homme. Donner un homme. Donner un homme. coup de pied a un coup de poing a un I Tirer, 1. t Tirer un coup de fusil. t Tirer un coup de pistolet. t Tirer un coup de fusil sur quel- qu'un. f J'ai tire un coup de fusil a cet oiseau. t J'ai tire deux coups de fusil. t J'ai tire trois coups de fusil. t J'ai tire quelque coups de fusil. t Combien de coups de fusil avez- vous tires ? Combien de fois avez-vous tire sur cet oiseau? J'ai tire plusieurs fois sur lui. j FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 245 I have heard a shot. He has heard the report of a pistol. We have heard a clap of thunder. The fist. To cast an eye upon some one or some- thing. Have you cast an eye upon that book? I have cast an eye upon it. t J'ai entendu un coup de fusil, t II a entendu un coup de pistolet. t Nous avons entendu un coup de tonnerre. Le poing. Jeter un coup oV oeil sur quelqu'un OU quelque chose. Avez-vous jete un coup d'ceil sur ce livre ? J'y ai jete un coup d'ceil. Quarante-huitieme Th£me. 2de Sec. Combien de fois les ennemis ont-ils tire sur nous ? lis ont tire plusieurs fois sur nous. Ont-ils tue quelqu'un? lis n'ont tue per- sonne. — Qu'avez-vous fait de mon livre ? Je Pai mis derriere le pupitre, sur votre coffre. — Dois-je vous repondre? Vous me repon- drez a votre tour. — Est-ce le tour de mon frere 1 Quand son tour viendra, je lui demanderai ; car, chacun a son tour. — Avez-vous fait un tourde promenade ce matin? J'ai fait un tour de jardin. — Ou votre oncle est-il alle ? II est alle se promener. — De quel cote est-il alle ? De ce cote-la. — Vous vous trompez, il est alle du cote du pont, n'est-ce pas ? Oui ; ii est alle du cote ou il se promene tou- jours. — Pourquoi ce garcon-la court-il si vite? II a peur de cet etranger. L'etranger veut-il lui faire du mal ? Oui, il veut lui don- ner un coup de pied ou de poing. — Pourquoi done 1 Que lui a fait le garcon ? Le petit mechant (wicked little fellow) lui a tire les che veux. — Qui court derriere nous ? Notre chien court derriere nous. Apercevez-vous Poiseau qui est derriere Parbre? Je Papercois. Does not your boy listen to what you tell him 1 He does not listen to it, if I do not give him a beating, (de coups.) — Why do those children not work ? Their master has given them blows with his fist, so that they will not work. — Why has he given them blows with his fist? Because they have been disobedient. — Have you fired a gun ? I have fired three times. — At what did you fire ? I fired at a bird. — Have you fired a gun at that man ? I have fired a pistol at him. — Why have you fired a pistol at him ? Because he has given me a stab with his knife. — How many times have you fired at that bird ? I have fired at it twice. — Have you killed it ? I have killed it at the second shot, (au deuxieme coup.) Have you killed that bird at the first shot (du premier coup?) I have killed it at the fourth, (du quatrieme.) — Do you fire at the birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which you see in the gardens? I fire neither at those which I see upon the trees, nor at those which I see in the gardens, but at those which I perceive on 21* 246 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) the castle behind the wood. — Have you a wish to fire at that bird? I have a desire to fire at it. — Why do you not fire at those birds ? I cannot, for I have a sore finger. — When did the captain fire ? He fired when his soldiers fired. — How many birds have you shot at ? I have shot at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, because my gun is good for nothing. — Have you cast an eye upon that man 1 I have cast an eye upon him . — Has he seen you ? He has not seen me, for he has sore eyes. — Have you drunk of that wine % I have drunk of it, and it has done me good. — Why have your pupils gone away 1 Why did they run so ? They went away, and they have run so quickly, because they did not wish to be seen by the man whose ( § 88) dog they have killed. FORTY-NINTH LESSON, 49th.— Quarante-muvieme Legon, 49me. Vocabulaire. Ire Section.^ To hear of . . . Heard of . . . Have you heard of your brother ? I have heard of him. Is it long since you breakfasted ? How long is it since you breakfasted ? It is not long since I breakfasted. It is a great while since. It is a short time since. How long is it since you heard of your brother ? It is a year since I heard of him. < It is only a year since. It is more than a year since. Obs. 112. Than, before a cardinal More than nine. More than twenty times. It is hardly six months since. Entendre parler de . . . Entendu par- Ier de . . . t Avez-vous entendu parler de votre frere? t Pen ai entendu parler. t Y a-t-il long-temps que vous avez dejeune ? t Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous avez dejeune ? Obs. 111. The impersonal il y a cannot be rendered into English by there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question : How long is it since ? t II n'y a pas long-temps que j'ai dejeune. t II y a tres-long-temps. t II y a peu de temps. t Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous avez entendu parler de votre frere ? f " t II y a un an que j'ai entendu par- ' ler de lui. i t II y a un an que j'en ai entendu ^. parler. I t II n'y a qu'un an. I t II y a plus d'un an. number, is rendered by de (16 a .) Plus de neuf. Plus de vingt fois. t II y a a peine six mois. FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 247 A few hours ago. These few hours. Half an hour ago. This half hour. Two years ago. These two years. Two hours and a half ago. (19 2 , N. 3.) A fortnight ago. These two weeks. A fortnight. Have you been long in France ? t II y a quelques heures. t II y a une demi-heure. t II y a deux ans. t II y a deux heures et demie. t II y a quinze jours. t Quinze jours. 1 t Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes en France ? Obs. 113. In English the state of existence or of action, when in its duration, is always expressed in the perfect tense, while in French it is expressed by the present tense. For : Have you been long in France ? means that you are still there. Say, then, in French, que vous etes and not que vous avez ete, which would mean that you are no longer at the place. He has been in Paris these three years. I have been living here these two years. II y a trois ans qu'il est a Paris. II y a deux ans que je demeure ici. Quarante-neuvieme ThIsme. Ire Sec. Vous avez-la de jolis livres, combien y a-t-il que vous les avez? II n'ya que trois ou quatre jours. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous avez commence a les lire ? Non, il n ? y a que quelques minutes. Est-ce depuis que votre cousin est parti ? Oui, c'est depuis cela. Combien y a-t-il qu'il est parti ? II n'y a pas long-temps. — Quand avez-vous rencontre mon pere ? Je Pai rencontre il y a quinze jours. Y a-t-il autant que cela ? Je le crois. Ne vous trompez- vous pas % il n ? y a pas si long-temps que ca. Non 7 je ne me trompe pas. II y a juste quinze jours aujourd'hui, que nous nous sommes rencontres au pont de fer. — Y a-t-il long-temps que vous connaissez ce marchand suisse? Quel marchand suisse ? Je n'en connais aucun. II dit qu'il vous connait, lui. II se trompe. — II y a pre? de trois mois que votre fils est en Europe, n'est-ce pas? Trois mois. Laissez-moi voir. Mai, Juin. Non, il n'y a que deux mois. Vous a-t-il ecrit ? Oui, plusieurs fois. D'ou? De Liverpool d'abord: ensuite. de Londres, ou il est a present. Y a-t-il quinze jours qu'il y est? Oui, il y a environ 15 jours. S'y amuse-t-il ? II m'ecrit qu'il s'y plait beaucoup. Que pense-t-il de Liverpool ? II ne m'en a pas dit grand 7 chose; il n 7 y est reste que trois ou quatre jours. Have you heard of any one ? I have not heard of any one, for I have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the man who has killed a soldier? I have not. — Have you heard of my brothers ? I have not. — Of whom has your cousin heard? He has 1 Literally 15 days. In 2 weeks there are 15 days and only 14 nights: hence, fortnight. 248 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) heard of his friend who is gone to America. — Is it long since he heard of him ? It is not long since he heard of him. — How long is it? It is only a month. — Have you been long in Paris? These three years. — Has your brother been long in London ? He has been there these ten years. — How long is it since you dined? It is long since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. — How long is it since you supped ? It is half an hour. — How long have you had these books ? I have had them these three months. — How long is it since your cousin set out? It is more than a year since he set out. What is become of the man who has lent you money ? I do not know what is become of him, for it is a great while since {que je ne) I saw him. — Is it long since you heard (que vous n'avez entendu parler) of the soldier who gave your friend a cut with the knife % It is more than a year since I heard of him. — How long have you been learning French? I have been learning it only these five months. — Do you know already how to speak it? You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of the English noble- men been learning it long ? They have been learning it these three years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — Why do they not know how to speak it ? They do not know how to speak it, because they are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well? They have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. How long have you had that horse ? I have had it these five years. How long ? (since what time ?) How long has he been here ? These three days. This month. It is six months since I spoke to him. Obs. 114. The meaning of, It is 6 months since I spoke to him, is evi- dently : I have not spoken to him these 6 months. When a negative turn may be given to the English sentence, the French use ne, but suppress pas. (That is, they suppress only a part of the negative, instead of suppressing it altogether, as the English do. § 145 — 1.) Combien y a-t-il que vous avez ce cheval ? II y a cinq ans que je Pai. Depuis quand ? Depuis quand est-ii ici % Depuis trois jours. Depuis un mois. II y a six mois que je ne lui ai parle. Since I saw you, it has rained very often. Tt is more than a year since I heard of him. To come from. To have just. I come from your brother's office. I have just seen your brother. Depuis que je ne vous ai vu, il a plu tres-souvent. II y a plus d'un an que je w'en ai entendu parler. Venir,* de. (24 3 .) Je viens du bureau de votre frere. Je viens de voir voire frere. Obs. 115. To express an action very recently past, use the verb venir, mmediately followed by the preposition de, and an infinitive. ($ 145 — 3.) FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 249 He has just done writing. The men havo just arrived. Has that man been waiting long? He has but just come. To have but just. To do one s best. I will do my best, (as well as I can.) He will do his best, (as well as he can.) To spend money. How much have you spent to-day ? He has fifty crowns a month to live upon. Nephew, plur. my nephews. Near by, this way, here. Yonder. That icay, there. Had you ? ^imperfect.) I had. Had you not ? I had not. t II vient d'ecrire. t Les hommes viennent d'arriver. t Y a-t-il long-temps que cet homma attend ? t II ne fait que d'arriver. Nefaire que de, used only negatively, t Faire de son mieux. t Je ferai de mon mieux. t II fera de son mieux. Depenser, 1. Combien avez-vous depense aujour- d'hui ? II a cinquante ecus par mois a de- penser. Neveu, plur. mes neveux. (9 2 .) Par ici. Par la. Aviez-vous ? (imparfait.) J'avais. N'aviez-vous pas ? Je n'avais pas. QUARANTE-NETJVIEME ExERCICE. 2de Sec. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu le jeune homme qui a appris Fallemand chez le maitre avec lequel nous Favons appris? II y a pres d : un an que je ne l"ai vu ($ 145-1.) — Combien y a-t-il que cet enfant a mange ? II a mange il y a quelques minutes. — Com- bien y a-t-il que ces enfants out bu ? Lesquels? Ces petits-la ou les autres? Ces grands-ci. Ceux-la! Oh! ils ont bu il y a un quart d'heure. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non, je ne me trompe pas, je vous assure: car, j'ai vu le jeune valet donner du laitaux uns et de Peau aux autres. — Combien y a-t-il que votre neveu est en Espagne? En Espagne? II n'y est pas. Je le croyais en Espagne . ou est-il done? II est a Baltimore. Depuis quand y est- il? II y est depuis six mois. C'est done votre cousin qui est en Espagne. Oh ! c'est different. II y est, c'est vrai. Combien y a-t-il qu'il y est ? II y a un mois. Y a-t-il vu notre ministre % II Pa vu plus de dix fois. Je me trompe. je veux dire plus de vingt fois; il le voit presque tous les jours. Que venez-vous de me dire? Ils se voient? Oui, sans doute. Je les croyais ennemis. Ils ne le sont plus. J'en suis charme. N'aviez-vous pas mon journal Italien hier apres-midi? Je l'avais alors ; mais je ne l'ai plus. When did you meet the lawyer's nephew 7 I met him just now. — Where have you just met him? I met him close by here, (tout pres cl ici.) — Whom did you see with him ? I saw him alone. — Did he do you any harm? He did me no (33 1 ) harm, for he is a very good lad. iL r an;on.) — Where are my gloves? They (on) have 250 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) thrown them away, for they were worn out, quite. — Who is the man who has just spoken to you ? He is a merchant. — What has the shoemaker just brought? He has brought the shoes which he has made us. — Who are the men that have just arrived ? They are "Russians. — Where did your uncle dine yesterday? He dined at the hotel. — How much did he spend? He spent five francs. — How Eiuch has he a month to live upon ? He has two hundred francs a month to live upon. It is about forty dollars; is it not? Yes, a little less. — Do you throw your hat away ? I do not throw it away, for it fits me very well. — How much have you spent to-day ? I have not spent much ; I have spent only two francs. — Do you spend every day as much as that ? I sometimes spend more than that. — Has that nephew of yours (votre neveu) been waiting long? He has but just come. — What does he wish ? He wishes to speak to you. — Are you willing to do that ? I am willing to do it. — Shall you be able (462) to do it well ? I will do my best. — Will this man be able to do that ? He will be able to do it, for he will do his best. — Have you my yellow copy-book? I had it this morning, but I have it no longer. — I thought you had it yet. — You have made a mistake. (43 2 , 44 2 .) Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. Have the horses been found ? They have been found. The men have been seen. Our children have been praised and rewarded, because they have been good and studious. By whom have they been rewarded ? By whom have we been blamed ? To pass. To go by. Before. Les chevaux ont-ils ete trouves ? lis ont ete trouves. (42 l .) Les hommes ont ete vus. Nos enfants ont ete loues et recom- penses, parce qu'ils ont ete sages et assidus. Par qui ont-ils ete recompenses ? Par qui avons-nous ete blames ? Passer , 1. Devant. Obs. 116. Before is expressed in French by avant when it denotes pri- ority, (l-3 r ,l and by devant, when it signifies in presence of. Ex. To pass before some one. To pass before a place. A place, this place, this fine place. I have passed before the theatre. He passed before J did before the museum. To spend time in something. What do you spend your time in ? I spend my time in studying. What has he spent his time in ? What shall we spend our time in ? To miss, to fail to. Passer devant quelqu'un. Passer devant un endroit. Un endroit, cet endroit, ce bel en- droit. J'ai passe devant le theatre. II a passe avant moi devant le musee. Passer le temps d quelque chose. t A quoi passez-vous le temps ? t Je passe le temps a etudier. t A quoi a-t-il passe le temps? t A quoi passerons-nous le temps ? Manquer, 1, (de av. Pinf.) FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 251 Do not fail to go. Do not fail to do it, (do not neglect it.) Mind ! (you hear ?) The merchant has failed to bring the money. Did he ? You have missed your turn. You have failed to come. Send them to me. Don't you forget it now, (don't you fail,) mind ! To be good for something. Of what use is that ? It is good for nothing. A good-for-nothing fellow. He is a good-for-nothing fellow. Is the gun which you have bought a good one ? No, it is good for nothing. Have you thrown away anything ? He has thrown away what* is good for nothing, (worth nothing.) Ne manquez pas d'y aller. N'y manquez pas. Entendez-vous ? Le marchand a manque d'apporter 1' argent. Y a-t-il manque ? Vous avez manque votre tour. Vous avez manque de venir. Envoyez-les-moi. N'y manquez pas, entendez-vous ? t Etre bon d quelque chose. t A quoi cela est-il bon ? t Cela n'est bon a rien. Tin vaurien. C'est un vaurien. (§39, N. 3.) Le fusil que vous avez achete est-il bon? Non, il ne vaut rien. Avez-vous jete quelque chose ? II a jete' ce qui n'est bon a rien, (ce qui ne vaut rien.) Quarante-netjvieme Th£me. 3me Sec. A-t-on trouve les chales ? On les a trouves. Ou ont-ils ete trou- ves? lis ont ete trouves derriere le sofa, de ce cote-ci du pupitre. — Avez-vous ete vu par quelqu ; un? Je n'ai ete vu par personne. Je croyais que vous aviez ete vu par le nouveau jardinier. Je croyais ne pas avoir ete vu. ($ 171 — 7.) — Attendez-vous quelqu'un? Nous n'attendons que notre cousin, le capitaine. Est-il arrive ? Oui, il vient d'arriver. Combien y a-t-il qu'il est ici ? II ne fait que d'ar- river. Envoyez-moi chercher lorsqu'il viendra> n'y manquez pas; entendez-vous? Ne pouvez-vous pas Pattendre? II sera ici avant une demi-heure. Je ne peux pas, je suis presse dans ce moment. Alors, je vous enverrai chercher. S'il vous plait: n 7 y manquez pas, entendez-vous ? Non, non, soyez tranquille, (depend upon it.) Je n'y manquerai pas. — Le roi (king) a-t-il passe sur le pont de fil de fer? Non, il a passe devant. — Qu ? est-ce que ce vaurien attend? Je ne sais pas ce qu ; il attend. Dites-lui de s'en aller. II s'en va. — Ou est votre neveu ? Tenez ; le voila. Has the king passed here? (par ici?) He has not passed here, (par ici } ) but before the theatre. — Has he not passed before the castle ? He has passed there, but I have not seen him. — How do you spend your time? (A quoi . . . .) 1 spend my time in studying. — What does your brother spend his time in ? He spends his time in reading and playing. — Does this man spend his time in working? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow : he spends his time in drinking and playing. — What do your children spend their time in ? They 252 FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me? — I cannot pay it you. for the merchant has failed to bring me my money. Why have you breakfasted without me ? You failed to come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — Has the merchant brought you the gloves which you bought at his house, (chez lui?) He has failed to bring them to me. — Has he sold them to you on credit ? He has sold them to me, on the contrary, for cash. — Do you know those men ? I do not know them ; but I believe that they are (ce sont) good-for-nothing fellows, for they spend their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my father's, this morning % The tailor did not bring me the coat which he promised me, so that I could not do what I had promised. FIFTIETH LESSON, 50th.— -Cinqucnitieme Legon, 50me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. Far, very far, too far, far enough. I Loin, fort loin, trop loin, assez loin. How far, (meaning what distance ?) | Quelle distance ? Obs. 117. The impersonal il y a cannot be rendered into English by there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question, How far ? Quelle distance ? How far is it from here to Paris ? Is it far from here to Paris ? Is it far ? It is not far. How many miles is it ? A mile. Is it ten miles ? It is more than two hundred miles from New York to Washington. It is nearly a hundred miles from Berlin to Vienna. From Venice, from Havre. I am from Paris. What countryman are you ? Are you from France ? I am. I am not. The Parisian. He is a Parisian, (from Paris.) The king. The philosopher. The preceptor, the tutor. The innkeeper, the landlord. Are you an Englishman ? Whence do you come ? I come from Paris. Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici a Paris 1 Y a-t-il loin d'ici a Paris ? Y a-t-il loin ? II n'y a pas loin. Combien de milles y a-t-il ? Un mille. Y a-t-il dix milles ? II y a plus de deux cents milles de New York a Washington. II y a environ cent milles de Berlin a Vienne. De Venise, du Havre. (§ 9.) Je suis de Paris. t De quel pays etes-vous ? Etes-vous de France ? Pen suis. Je n'en suis pas. Le Parisieii t II est Parisien. Leroi. Le philosophe. Le precepteur. L'auhergiste, l'hote. Etes-vous Anglais ? D'oii venez-vous? Je viens de Paris. FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) 253 To flee, to fly, run away. Run away. Do not fly away. I run away, thou runnest away, he runs away. Why do you fly ? I fly because I am afraid. To assure. I assure you that he is arrived. To hear a sound, a noise. To hear a news. Have you heard nothing new 1 I have heard nothing new. S'enfuir* 2, s'enfuyant, fui. Enfuyez-vous. Ne vous enfuyez pas. Je m'enfuis, tu t'enfuis, il s'enfuit. Pourquoi vous enfuyez-vous ? Je m'enfuis parce que j'ai peur. Assurer, 1. Je vous assure qu'il est arrive*. Entendre un son, un bruit. Apprendre une nouvelle mom fern.) t N'avez-vous rien appris de nou- veau ? t Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. Cinquantieme Theme. Ire Sec. Allez-vous quelque part? Pourquoi me demandez-vous cela? Parce que je vois que vous etes pret a voyager. Vous avez tout ce qu'il faut pour cela. Chapeau, gants, parapluie, manteau. (§140 — 6.) Vous avez raison. Je vais partir pour Providence. Com- bien y a-t-il d'ici a Providence? II y a environ 250 milles. — Y a-t-il plus loin de New York a Washington que de Philadelphie a Provi- dence? II n ? y a pas tout-a-fait si loin. — Qui craignez-vous? Ce mechant homme qui s'enfuit. — Ne craignez-vous pas ce gros chien noir? Je ne le crains pas, il n ; est pas mechant; il n'a jamais mordu personne. N'a-t-il pas mordu Paubergiste? Non, il ne lui a pas fait de mal. — Qu'est-ce qui (§ 116) vous plait tant, mon jeune neveu ? Ce petit chien-la. II est si obeissant qu'il fait tout ce (§91) qu'on veut. — N'aviez-vous pas mon dictionnaire ce matin? Si fait, je Pavais, et je Pai encore. En avez-vous eu besoin? Non, pas jusqu'a present. Si vous en avez besoin, je vous le rendrai. Don- nez-le-moi. Le voici. How far is it from Paris to London ? It is nearly two hundred miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Berlin? It is far. — Is it far from there to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and fifty miles from there to Vienna. — Is it further from Paris to Blois than from Orleans to Paris? It is further from Orleans to Paris than from Paris to Blois. — How far is it from Paris to Berlin? It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. — Do you intend to go to Paris soon ? I intend to go soon. — Why do you wish to go this time ? (cette fois ?) In order to buy good books and good gloves, and to see my good friends. — Is it long since you were there? (n'y, 49 2 , Obs. 114.) It is nearly a year since I was there. — Do you not go to Italy, this year, (cette annee?) I do not go, for it is too far from here to Ttaly. 22 254 FIFTIETH LESSON. (2.) Who are the men that have just arrived? They are philoso- phers.— Of what country are they ? They are from London. — What countryman are you? I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Ita- lian. — Are you from Tours? No, I am a Parisian. — How much money have your children spent to-day ? They have spent but little • they have spent but one crown. — Where did you dine yester- day ? I dined at the innkeeper's. — Did you spend much ? I spent a crown and a half. — Has the king passed here? (parici?) He has not passed here, but before the theatre. — Have you seen him ? I have seen him. — Is it the first time (la premiere fois que) you have seen him ? It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than twenty times. — I thought you had seen him a few times, but I did not think that you had seen him twenty times. — Why does your servant run away? He is afraid of that ox. — Why do you run away? I! I do not run away. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Ar river, 1. To happen. The happiness, fortune. The unhappiness, misfortune. A great misfortune has happened. He has met with a great misfortune. What has happened to you ? Nothing has happened to me. I have met with your brother. The poor man. I have cut his finger. You have broken the man's neck. To pity, pitying, pitied. I pity, thou pitiest, he pities. Pity that host and his nephew. I pity him with all my heart. With all my heart. To complain. Do you complain ? I do not complain. Do you complain of my friend ? I do complain of him. I do not complain of him. To dare, to spoil. Damage nothing. To serve, wait upon, served, serve. Dost thou wait upon, iserve ?) I do wait upon, (I serve.) He waits upon, (he serves.) Do you wait upon ? (do you serve ?) To serve some one, to wait upon some one. Le bonheur. Le malheur. II est arrive un grand malheur. t II lui est arrive un grand. malheur. Que vous est-il arrive ? II ne m'est rien arrive. J'ai rencontre votre frere. Le pauvre homme. t Je lui ai coupe le doigt. t Vous avez casse le cou a I' homme. Plaindre,* 4, plaignant, plaint. Je plains, tu plains, il plaint. Plaignez cet hote et son neveu. Je le plains de tout mon coeur. t De tout mon coeur. t Se plaindre,* 4. Vous plaignez-vous ? t Je ne me plains pas. Vous plaignez-vous de mon ami ? Je m'en plains. Je ne m'en plains pas. Oser, 1. Gdter, 1. Ne gatez rien. Servir,* 2, (25 1 ,) servi, servez. Sers-tu? Je sers. II sert. Servez-vous? Servir quelqu'un. FIFTIETH LESSON. (2.) 255 Has he been in your service ? I A-t-il ete a votre service ? Has he served you ? | Vous a-t-il servi ? C t Combien y a-t-il qu'il vous sert ? How long has he been in your ser- \ + Combien y a . t _ii qu >ii est a votre vlce? ( service? The service. To offer, offered, offer. Do you offer ? I do. I offer nothing. Dost thou offer ? He offers. Le service. Offrir,* 2, offert, offrez. Offrez-vous? J'offre. Jen'offre rien. Offres-tu? Ilofire. Cinquantieme Th^me. 2de Sec. M'ofTrez-vous ce bouquet? Oui, Mlle.^je vous Poffre de tout mon caeur. — Vous plait-il? (47 3 ? Obs. 109.) II me plait beaucoup, et je vous remercie de votre don, (for your present.) De rien. (26 1 .) — En avez-vous offert un a Sophie? Non, je ne lui en ai pas offert. Lui en offrirez-vous un demain? Je n ; y manquerai pas. Ne Poubliez pas, je vous prie. Non, je vous assure que je n ; y manquerai pas. — Avez-vous mon eventail Hollandais? Non, je croyais que vous Paviez vous-meme. Je Pavais, il y a un moment, et je croyais que vous Paviez pris. — Non, je ne Pai pas eu. Ah! je le vois; il est derriere vous. Le voici. Merci. De rien. — Qu : est-il arrive au neveu de M. Lenoir? Oh ! pas grand' chose. II s ; est fait un peu mal au doigt. — Ne vous est-il rien arrive ? A moi? Non, il ne m'est rien arrive. — Qu"est-ce que vous apprenez? J ; ap- prends ceci, et ce n'est pas difficile. Qu ; est-ce que vous avez appris de nouveau ? Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. On parle du cholera, de la Californie : mais ce irest pas nouveau. Of whom has your brother heard ? He has heard of a man to whom a misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not done their exercises? I assure you that ihey have done them, and you are mistaken if you believe that they have not done them. — What have you done with my book? I assure you that I have not seen it. — Has your son had my knives? He assures me that he has not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already? He has not arrived yet. — Will you wait till he returns? I cannot wait, for I have a good deal (beaucoup) to do. — Have you not heard anything new ? I have heard nothing new. — Has the king arrived ? They say that he has arrived. — What has happened to you? A great misfortune has happened to me. — What? (lequel ?) I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a stick. — Then I pity you with all my heart. Why do you pity that man ? I pity him because you have broken his neck. — Why do you complain of my friend? [ complain of him because he has cut my fingej. — Does that man serve you well ? 256 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) He does serve me well, but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take this servant ? I am willing to take him, if he will serve me. — Can I take that servant? You can take him, for he has served me very well. — How long is it since he is out of (Jiors de) your service ? It is but two months since. — Has he served you long? He has served me for {pendant) six years. — Do you offer me anything? I have nothing to (a) offer you. — What does my friend offer you ? He offers me a book. — Have the Parisians offered you anything ? They have offered me wine, bread, and good beef. V03ABULAIRE. 3me Sec. To confide, intrust. Trust me with it. Do you trust me with your money ? I do trust you with it. I have intrusted that man with a secret. The secret. To keep anything secret. I have kept it secret. To take care of something. Do you take care of your clothes ? I do, I put them away. Will you take care of my horse ? I will take care of it. To leave, left. Leave, let me. To squander, to dissipate. He has squandered all his wealth. To hinder prevent, keep from. You hinder me from sleeping. Do not keep me from sleeping. To shop, to purchase. What have you purchased ? I have purchased two handkerchiefs and a bag. Have you purchased anything ? Most lovely, charming. Admirably. That hnt fits you admirably. That coat fits him very well. It is charming. Confier, 1, . . . a . . . Confiez-le-moi. Me confiez-vous votre argent ? Je vous le confie. J'ai confie un secret a cet homme. Le secret. t Garder le secret de quelque chose. t J' en ai garde le secret. Avoir* soin, ) , i , t» i * . } de quelque chose. Prendre* som, ) Avez-vous soin de vos habits ? J'en ai soin, je les serre. Voulez-vous prendre soin de mon cheval ? Je veux en prendre soin. Laisser, 1, laisse. Laissez-moi. Dissiper, 1. II a dissipe tout son bien. Empecher, 1. {de av. l'infini.) t Vous m'empechez de dormir. Ne m'empechez pas de dormir. Faire emplette, (a feminine noun ; takes de before the substantive.) Faire des emplettes. t De quoi avez-vous fait emplette ? t J'ai fait emplette de deux mou- choirs, et d'un sac. Avez-vous fait des emplettes? Charmant, (an adjective, i tres-bien, extremement bien, (adverbs.) A merveille, (an adverb.) Ce chapeau vous va a merveille. Cet habit lui va tres-bien. C'est charmant. FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) 257 Cinquantieme Theme. 3me Sec. Quelqu'un vient de s'en aller, n'est-ce pas? Oui, quelqu'un vient de sortir. Qui vient de s'en aller ? C'est un Anglais qui a dissipe tout son bien (all his fortune, wealth) en France. Est-ce un An- glais? Oui, je vous assure. Je le croyais Allemand ou plutot Hoi- landais. Vous vous etes trompe, car il est de Bristol, en Angleterre. — Pourquoi cet adolescent fuit-il? II s'enfuit parce qu'il craint d'etre puni. Par qui craint-il d'etre puni? II craint de Petre par un de ses parents, parce qu'il n'a pas pu faire son devoir. — A qui confiez-vous votre argent ? Je le confie a la banque, ou je le garde moi-meme. (h 41 J.) — Ne confiez rien a ce garcon-la, car il ne peut pas garder un secret. Je ne lui confierai rien. — Qui a soin de vos oiseaux? J'en ai soin moi-meme. Qui en aura soin lorsque vous serez chez votre oncle? Thomas m'a promis d'en avoir soin. — Laissez mes gants blancs, {leave my white gloves alone.) Vous les salissez, vous les gatez. Tenez ! les voila, (here ! there they are.) Why do you pity our neighbor? I pity him because he has trusted a merchant of (de) Paris with his money, and the man (et que celui-ci) will not return it to him. — Do not trust this man with anything. I do not trust him with anything. — Has he already cheated you? I have never trusted him with anything, so that he has never cheated me; but it is said that he has cheated many people. — Will you trust my father with your money? I will trust him with it. — With what secret has my son intrusted you ? I can- not intrust you with that with which he has intrusted me, for he has desired me (ra'a prie de) to keep it secret. — Whom do you intrust with your secrets ? I intrust nobody with them, so that no- body knows them. — Has your brother been rewarded ? He has, on the contrary, been punished; but I beg you (prier) to keep it secret, for no one knows it. — What has happened to him? I will tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret ? I do promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. — Will you take care of my clothes? I will take care of them. — Are you taking care of the book which I lent you? I am taking care of it; I have put it away in my desk. — Who will take care of my servant? The landlord will take care of him. — Do you throw away your hat ? I do not throw it away, for it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat? He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — Who has spoiled *iy book ? No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to vouch it, (le toucher.) — Did not that little boy with black hair touch 22^ 258 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) it ? No, I prevented him from touching it, (his touching it.) — Pre- vent his touching it : for if he does, he will soil and spoil it. Resume" pour la 50me Lecon. Theme en Fran^ais.. Le chien de Petranger a-t-il mal au dos? Oui, il a mal au dos. Le jeune cheval du boucher a-t-il mal au dos ? Non, mais son vieux mouton a mal au dos. Va-t-il tuer le mouton qui a mal au dos? Non ; il ne va pas tuer celui-la. Lequel va-t-il tuer ? II va tuer celui qui a mal au pied. — Qui a mal au dos ? Je ne sais pas qui a mal au dos. Le joli petit mouton de Mile. Sara est-il dans le jardin ? Non, il est dans son appartement. — Quel appartement allez-vous prendre ? Je vais prendre celui que vous n'avez plus. Aimez-vous cet appartement-la ? Non, mais j ; aime celui-ci. Le trouvez-vous (do you think it) joli ? Oui, assez joli. Ne le trouvez-vous pas trop petit? Non, je le trouve assez grand. Quel jour allez-vous prendre votre appartement? Nous allons le prendre le 10 de ce mois. N ? est-ce pas aujourd'hui le hurt? Si fait, c'est le huit. Alors (then) vous allez prendre votre appartement dans deux jours ? Oui, nous allons le prendre dans deux jours. — Avec qui allez-vous jouer ? Je vais jouer avec le fils du dentiste. Ou allez-vous jouer avec lui? Nous allons jouer dans Fatelier de son pere. Voulez-vous venir jouer avec nous ? Avec plaisir. — Qui est dans cet appartement-la ? Le petit garcon qui a mal au coude et au genou. Avec qui les medecins sont-ils? lis sont avec les enfants qui ont mal aux yeux. — Ne voulez-vous pas venir avec nous voir le pont de fil de fer ? Si fait, avec plaisir, (yes, 1 will.) — Ce bois de lit-la est-il assez grand pour P appartement que vous prenez? Celui que nous prenons n'est pas tres-grand. Pour- quoi vos petits amis vont-ils chez le consul ? lis y vont pour lire les journaux de France. Quels papiers de France recoit-il? II en recoit plusieurs. En recoit-il autant que le President du conseil municipal? (of council.) II en recoit plus que lui. En lit-il plus de dix? II en lit moins de dix. II rPen lit que quatre ou cinq. N'est-ce pas assez? Si fait. Je crois que c ; est trop. Je ne peux pas en lire autant. Combien en lisez-vous ? Je n'ai le temps d'en lire qu'un. — Le boucher vous apporte-t-il ce que vous achetez au marche ? II ne me Papporte pas; mais il m'envoie ce que j'achete. Vous Penvoie-t-il tous les matins? Non, nous n'allons au marche que tous les trois jours, le mercredi et le samedi. — Avez-vous deux grands bois-de-lit ? Non. J ; ai un grand bois-de-lit pour moi et un petit pour mon fils. A qui est ce beau jardin? C ? est celui de . . . A qui sont ces FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 259 beaux chevaux et ce joli carrosse, (carriage.) Je ne sais pas a qui ils sont. — Vous etes grand ; mais je crois que mon cousin est plus grand que vous. Non, il est moins grand que moi. Pai deux pouces de plus que lui. (Obs. 71.) — Les Americains envoient-ils plus de coton en France qu'en Angleterre (England) ? Non, ils en envoient beaucoup plus en Angleterre qu'en France. — Ou les Bos- toniens achetent-ils leur charbon ? Ils Pachetent presque toujours a Philadelphie. Combien le paient-ils a Philadelphie ? lis le paient S4 le tonneau (§7) et ils le vendent $7 ou $8. — Votre oncle lit-il beaucoup? II aime beaucoup a lire les ouvrages Francais, Anglais, et Americains. — Vos cousins lisent-ils les journaux tous les jours ? Ils commencent tous les matins a les lire. — Que lit votre pere ? II ne lit rien a present; il a mal aux yeux. II fait lire notre plus jeune frere pour lui. — Quels ouvrages les Americains lisent-ils? Ils lisent les ouvrages de toutes les autres nations aussi bien que les leurs. Ont-ils, eux-memes., beaucoup d- ouvrages? Ils en font tous les jours quelques-uns. L'ami du fils de son jardinier travaille-t-il autant que le cousin du menuisier ? Non, il ne travaille pas tant que lui. — Est-il plus jeune ? Non 7 au contraire, il est plus age. — Combien a-t-il de plus? {How much older?) II a 2 ans de plus. — II est done paresseux? Oui, un peu. — Vous avez de jolis souliers. qui vous les fait? Notre cordon- nier. — Les fait-il toujours aussi bien? Oui ? si vous les faites faire. — Combien vendez-vous ces gants. Mile.? Nous les vendons demi- dollar. — En avez-vous a un quart de dollar? Oui. nous en avons; mais ce ne sont pas les meilleurs. — Laissez-moi voir les uns et les autres. Void ceux que nous vendons cinquante sous: ils sont superbes, com me vous voyez. Voila ceux de 25 sous. — Ils sont bons; mais ils sont moins bons que les autres. — Votre panier est-il assez grand pour mettre votre marche (marketing) dedans? Je crois que oui. Nous y mettons. du moins beaucoup de choses. — Qu'a votre cheval ? II a mal au dos et a un pied. — Jules n"a-t-il pas mal a Pcei! ? Si fait": il y a mal. FIFTY-FIRST LESSON, 51st.— Cinquante et unieme Legon, 51me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. Will the people come soon ? Soon, very soon, too soon, soon enough. A violin. A piano. Le monde viendra-t-il bientot ? Bientot, trop tot, assez tot. Un violon. Tin piano. To play upon the violin. ) + Jouer du violon . Tc play the violin. S 260 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) Obs. 118. When a musical instrument is spoken of, the verb, jouer, ti play, takes de, but d, when a game is spoken of, As : « To play at cards, at chess. To play the (upon the) piano. What instrument do you play ? To touch. To play the piano. Near me, near them, near the fire. Near the trees, near the hotels. Near going. Near breaking it. Where do you live ? I live near the castle. What are you doing near the fire ? To dance. To fall, fallen, do not fall. Did you fall ? I did not. To drop, (meaning to let fall.) Has he dropped anything ? He has not dropped anything. To retain, to hold, keep back. To approach, to draw near. Draw near the fire, (approach.) Do you approach the fire ? I do approach it. To approach, to have access to one. He is a man difficult of access. I go away (withdraw) from the fire. To withdraw (or go away) from. I go away from it. Why does that man go away from the fire ? He goes away from it because he is not cold. So much, so many. I have written so many notes that I cannot write any more. Do you fear to go out ? I do fear to go out. Cinquante et unieme Th&me. Ire Sec. J'ai entendu tomber quelque chose, avez-vous rien laisse tomber? Non. je crois ne rien avoir laisse tomber. Voyez, eependant. — Ah! voici un de d'argent; est-ce vous qui Pavez laisse tomber'? C'est le de de Louise. Je Pai peut-etre fait tomber. Je croyais Pavoir mis dans son panier. Je Pai tronve pres du pied du fauteuil. Merci. De rien. — Qui va au musee cet apres-midi ? George y va; mais je crains de ne pas pouvoir y aller. Pourquoi done? Mon oncle Jouer aux cartes, jouer aux echecs. t Jouer du piano. t De quel instrument jouez-vous ? Toucher, 1. Toucher le piano. Pres de moi, pres d'eux, pres dufeu. Pres des arbres, pres des hotels. (§ 11.) Pres d' aller. Pres de le casser. Ou demeurez-vous ? Je demeure pres du chateau. Que faites-vous pres du feu ? Danser, 1. Tomber, 1, tombe e . Ne tombez point. Etes-vous tombe ? Je ne suis pas tombe. Laisser tomber. A-t-il laisse tomber quelque chose ? II n'a rien laisse tomber. Retenir* 2, (comme tenir, 24 3 , 25 1 , 34 1 .) S'approcher, 1, (de av. un nom.) Approchez-vous du feu. Vous approchez-vous du feu? Je m'en approche. Approcher quelqu'un. C'est un homme qu'on ne peut ap- procher. Je m'eloigne du feu. S' eloigner, 1, {de av. le nom.) Je m'en eloigne. Pourquoi cet homme s'eloigne-t-il du feu? II s'en eloigne parce qu'il n'a pas froid. Tant. J'ai ecrit tant de billets que je ne puis plus en ecrire. Craignez-vous de sortir ? Je crains de sortir. FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 261 vient de me dire qiril attend 100 sacs de cafe et qu 7 il faut les rece- voir et les faire mettre dans le magasin. N ; importe, si vous n 7 y allez pas cet apres-midi, vous irez une autre fois. Cela est vrai. Jouez-vous du violon et du piano ? Non, je ne joue que du violon. En jouez-vous tous les jours ? Un peu 7 pour ne pas oublier. Do you play the violin ? I do not play the violin, but the piano. — Shall we have a ball to-night ? We shall have one, in the large par- lor. — At what o'clock? At a quarter to eleven. — What o'clock is it now? It is -almost eleven, and the people will soon come. — What instrument will you play ? I shall play the violin. If you play the violin, I shall play upon the piano. — Are there to be (doit-il y avoir, 47 2 ) a great many people at our ball ? There is to be a great many. Will you dance ? I shall dance. — Will your children dance ? They will dance if they please, (si cela leur convient, or si cela leur plait.) — How do you spend your time in this country ? I spend my time in playing on the piano, and in reading.— How does your cousin divert himself? He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. — Does any one dance when you play? A great many people dance when I play. They never fail to do it. (On n'y manque jamais.) — Who ? At first (d'abord) our children, then our cousins, at last our neighbors. — Do you amuse yourselves ? I assure you that we amuse ourselves very much. Whom do you pity ? I pity your friend. — Why do you pity him ? I pity him because he is ill. — Has anybody pitied you ? Nobody has pitied me, because I have not been ill. — Do you offer me any- thing? I offer you a fine gun. — What has my father offered you? He has offered me a fine book. — To whom have you offered your fine horses? I have offered them to the English captain. — Dost thou offer thy pretty little dog to these children? I offer it to them, for I love them with all my heart. — Why have you given that boy a blow with your fist? Because he hindered me from sleeping. — Has any- body hindered you from writing? Nobody has hindered me from writing, bat I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin and nephew. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To recollect, (no prep, in French.) Do you recollect that ? I do recollect it. Does your brother recollect that ? He recollects having seen it. Do you recollect the words ? I do recollect them. Have you recollected the words ? Se rappeler, 1, (33 3 ,) rappelez-vous cela. Vous rappelez-vous cela ? Je me le rappelle. Votre frere se rappelle-t-il cela ? II se rappelle l'avoir vu. Vous rappelez-vous les mots ? Je me les rappelle. Vous etes-vous rappele les mots ? FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) I have recollected them. I have not recollected them. Have you recollected them ? You have recollected them. Has he recollected them ? He has recollected them. We have recollected them. They have recollected them. I recollect (remember) coming. To remember, to recollect, (comme venir,* 24 3 , 25*, &c.) Do you remember that man ? I do remember him. Do you remember seeing him ? I do not. I do remember it. What do you remember ? I remember nothing. I do not remember falling down. To sit down. Sit down, (impera.) Are you sitting down ? I am sitting, thou art sitting down. Is he sitting down ? He is not. I shall or will sit down. He sits near the fire. He is sitting near the fire. To run away, to fly. Did you run away ? I did not run away. Why did that man run away ? He ran away because he was afraid. Who has run away ? He has. They have. / Je me les suis rappeles. Je ne me les suis pas rappeleg. Vous les etes-vous rappeles ? Vous vous les etes rappeles. Se les est-il rappeles ? II se les est rappeles. Nous nous les sommes rappeles. lis se les sont rappeles. Je me rappelle etre venu. Se souvenir,* 2, de. Souvenez-vous de . . . Se ressouvenir* 2, de. j Ressonvenez-vous-en, (de avant V le nom et av. l'auxiliaire.) Vous souvenez-vous de cet homme ? Je m'en souviens. Vous souvenez-vous de 1' avoir vu ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Je m'en souviens. De quoi vous souvenez-vous ? Je ne me souviens de rien. Je ne me souviens pas d'etre tombe. t S'asseoir,* pres. part, s'asseyant ; past part, assis. Asseyez-vous. Vous asseyez-vous ? Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds. S'assied-il ? II ne s'assied point. Je m'assierai, or je m'asseierai. (462 ) > II est assis pres du feu. Se sauver, 1, s'enfuir* 2. (50 1 .) Vous etes-vous sauve ? Je ne me suis pas sanve. Pourquoi cet homme s'est-il sauve ? II s'est sauve parce qu'il a eu peur. Qui s'est enfui ? i 1 Qui s'est sauve ? I II s'est enfui. lis se sont sauves. ClNQUANTE ET UNIEME ThI&ME. 2de See. Vous avez Faird'avoir froid, approchez-vous du feu. Je n'ose pas m'en approcher. Pourquoi n 7 osez-vous pas? Je crains de me Druler. Cela vous plait a dire. (47 3 .) Votre neveu s'eloigne-t-il du feu parce qu'il craint de se bruler? Non, mais parce qu'il n'a plus froid, je pense. Noil, ce n'est pas pour cela. Et pourquoi done? II a laisse tomber un quart de dollar, et il veut le ramasser. Tenez, le voila pres du sofa. Ramassez-le pour lui. De quel cote du sofa? De ce cdte-ci; la ; pres de votre pied. Bon, je le voisa present. Je 1 ai, je vais le lui rendre. Tenez, voici votre quart de dollar. Merci. De rien. Ah ! M. Lucien, vous rappelez-vous le nom du medecin FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 263 du general ? Non, je ne me le rappelle pas. — Qui s'assied sur ce fauteuil ? Parsonne ne s'assied dessus. Alors, je vais m'y asseoir. Comme il vdus plaira ; il est a votre service. — Pourquoi le petit Jules s'eloigne-t-il ? II a honte de ne pas s'etre souvenu de vc-us porter mon billet. Do you remember anything pretty ? I remember nothing at all ; I am too sleepy. — What does your uncle recollect ? He recollects what you have promised him. — What have I promised him ? You have promised him to go to France with him next winter. Have you not ? I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. — Why do you with- draw from the fire ? I have been sitting near the fire this hour and a half, (il y a,) so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not like to sit near the fire ? He likes, on the contrary, much (beaucou'p) to sit near the fire, but only (seulement, 1 adv.) when he is cold. — May one approach your uncle ? One may approach him, for he receives everybody. — Will you sit down ? I will not sit down ; I have to work. — Where does your father sit down ? He sits down near me, in that large red velvet arm-chair, (grand faut de v. n.) — Where shall I sit down ? You may sit near me. Do you sit down near the fire, or on the sofa ? I do not sit down near the fire, for I am afraid of being too warm. — Do you recollect my brother ? I recollect having seen him and spoken to him once. — Do your parents recollect their old friends ? They do recollect them. — Do you recollect these words ? I do not recollect them. — Have you recollected that ? I have recollected it. — Has your uncle recol- lected those words ? He has recollected them. — Have I recollected my exercise ? You have recollected it. — Have you recollected your exercises ? I have recollected them, for I have learned them by heart ; and my brothers have recollected theirs, because they have learned them by heart. — Is it long since you saw your friend from Paris ? I saw him a fortnight ago. (Obs. 1 14.) Vocabtjlaiee. 3me Sec. To like better, to prefer. Aimer mieux, (no prep. § 170 — 2.) Do you like to stay here better than Aimez-vous niieux rester ici que de going out? sortir ? I like staying here better than going J'aime mieux rester ici que de sortir, o ut . (mieux comes directly after the verb. ) He likes to play better than to study. II ahne mieux jouer que cTitudier. Do you like to write better than to Aimez-vous mieux ecrire que de speak ? parler ? I like to speak better than to write. . J'aime mieux parler que d'ecrire. Better than, ! Mieux . . . que de, (avaut un infinitif.) 1 Only, when separated from the verb, is seulement. 264 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) He likes to do both. I like beef better than mutton. Do you like bread better than cheese ? I like neither the one nor the other. I like tea as much as coffee. Just as much, hardly so much. A calf, calves. Some, any veal. Aloud. Low, too low. Does your master speak aloud or low ? He speaks aloud and slowly. In order to learn French, one must speak aloud and quick. Quicker, faster. As fast as you. Not so quick, less quick. He eats quicker than I. Do you learn as fast as I ? I learn faster than you. I do not understand you, because you speak too fast. To sell cheap. To sell dear. Does he sell cheap ? He does not sell dear. He has sold to me very dear. This man sells everything so dear, that one cannot buy anything of him. You speak so fast that I cannot under- stand you. To buy something of some one. I have bought it of him. II aime a faire Tun et 1' autre. J'aime mieux le boeuf que le mouton. Aimez-vous mieux le pain que le fromage ? Je n'aime ni l'un ni 1' autre. J'aime tout autant le the que le cafe Tout autant, a peine tant. Un veau, des veaux. Du veau. Haut, a haute voix. Bas, trop bas Votre maitre parle-t-il haut ou bas \ II parle haut et lentement. Pour apprendre le Fran§ais, il faut parler haut et vite. Plus vite. Aussi vite que vous. Pas si vite, moins vite. II mange plus vite que moi. Apprenez-vous aussi vite que moi ? J'apprends plus vite que vous. Je ne vous comprends pas, parce que vous parlez trop vite. Vendre a bon marche. Vendre cher. Vend-il a bon marche ? II ne vend pas cher. II m'a vendu fort cher. Cet homme vend tout si cher, qu'on ne peut rien acheter chez lui. Vous parlez si vite que je ne puis vous comprendre. Acheter quelque chose a quelqu'un. Je le lui ai achete. 1 Cinquante et UNiEME ThSme. 3me Sec. Ramassez le gant de chamois de Mile. Clara, qui vient de le laisser tomber. (Obs. 115.) Adrien Pa deja ramasse. — Votre neveu vient de finir son devoir, n ? est-ce pas % Non ; il ne Pa pas encore fait. Moi, je croyais qu'tZ Yavait (he had) fait. Vous vous etes trompe. (43 2 .) — Vous sortez? Passez-vous pres du musee? Non, je passe loin de-la. N'importe. — Charles, venez me voir ce soir, (come and see me. § 150 — 12) voulez-vous ? Je suis tres-occupe, cependant j'irai, si je m/en souviens. — Si vous avez tant a faire, vous tomberez 1 Acheter a quelqu'un means to buy of or for some one. Ex. Tai achete ce cheval a votre frire, I have bought that horse of your brother; i.e. Je Vai achete de lui, I have bought it of him. Tai achete un gateau d mon enfant, I have bought a cake for my child: i. e. Je Vai achete pour lui, I have bought it for him. FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 265 malade. Ne le craignez-vous pas? Moi, je ne le crains pas, mais moti pere le craint. Pourquoi vous etes-vous sauve corame cela hier soir? Petais (I was. imperfect) tres-presse. Qu ; aviez-vous a faire? Vousle savez bien. Javais a apprendre mes lecons. Etiez- vous (were you. imperf.) presse lorsque vous etiez chez le marchand de gateaux? Quand etais-je la? N'y etiez-vous pas a onze heures? Je n'y etais pas. II vend trop cher. Ses gateaux sont a peine aussi bons que ceux des autres marchands, et ils sont beaucoup plus petits. Do your scholars like to learn by heart? They do not like to learn by heart* they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. — Do you like cider better than wine ? I like wine better than cider. — Does your brother like to play? He likes to study better than to play. — Do you like veal better than mutton ? I like the latter better than the former for breakfast • but I like the former better than the latter for dinner. — Do you like to irink better than to eat? I like to eat better than to drink; but my uncle likes to drink better than to eat. — Does the Frenchman like fowl better than fish ? He likes fish better than fowl. — Do you like to write better than to speak? I like to do both. — Do you like honey (miel) better than sugar? I like neither. — Does your father like coffee better than tea? He likes neither. Can you understand me ? No, Sir. for you speak too fast. — Will you be kind enough (avoir la bonte de ne pas. § 171 — 7) not to speak so fast? I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. I am ready to listen. — Can you understand what my brother tells you in French? He speaks so fast that I cannot understand him. — Can your pupils understand you? They understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly. — Is it necessary to speak aloud to learn French ? It is necessary to speak aloud. — Does your master speak aloud ? He does speak aloud and slow. — Why do you not buy anything of that merchant ? He sells so dear that I cannot buy anything of him. — Will you take me to another ? I will take you to the son of the one from w T hom you bought last year, (V'annee passee.) — Does he sell as dear as this one? He sells cheaper. — Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish? They do not like to learn either; they only like to learn French. — Do you like mutton ? I like beef better than mutton. — Do your children like cake better than bread? They like both. — Has he read all the books which he bought? He bought so many (tant) that he cannot read them. — Do you wish to write some exercises? \ have written so many that I cannot write any more. — Why does (hat lad run away so fast ? Will any one touch him ? hurt him ? 23 266 FIFTY-SECONE LESSON. (1.) No one will hurt him j but he will be punished by his master for not having (pour ne pas avoir) done his task. (§ 171 — 7.) FIFTY-SECOND LESSON, 52d. —Cinquante-deuxmne Legon, 52m*. Vocabulaiee. Ire Sec. A cote de. Passer a cote de quelqu'un. J'ai passe a cote de vous. Avez-vous passe a cote de mon frere ? By the side of. By. To pass by the side of some one. I have passed by the side of you. Have you passed by the side of my brother ? I have passed by the side of him. i * 'ai passe a cote de lui. Obs. 119. Prepositions formed with a, au, or aux, and a noun, require the preposition de after them ; almost all others require none. To pass by a place. I have passed by the theatre. He has passed by the castle. You have passed before my ware- house. Which way did they pass ? To dare, I dare not go thither. He dares not do it. I did not dare to tell him so. To make use of, to use. Used, use it Do you use my copy-book % I do use it. Does your father use it ? He does use it. Have you used my gun ? I have used it. They have used your books. They have used them. To instruct, instructed, instruct. I instruct, thou instructest, he in- structs. To teach. To teach some one something. He teaches me arithmetic. I teach you French, have taught him French. To teach some one (how) to do some- thing. He teaches me (how) to read. You teach them (how) to write. t Passer aupres aVun endroit. t J'ai passe aupres du theatre, t II a passe aupres du chateau. Vous avez passe devant mon maga- sin. Par ou ont-ils passe ? Oser, 1, (point de preposition.) Je n'ose pas y aller. II n'ose pas le faire. Je n'ai pas ose le lui dire. Se servir,* 2, de, (50 2 ) servi, servez- vous-en. Vous servez-vous de mon cahier ? Je m'en sers. Votre pere s'en sert-il ? II s'en sert. Vous etes-vous servi de mon fusil ? Je m'en suis servi. lis se sont servis de vos livres. lis s'en sont servis. Instruire,* 4, instruit, instruisez. J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit. Enseigner, 1. Apprendre* 4. Enseigner quelque chose d quelqu un, II m'enseigne le calcul. Je vous enseigne le Frangais. Je lui ai enseigne le Francais. Apprendre a quelqu'un a faire quel- que chose, ou Enseigner a . . . . II m'apprend a. lire. Vous leur apprenez a. ecrire. FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 267 Cinquante-detjxi&me Theme. Ire Sec. Par ou avez-vous passe pour venir chez nous? J'ai passe aupres du pont de fer, du quai Buena Vista, et du musee. Vous avez done fait un grand tour, (taken a long walk.) Oui, j'aime a me promener, et j'aime mieux me promener de bonne heure qu'a midi. Vous avez raison; il ne fait pas si chaad alors. C'est pourcela que je le fais. Vous servez-vous de votre parapluie ? Non, je ne m'en sers pas. — Prenez-le. Servez-vous en. Merci. De rien. — Avez-vous rencontre le neveu de Pepicier? Non, mais j'ai passe a cote de celui de Papothicaire. Que vous a-t-il dit? Rien. Je Pai apercu; mais il ne m'a pas apercu, de sorte que nous avons passe a cote Pun de Pautre sans nous parler. — Avez-vous dit a votre cousin ce qu'on a dit de lui? Je n'ai pas ose. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas ose % Je ne sais pas exactement pourquoi je n'ai pas ose; mais je ne le lui ai pas dit. Ne le lui direz-vous pas ? Pourquoi lui dire ? Cela ne lui fera pas plaisir. Have your new books been found ? They have been found. — Where ? Under the bed. — Is my coat on the bed? It is under it. — Are your brother's stockings under the bed ? They are upon it. — Have I been seen by anybody? You have been seen by nobody. — Have you passed by anybody ? I have passed by you, and you did not see me. — Has anybody passed by you? Nobody has passed by me. — Where has your son passed? He has passed by the theatre. Shall you pass by the castle? I shall pass there. — Why have you not cleaned my trunk ? I was afraid to soil my fingers. — Has my brother's servant cleaned his master's guns? He has cleaned them. Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers? He has not been afraid to soil them, because his fingers are never clean, (propre.)— Do you use the books which I have lent you? I do use them. — May I (vuis-je) use your knife? Thou mayest use it, but thou must not cut thyself, nor spoil the knife. — May my brothers use your books? They may use them. — May we use your gun? You may use it, but you must not spoil it. — What have you done with my wood? I have used it to warm myself. — Has your father used my horse ? He has used it. — Have our neighbors used our clothes? They have not used them, because they did not want them. — Who has used my hat ? Nobody has used it, for nobody has dared use it. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Le maitre de Frangais. The French master, (meaning the master of the French language.) The French master, (a Frenchman, whatever he teaches.) Le maitre Frangais. 268 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) To shave, to shave one's self. To get shaved. To dress, to undress. To dress one 1 s self. To undress one 1 s self. Have you dressed yourself? I have not yet dressed myself. Have you dressed the child? I have dressed it. To undo, undone, undo. To get rid of. Are you getting rid of your damaged sugar ? I am getting rid of it. Did you get rid of your old ship ? I did get rid of it. To part with. The design, the intention. To intend, to have the intention of. I intend to go thither. We have the intention to do it. Do you intend to part with your horses ? I have already parted with them. He has parted with his gun. Have you parted with (discharged) your servant ? I have parted with (discharged) him. To get rid of some one. I did get rid of him. Did your father get rid of that man ? He did get rid of him. Raser, 1, seraser, raseZ'VOUS. t Se faire raser. Habiller, 1. Deshabiller, 1. S'habiller, 1. Se deshabiller, 1. Vous etes-vous habille ? Je ne me suis pas encore habille. Avez-vous habille l'enfant ? Je l'ai habille. Defaire,* 4, defait, defaites,. (comme faire, 25 l , 27 1 .) Se defaire * de. Vous defaites-vous de votre sucre avarie ? Je m'en defais. Vous etes-vous defait de votre vieux vaisseau ? Je m'en suis defait. t Se defaire* de. Le dessein. Avoir dessein, (de avant un infini.) J'ai dessein d J y aller. Nous avons dessein de le faire. Avez-vous dessein de vous defaire de vos chevaux ? Je m'en suis deja defait. II s'est defait de son fusil. Vous etes-vous defait de votre do- mestique ? Je m'en suis defait. Se debarrasse?' de quelqu'un. Je me suis debarrasse de lui. Votre pere s'est-il debarrasse de cet homme ? II s'en est debarrasse. Cinquante-detixieme Theme, 2de Sec Vous etes seul ; vous vous etes enfin debarrasse de ce vaurien. Je m'en suis enfin debarrasse. — Pourquoi votre pere s'est-il defait de ses chevaux? S'en est-il defait? N'en savez-vous rien? Je n'en ai pas entendu parler. Le maitre de Francais vient ce matin, n'est-ce pas'? C'est son jour, du moins, et je pense qu'il viendra. Serez- vous pret lorsqu'il arrivera'? J'ai a me raser et a m'habiller, car vous voyez que je ne suis ni rase ni habille. Eh bien! rasez-vous et habillez-vous. Qu'est-ce qui vous en empeche % Bien ne m'en empeche, et je vais dans mon appartement pour cela. Appelez- moi, s'il vient avant mon retour. Je n'y manquerai pas. — GuillaumCj FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 269 qu'avez-vous dessein de faire de votre fusil Anglais ? Le maitre Francais m 7 a prie de (has asked me to) le lui preter. Allez-vous le lui porter ? Pendant qu'il s'habille et se rase, il a envoye ce petit garcon, pour le chercher, (get it.) x\llez-vous le courier a ce petit garcon ? Croyez-vous qu'il le gatera? J'en ai peur. Alors je ferai mieux de le lui porter moi-meme. Have you shaved to-day ? I have shaved. — Has your brother shaved? He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. — Do you shave often ? I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the evening. — When do you shave in the evening ? When I do not dine at home. — How many times a day does your father shave % He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day. — Does your cousin shave often? He shaves only every other day, (de deux jours run.) — At what o'clock do you dress in the morning? I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — Does your neighbor dress before he breakfasts ? He breakfasts before he dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou undress ? I undress as soon as I return from the theatre. Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? I do not go every evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. — Have you already dressed the child ? I have not dressed it yet, for it is still asleep, (dort encore.) — Did you at last get rid of that man ? I did get rid of him. — Why has your father parted with his horses? Because he did not want them any more. — Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar? He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on credit ? He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. — Who has taught you how to read? I have learned it with (chez) a French master. — Has he taught you to write ? He hSs taught me to read and to write. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. To wake. To awake. I generally awake at six o'clock in the morning. My servant generally wakes me at 6ix o'clock in the morning. 23* fiveiller, 1. JReveiller, 1. 5" eveiller, 1. Se reveiller. Je m'eveille ordinairement a six heures du matin. Mon domestique m'eveille ordinaire- ment a six heures du matin. 270 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) A slight noise wakes me. A dream has waked me. I do not make a noise, in order not to wake him. A dream. Generally. To come, or go down. To alight from one's horse, to dis- mount. To conduct one's self. Behave well. To behave. I conduct myself well. How does he conduct himself? Towards. He behaves ill towards that man. He has behaved ill towards me. To be worth while to. Is it worth while to .... ? It is worth while. Is it worth while to do it ? It is not worth while. Is it worth while to write to him ? It is worth nothing. Is it better ? It is better. Will it be better ? It will. It is better to do this than that. It is better to stay here than go a walking. Un bruit leger me reveille. Un songe m' a reveille. Je ne fais pas de bruit, pour ne pas le reveiller. $ 171 — 7.) Un songe, un reve. Ordinairement. Descendre, 4, descendu, descendez Descendre de cheval. Se conduire,* 4. Conduisez-vous bien. Se comport er, 1. Je me conduis bien. Comment se conduit-il ? Envers or vers. II se comporte mal envers cet homme. II s'est mal comporte envers moi t Valoir la peine de. t Vaut-il la peine de . . . . ? t Cela en vaut la peine. (§ 50.) ■t Vaut-il la peine de le faire ? t Cela n'en vaut pas la peine, t Cela vaut-il la peine de lui ecrire ? t Est-ce la peine de lui ecrire ? t Cela ne vaut rien. (39 ? .) t Vaut-il mieux ? II vaut mieux. t Vaudra-t-il mieux ? II vaudra mieux. t II vaut mieux faire ceci que de faire cela. t II vaut mieux rester ici que de se promener. Cinquante-deuxieme Th&me. 3me Sec. Vous etes descen^i seul. N ? avez-vous pas dit a votre frere de descendre ? Non 7 je n'ai pas ose le lui dire. Pourquoi n ; avez- vous pas ose ? Parce qu ; il dort. Ne l'avez-vous pas reveille ? Non, en verite. Je n'ai pas ose. Et pourquoi done? II est temps de se lever ; n'est-ce pas? Oui ; sans doute ; mais il m'a dit de ne jamais (§ 171 — 7) Peveiller quand il dort. Et si voas Feveillez, qu'arri- vera-t-il ? II me battra. Est-il assez mechant pour le faire 1 II le fait quand cela lui convient. — Qui a appris le calcul a votre petit frere? Un maitre Francais le lui a enseigne. — M ; appelez-vous? Je vous appelle. — Que vous plait-il? Pourquoi ne vous levez-vous pas? Ne savez-vous pas qu'il est deja tard? Que me demandez- vous? (40 l .) J 7 ai perdu tout mon argent, et je viens vous frier de FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 271 (beg) m'en preter. — Quelle heure est-il ? II est deja six heures et un quart, et vous avez assez dormi. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes leve ? II y a une heure et demie que je le suis. — Voulez-vous faire un tour avec moi ? Je ne peux pas aller faire un tour, car j ; at- tends mon maitre de Francais. Do you rise as early as I ? I do not know at what o'clock you rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to wake me to-morrow, at four o'clock'? I will tell him. — Why have you risen so early? My children have made such a {tant de) noise that they wakened me, and hindered me from sleeping. — Have you slept well ? I have not slept well, for the dogs have made so much noise, and barked so loud, that I have not been able to sleep. — At what o'clock did the good captain awake ? He awoke, as usual, at a quarter past five in the morning. How did my child behave ? He behaved very well. — How did my brother behave towards you ? He behaved very well towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. — Is it worth while to write to that man ? It is not worth while to write to him. — Is it worth while to dismount from my horse to buy a cake ? It is not worth while, for it is not long since you ate. — Is it worth while to dismount from my horse to give something to that poor man ? He seems (parait) to want it; but you can give him something without dismounting from your horse. — Is it better to go to the theatre than to study? It is better to do the latter than the former, (ceci que cela.) 1 — Is it better to learn to read French than to speak it? It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. — Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking ? It is better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to go to France than to Germany? It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one has no wish to travel. FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, 53&.—Cinquante-troisieme Legon, 53m*. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To hope, expect. Hope ever. I Esperer. ($ 144 — 5.)2isp£reztoujours. I hope, thou hopest, he hopes, one hopes. \ T espere, tu esperes, il espere, on espere. 1 When latter and former apply to actions, translate by : ceci and cela ; not by : celui-ci and celui-ld, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. ($38, N. 5.) 272 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, (l.) Do you hope ? We no longer hope. To yield. To sell, (as a favor granted.) 1 I yield, thou yieldest, he yields, one yields. Will you sell me your horse ? (or, I wish you would sell me, &c.) I will, to oblige you. Do you expect to find him there ? I do expect it. To change, (meaning, to exchange.) To change one thing for another. I change my hat for his, or We exchange seats. To change, (meaning, to put on other things.) Do you change your hat ? I do change it. He changes his linen. They change their clothes. To mix, among, amongst. I mix among the men. He mixes among the soldiers. To recognise or to acknowledge. Do you recognise that man ? It is so long since I saw him that I do not recollect him. I have more bread than I can eat. Esperez-vcms ? Nous n'esperone plus. ; Ceder, 1. (§ 144—5.) Je cede, tu cedes, il cede, on cede. Voulez-vous me ceder votre cheval ? | Je vous le cedt rai pour vous obliger, | Esperez-vous l'y trouver ? Je l'espere. Changer, 1, {contre, pour, de.) Changer quelque chose contre quel- que chose. Je change mon chapeau pour le sien. Nous changeons de places, (fem.) Changer, 1, (takes de before a sub- stantive.) t Changez-vous de chapeau? t J' en change. t II change de linge. t lis changent Douter, 1, de quelque chose. | Doutez-vous de cela ? Pen doute. I Je n' en doute pas. De quoi doutez-vous ? Je doute de ce que cet homme m'a dit. Le doute. Sans doute. Convenir* 2, de quelque chose, (con- jugated like its primitive, venir.*) Convenez-vous de cela ? J' en conviens. t Combien avez-vous paye* ce cha- peau? t Je l'ai paye trois ecus. The doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. To agree to a thing. Do you agree to that ? I do agree to it. How much have you paid for that hat ? I have paid three crowns for it. Obs. 125. When one of the prepositions, for, at, is used in English to express the price of a thing, it is not rendered in French. (40 1 , Obs. 93.) J'ai achete ce vin 6 dollars le parrier. (ou a 6 dollars.) J'en ai achete a $10 le panier. Cinquante-quatrieme Th£me. Ire Sec. Ou est M. votre oncle ? II voyage. Y a-t-il long-temps qu'il voy- age? II y a deja quelques mois. Se porte-t-il bien ? Oui, il se porte beaucoup mieux depuis qu'il voyage. Que pense-t-il de PEu- rope ? Quelques pays lui plaisent, d'autres ne lui plaisent pas. — A-t-il ete en France? Oui, il y est passe ; mais comme il ne parle pas le FrancaiSj il ne Faime pas beaucoup. Comment ! M. votre I bought this wine at 6 dollars a bas- ket. ($ 7.) I bought some at $10 a basket. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 277 oncle ne parle pas Francais ! Non, il ne Pa jamais appris. — Com- ment se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Et chez M. votre neveu ? Le domestique dit qu ; on y est malade. Qui y est malade ? Je ne sais pas. Comme j'ai Pintention d'y aller, je n 7 ai rien demande au domestique. Je doute de ce que ce valet dit. Je ne le crois pas toujours. — Ou avez-vous achete ce joli baton ? Le trouvez-vous joli? Oui, charm ant. Combien Pavez-vous paye ? Je n ; en ai donne que trois quarts de gourdes, (dollars.) Ce n ; est pas cher. Etes vous convenu d'aller demain a Burlington ? J'en suis convenu. Prenez de notre vin a $12 le panier. J'en prendrai. How is your father? (Monsieur votre fere 1) He is (only) so so. (35 1 .) — How is your patient ? He is a little better to-day than yesterday- — Is it long since you saw your brothers ? {Messieurs vos freres ?) I saw them two days ago. — How art thou? I am tolerably well. — How long has your cousin been learning French? He has been learning it only eight months. — Does he already speak it? He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who has been learning it these two years. — Is it long since you heard of my uncle ? It is hardly a fortnight (quinze jours) since I heard of him. — Where is he staying now ? He is staying at Berlin, but my father is in London. — Did you stay long at Vienna? I stayed there a fortnight. — How long did your cousin stay at Paris? He stayed there only a month. Has your uncle at last bought the garden ? He has not bought it, for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed about the price of that picture ? We have agreed about it. — How much have you paid for it? I have paid fifteen hundred francs for it. — What hast thou bought to-day ? I have bought two fine horses, three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun. — For how much hast thou bought the pictures? I have bought them for seven hundred francs. — Do you find them dear? I do not find them dear. — How much have you spent, then ? I have spent and paid nearly four thousand francs. — How many dollars (gourdes) is that? About 800. It is a good deal of money. — Have you already heard of your cousin who is gone to Hungary ? He had agreed to write to me, but he has not yet done it; however, I have written to him. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. The price. Have you agreed about the price ? We have agreed about it. About what have you agreed ? About the price. 24 Le prix. Etes-vous convenus du prix ? Nous en sommes convenus. De quoi etes-vous convenus ? Du prix. 278 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) To agree, to compose a difference. To feel, feeling. Felt , feel. Do you feel ? We do not. I feel, thou feelest, he feels. To consent, to agree to . . . I consent to go thither. To wear (garments.) The garment. What garments does he wear ? He wears beautiful garments. Against my custom. As customary. My partner. To observe something. To take notice of something. Do you take notice of that ? I do take notice of it. Did you observe that ? Did you notice what he did ? I did notice it. To expect, (to hope for.) What do you expect ? (hope for ?) Do you expect to receive a note from your uncle ? I expect it. I do not. He expects it. We expect it. Have we expected it. We have expected it ? To get, (meaning to procure.) I cannot procure any money. He cannot procure anything to eat. S'accorder, 1. Sentir,* 2, sentant. Senti, sen\>ez. Sentez-vous ? Nous ne sentons pas. Je sens, tu sens, il sent. Consentir* 2, (comme sentir,*) (a ou de av. l'infin., d av. un nom.) Je consens a (d'y) aller. Porter, 1, (des habits.) Le vetement. Quels vetements porte-t-il? II porte de beaux vetements. Contre mon ordinaire. Comme a Pordinaire. Mon associe. > t S'apercevoir, 3, de quelque chose. Vous apercevez-vous g$ cela? Je m'en apergois. Vous etes-vous apergu de cela ? Vous etes-vous aper§u de ce qu'il a fait? Je m'en suis apergu. t S'attendre, 4, (o av. l'infini.) A quoi vous attendez-vous ? Vous attendez-vous d recevoir un billet de votre oncle ? Je m'y attends. II s'y attend. Nous nous y attendons. Nous y sommes-nous attendus ? Nous nous y sommes attendus. t Se procurer, 1. i( Je ne peux pas me procurer d'argent. I Je ne puis me procurer de 1' argent. | II ne peut se procurer de quoi manger. Cinqtjante-qttatbjeme Theme. 2de Sec. Quelque chose ne vous plait pas. C'est vrai. Je m'attends a recevoir un present, et il ne vient pas. Ne soyez pas (41 2 ) impa- tient, il viendra, si on vous Pa promis. — Qui vous fait ce don 1 Le secretaire du general m'en a promis un. — Le cousin de Papothi- caire a-t-il consenti a vous ceder son dictionnaire Anglais et Francais? II n'y a pas encore consenti. Y consentira-t-il ? J'espere qu'il y consentira. — Qu 7 allez-vous porter ce printemps? Je n'ai pas encore fait de choix. Je ne sais pas ce que je porterai. Moi, je porterai des habits fonces au printemps, et quelque chose de clair en ete. N'aviez-vons pas un surtout clair Phiver passe ? Si fait. J'en ai porte un tout Phiver. Je le croyais. Moi, je ne les aime plus clairs. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 279 Je les ai aimes autre fois. — Avez-vous vendu votre grain a 75 cents le boisseau? (a bushel. § 7.) Pen ai eu 80 cents le boisseau. Have you agreed with your partner ? I have agreed with him. — Does he consent to pay you the price of the ship ? He consents to pay me the price agreed upon, (convenu.) — Do you consent to go to France? I do. — Do you too? I? No. — Have you seen your old friend again'? (revoir* comme voir,* 25 1 , 33 3 .) I have seen him again. — Did you recognise him? I could hardly recognise him ; for. contrary to his custom, he wears a large hat. — How is he ? He is very well. — What garments does he wear? He wears beautiful new garments. — Have you taken notice of what your boy has done ? I have taken notice of it. — Have you (Ven) punished him for it ? I have punished him for it. — Has your father already written to you ? Not yet; but I expect (je m' attends) to receive a note from him to-day. Of what do you complain? I complain of not being able to procure some money. — Why do these poor men complain ? They complain because they cannot procure anything to eat. — How are your parents? They are, as usual, (comme d V ordinaire,) very well. — Is your uncle well ? He is better than he usually is. — Have you already heard of your friend who is in Germany ? I have already written to him several times: however, he has not answered me yet. — Why have you punished your boy ? I did it because he broke my best glass. I had given him some syrup and water, and instead of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, which we bought ten days ago: and what do you think he did afterwards? — Did he break the glass? Yes, he did, and then I gave him a few blows. — What did you pay for a yard of your new carpet ? I paid dear for it: Si. 60. Vocabulaibe. 3me Sec. To make fun of some one or some- \ _, , , i • f oe moquer de quelqu un ou de quel- To laugh at some one or something. ) Ciue c ose * He laughs at everybody. ) n ge e de ^ [e mQnde He criticises everybody. » He criticises everybody Do you laugh at that man ? I do not laugh at him. To stop, to stay. Stop, wait, hold on. Have you-stayed long at Berlin ? stayed there only three days. To sojourn. To stay. Where does your brother stay at present ? At present, actually. Vous moquez-vous de cet homme? Je ne m'en moque pas. S'arreter, 1. Arretez-vous. Vous etes-vous arrete long-temps a Berlin ? Je ne m'y suis arrete que trois jours. Sojourner, 1. Ou Monsieur votre frere sejourne-t-il actuellement ? Actuellement. 280 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) The residence, stay, abode. Paris is a fine place to live in. After reading. After cutting myself. After dressing yourself. After dressing himself. After shaving ourselves. After warming themselves. I returned the book after reading it. I threw the knife away after cutting myself. You went to the concert after dress- ing yourself. He went to the theatre after dressing himself. We breakfasted after shaving our- selves. They went out after warming them- selves. The sick person, (the patient.) Tolerably well. It is rather late. It is rather far. Le sejour. t C'est un beau sejour que Paris. t Apres avoir lu. (40 1 .) t Apres m'etre coupe. t Apres vous etre habille. t Apres s'etre habille. t Apres nous etre rases. t Apres s' etre chauffes. t J'ai rendu le livre apres Patron* lu. t J'ai jete le couteau apres m'etre coupe, t Vous etes alle au concert apres vous etre habille. t II est alle au theatre apres s'etre habille. t Nous avons dejeune apres nous etre rases, t lis sont sortis apres s'etre chauffes. Le malade. Assez bien, paasablement. II est bien tard- C'est bien loin. Cinquante-qtjatrieme Th&me. 8me Sec. Tu arrives tard, mon cher Armand, t ; es-tu arrete en chemin? Je suis parti un peu tard, et je me suis arrete en chemin, (on the way.) Pourquoi t ; es-tu arrete ? Je me suis arrete pour voir un voleur de grand chemin qu ; on a pris de bonne heure v,e matin. Je crois que tu as des vetements neufs? Oui, j'ai mis a\,jOurd 7 hui les vetements dont mon bon oncle m ; a fait present. lis s*,at beaux; mais je crois que Phabit est un peu trop grand : qu ; en penses-tu ? Je ne peux pas bien voir derriere ; devant, il va bien, n'est-ce pas ? A mer- veille ; mais ici et la, il est un peu trop larg*-. Comment va le gilet? Parfaitement bien. Et les pantalons (pauialoons) comment vont- ils? lis vont bien aussi. Ne sont-ils ni uop longs ni trop large s ? Non ; ils sont juste ce qu'il faut. Do you like to speak to my uncle ? I li^e much to speak to him; but sometimes he laughs at me, (se mo-que de.) — Why does he laugh at you ? He laughs at me because i speak badly. — Why has your brother no friends ? He has none, because he criticises every- body. — Why are you laughing at that man? I do not intend (je iv ai pas dessein) to laugh at him. I beg vou not (prier de, § 171 — 7) to do it; for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Do you doubt what' I am telling you? 1 do not doubt it. — Do yon doubt what that man has told you? I doubt it. for he has often told stories, (mentirJ* 44 s .) — Have you at last bought the horse which you FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 281 wished to buy last month ? I have not bought it, for I have not been able to procure money. What have you done with the books which the English captain has lent you ? I have returned them to him 7 after reading them. — Why have you thrown away your knife ? I have thrown it away after cutting myself. — When did I go to the concert % You went after dressing yourself. — When did your brother go to the ball % He went after dressing himself. — When did you breakfast % We break- fasted after shaving ourselves. — When did our neighbors go out? They went out after warming themselves. — What did you do this morning ? I shaved, after rising, and went out after breakfasting. — What did your father do last night? Qiier soir?) He supped after going to the play, and went to bed after supping. — Did he rise early ? He rose at sunrise. A useful Hint. Some of the observations have been given in French, to show the pupil that it can easily be done. Let him now translate in French all the English he finds in the book, as a part of his daily task. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, 55th.— Cinquante-cinquieme Legon, 55me. Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. DEFINITE ARTICLE, Feminine.— Article Defini, Feminin. Sing, and plur. The, of, from the, to the, for the. Singulier. La, 1', de la, de 1', a la, a 1', pour la, pour 1\ Pluriel. Les, des, aux, pour les. Obs. 126. It will be observed that the plural of the definite article is alike for both genders. (9 1 .) When the definite article stands before a vowel or an h mute, in the sin- gular, it is also alike for both genders, viz. V . Sing. Plur. Singulier. Pluriel. The woman, women. La femme, les femmes. The mother. La mere, les meres. The daughter or the girl. La fille, les filles. The sister. La sceur, les soeurs. The candle. La chandelle, les chandelles. The bottle. La bouteille, les bouteilles. The key. La clef, les clefs. She, it. They, (nominatives.) Elle. Elles, (§ 38, 1 & 2.) Nominat. Her, it. To her, to it. Of, from her. La, 1'. Lui, y. D'elle, en. En, Of, from it. ($ 47.) Them. To them. To them. Of, from Les. Leur, (21 1 .) Y, (21*.) D'elles, them. en. En. Has she ? She has. Has she not ? A-t-elle ? Elle a. N'a-t-elle pas ? 24* 282 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, (l.) Have they? They have, they have not. | Ont-elles? Ellesont, elles n'ont pas. Of, from. To. With. My, (feminin singulier.) Ma, de ma, a ma, avec ma. Thy. Ta, de ta, a ta, avec ta. His, her, its. Sa, de sa, a sa, avec sa. My, (plur. des deux genres.) Mes, de mes, a mes, avec mes. Obs. 127. In the plural, the possessive pronouns are always alike for both genders. (9 1 .) The father and his son or his daugh- ter. ($ 32.) The mother and her son or her daugh- ter. The child and its brother or its sister. Le pere et son fils ou sa fille. La mere et son fils ou sa fille. 1/ enfant et son frere ou sa soeur. Sing. My pen, Thy fork, His or her nut, Our hand, Your mouth, Their door, Plur. my pens, thy forks, bis or her nuts, our hands, your mouths, their doors. Singulier. Ma plume, Ta fourchette, Sa noix, Notre main, Votre bouche, Leur porte, Pluriel. mes plumes, tes fourchettes. ses noix. nos mains, vos bouches. leurs portes. Obs. 128. The personal pronoun leur must not be mistaken for the pos- sessive leur. The former never takes an s, while the latter does, when the person or thing possessed is in the plural. Ex. Je leur parle, I speak to them ; je vois leurs freres et leurs soeurs, I see their brothers and their sisters. -4.) The pretty woman. (§ 200- The pretty women. The small candle, the small candles. The large bottle, the large bottles. La jolie femme. Les jolies femmes. La petite chandelle, La grande bouteiile, les petites chandelles. les grandes bouteilles. Cinquante-cinquieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Comment se porte Madame votre mere % Je vous remercie, elle se porte passablement. Et Mesdemoiselles vos scbuts'? Elles ne se portent pas si bien qu 7 a Pordinaire. Qu'ont-elles ? Elles n ; ont pas grand' chose; mais elles se plaignent un peu. Les femmes aiment a se plaindre, n 7 est-ce pas ? Elles ne se plaignent pas plus que les hommes. La fille du ministre est-elle mieux? On dit qu'elle est plus mal. Mange-t-elle quelque chose ? Non, elle a trop mal a la bouche pour manger. — Brule-t-on des chandelles ou du gaz chez votre seem:? On y brule du gaz. On pense que ce n'est pas si cher que les chandelles. — Ou Sophie a-t-elle mis la clef? La clef de quoi? La clef du pupitre Francais. Je ne sais pas. Mais voici ma clef; elle ouvre le pupitre. N'importe. Je irai pas besoin de Pouvrir. A-t-on apporte les bouteilles ? Les bouteilles de FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 283 quoi ? Les bouteilles de vin. Oui, les voici, (here they are,) derriere la porte. Combien avez-vous paye la bouteille ? Pai paye presque un demi-dollar la bouteille. — Avez-vous vu la jolie femme qui a passe par ici ? Quand a-t-elle passe ? II y a un moment. J'etais alors occupe a casser mes noix, de sorte que je n'ai pas pu la voir. — Ma plume d'acier est dans mon grand portefeuille, prenez-la, si vous la voulez. Merci. De rien. Has your sister my gold ribbon ? She has it not. — What has she ? She has nothing. — Has your mother anything? She has a fine gold fork. — Who has my large bottle ? Your sister has it. — Do you some- times see my mother? I see her often. — When did you see your sister? I saw her a fortnight ago. — Who has my fine nuts? Your good sister has them. — Has she also my silver forks ? She has them not. — Who has them ? Your mother has them. — *Vhat fork have you ? I have my iron fork. — Have your sisters had my pens ? They have not had them, but I believe that their children have had them. — Why does your brother complain ? He complains because his right foot aches. — Why do you complain ? I complain because my left eye aches. Among you country people (parmi vous autres (§41i) gens de campagne) there are many fools; are there not? asked (demandd) a philosopher, lately, (V autre jour,) of a peasant, (dun paysan.) The latter answered, (repondit :) " Sir, they are to be found (on en trouve) in all stations, (Vetat.") " Fools sometimes tell the truth, (la verite,") said (dit) the philosopher. — What did the philosopher ask of the countryman ? He asked if there were not (n 7 y avail pas) many fools among country people ? — What did the countryman reply to the philosopher ? He answered that there were some in all stations. — Was the philosopher pleased with the peasant's answer? (la re- ponse, fern.) I think he was pleased with the answer. — What do you think of the peasant's answer ? I think it .... (L'ecolier peut flnir la reponse.) — Do you not like that young lady's face? Yes, I do; but not her hair, (plur.) — Has not that young woman too much tongue ? Yes, she has a little too much ; at least, so they say, (on le dit.) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Which woman ? Which women ? Quelle femme ? Queiles femmes ? Which daughter ? Which daughters ? Quelle fille ? Queiles filles ? Which, what one ? Which ones ? Laquelle ? Lesquelles ? This, that woman. ; Cette femme. These, those women. Ces femmes. This lady, these ladies. Cette dame-ci, ces dames-ci. That young lady, those young ladies. Cette demoiselle-la, ces demoi- selles-la. 284 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) The hand, the hands. The right hand. The left hand. I have a sore hand. La main, les mains. La main droite. La main gauche. J'ai mal a la main. Obs. 129. Avoir mal is used with the preposition d, to express that a part of the body is affected with illness or pain. (23 1 .) The tooth, the teeth. Have you the toothache ? I have the headache. I feel a pain in my side. His feet are sore. The face. The mouth. The cheek. The tongue. The language. The door. The window. The street. The town. The linen. The old woman. La dent, les dents. Avez-vous mal aux dents t J'ai mal a la tete. J'ai mal au cote. II a mal aux pieds. La figure. La bouche. Lajoue. La langue. Laporte. La fenetre. Larue. La ville. La toile. La vieille femme. Remark. From what precedes, this principle may be deduced : — The characteristic ending of French feminine nouns and adjectives is the letter e. There are, however, some adjectives which also have this ending in the masculine, and then they are of both genders, as : An amiable man. An amiable woman. The room. The front room. The back room. The upper room. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRO NOUN. —Article Partitif Feminin. Some, Of, from some. To some, With some. Sing. (II 1 ' 2 .) De la, T, de, a de la, 1', avec de la, 1'. Plur. Des, de, a des, avec des. Obs. 130. For the plural of this article, and when it stands before an adjective, (ll 1 * 2 .) Un homme aimable. Une femme aimable. La chambre. La chambre de devant, (ou du de vant, ou sur le devant.) La chambre de derriere, (ou du der- riere, ou sur le derriere.) La chambre d'en haut, (ou du haut.) Some light. Some silk. Some good soup. Some good apples. De la lumiere. De la soie. De bonne soupe. De bonnes pommes. Obs. 131. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, and et, double their final consonant before the e mute of the feminine. Examples: Une cruelle certitude. A cruel certitude. Such a promise. An old acquaintance. A good truth. A dumb woman. Une pareille promesse. Une ancienne connaissance. Une bonne ve'rite. Une femme muette. Oh?. 132. In the masculine, the above adjectives would be crutl, pareih ancien, bon, muet. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 285 INDEFINITE ARTICLE, Feminine.— Article Indejlni, Feminin. A ox an, of, from a, to a, with a. Une, d'une, a une, avec une, A virtuous woman. | Une femme vertueuse. Obs. 133. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x become feminine by changing x into se ; as, masc. vertueux ; fem. vertueuse, virtuous. A happy young lady. | Une demoiselle heureuse. 1 Cinquante-cinquieme Th£me. 2de Sec. Sont-ce les Demoiselles Cavaignac ? Oui, ce sont elles. Voulez- vous me 'presenter a elles J (introduce me to them. § 64.) Volontiers. Venez. Attendons un moment, car vous voyez qu' elles parlent a ces dames en bleu. Quelles sont ces deux dames en bleu, elles sont jolies, n 7 est-ce pas? Je ne les connais pas. Approchons a pre- sent. Mesdemoiselles, voulez-vous me permettre de vous presenter mon ami, M. de Montcalme ? Nous sommes bien aises, M. de Montcalme, de faire voire connaissance, (acquaintance.) — Mesde- moiselles, tout le plaisir est de mon cote. Vous avez bien de la bonte. (literally goodness, here, politeness.) — Mile. Clara va-t-elle jouer du piano? Non, elle n'en toucher a pas (will not play)ce soir, parce qu'elle a mal a la main droite. Comment s'est-elle fait du mal? Elle s'est fait du mal avec ses ciseaux. — Quel bruit est cela? C'est la porte de la rue (street door) qu'on vient de fermer. — Pourquoi Mile. Sophie tient-elle son mouchoir sur sa joue? y a-t-elle mal? Elle n'a pas mal a la joue, mais aux dents. Cette femme muette est-elle heureuse ? Oui, elle est heureuse, parce qu'elle est bonne et vertueuse. Is your sister writing? No, Madam, she is not. — Why does she not? Her right hand is sore. — Why does not the daughter of your neighbor go out? She does not, because she has sore feet. — Why does my sister not speak ? Because she has a sore mouth. — Hast thou not seen my silver pen ? No, but I have seen your sister's steel pen. — Hast thou a front room ? I have a back one, (une de der- riere,) but my brother has a front one. — Is it (est-ce) an upper room? It is one, {e'en est une.) — Does the wife {la femme) of our shoemaker go out already ? No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is still very ill. — Which bottle had your little sister? She had our mothers, {celle de.) — Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? I have eaten neither of yours {de la voire) nor your mother's, but of that of my good sister. Have you seen the lady who was with me this morning ? No, but I saw her amiable daughter. — Has your mother hurt herself? She has not hurt herself. — Can you write with this steel pen ? Which? 1 From the masculine heureux. 286 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) (la quelle?) Sophia's? Yes, Sophia's. No, but I shall write with the golden one, (telle d J or.) — Each (chaque) woman thinks herself amiable, and each (chacune) is conceited, (a de V amour propre.) The same as (de mime que) men, my dear friend. Many a one (tel) thinks himself (se croit) learned who is not so, (ne Vest pas,) and many men (bien des hommes) surpass (surpasser) women in vanity, (en vanite.) — What is the matter with you? Nothing is the matter with me. — Why does your sister complain ; Because she has a pain in her cheek. — Has your brother a sore cheek ? No, but he feels a pain in his side. — Where is the silk? It has fallen from the window in the street. — Did this old woman pick it up ? Yes, she did • but she did not pick up the linen. — Did the linen fall also from the window ? Yes, it did. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. An active young woman. | Une jeune personne 1 active. 06s. 134. Adjectives ending in the masculine in /, become feminine by changing /into ve, as, masc. actif; fern, active, active. A new gown. An ingenuous proposal. Have you my pen ? No, Madam, I have it not. Which bottle have you broken? Which door have you opened ? Une robe neuve. 2 Une proposition naive. 3 Avez-vous ma plume ? Non, Madame, je ne l'ai pas. Quelle bouteille avez-vous cassee ? Quelle porte avez-vous ouverte ? Obs. 135. The past participle agrees with its direct object, {regime direct,) in gender as well as in number. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) Which windows have you opened ? Which bottles has the woman broken ? Which young lady have you con- ducted to the ball ? Which water have you drunk ? Which letters have you written ? This, this one. These. That, that one. Those. Have you this or that pen ? I have neither this nor that. Do you see that woman ? I see her. Have you seen my sisters ? No, Miss, I have not seen them. Quelles fenetres avez-vous ouvertes ? Quelles bouteilles la femme a-t-elle cassees ? Quelle demoiselle avez-vous con duite au bal ? Quelle eau avez-vous bue ? Quelles lettres avez-vous ecrites ? Celle-ci. Celles-ci. Celle-la. Celles-la. Avez-vous cette plume-ci ou celle la? Je n'ai ni celle-ci ni celle-la. Voyez-vous cette femme ? Je la vois. Avez-vous vu mes soeurs ? Non, Mademoiselle, je ne les ai pas vues. 1 Personne, as a pronoun, is masculine ; as a substantive, it is feminine. 2 From the masculine neuf * From the masculine nafy. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 287 Has he spoken to her ? He has. To her, to him, to them. Do you speak to my sisters ? I speak to them. Some coarse linen. Some good water. A napkin, a towel. A clean napkin. The following double the letter I : — (before a consonant, | Bean, < before a vowel or h ) V mute, i r before a consonant, | < before a vowel or ft) ( mute, 5 Lui a-t-il parle ? II lui a parle. Lui, leur. (Obs. 128.) Parlez-vous a mes sceurs ? Je leur parle. De grosse toile. De bonne eau. Une serviette. Une serviette propre. Handsome. New. Bel, Nouveau, Nouvel, belle. nouvelle. Old. Crazy, foolish. *)ft. Some fine silk stockings. The Christian. (06s. 132.) The Jew. (Obs. 134.) The negro. A companion. A friend. (Remark, p. 284.) To celebrate, to feast. vieille. folle. molle. Vieux, Vieil, Fou, Fol, 1 Mou, Mol,2 De beaux bas de soie. Le Chretien, Fern, la Chretienne. Le Juif. " la Juive. Le negre. " la negresse. Uncompagnon. " une compagne. Un ami. Celebrer, 1, feter, une amie. 1. Cinquante-cinquieme Theme. 3me Sec. A quelle joue avez-vous mal? A la droite ou a la gauche? Je n 7 ai mal ni a la joue droite ni a la gauche. Vraiment ? Je croyais que vous aviez mal a Pune ou a P autre. A quoi cette dame s'amuse- t-elle ? Elle s'amuse a toucher du piano. — Guillaume, apportez de la lumiere, nous voulons jouer aux echecs. Voulez-vous une chan- dello ? ou allumerai-je le gaz? — Apportez une chandelle, allumee. N'avez-vous pas revu notre ancienne connaissance, Mme. Leroux? Non ; je n'ai pas revu cette ancienne connaissance, mais j'en ai revu une autre. Qui? Devinez, (guess.) — Vousa-t-elle fait une pareille 1 Fol is used instead of fou before nouns beginning with a vowel. Fol always precedes, and fou always follows its substantive. Ex. Tin march* fou, a foolish bargain; un fol espoir, a foolish hope. Substantively, fou means a madman, and folle a madwoman. 2 Formerly, mol was more in use than mou. The Academy writes : 11 TInhomme mou et effimine^'' a weak and effeminate man. We read, however, in Buflbn, " Les Chinois sont des peuples mols," the Chinese are an effeminate people. 288 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) promesse ? Oui ; elle en a fait une pareille, a ma soeur, a ma cousine, et a moi. (§64 — 2.) Comment se portent Mesdemoiselles vos soeurs ? Elles se portent tres-bien depuis quelques jours. Ou demeu- rent-elles 1 Elles demeurent a Wilmington. — Est-ce une petite ville ? Oui, c'est une petite ville dans Vetat de Delaware, (the state of Dela- ware.) Quel jour les Turcs celebrent-ils ? lis celebrent le vendredi; les Juifs celebrent le samedi, et les Chretiens le dimanche. Quel jour est-ce que les negres celebrent? Les negres celebrent le jour de leur naissance, (their birth-day.) Is your sister as old as my mother ? She is not so old ; but she is taller. — Has your brother purchased anything? (fait des emplettes?) He has purchased something, (il en a fait.) — What has he bought % He has bought fine linen, good pens, old candles, and napkins. — Has he not bought some silk stockings'? He has bought some. — Have you a sore nose ? I have not a sore nose, but I have the tooth- ache. — Have you cut your finger? No, my lady, I have cut my hand. — Will you give me a pen ? I will give you one. — Will you have this or that? I will have neither. — Which (laquelle) one do you wish to have ? I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do you wish to have my mothers good black silk (bonne sole noire) or my sister's ? I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you have. Do you open the back window? I open it, because it is too warm. —Which windows has your sister opened ? She has opened those of the front room. — Have you been at the ball of my old acquaint- ance? I have been there. — Which young ladies have you taken to the ball? I took my sister's friends and companions (fern.) there. — Did they dance ? They danced a good deal. — Did they amuse them- selves ? They amused themselves. — Did they remain long at the ball ? They remained there two hours. — Is this young lady a Turk ? No, she is a Greek. — Does she speak French ? She speaks it. — Does she not speak English? She speaks it also, but she speaks French better. — Has your sister a companion ? She has one. — Does she like her? She likes her very much, for she is very amiable. — That active young woman is ingenuous, is she not? Yes, she is (both) active and ingenuous. — What do you think of his sister's new silk gown? Her new silk gown? Yes, the silk one. Her new silk gown pleases me much. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON, 5Gth.—Cinquante-sixicme Legon, 56me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To go to the country. To be pleased in the country. To go to the 'oank. r 'o rtop at the bank. To or at the exchange. To or at the river. To or at the kitchen. To or at the cellar. To or at church. To or at school. To or at the French school. To or at the dancing school, singing school. The play. The opera. To go a hunting. Is he a hunting? To hunt. To fish. To go a fishing. To get tired of fishing. The whole day, all the day. The whole morning. The whole evening. The whole night, all the night. The whole year. The whole week. Tn? whole society. Aller a la campagne. S'amuser a la campagne. Aller a la banque. S'arreter a la banque. A la bourse. A la riviere. A la cuisine. A la cave. A 1'eglise. A 1'ecole. A 1'ecole de Fran$ais. A 1'ecole de danse, a 1'ecole de chant. La comedie. L' op era, (a masculine, noun.) 1 f Aller a la chasse. t Est-il a la chasse ? Chasser, 1. Pecher, 1. Aller a la peche. S'ennuyer a la peche. Toute la journee. Toute la matinee. Toute la soiree. 2 Toute la nuit. Toute l'annee. 3 Toute la semaine. Toute la societe. * All nouns ending in a are of the masculine gender, except sepia, sepia ; and talva, a tumor, which are feminine. 1 The words day, moaning, and evening, are expressed by jour, matin, and soir, when we speak of s. part of them, and by journee, matinee, and soiree, when their whole duration is to be expressed. Ex. Il vient me voir tous les jours, he comes to see me every day ; j'ai reste ckez mol, toute la journee, I stayed at home all the day long ; je me promene tous les matins pendant une heure, I take an hour's walk every morning ; il a phi toute la matinee, it has been raining all the morning ; j'irai vous voir demain au soir, I shall call upon you to-morrow evening ; ou passerez-vous la soiree ? where shall you spend the evening ? 3 Year is expressed by an when we wish to express one or more units of a twelvemonth, and by annee when it is considered as a twelvemonth in its duration. Ex. Il y a six ans que mon frire ne m'a ecrit, it is six years since my brother wrote to me ; une annee heureuse est celle que Von passe ians ennui tt sans infirmite, a happy year is that which is spent without tediousness or infirmity. 25 290 TIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) aii of «««« 5 Tout a lafois. All at once. < „ ( Tout a coup. Suddenly, all of a sudden. This week. This year. Last week. Next week. Every woman. Once, one time, every time. Every week. A table. This mahogany table. Soudainement. Cette semaine. Cette annee. La semaine passee. La semaine prochaine. Toutes les femmes. Une fois, toutes les fois, chaque foia Toutes les semaines. Une table. Cette table d' acajou. Cinquante-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. Venez-vous de la campagne pour aller a la banque ? Oui 7 j'ai dessein de changer un billet de banque en argent. — Trez-vous a la bourse avant de retourner a la campagne ? Non, mais j'irai acheter quelque chose pour aller a la peche. Aimez-vous la peche ? J'aime assez a pecher. Pechez-vous toute la journee ? Non, nous pechons toute la matinee ou toute la soiree. — Qui va a Pecole de chez vous? Jean va a Pecole d' Anglais et de Francais, Sophie a Pecole de danse et de chant, et Frederic ne va a aucune. — Qu'allez-vous faire cette semaine a la campagne? Nous allons couper notre grain. — Vos cousins vont-ils en Californie la semaine prochaine ? lis n ; iront que dans deux semaines. Leurs femmes et leurs filles iront-elles avec eux ? Non, elles n'iront pas. — N'avez-vous paj nettoye mes bas de soie, mes pantalons, mon habit bleu, et mon gilet blanc ? Non, pas encore, je ne peux pas faire tout a la fois. On ne peut pas faire tout a la fois, c'est vrai ; mais je croyais que vous aviez eu assez de temps pour faire chaque chose a son tour. I hear a noise in the cellar; who is in it ? The old dumb woman, I suppose. — What does she want from (dans) the cellar? She wants some wood or coal. — I have your steel fork; have you mine? I have not yours, but hers, and Henry's is on the table, in the other room. — Which table ? The mahogany table. — Where is your mo- ther 1 She is at church. — Is your sister gone to school ? She is. — Does your mother often go to church ? She goes every morning and every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to church? She goes as soon as she gets up. — At what o'clock does she get up ? She gets up at sunrise. — Dost thou go to school, to- day? I do. — What dost thou learn at school? I learn to read, write, and speak there. — Where is your good mother? She is gone to shop (50 3 ) with my little sister. — Do your sisters go this evening to the opera? No, Madam- they go to the dancing and singing school. — Do they not go to the French school? They go in the FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 291 morning, but not {metis non) in the evening. — Is your father gone a hunting? He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting? I like to go a fishing better than a hunting. — Is your father still in the country 1 Yes, Madam ; he is still there. — What does he do there ? He goes a hunting and a fish- ing. — Did you hunt in the country? I hunted the whole day. — How long did you stay with my mother? I stayed with her the whole evening. — Is it long since you were at the castle ? I was there last week. — Did you find many people there ? I found only three per- sons there, the French teacher, his wife, and their daughter, who dances so well. Your aunt. Your niece. Your cousins. Any person. The earache. The heartache. His sister has a violent headache. Vocabulaire. 2cle Sec. Madame votre tante. Mademoiselle votre niece. Mesdemoiselles vos cousines. Toute personne. (55 3 , N. 1.) t Le mal d'oreille. t Le mal de cceur. t Sa sceur a un violent mal de tete. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Possessifs Absolus, Feminin. Singular. Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) Ours, yours, theirs. Plural. Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) Ours, (0. 9, 4. 1 ; yours, theirs. Were you doing ? (.imperfect.) I was. What were you saying ? I was not saying anything. Have you my pen or hers ? I was saying that I had hers. What do you wish to send to your aunt? I wish to send her a tart. Will you send her some fruit also ? I will send her some. Have you sent the books to my sis- ters ? I have sent them to them. The ache, pain, Th3 tar;. The peach, The s'.rawberry, The cherry, The newspaper, the gasette, la douleur. la tourte. la peche. la fraise. la cerise. la gazette. Singulier. La mienne, la tienne, la sienne. Lanotre, la votre, la leur. Pluriel. Lesmiennes, lestiennes, lessiennes. Les notres, les votres, les leurs. Faisiez-vous ? (imparfait) Jefaisais. Que disiez-vous ? Je ne disais rien. ■ Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne ? Je disais que j'avais la sienne. Que voulez-vous envoyer a votre tante ? Je veux lui envoyer une tourte. Voulez-vous lui envoyer aussi des fruits ? Je veux lui en envoyer. Avez-vous envoye les livres a mea sceurs ? Je les leur ai envoyes. The aunt, la tante. The female cousin, la cousine. The niece, la niece. The maid-servant, la servante. The female relation, la pnrente. The female neighbor, la voisine- The female cook, la cuisiniere. 292 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) The merchandise, (goods,) la marchandise. What was you doing ? I was making a cherry tart for my niece. Were you telling the maid-servant to fasten the windows ? I was. The brother-in-law, le beau-frere. The sister-in-law. la belle-sceur. Que faisiez-vous ? Je faisais une tourte aux cerises pour ma niece. Disiez-vous a la servante de fermer les fenetres ? Je le lui disais. Cinqttante-sixieme Theme. 2de Sec. Mile., votre niece est-elle a la maison? Je ne sais pas. Je vais envoyer la servante pour voir si elle est dans sa chambre. N'im- porte; je n'ai pas le temps de m'arreter a present. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de lui presenter ces peches, en mon nom? Oh! elles sont superbes ! Je vous remercie, en son nom. Mais a pre- sent que j 7 y pense, comment se porte Madame votre belle-SGBur? J ; etais chez elle hier soir. Elle se porte bien, merci. Presentez-lui mes compliments quand vous la reverrez. Je n ; y manquerai, pas. J 7 ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Adieu, M. — La parente du general a-t-elle mal d'oreille ? Mai d'oreille ! Non, elle n 7 a pas mal d ; oreille. Pourquoi le croyiez-vous ? — La cuisiniere de notre voisine rPa-t-elle pas envoye une tourte aux cerises a notre petite fille, cette semaine ? Si fait, elle lui en a envoye une ; non pas cette semaine, mais la semaine passee. — Que faisiez-vous Pannee passee? J'etais marchand. — N ; etes-vous pas Passocie de votre beau-frere? Je rPai point de beau-frere, de sorte que je ne puis pas etre son associe. — On irPa dit que votre belle-soeur avait une excellente cuisiniere, est-ce vrai? On en trouve a peine une bonne, mais la sienne Pest. En etes-vous sure % Oui, du moins ma belle-sceur le dit. Are these girls as good (sage) as their brothers ? They are better than they. — Can your sisters speak German ? They cannot, but they are learning it. — Have you brought anything to your mother? I brought her some good fruit and a fine tart. — What has your niece brought you ? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good peaches. — Do you like peaches? I like them much. — How many peaches has your neighbor (fem.) given you? She has given me more than twenty. — Have you eaten many cherries, this year? I have. — Did you give any to your little niece ? I gave her so many that she cannot eat them all. — Why have you not given any to your good neighbor? (fem.) I wished to give her some, but she would not take any, because she does not like cherries. Were there any pears (la poire) last year? There were not many. — Has your cousin (fem.) any strawberries ? She has so many that she cannot eat them all. — Do you expect to see your niece, to-day? I hope to see her, for she has promised me to dine with us. — 1 admire (admirer) that family, (la fnmiHe,) for the father is the king, FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 293 and the mother is the queen of it. The children and the servants are the subjects (le sujet) of the state. (Vet at.) The tutors of the children are the ministers, who share ( partager) with the king and queen the care (le soin) of the government, (le gouvernement.) The good education (V education, fem.) which is given to children (Obs. 101 — 2) is the crown, (la couronne) of monarchs, (le monarque.) Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. Obs. 136. The three substantives, auteur, author ; peintre, painter ; poete, poet, are of the masculine gender only, and are used for both sexes. Elle est poete. Est-elle peintre ? Elle est auteur. Louer, 1. Avez-vous deja loue une chambre? ? Convenir* de quelque chose. Convenez-vous de cela? J'en conviens. Convenez-vous de votre faute ? J'en conviens. Je conviens que c'est une faute. Avouer, 1. Confesser, 1. Tant. Elle a tant de chandelles qu'elle ne peut pas les brulet toutes. t S'enrhumer, 1. t Rendre malade. She is a poetess. Is she a painter ? She is an author. To hire, to let. Have you already hired a room ? To admit or grant a thing. To confess a thing. Do you grant that ? I do grant it. Do you confess your fault ? I confess it. I confess it to be a fault. To confess, to avow, to own, to ac- knowledge. To confess. So much, so many. She has so many candles that she cannot burn them all. To catch a cold. To make sick. Obs. 137. To make, before an adjective, must be translated by: rendre. If you eat so much it will make youl Si vous mangez tant, cela vous ren- sick. dra malade. Obs. 138. When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding circum- stance, it is translated by cela; when to a following circumstance, by il. Does it suit you to lend your gun ? It does not suit me to lend it. It does not suit me. Where did you catch a cold ? caught a cold in going from the opera. To have a cold. 1 he cold, the cough. I have a cold in my head. You have a cold on your breast. The brain, the chest. 25* Vous convient-il de preter votre fusil? II ne me convient pas de le preter. Cela ne me convient pas. t Ou vous etes-vous enrhume ? t Je me suis enrhume en sortant de l'opera. t Etre enrhume. Le rhume, la toux. t J'ai un rhume de cerveau. t Vous avez un rhume de poitrine. Le cerveau, la poitrine. 294 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) Has she not a bad cough ? I N'a-t-elle pas une mauvaise toux ? Yes, she has (one). I Si fait, elle en a une mauvaise. Cinqtjante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. Avez-vous bien dormi la nuit passee ? Non, je n'ai pas bien dormi du tout. On a fait tant de bruit que eel a m ; a empeche de dormir. Ou avez-vous passe la soiree hier ? Je Pai passee chez mon beau- frere. Y avez-vous vu votre belle-sceur ? Je Py ai vue. Comment se porte-t-elle ? Elle se porte mieux qu'a Pordinaire. Avez-vous joue ? Nous n'avons pas joue, pas menus aux echecs: mais nous avons lu de bons livres; car ma belle-sceuf aime mieux lire que de jouer. — Avez-vous lu la gazette de ee matin ? Je Pai lue. Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau dedans ? Ilya toujours dunouveau; mais rien de bien interessant. Que dit-on du roi et de la reine ? Celui-la est occupe du soin du gouvernement, et celle-ci du soin de safamille. N'etait-elle pas a la campagne quand vous y etiez? Non, elle n ; y etait pas alors; mais elle y etait la semaine derniere. — Sa fille est interessante, n'est-ce pas ? C 7 est ce que je disais. Le commis di- sait-il ou faisait-il quelque chose % II disait quelque chose, mais, il ne faisait rien. Qui faisait quelque chose ? Charlotte faisait une couronne de cerises. Why do your sisters not go to the play ? They cannot go thither because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Where did they catch a cold? They caught a cold in going from the opera last night. — Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches ? It does not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and if she eats so much it will make her ill. — Have you already hired a room'? I have already hired one. — Where have you hired it? I have hired it in William-street, (dans la rue or rue Guillaume,) num- ber one hundred and fifty-two. — At whose house (chez qui) have you hired it? At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. — For whom has your father hired a room ? He has hired one for his son, who has just arrived from France. — Why have you not kept your promise ? (la promesse.) Which promise % I do not remember what I promised you. — Had you not promised us to take us to the concert last Thursday? I confess that I was wrong in promising you; the concert, however, has not taken place. Does your brother confess his fault ? He confesses it. — What d. es your uncle say to (de) that note? He says that it is written very well, but he admits that he has been wrong in sending it to the cap- tain. — Do you confess your fault now? I confess it to be a fault. — Where have you found my coat? I have found it in the blue room up stairs. The front room ort3h« lacl mm? The back room. (Obs. FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 295 61.) — Will you hang my hat on the tree ? I will hang it thereon. — How are you to-day ] I am not very well. — What is the matter with you? I have a violent headache and a cold. — Where did you catch a cold ? I caught it last night, in going from the play. — How old is your niece? She is about 10 years old. FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 57th.^inquante-septiemeLegon,b7me. Questionner, 1 (21*), la question. La cravate, la voiuure, la maison. La lettre, la famille, la promesse. La jambe, lajambe droite, la gauche. Cette gorge. Ce mal de gorge. Nous avons tous mal a la gorge. La viande. De la viande salee. De la viande fraiehe. Du bceuf frais. De l'eau fraiehe. De bons aliments. Les entremets. Du laitage. To question, the question. The cravat, carriage, house. The letter, family, promise. The leg, the right leg, the left. This throat. This sore throat. We have all a sore throat. The meat. Fresh meat. Fresh beet. The food. The dish. Salt meats. Salt meat. Cool water. Some good victuals The dainty dishes. Milk-food. To march, to walk, to step. Obs. 1381. Marcher must not be mistaken for se promener. (44 1 .) former means to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. L' aliment. Le mets. Des mets sales. Marcher, 1. The I have walked a good deal to-day. I have been walking in the garden with my mother. To walk or travel a mile. To walk or travel a league. To walk a step. To take a step, (meaning to take measures.) To go on a journey. To make a speech. A piece of business. An affair. To transact business. To meddle with something. What are you meddling with ? I am meddling with my own business. I do not attend to it any longer. That traveler always meddles with otfier people's business. [ do not meddle with other people's business. Others, other people. J'ai marche beaucoup aujourd'hui. Je me suis promene dans le jardin avec ma mere, t Faire un mille. t Faire une lieue. t Faire un pas. t Faire une demarche. t Faire un voyage, t Faire un discours. t Une affaire. Faire des affaires. t Se meler de quelque chose. De quoi vous melez-vous? Je me mele de mes propres affaires. Je ne m'en mele plus. Ce voyageur se mele toujours des affaires des autres. Je ne me mele pas des affaires d'au- trui. Autrui, (indefinite pronoun, without gender or plural.) 296 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) Did you wish, want ? I did, (imperf.) | Vouliez-vous ? (147) Je voulais, (imp.) TT ; ,. , r . . . C t II se mele de peindre. He employs himself in painting. | + n s , occupe de peinture . The art of painting. | La peinture. Chemistry. The chemist. | La chimie. Le chimiste. CiNQUANTE-SE:r-..iir *~? « m i, s'est yrai ; j'ai une question a vous faire. I e qui est la lettre one vous avez recue^ La lettre que j ; ai recue ! Ah ! c 7 est un pecret. Que vous ne voulez pas me confier, n ; est-ce pas'? OuL c ; est un secret que j'aime mieux garder. Eh, bien ! gardez-le. — La voiture est devant la porte de la maison, etes-vous pret a partir ? Pret ; mais non, je ne savais pas que la voiture allait venir sitot. — Nous croyions que vous le saviez. Qu ? avez-vous encore a faire ? J'ai a mettre ma cravate. C'est PafTaire d ; une minute. L ; afTaire d'une minute ! pas avec moi. Paime a avoir une cravate bien mise ? bien arrangee. Alors ne parlez plus et faites-le vite. Eh, bien ! Laissez-moi; allez-vous-en, (go away.) Je vais en bas, je descends, pour preparer votre chapeau, vos gants, et votre parapluie. Non, non, laissez tout cela et melez- vous de vos propres affaires. Si je me mele des votres, c'est que je vous aime. Will you dine with us to-day % With much pleasure. — What have you for dinner? {quels mets avez-vous?) We have good soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food? I like it better than (prefer er a) all other food. — Are you ready to dine ? I am. — Do you intend to set out soon % I intend setting out next week. — Do you travel alone? (seul?) No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you travel on foot or in a carriage ? (42 2 .) We travel in a carriage. — Did you meet any traveler in your last journey (dans votre dernier voyage) to Berlin ? We met many travelers. — How do you intend to spend your time (49 3 ) this summer? I intend to take a short (petit) journey. Did you walk much in your last journey ? I like much to walk, but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk ? He wished to walk at first, (tfabord,) but he wished to get into the coach (monter en voiture) after having taken a few steps, so that I did not walk much. — Does he no longer do any business? He no longer does any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your business? He does not generally (ordinairement) meddle with other people's business, but he meddles with mine because he loves me. — Has your master made you recite your lesson to-day ? He has made me recite it. — Did you know it? I knew it pretty well. — Have you also done some exercises? I have done some, but I have not quite finished my lesson. FITTY-SE VENTH LESSON. (2.) 297 Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. That art is easy. The art. It is .strange. It is a pity, To employ one* s self in. To concern some one. J.? art. Cet art-la est facile Etrange, etonnant. C'est etrange. C'est dommage. S'occuper, 1, de or d. Concerner, 1, or regarder, 1, quel* qu'un. Regarder, 1, quelqu'un. t Je n'aime pas a me meler de ce qui ne me regarde pas. Cela ne regarde personne. t Se soucier, 1, de. S'en soucier. O s. 139. Se soucier de, is not frequent Jy used affirmatively. Do you wish to go to Italy ? | Avez-vous envie d'aller en Italie ? I have no great wish to go. I do not > , T , care about it. I'd rather not. J t Je ne m en soueie pas. To look at some one. i do not like to meddle with things that do not concern me. That concerns nobody To rare about. To care about it. She used to like dancing, but she cares no more about it. We'd rather not sing. To attract. Loadstone attracts iron. Her singing attracts me. To charm. To enchant. I am charmed with it. The beauty. The goodness. Obs. 140. All nouns ending in te, and expressing properties or qualities, are feminine. Elle aimait (§ 147) la danse, mais elle ne s'en soueie plus. Nous ne nous soucionspasdecAarcter. Attirer, 1. L'aimant attire le fer. Son chant m'attire. Charmer, 1. Enchanter, 1. J'en suis charme, {fern, ee.) La beaute. La bonte. The harmony, the voice, the power. To repeat. The repetition, the rehearsal. The wisdom. Study. The lord. Our Lord. Amemorandum,abill. A nightingale. All beginnings are difficult. To create. The Creator, the creation. The fear of the Lord. The benefit. Heaven. The earth. Solitude. The meeting. Flour, meal. Some wheat. The mill. Marriage. Death. L'harmonie, Repeter, 1. La repetition. La sagesse. Le seigneur. Un memoire. la voix, te pouvoir. L'etude. Notre Seigneur. Unrossignol. Tous les commencements sont diffi- ciles. Creer, 1. Le Createur, la creation. La crainte du Seigneur. Le bienfait. Le ciel. La terre. La solitude. L'assemblee. La farine. Du froment. Le moulin. Le mariage. La mort. Cinquante-septl&me ThEme. 2de Sec. N ; admirez-vous pas la beaute de cette dame ? Si fait, mais j'ad- mire encore plus sa bonte. — Preferez-vous la bonte a la beaute' 1 298 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) Saris doute. Qui ne la prefere pas'? Beaucoup de personnes. — La farine de votre boulanger est-elle bonne? Elle est quelque fois bonne et quelque fois sure, (sour.) — Ou se tenaient lears asse.vahlee- ? Leurs assemblies se tenaient dans la solitude des bois. MadaKie de Beaumont va-t-elle au concert? Non, elle a cede sa place a sa niece. Autrefois elle aimait le chant, a present elle ne s 7 en soucie plus. — N 7 iront-elles pas au bal ? Non, elles n 7 iront pas, car elles ne se soucient plus de la danse. De quoi te soucies-tu? Je ne mt soucie pas de grand 7 chose, (I am indifferent to almost everything,}* Ou est le maitre de chant ? II est a la repetition. — Combien de repe titions y a-t-il par semaine? II y en a une tous les matins. L'art d<3 pem dre est-il facile ? Demandez a Mile. Caroline, qui s'occupe de la pei; ture. — Labonte est un bienfait du ciel, n 7 est-ce pas'* Oui. C 7 est un bienfait que le Createur a accorde a la terre. Avez-vcus appris le manage de votre cousin? Oui, il m 7 en a informe. C 7 est dommage, n 7 est-ce pas? Je ne dis rien: mais je n 7 en pense pas moins. La mort du capitaine est etrange, n 7 est-ce pas? Oui, elle est tres- etrange. What have you been doing (§ 145) at school, to-day? We have been listening to our professor. — What did he say new and interest- ing? He made a long {grand) speech on the goodness of God. After saying (40*) "Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God,' 7 he said, " God is the Creator of heaven and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis- dom. 77 — What are you doing all day in this garden ? I am walking in it. — What is there in it that attracts you ? {qu'est-ce qui vous y attire?) The singing of the birds attracts me, {m J y attire.) — Are there any nightingales in it ? There are some in it, and the har- mony of their singing enchants me. — Have those nightingales more power over (sur) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender (tendre) mother, who loves you so much ? I confess the harmony of the singing of these little birds has more power over me than the most tender words {que les paroles les plus tendres) of my dearest friends. How does your niece amuse herself (or pass her time) in her solitude? She reads a good deal, she plays on the piano, she is fond of painting, and she writes letters to her absent mother. — How does your uncle amuse himself in his solitude? He used to find (§ 147) much pleasure in society, in the world; but now he does not care about it ; he is only fond of fishing and chemistry. Why do you not call on Frederick? What is that to you? (qu'est-ce que cela vous fait) I beg, (je vous prie?) I do not generally meddle with things that do not concern me ; but T love you so much that I con- FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 299 cern myself much about (que je mHnteresse beaucoup a) what you are doing. — Does any one trouble his head about you? No one troubles his head about me, for I am not worth the trouble, (je rien vaux pas la peine.) FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 58th.— Cinquante-huitieme Legem, 58me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. SECOND FUTURE.— Futur Passe ou Compose. The Futur passe, like the second future, is formed from the future of the auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Ex. I shall have loved. Thou wilt have loved. He, she, or one will have loved. We shall have loved. You will have loved. They will have loved. I shall have come. Thou wilt have come. He will have come. She will have come. We shall have come. You will have come. They will have come. They will have come, fern. I shall have been praised. Thou wilt have been praised. He will have been praised. She will have been praised. We shall have been praised. You will have been praised. They will have been praised. They (/em.) will have been praised. I shall have risen. Thou shalt have gone to bed. Shall he have undressed himself? She will not have dressed herself. Will any one have praised one's self? We shall have made a mistake. Shall you have taken a walk ? Shall they not have sat down ? Shall they not have sat down ? X On s.> seravenu. J'aurai aime. Tu auras aime. II, elle, ou on au r a aime'. Nous aurons aime*. Vous aurez aime. lis {fern, elles) auront aime. Je serai venu, Fern, venue. Tuserasvenu, " venue. II sera venu. Elle sera venue. Nous serons venus, Fern, venues. Vous serez venus, lis seront venus. Elles seront venues. J'aurai etc loue, Fern, louee. Tu auras ete loue, " louee. II aura ete loue. Elle aura ete louee. Nous aurons ete loues, fern, louees. Vous aurez ete loues, " louees. lis auront ete loues. Elles auront ete louees. Je me serai leve, fern, leve'e. Tu te seras couche, " couchee. Se sera-t-il deshabille ? Elle ne se sera pas habillee. Se sera-t-on loue ? Nous nous serons trompes. Vous serez- vous promene ? Csing.) 1 Ne se seront -ils pas assis ? Ne se seront-elles pas assises ? 1 It is hardly necessary to remark, that if one person only is spoken to, 1. e. when the second person plural, vous, is employed instead of the second person singular tu, no a is put to the past participle. 300 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) To have left. When I have paid for the horse I shall have only ten crowns left. How much money have you left ? I have one franc left. I have only one franc left. How much has your brother left ? He has one crown left. How much has your sister left ? She has only three sous left. How much have your brothers left ? They have one louis left. t Hester, 1. Quand j'aurai paye le cheval il ne me restera que dix ecus. Combien d' argent vous reste-t-il f II me reste un franc. II ne me reste qu'un franc. Combien reste-t-il a votre frere ? II lui reste un ecu. Combien reste-t-il a votre sceur ? II ne lui reste que trois sous. Combien reste-t-il a vos freres ? II leur reste un louis. Obs. 141. In English the present (Obs. 106, 46 3 ) or the perfect is used after the conjunctions, when, as soon as, or after, when futurity is to be expressed ; but in French the future must in such instances always be employed. Cinqtjante-huitieme Theme. Ire Sec. Lorsque vous serez venue nous voir, nous irons vous voir, car vous savez que vous nous devez une visite. Comptez-vous les visites de cette maniere ? Non, c'est seulement pour vous rappeler qu'il y a long-temps que nous n 7 avons eu le plaisir de vous voir chez nous. — Aussitot qu'ils auront etc apportes, envoyez-les-moi, entendez-vous ? Je n ; y manquerai pas. — Quand irez-vous voir les De Courci? (§ 140 — 5.) Nous passerons chez eux aussitot que nous serons informes de leur retour. — Charles ira-t-il se promener a cheval apres qu ; il aura dine ? Non, il ira faire une visite a son oncle dont la femme est morte, (is dead.) Sa femrae est morte, et de quoi? Elle est morte du cholera. C'est dommage. C ; etait une tres-bonne dame. — Le marchand a-t-il envoye le baril de farine ? Non, il ne Pa pas encore envoye. Quand il Paura envoye. faites du pain. Pen ferai aussitot que la farine sera venue. — Saviez-vous que Thomas est marie ? (married?) Non,je ne le savais pas; mais je savais que Marthe est mariee, et bien mariee. Avec qui est-elle mariee? Elle est mariee avec M. Dubois. Le marchand ? Non, Pavocat. J'en suis charmee. Will your parents go into the country to-morrow ? They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall we take a walk, to-day? We will not take a walk, for it is soon going to rain. — Will it rain before 12 o'clock ? I believe it will. — Do you see the castle of my relation behind (derriere) yonder mountain ? (cette montagne-ld?) I see it. — Shall we go in? We will go in, if you like. — Will you go 'nto that room ? I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, Madam, (26 2 .) — Will you not come in ? Will you not sit d un? I will sit down upon that large arm-chair. — Will you teli FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 301 me what has become of your brother ? I will tell you. — Where is your sister 1 Do you not see her ? She sits upon the bench. — Is your father seated upon the bench? No ; he sits upon the sofa of mahogany. Hast thou spent all th; money ? T have not spent all. — How much fiast thou left? I have not much left • I have but five francs left. — How much money have thy sisters left? They have but three crowns left. — Have you money enough left to pay your tailor? I have enough left to pay him • but if I pay him I shall have but little left. — How much money will your brothers have left ? They will have a hundred crowns left. — When will you go to Italy? I shall go as soon as (aussitot que) I have learned Italian. — When will your bi others go to France? They will go as soon as they know French. — When will they learn it? They will learn it when they have found a good master. — How much money shall we have left when we have paid for our horses? When we have paid for them, we shall have only a hundred crowns left. Vocabtjlaire. 2de Sec. Quand ils auront paye le tailleur, il When they have paid the tailor, they | will have a hundred francs left. When I am at my aunt's, will you ! come to see me ? After you have done writing, will you take a turn with me ? You will play when you have finished your exercise. What will you do when you have dined ? When I have spoken to your brother, I shall know what I have to do. Idioms It does. Does it rain ? It rains. Does it snow ? It does not. It snows. Is it muddy ? It is muddy. Is it muddy out of doors ? It is* very muddy. Is it dusty ? It is very dusty. Is it smoky ? It is too smoky. Out of doors. Out of the window. 26 leur restera cent francs. Quand je serai chez ma tante, vien- drez-vous me voir ? (Obs. 106, 46 3 .) Apres que vous aurez Jini d'ecrire viendrez-vous faire un tour avec moi ? Vous jouerez lorsque vous aurez jini votre theme. Que ferez-vous quand vous aurez dine? Quand j'aurai parle a votre frere, je saurai ce que j'ai a faire. with Faire. t Fait-il de la pluie ? II en fait. t II fait de la pluie. t Fait-il de la neige ? II n'en fait pas. t II fait de la neige. t Fait-il de la boue ? t II fait de la boue. t Fait-il sale dehors ? t II fait tres-sale. t Fait-il de la poussiere ? t II fait beaucoup de poussiere. t Fait-il de la fumee ? t II fait trop de fumee. Dehors. Par la fenetr*. 302 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) To enter, to go in, to come in. Will you go into my room ? I will go in. Will you go in ? I shall go in. To sit down. Td sit, to be seated. H3 is seated upon the large chair. She is seated upon the bench. To fill . . . with, fill up . . . with. Fill this bottle with wine. What do you fill up with water ? What does he fill his purse with ? He fills his purse with money. The pocket. My vest pocket. Entrer, 1, dans. Voulez-vous entrer dans ma cham. bre ? Je veux y entrer. Y entrerez-vous ? J'y entrerai. S'asseoir,* 3. (51 2 .) Etre assis ; fern, assise. II est assis sur la grande chaise. Elle est assise sur le banc. Remplir, 2 . . . de, remplissez . . . d e. Remplissez cette bouteille de vin. Que remplissez-vous d'eau? De quoi remplit-il sa bourse ? II remplit sa bourse d'mrgent. 1 La poche. La poche de mon gilet. Cinqtjante-htjitieme Theme. 2de Sec. Ou est Mile. Emilie ? Elle est assise sur le banc sous le gros arbre dans le jardin. II fait tres-humide, n 7 a-t-elle pas peur de s'en- rhumer ? Elle craint plus la poussiere que Vhumidite, (dampness.) Que fera-t-il aussitot qu'il aura fini son theme ? jouera-t-il du violon ? Non, ii n 7 en jouera pas ; car Fhumidite a casse deux cordes (strings) de son violon. Quelles cordes sont-ce? Ce sont les deux plus petites. N ; a-t-il pas d'autres cordes? Non; mais quand il aura fini ? il ira en acheter. Jouerez-vous du piano quand il jouera du violon ? Je ne me soucie pas de jouer aujourd ? hui ; mais nous jouons tres-souvent ensemble. II fait de la pluie, appelez Mile. Emilie, ou elle sera mouillee. Vous vous trompez • ce n'est pas de la pluie, mais de la neige. Je crois que vous avez raison, et j'en suis bien fache, car il fera tres-sale dehors, il fera tres-mauvais marcher. Je commence a avoir froid • entrons dans mon bureau \ il y fait plus chaud. Do you gain (gagner, 53 2 ) anything by (d) that business? I do not gain much by it ; (3/,) but my brother gains a good deal by it. He fills his purse with money. — How much money have you gained 1 I have gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much by it He has filled his pocket with money. — Why does that gardener not work ? He is a good-for-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat all the day long. He fills himself up with fresh and salt meat, so that he will make himself (se rendre) ill if he continues to eat so much. — With what (de quoi) have you filled that bottle? I -have filled it with wine. — Will this man take care of my horse? He will 1 The ambiguity conveyed by: 11 remplit sa bourse a" argent, might be avoided by saying : Il remplit d* argent sa bourse ; but the French have not yet adopted the latter construction. Hence I have used the former. FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 303 take care of it. — Who will take care of my servant % The landlord will take care of him. Does your servant take care of your horses % He does take ( are of them, and my cousin's. — Is he taking care of your clothes % He takes care of them ; for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk French wine ? I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate French bread ? It is almost three years since I ate any. — Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? I have not hurt him, but he has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ! With the knife which you have lent him. — Is your father arrived at last? Every- body says that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet.~ >-Has the physician hurt your son ? He has hurt him. for he has cut his finger. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. Have you come quite alone ? No, I have brought all my men along with me. To bring. Etes-vous venu tout seul ? Non, j'ai amene tout mon monde. Amener, 1. Obs. 142. Amener must, in French, not be mistaken for apporter. The former is used when the object can walk, and the latter when it cannot. Ex. He has brought all his men along with him. Have you brought your brother along with you ? I have brought him along with me. Have you told the groom to bring me the horse ? The groom, the ostler. Are you bringing me my books ? I am bringing them to you. To take, to carry. II a amene tout son monde. Avez-vous amene votre frere ? Je l'ai amene. Avez-vous dit au palefrenier de m'a- mener le cheval ? Le palefrenier, le valet d'ecurie. M'apportez-vous mes livres ? Je vous les apporte. Metier, 1. 06s. 143. The same distinction must be observed with regard to mener and porter, as with amener and apporter. Will you take that dog to the stable ? I will take it thither. Are you carrying this gun to my father ? I carry it to him. The cane, stick. The stable. To come down, to go down. To go down into the well. To go or come down the hill. To go down the river. Voulez-vous mener ce chien a 1' curie ? Je veux l'y mener. Portez-vous ce fusil a mon pere ? Je le lui porte. La canne. L'ecurk Descendre, 4. Descendre dans le puits. Descendre la montagne. Descendre la riviere. 1 1 The verb descendre takes the auxiliary avoir in its compound tenses when, as in these examples, it is construed with the accusative ; otherwise, 304 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) To alight from one's horse, to dis- mount. To alight, to get out. To go up, to mount, to ascend. To go up the mountain. Where is your brother gone to ? He has ascended the hill. To mount the horse. To get into the coach. To get on board the ship. To desire, to beg, to pray, to request. Ask him to do it. Ask your brother to come down. Do, (I beg you would,) pray. The river, (if it empties in a sea.) The river, (empties in another river.) The river Schuylkill empties in the Delaware. The beard. The stream, torrent. Descendre de cheval. (52 s .) Descendre de voiture. Monter, 1. Monter la montagne. Ou votre frere est-il alle ? II a monte la colline. 1 Monter a cheval. t Monter en voiture. Monter sur un vaisseau. Trier, 1, {de av. l'infin.) Priez-le de le faire. Priez votre frere de descendre, je vous en prie. Le fleuve, (se jette dans une mer.) La riviere, (se jette dans un fleu\i.) La riviere Schuylkill se jette dans le fleuve Delaware. La barbe. Le torrent. Remonter la riviere. To go or come up the river Cinquante-huitieme Theme. 3me Sec. Le voyageur a-t-il descendu la montagne? II a descendu la mon- tagne, et il a remonte le fleuve. Votre neveu est-il descendu de cheval pour ramasser le gant de sa compagne? Non, un voyageur a eu la bonte de le ramasser et de le rendre a la demoiselle. — Jouez Hail Columbia pour nous. Je ne me soucie pas de jouer a present. Ah ! jouez-le, je vous en prie. (Oh ! do. play it.) Je le ferai pour vous obliger; mais je ne pourrai pas bien le jouer ; je vous assure, car je ne suis pas en train. (I do not feel like it; in the humor.) — Qui est ce M. a la barbe bleue? O'est le ministre de notre eglise. Le palefrenier a-t-il mene le nouveau cheval a la vieille ecurie ? Oui, il Py a mene. Voulez-vous amener votre sceur avec vous et apporter son cahier de chant? Je Pamenerai, mais je n'apporterai pas son cahierde chant. — J ; ai oublie ma canne dans Pecurie: allez-Py cher- cher pour moi. Attendez-moi un instant, je reviendrai de suite. Has the joiner's leg been cut off? (couper?) They have cut it off to prevent his dying. — Are you pleased (content) with your servant? I am much pleased with him, for he is fit for anything, (propre d it takes etre. Ex. Il a descendu la montagne, he has gone down the moun- tain ; elle est descendue d'une famille honorable, she is descended from an honorable family. 1 Monter also takes avoir when, as in these examples, it is construed with the acciisative, and etre when otherwise. Ex. Il est monte par degres aux plus hautes charges militaires, he has ascended by degrees to the highest military employments. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 305 tout.) — What does he know? He knows everything, (tout.) — Can he ride? (monter a cheval?) He can. — Has your brother returned at last from England ? He has returned thence, and has brought you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me ? He has. — What do you think (que dites-vous) of that horse? I think (je dis) that it is a fine and good one, (quHl est beau et 6on,) and beg you to lead it into the stable. — How did you spend your time yesterday'? I went to the concert, and afterwards (ensuite) to the play. When did that laborer (ouvrier) go down into the well % He went down into it this morning. — Has he come up again already? (remon- ter ?) He came up an hour ago. — Where is your brother? He is in his room. Tell him to come down, pray, do, (je vous en prie.) I will tell him so, but he is not dressed (52 2 ) yet. — Is your friend still (toujours) on the mountain? He has already come down. — Did you go down or up (remonter) the river? We went down. — Did my cousin speak to you before he started ? He spoke to me before he got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother ? I saw him before I went on board the ship. — Is it better to get into a coach than to go on board the ship ? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to go on board the ship, when one has no wish to travel. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON, 59th.— Cinquante-neuvieme Lecon. 59me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. OF THE IMPERFECT.— Be VImparfait, (§ 147.) For its formation and use see (§ 147). That paragraph must be carefully ■tudied. Quand j' etais a Berlin, yallais sou- vent voir mes amis. Quand vous etiez a Paris, vous alliez souvent aux Champs- Elysees. A la mort de Lucrece Rome etait gouvernee par des rois. Washington etait un grand homme. Ciceron 6tait un grand orateur. Nos ancetres allaient tous les jours a la chasse. Les Romains cultivaient les arts et les sciences, et recompensaient le merite. Vous promeniez-vous ? Je ne me promenais pas. When I was at Berlin I often went to see my friends. When you were in Paris you often went to the Champs- Elysees. At the death of Lucretia Rome was governed by kings. Washington was a great man. Cicero was a great orator, (used to be.) Our ancestors went a hunting every day, (used to go.) The Romans cultivated the arts and sciences, and rewarded merit. Were you walking ? I was not walking. 26* FIFTY-NINTH IESSON. (1.) Were you in Paris when the king was there ? I was there when he was there. Where were you when I was in Lon- don ? A.t what time did you breakfast when you were in Germany ? [ breakfasted when my father break- fasted. Did you work when he was working ? I studied when he was working. Some fish. Some game. When I lived (used to live) at my father's, I rose (used to rise) earlier than I do now. (§ 145—1.) When we lived in that country, we went a fishing often. When I was ill, I kept in bed all day. Last summer, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit. Etiez-vous a Paris lsrsque le roi y etait ? J'y etais lorsqu'il y etait. Ou etiez-vous lorsque j' etais a Lon- dres? Quand dejeuniez-vous lorsque vous etiez en Allemagne ? Je dejeunais lorsque mon pere de- jeunait. Travailliez-vous lorsqu'il travaillait ? J'etudiais lorsqu'il travaillait. Du poisson. Du gibier. Quand je demeurais chez mon pere, je me levais de meilleure heure que je ne le fais a present. (53 1 , Obs. 120.) Quand nous demeurions dans ce pays- la, nous allions souvent a la peche. Quand j'etais malade, je gardais ie lit toute la journee. L'ete passe, pendant que j'etais a la campagne, il y avait beaucoup de fruit. Cinquante-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. Qui cherchiez-vous ? Je cherchais mon petit frere, que je ne peux trouver ni en haut ni en bas. Si vous le cherchez encore, il faut aller pres du fleuve. Que fait-il la? II peche, assis sur le banc que vous y avez fait mettre, (had or got placed.) II n'etait pas tres-bien hier ; Phumidite ne le rendra-t-elle pas malade ? Pespere que non. — II y a a la porte un garcon qui vous demande. Faites-le entrer. Que me voulez-vous % Je vous apporte vos habits. Pourquoi ne les avez- vous pas apportes avant? lis n'etaient pas faits, de sorte que je ne pouvais pas les apporter; mais les voici. C 7 estbon. Mettez- les sur cette chaise. Quand je les aurai essayes, je passerai chez le tailleur. Tres-bien, M. — Vous avez appris votre lecon, pourquoi votre sceur ne savait-elle pas la sienne? Elle a fait une longue (long, fern.) promenade avec notre chere mere, de sorte qu'elle n ? a pas pu l'etudier. Ou ont-elles ete ? Elles ont d'abord ete pres de la riviere qui est derriere notre jardin, ensuite elles ont passe devant la grande maison neuve, dont elles ont fait le tour, et enfin, elles sont montees sur la montagne. Et tout cela a pied? Oui; mais je vous assure qu'elles etaient bien fatiguees. Je le crois. Were you loved when you were at Dresden ? (Dresde ?) — I was not hated. — Was your brother esteemed when he was in London? FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 307 He was loved and esteemed.— When were you in Spain ? I was there when you were there.— Who was loved and who was hated ? Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those who were naughty, (meckcmt,) idle, and disobedient, were punished, hated, and despised.— Were you in Berlin when the king was there ? I was there when he was there.— Was your uncle in London when I was there ? He was there when you were there.— Where were you when I was at Dresden? I was in Paris.— Where was your father when you were in Vienna ? He was in England. At what time did you breakfast when you were in France ? I breakfasted when my uncle breakfasted.— Did you work when he was working ? I studied when he was working.— Did your brother work when you were working ? He played when I was working.— On what (Be quoi) lived our ancestors? They lived on nothing but fish and game, for they went a hunting and a fishing every day.— Were you ascending the river (fleuve) while it rained? Yes. we were ascending it while it was raining very fast; and as we had no umbrellas, we got very wet.— Did you often go to see your friends when you were at Berlin ? I went to see them often : 5 or 6 times a week.— Were you writing to John? I was writing to him. his cousin Julius, and his friend Alfred. (64— 2.)— Did you sometimes go to the Champs-Elysees when you were at Paris ? I often went. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. A thing. The same thing. The same violin. The same flute. It is all one ; it is the same ; it makes no difference ; no matter, &c. Such. Such a man. Such men. Such a woman. Such things. Such. Such men merit esteem. Out. Out of the city, (the town.) Without or out of doors. Who is out? The church stands outside the town. I shall wait for you before the town gate. The town or city gate. The barrier, the turnpike-gate. Seldom, ;rarely.) Some brandy. The life. To get one's livelihood by. I get my livelihood by working. He gets his living by writing. Tine chose. La meme chose. Le meme violon. La meme flute. t Cest egal; c'est la meme chose ; ga nefait rien ; cela ne fait rien. Mas. lintel; fern. Tine telle. Un tel homme. De tels homines. Une telle femme. De telles choses. Pareil; fern, pareille. De pareils hommes meritent de l'estime. Hors de. Hors de la ville. Dehors. Qui est dehors ? L'eglise est hors de la ville. Je vous attendrai devant la porte de la ville. La porte de la ville. La barriere. Rarement. De l'eau de vie. La vie. Gagner sa vie a. Je gagne ma vie a travailler. II gagne sa vie a e'crire. 308 FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) I gain my money by working. By what does that man get his live- lihood ? To proceed, to go on, to continue. He continues his speech. A good appetite. The narrative, the tale. The edge, the border, the shore. The edge of the brook. The sea-shore. On the sea-shore. The shore, the water-side, the coast, the bank. People or folks. They are good folks. Je gagne mon argent a travailler. A quoi cet homme gagne-t-il sa vie f Continuer, 1, (de or a, av. l'inf.) II continue son discours. Un bon appetit. Le conte, (la narration.) Le bord. Le bord du ruisseau. Le bord de la mer. Au bord de la mer. Le rivage, la rive. Gens. t Ce sont de bonnes gens. Obs. 144. The adjectives that precede gens must be feminine, those tlaat follow it, masculine. Those people are despised. I Ces gens-la sont meprises. Those wicked people are despised. I Ces mechantes gens sont meprises. Cinqtjante-neuvieme ThJIme. 2de Sec. Qui est dehors? Personne n 7 est dehors. — Thomas, fermez les portes et les volets. — Le marchand de vin a-t-il envoye Peau-de-vie? Non, il n'a pas encore pu Penvoyer, parce que son garcon est ma- lade. A-t-il bu trop d'eau-de-vie ? C'est cela meme, (the very thing.) — Ou serez-vous oblige d'attendre votre neveu et votre niece? Nous les attendrons : elle, a la barriere, lui, a Patelier. — Les attendiez-vous au musee hier? Non, je les attendais au pont couvert. — Faisait-il de Forage alors % Oui ; il en faisait. Le tonnerre grondait, il pleuvait et il grelait. Sont-ils venusapresPorage? lis ont cru que je n'etais pas sorti. — Quel conte ce voyageur vous a-t-il fait ? (did he relate ?) — II m'a fait un conte auquel je n*ai riencompris; il m'aditdeschoses etranges et extraordinaires. — C ; est dommage que les voyageurs exagerent (exaggerate) comme ils le font. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de fruit cette annee-ci? II y en aura beaucoup, des pommes, surtout, (especially.) — Que faisiez-vous lorsque vous demeuriez dans ce pays- la? Quand nous y demeurions, nous allions souvent chasser sur le bord de la mer. — Quels gens aviez-vous la? Nous y avions de bonnes gens, mais ils ne sont pas heureux. Do you rise early ? Not so early as you, but when I lived at my uncle's I rose earlier than I do now. — Did you sometimes keep in bed when you lived at your uncle's? When I was ill I kept in bed aii day. — Is there much fruit this year? I do not know; but last mi miner, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit. Whal do you get your livelihood by ? I get my livelihood by work- ing. — Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? He gets it by SIXTIETH LESSON, (l.) 309 speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by working? They get it by doing nothing, (d ne rien faire,) for they are too idle to work. — What has your nephew gained that money by ? He has gained it by working. What did you get your livelihood by when you were in England? I got it by writing. — Did your cousin get his appetite by writing ? He got it by working. — Have you ever seen such a person? I have never seen such a one, (une pareille.) — Have you already seen our church ? I have not seen it yet. — Where does it stand ? It stands outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order to show it you. — What do the people live upon that live on the sea- shore ? They live on fish alone. — Why will you not go a hunting any more ? While I was hunting yesterday, I killed nothing but an ugly bird, so that I shall not go any more a hunting. — Why do you not eat ? Because I have not a good appetite. — Why did your bro- ther eat so much? Because he had a good appetite. — Do you make faults in your exercises? I do sometimes. You must not (il ne faut pas en) make any, for you have all (§91) you want to prevent you from making any. SIXTIETH LESSON, 60th.— Soixantieme Legon, 60me Vocabtjlaiee. Ire Sec. IMPERFECT CONTINUED.— Imparfait Continue. I forgot, thou forgottest, he or she forgot. We forgot, you forgot, they forgot. When we went to school we often forgot our books. When you went to church you often prayed to the Lord for your chil- dren. I paid, thou paidest, he or she paid. We paid, you paid, they paid. When we received some money we employed it in purchasing good books. When you bought of that merchant you did not always pay in cash. Has your sister succeeded in mend- ing your cravat ? She has succeeded in it. J'oubliais, tu oubliais, il ou elle ou- bliait. NousoubhVons, vous oubluez, ils ou elles oubliaient. (§ 147 — 5.) Quand nous allions a l'ecole nous oubliions souvent nos livres. Quand vous alliez a l'eglise vous prnez souvent le Seigneur pour vos enfants. Je payais, tu payais, il ou elle payait. Nous payions, vous payiez, ils ou elles payaient. (§ 147 — 6.) Quand nous recevions de 1' argent nous 1' employes a acheter de bons livres. Quand vous achetiez chez ce mar- chand vous ne payzez pas toujours comptant. Votre sceur est-elle parvenue a rac commoder votre cravate ? Elle y est parvenue. 310 SIXTIETH LESSON. (1.) Has the woman returned from the market ? She has not yet returned. Did the women agree to that? They did agree to it. Where is your sister gone to ? She is gone to the church. La femme est-elle revenue du mar« che? Elle n'en est pas encore revenue. Les femmes sont-elles convenues de cela? Elles en sont convenues. Oii votre sceur est-elle allee? Elle est allee a l'eglise. POTENTIAL, IMFERFECT.—Conditionnel, Simple ou Present. For its formation and use see (§ 148.) That paragraph must be well studied. I would go if I had time. If he knew what you have done he would scold you. To scold. Do not scold if you can prevent it. If there were any wood he would make a fire. Should the men come, it would be necessary to give them something to drink. Should we receive our letters, we would not read them until to-mor- row. Not until, (meaning not before.) Must I go ? You must go. You must not go. To guess. An acquaintance. An .... of mine. J'irais si j'avais le temps. S'il savait ce que vous avez fait il vous gronderait. Gronder, 1. Ne grondez pas s>\ vous pouvez l'empecher. S'il y avait du bois il ferait du feu. Si les hommes venaient, il faudrait leur donner quelque chose a boire. Si nous recevions nos lettres, nous ne les lirions pas avant demain. Pas avant, {de av. l'infini.) Faut-il que j'aille ? II faut que vous alliez. II ne faut pas que vous alliez. Deviner, 1. Une connaissance. Une de mes . . . s. Soixantieme Theme. Ire Sec. Attendez-vous quelqu'un? A present % Non. Pattendais mi ouvrier (workman) a six hemes, et comme il n'est pas venu, je ne Pattends plus. S'il venait, l'emploieriez-vous % ($ 144 — 3.) Non, si cet ouvrier venait a cette heure-ci, je ne Pemploierais pas s'il n'avait pas une excellente raison a me donner pour avoir manque de venir. Vous avez raison, il n ; y a rien de tel (Obs. 7) que d'etre ponctuei. — Saviez-vous que M. N. D — etait mort? Oui, je Pavais appris avant d'arriver. — Etait-ce une de vos connaissances ? Oui ; c'etait une de mes plus anciennes connaissances. Combien y avait-il que vous le con^aissiez ? II y avait environ .... Devinez. — Deviner ! Je ne peux jamais deviner. — Dites-le moi. Eh ! bien, il y avait quinze ans. Oh faut-il que faille 7 II faut que vous alliez chez le marchand de bijoux. — Chez le bijoutier? Oui, chez le bijoutier. — Et pourquoi faut-il que yy aille? Je voulais faire faire (34 2 ) quelque SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) 311 chose ; mais comme j'ai change d'intention, il faut que vous alliez le lui dire, tout de suite, pour Pempecher de commencer Pouvrage. Did you use to forget anything when you went to school 1 We often forgot our books. — Where did you forget them ? We forgot them at the school. — Did we forget anything? You forgot nothing. — Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ? She prayed for her children. — For whom did we pray? You prayed for your parents. — For whom did our parents pray? They prayed for their children. — When you received your money, what did you do with it? (qu'en faisiez-vous?) We employed it in purchasing some good books. Did you employ yours also in purchasing books ? No, we employed it in assisting the poor, (d secourir les pauvres.) — Did you not pay your tailor? W r e did pay him. — Did you always pay in cash, when you bought of that merchant? We always paid in cash, for we never buy on credit. Has your sister succeeded in mending your stockings ? She has succeeded in it. — Has your mother returned from church ? She has not yet returned. — She would return if it did not rain ; would she not? Yes, she would. — Where has your aunt gone? She has gone to church. — Where have our cousins (fern.) gone ? They have gone to the concert. — Have they not yet returned from it ? They have not yet returned, for the carriage will go for them only in a quarter of an hour. — Would you give me something pretty if I were (§ 148 — 3) good ? If you were very good, and if you worked well, without meddling in other people's business, I would give you a fine book. — Would you have money if your father were here ? I should have enough if he should arrive. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. POTENTIAL, PERFECT.— Conditionnel, Passe on Compose. For its formation and use, see (§ 149.) That paragraph must be well studied. If they had got rid of their old horse, they would have procured a better one. If he had washed his hands, he would have wiped them. If I knew that, I would behave dif- ferently. If I had known that, I would have behaved differently. If thou hadst taken notice of that, thou wouldst not have been mis- taken. S'ils s'etaient defaits de leur vieux cheval, ils s'en seraient procure" un meilleur. S'il s'etait lave les mains, il se les serait essuyees. Si je savais cela, je me comporterais dirTeremment. Si j'avais su cela, je me serais com- porte autrement. Si tu t'etais aper§u de cela, tu ne te serais pas trompe. 312 SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) Would you learn French if I learned it? I would learn it if you learned it. Would you have learned German if I had learned it ? I would have learned it if you had learned it. Would you go to France s if I went thither with you ? I would go thither, if you went thither with me. Would you have gone to Germany, if I had gone thither with you ? Would you go out if I remained at home ? I would remain at home if you went out. Would you have written a letter if I had written a note ? There is my book. Behold my book. Here is my friend, my niece, my book. There he or it is. There she or it is. There they are, we are, you are. Here I am, here you are, thou art. Here is some. There are 2 or 3. That is the reason why. Therefore I say so. A pair of gloves, of chickens. Apprendriez-vous le Fran§ais si je l'apprenais? Je l'apprendrais si vous l'appreniez. Auriez-vous appris l'Allemand si je l'avais appris? Je l'aurais appris si vous l'aviez ap- pris. Iriez-vous en France, si j'y allais avec vous ? J'irais, si vous y alliez avec moi. Seriez-vous alle en Allemagne, si j'y etais alle avec vous ? Sortiriez-vous si je restais a la mai- son ? Je resterais a la maison si vous sor- tiez. Auriez-vous ecrit une lettre si j'avais ecrit un billet ? Voila mon livre. Voici mon ami, ma niece, mon livre. Le voila. m La voila. Les voila, nous voila, vous voila. Me voici, vous voici, te voici. En voici. En voila 2 ou 3. Voila pourquoi. Voila pourquoi je le dis. Une paire de gants, de poulets. Soixantieme Th&me. 2de Sec. Ou sont mes gants de chamois ? Les voici, derriere votre cha- peau. S'ils n*etaient pas ici, iriez-vous les chercher? S'ils n J a- vaient pas ete ici, j'aurais ete les chercher. Je ne vous croyais pas si complaisant. Vous vous trompiez. — Mes cousins sont-ils en haut ? Faut-il que j'aille voir? Non ; les voila. De qui parliez-vous? Devinez. Je ne puis deviner. Nous parlions de MM. Ducomb, (§ 140 — 5,) et les voila. — Ai-je des souliers propres? Je ne sais pas. II faut que vous alliez voir. Oui, en voici. Donnez-m'en une paire En voici deux. Si je vous en avais demande deux paires, vous ne nven auriez montre qu'une. En voici deux, choisissez la paire que vous voudrez. — Ou est Thomas? Le voici. Ou? je ne le vois pas. II etait ici il y a un moment; mais il s'en est alle. — Faut-il que j'aille le chercher? N'importe. Parle-t-il espagnol? II pour- rait le parler. s'il voulait. Vous voulez dire qu 7 il le parlerait s'il pouvait. Auriez-vous ete a Baltimore si votre pere et votre mere y avaient ete ? Oui ; ils m'y auraient mene avec eux. Ne seriez- SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 313 vous pas venue plus tot, si vous aviez pu ? Si fait, je serais venue avant eux si j'avais pu le faire. Ou faut-il que vous alliez? Nulle part. Who is there ? It is I ; (c'est moi.) — Who are those men ? They are foreigners, who wish to speak to you. — Of what country are they? TVl ^y are Americans. — Where is my book] There it is. — And t^j pen ? Here it is. — Where is your sister? There she is. — Where are our cousins? (fern.) — There they are.— Where are you, John? (Jean.) Here I am. — Why do your children live in France? They wish to learn French* that is the reason why they live in France. — Why do you sit near the fire ? My hands and feet are cold; that is the reason why I sit near the fire. — Are your sister's hands cold? No, but her feet are cold. — What is the matter with your aunt? Her arm hurts her. — Is anything the matter with you? My head hurts me. — What is the matter with that woman? Her tongue hurts her very much. Why do you not eat? I shall not eat before I have (avant d'avoir) a good appetite. — Has your sister a good appetite ? She has a very good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats so much. — If you have read the books which I lent you, why do you not return them to me? I intend reading them once more, (encore une fois ;) that is the reason why I have not yet returned them to you • but I will return them to you as soon as I have read them a second time, (pour la seconde fois.) — Why have you not brought my shoes? They were not made ; therefore I did not bring them • but I bring them you now ; here they are. — Why has your daughter not learned her exercises? She has taken a walk with her companion, (fern. ;) that is the reason why she has not learned them ; but she promises to learn them to-morrow, if you do not scold her. — What ails her horse ? It has a sore leg * that is why she did not ride. Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. I guess, 1 reckon, (so much used here.) I guess you have it. An atmosphere. A dry atmosphere. The temperature. A high .... A low temperature. A mean .... A plate. A soup-plate. The son-in-law. The step-son. The husband. The daughter-in-law. The step-daughter. The progress. To profit. To improve. 27 Je presume, Je pense, T ose dire, que . . Je suis presque sur que vous l'avez. Une atmosphere. Une .... seche. La temperature. Une .... elevee. Une temperature basse . . . moyenne. Une assiette. Une assiette a soupe Le beau-fils, le gendre. Le beau-fils. Le mari. La belle-fille, la bru. La belle-fille. Le progres. t Faire des progres. 314 SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) To improve in learning. The progress of a malady. The father-in-law, the step-father. The mother-in-law, the step-mother. Must I be ? You must be. Must I not be here at 9 o'clock ? It is not necessary for you to be here. Where must you be to-morrow ? I must be in Boston. Why must you be there ? I must go and see Mr. Abbott. t Faire des progres dans les etudes, dans les sciences. Le progres or les progres d'une mala- die. 1 Le beau-pere. La belle-mere. Faut-il que je sois ? II faut que vous soyez. Ne faut-il pas que je sois ici a 9 heures ? II ne faut pas que vous y soyez. Ou faut-il que vous soyez demain ? II faut que je sois a Boston. Pourquoi faut-il que vous y soyez ? II faut que j'aiile voir M. Abbott. Soixanti^me THibiE. 3me Sec. Ou faut-il que vous soyez demain soir ? Pour arriver a Boston, apres-demain matin, il faut que je sois a New York demain soir. Votre gendre va-t-il avec vous ? Py vais seul ; sans compagnie que celle du petit Joseph, qui m'accompagne. Si votre fille rPetait pas malade, votre gendre, son mari, ne vous accompagnerait-il point? Non ) il ne le pourrait pas, parce que c'est la saison des affaires. — Ce petit garcon n'a-t-il pas froid aux pieds? Pourquoi le croyez- vous? Parce qu'il a de si mauvais souliers, [such bad.) II aurait froid s'il n 7 y etait pas accoutume. — Qui est parti pour le Canada? Le beau-pere de Pavocat et sa belle-mere, sa belle-sceur et son beau- frere sont tous partis. N 7 etait-il pas parti avant eux? Lui? II n 7 est pas encore parti. Je croyais qu 7 il Petait. N'auriez-vous point ecrit a votre chere petite cousine et a votre grand cousin, si vous aviez su que le capitaine passerait a Newark? J'aurais ecrit a Pune, mais non pas a Pautre. Would you be glad if I were to lend you an interesting book? To be sure I would be glad. (Dir. 6.) You know very well that I am fond of reading. But have you any interesting book ? What do you think of one of W >s works? I should like very well (beaucoup) to read his last work. Would you, indeed ! (translate merely : indeed !) Then what will you give me if I lend it to you? You are jesting- are you not? Why do you think so? Because I think you say so only to plague me, (me tracasser, 1.) To plague you ! You know that I do not like to plague you. You ! You do not like to plague me ? You plague me every day. I would like 1 All nouns ending in ie are feminine. to the English termination y. This ending frequently answer* SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 315 to plague you; but I cannot, you are so good. — Would the robber have been punished, if he had been taken 7 ? He would have been punished, if they had been able to prove (prouver) that he was culpable, (cowpable.) — Would your cousin progress so well, if she did not stud)' so much? She does not study so much as you think. She does not stud}- as much as I (do) • and, notwithstanding, she makes more progress, (or she improves more.) How is that ? (Com- ment cela se fait-il?) She learns more easily (aisernent) than I. Resoi:6 pour la 60me Lecon. Avez-vous trouve le bracelet (bracelet) que j'ai perdu ? Avez-vous perdu un bracelet? Oui, j'en ai perdu un d'or. comme celui-ci. Je suis fache de vous dire que je n 7 en ai pas trouve. Y a-t-il long- temps que vous Pavez perdu? Je les ai mis tous les deux, il y a a peu pres une heure, et a present je n ; ai que celui du bras gauche. Etes-vous sortie depuis que vous les avez mis? Non, j ; ai cepen- dant ete a la porte de devant, pour y accompagner une demoiselle de ma connaissance qui est venue me voir. Avez-vous } depuis, cherche votre bracelet-la? Oui, il n'y est pas. Si vous iretes pas sortie, votre bracelet n'est pas perdu, il n'est qu'egare (egarer, to mislay.) Egare ou perdu, c'est a peu pres la meme chose : il n'est plus sur mon bras. Vous le retrouverez, ayez patience. Tenez, je suis presque sur (I guess) que vous avez cru mettre (28 2 , Obs. 65) les deux bracelets, et que vous men avez mis qu'un. Vous plai- santez, (you jest.) n'est-ce pas? Non, je ne plaisante pas. Je suis presque sur que vous le trouverez en haut sur votre table ou sur votre toilette. Je vais voir. M. Saint-Cir, fait-il froid dehors? Froid ! Non, il fait un temps charmant; plus frais que hier, mais agreable. Agreable, pour ceux qui marchent ou qui se promenent, mais froid, pour ceux qui restent long-temps assis pour ecrire ou pour lire. Cela se peut. Quant a moi, je le trouve tres-agreable. Mais asseyez-vous done. Voici un fauteuil. Non, gardez le fauteuil, vous qui avez froid: moi, je vais m'asseoir ici, sur ce siege. Se porte-t-on bien chez vous? Nous nous portons tous bien, excepte ma petite fllle. Qua-t-elle ? Je ne sais ; mais elle est malade ; aujourd'hui, mal aux dents; demain mal de tete, une autre fois un rhume. . . .Mais voici Louis. Quant a celui-la. il n'est pas malade. je vous assure. Bon jour. Louis, comment va? Tres-bien, M., merci. Dormez-vous tien ? Oui, je dors bien. Mangez-vous, buvez-vous. jo:iez-vous bien? Oui. il fait tout cela a merveille. Etudie-t-il bien? Oui, e'est un bon ecoiier. Tenez, je crois qu'il est venu pour me mon- trer quelque chose qu'il a traduit. N'est-ce pas 5 . Louis; ! 316 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) C ; est me petite anecdote, papa. Voulez-vous lui permettre de la lire? Sans doute, je serai charme de Pentendre. — Cette traduction (translation) n ; a pas ete corrigee, de sorte qu'il peut y avoir des fautes. Que vous aurez la boute d'excuser. — Sans doute. Qui ne fait pas de fautes? Lis ta traduction. J ; ai peur, papa. Quoi ! Tu as peur. Tiens, (come.) Ne fais pas V enfant, (do not be childish; from : faire P enfant, to be childish.) Lis. — Traduction. Un officer Francais etant arrive a la cour (court) de Vienne, Pimperatrice Therese lui demanda, (asked, § 153 — 3,) s'il croyait que la princesse de N qu'il avait vue la veille, (the day before,) etait vraiment, comme on le disait, la plus belle femme du (in the) monde? Madame, repliqua Pofficier, je le croyais hier. — C ? est bien, Louis. Mais, dis-moi, comment as-tu epele le participe passe : vu? Je Pai epele, v, u, e, feminin. Pourquoi ? Parce que son regime direct, que, est avant. C'est la regie. Tu as raison. C'est bien. La reponse de Pofficier Francais etait ingenieuse, (ingenious.) On la regarde comme telle ; car chaque nation la raconte, et change le lieu. Oui, c'est vrai- les Anglais la placent a la cour d'Angle- terre, sous le regne de leurreine favorite, Elizabeth; les Francais a la cour de France ; les Espagnols a Madrid, &c. &c. Les bonnes anecdotes appartiennent a tout le monde. Louis, peux-tu nous raconter celle du vieux monsieur et du jeune homme a Peglise ? Je ne sais pas si je pourrai la dire, mais je pourrais la lire si je Pavais ici. Non, non, essaie de nous la dire. Je vais essayer; mais je crains de ne pas reussir. Commence, nous sommes prets a Pecoute'..^ — Un jeune homme etant dans une eglise, peu attentif au seivice, et ne sachant que faire, (restless,) demanda (§ 153 — 3) a un vieux monsieur qui etait dans le banc voisin, (next pew,) Connais- sez-vous, Monsieur, une regie sans exception % Oui, repondit-il, un homme bien eleve, (a gentleman,) se conduit toujours bien, et par- ticulierement, (especially,) a Peglise. SIXTY-FIRST LESSON, 61st.— Soixante et unieme Legon, 61me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. What has become of your aunt ? I do not know what has become of her. What has become of your sisters ? I cannot tell you what has become of them. Qu'est devenue votre tante ? Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle est devenue. Que sont devenues vos sceurs ? Je ne peux pas vous dire ce qu^lles sont devenues. SIXTY-TIRST LESSON. (1.) 317 To die (lose life), died, do not die. I die, thou diest, he or she dies. Shall or will you die ? I shall. The man died this morning, and his wife died also. The man is dead. The woman died this morning. To be alive. Wine sells well. Wine will sell well next year. That door shuts easily. That window does not open easily. That picture is seen far off. Far off, from afar. From a great dis- tance. Winter clothes are not worn in sum- mer. That is not said. That cannot be comprehended. To conceive, to comprehend. It is clear. According to circumstances. The circumstance. That is according to circumstances. It depends. Glad of Pleased with . . . (not plu, but Sorry of or for . . displeased at, with . . Must I have ? You must. Must you not have ? It is necessary. Mourir* 2, mort, ne mourez pas, Je meurs, tumeurs, ilouelle meurt, Mourrez-vous ? (46 3 .) Je mourrai. L'homme est mort ce matin, et sa femme est morte aussi. L'homme est mort. La femme est morte ce matin. Etre vivant-s, etre vivante-s. t Le vin se vend bien. t Le vin se vendra bien l'anne'e pro- chaine. t Cette porte se ferme facilement. t Cette fenetre ne s'ouvre pas facile- ment. t Ce tableau se voit de loin. De loin. De bien loin. t Les vetements d'hiver ne se por- tent pas en ete. t Cela ne se dit pas. t Cela ne se congoit pas. Concevoir, 3. C'est clair. t Selon les circonstances. La circonstance. > t C'est selon. Bien aise, {de, av. l'inf.) Content (de). (47 3 , Obs. 109.) Fache (de.) Me content (de.) t Faut-il que j'aie ? II faut que vous ayez. t Ne faut-il pas que vous ayez ? C'est necessaire. Ce n'est pas .... It is not . . . Soixante et unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Vous souciez-vous d'aller au musee? Oui, je voudrais bien y aller; mais il faut que j'aille a la maison. Et pourquoi done? II faut que j'y sois avant 9 heures, et que j'aie fait raon devoir avant 10 heures. Vous etes ponctuel, et vous faites bien. La femme qui etait si mal hier au soir, est-elle morte? Le medecin croyait qu'elle ne passerait pas la nuit; mais je presume qu'elle n est pas morte, car nous n'en avons pas entendu parler. Les medecins se trompent quelque fois aussi bien que les autres. Eh! pourquoi ne se trom- peraient-ils point? lis sont sujets a se tromper comme les autres person ne s. — Le coton se vend-il bien cette annee ? Oui. le prix est un peu plus haut a Liverpool. S ? est-il bien vendu Pannee passee I 27* 318 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) Oui, il s'est tres-bien vendu. — IJtes-vous contente de voire nouvelle paire de souliers? J'en suis assez contente; mais je Paurais ete davantage, si les souliers n'etaient pas tout-a-fait si grands. — Que pensez^vous de Salomon, qui est sorti ce matin avec son manleau d ; hiver? Cela ne se concoit pas. II faut quHl soit (he must be) malade. — Lui? Non ; ce n'est que pour avoir Pair singulier. What has become of your uncle ? I will tell you what has become of him. Here is the chair (la chaise) upon which he often sat ; (etre assis, 51 2 .) — Is he dead? He is dead. — When did he die? He died two years ago, (47 2 .) — I am very sorry for it. Why do you not sit down ? If you will stay with (aupres de) me I will sit down; but if you go, I shall go (along) with you. — What has become of your aunt? I do not know what has become of her. — Will you tell me what has become of your niece ? I will tell you what has become of her. — Is she dead? She is not dead, but alive. — What has become of her? I guess she is gone to Vienna. — What has become of your sisters? I cannot tell you what has become of them, for I have not seen them these two years. — Are your parents still alive ? They are not alive, but dead. How long is it since your cousin (fern.) died? I guess it is six months since she died. — Did wine sell well, last year? It did not sell very well, (pas trop bien;) but it will sell better (mieux) next year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be dear. — Why do you open the door ? Do you not see how it smokes here ? I see it, but you must (il faut) open the window instead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily ; that is the reason why I open the door. — When will you shut it? I will shut it as soon as there is (58 2 ) no more smoke. — Did you often go a fishing when you were in that country ? We often went a fishing and a hunting. — If you will go with us into the country, you will see my father's castle. — You are very good, Sir; if I had not seen that castle, I would willingly accept, (accepter;) but I have already seen it. — Never mind ; you must go with us. — Can I ? You know that I must be at b me this evening, and that I have 20 miles to go. (57 1 .) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Are you rich ? I am. Are the women handsome ? They are, they are rich and hand- some. Are you from France ? I am. What countrywoman is she ? She is from France. Would you be sorry if you were rich ? Etes-vous riche ? Je le suis. Les femmes sont-elles bien ? Elles le sont, elles sont riches et belles. Etes-vous de France ? J'en suis. De quel pays est-elle ? Elle est de France. Seriez-vous fache si vous etiez riche ? SIXTY-TIRST LESSON. (2.) 319 I should not be sorry for it. To be angry with somebody. To be angry about something. What are you angry about ? Are you sorry for having done it ? I am sorry for it. Honest, polite. Impolite, dishonest. Polite, courteous. Uncivil. Happy, lucky. Unhappy, unlucky. Easy, not hard. Easy to do. Difficult, hard. Hard to say. Useful. Useful to know. Useless. It is useless to repeat it. Is it useful to write a great deal ? It is useful. Is it well (right) to take the property of others ? It is bad, (wrong.) It is not well (right) or it is wrong. Well, right. Bad, wrong. Of what use is that ? That is of no use. What is that ? I do not know what that is. What is it ? I do not know what it is. Does he wish me to come ? He wishes you to come alone. He does not. Must I come without her ? You must come without her. Je n'en serais pas fache. Etre fdche contre quelqu'un. Etre fdche de quelque chose. De quoi etes-vous fache ? Etes-vous fache de l'avoir fait? Pen suis fache. Honnete. Malhonnete. Poli. Impoli. Heureux, fern, heureuse. Malheureux, " malheureuse. Facile, aise. Facile a faire. Difficile. Difficile a dire. Utile. Utile a savoir. Inutile. II est inutile de le repeter. Est-il utile d'ecrire beaucoup ? C'est utile. Est-il bien de prendre le bien des autre s ? C'est mal. Ce n'est pas bien. Bien. Mal. t A quoi cela est-il bon ? t Cela n'est bon a rien. t Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? t Je ne sais pas ce que c'est que cela. t Qu'est-ce que c'est? t Je ne sais pas ce que c'est. Veut-il queje vienne ? (§ 151.) 11 veut que vous veniez seul. II ne veut pas que vous veniez seui. Faut-il que je vienne sans elle ? II faut que vous veniez sans elle. Soixante et unieme Th£me. 2de Sec. fetes- vous du meme pays que cette dame-la? Non, je suis Franc aise, et elle est Suisse. — De quoi votre beau-fils se plaint-il I II se plaint de son beau-frere. — Comment appelez-vous cette demoi- selle-ci ? Ceci est Madame de Balmont. Cette jeune personne est- elle mariee? Sans doute. Elle semble (seem) etre si jeune ; que je ne le croirais pas ; si vous ne me le disiez pas. Elle n'est pas si jeune qu'elle semble Petre. Non! Quel age a-t-elle done ? De- vinez, si vous pouvez. Si je devine> je dirai seize ans. Vous n'avez pas reussi a deviner. — Le jeune commis n'est-il pas fache contre vous? Non, il n'est pas fache contre moi, car je ne lui ai rien fait. Contre qui est-il done fache % II est mecontent de vous qui avez casse sa jolie petite canne. Ne Pai-je pas payee ? Si fait ; mais le prix n'est pas la canne. C'est selon : quelque fois Pun vaut mieux, 320 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) quelque fois Pautre. — Dit-on : remplissez d'eau la bouteille ? Non, cela ne se dit pas. Que dit-on done ? On dit : remplissez la bou- teille d'eau. Where did you take this book from ? I took it out of (dans) the room of your friend, (fern.) — Is it right to take the books of other people ? It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it. and I hope tnat your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon as I have read it. — What is your name ? My name is William, (Guillaume.) — What is your sister's name? Her name is Eleanor, (Leonore.) — Are the ladies handsomer in Paris than in London? Strangers say they are. — Are the women handsome here ? Yes, they are. — Are they rich? Some are rich, others are poor. — Are they industrious I They used to be. — You seem unhappy ; are you angry at any one ? Yes, I am angry at my husband, who has not been willing to (or would not) take me to Boston. He is not rich enough, perhaps. Avis aux Lecteurs. — Nous allons des aujourd'hui, (from to-day,) laisser une partie des questions sans reponses, pour accoutumer Pecolier a les faire lui-meme. What countrywoman is she? — Are you, too? — Would you be sorry if you could go travelling ? — Would you not have been pleased if she had not died? — What are you mad at? — That merchant is honest ; people can do business with him, can they not ? — Whom do you say is so polite ? — That man and his wife are happy, are they not? — This young girl is very interesting; is she not happy? — Are your gloves easy or difficult to put on ? — Does that foreigner bring good wines ? — What do they sell cheap ? — What is useless ? — What is impolite ? — Is the German hard (difficult) to translate ? — Is it, to pronounce % — Is it not, to speak ? — If this (ceci) is useful, why do you not do it ?- -If to get up early is useful and easy, why do you not get up earlier than you do? (49 2 , Obs. 114.) — Is it right to speak ill of the absent? — Do not fill that bottle with wine. — What would you fill with coffee, if you had any? — Would he have drunk that brandy, if I had given it to him ? — What is that good for? Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. What is your name ? My name is Charles. What do you call this in French ? How do you express this in French ? What is that called ? George the Third. t Comment vous appelez-vous ? t Je m'appelle Charles. t Comment cela s'appelle-t-il en Fran§ais ? t Comment dit-on cela en Francais I Comment appelle-t-on cela? George trois. SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 321 Obs. 145. After the Christian name of a sovereign, the French employ the cardinal numbers without an article, while the English use the ordinal. Lewis the Fourteenth. I Louis quatorze. Henry the Fourth. I Henri quatre. Obs. 146. First and second, however, are exceptions to this rule : for first, the French use premier; and for second, either deux or second. Quint instead of cinq is also used in speaking of the emperor Charles V., and of the pope Sixtus V. Henry the First. Henry the Second. Pope Sixtus the Fifth. Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu- ropean languages fluently. Europe, European. Fluently. Bather. Rather . . . than. Rather than squander my money, I will keep it. I will rather pay him than go thither. I will rather burn the coat than wear it. He has arrived sooner than I. A half- worn coat. To do things imperfectly, (by halves.) To reign. Does she reign ? A foolish discourse. Infernal. His, her majesty. Their majesties. (57*. Ohs 40.) Henri premier. Henri second or Henri deux. Le pape Sixte- Quint. Charles- Quint parlait couramment plusieurs langues europeennes. L'Europe, europeen. Couramment. Plutot . . . que. Plutot . . . que de. Plutot que de dissiper mon argent, je le garderai. Je le paierai plutot que d'y aller. Je brulerai plutot l'habit que de le porter. II est arrive plus tot que moi. t Un habit a demi-use. t Faire les choses a demi. Regner. 1. (28 2 .) Regne-t-elle ? Un sot discours. Infernal. Sa majeste, (nom/em.) Leurs ma- jestes. Soixante et UNIEME Theme. 3me Sec. Qui regne en Angleterre? La reine Victoria premiere. Quelroi regne en France'? Aucun roi n ? y regne. Quel en etait le dernier? Louis Philippe premier. Quel a ete le dernier Charles d'Espagne % Etait-ce Charles trois ou quatre ? C'a ete Charles quatre. Quel a ete son successeur, (successor?) Ca ete Ferdinand sept. Combien de George y a-t-il eu en Angleterre? II y en a eu quatre. Y en a-t-il eu en France ? Non> il n'y en a eu aucun. Y a-t-il eu un Henri quatre dans ce dernier pays ? Oui. il y en a eu urn qu ; on nomme Henri le Grand. Sans reponse. — Pouvez-vous faire des reponses en Francais? — Auriez-vous pu en faire a la premiere lecon ? — Que faut-il que j'aie'? — Veut-il que j'aille chez le bijoutier'? — Si vous etiez riche comme Etienne Girard l'etait, que feriez-vous? — Ne portait-il pas toujours un habit a demi-use ? — Qui fait les choses ademi 7 ? — Que feriez-vous plutot que d'etre marchand 1 — Quel roi de France a ete mis a mort, (put to death?) — Ou voulez-vous que ] ? aille? 322 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) What did Charles V. say of European languages? Charles V. 5 who spoke fluently several European languages, used to say (avait coutume de dire) that we should speak (quHl fallait parler) Spanish with the gods ; Italian with our (son) friend, (fern.,) French with our friend, (rnas.,) German with soldiers, English with geese, (une oie,) Hungarian (hongrois) with horses, and Bohemian (bohe- mien) with the devil, (le diable.) — Do you admire what Charles V. said of languages ? I do not, I assure you. I think, on the con- trary, that it is a very foolish speech. — Why do you think so ? Be- cause those languages must be spoken (il faut parler ces langues) to the people who speak them, and not to geese, horses, and the devil. — How did his majesty (sa majeste) the emperor, Charles V., know that the Bohemian suited his infernal majesty ? (sa majeste infernale.) — Are not all the majesties relations'? Questions sans reponses. — How is that called in French? — What is the French of: companion? — of: a female companion? — of: an acquaintance of mine ? — Do you know, or do you not know, that of. a half -worn-out hat? — Is that young lady called Eleanor? — Is her brother called Stephen? (Etienne.) — Where did George HI. reign i — Was Charles the First put to death? (mettre d mortV) — Was Six- tus V. a pope {pape) or a king ? — Are all kings happy ? — Have there been many popes ? — Is it correct to say : happy as a king or a pope ? — Who would not rather be a farmer than a king ? — What must I have? — Where must you go? — You wish me to be kind; be so yourself. — Does she wish me to come and play at her concert ^ SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, 62d.—Soixante-deuxieme Legon, 62me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. As to, as for. As to me ; to them. I Quant a ; quant a moi ; a eux, a dies. As to that, I know not what to say. | Quant a cela, je ne sais que dire. Obs. 147. Ne is used without pas with the four verbs : — To cease, to dare, to be able or knowhow. I do not know what to do. Do you not know where to go ? She does not know what to answer. We do not know what to purchase. You do not cease importuning me. She continually complains. I dare not ask you for it. She dares not tell you. Cesser, oser, pouvoir,* savoir Je ne sais que faire. Ne savez-vous oil aller ? Elle ne sait que repondre. Nous ne savons qu'acheter. Vous ne cessez de m? importuner . Elle ne eesse de se plaindre. Je n'ose vous le demandei. Elle n'ose vous le dire. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 323 I cannot go to the covered bridge. I cannot tell you, (would not know how.) Can you not believe it ? To die of a disease, {malady.) She died of the varioloid. Did he not die of apoplexy ? They died with the cholera. The, ^, fever. The yellow fever. A chill. The intermittent fever. The apoplexy. An attack of a ... . He has a chill. He has a fever. He has had a fever. His fever has returned. He was struck with apoplexy. To strike, knock, rap, at the door. What has happened to that priest ? What has happened to her ? She had a dreadful accident. To shed, pour out. Pour me out a drink. A tear. To shed tears. To pour out a drink' — some water. I pour out some drink for that man. With tears in his, her, our, or my eyes. Sweet, mild. Sour, acid. Some sweet wine. A mild air. A mild zephyr. A soft sleep. Nothing makes life more agreeable than the society of, and intercourse with, our friends. Je ne puis aller au pont couvert, Je ne saurais vous le dire. Ne sauriez-vous le croire ? Mourir d'une maladie. Elle est morte de la variole. N'est-il pas mort d'apoplexie ? lis sont morts du cholera. L&jievre. liQ.Jievrejaune. Un frisson, la^ fievre intermitlente. L'apoplexie. Une attaque d'a . . . . II a un frisson, t La fievre l'a pris. t II a eu la (un acces de) fievre. t La fievre l'a repris. II a ete frappe d'apoplexie. Frapper, 1, frapp er a la porte. Qu'est-il arrive a cet ecclesiastique ? Que lui est-il arrive ? (50 2 .) II lui est arrive un accident affreux. Verser, 1. Versez-moi a boire. Une larme. Verser des larmes. Verser a boire — de l'eau. t Je verse a boire a cet homme. Les larmes aux yeux. Doux ; fern, douce. Sur. Du vin doux. Un air doux. Un doux zephir. Un doux sommeil. Rien ne rend la vie si douce que ia societe et le commerce de nos Soixante-deuxieme Theme. Ire Sec. Allez-vous vous verser a boire ? Moi, non ; mais quant a Henri, il ne cesse de se verser a boire. II faut qu ; il ait soif. C'est tres proba- ble. — Versez a boire au jardinier. Que lui verserai-je ? De Peaa, de reau-de-vie, ou du vin doux ? Comme il a eu la fievre, versez- lui un peu de vin doux. Est-ce bon pour la fievre? On le dit. — Votre cidre est-il doux ou sur ? II n'est ni doux ni sur. — Airre- t-il le cafe doux? Non, il le prend sans sucre. — Qirest-ce qui rend la vie douce ? — Mile. Clara a-t-elle encore la fievre intermittente ? Sa fievre est passee. Quel accident est arrive a Pecclesiastique ? II est tombe de cheval, et il s 7 est fait beaucoup de mal a la jambe gauche et au pied droit. Sans reponses. — Vous etes-vous assooie avec le marchand qui vend si bon marche ? — A-t-on pu vous dire de quelle maladie ie 324 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) vieil ecclesiastique est mort ? — Ce vin n'est-il pas un peu sur ? — Ces cerises sont-elles donees'? — Mon the est trop doux, versez-y un peu d'eau et de lait. — Votre fils ne craint-il pas la fievre jaune a la Nouvelle Orleans, ou Fa-t-il deja eue ? — Que dit le medecin ? Croit-il que cette attaque d ; apoplexie tuera le vieil epicier ? — Ne faut-il pas que vous veniez ? Of what illness did your sister die? She died of (de la) fever, — How is your brother? My brother is no longer living- he died three months ago. — I am surprised (etonne) at it, for he was very well last summer, when I was in the country. — Of what did he die ? He died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend? She is not well ; she had an attack of ague, the day before yesterday, and this morning the fever has returned. — Has she an intermittent fever? I do not know, but she often has chills. — What has become of the woman whom I saw at your mother's ? She died this morning, of apoplexy. — Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? They will rather tear them than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask me for ? He asks you for the money which you owe him. Sans reponses. — How do you like this wine ? — Shall I pour you out a glass of brandy and water? — Does she not prefer a glass of mineral water, with syrup? — Do you not know what to eat? — Where must you be to-night? — How many of your cousins are alive? — How much syrup shall I pour out for her? — Did you not hear a knock at the front door? — Why does she shed tears? — Has an accident happened ? — What has happened to them ? — Does he not quit (cease) speaking? — How does your mother like our food? — Why does she not eat any more ? Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. A case. Ten cases of cholera. The report. Is the report favorable ? To augment, increase. Diminish, decrease. To report. Do they report all the cases ? Does the cholera increase or not ? It seems to be diminishing now. How many cases have they reported ? Only 7 for the last 24 hours. To cry, to scream, to shriek. Un cas. Dix cas de cholera. Le rapport. Le rapport est-il favor- able ? Augmctnter, 1. Diminuer, 1. Rapport er, 1. Rapporte-t-on tous les cas ? Le chole'ra augmente-t-il ou non ? II semble diminuer a present. Combien de cas a-t-on rapporte ? Seulement 7 pour les dernieres 24 heures. Crier, 1. To help, assist, some one to do a thing, j Aider, 1, quelqu'un d faire une chose I help him to do it. I Je l'aide a le faire. SIXTT-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 325 I help you to write. I will help you to work. To cry out for help*. The help. To inquire after some one. Whom are you inquiring after ? Has he inquired after our residence ? Where, when you please. As you please, you like ; at your plea- sure. As soon as you like it. To trust some one. Trust no one. I trust nobody. Do you trust him ? her ? them, (fern.) ? I do trust him, her, them. He does not trust me, them, (mas.) We must not trust everybody. To distrust one, mistrust. Do you distrust that lawyer ? She distrusts her maid-servant. In your place, I would distrust him. A seat, a place. A public square. Make me a little room. To laugh at something, laughed, laugh. I laugh, thou laughest, he, she, one laughs. Do you laugh at that ? I do, with all my heart, and he does also. At what do they laugh ? | Je vous aide a e'crire. I Je veux vous aider a travailler. i Crier a l'aide. Appeler du secours. L'aide, 1 le secours. *S" informer, 1, de quelqu'un. De qui vous informez-vous ? S'est-il informe de notre demeure ? Ou, quand "\ Comme I .. , . (463. Obs. 107.) Mvousplaira. Aussitot qu' , des qu' J t Sefier, 1, a. quelqu'un. Ne vous fiez a personne. §55.) t Je ne me fie a personne. t Vous fiez-vous a lui, a elle, a elles ? t Je me fie a lui, a. elle, a elles. i§ 64.) t II ne se fie pas a moi, a eux. t II ne faut pas se fier a tout le monde. t Se defer de quelqu' 'un. t Vous defiez-vous de cet avocat ? t Elle se defie de sa domestique. A votre place, je me defierais de lui. Une place. Une place publique. Faites-moi un peu de place. Rire,* 4, de quelque chose, ri (p. p.), riez. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, elle rit, on rit. Riez-vous de cela ? J'en ris de tout mon cceur, et lui aussi. De quoi rient-ils ? rient-elles ? Soixante-detjxieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Quel est le rapport du cholera ? II est moms favorable que hier. — Combien de cas dans les 24 hemes? II y a eu 42 cas et 17 morts. — C'est plus que hier; car il n'y avait que 35 cas et 14 morts. — Cela augmente un jour et diminue l'autre. — II faut etre prudent et modere, (prudent and moderate.) — Combien de cas a-t-on rapporte a St. Louis? Seulement 12. — Ce n'est pas autant que la derniere fois. — Aidez-vous votre cousin a faire son devoir? Seulement lorsqu'il est trop difficile. Quant a mon frere et a moi. nous ne nous aidons jamais Tun Pautre. — Pourquoi cet enfant crie-t-il? II s'est fait du mal a la jambe gauche. A quoi sert de crier? A rien; mais les enfants crient. 1 Aide, iii the signification of help, is feminine ; means an assistant. 28 it is masculine when it 326 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) Sans reponses. — Rit-elle parce que ce Monsieur est tombe? — Riez-vous toujours quand vous voyez tomber quelqu'un % — Ne con- naissez-vous personne qui crie alors? — Vous fiez-vous a ce boucher 1 — Ne se fie-t-elle pas a sa domestique 1 — Nous pouvons nous fier a celle-ci, n 7 est-ce pas? — Ne nous trompera-t-elle point? — Savez-vous le Francais de : As you please? — N 7 avez-vous pas entendu frapper? — Que vous verse-t-elle ? — N 7 appelle-t-on pas au secours? Sentez- vous le doux zephir ? — Ne faut-il pas que j ; ai un chapeau neuf ? — Seriez-vous fache si je m 7 en allais ? — Quel est le nom de votre nou- velle eonnaissance % Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? I have; but nobody would 1 or could (personne n 7 a voulu on n 7 a pu) tell me what has become of him. — Never mind ) you will easily find another who sells as cheap. — I wish I could, 2 (Je voudrais pouvoir ; 2 ) for I have but little money. — Did the general's nephew die of a disease or of an accident ? He died of the yellow fever. — Has not a dreadful accident happened to the apothecary ; s old clerk? He fell and broke his arms or legs. (Dir. 2 — 24 2 , Obs. 55.) — His arms and legs, did you say ? No, only his arms or legs. — Would she cry for help, if I should beat her? (§ 148 — 3.) If you should hurt her, I guess she would cry. — Would they not laugh, if I was to tell them that tale ? No, I guess they would be angry. — Must I not go for some cigars? Yes, you must go for some. — Must I not have the money to pay for them ? Yes, you must have it ; here it is. — After you have paid for them, (46 3 , Obs. 107,) you will have six cents left; you may keep them. Sans reponses. — What dost thou ask me for? — Will you pass me the bottle, if you please ? — Have you not drunk enough ? — Shall I give you (faut-il vous verser) some wine ? — Why do you not eat ? — Who knocks at the door ? — Why does he cry ? — What has happened to you? — Where will you go to, this evening? — Where will your brothers go to ? — Why do you go to town ? — Will you go with me ? — Must I sell to that man on credit? — Has he already deceived (trom- per) anybody? — Must I trust those ladies? — Do those merchants trust you? — Whom do those gentlemen laugh at? — Why do those 1 Translate could, by: j'ai pu, il a pu, il pouvait, &c. Would, by: j'ai voulu, il a voulu, je voulais, &c, when they refer to past actions instead of future ones. (§ 148 — 4.) 2 I wish, in such phrases as, I wish I could, I might, I had, &c, or any other imperfect tense, where it means, I should like to, must be translated by : Je voudrai pouvoir, avoir, &e. When 1 wish, does not mean, I should liketo, but merely, 1 want, translate it by: Jeveux, &c, as: lwishtoseeyou t Je veux ou desire vous voir. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 327 people laugh at us? — Ought we to laugh (faut-il se rnoquer) at persons who speak badly? — What are you laughing at? — How long (depuis quand) have you been wearing it so large 1 (grand.) Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. To ring. A bell, a small bell. To hear a ring. Heard a ring. He must go. Where must she go ? Do you wish him to be good or not ? I wish him to be good, and I wish her also to be good. Must he not have a new coat ? He must come with me to the tailor's, To laugh in a person's face. We laughed in his face. To laugh at, to deride some one. I laugh at (deride) you. Were you laughing at us ? Were you making fun of us ? We did not laugh at you. Full. A book full of errors. To afford. Can you afford to buy that horse ? I can afford it. I cannot afford it. Who is there ? Who is it ? is that ? It is I, he, she, we, you, thou. Is it he ? It is not he. Are they your brothers ? (4? 3 .) It is they. It is not they. Is it she ? It is she. It is not she. Are they your sisters ? It is they, (feminine.) It is not they. " It is I who speak. Is it they who laugh ? It is you who laugh. It is thou who hast done it. Sonner, 1. Une cloche. Une clochette. Entendre sonner. Entendu sonner. II faut qu'z'Z aille. Ou faut-il qu' eZZe aille ? Voulez-vous qu'i'Z soit bon ou non? Je veux qu'il soit bon, et je veux aussi qu'elle soit bonne. (§ 151.) Ne faut-il pas qu'?7 ait un habit neuf ? II faut qu^'Z vienne avec moi chez le tailleur. Eire au nez de quelqu'un. Nous lui avons ri au nez. Se rire ou se moquer de quelqu'un. Je me ris (me moque) de vous. (54 3 /, Vous riiez-vous de nous ? Vous moquiez vous de nous ? ($ 147 — 1.) Nous ne nous riions pas de vous. Plein, pleine. Un livre plein de fautes. t Avoir les moyens, {de before in- finitive.) t Avez-vous les moyensd'acheter ce cheval ? J'en ai les moyens. t Je n'en ai pas les moyens. Qui est-la ? Qui est-ce ? Qui est cela? C'est moi, lui, elle, nous, vous, toi Est-ce lui ? Ce n'est pas lui. Sont-ce vos freres ? or, Est-ce que ce sont vos freres ? Ce sont eux. Ce ne sont pas eux. Est-ce elle ? C'est elle. Ce n'est pas elle. Sont-ce vos soeurs? or, Est-ce que ce sont vos sceurs? Ce sont elles. Ce ne sont pas elles. C'est moi qui parle. Sont-ce eux (elles) qui rient ? or, Est-ce que ce sont eux Le (la) connaissez-vous ? z Do you know him, her ? 5 1 We have seen, (18 1 , Obs. 38,) that n'est-ce pas was used to ask a negative interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, but now, we say, when the interrogation, whether negative or not, is in another person, use the conjunction et with any required personal pronoun. Don't you? Et vous ? Don't he ? Et lui ? Don't she ? we ? they ? Et elle ? nous ? eux ? I know him : to you ? Et vous ? — Does he ? she ? Peter, &c. : Et lui ? et elle ? et Pierre ? But, does any one ? must be translated by: Quelqu'un le connait-il ? 2 The verb to know is always expressed by connaitre* when it signifies to be acquainted with, and by savoir* in all other cases. Ex. I know that man, that lady. Je connais cet homme, cette dame ; I know my lesson, Je sais ma lecon ; I know what you wish to say, Je sais ce que vous voulez dire. 28* 330 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) I am — I do. I am not — I do not. He is an acquaintance of mine. She is my acquaintance. He is not a friend, he is but an ac- quaintance. To enjoy. Do you enjoy good health ? To be well. She is well. Does she enjoy a great fortune ? Does he enjoy a good reputation ? To imagine. Our fellow creatures. He has not his equal or his match. To resemble some one, to look like some one. That man resembles my brother. That beer looks like water. We resemble each other. They do not resemble each other. Is it time that I . . . thou ... he ... ' she . . . we, &c. Is it time for me . . . thee . . . him . . . her ... us, &c, to. . ? Is it time for us to go, come, have, be? It is time for us to go, come, have, be. Je le (la) connais. Je ne la connais point. II est de ma connaissance. Elle est de ma connaissance. Ce n'est pas un ami, ce n'est qu'une connaissance. Jouir, 2, de. Jouissez-vous d'une bonne same"? Etre bien portant, portante. Etre en bonne sante. t Elle est bien portante. t Elle se porte bien. t Elle est en bonne sante. Jouit-elle d'une grande fortune? Jouit-il d'une bonne reputation? S'imaginer, 1. Nos semblables. II n'a pas son semblable. t JRessembler, 1, a quelau'un. (Mind the ss and the a.) Get homme ressemble a mon frere. Cette biere ressemble a de l'eau. Nous nous ressemblons. lis ou elles ne se ressemblent pas. Est-il temps que je . . . tu . . . il . . . elle . . . nous . . . vous ... ils . . . elles . . ., (govern the subj. § 151.) Est-il temps que nous allions, veni- ons, ayons, soyons ? II est temps que nous allions, que nous veni- ons, ayons, soyons. Soixante-troisieme Theme. Ire Sec. Est-il temps que nous allions a Washington pour 1'arTaire de Fre- deric ? Oui, il faut que nous y soyons demain ou, au plus tard, apres-demain. II y a une mauvaise affaire; je ne sais comment il s'en tirera. Lui! il se fait souvent de mauvaises affaires, mais il s'en tire toujours. C'est vrai, il est tres-heureux. — Ne jouit-elle pas d'une fortune considerable ? Si fait, son pere lui a laisse une grande for- tune, dont elle jouit, et dont elle fait bon usage. Jouit-elle d'une bonne sante ? Oui, pour une personne riche, elle jouit d'une tres- bonne sante. Sa sceur est-elle bien portante'? Non, il faut qu'elle soit souvent malade, car elle n'a pas bon air. — Ce monsieur, n'est-il pas une de vos connaissances % Lequel? Celui qui est entre les deux dames en jaune? Non, celui qui est entre la table et la fene- tre. — Ressemblez-vous a votre sceur? — Vous ressemble-t-elle ? — A qui ce commis ressemble-t-il 1 — Mon frere et moi, nous ressemblons- SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 331 nous ? — Ces deux sceurs ne se ressemblent-elles pas corame deux gouttes d'eau, (2 drops of water ?) — Pourquoi cet homme s ? enfuit-il comme pa ? II faut qu ; il ait fait quelque chose de mal, ne le croyez- vous pas ? What is the report of the health-office, to-day? (du comite de sante?) The report has increased to-day. — How many cases are there ? 53 > and only 11 deaths. We must hope that it will diminish soon. — A certain (certain) good-for-nothing fellow liked brandy much, but he found in it (lui) two bad qualities, (une qualite :) u If I put water to it, 7 ' said he, " I spoil it: and if I do not put any to it, it spoils me." — Does your cousin resemble you? He resembles me, — Do your sisters resemble each other? They do not resemble each other; for the elder (I'ainee) is idle and naughty, and the younger {la cadette) assiduous and good-natured towards everybody. — How is your aunt % She is very well. — Does your mother enjoy good health? She imagines she enjoys {^imagine jouir) good health ; but I believe she is mistaken, for she has, these six months, had a cough, of which (dont) she cannot get rid. Is it right to laugh thus at everybody ? If I laugh at your coat, I do not laugh at everybody. — Does your son resemble any one ? He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink? I do not know what to drink, for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. — If you wish to have some other, I shall go down (descendre) into the cellar to fetch you some. — You are too polite, Sir; I shall drink no more to-day. — Have you known my father long? I have known him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. We often worked for one another, and we loved each other like brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each other. — When I had not done my exercises, he did them for me; and when he had not done his, I did them for him. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Each other, one another. Of each other. Without one another. The brother and the sister love each other. Are you pleased with each other ? We are. As, as well as ; as well as we ; they. The appearance, the countenance. To show a disposition to. That man whom you see shows a desire to approach us. To look pleased with some one. L'un 1' autre l'unel'autre. L'unde l'autre. L'une sans l'autre. Le frere et la sceur s'aiment l'un a Fautre. Etes-vous contents l'un de l'autre ? Nous le sommes. Ainsi que ; ainsi que nous ; qu'eux. La mine. Faire mine de. Cette homme que vous voyez fait mine de nous approcher. Faire bonne mine d quelqu'un. 332 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) Faire mauvaise mine d quelqu'un. Quand je vais voir cet homrae, au lieu de me faire bonne mine, il me fait mauvaise mine. Un homme de bonne mine. Un homme de mauvaise mine. Des gens de mauvaise mine. Aller voir quelqu'un. < Faire uneYi S ite).,, un ( Rendre visite > Frequenter un lieu, (endroit.) Frequenter des societes. t Frequenter quelqu'un. Avoir fair. Quelle mine a-t-il ? Quel air a-t-il ? II a l'air enjoue, (triste, content.) Vous avez l'air bien portant. Vous avez l'air d'un medecin. Elle a l'air de mauvaise humeur. lis ont l'air content. lis ont l'air d'etre de bonne humeur. Avoir l'air bon. t Boire a quelqu'un. Boire a la sante de quelqu un. t Je bois a votre sante. t C'en est fait de moi ! d'elle! d'elles ! t C'en est fait, t II vaut mieux que je, il, vous, elles, nous, tu, (must be followed by the subjunctive.) Il vaut mieux que je le fasse, nous le fassions, vous le fassiez. To Icok cross at some one. When I go to see that man, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. A good-looking man. A bad-looking man. Bad-looking people, or folks. To go to see some one. To pay some one a visit. To frequent a place. To frequent societies. To associate with some one. To look like, to appear. How does he look ? He looks gay, (sad, contented.) You appear very well. You look like a doctor. She seems angry, to be in a bad humor. They look pleased. They appear to be in a good humor. To look good, to appear to be good. To drink to some one. To drink some one's health. I drink your health. It is all over with me ! her ! them ! (fern.) It is all over. It is better for me, him, you, them, us, thee : or I, he, you, we, thou hadst better .... It is better for me to do it, for us to do it, for you to do it. (I had better do it, &c.) Soixante-troisieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Pourquoi fre quel tez- vous ces gens-la? Je les frequente parce qu'ils me sont utiles. — Si vous ne cessez de les frequenter, vous vous attirerez de mauvaises affaires, car ils ont beaucoup d 7 enne- mis. Vous croyez? Alors je ne continuerai plus a les voir. II vaut mieux que vous fassiez ce que vous dites. Ces gens font mine de nous approcher. Que nous veulent-ils ? Le leur demanderai-je ? Ouij faites-le. Que voulez-vous, mes amis? Ils ont Pair de ne pas m'entendre. II faut qu'ils soient etrangers. — Quels sont ces homines de mauvaise mine qui viennent par ici? Si ce sont des voleurs, c'en est fait de nous. N'avez-vous pas peur? — Le jeune docteur est un homme de bonne mine, n 7 est-ce pas? — Qui allez-vous voir? — Si SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 333 vous aviez le temps, iriez-vous rendre visite a vos cousines*? — Fre- quentez-vous le theatre ? — Quels endroits. quels lieux frequentent- ils ! — Ce marehand a toujours Pair d'etre de mauvaise humeur, est-il malade ? Why did you not come to dinner? I have been hindered. I am sorry I made you wait. (Je suis fdche de . . . .)* — Until what time did you wait ? We waited for you till a quarter past four ; and, as you did not come, we dined without you. — You did right. I wish I had (62 2 , N. 2) sent you a boy to inform you that I could not come: but I thought I could come. 1 — Never mind; did you drink my health? We drank yours (d la votre) and that of your parents. — How does your uncle look % [quelle mine a . . . . ?) He looks (a Voir) very gay, (enjoue.) for he is much pleased with his children. — Do his friends look (ont-ils la mine) as gay as he ? They, on the con- trary, look sad. because they are discontented. My uncle has no money, and is always contented, and his friends, who have a good deal of it, are scarcely ever so. Is that man angry with you ? I think he is angry with me, be- cause I (de ce que je) do not go to see him; but I do not like to go to his house, for when I do, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not believe that; he is not angry with you, for he is not so bad (mediant) as he looks, (quil en a Voir.) He is the best man in the (du) world; but one must know him in order to appreciate him, (pour pouvoir Vapprecier.) — There is a great dif- ference (la difference) between you and him, (lui ;) you look pleased with all who come to see you, and he looks cross at those who call on him, (go to see him.) Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. To please (oblige) some one. You oblige (please) her much. To hurt some one's feelings, to grieve. Have you h«?t that man's feelings ? I did not. You grieve me, (hurt my feelings.) If you know a good place to swim in, oblige me by showing it to me. t Faire plaisir a quelqu'un. t Vous lui faites grand plaisir. t Faire de la peine a quelqu'un. t Avez-vous fait de la peine a cet homme ? Je ne lui en ai pas fait, t Vous me faites de la peine. Si vous connaissez un bon endroit pour nager, faites-moi le plaisir de me le montrer. 1 When the same nominative I, I, he, he, &c, is repeated in the second member of a compound sentence, as : I am sorry / have made you wait ; the French, instead of the second nominative, use an infinitive, (with or without preposition.) Thus, instead of saying : Je suis fdche que je cons ni fait attend re ; thev say : Je suis fdche de vous avoir fait attendre. (R. 3.) (28 2 , Obs. 65.) 334 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) To experience, to undergo. I have experienced a great many misfortunes. To suffer, to bear, suffered, suffer. Do not suffer it. Dost thou suffer ? I do. He suffers. To feel a pain in one's head, foot. I felt a pain in my eye. To neglect. Let us never neglect our duty. We must yield to necessity. To spring, dart forward. The cat springs upon the rat. To leap on horseback. An increase, an augmentation. For more bad luck. For more good luck. For more bad luck I have lost my purse. To lose one's wits. That man has lost his wits, and he does not know what to do. Obstinately, by all means. That man wishes by all means to lend me his money. To follow. I follow, thou followest, he or she follows, people follow. To pursue. Eprouver, 1. J'ai eprouve beaucoup de malheurs. Souffrir * 2, souffert, souffrez. Ne le souffrez pas. Souffres-tu ? Je souffre. II souffre. t Souffrir de la tete, du pied. t J'ai souffert de l'oeil. Negliger, 1, (de, av. l'mf. §144—2.) Ne negligeons jamais notre devoir. II faut c£der a la necessite. t S'elancer. Le chat s'elance sur le rat. S'elancer sur son cheval. Un surcroit. Pour surcroit de malheur. Pour surcroit de bonheur. Pour surcroit de malheur j'ai perdu ma bourse. Perdre la tete. Cet homme a perdu la tete, et il ne sait que faire. (62 1 , Obs. 147.) A tout e force. Cet homme veut a toute force me preter son argent. Suivre,* 4 ; pres. part, suivant ; past part, suivi. Je suis, tu suis, il ou elle suit, on suit. Pour suivre* 4. (Is conjugated like suivre.) Conserver, 1. To preserve, to save. Soixante-tr hsieme Theme. 3me Sec. 1. faut que nous nous en allions. — Pourquoi faut-il que nous nous en allions? Je n'aime pas la mine de ces gens-la. lis nous suivent, je crois. lis viennent par ici ; tournons par-la. JSPayez pas peur d ? eux. — Quand irons-nous nager? Nous irions a present raeme, si nous pouvions trouver un bon endroit. — Qu'a-ce petit garcon % II souffre de la tete. N ; a-t-elle pas souffert de la gorge ? — Ne faites- vous pas de la peine a votre tante? — Ne font-ils pas de la peine a leurs parents? — A qui eherchez-vous a faire plaisir? — Si j'allais au theatre ; cela ferait-il plaisir a mon oncle? — N : a-t-il pas fait de la peine a sa belle-seem ? — Si un voleur attaquait (attacked) M. Ran- dolph, son gros chien ne s'elancerait-il pas sur le voleur ? — Ne crie- t-elle point, parce qu'il faut coder a la necessite ? What is the matter with you ? It is all over with me. — Why do SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 335 you cry thus? Why do I cry? I have been robbed of my gold rings, (une bague d'or,) my best clothes, and all my money; that is the reason why I cry. — Do not make (ne faites pas) so much noise, for it is we who have taken them all. (tout cela,) in order to teach you to take better care (avoir plus de soin, 50 3 ) of your things, (affaires,) and to shut the door of your room when you go out. — Why do you look so sad % I have experienced great misfortunes. After having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men; and to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not afflict yourself (s'affliger) so much, for you know that we must yield to necessity. Do you know a good place to swim in ? I know one, but it is rather far. — Where is it? If you will go with me, I will tell you. — I will go if it is not too far. — On that side (38 1 ) of the river, behind the wood, (laforit,) near the high road, (le grand chemin.) — When shall we go to swim? This evening, if you like. — Will you wait for me before the city gate ? I shall wait for you there ) but I beg of you not to forget it. — You know that I never forget my promises. — Where did you become acquainted with that lady? I became acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Why does your cousin ask me for (40 1 ) money and books ? Because he is a fool ) of me, (car a moi 7 ) who am his nearest relation, (son plus proche parent,) and his best friend, he asks nothing. — Can you get rid of that man? (52 2 ). I cannot get rid of him, for he will abso- lutely (d toute force) follow me. — Has he not lost his wits? It may be, (cela se peut.) — What does he ask you for? He wishes to sell me a horse which I do not want. SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 64th.— Soixante-quatrieme Legon, Mme. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. Obs. 149. How, how much, how many, before an exclamation, are trans- lated by que. Ex. Tj i , S Que vous etes bon ! How good you are ! < Tr . _ ( Que de bonte vous avez ! How foolish he is, not to go ! | Qu'il est sot, de ne pas y aller ! Obs. 1491. The adjective which in English follows how, stands in French after the verb ; and when que is followed by a substantive, de must always precede the latter. 336 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) How foolish she is to believe him ! How rich that man is ! How handsome that woman is ! How much kindness you have for me ! How many obligations I am under to you ! To be under obligations to some one. I am under many obligations to him. How many people ! How happy you are ! How much wealth that man has ! How much money that man has spent in his life ! To be obliged to some one for some- thing. To be indebted to some one for some- thing. I am indebted to him for it. To thank. To thank one for something. Qu'elle est sotte de le croire ! Que cet homme est riche ! Que cette femme est belle ! Que de bonte vous avez pour moi ! t Que d'obligations je vous ai ! t Avoir des obligations a, quelqu'un. t Je lui ai beaucoup d'obligations. Que de monde ! Que vous etes heureux ! Que de richesses cet homme a ! Que d' argent cet homme a depense dans sa vie ! Etre oblige a quelqu'un de quelque A chose. Etre redevable a quelqu'un de quel- que chose. Je lui en suis redevable. Remercier, 1, (has no prepos. before the pers. but de before the object.) Remercier quelqu'un de quelque chose. Voulez-vous me passer cet eventail ? Ayez la bonte de me Faites-moi le plaisir de me Vous prierai-je de me Veuillez (imper.) me Obs. 150. Never use remercier before the performance of the action, but one of the opposite phrases, or any of similar import. I thank you for the trouble you have I Je vous remercie de la peine que taken for me. vous avez prise pour moi. Soixante-quatrieme TiribiE. Ire Sec. Que ce petit garcon est sot de crier comme cela ! Que vous etes impoli de Pappeler sot! Et vous 7 que vous etes impertinent de m'appeler impoli ! — Vous a-t-il repondu ainsi, lui qui vous a tant d'obligations ! II est riche, et il a oublie toutes les obligations qu'il m'a. — Qui n'a point d'obligations a ses semblabies! — Nous nous devons des secours les uns aux autres. — C'est vrai. Quel est ce jeune homme en habit bleu? C'est le neveu d'un de nos premiers marchands. Que d'argent ce neveu a depense ! Que Madame Lewis est belle ! n ; est-ce pas? Et qu'elle est aimable ! Quelqu'un vous a-t-il remercie des dons que vous nous avez faits? Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. Faites-moi le plaisir (I will thank you) de me ies montrer. — Volontiers. Montons dans la chambre de devant I will thank you for that fan, or Shall I thank you for that fan ? SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 337 nous les y trouverons. — Veuillez ramasser ma plume d'*acier, (I'll thank you to. . . .) La voici. Je vous remercie. De rien. A qui cet officier est-il redevable de sa compagnie. (company.) II en est redevable a son oncle, le general. — X qui est-il redevable de sa place ? (situation ?) How many people there were at the ball ! Then you enjoyed yourself (s'amuser) a good deal, I presume? No. not at all. Why so ? There was there such a multitude, that one could hardly get in. How many invitations they must have sent ! Could you dance? (N. 62 2 .) No ; there was not room (place) enough, — I bring you a pretty present, with which you will be much pleased, I hope. How good you are! What is it? A silk cravat. How many obligations I owe you 1 . Where is it? I have got it in my coat-pocket. Here it is, in this paper. Shall I open it ? Yes, open it. Now I see the cravat. How beautiful it is ! Does it please you? It pleases me much, and I thank you for it, with all my heart. I hope you w T ill at last accept {accepter) something from me. What do you intend to give me ? I will not tell you, for if I did, you would have no pleasure when I should give it to you. Where do you wish me to go for you ? W T here do I want you to go for me ? It is rather far. — No matter, (n'importe,) I am so much indebted to you, that I" will go wherever (ow) you please. (463, 0ft s . 107.) — How kind you are ! Not more than you, (pas plus.) — How foolish Clarissa is, to stay at home when she could go travelling! Now she is almost too old, but say how foolish she was not to go 15 years ago, when she could have gone! With whom could she have gone 1 5 years ago ? With her cousin's family, from Virginia, (laVirginie.) — Had she lost her wits? Perhaps, or perhaps her heart. — Make haste ; you and I must be at home in a quarter of an hour. Come, then; I am ready. I am not, (pas moi:) for, before I go away, I must have my pencils. — Here they are. I am much obliged, and under many obligations to you. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. How large? Of what size is the dog ? How high? Of what height is the tree ? How deep? Of what depth is the pond? De quelle grandeur est le chien ? De quelle hauteur ... est l'arbre ? De quelle profondeur ... est V Hang ? Ohs. 150£. When speaking of dimensions, the English use the verb to be, while the French use avoir, with the preposition de before the noun or adjective of dimensions. — How thick is this ? Combien ceci a-t-il d'epais- seur ? l 1 In general, the substantive is more elegantly used than the adjective but deep cannot be expressed by deprofond, nor thick by d'epais. 29 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) How high is his or her house ? It is nearly fifty feet high. Our house is thirty feet broad. That table is six feet long. That river is twenty feet deep. The size. What is your size ? how tall . . . I am 5 feet 9 inches. Of what size is that man ? He is but 5 feet 1 inch. How was that child dressed ? It was dressed in green. The man with the blue coat. The woman with the red gown. Is it true that his house is burnt ? It is true ; it is but too true. Is it not, (or is it not true ?) I shall perhaps go there ; but not he. t Combien sa maison a-t-elle de haut ou de hauteur ? t Elle a environ cinquante pieds de haut ou de hauteur, t Notre maison a trente pieds de large ou de largeur. t Cette table a six pieds de long ou de longueur, t Cette riviere a vingt pieds de pro- fondeur. 1 La taille. Quelle est votre taille ? t J'ai 5 pieds 9 pouces. De quelle taille cet homme est-il ? t II n'a que 5 pieds 1 pouce. Comment cet enfant etait-il habille* ? t II etait habille de (ou en) vert. t L'homme a l'habit bleu. t La femme a la robe rouge. Est-il vrai que sa maison est bruise ? C'est vrai, ce n'est que trop vrai. N'est ce pas, (n'est-il pas vrai?) J'irai peut-etre ; mais il n'ira pas. Obs. 151. of: aller. Y (there), must not be used before the future and conditional To share, to divide. Whose horse is this ? It is mine. (29 2 .) It is my horse. It is mine. (§ 38, N. 3.) It is mine, or it belongs to me. Whose horses are these ? Are these gloves yours ? They are mine, or they belong to me. Whose house is that ? It is mine, or it belongs to me. Whose houses are these ? They are mine, or they belong to me. It is not your purse : is it ? These are not your notes : are they ? No, they are not. Partager, 1. A qui est ce cheval ? II est a moi. C'est mon cheval. C'est le mien. C'est le mien, ou il est a moi. A qui sont ces chevaux ? Ces gants sont-ils a vous ? Ce sont les miens, «milssonta moi. ^ (473. Obs. 110.) A qui est cette maison ? C'est la mienne, ou elle est a moi. A qui sont ces maisons ? Ce sont les miennes, ou elles sont a moi. Est -ce que c' est 2 votre bourse? Est-ce que ce sont 2 vos billets ? Non, ce ne les sont pas. (§39 — 3.) 1 See note on page 337. 2 When a simple interrogation is used after a negation, as : You have not my ring, have you ? The French merely use the interrogative form : Est-ce que ... as: Est-ce que vous avez ma bague ? You may use : Avez-vous ma bague? but the other corresponds better with the doubt which the English mode seems to con rey. SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 339 SoixANTE-QUATRiiiME Theme. 2de Sec. Avez-vous vu la nouvelle maison de Pavocat ? Oui, je Pai vue. Et vous, ne P avez-vous pas encore visitee? Non ; il faut que j'aille la voir bientot. II vaut mieux que vous alliez en voir la grandeur. Combien a-t-elle de hauteur % Elle a au moins 56 pieds de hauteur. — Combien de largeur a-t-elle ! Elle a, laissez-moi voir, les deux salons ont chacun 18 pieds de largeur et le vestibule a peu pres 8, ce qui fait 44 pieds. et Pepaisseur (the thickness) des murs a peu pres 4 autres pieds. Alors le tout fait de 48 a 50 pieds de largeur, n'est-ce- pas? C'est une grande maison pour un petit homme. Quelle est sa taille ? II a environ 5 pieds 3 pouces; car j'ai au moins 6 pouces de plus que lui. Votre fils n'est-il pas grand % Si fait, il a plus de 6 pieds. — X qui sont ces deux beaux chevaux noirs? Ah! quails sont beaux ! Ce sont ceux du ministre Americain. N'est-ce pas le Mon- sieur a Phabit noir, au gilet blanc, et a la cravate bleu mazarin ? — Combien cette riviere a-t-elle de profondeur ? — Combien cette table d'acajou a-t-elle de hauteur? N'est-il pas temps que nous allions voir le pont-neuf ? Whose houses are those ? They are mine. — Do these pens belong to you ? No, they belong to my sister. — Are those (sont-ce Id) the pens with which she writes so well] They are the same. — Whose gun is this? It is my fathers. — Are these books your sister's? They are hers. — Whose carriage is this ? It is mine. — Which is the man of whom you complain ? It is he (celui) who wears a red coat. — How were they dressed? Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. — Who are those men ? The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbor, and the man with the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a blow with a stick. — Who is the man with the green coat ? He is one of my relations. — Are there many philosophers in your country ? There are as many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me ? It fits you very well. — How does that coat fit your brother? It fits him admirably.— Is your brother as tall (grand) as you ? Hej is taller than I, but I am older (age) than he. — Of what size (de quelle taille.) is that man ? He is five feet four inches (un pouce) high. — How high is the house of our landlord? It is sixty feet high. — Is your well deep ? Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. — -'There are many learned men (un savant) in Rome, are there not, (n J est-ce pas ?'*') Milton asked a Roman. " Not so many as when you were there/'* answered (repondit) the Roman. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. To run up, run up, p. p., run up i Accourir* 2, accouru e , ace our ez vi(e, quick. (conjugue comme Courir.) (46 3 , 4S 1 .) 340 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) Many men had run up ; but instead of extinguishing the fire, the wretches set to plundering. To run to the assistance of some one. To save, to deliver from danger. To save anybody's life. To plunder, ao rob.) The pillage. To set about something. Have they succeeded in extinguish- ing the fire ? They have succeeded in it. The watch indicates the hours. To indicate, to mark. To quarrel. To quarrel with one. To dispute {to contend) about some- thing. What are those officers disputing about ? They are disputing about who shall go first to the attack. To be ignorant of something, or Not to know something. The eve, the day before. The day before that day was Satur- day. The day before Sunday is Saturday. What day comes before Sunday ? Is it time for me to take ? It is time that you should take, we should take. Although 1 can, thou canst, he can. We can or may, you can or may, they may. For the formation of the subjunctive To cure, heal. To cure one's self. | Eeaucoup d'hommes etaient accou rus, mais au lieud'eteindre le feu les miserables s' etaient mis a piller. Accourir,* 2, au secours (a l'assist ance, a l'aide) de quelqu'un. Sauver, 1, du danger. Sauver la vie a quelqu'un. Piller, 1. Le pillage. t Se mettre* a quelque chose. Est-on parvenu a eteindre le feu? On y est parvenu. La montre marque les heures. Marauer, 1 ; indiquer, 1. Se quereller, 1. t Quereller quelqu'un. Disputer sur quelque chose. Sur quoi ces officiers disputent-ils ? t lis disputent a qui ira le premier a l'attaque. Ignore?-, 1, quelque chose, (no prep.) La veille, (de avant le nom qui suit.) t La veille de ce jour-la etait un samedi. t La veille de dimanche est samedi. Quelle est la veille de dimanche ? Est-il temps que je prenne ? II est temps que vous preniez — que nous prenions. Quoiqueje puisse, tu puisses, il puisse. Nous puissionSj vous puissiez, ils puis sent. present, see (§ 151.) Guerir, 2. Seguerir. Guerissez-vous. Soixante-quatrieme The^ie. 3me Sec. Est-il vrai que votre oncle soit arrive? Quoiqu'on m'ait dit qu'il est arrive, je ne le crois pas, je vous assure. — Le ministre vous a-t-il assure de son assistance ?■ Oui, je vous assure que c'est vrai. — N'est-il pas temps que nous prenions le the '\ Si fait, il est temps que nous le prenions. — Irez-vous a Passemblee 1 Quoique je puisse y aller, je rrirai pas, parce que m'a mere ne desire pas que j'y aille. — Com- ment se trouve Emma, aujourd'hui ? Quoiqu'elle soit mieux, elle n'est pas encore bien. Sort-elle? Oui ; quoiqu'elle ne soit pas SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 341 guerie, elle sort. — Se querellent-ils toujours? lis se querelent, mais il est temps qu'ils soient amis. — Sur quoi disputez-vous ? Nous disputons sur le rapport du comite de sante. Disputerez-vous tou- jours? Pourquoi ne disputerions-nous pas? — Ne vous a-t-elle pas sauve d'un grand danger? — L'attaque a-t-elle eu lieu? — A-t-elle reussi? — Ou etiez-vous la veille de ce jour-la? — Ignoriez-vous le manage de M.Francois? — Quelle est la veille de lundi? — Quelle est la veille du douze? N ; entendez-vous pas crier au feu! (fire!) au feu ! — A-t-on sauve la maison ? — A-t-on pu sauver Pecurie ? — Si Pon avait eu plus d'eau. la maison aurait-elle brule? 11 What is the difference (la difference) between a watch and me ? ;? inquired (demanda) a lady of a young officer. — "My lady," replied he. " a watch marks the hours, and, near (aupres de) you, one for- gets them." — How many obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! You have saved my life ! without you I should have been lost. — Have those miserable men hurt you ? They have beaten and robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to (Us allaient) strip (deshabiller) and kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you from the (des) hands of those robbers. — How good you are ! I shall always be indebted to you for it ! — It is not worth mentioning, (speaking about it.) Why are those officers quarreling ? They are quarreling because they do not know what to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguish- ing the fire ? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said (on dit) that several houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able to save anything? They have not been able to save anything; for, instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (les mise- rables) who had come up, set to plundering. — What has happened? A great misfortune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without me ? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not come, they set out. — What is the day before Mon- day called ? The day before Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has been burnt? I was quite (entier ement) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que le feu fid a sa maison ;) for, had I known it, I would have run to his assistance. SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON, 65th.-— Soixante-cinquieme Legon, 65me. Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. To propose. I Se proposer, 1, (de before infin.) I propose going on that journey. | Je me propose de faire ce voyage. 29* 342 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) He proposes joining a hunting party. To play a game at chess. A game at billiards. A game at cards. A party, a soiree ; a musical party. To succeed. Do you succeed in doing that ? I do succeed in it. To endeavor. I endeavor to do it. I endeavor to succeed in it. Endeavor to do better. Since, seeing, considering that. Since you are happy, why do you complain ? To be thoroughly acquainted with a thing. To make one's self thoroughly ac- quainted with a thing. That man understands that business perfectly. I understand that well. Since ox from. From that time. From my childhood. From morning until evening. From the beginning to the end. From here to there. To blow, to blow out. Strongly, hard. East, the east, to the east, east wind. The north, to the north, the north wind. The west, to the west, the west wind. The south, to the south, the south wind. The north-west. The south-east. To encourage. To unroot, pull. II se propose d'aller a une partie dt chasse. t Faire une partie d'echecs. Une partie de billard. Une partie de cartes. Une partie, ou soiree ; une soiree musicale. Reussir, 2, (a before infin.) Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? J'y reussis. Tdcher, 1, {de before infin.) Je tache de le faire. Je tache d'y reussir. Tachez de faire mieux. Puisque. Puisque vous etes heureux, pourquoi vous plaignez-vous ? JE.tr e aufait de quelque chose. Se mettre au fait de quelque chose. Cet homme est au fait de cette af- faire. Je suis au fait de cela. Depuis. Depuis ce moment-la. Depuis ma jeunesse. Depuis le matin jusqu'au soir. Depuis le commencement jusqu' a la fin. Depuis ici jusque la. Souffler, 1. Fort. Est, Test, a Test, le vent d'est. Le nord, au nord, le vent de nord. L'ouest, a, l'ouest, le vent d'ouest. Le sud, au sud, le vent de sud. Le nord-ouest. Le sud-est. Encourager, 1. (§144 — 2.) Dera- ciner, 1. Soixante-cinquieme ThSme. Ire Sec. Vous proposez-vous de faire un petit voyage cet ete ? Je me pro- pose de faire un petit tour. N'est-il pas temps que vous partiez ? (§151.) Je me propose de le faire dans quelques jours. Si vous n'etes pas occupe, allons faire une partie de billard. II y a si long- temps que je n'ai joue au billard, que vous n'auriez aucun plaisir a fairo une partie avec moi; mais si vous aimez les echecs, j'en ferai une partie avec vous. J 7 aime les echecs le soir quand on est tran SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 343 quille. — Mais ne faut-il pas que nous allions nous preparer pour la soiree de Madame Rush? Quoiqu ; elle nVait fait Fhonneur de min- viter. (to invite me.) je ne pourrai pas y aller. Tachez d'y venir. Puisque vous le desirez, je tacherai d'y aller. Y jouera-t-on aux cartes ? II y a toujours une partie de cartes. — Ce jeune Irlandais est- il au fait ? — Votre servante est-elle au fait de son devoir ? — Ce corn- mis est au fait ; n 7 est-ce pas? — Vous dites que votre cousine est toujours de bonne humeur, pourquoi done se plaint-elle du matin jusqu ; au soir? — Quant a la danse, il est au fait, n 7 est-ce pas? — Est- ce qu ; il s'est bien conduit depuis sa jeunesse? (64 2 , N. 2.) — Quel bruit est cela ? N 7 est-ce pas le vent qui souffle ? Oh ! Comme il souffle fort ! Est-ce que c ; est un vent d ; ouest ou de nord? The wind has been blowing (§145) from the east these (depuis) three or four days, are you not astonished that we have no rain ? (subj. §151.) Yes. I am; for when the wind blows from the east, we generally have rain. — Is your west wind warm or cold? The west wind is not very cold, but the north and the north-west winds are usually strong and very cold. — Are they not cool in summer ? Yes, they are. — I presume your south wind is warm, is it not? It is our warmest wind. — And the south-west ? That is pleasant. — Does the wind blow hard here ? It sometimes blows hard enough to unroot trees, (deraciner des arbres.)—li Miss Clara is at Mrs. M.'s party, will you present me to her ? I will, with pleasure. — Have you been long acquainted with her ? I have known her these 2 years. — Does she understand the figures of quadrilles J (Est-elle au fait des figures des quadrilles ?) She knows them very well, or understands them perfectly, do you? (64 2 , N. 2.) Who won the game of chess ? I endeavored to do it, but I could not (62 2 . N. 1.) — Your cousins frequendy play chess, do they not? No. they more frequently play billiards or cards. — I wish I could translate my exercises without mistakes ; but, although I try to do it, I cannot succeed. Try again. It is the only means to succeed. Since you encourage me, I will continue. — If she was not unhappy, would she complain? There are people who always complain. — Why are you without a light ? The wind blew it out when you came in. — What does your French master make you do ? He makes me read a lesson; afterwards he makes me translate English exercises into French on the lesson which he made me read; and from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks French to me, and I have to answer him (il me faut lui repondre) in the very language (dans la langue meme) which he is teaching me. — Have you already learned much in that manner? You see that I have already learned something. 344 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Reduire* 4, Reduis-tu ? reduit. Reduisez, Je reduis, elle reduit, Traduit. Traduisez. (as reduire.) Pre- To reduce, abate, reduced. Reduce. Dost thou reduce ? I reduce, she reduces. To translate, translated. Translate. To introduce, to present. To reduce the price. Reduce the price a crown. To translate into French. Shall I translate French into English ? Translate from one language into another. I introduce him to you. I introduce you to him, her. He will present us to them. He himself has told it me. He has told it me, to myself, (not to another person.) One does not like to flatter one's self. On n'aime pas a se flatter soi-meme. Obs. 152. Sometimes the word meme is an adverb, and answers to the English word even. Traduire,* 4. I?itroduire,* 4 senter, 1. Reduire le prix. Reduisez le prix d'un ecu. Traduire en Frangais. Traduirai-je du Fran§ais en Anglais ? Traduisez d'une langue dans une autre. Je l'introduis chez vous. t Je vous le presente. t Je vous presente a lui, a elle. t II nous presentera a eux, a elles. II me l'a dit lu>meme. (41£.) II me l'a dit a moi-meme. He has not even money enough to buy some bread. We must love everybody, even our enemies. Again, (anew.) He speaks again. To fall, to lower. The price of the merchandise falls. To deduct. To raise, lift up, put up, rise, increase. Is flour higher or lower ? She has lowered the window ; raise it up. The provisions. Produce has risen. To overcharge, to ask too much. Not having overcharged you, I can- not deduct anything. An ell. A yard. A metre, {measure.) To produce, {to yield, to profit.) How much does that employment yield you a year ? An employment. To permit, permitted. Permit. II n'a pas meme assez d'argent pour acheter du pain. II faut aimer tout le monde, meme nos ennemis. De nouveau. II parle de nouveau. Baisser, 1, {tomber, 1, 51 M La marchandise baisse de prix. Rabattre, 4, (see battre, 4, 36 J .) Lever, 1. (§ 144 — i.) Hausser. La farine a-t-elle hausse ou baisse ? Elle a baisse la fenetre, levez-la. Lesdenre'es. Lesdenrdesont hausse. Surf aire, * (like faire.*) Ne vous ayant pas surfait, je ne sau- rais rien rabattre. Une aune. Une yard ou verge. Tin metre. Rapporter, 1. Combien cet emploi (cette charge) vous rapporte-t-il (elle) par an ? Un emploi, une charge. Permettre*4: [de), permis. Permettez, (mettre.j SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 345 Soixante-cinqtjieme Th^me. 2de Sec. A-t-il reduit le prix de son velours de soie? Non. il dit qu'il ne rabattra rien. Ce marchand surfait trop. II assure qu'il ne surfait pas du tout, mais que comme ses marchandises sont de la meilleure qualite, il est oblige de vendre plus cher. — Voulez-vous m'introduire a un autre ? Je vous introduirai avec plaisir. — Qui a presente ce jeune avocat au president? Le ministre le lui a presente. Le roi a-t-il efre presente au ministre ? Non ; mais le ministre Pa ete au roi.— Puisque vous cormaissez M. Martin, voulez-vous me le pre- senter? Je vous le presenterai. II vient par ici. Dr. Prudieu, per- mettez moi (permit me) de vous presenter M. Martin, de Louisville. Dr., je suis charme d'avoir le plaisir de votre connaissance. C ; est avec beaucoup de plaisir, M., que je fais la votre. — Vous 1? a-t-il dit lui-meme ? Non, mais sa femme elle-meme me Pa dit. — Votre pere vous a-t-il permis (from permetlre, to permit) d'acheter 3 aunes de ce drap ? II me Pa permis. — Leur permet-il de se servir de son cheval? — Avez-vous leve la fenetre? — Le coton hausse-t-il ? What is the price of this cloth? I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. — I think (trouver) it very dear. Has the price of cloth not fallen ? It has not fallen ; the price of all goods (la marchandise) has fallen, except that of cloth, (excepte celui du drap.) — I will give you three crowns for it, (en.) — I cannot let you have (donner) it for (a) that price, for it costs me (couter, 1) more. — Will you have the goodness to show me some pieces (la piece) of English cloth? With much pleasure. — Does this silk suit you ? It does not suit me. — Why does it not suit you? Because it is too dear; if you will lower the price, (en rdbattre quelque chose,) I shall buy twenty yards of it. — Not having asked too much, I cannot take off anything. — You learn French ; does your master let you translate ? He lets me read, write, and translate. Had cotton risen in England, by the last news? Yes, it had risen } of a penny. — Then it will rise here. — Probably, (proba- blement.) — Is it true that produce and provisions are lower? I be- lieve they are the same, (au merne prix;) that they have neither risen nor sunk, (lowered.) — What is the price of a yard of your silk velvet? It is 4 dollars a yard. It is high. How beautiful it is! See! — Is flour high? Five dollars a barrel. — Will it not be lower in the fall ? It may lower, fall. — Will you permit me to use your fan? If he would reduce the price of his house, would you take it for your family? — W^ould he purchase 2 barrels of flour, if it was 4i dollars a barrel? — How do you do, to-day? I am very unwell, (tres-mal.) — How do you like that soup? I think (trouver) it is very bad; but since I have lost my appetite, (Vappetit.) I do 346 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. {!.) not like anything, (je ne trouve rien de bon.) — How much does that employment yield to your father ? It yields him more than four thousand (mille has no s in the plural) crowns. SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON, 66th.— Soixante-sixieme Legem, 66me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. A kind , sort, (a species.) What kind of fruit is that ? A stone (of a fruit). A plum stone. A stone of a peach, an apricot. Stone-fruit. Break these stones. One must break the stone before one comes at the kernel. A kernel. An almond. Kernel-fruit. A sweet almond. A bitter almond. It is a kernel-fruit. To gather, gathered. Gather. I gather, thou gatherest, he gathers. To gather fruit. To serve up the soup, the breakfast. To bring in the dessert. The fruit. An apricot. A peach. A plum. An anecdote. Roast meat. To cease, to leave off. I leave off reading. She does not leave off speaking. To avoid. To escape. To escape a misfortune. He ran away to avoid death. To flee, to take to flight, one 1 s heels, &c. To do without a thing. Can you do without bread 1 I can do without it. There are many things which we must do without. To depend, belong to, be connected with. This employment and the duties connected with it. That lesson and the exercises be- longing to it. Une espece. Quelle espece de fruit est cela, (or est-ce la ?) Un noyau. Un noyau de prune. Un noyau de peche, d'abricot. Fruits a noyau. Cassez ces noyaux. (92.) II faut casser le noyau pour en avoir l'amande: (a proverb.) Une amande, un pepin. Une amande. Fruits a pepin. Une amande douce, amere. C'est un fruit a pepin. Cueillir,* 2, cueilli. Cueillez. Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille. Cueillir du fruit. Servir la soupe, le dejeuner. Servir le dessert. Le fruit. Un abricot. Une peche. Une prune. Un© anecdote. Du roti. Cesser, 1, de. Je cesse de lire. Elle ne cesse de parler. (62 1 .) Eviter, 1, (de before infin.) Echapper, 1. t Echapper a un malheur. II a pris la fuite pour echapper a la mort. 'Prendre la fuite. Se passer de quelque chose. Pouvez-vous vous passer de pain ? Je puis (je peux) m'en passer. II y a bien des choses dont il faut se passer. Dependre, 4, de. Cet emploi et les devoirs qui en de- pendent. Cette lecon et les themes qui en de- pendent. SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 347 Soixante-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. Aimez-vous les amandes? Oui, je les aime douces. — L'epicier du coin vend-il de bonnes peches seches ? Non, les peches seches qu'il vend sont sures, trop sures. C'est dommage. — N ; est-il pas bientot temps que nous ayons des abricots ? Des abricots ? Ce n'est pas encore la saison (season.) II faut que les cerises et les fraises viennent (subj. § 151) avant. Nousn'avons pas encore eu ces fruits-la Dans la saison des fruits j'aime beaucoup les desserts. — Jean, si vous allez dans le jardin, ne cueillez pas les fruits. Non, je n'en cueillerai pas; mais ne faut-il pas que je cueille un bouquet? Si fait, cueillez en un pour votre cousine Marie. — Quelle espece de fruit est cela? Ce n 7 est pas un fruit. Qu ? est-ce done ? O'est une tomate (a tomato.) Elle ressemble aun fruit, n ? est-ce pas ? Dans la saison des tomates, je ne peux pas m'en passer, et vous? (62 3 , N. 1.) — Mon fils ne peut pas se passer de pain, les votres s'en passent-ils ? Pourquoi eviiez- vous M. Charles ? — Mile. Amanda a ete bien heureuse d'echapper a la mort. — Elle a echappe a un accident affreux, ne le saviez-vous pas? You must speak, (subj.) you must not be afraid. — I am too bashful (timide) to speak. I should like to (je voudrais bien) know why I am so bashful. — You would not be so bashful if you studied better. Do you think so ? To be sure, I do. — Have they already brought in the dessert? They have brought it in. — Do you like fruit? I like fruit, but I have no more appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese? I will eat a little. — Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese? I will eat a little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that? It is stone-fruit. — What is it called? It is called thus. — Will you wash your hands? I should like to (je voudrais bien) wash them, but I have no towel to (pour) wipe them with. — I will let you have (faire donner) a towel, some soap, and some water. I shall be much obliged (fort oblige) to you. May I ask you for (oserais-je vous demander) a little water ? Here is some, (en void.) Can you do without soap? As for soap, 1 can do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with. — Do you often do without soap ? There are many things which we must do without. — Why has that man run away? Because he had no other means of escaping the punishment (la punition) which he had deserved, (meriter.) — Why did your brothers not get (se procurer) a better horse ? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would have got a better. — Has your father arrived already ? Not yet, but we hope that he will arrive this very day, (aujourd'hui mane.) — Has your friend set out in time, (a temps?) I do not know, but I hope he has (quHl sera, 58 1 , Obs. 141) set out in time. 348 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) VOOABULAIBE. To execute a commission. To acquit one's self of a commis- sion, to do an errand. I have executed your commission. 2de Sec. S'acquitter, 1, oVune commission. Have you executed my commission ? * I have executed it. To do one's duty. To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one's duty. That man always does his duty. That man always fulfils his duty. To rely, to depend upon something. He depends upon it. I rely upon you. You may rely upon him. That is to say, (i. e.) Et ccstera, (etc.) My pen (quill) is better than yours. They will warm the soup. Dinner (or supper) is on the table, (is served up.) Do you choose any soup ? Shall I help you to some soup ? I will trouble you for a little. To serve up, to attend. Not that I know of, you know of. Je me suis acquitte de votre com- mission. Vous etes-vous acquitte de ma com- mission ? Avez-vous fait ma commission ? Je m'en suis acquitte. Faire son devoir. Remplir son devoir. Cet homme fait to uj ours son devoir. Cet homme s'aequitte toujours de son devoir. Compter, 1, sur quelque chose. II y compte. JJe compte sur vous. Je me fie a vous. f Vous pouvez vous fier a lui. < Vous pouvez vous y fier. ( Vous pouvez compter sur lui. C est-a-dire. Savoir. Et ccetera, (etc.) Ma plume est meilieure que la votre. On fera chauffer la soupe. On a servi. > t Vous servirai-je de la soupe ? t Je vous en demanderai un peu. Servir. * Pas que je sache t vous sachiez, (sub. $ 151.) 1 1 est impossible que je le receive a Je voudrais Men savoir. Je voudrais Men savoir pourquoi il le dit. Je voudrais bien savoir si . . . It is impossible that I should receive it in time, (for me to receive it.) I should like to know. I wonder why he says it. I wonder whether, (should like to know if. . .) Soixante-sixieme Th£me. 2de Sec. Que faut-il que nous fassions aujourd'hui? Je vous donne a etudier le vocabulaire de la soixante-sixieme lecon, seconde section ; et a preparer les themes Francais et Anglais qui en dependent (belong to it* connected with it.) Tachez de ne point faire de fautes. J'essaie toujours, mais je n 7 y reussis pas. Pierre (Peter) s'est-il ac- quitte de ma commission ? Pas que je sache. — Votre cousine parle- SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 349 t-elle plus que votre soeur? Elle lefait; non parce qu'elle parle mieux, mais parce qu'elle n'est pas si timide. — Pai une commission importante a faire, pour laquelle je compte sur vous. — Vous pouvez compter sur moi. Je m'en acquitterai de mon mieux. Je voudrais bien savoir si Fori peut compter sur notre domestique ! — Mile. Emilie n'est pas encore revenue, faut-il qa'on tienne (§151) la soupe chaude pour elle ? — Vous servirai-je un peu de soupe ? — Pourquoi n'en prenez-vous pas, si vous ne pouvez pas vous en passer ? — Que vous servirai-je ? — Mon neveu va a Norristown, voulez-vous qu'il y fasse quelque commission ? Have you executed my commission ? I have executed it. — Has your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? He has executed it. — Would you (voudriez-vous) execute a commission for me ? I am under so many obligations to you that I will always execute your commissions, when it shall please you to give me any. — Will you ask the merchant whether (si) he ean let me have (me donner) the horse at the price (au prix) which I have offered him ? I am sure that he would be satisfied if you would add a few crowns more. — If I were sure of that I would add a few crowns more. — Good morning, my children! have you done your task? You well know that we always do it; or else (ou bien) we must be sick, or we must have a good excuse, (une excuse.) I wonder whether you could tell me an anecdote? Will you try to relate one to us? (nous en raconter une?) — In English or in French? Not in English; but in French. It is impossible for me to relate it without making many mistakes. We think so ; therefore we will excuse them, (excuser, 1.) — One of the valets de chambre (un des valets de chambre) of Louis XIV. (de Louis XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to bed, (comme it se mettait au lit,) to recommend (de faire recommander) to the first president (d Monsieur le premier president) a law T suit (un proces) which he had against (contre) his father-in-law, and said, in urging him, (en le pressant :) "Alas, (Helas.) Sire, (Sire.) you have but to say one word." "Well," (Eh!) said Louis XIV., "it is not that which embarrasses me, (ce n J est pas de quoi je suis en peine ;) but tell me, (dis-moi.) if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, (a la place de. . . . ,) and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad (bien aise) if I said that word ? Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. Ho suffice, be sufficient, answer. Is that bread sufficient for you ? It ie sufficient for me. 1 suffice, thou dost suffice. 30 Suffire* 4, suffisant, suffit. Ce pain vous suffit-il ? II nie suffit. Je suffis, tu suffis. 350 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) Will that money be sufficient for that man ? It will be sufficient for him. Little wealth suffices for the wise. Has that sum been sufficient for that man? Was that man contented with that sum ? With those three dollars ? He was (satisfied with it, with them.) He has been contented with it. To be contented with something. It would be sufficient for him if you would only add a few crowns. He would be contented if you would only add a few crowns. To add. Add nothing to it. To embark, to go on board. A sail. To set sail. To set sail for. To sail for America. To sail. Under full sail. To sail under full sail. He embarked on the sixteenth of last month. He sailed on the third instant. The instant, the present month. The fourth or fifth instant. The letter is dated the 6th instant. To look at. Look at it, (him or her.) Soixante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. Je voudrais bien savoir quand le batiment mettra a la voile'? Le capitaine ne le dit-il pas dans sa lettre du quinze du courant ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Regardez-la. II dit seulement : Mon batiment fera voile incessamment, ce qui veut dire : sans delai, bientot, dans quelques jours. — Quelle est la date aujourd'hui ? C ; est le 20 du courant. — Faut-il que vous sachiez le jour que le batiment fera voile ? H est important que je lesache. (§ 151.) — Ce que vous avez sur votre liste de provisions suffira-t-iH La regarderai-je ? Ne Pavez-vous pas encore regardee ? Non. Si je Pavais regardee, je saurais si ce que vous avez suffirait. Eh bien ! regardez-la. Du fromage. 1 Voile, meaning a veil, a cover, is masculine. Ex. She has bought a veil Elle s'est, achefe un voile. Cet argent suffira t-il a cet homme ? (usually in the 3d pers. sing. ($• plur.) II lui suffira. Peu de bien suffit au sage. Cette somme a-t-elle sum* a. cet homme ? Cet homme s'est-il contente de cette somme ? De ces 3 gourdes ? (fem.) Elle lui a suffi. Elles lui ont suffi. II s'en est contente. Se contenter de quelque chose. Elle lui suffirait, si vous vouliezsewZe- ment y ajouter quelques €cus. II se contenterait, si vous vouliez seulement y ajouter quelques ecus. Ajouter, 1. N'y ajoutez rien. S 1 embarquer, 1. Une voile. 1 t Mettre a la voile. t Faire voile pour. Faire voile pour PAmerique, (aller en Amerique.) Marcher. A pleines voiles, (a toutes voiles.) Marcher a pleines voiles, (cingler.) II s'est embarque le seize du mois dernier. II a mis a la voile le trois courant. Le courant. Le quatre ou le cinq du courant. La lettre est du six du courant. Regarder, 1. Regardez-le, (la.) SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 351 du vin, de Peau de vie, du biscuit, du beurre, des amandes, des pruneaux, (prunes,) des raisins sees, (raisins,) du bceuf. Si vous n'avez pas de langues salees, (salt tongues,) il faut en ajouter. Com bien en ajouterai-je ? II faut que vous en ajoutiez au moins 5 ou 6. Vous passerez-vous dW/s J (eggs ?) Non, ni de poulets; car j'aime beaucoup les ceufs et les poulets. Ajoutez-les a la liste. What is that vessel coming under full sail ? It is the packet (paquebot) Susquehanna, from Liverpool. How fast it sails ! It sailed from Liverpool the 3d instant. It will soon come (arriver) to the wharf. Let me finish looking at your list, and then we will go and see who is in the packet. The last articles are chickens and eggs. — Will twelve pair of chickens be sufficient? I would think so. — And how many- eggs will you want? (vous faudra-t-il?) About twelve dozen, (dou- zaines.) or one hundred and fifty, will answer, (suffiront.) — Will you not want two hundred ? No, I guess twelve dozen will be enough. You will do well to put them up in salt. I wish I had everything arranged. I also. — On the list is there any tea, sugar, coffee, choco- late, pepper, and vinegar? Yes, I see all those articles. — Have you sent anything on board ? (d bord ?) I have already sent several chests full on board. We must, in going (en allant) to the Liverpool packet, see if they have been received, and where they have been put. Have they served up the ' soup % They have served it up some minutes ago. Then (alors) it must be cold : I like soup onl} T when it is hot. They will warm it for you. You will oblige me, (obliger.) — Shall I help you to some of this roast meat ? I will trouble you for a little. — Will you eat some of this mutton ? I thank you, I like fowl better, but a very small piece will suffice me. — May I offer you (vous offrirai-je) some wine ? I will trouble you for a little. — Is this bread sufficient for you 1 It would be sufficient for me if I was not very hungry. — When did your brother embark for America? He sailed on the 30th of last month. — Do you promise me to speak to your brother ? I promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon you. — Will you work harder (mieux) for next lesson than you have done for this? (53 1 , and $200.) I will work harder. — May I rely upon it? You may. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 67th.— Soixante-septieme Lecon, 67me Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To be a judge of something. I t Se connaitre en quelque chose. Are you a judge of Hoth ? I t Vous connaissez-vous en drap ? 852 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) I am a judge of it. I am not a judge of it. I am a good judge of it. I am not a good judge of it. To draw. To chalk, to trace, (to counterdraw.) To draw a landscape. To draw after life. The drawing. The drawer. Nature. Natural. To manage, or to go about a thing. How do you manage to make a fire without tongs ? I go about it so. You go about it the wrong way. I go about it the right way. How does your brother manage to do that ? Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle- ; verly. Awkwardly, unhandily, badly. To forbid. I forbid you to do that. To lower. To cast down one's eyes. The curtain (of a theatre). The curtain rises, falls. The stocks have fallen — risen. The day falls. Night comes on. It grows dark. It grows late, it is rather late. To stoop. Je m'y connais. Je ne m'y connais pas. Je m'y connais tres-bien. Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup. Des stiver, 1. Calquer, 1. Dessiner un paysage. Dessiner d'apres nature. Le dessin. Le dessinateur. La nature. Naturel, naturelle. S' y prendre. Comment vous y prenez-vous pour faire du feu sans pincettes I 1 Je m'y prends comme cela. Vous vous y prenez mal. Je m'y prends bien. Comment votre frere s'y prend-ii pour faire cela ? Adroitement. Maladroitement. Defendre, 4, (de av. l'inf.) Je vous defends de faire cela. Baisser, 1. t Baisser les yeux. Latoile (d'un theatre), le rideau. t La toile (le rideau) se leve, se baisse. Le change a baisse — hausse. Le jour baisse. II se fait nuit. II se fait tard. Se baisser. Soixante-septieme Th&me. Ire Sec. Je voudrais bien savoir (I wonder) qui se connait bien en che- vaux? M. Lenoir s'y connait. Etes-vous sur qu'il s'yconnaisse bien? (§ 151.) Oui ; j'en suis stir; car je m'y connais moi-meme, mais il s ? y connait mieux que moi. — Vous dessinez, je sais. Des- sinex-vous d'apres nature, ou copiez-vous ? Je copie, generalement. — Voulez-vous que je dessine quelque chose pom vous? Je vou- drais avoir une copie (a copy) de ce paysage. Jean peut vous en ressiner une copie. Croyez-vous qu'il veuille le faire ? (§ 151".) En 1 All nouns ending in Me are feminine, except the two following : un amu- lette, an amulet; un squelette, a skeleton ; and some compounds, as: un porte-mouchettes , asnufTer-stand ; un tire-botte, a boot-jack ; uncasse- noisette, rut-crackers. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 353 cas qu 7 il ne veuille pas, (In case he would not,) ne pouvez-vous pas le calquer? Comment voulez-vous le calquer, lorsqu'il est sous verre ? C'est vrai. Je n ; y pensais pas. Ne peut-on pas Poter du cadre? (frame.) Sans doute, on le pent. Comment vous y pren- driez-vous pour Poter? II faut d'abord oter les clous qui tiennent le dos du cadre. Mais pour cela il faut que nous ayons des pin- cettes. J ; ai une paire de pincettes. La voici. Voila un clou d'ote, (3 1 , Obs. 7.) 1 En voila deux d 7 6tes ; en voila trois. Ah 1 II n'y en a que trois. Alors ils sont tous otes. Mais attendez done ; ne nous est-il pas defendu d ; 6ter les gravures (engravings) des cadres pour calquer ? Are you a judge of cloth? I am a judge of it. — Will you buy some yards for me? (ra'en?) If you will give me the money, I will buy you some, (vous en.) — You will oblige (obliger) me. — Is that clerk a judge of cloth? He is not. — How do you manage to do that? I manage it so. — Will you show me how you manage it? I will, (je le veux bien.) — What must I do for my lesson of to-mor- row ? You will copy your exercises properly, learn the next voca- bulary, (vocabulaire suivant,) and write the exercises belonging to it. — How do you manage to get goods (des marchandises) without money? I buy on credit. — How does your sister manage to learn French without (52 1 ) a dictionary? She manages it thus. She manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother manage it? (Mais M. votre frere com- ment s'y prend-il ?) He manages it very awkwardly ; he reads and looks for the words in the dictionary. — He may (peut) learn in this manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sen- tence, (une seule phrase.) — Why does your sister cast down her eyes ? Is it because she is bashful ? She casts them down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Shall we breakfast in the garden, to-day? The weather is so fine, that we should (quHl faut) take advantage of it, (en profiter.) — How do you like that coffee ? I like it very much, (excellent.) — I wonder why you stoop ? I stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped, and in which I have put some money. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To smell, to feel. He smells of garlic ; she, of musk. To feel some one's pulse. Sentir.* (54 2 .) II sent Vail; elle, le muse. t Tater le pouls a quelqu'un. 1 After a noun, the past participle (used as an adjective, that is, without an auxiliary must be preceded by de or d\ (3 1 , Obs. 7. — 30 1 , Obs. 71.) 30* 354 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) To consent to a thing. I consent to it. To hide, to conceal. To hide one's self. The wit, the mind. Indeed. In fact. The truth. The effect. True. A true man. This is the right place for that pic- ture. To think much of one, (to esteem one.) To esteem some one. I do not think much of that man. I think much of him, (I esteem him much.) The flower, the bloom, the blossom. On a level with, even with. That man has his eyes on a level with his head, (prominent eyes.) To blossom, {to flourish.) To grow, growing, grown. I grow, thou growest, he or she grows, one grows, people grow. To grow rapidly, (fast.) To grow tall or big, grown tall. That child grows so fast that we may even see it. That child has grown very fast in a short time. That rain has made the corn grow. Corn. Indian corn. What a fine carnation ! What a good odor ! Has mignonette a fine scent, odor, or Le reseda sent-i! bon ? ou a-t-il une smell ? does it smell good, nice ? bonne odeur ? That heliotrope has a delightful scent. Cet heliotrope a une odeur delicieuse. To be witty, smart, talented. | t Avoir de l'esprit. Soixante-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. Quelle belle (what a fine) fleur vous avez-la ! Sent-elle bon ? Sentez-la et regardez-la. Elle est belle; mais elle ne sent pas bon. Quelle espeee de fleur est-ce ? Ne la connaissez-vous pas ? C'est 1 Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; but when it means to flourish, its pre- sent participle is florissant, and its imperfect indicative florissait, florissaient. Ex. Tin empire florissant, a flourishing empire ; une armee florissante, a flourishing army; cet auteur florissait sous son regne, that author flourished under his reign ; les arts et les sciences florissaient alors, arts and sciences were then flourishing. Consentir * a quelque chose. (54 2 .) J'y consens. Cacher,!. Secacher. Cachez-vous, L'esprit. En verite. En effet. La verite. L' effet. Vrai. Un homme vrai. Voila la vraie place de ce tableau. Faire cas de quelqu'un. Estimer, 1, quelqu'un. Je ne fais pas grand cas de cet homme. Je fais grand cas de lui, (je Festime beaucoup.) La fleur. A fleur de. Cet homme a les yeux a fleur de tete. Fleurir, 2. 1 Croitre* 4, croissant, cru. Je crois, tu crois, il ou elle croit, on croit. Croitre rapidement. Grandir, 2, grandi. t Cet enfant grandit a vue d'oeil. Cet enfant a bien grandi en peu de temps. Cette pluie a fait grandir les bles. Du ble. Du mais. Quel bel ozillet ! Quelle bonne SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 355 nn dahlie. — Ce beurre sent Pail. L'aimez-vous quand il a le gout d 7 ail? Je ne Paime ni quand il sent Pail ni quand il en a le gout. (24 2 , Obs. 55.) — Que pensez-vous des ouvrages de W. Irving? Pen fais grand cas. Et de ceux de C. D. ? Je n ; en fais pas grand cas. II y a trop de mots dedans. — Votre cuisine est-elle a fleur de terre ? Oui, comme presque toutes les cuisines modernes, ou que Pon batit a present. Les anciennes cuisines n'etaient pas a fleur de terre : mais au dessous. — Que cachez-vous? Quelque chose que je ne veux pas que vous voyiez, (§ 151.) En verite ! Je suis fdche que vous le cachiez; (§151) en avez-vous honte ? N ; importe, cela me concerne, et ne vous concerne pas. En effet, cela ne me regarde pas; mais je ne croyais pas que vous en auriez fait un secret. — Votre neveu grandit beaucoup, iPest-ce pas? — Sa sceur ne grandit-elle pas a vue d'ceil? — Qui ne grandit plus ? Which is the most flourishing city of the United States ? (des Etats- Unis ?) It is New York, I think ; but there are many other flourish- ing cities in the U. S., (E. U.) — Which are the other flourishing places'? (endroits?) Philadelphie, Baltimore. Boston. Cincinnati, La Nouvelle-Orleans. Pittsbourg, &c. &c. — Does Indian corn grow well this season? Yes, it looks very well. The last rain we had (have had) has made it grow very fast. The mind always shows itself — it cannot be hidden. — That lawyer is w T itty, is he not? Yes, indeed. How witty (d'esprit) is that young lady ! — Truth has always a good effect, has it not? No, not always: truth sometimes make us ene- mies. — Is your portrait (portrait) in its right (true) place ? No, the light comes from the wrong (mauvais) side. Your portrait ought to be on the other side of the parlor. Then it would be in its true light, (jour.) — Had you not better change its place ? The family will not consent to it. That engraving would be in its true place, there : and your portrait in its, here : if I were you, I would change them. It is indifferent to me, and as the rest of the family have arranged it so, I will not meddle with it. — Do you like the smell of this little flower? It is delightful. — Is it not a piece of mignonette ? No, it is a piece of heliotrope. — Why do your sisters hide themselves? They would not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they afraid of? They are afraid of their governess, (une institutrice.) who scolded them yesterday because they had not done their tasks, (leur devoir.) — Have you already seen my son ? I have not seen him yet ; how is he ? He is very well ) you will not be able to recognise him, for he has grown .very tall in a short time. 356 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) Vocabulaire, 8me See. A cover. A shelter. A cottage, a hut. | Un gite. Un abri. Une chaumiere. > Se mettre a/?l'abr-i de quelque chose. To shelter one's self from something To take shelter from something. Let us shelter ourselves from the rain, the wind. Let us enter that cottage in order to be sheltered from the storm, (the tempest.) Everywhere, all over, throughout. All over (throughout) the town. A shade. Under the shade. Let us sit down under the shade of that tree. To pretend. That man pretends to sleep. That young lady pretends to know French. They pretend to come near us. Now. From, since. From morning. From the break of day. From the cradle, from a child. From this time forward. As soon as. As soon as you please. As soon as I see him I shall speak to him. For fear of. To catch a cold. I will not go out for fear of catching a cold. He does not wish to go to town, for fear of meeting with one of his creditors. He does not wish to open his purse, for fear of losing his money. To transcribe fairly. A grammar. A French grammar. Mettons-nous a l'abri de lapluie, du vent. Entrons dans cette chaumiere, pour etre a couvert de la tempete,"ow pour etre a l'abri des injures du temps. Part out. Par toute la ville. Une ombre. 1 A V ombre. Allons nous asseoir a 1' ombre c/e cet arbre. Faire semblant de. Cet homme fait semblant de dormir. Cette demoiselle fait semblant de savoir le Fran§ais. lis font semblant de s'approcher de nous. Maintenant. Des. Des le matin. Des le point du jour. Des le berceau. Des a present. Des que. Des que vous voudrez. Des que je le verrai je lui parlerai. De crainte oxx.de peur de. Prendre froid, s'enrhumer. Je ne veux pas sortir, de peur de m'enrhumer. II ne veut pas aller a la ville, de peur de rencontrer un de ses creanciers. II ne veut pas ouvrir sa bourse, de peur de perdre son argent. Mettre* au net. (33 1 .) Tine grammaire. Une grammaire Franchise. Soixante-septieme Th^me. 3me Sec. Le ciel est couvert, ne ferons-nous pas mieux de prendre chacun un parapluie ? Oh ! non, cela n 7 en vaut pas la peine. S'il pleut, 1 Ombre, a shadow, is feminine ; game at cards, are masculine. but ombre, a kind of fish, and V ombre, a SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 357 nous trouverons quelqu'abri. Sans doute ; nous trouverons quelque maison ou quelque chaumiere. Allons, allons. — Tenez, mainte- nant il fait du soleil, et un soleil bien chaud. II faut que nous pre- nions (§ 151) le cote de Pombre. Oui, vous avez raison, allons a Pombre. Lorsque nous aurons passe par toute la ville, nous senti- rons assez le soleil a la carnpagne. Passerons-nous a Pombre. Quant a moi, je ne nren soucie pas. Je n ; ai pas trop ehaud de ce cote-ci, mais je ne vous empeche pas d'aller a Pabri des maisons, si vous avez trop chaud au soleil. Jacques (James) et moi, nous allons a Pombre, vous autres ; (47J, 1,) faites comme vous voudrez. — Samuel fait semblant de ne pas ($ 171 — 7) avoir peur du chaud, cependant, il le sent aussi bien que nous autres. — Tenez, (06s. 94,) voyez done ! Thomas a sa grammaire Francaise ! Eh bien ! qu'y trouvez vous d'extraordinaire? Si j'ai le temps j ; etudierai. J'ai deja mis mes themes au net, et vous ; avez-vous mis les votres an net? Je les mettrai ce soir. Why does that man give nothing to the poor? [aux pauvres ?) He is too avaricious, (avare ;) he does not wish to open his purse, for fear of losing his money. — What sort of weather is it ? It is very warm ■ it is long since we had any rain ) I believe we shall have a storm, [un or age.) — It may be, (cela se pent bien.) The wind blows, it thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I hear it, but the storm is still far off, [encore bien loin.) — Not so far as you think; see how it lightens. — It rains, it pours; what a shower! [quelle averse I) — If we go into some place [quelque part) we shall be sheltered from the storm. — Let us go into that cottage, then, [clone ;) w T e shall be shel- tered there from the wind and the rain. — The storm has ceased. We must go. Let us thank these good people for the shelter they have given us. We are much obliged to you. Adieu ! You are welcome. — W T here shall we go now? Which road shall we take? The shortest (court) will be the best. — We have too much sun, and I am still very tired : let us sit down under the shade of that tree. — W T ho is [quel est) that man who is sitting under the tree ? I do not know him. — It seems he [il par ait qu'il) wishes to be alone, [seul :) for when we offer (vouloir*) to approach him, he pretends to be asleep. — He is like your sister: she understands French very well, (fort bien;) but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to understand me. — Has not your uncle given the clerk (Dir. 3) some- thing to transcribe ? Yes, he has. — I wonder whether it is important that he should transcribe it (§ 151) immediately? Yes, it is, for fear the gentleman should go without the copy, (§151.) 358 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 6Sih.—Soixante-huitieme Legon, 6Sme Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. SECOND IMPERFECT TENSE.— Preterit. For its formation and use, see (§ 153,) and study it carefully. INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT. PRETERIT. To have, Avoir, I had. J'eus, tu eus, il eut, nous eumes, vous eutes, ils eurent. To be, Etre, I was. Je fus, fus, fut, fumes, futes, Had you money enough ? I had enough. Had he the pleasure of seeing her ? No, he was deprived of it. (To de- prive.) Had they no soup on that day ? They had none, but we had some. Had I less good luck than they ? You had as much as they, (fern.) Wast thou happy in thy choice ? I was not at all. Who was ? We were, they were ; but you were not. To go, Aller, I went. J'allai, To find, Trouver, I found. Je trouvai, vas, va. To bring-, Apporter, I brought. J'apportai, tas, ta, furent. J'er fumes, Eutes-vous asses d'argent ? eus assez. Eut-il le plaisir de la voir ? Non, ii en fut prive. {P river, 1.) N'eurent-ils pas de soupe ce jour-la ? Ils n'en eurent pas, mais nous en eumes. Eus-je moinsde bonheur qu'eux? Vous en eutes autant qu'elles. Fus-tu heureux dans ton choix ? Je ne le fus pas du tout. Qui le fut ? Nous le fumes, ils le furent ; mais vous ne le futes pas. alias, alia, allames, allates, allerent. vames, vates, verent. tames, tates, terent. Where did you go last night ? (§ 153.) I went nowhere, I stayed at home. Who went to the minister's ball ? None of the family went, but Sarah and Fanny will go to the consuV s ball. Did not the consul give one 3 weeks ago? Not the consul, but the ambassador and his wife gave one then. And it was there that his wife wore her beautiful wreath, was it not ? Did you find what you were seeking ? I did, but after looking long for it. Was the battle decisive ? It was completely so. The year before last. The week . . . Uiis steamboat. A steamship. Ou allates-vous hier soir? (time past.) Je n'allai nulle part, je restai a la maison. Qui alia au bal du ministre ? Personne (§ 153 — 3,) de la famille n'y alia, mais Sara et Fanny iront au bal du consul. Le consul n'en donna-t-il pas un il y a trois semaines ? Pas le consul, (§ 153 — 3,) maisl'am- bassadeur et son epouse en donne- rent un alors. Et ce fut la que son epouse porta son superbe bandeau, n'est-ce pas? Trouvates-vous ce que vous cher- chiez ? Je le trouvai, mais apres 1' avoir cherche long-temps. La bataille fut-elle decisive ? Elle le fut completement. U avant derniere annee. Semaine. Ce bateau d vapeur. Un natire a vapeur. SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) On board the steam packet. Now and then, from time to time. He gave it up on that account. A lord du paquebot a vapeur. De temps en temps. 11 V abandonna a, cause de cela. Soixante-huitieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Que trouvates-vous dans le sac que vous ramassates ? Py trouvai un mouchoir, une jolie bourse et un morceau de gateau. Trouvates- vous, sur le mouchoir, le nom de la personne a qui il appartient? Je Py trouvai. Allates-vous le lui rendre % Je Py envoyai par la domestique. L ; ambassadeur eut-il beaucoup de raonde hier? II n'eut presque personne ; il faisait trop chaud. Restates-vous long- temps a Saratoga? Je n ; y restai que quelques jours; mais mes freres y resterent plus de 3 semaines. Eutes-vous le temps d'y voir le consul % Non, il n'etait pas encore arrive quand je quittai Pen- droit; mais mes freres eurent le temps et le plaisirde Py rencontrer — Jackson etait-il a la Nouvelle Orleans quand vous y arrivates? La bataille du 8 Janvier fut-elle decisive ? Le fut-elle aussi complete- ment que celle de Waterloo? Eurent-elles de bonne musique a leur concert? Ne fus-je pas complaisant? Ces petites filles ne furent-elles pas obeissantes? Elles s'en allerent, n ; est-ce pas? Did you not go last week to see the great panorama ? I was unwell, so that I did not go; but almost all the family went. — Were you obliged to transcribe that note more than once ? I was obliged to transcribe it three times. — Did not your cousin get (avoir) the yellow fever when he was in Mobile the year before last? No, he did not get it; but my nephew and my niece had it. — Had they a light or a violent attack ? The latter had a light attack of it, but the former had a violent one, and he could hardly escape death, (ce fut avec peine quHl.) — Did you find your father at Burlington? I was lucky enough to find him there, at the moment he was going on board the steamboat*— Did you both stay in Burlington then ? No, he took me on board the steamboat with him and brought me here. What steamboat was it? (etait-ce?) It was the John Stevens.— Were there many persons on board? (y avait-il?) There were not many. — Did the office (employment, la charge) which your uncle Had, produce much to him ? The office and all the functions which belonged to it, produced him between 1500 and 2000 dollars a year, (15 cents et 2 mille gourdes.) — Had he much to do ? (not past. J \ r es, he had a great deal to do. — Did his occupation (occupation j make [use to make) him sick now and then ? Yes, now and then he was (used to be) sick. — Had he not, once, more to do than usual ? (past.) Yes, once he had a great deal more to do. — Was he sick then ? (past.) Yes, he was very sick that time. — Was he sick a long time ? Did he give up his office on that account ? Where did we go on that account ? Did we give it up on that account ? 360 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. IMPERFECT CONTINUED.— Preterit Continue. INFINITIVES. IMPERFECT. PRETERIT. To punish, punir, I punished, Je punis, nis, nit, nimes, nites, nirent. To succeed, reussir, I succeeded, Je reussis, sis, sit, simes, sites, sirent. To restore, rendre, I restored, Je rendis, dis, dit, dimes, dites, dirent. To owe, devoir, I owed, Je dus, dus, dut, dumes, dutes, durent. J'avais fini de lire quand il descendit. Avais-je trouve ma bourse quand vous perdites la votre ? I had done reading when he came down. Had I found my purse when you lost yours ? These examples, and some previously given, show that THE PLUPERFECT.— Le Plusqueparfait. ($154.) is formed in French as in English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. We had dined when he arrived. The king had named an admiral when he heard of you. (To name.) After having spoken, you went away with the colonel. After shaving, I washed and wiped my face. After having warmed themselves, they went into the garden. As soon as the bell rung, you awoke and you rose, (got up.) As soon as they called me, I got up. As soon as he was ready, he came to see me, and so did the colonel. As soon as we had our money, we agreed to that. As soon as he had his. horse, he came to show it me, and we tried it. After trying several times, they suc- ceeded in doing it. As soon as I saw him, I obtained what I wanted. As soon as I spoke to him, he kept his word, and did what I told him. The business was soon over. His word (meaning promise) of honor. Nous avions dine lorsquHl arriva. Le roi avait nomme un amiral, quand on luiparla de vous. {Nommer, I.) Apres avoir parle, vous vous en al- lates avec le colonel. Apres m'etre rase, je me lavai et rrC essuyai la figure. Apres s'etre chauffes, Us allerent au jar din. Des que la cloche sonna, vous vous reveilldtes, et vous vous levdtes. Des qu'ils m'appelerent, je me levai. Aussitot qu'il fut pret, il vint me voir, et le colonel vint aussi. Aussitot que nous eumes notre ar- gent, nous convinmes de cela. Aussitot qu'il eut son cheval, il vint me le montrer, et nous Vessaydmes. Apres avoir essaye plusieurs fois, ils parvinrent a le faire. Aussitot que je le vis, yobtins ce dont j'avais besoin. Aussitot que je lui parlai, il tint sa parole, et fit ce que je lui dis. L' affaire fut bientot faite. Sa parole (not mot) d'honneur. Soixante-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. Que faisiez-vous quand il arriva 1 Nous nous preparions a sortir. — Perdites-vous la partie d'echecs ? Oui ; je la perdis ; mais je gagnai la partie de billard. — Que demandates-vous au capitaine lorsque vous le rencontrates au quai? Je lui demandai si son colonel avait SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 361 ete voir Pambassadeur Anglais ? Repondit-il que oui? II ne me repondif rien. C'etait tres poli, n 7 est-ce pas ? Je crois qu'il n ; entendit pas ma question. C/est different. Vous aurait-il repondu s'il vous avait entendu? Je n ; en doute pas, car il est extremement poli et affable. — Est-il important que vous passiez chez le marchand de soie ? — N 7 y passerent-ils pas sans vous? — Vous donna-t-elle des ceufs pour dejeuner? — Vous en donnera-t-elle de nouveau? — Nous en denneriez-vous si nous ne les aimions pas? Did not Mr. N. Biddle sell his beautiful black horse to his sister-in- law? No, she did not buy it, — Why did she not buy it? Because she was afraid of the price. — What did he ask her for it ? I was told that he had asked her 450 dollars for it. — When did Sarah finish her task? She finished it at J past 9. — Did you finish yours before that hour? I finished mine 1 hour before. Who arrived this morn- ing by the steamboat ? I do not know who arrived this morning, but Julius arrived yesterday, (past.) by the steam packet. — What news has the steamer brought ? It brought favorable news. 1 Cotton and provisions kept up (maintenir) their prices, and the continent of Europe was a little more quiet. At what time does your uncle William generally get up ? He rises generally early. I thought so. — Did he get up early to-day ? No. he did not, (not past.) — Did he get up early yesterday? (past.) No, he did not. — Why did he not get up to-day and yesterday (mind the distinction to be observed in French) as early as usual ? Because he was a little unwell (not has been), and is yet so. Do you not take your drawing lessons (legons de dessin) early every other day? Yes, we take them pretty early. — Did you receive the last as early as usual? No, we received it only after breakfast. — Why did you receive it only after breakfast? Because our teacher did not come before. — Did you buy your books at Appleton's, corner of Chestnut and 7th ? (de la Ime ?) Yes, I did : it is there that I always buy books. 1 Although, speaking of Julius's arrival, the French may use the Preterit, and say : // arriva hier, because, on his landing, there was a completion of the action ; yet they cannot, speaking of the steamer, translate : It brought favorable news, by : Il apporta des ?iouvelles favorables, because we are not yet fully acquainted with the news it brought, and, of course, there is no completion of the action. This is a nice distinction, which the judicious pupil must treasure up. But had the steamer been in port two or three weeks, fl apporta des nouvelles favorables, might be used ; because the knowledge of the news it brought might be supposed complete, and we must recollect that the Preterit is used, only, when " the event or action is past and finished." 31 362 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. SECOND PLUPERFECT— Pre^r^ Anterieur} For its formation and use see ($ 155.) That article must be carefully learned. To elucidate the two rules given in it, we here put a few examples. On 1st Rule. — The conjunctive adverb connected with the simple tense. Had we not dined when he came ? Had she finished when you called her ? ($ 155—1.) Had we not dined when he came, or used to come ? She had finished when you were call- ing her, or used to call her. Here, the Plusqueparfait is used, whether the simple tense is the Parfait t the Preterit, or the Imparfait. Rule 2d. The conjunctive adverb connected with the compound tense. N'avions-nous pas dine quand il vint ? Avait-elle fini quand vousl' appelates, ou l'avez appelee ? N'avions-nous pas dine quand il venait ? Elle avait fini quand vous l'appeliez. When they had done playing, they be- gan to sing. (§ 155 — 2.) When they had done playing, they usually began to sing. When I had dined, it struck 12. As soon as 1 had dined, it used to strike 12. He had done in a moment, (if only once.) He had done in a moment, (if more than once.) Quand Us eurent acheve de jouer, lis se mirent a chanter. (Pret.) Quand ils avaient fini de jouer, ils se mettaient a chanter. (Imparf.) Quand j'ews dint, midi sonna. Aussitot que ^avais dine, midi son- nait. (Imparf.) II eutfini en un moment. II avait fini en un moment. Soixante-huitieme Th£me. 3me Sec. Que fites-vous quand vous eutes fini votre lettre? J ; allai chez mon frere, qui me mena au paquebot a vapeur, ou j'eus le plaisir de trouver une de mes anciennes amies que je n'avais pas vue depuis plusieurs annees. — Que faisait-elle des qu'elie avait fini de prendre sa lecon de chant? Elle allait chez son amie Jeanne, et toutes deux se promenaient dans le jardin, oil elles cueillaient, ou des fleurs pour le salon, ou des fruits pour le dejeuner. — Qu ; as-tu fait apres t'etre leve ce matin? (not past.) — Apres avoir lu les lettres du comte polonais. j'ai ete voir le theatre du prince, que je n'avais pas encore vu. — Que fis-tu hier matin apres t'etre leve? J'allai au marche pour y acheter nos provisions, et quand je fus revenu a la maison, je lus mes lettres et j'y repondis.— Que faisaient vos amis 1 There is another Preterit Anterieur, called the Priterit Anterieur In* Hejini, which is, however, seldom employed. SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 363 tous les matins a la campagne Pete dernier ? lis prenaient leurs fusils et se rendaient (se r cadre, 4, to repair, to go) a Photel du village pour y prendre leurs papiers et leurs lettres. What did the colonel do when he had breakfasted, this morning ? He shaved and went out. (not past.) — Did he shave and go out yes- terday, after breakfast, also ? (past.) No, he shaved before break- fast, and went out after. — Had he gone out when you came in'? He had gone out long before. — Did he read the gazette before he went out? No. he read something else, (quelqa' autre chose.) — After reading, did he do anything else before he went out? He smoked a cigar. — Did he use to smoke when he was in the woods? No he did not, because he could not get good cigars, and rather than smoke bad tobacco, he would not smoke (62 2 , N. 1) at all. — What did your friend do after he had been walking? He went to the baron ; s house. — Did the baron receive him well? Yes, he received him as well as he had (avait) received him before. W 7 hen do you set out? I do not set out till (je ne pars que) to morrow ; for before I leave I will once more see my good friends. — What did your children do when they had breakfasted? They w r ent a walking with their dear preceptor, (precepteur.) — Where did your uncle go after he had warmed himself? He went nowhere. After he had warmed himself he undressed and went to bed. — At what o'clock did he get up? He got up at sunrise. — Did you wake him? I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before me. — W T hat did your cousin do when he heard of the death (la mort) of his best friend? He was much afflicted, (tres-afflige.) and went to bed without saying a word. — Did you shave before you break- fasted? I shaved when I had breakfasted. — Did you go to bed when you had eaten supper? When I had eaten supper I wrote my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. SIXTY-NINTH LESSON, 69th.—- Soixante-neuvieme Lcgon, 69me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To get beaten, (whipped.) To get pnid. To get one's self invited to line. At first. Firstly, ($ 170.) Secondly. Thirdly, &c. t Se faire battre. t Se faire payer. t Se faire inviter a diner. D'abord. Premierement, en premier lieu. Secondement, en second lieu. Troisieniement,en troisieme lieu. Is your mother at home ? \ Votre mere est-elle chez elle ? C Votre mere est-elle a la maison? 364 SIXTY-NTNTH LESSON. (1.) Elle y est. Elle n'y est pas. Je vais chez elle. Un sujet, une raison, une cause. Un sujet de chagrin. Un sujet de tristesse. Elle a un sujet de tristesse. Le chagrin, la tristesse. Cette femme est-elle prete a sortir : Elle Test. Ne l'est-elle pas? Malgre, en depit de. Malgre cela. En depit de vous. Malgre lui, elle. En depit d'eux. Faire en sorte de. Faites-vous en sorte de finir votre ouvrag.e tous les samedis soir ? Faites-vous en sorte d' avoir fini votre ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? Faites en sorte de faire cela pour m'obliger. Je ferai tout pour vous obliger. Donner sur. La fenetre donne sur la rue. La fenetre donne sur la riviere. La porte de derriere donne sur le jardin. Attacher, 1. Attaeher ses souliers. On l'attacha a un arbre. Jusqu'd ce que vous arriviez a la maison. Soixante-nettvieme Theme. Ire Sec. Comme M. Salomon vient tard pour nous faire visite ! II vient pour se faire inviter a diner. — Allates-vous chez le colonel avant- hier? Non, je n'y allai pas. Y etes-vous alle ce matin? Non, et je n'irai pas avant sa soiree musicale. Et pourquoi pas? D'abord, parce que je ne lui dois point de visite, et secondement, parce qu'on pourrait croire que je veux me faire inviter. — Ce garcon ne s'est-il pas fait battre ? II est si mechant qu 7 il se fit battre deux fois la semaine passee. — M. D vous doit-il encore? Non. je me suis fait payer. — Quel sujet de chagrin cette jeune dame a-t-elle ? A-t- elle perdu son mari? Non, elle a perdu son oiseau favori. Est-ce la ce qui cause son chagrin ? Je crois que oui. — lis ne veulent pas que vous fassiez cela. N'importe, je le ferai en depit d'eux. — Fera- t-elle en sorte de venir? — Lorsqiril sut qu'elle irirait pas, il fit en sorte de s'y rendre, n'est-ce pas? When had you finished your task ? I had finished it when you came in. (§ 155 — 1, 2.) — As soon as Cresar (Cesar) had crossed She is. She is not. I am going to her house. A cause, a reason. A cause of complaint. A cause of sadness. She has reason to be sad. Grief, sorrow, sadness. Is that woman ready to go out ? She is. Is she not ? Notwithstanding, in spite of. Notwithstanding that — you. In spite of him, her, them. To contrive, to manage. Do you manage to finish your work every Saturday night ? Do you manage to have your work done every Saturday night ? Try to do that to oblige me. I will do everything to oblige you. To command, look upon, overlook. The window looks into the street. The window looks out upon the river. The back-door looks into the garden. To fasten, to tie. To tie his shoes. He was fastened to a tree. Until you get home. (§ 151.) SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 365 {passer) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (deliberer:) he was obliged (devoir) to conquer (vaincre) or to die. — An emperor (un empereur) who was irritated at (irrite contre) an astrologer, (un astro- logue.) asked him : " Wretch ! what death (de quelle) dost thou believe thou wilt die V' Cl I shall die of a fever," replied the astrologer. •• Thou liest/ ; said the emperor. " thou wilt die this instant of a vio- lent death/"' As soon as he was seized, (saisir.) he said to the em- peror, Sire, (Seigneur.) order some one to feel (ordonnez qu'on me tdte) 1 my pulse, (24 2 , Obs. 55) and it will be found that I have a fever/'" This sally (cette saillie) saved his life. Do you perceive yonder house ? (cette maison Id-bas ?) I do. — Had you perceived it before 1 I had not. — Would you have perceived it if I had not shown it to you? May be so, (peut etre que oui,) may be not. But now that you have shown it to me, what kind of a house is it ? It is an inn, (une auberge.) — If you agree, we will go into it, to drink a glass of wine or cider, for I am very thirsty. Try (faites en sorte) to keep your thirst until you get home. It does not suit men like us to enter (dans) inns. I see that the inn overlooks the river. And as the house is high, it commands a large portion of the country. — You appear sad : what cause of grief have you ? If you were as thirsty as I am, you would also have a cause for grief. — Are you always thirsty when you see an inn ? I once saw a small black horse that managed to stop at every inn before which he passed. Ah! ah! I guess he was thirsty too. — Did the colonel pay you last week ? No, he could not. He might have done it, if his nephew had not spent all his money • but he will manage to pay me to-morrow. ■ Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To drown. I Noyer, 1. To drown a dog, a cat. I Noyer un chien, un chat. To be drowned, to be drowning. > m , % xc , & , > be noyer. 1 o drown one s self, to get drowned. ) )get To leap through the window. To throw out of the window. I am drowning. He jumped out of the window. The cattle. To keep warm. To keep cool. To keep clean. To keep one's self up, straight. Keep yourself properly. To keep on one's guard against some one. Sauter par la fenetre. Jeter par la fenetre. Je me noie. (144 — 3.) II sauta par la fenetre. Le betail ; plur. les bestiaux. t Se tenir chaud. t Se tenir frais. Se tenir propre. Se tenir droit. Tenez-vous comme il faut . . . bien. t Se tenir en garde contre quelqu'un. 1 Ordonner que . . (order that . . .) requires the subjunctive after it. SI * 366 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) Keep on your guard against that man. To take care {to beware) of somebody or something. If you do not take care of that horse, it will kick you. Take care that you do not fall. To keep on one's guard against some one. To beware of somebody or some- thing. Keep on your guard against that man. Take care. A thought. An idea. A sally. To be struck with a thought. A thought strikes me. That never crossed my mind. To take it into one's head. He took it into his head lately to rob me. What is in your head ? t Tenez-vous en garde contre cet homme. Prendre garde d quelqu'un ou d quelque chose. Si vous ne prenez pas garde a ce cheval, il vous donnera un coup de pied, t Prenez garde de tomber. t Se tenir tetre) sur ses gardes avec quelqu'un. t Se garder de quelqu'un ou quelque chose, t Tenez-vous sur vos gardes avec cet homme. Prenez garde. Une pensee. Une idee. Une saillie. Venir en pensee, (a l'idee, a l'esprit.) II me vient une pensee. Cela ne m'est jamais venu a l'esprit. t S'aviser, 1. t II s'avisa 1' autre jour de me voler t De quoi vous avisez-vous ? Soixante-neuvieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Avez-vous vu ce mediant petit garcon attacher ce pauvre petit chien, le jeter dans la riviere, et le noyer ? Si je l'avais vu, j'aurais fait en sorte de Pen empecher. J*ai essaye de le faire ; mais je n'ai pu y reussir. — La petite fille qui tomba dans l'eau, de la fenetre du bateau a vapeur, se noya-t-elle ? Non, on la sauva, dans un petit bateau. — Le voleur fut-il pris? Non, il sauta par la fenetre et fit en sorte de se sauver. — Vous etes sur un banc casse j prenez garde de tomber. Py prendrai garde. — Voyez comme cette jeune demoiselle aux cheveux noirs se tient bien ! Oui, c'est un plaisir de voir comme elle se tient ! — Si vous vous approchez trop de ce cheval, il vous don- nera un coup de pied. Py prendrai garde. — Faites-vous des affaires avec cet homme la-bas ? Lequel ? Celui au chapeau blanc. Non, j'en faisais autrefois; mais a present je me tiens sur mes gardes contre lui. — Ne s'avisa-t-elle pas de revenir ici l'autre jour'? Ne craignez rien. II ne s'avisera plus de le faire. You appear very well satisfied ; what thought struck you ? Some- thing which had never crossed my mind before. — What is it 1 Should I tell you, (if I were,) you would be as wise as I. — Did William jump out of the window? Yes, he did. — What did he do after jumping out of the window? After he had jumped, he first ran to the garden gate, opened it and then ran towards the bridge. — Did he SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 367 go as far as the bridge ? No, there were some cattle in the road, and he was afraid of them, so that he stopped. Are the cattle as large here as there ? No, the cattle (bestiaux) are larger there than here. — How can I keep myself warm ? Put on a warmer coat. — Where must I put the butter to keep it cool ? You must put it in the cellar. — Who is that little boy? He is the baker's son. — I admire him ; for he always keeps himself so clean. — Does your cook keep her kitchen clean ? Why do the cattle go in the shade ? Did Thomas dare (s'aviser) to ask you for money'? Yes, he did. — Did you lend him any ? No, I was on my guard against him. — What was the cause of your quarrel with the gardener's boy ? He took it into his head (or he dared) to call me a fool. — Did you not beat him after he had called you so ? I did, soundly, (comm H faut.) — Why do you laugh at me ? I do not laugh at you, but at your coat. — Does it not look like (63 1 ) yours? It does not look like it, for mine is short (court) and yours is too long, (long ;) mine is black and yours is green. — Why do you associate with (63 2 ) that man? I would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great ser- vices, (le service.) Do not trust him, (ne vous y fiez pas,) for if you are not on your guard, he will cheat (tromper) you. Vocabttlaire. 3me Sec. In my, your, his or her place. We must put everything in its place. Around, round. All around. We sailed around England. They went about the town to look at all the curiosities. To go around the house. To go about the house. How much does that cost you ? How much does this book cost you ? It costs me three crowns and a half. That table costs him twenty crowns. Alone, by one's self. I was alone. One woman only. One God. God alone can do that. The very thought of it is criminal. A single reading is not sufficient to satisfy a mind that has a true taste. To kill by shooting. To blow out some one's brains. A ma, votre, sa place. II faut mettre chaque chose a sa place. Autour. Tout autour. Nous naviguames autour de 1' Angle- terre. t lis allerent 9a et la dans la ville, pour en voir toutes les curiosites. Aller autour de la maison. Faire le tour de la maison. Aller ^a et la dans la maison. Combien cela vous coute-t-il ? Combien ce livre vous coute-t-il? 11 me coute trois ecus et demi. Cetle table lui coute vingt ecus. Seul ; fern, seule. J'etais seul. Une seule femme. Un seul Dieu. Dieu seul peut faire cela. La seule pense'ede cela est criminelle. Une seule lecture ne suffit pas pour contenter un homme qui a du gout. Tuer oVun coup oVarme a feu. Bruler la cervelle a quelqu'un. 368 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) To shoot one's self with a pistol. He has blown out his brains. He has blown out his brains with a pistol. He served for a long time, acquired honors, and died contented. Obs. 153. In narratives, when the verbs are in the same tense, the pro- nouns of the third person are not repeated. He arrived poor, grew rich in a short time, and lost all in a still shorter time. Se bruler la cervelle dun coup de pistolet. II s'est brule la cervelle. II s'est brule la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet. II servit long-temps, parvint aux honneurs, et mourut content. II arriva pauvre, devint riche en peu de temps, et perdit tout en moins de temps encore. Soixante-neuvieme Theme. 3me Sec. A votre place je ne laisserais pas mes livres et raes papiers ca et la, mais je mettrais chaque chose a sa place. Je tache de tenii chaque chose a sa place ; mais je ne puis y reussir. — Pourquoi a-t-on mis cela autour de ce jeune arbre 1 Pour empecher le betail de le mordre et de le casser. — Le capitaine navigua-t-il autour de Pen- droit % II navigua tout au tour dans son bateau. Ne descendit-il pas ? Si fait, il descendit. N'attacha-t-il pas son bateau a un arbre ? II Py attacha. — Lut-il le livre ? II le lut en un seul jour. — Etait-elle seule quand le voleur entra? Oui, elle etait seule. Voulut-il lui bruler la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet? Oui; mais comme elle allait prendre une prise de tabac, elle jeta tout son tabac dans les yeux du voleur, qui tira son coup sans la toucher. II lui vint une heureuse idee, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle eut vraiment une heureuse pensee. — Combien ce parapluie vous coute-t-il? — Ce drap-la vous a-t-il coute 4 gourdes la verge ? — Cette maison lui coutera au moins 15,000 gourdes, n'est-ce pas % — Dieu seul connait notre destinee. (fate,) n'est-ce pas % What is the matter with you ? Why do you look so melancholy ? (avoir Pair melancolique?) — I should not look so melancholy if I had no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (49 2 ) that one of my best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best friends has drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself? She drowned herself in ihe river which is behind her house. Yes- terday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose without saying a word to any one, (d personnel leaped out of the window which looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river, w T h ere she was drowned. — I have a great mind (grar.de envie) to bathe (se baigner) to-day. — Where will you bathe ? In the river. — Are you not afraid of being drowned ? Oh, no ! I can swim. — Who taught SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 369 you % Last summer I took a few lessons in the swimming-school, (a Vecole de natation.) Were you not afraid to go into the water before you could swim ? A little, but I could not have learned without going into the water. — You did not think like the man who said : I will go into the water only when I know how to swim. There are many who. like that man. think that they will try to speak French only when they know how. — Do they not know that if they do not try to speak they can- not learn? I guess they forget it. — Why do you work so much? I work in order to be one day useful to my country. — Would you copy your exercises if I copied mine % I would copy them if you copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had transcribed mine ? She would have transcribed it. — Would she have set out if 1 had set out? I cannot tell you what she would have done if you had set out. SEVENTIETH LESSON, 70th.— Soixante et dixieme Legt k, 70me. Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. As we began to use the verb in the Imperative mood from the 8th lesson, and referred to the article in the Synopsis in the (252), and a ll subsequent lessons, THE IMPERATIVE MOOD— U Imperatif will be nothing new to the student. However, as that mood must be found somewhere, we place it here. See, for its formaiion and use, (§ 150.) That article must be carefully studied. Have patience. •Be (you) attentive, patient, affable. Go ye there. Do not go there. Give it to me. Do not give it to me. Send it to him. Lend it to me. Have the goodness to hand me that plate. To borrow . ... of or from. I will borrow some money of you. T will borrow that money of you. Borrow it of (or from> him. Do not borrow it of him. 1 borrow it from him. Do not tell him or her. Tell her. Return it to them. (§ 150 — 8.) Ayez patience. Soyez attentif, patient, affable. Allez-y. N'y allez pas. ($ 150—8.) Donnez-le-moi. Ne me le donnez pas. Envoyez-le-lui. Pretez-le-moi. Ayez la bonte de me passer ce plat. Emprunter, 1 ... d. Je veux vous emprunter de l'argent. Je veux vous emprunter cet argent. Empruntez-le-lui. Ne le lui empruntez pas. Je le lui emprunte. Ne le lui dites pas. Dites-le-lai. Rendez-le, (-la-)-leur. 370 SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) Do not return it to them. Patience, impatience. The neighbor. The snuff-box. The segar-box. Be ye good. Be not (so). (§ 150—8.) Know it. Do not. Obey your masters, and never give them any trouble. Pay what you owe, comfort the af- flicted, and do good to those that have offended you. Love God, and thy neighbor as thy- self. To obey. Obey your father. To comfort. Comfort them. To offend. Offend no one. Let us always love and practise vir- tue, and we shall be happy both in this life and in the next. To practise. Let us see which of us can shoot best. To express. Express your wish to your friend. To express one's self. Express your- self. To make one's self understood. Make yourself understood. To accustom. Children must early be accustomed to labor. To accustom one's self to something. To be accustomed to a thing. T am accustomed to it. Ne le leur rendez pas. La patience, l'impatience. Le prochain. La tabatiere. La boite a cigares, Soyez bons. Ne le soyez pas. Sachez-le. Ne le sachez pas. Obeissez a vos maitres, et ne leui donnez jamais de chagrin. Payez ce que vous devez, consolez les malheureux, et faites du bien a ceux qui vous ont offenses, t Aimez le bon Dieu, et le prochain comme vous-meme. Obeir, 2, d. Obeissez a votre pere. Consoler, 1. Consolez-les. Oflenser, 1. N'offensez personne. Aimons et pratiquons toujours la vertu, et nous serons heureux dans cette vie et dans 1' autre. Pratiquer, 1. Voyons qui tirera le mieux. Exprimer, 1. Exprimez votre souhait a votre ami. S'exprimer, 1. Exprimez-vous. Se faire comprendre. Faites-vous comprendre. Accoutumer, 1, a (av. l'inf.) II faut, de bonne heure, accoutumer les enfants au travail. S' accoutumer a quelque chose. Etre accoutume a, quelque chose. J'y suis accoutume. Soixante et DixiEME Theme. Ire Sec. Ayez de la patience, soyez attentif, et vous reussirez. Je ferai en sorte d'etre patient et attentif. — Si vous avez ma Vie de Washington, donnez-la-moi. Je vous Paurais deja donnee, si vous aviez ete ici. Hier des que je Peus finie, je la mis dans mon pupitre pour vous la donner, mais vous ne vintes pas. — Faites vos themes; pourquoi ne les faites-vous pas ? Mon frere n'est pas a la maison. II ne faut pas que vous les lui fassiez faire. Je ne les lui fait pas faire, mais il a la clef du pupitre. Non, la voici. Ouvrez-le, prenez votre livre, votre carrier, et tout ce qu'il vous faut, et commencez. Je vais m'y mettre a Pinstant. — Que fait Sara ? Elle lit le livre que vous lui avez prete. Elle a tort d'etre toujours a lire. Dites-lui de dessiner ce paysage. (67 ! .) Et lorsqn'elle Paura fini, pourra-t-elle se mettre a SEVENTIETH LESSON. (2.) 371 la lecture ? (reading?) Non, alors faites-lui decliner (to decline) quel- ques noms avec des adjectifs. Comment? Comme ceci: La belle pomme ; de la belle pomrae, a la belle pomme. Les poires mures, (ripe pears,) des poires mures, aux poires mures. Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters (changer) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (empirer le mat.) Be not afraid of your creditors; be sure that they will do you no harm. They will wait, if you cannot pay them yet. — Pay me what you owe me, will you ? As soon as I have money, I will pay all that you have advanced (avancer) for me. Don ; t you forget ! you hear ! I shall not forget, you may depend upon it, for I think of it (fy pense) every day. I am your debtor, (le debiteur,) and I shall never deny (nier) it. — What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray lend it me. — What do you wish to do with it? I wish to show it to my sister. — Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — Do not fear, (Ne craignez rien.) What do you want of my brother ? I want to borrow some money of him. — Borrow some of somebody else, (d un autre.) — If he will not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. You will do well. — Do not wish for (souhaiter) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence (la Providence) has given you, and remember that there are many men who have not what you have. As life is short, (court,) let us endeavor (65 1 ) to make it (56 3 , 06s. 137) as agreeable (agreable) as possible, (qu'il est possible.) But let us also remember that the abuse (Vabus) of pleasure (in the plural in French) makes it bitter, (amere, fern.) — What must we do in order to be happy? Always (§ 170) love and practise virtue, and you will be happy both in this life and in the next. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To have the habit of. I Avoir 1' habitude de . . I cannot express myself in French, Je ne puis pas bien m'exprimer en for I am not in the habit of speak- ing. You speak properly. To converse, to chatter, to prate. A prattler. A chatterer. To practise. I practise speaking. To permit, to allow. Permit me to go (there.) I do. Francois, parce que je n'ai pas l'ha- bitude de parler. Vous parlez comme il faut. Causer, 1. Bavarder, 1. Jaser, 1. Un causeur, fern, euse. 1 Un jaseur,/m. euse. Exercer, 1. Je m'exerce a parler. Permettre* 2, de. (Comme mettre, 25 1 , 33 l .) Permettez-moi d'y aller. Je vous le permets. Tine causeuse means also a small sofa for two persons. 372 SEVENTIETH 1 ESSON. (2.) I do not permit her to go. The permission, the permit. Do good to the poor, have compassion on the unfortunate, and God will take care of the rest. To do good to some one. To have compassion on some one. Compassion. Pity. The rest. If he comes, tell him I am in the gar- den, under the jasmin bower. Je ne lui permets pas d'y aller. La permission, le permis. Faites du bien aux pauvres, ayez compassion des malheureux, et le bon Dieu aura soin du reste. Faire du bien a quelqu'un. Avoir compassion de quelqu'un. La compassion. La pitie. Le reste. »S' il vient, dites-lui que je suis au jar- din, sous le berceau de jasmin. Obs. 154. The letter i suffers elision in the conjunction si, if, before the personal pronouns, il, he ; Us, they ; but not before elle or elles. (21 2 , Obs. 47.) Ask the merchant whether he can l«»t | Demandez au marchand s'il peut me me have the horse at the price donner le cheval au prix que je lui which I have offered him. ai offert. I read, and was told. ' j ai lu, et Von m'a raconte. Obs. 155. The indefinite pronoun on takes a euphonic V after the words et, ou, ou, si, que, and qui. On y rit et Von y pleure tour a tour. Si Von savait ce que vous avez fait. Le pays ou Von trouve le diamant. On vous a dit, ou Von vous dira bientot. Ce que Von con§oit bien s'enonce clairement. Qui aime-t-on ? On aime ceux a qui Ton doit son bonheur. Peut-on etre grand sans etre juste ? On ne peut etre grand qu'autant que Ton est juste. There they laugh and weep by turns. If they knew what you have done. The country where diamonds are found. You have been, or will soon be told. We say with precision what we un- derstand well. Whom do people love ? Those to whom they owe their happiness. Can one be great without being just ? One can be great only inasmuch as he is just. Obs. 156. But the euphonic V is omitted, when on is followed by le, la. or les. Say : Je ne veux pas qiVon le tourmente, I do not wish him to be molested, and not que Von le, &c, which would be harsher than qu J on le. Soixante et dixieme Theme. 2de Sec. Bon jour. Mile. N Ah ! vous voila enfin. Je vous ai attendue avec impatience. — Vous etes une causeuse, je crois. Vous me par- donnerez, n'est-ce pas ; machere 1 Je n'ai pas cause, je vous assure ; mais je n'ai pas pu venir (N. 62 2 ) plus tot. Permettez-moi de voir ce que vous avez apporte. Vous permettre de le regarder ! Je Tai apporte expres (on purpose) pour vous le montrer. Tenez, le voila. prenez-le. — Je le tiens. Ah! que c'est joli ! Vous exercez-vous a peindre ? Je pratique quelque fois. Mais comment se porte madame votre mere ? On dit qu'elle se porte mieux depuis qu'elle est aux eaux SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 373 (at the springs) et Pon croit qu'elle sera bientot guerie. Que je suis cnarmee de Papprendre ! — Votre pere vous permit-il d'aller au bal avant-hier ? Oui, des que je lui eus demande il m'en donna la per- mission. — Salomon a-t-il compassion des pauvres? Lui! II n ; a cornpassioa de personne. — Parlons Franc ais. Ayez la bonte de par- ler, vous, et moi, je vous repondrai en Anglais. Vous parlez tout aussi bien que moi. Vous plaisantez, (plaisanter, 1 3 to jest.) Non ; je ne plaisante pas. Vous me rlattez pour me faire parler. Since (vuisque) we wish to be happy , let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the unfortunate ; let us obey our mas- ters, and never give them any trouble ; let us comfort the unfortunate (les infortunes,) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those (et ne haissons pas ceux) that have offended us; in short, (enun mot,) let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. — My son, in order to be loved you must be laborious (laborieux) and good. Thou art accused (on f accuse) of having been idle and negligent (negligent) in thy affairs. Thou knowest, however, (pourtant,) that thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being lately (Vautre jour) in town, I received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly (fort) complained of thee. Do not weep, (pleurer ;) now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and be a good boy, (sage,) otherwise (autrement) thou wilt get nothing for dinner, (d diner.) I shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certainly (certainement) be satisfied with me. — Has the little boy kept his word? (tenir* parole?) Not quite: for after having said that, he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table, (s€ mit d une table,) and fell asleep, (s'endormit.) " He is a very good boy when he sleeps/' said his father, seeing him some time (quelque temps) after. — Do you understand all I am telling you ? I understand (entendre) and comprehend (comprendre*) it very well; but I cannot express myself well in French, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. That will come in (avec le) time. I wish (sou- haiter) it with all my heart. SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, 71st— Soixante-onzieme Le$on, lime. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To stand up. To remain up. i Etre debout. Rester debout. Will you permit me to go to the! Voulez-vous me permettre d'aK ■• au market? marche ? To hasten, to make haste. \ t Se depicher, 1, de. 32 374 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (!•) Make haste, and return soon. Go and tell him that I cannot come to-day. Depechez-vous, et revenez bientot. Allez lui dire que je ne puis venir aujourd'hui. Obs. 157. In French the verbs aller,* to go, and venir,* to come, are always followed by the infinitive instead of another tense used in English, and the conjunction and is not rendered. (§ 150 — 12.) He came and told us he could not come. Go and see your friends. To weep, to cry. The least blow makes him cry. To frighten. To be frightened, to startle. The least thing frightens him or her. Be not frightened. To be frightened at something. What are you frightened at ? At my expense. At his, her, our expense. At other people's expense. That man lives at everybody's ex- pense. To depend. That depends upon circumstances. That does not depend upon me. It depends upon him to do that. ! yes, it depends upon him. To astonish, to surprise. To be astonished, to wonder. To be surprised at something. 1 am surprised at it. An extraordinary thing happened which surprised everybody. To take place, to happen. Many things have passed which will surprise you. To surprise. Many days will pass before that. A man came in who asked me how I was. II vint nous dire qu'il ne pouvait pas venir. Allez voir vos amis. Pleurer, 1. Le moindre coup le fait pleurer. Effrayer, 1. »S" ejfrayer, 1. La moindre chose 1'erTraie. Ne vous efTrayez pas. S' effrayer de quelque chose. De quoi vous efTrayez-vous ? A mes depens. A ses, a nos depens. Aux depens d'autrui. Cet homme vit aux de*pens de tout le monde. Dependre de. Cela depend des circonstances. Cela ne depend pas de moi. II de'pend de lui de faire cela. Oh ! oui, cela depend de lui. Etonner, 1. S' etonner, 1. A. 7 Etre etonne de quelque chose. J'en suis etonne. II arriva une chose extraordinaire qui etonna tout le monde. Se passer, 1. II s'est passe plusieurs choses qui vous surprendront. Surprendre* (comme prendre.) II se passera plusieurs jours avant cela. II entra un homme qui me demanda comment je me portais. Soixante-onzieme Theme. Ire Sec. Pleurez-vous, mon petit bon homme. (a familiar expression con- stantly used for: my little boy,) parce que vous etes oblige de rester debout ? Oni, il y a si long-temps que je suis debout que je suis tres-fatigue. Si Pon vous permettait de vous aaseoir, seriez-vous plus SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 375 sage une autre fois? Je tacherais de Petre. Je compte sur votre parole. Asseyez-vous la-bas, (yonder.) — Si vous aviez touche cette petite fille, elle aurait pleure. car elle pleure pour la moindre chose. Je suis etonne qu' elle (§151) ne pleure pas. par je lui ai donne un coup. Alors, il est vraiment etonnant f^'elle ne pleure pas. — Aux depens de qui avez-vous fait ces belles emplettes? A mes propres depens; je n ; en fais jamais aux depens d ; autrui. — Votre ami obtien- dra-t-il Temploi qu ; il desire ? C ; est selon : cela dependra des circon- stances. Si cela dependait de votre cousin, le secretaire. Fobtien- drait-il ? Oui ; mais cela ne depend pas de lui. — Lorsque la chose fut arrivee, cela n 7 etonna-t-il pas tout le monde? Oui. chacun en fut etonne. — Vous surprenez tout le monde, mais votre neveu ne sur- prend personne. II me surprend. Can you stand one hour on one foot without moving? I have never tried, but I think I could. If you were to try (essayiez. imparf.) you would find out your mistake (erreur. fern.) before i an hour. — Is your letter written ? No, not quite. Make haste to finish it. — And why should I make haste to finish it ? You must make haste, ($151,) if you wish it to go by the steamship. I thought it went only (ne mettait d la voile, que) on Wednesday next. (N. p. 167.) That is true ) but from Boston, not New York. And my letter must go (§ 151) from here to Boston by the mail, (le courrier.) So that I must make haste, as you say. Go then and tell William to get ready, so as to carry it to the post office (la poste) as soon as I finish it. Do not be afraid, you have yet time enough. Do not speak to me, or else I shall not be able to finish it in time. Do you wonder at (de) what takes place? No* now, nothing astonishes me. Everything is now so astonishing, so wonderful, that nothing appears extraordinary. — Why does that woman weep ? Has her child been dead long? — This little girl weeps because she has lost a five cent piece; have you not one to give her? — Does that man live at his own expense, or at that of other people ? — Does it depend on him to do that? — Does not that marriage depend on his brother-in-law ? — On whom does it depend then ? — I wonder whethei (66 2 ) the general will be elected? (elire* 4, like lire.) — Shall I go and tell them to make less noise ? — Shall I go and buy you a bottle of cologne ? Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Done. Then, thus, consequently. Therefore. Ennui. The other day. Lately. In a short time. In. C'est pourquoi. Ennui, I'ennui. L'autrejour. Dernierement. Dans pea de temps. Dans. en. Obs. 158. When speaking of time, dans expresses the epoch, and en the duration. 376 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) He will arrive in a week, (when a week is elapsed.) It took him a week to make this journey. He will have finished his studies in three months. He finished his studies in a year. He has applied himself particularly to geometry and mathematics. II arrivera dans huit jours. II a fait ce voyage en huit jours. II aura fini ses etudes dans trois He has a good many friends. mois. II a fini ses etudes en un an. II a fait une etude particuliere de la geometrie et des mathematiques. II a Men des amis. II a beaucoup d'amis. Obs. 159. The word Men is always followed by the article, and beaucoup by the preposition de. Vous avez bien de la patience. Vous avez beaucoup de patience. lis out bien de l'argent. Vous avez bien du courage. Faire present de quelque chose d quelqu'un. Monsieur Lambert m'ecrivit 1' autre jour que mesdemoiselles ses soeurs viendraient ici dans peude temps, et me pria de vous le dire. Vous pourrez done les voir, et leur donner les livres que vous avez achetes. Elles esperent que vous leur en ferez present. Leur frere m'a as- sure qu' elles vous estiment, sans vous connaitre personnellement. You have a great deal of patience. X They have a great deal of money. You have a great deal of courage. To make a present of something to some one. Mr. Lambert wrote to me lately, that his sisters would be here in a short time, and requested me to tell you so ; you will then be able to see them, and to give them the books which you have bought. They hope that you will make them a present of them. Their brother has assured me that they esteem you, without knowing you personally. To want amusement. To get or be tired. How could I get tired in your com- pany ? He gets tired everywhere. Agreeable, (pleasing.) Tiresome. To be welcome. You are welcome everywhere. > t S'ennuyer, 1. t Comment pourrais-je m'ennuyer aupres de vous ? II s'ennuie partout. Agreable. Ennuyeux — euse, fern. t Etre le bienvenu. t Vous etes partout le bienvenu. Soixante-onzieme Theme. 2de Sec. Voudriez-vous n'avoir rien a faire ? Non, jc vous assure, car je m'ennuierais corame tous ceux qui n'ont pas d'occupations. Vous avez bien raison. Cependant il y a bien des jeunes gens qui vou- draie.it ne point avoir d'occupation. lis ne savent pas ce qu'ils desi- rent. Us s'ennuieraient s'ils n'en avaient point. — Que faisait-il der- merement'? Rien. e'est pourquoi il mourait d'ennui. — Le colonel n 7 arrivera-t-il pas dans pen de temps'? Au contraire. il va joindre SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 377 son regiment, (to join his regiment.) — A quel regiment appartient-il? II appartient au cinquieme regiment. — Que dessina-t-elle l'autre jour? Quand je la vis, elle dessinait le nouveau paquebot. — J'en- tends toujours Mme. G. . . . gronder sa demoiselle parce qu'elle ne se tient pas droit, la voila, ne trouvez-vous pas qu'elle se tient com me il faut ? Elle se tient aussi droit qu ; il le faut. — Quand le capitaine joindra-t-il sa compagnie ? II la joindra dans 3 jours. — Combien de jours lui faut-il pour faire le voyage % II lui en faut 8, et comme il est en chemin depuis 5 jours, il lui en faut encore 3 pour le finir. Will you drink a cup (une tasse) of tea? I thank you; I do not like tea. — Do you like coffee? I like it, but I have just (49 2 , Obs. 115) drunk some. — Do you not get tired here? How could I get tired in this agreeable society ? As to me, I always want amuse- ment. — If you did as I do, you would not want amusement, for I listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn many anecdotes, a thousand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired; but you do nothing of that kind, (de tout cela,) that is the reason why you want amusement. I would do everything like (comme) you, if I had no reason to be sad. — Have you seen Mr. Lambert ? I have seen him ; he told me that his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired (prier) me to tell you so. When they have arrived (46 3 , Obs. 106) you may give them the gold rings (la bague) which you have bought to make them a present of. Will they receive them ? Oh ! yes, for they love you without knowing you personally. — Has my sister already written to you? She has written to me many times, and I am going to answer her, for her letters are always agreeable and welcome, (bienvenues.) — Shall I (faut-il) tell her that you are here ? Tell her; but do not tell her that I am waiting for her impatiently. — Why have you not brought (58 3 , Obs. 142) your sister along with you? Which one? The one you always bring, the youngest. — She did not wish to go out, because she has the toothache. — I am very sorry for it, for she is a very good girl. — How old is she ? She is nearly fifteen years old. She is very tall (grande) for her age, (Vdge.) — How old are you? I am twenty-two. Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, 7 2d. —Soixante-douzieme Legon, 72me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. OF NEGATIONS ,— Des Negations. See ($171) for the manner of using them, and consult the article when necessary. 32* 378 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) Have you none of my copybooks ? I have none, and I have seen none. Have you neither seen nor heard the great lady singer ? {§ 171 — 4.) No, and I shall neither see nor hear her. I neither care about seeing nor hear- ing her. What did he do as soon as he had recognised his sister ? No sooner had he recognised her than he threw himself in her arms. Touch neither the flowers nor the fruits. I shall touch neither these nor those. Does that seamstress earn but two dollars a week ? That seamstress earns but two. Would she not gain more if she was a mantua-maker ? Moreover, besides. Besides that. Besides what I have just said. There are no means of finding money now. To push, shove, jog. Do not . . . me. Along the road. Along the street. All along . . All the year round. To enable to. To enable John to . . . That enabled me to go. To be able to. He is able to do it. To the right. On the right side or hand. Straight on. To the left. On the left side or hand. Could you not tell me which is the nearest way to the city gate ? — to the bridge ? Follow (or go along) this street, and when you are at the end of it, IV'avez-vous aucun de mes cahiers ? Je n 'en ai aucun, et je ri en ai vu aucun. IV'avez-vous ni vu ni entendu la grande cantatrice ? Non, et je ne la verrai ni ne l'en- tendrai. Je ne me soucie ni de la voir ni de l'entendre. Que fit-il aussitot qu'il eut reconnu sa soeur ? II ne l'eut pas plutot reconnue qu'il se jeta dans ses bras. Ne touchez ni les fleurs ni les fruits. Je ne toucherai ni ceux-ci ni celles- la. Cette couturiere ne gagne-t-elle que deux gourdes par semaine ? Cette couturiere n'en gagnc que deux. N'engagnerait-elle pas davantage si elle etait faiseuse de robes ? Ainsi nous voyons qu'avec les temps simples ne se place toujours avant, et le complement, toujours apres le verbe. En outre, d } ailleurs. Outre cela. Outre ce que je viens de dire. II n'y a pas moyen de trouver de 1' argent a present. Pousser, 1. Ne me poussez pas. Le long du chemin. Le long de la rue. Tout le long de . . . t Tout le long de l'annee. Mettre a meme de. Mettre Jean a meme de . . . Cela me mit a meme d'y aller. Etre en etat ou etre a meme de. II est en etat (a meme) de le faire. A droite. Sur la droite. Tout droit. A gauche. Sur la gauche. Ne pourriez-vous pas me dire quel est le chemin le plus court pour arriver a la porte de la ville ? — au pont ? Suivez (allez tout le long de) cette rue, et quand vous serez au bout, SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 379 turn to the right, and you will find a cross-way, which you must go through. And then, where shall I go ? You will then enter a broad street, which will bring you to a public square, on the right you will see a blind alley or court. tournez a droite, vous trouverez un carrefour, que vous traverserez. Et puis, ou irai-je ? Puis vous entrerez dans une rue as- sez large, qui vous menera sur une grande place publique, a droite vous verrez un cul-de-sac ou une impasse . Vous laisserez le cul-de-sac a. main gauche, et vous passerez sous les arcades qui sont a. cote. t Ensuite vous demanderez. Une arcade. Le carrefour. Un cul-de-sac. Une impasse. Traverser, 1. Traversons. You must leave the blind alley on your left, and pass under the arcade that is near it. Then you must ask again. An arcade. The cross- way. A blind alley. A court. To cross, to cross over. Let us cross. Soixante-dotjzieme Theme. Ire Sec. Est-elle en etat d'aller a pied jusqu'a la promenade publique? Non, elle n ? est pas en etat de s'y rendre a pied. D ; ailleurs, le me- decin n ? a-t-il pas defendu qu'elle aille (§151) a pied I Oui, il Pa defendu ; d'ailleurs, elle ne peut plus mettre ses souliers. II faut que nous ayons une voiture. Par ou passerons-nous ? Nous irons tout le long de notre rue, jusqu'au jardin public, la nous nous arreterons quelques instants. Pour la laisser reposer. n'est-ce pas ? Oui, et en outre, pour la laisser jouir du frais, (de lafraicheur. cool, coolness.) — Apres cela, ne traverserons-nous pas le jardin public ? Non. Per- sonne n'y passe en voiture. — Ou irons-nous done ? Nous tournerons a gauche, et nous passerons sous Parcade du coin, ou elle pourra prendre le verre d'eau minerale ordonnee par le medecin. N'en prendrons-nous pas aussi ? Si fait : quoique le docteur ne Pait pas ordonnee. — De quel cote tournerons-nous ensuite \ A droite, jusqu'a l ; impasse du voleur. Nous laisserons cette impasse a gauche, et nous irons tout droit jusqu ; a la promenade publique. La, nous descendrons. — La couturiere est-elle venue ? — La faiseuse de robes a-t-elle envoye les robes neuves ?-— Qui est votre faiseuse de robes ? Who pushes me so? I cannot write, if you do it any more. No- body pushes you. No, nobody pushes me now, but somebody did push me a little while ago. Nobody has pushed you. You write badly, and you will blame us for it. — Why does that officer push that man all along the street? Because he is a good-for-nothing fellow, who will do nothing. — What is the gardener going to put all along this wall?- He is going to put some trees there. Fruit-trees? (Des arbres fruitier s?) 1 Plum-trees here, pear-trees there, further on 1 Peche, pecker, peach-tree ; pomme, pommier, apple-tree ; abricot, abri- cotier, apricot-tree; hence, prunier, cerisier, amandier, rosier, (rose-bush.) 380 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) peach-trees.- -Is he not going to put cherry-trees there ? No, because they grow too big. {Us viennent trop gros.) and so do apple-trees — Is it difficult to get money now ? No, it is not difficult to find, but as usual you must give a good security, (bonne securite.) — Can you procure me any? — What security have you to give? — Is not my name sufficient % A single name is not sufficient for capitalists, (un capitaliste ou rentier.) What did you do for him? I lent him a horse, and that has enabled him to join his regiment in time. — Why did he not start on horseback ? He did not, because he depended on the steamboats. — What has become of them? One has been burned, so that he could not have continued his journey (voyage) if I had not lent him a horse. — Has he sent him back? (renvoyer, 1.) I suppose the horse is on the way ; but as it requires four days for the journey, he will arrive only the day after to-morrow. — Did the colonel write to you by mail, or did he send a message by the electric telegraph ? We have no electric telegraph along our roads, so that he wrote me by mail. — In the forests there must be (il doit y avoir) many cross-ways, (Men des,) how can the mail-riders (les courriers) recognise them? They are used to them. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Dans les temps composes. (§ 171 — 4, 5.) A-t-on appele aucun des ouvriers ? On rC en a appele aucun. On 7i'a appele personne. IV aurait- elle fait que cela ? Elle n* en aurait fait guere plus, ou elle rf en aurait guere plus fait. Were any of the workmen called ? Not one of them was called. Nobody has been called. Would she have done but that ? She would have done but little more, or, she would not have done much more. Has she left my book anywhere ? She left it nowhere. To get (or be) married. Do not get m. To marry somebody. To marry, (to give in marriage.) My cousin, having given his sister in marriage, married Miss Delby. Is your cousin married ? No, he is still a bachelor. Is your niece married 1 No, but she is going to be married. To be a bachelor. An old bachelor. An old girl, maid. Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. An embarrassment, a puzzle. A-t-elle laisse mon livre quelque part ? Elle ne l'a laisse nulle part. t Se marier, 1. Ne vous mariez pas. Epouser, 1, quelqu 1 un. Marier, idonner en mariage.) Mon cousin, ayant marie sa soeur, epousa Mademoiselle Delby. M. votre cousin est-il marie ? Non, il est encore garcon. Votre niece est-elle mariee ? Non/mais elle va se marier. Etre garcon. Un vieux garcon. Une vieille fille. Embarrasse. Un embarras. SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 381 Vous m'embarrassez. Vous me mettez dans l'embarras. II demande ma sceur en mariage. La mesure. Prendre des mesures. Je prendrai d'autres mesures. Mon Dieu ! que le temps passe vite dans votre societe ! (en votre com- pagnie.) Le compliment. Vous me faites un compliment au- quel je ne sais que repondre. Ce n'est pas ma faute. Ne me l'imputez pas. Imputer, 1, la faute a quelqu'un. A qui est la faute ? Je ne sais qu'yfaire. Je ne saurais qu'y faire. Le delai. II le fait sans delai. Je me sauve. Je vais me sauver. Sauvez-vous ! Allez-vous-en ! Plaisanter, 1. Ne plaisantez point. La plaisanterie, le badinage. Vous badinez. Vous vous moquez. Si la negation forme le nominatif, il y a un changement dans la maniere de i'employer. (§ 151 — 6.) You embarrass (puzzle) me. You puzzle (perplex) me. He asks my sister in marriage. The measure. To take measures. I shall take other measures. Goodness ! how rapidly time passes in your society ! The compliment. You make me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. It is not my fault. Do not lay it to my charge. To lay the fault to one's charge. Who can help it ? Whose fault is it ? I cannot help it. The delay. He does it without delay. I must go, (must be off.) I am off. Go away ! Begone ! To jest, joke, be in fun. Do not trifle. The jest, joke. You are jesting. Does anything please them ? No, since their return nothing pleases them. Nobody cares to have them. Neither suit me. Neither these nor those houses will sell dear. None of my friends is going. No one knows it. Quelque chose leur plait-il ? Non, depuis leur retour rien ne leur plait. Personne ne se soucie de les avoir. Ni 1' un ni 1' autre neme conviennent. Ni ces maisons-ci ni celles-la ne se vendront cher. Aucun de mes amis n'y va. Nul, (pas un) ne le sait. Soixante-douzieme Theme. 2de Sec. Votre soeur, m'a-t-on dit, se marie bientot. — Oui ; elle se mariera la semaine prochaine. Ne devait-elle pas se marie r le mois passe ? Si fait, mais le colonel qvrelle va epouser rra pas pu quitter son regiment alors. Est-il ici pour long-temps'? Non, il n 7 y restera que quelques semaines. C'est dommage (57 2 ) qu r il soit oblige (§ 151) de partir si tot, n'est-ce pas? Je presume qu'il aura le temps de passer la lune de mid (honey-moon) ici. En outre, s'il ne reste pas, ce ivest pas sa faute. II prendra, peut-etre, des mesures pour ne pas partir si tot. Mile. S , ne va-t-elle pas se marier? Non, elle a tant d'admirateurs (admirers) qu'elle est embarrassee dans 882 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) son choix. — Qui vous blame % Mon oncle me blame, mais je ne saurais qu'y faire. Est-ce ma faute, si j ? ai mauvaise me moire ? II me faut si long-temps pour apprendre mes lecons, que je m'ennuie, que je m'endors, et que je n' apprends rien. — Votre oncle Jacques est un vieux garcon, n ; est-ce pas? Non, il est marie, mais il ira paa d'enfants. — Votre cousine est presque vieille fille, n'est-ce pas ? Oui. c'est tout-a-fait une vieille fille. Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your society ! — You make me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. — Have you bought your watch in Paris'? I have not bought it; my uncle has made me a present of it, (en.) — What has that woman intrusted you with ? She has intrusted me with a secret about a (d'un) great count who is in great embarrassment about the (d cause du) marriage of one of his daughters. — Does any one ask her in marriage ? The man who demands her in marriage is a nobleman of the neighbor- hood, (le voisinage.) — Is he rich'? No, he is a poor devil, (diable.) 1 who has not a sou, (le sow,) and who, besides, is old and disagreea- ble. — You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, (le condisciple :) but is it not your fault? You have spoken ill (mal parte) of them, and they have not offended you. What are you astonished at ? I am astonished to find you still in bed. — If you knew how (combien) sick I am, you would not be astonished (fern.) at it. — John, (Jean!) — What is your pleasure. Sir? Bring some wine. Presently, Sir. — Henry ! Madam ? Make the fire, (du feu.) The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring me some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (du sable) or blotting-paper, (du papier brouillard,) sealing-wax, (de la cire a cacketer) and a light, (de la lumiere.) — I am going for the blotting- paper, the sealing-wax, and the light ; but we have no sand. — Never mind the sand. Afterwards you will go to my sister's, to tell her not to wait for me. Be back again before 12 o'clock, to carry my letters to the post-office. Very well, Madam. — Do not fail, for you know that the mail closes (se ferme) at 12, and the letters must be (il faut que , §151) in the post office before (avant que, §151) the hour strikes. — I will not fail, Madam ; you may depend upon it. 1 Those two expressions: Mon Dieu ! and Diable, are constantly used by the French. The first is their only interjection for a host of English ones, such as : Bless me ! Oh dear ! Dear me ! Gracious ! Goodness ! &c. &c. The second is connected with every sort of epithets ; such as : bon diable, (good or clever fellow) ; mauvais diable, (bad fellow,) vilain, vieux, 'petit, grand, gros, beau, &c. &c. Whoever wishes to speak French with French people, ought to become familiar with the terms, if not to use them himself, at least to understand those who do. Hence, however reluctantly, we fol- low the t«xt of Ollendorff SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 383 Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. Avec l'infinitif. (§ 171—7.) That He likes to do nothing. , Has she ever promised not to touch j your watch ? No, never. What are they afraid of? . Not to have done their task in tune. Does your cousin expect many people to her soiree ? She is afraid she will have but few. He cannot take a joke, is no joker. To beg someone's pardon. To pardon. Pardon me. I beg your pardon. The pardon. The time-piece, house clock. To advance, go too fast. Is it too fast ? The watch goes too fast, (gains.) To retard, go too slow. Is it too slow ? The time-piece goes too slow, (loses.) My watch has stopped. To go right, to stop, to go wrong. Where did we stop ? We left o^T at the fortieth lesson, page one hundred and thirty-six. To wind up a {town dock,) a watch. To regulate a watch, a time-piece, a clock. Your watch is twenty minutes too fast, and mine a quarter of an hour too slow. It will soon strike twelve. Has it already struck twelve 1 To strike. Make the clock strike. What hour is striking ? It is one. On condition, or provided. I will lend you money, provided you will henceforth be more economi- cal than you have hitherto been. Hereafter, for the future, henceforth. The future. My prospect, fate. Economical. article must be carefully studied. II aime a ne rien faire. A-t-elle jamais promis de ne pas toucher votre montre ? Non, jamais. De quoi ont-ils peur ? De ne pas avoir fait leur tdche a. temps. Votre cousine attend-elle beaucoup de monde a sa soiree ? Elle craint de n'en avoir que peu (282, 05s. 65.) t II n'entend pas raillerie. Demander pardon a quelqu'un. Pardonner, 1. Pardonnez-moi. Je vous demande pardon. Le pardon. Cette pendule. Avancer, 1. Avance-t-elle ? La montre avance. Betarder, 1. 4tetarde-t-elle ? La pendule retarde. Ma montre s'est arretee. Aller bien, s'arreter, 1, aller mal. t Ou en etions-nous ? t Nous etions a la lecon quarante, page cent-trente-six. Monter une Tiorloge, une montre. Regler une montre, une pendule, une horloge. Votre montre avance de vingt mi- nutes, et la mienne retarde d'un quart d'heure. II va sonner midi. Midi est-il deja. sonne? Sonner, 1. Faites sonner la pendule. Quelle heure sonne-t-il ? C'est une heure. A condition. Sous condition. Je vous preterai de l'argent, a con- dition que vous serez desormais plus econome que vous n'avez ete jusqu'ici. Desormais, dorenavant, a l'avenir. L'avenir. Mon avenir. ficonome, economique, menager. 384 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) Renoncer au jeu. Renoncez-y. Suivre un conseil. Suivez les bona. Vous avez Fair si melancolique. Adieu. To renounce gambling. Renounce it. To follow advice (counsel). Follow the good. You look so melancholy. Adieu, farewell. God be with you, good-by. Till I see you again. | Au plaisir de vous revoir. I hope to see you again soon. | Sans adieu, au revoir. Quand le verbe est omis (omettre,* 4, to omit.) (§ 151 — 8.) Study it carefully. What is he afraid of? Nothing. Whom is she afraid of? Nobody. Whom does she fear ? No one. Do you want five ? Not more than two. De quoi a-t-il peur ? De rien. De qui a-t-elle peur ? De personne. Qui craint-elle ? Personne. Vous en faut-il cinq ? Pas plus de deux. Soixante-douzieme TheJme. 3me Sec. Quelle heure est-il ? II est plus d'une heure et demie. — Vous dites qu'il est une heure et demie, et a ma montre, il n'est que midi et demi. En moins de vingt-cinq minutes deux heures sonneront. Pardonnez-moi, une heure n'est pas encore sonnee. Je vous assure qu'il est deux heures moins vingt-quatre minutes, car ma montre va tres-bien. — Va-t-elle aussi bien qu'un chronometre ? Je crois qu'elle va mieux que bien des chronometres. Elle va mieux que notre horloge, qu'on est oblige de regler toutes les semaines. — Comment va votre pendule ? Elle va superiearement aussi. Ni ma montre ni notre pendule ne varient (varier, 1, to vary) d'une minute dans six mois. Elles vont toujours ensemble. Votre montre doit etre arretee ou derangee, (out of order.) Est-elle montee? Je Fai montee hier soir en me couchant. — A quelle condition le feriez-vous? — Suivez son conseil a condition qu'il suive (§151) le votre. — Son avenir ne serait-il pas moins incertain s'il etait plus econome? Ne le serait-il pas encore moins s'il renoncait au jeu ? Donnez-lui en le conseil. Je n'y manquerai pas. Adieu, au plaisir. Sans adieu. Your schoolfellows have done you good, and nevertheless you have quarrelled with them; why did you? Was it my fault? I think it was theirs. Never mind. You must, without delay, make your peace with them. — Dialogue (le dialogue) between a tailor and his journeyman, (le gargon.) — Charles, have you taken the clothes to the Count Narissi ? Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did he say ? He said nothing but (sinon) that he had a great mind to give me a box on the ear, (des soufflets, plur.,) because I had not brought them sooner. — What did you answer him? Sir, said I, I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me j and if you do SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 385 not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword, (porter la main a son epee,) and I ran away. Has it already struck twelve ? Yes, madam, it is already half- past twelve. — Is it so late? Is it possible? That is not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well? (bien?) No, Miss N., it is a quarter of an hour too fast. And mine is half an hour too slow. Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right. — Is it wound up ? — It is wound up, and yet (pourtant) it does not go. — Do you hear? it is striking one o'clock. Then I will regulate my watch and go home. — Pray (de grace) stay a little longer, (encore un peu!) I can- not, for we dine precisely at one o'clock, (d une heure precise.) Adieu, then, till I see you again. — You say you want fifty dollars; I will lend them to you with all my heart, but on condition that you w T ill renounce gambling, (renoncer au jeu,) and be more economical than you have hitherto been. I see now that you are my friend, and T love you too much not to follow your advice. SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON, 73d.— Soixante-treizieme Legon, l%me Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To last, (to wear well,) stand. A short time. That cloth will wear well. How long has that coat lasted you ? It lasted me a year. That color is not a standing one. To my, his, her, their, our liking. To everybody's liking. Nobody can do anything to his liking. A boarding-house. A boarding-school. To keep house, (a boarding-house.) To board with anyone or anywhere. To be a boarder. To exclaim. To make uneasy. To get or grow uneasy. To be uneasy. Why do yo fret, (are you uneasy?) I do not fret, 'am* not uneasy.) That news makes me uneasy. I am uneasy at not receiving any news. 33 Durer, 1. Peu de temps Ce drap durera bien. Combien de temps cet habit vous a-t-il dure ? II m' a dure un an. Cette couleur n'est pas de duree. v (ll 1 , Obs. 27.) A mo?i, son, leur, notre, gre. Au gre de tout le monde. On ne peut rien faire a son gre. Une pension. Tenir maison. Tenir pension. Etre en pension. Se mettre en pension. Etre pensionnaire. S' eerier, 1. Inquieter, 1. SHnquieter. Etre inquiet, fern, inquiete. Pourquoi vous inquietez-vous ? Je ne m'inquiete pas. Cette nouvelle m'inquiete. Je suis inquiet de ne point recevoif de nouvelles. 386 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) She is uneasy about that affair. Do not be uneasy. The uneasiness, trouble. Quiet. Be quiet, just wait, stop. To quiet. Compose yourself. To change, alter, fade, pass away. That man has altered a great deal since I saw him. To be of use. Of what use is that to you ? That is of no use to me. Of what use is that to your brother ? It is of no use to him. Of what use is that stick to you ? I use it to beat my dogs. Of what use are those baskets to your brother? He uses them to carry his vegetables to market. Elle est inquiete sur cette affaire. Ne vous inquietez pas. L'inquietude. Tranquille. Soyez tranquille. Tranquilliser, 1. Tranquillisez-vous, Changer, 1. La couleur change. Cet homme a beaucoup change de« puis que je ne l'ai vu. t Servir* 2, d quelque chose. t A quoi cela vous sert-il ? t Cela ne me sert a rien. t A quoi cela sert-il a votre frer« 1 t Cela ne lui sert a rien. t A quoi ce baton vous sert-il ? t II me sert a battre mes chiens. t A quoi ces paniers servent-ils a votre frere ? t lis lui servent a porter ses legumes au marche. II s'en sert pour porter ses legumes au msfche. Soixante-treizieme Theme. Ire Sec. De quel drap ferez-vous emplette ? Je veux du drap vert ; mais je veux qu 7 il dure et que la couleur tienne (§ 151), qu'elle ne passe pas. Si vous voulez de bon drap, il faut aller chez les Messieurs . Ne demeurent-ils pas au coin de cette rue-ci ? Si fait, c'est la qu'ils out leur magasin. Au dessus du (above the) magasin n ; y a-t-il pas une pension bien tenue ? Si fait, il y a ce qu'on appelle une pension d la mode, (a fashionable boarding-house.) — Vous con naissez-vous en drap ? Oui, assez bien. — Voulez-vous venir m'aider a en choisir? Volontiers. — Mais ne vous inquietez pas, soyez tranquille ; car si vous achetez le drap chez ces MM. , il sera bon et la couleur tiendra, elle ne changera pas, je vous assure. — Votre cousin a beaucoup change dernierement, a-t-il ete malade? Son epouse est encore plus changee. — Sont-ils dans une bonne pen- sion ? — Combien de pensionnaires y a-t-il 1 — Quel est le prix de la pension ? — Si votre associe reste dans une mauvaise pension, a quoi lui sert son argent? — Est-il avare % — S'il est marie, pourquoi ne tient-il pas maison ? — La pension leur convient-elle ? Sir, may (oser) I ask where General B lives? He lives near the arsenal, (arsenal, mas.,) on the other side of the river. — Could you tell me which road I must (je dois) take to go there? You must go (§ 151) along the shore, and at the end take a litfle street (quand vous serez au bout, prenez une petite rue) on the right, which will lead you straight to his house. It is a fine house ; you will find it easily. I thank you, Sir. — Does Captain N live here ? Yes, SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 387 Sir; walk in ; (donnez-vous la peine d^entrer,) if you please. — Is the captain at home? I wish to have the honor (I'honneur) to speak to him. Yes. Sir. he is at home. — Whom shall I have the honor to announce? (annoncerJ) I am from B , and my name is F . — Who keeps this fashionable boarding-house? Miss P . an old maid. Last summer, when we were a hunting together, (ensemble,) night grew upon us (la nuitnous surprit) at ten leagues (une lieue) at least from our country seat, (la maison de campagne.) — Well. (Eh bien,) where did you pass the night ? I was very uneasy at first, but your brother, not in the least, (pas le moins du monde ;) on the contrary, in his opinion (gre) it was an agreeable incident ] he tran- quillized me so that I lost my uneasiness. After some time we found a peasant's hut, where we passed the night. Here I had an opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and a truss of straw (une botte de paille) served him to make a comforta- ble (commode) bed ; he used a bottle as a candlestick, another bundle of straw served us as a pillow, and our cravats as nightcaps. When we awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy (bien por- tant) as if we had slept in our own beds. Vo cab ul aire. 2de Sec. Of what use are these bottles to your landlord ? They serve him to put his wine in. To stand instead, to be as. I use my gun as a stick. This hole serves him for a house. He used his cravat as a nightcap. To avail. What avails it to you to cry ? It avails me nothing. Opposite to. Opposite that house. Opposite the garden. Opposite to me. Right opposite. He lives opposite the arsenal. I live opposite the king's library. To set hold of. . . ) q •„„ , njn - + ™ f J . r > Seize upon it. lo take possession of ) To witness. To show. To give evidence against some one. t A quoi ces bouteilles servent-elles a votre hote ? t Elles lui servent a mettre son vin. t Servir,* de. t Mon fusil me sert de baton, t Ce trou lui sert de maison. t Sa cravate lui a servi de bonnet de nuit. t Servir * {de before inf.) t A quoi vous sert-il de pleurer? t Cela ne me sert a rien. Vis-a-vis de. Vis-a-vis de cette maison. Vis-a-vis du jardin. Vis-a-vis de moi. Tout vis-a-vis. II demeure vis-a-vis de V arsenal. Je demeure vis-a-vis de la biblio- theque royale. S' emparer de . . . Emparez-vous-en, Temoigner, 1. Temoigner contre quelqu'un. 388 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) He has shown a great deal of friend- ship to me. To turn some one into ridicule. To become ridiculous. To make one's self ridiculous. To he born. Where were you born ? I was born in this country. Where was your sister born ? She was born in the United States of North America. Where were your brothers born ? They were born in France. The game. The game-bag, pouch. A horse -hair. The feathers. A pillow. A cushion, down. A hair cushion. A down pillow. The boarder. The pensioner. II m'a temoigne beaucoup d'amitiel Tourner quelqu'un en ridicule. Tomber dans le ridicule. Se rendre ridicule. Etre ne. t Ou etes-vous ne ? t Je suis ne dans ce pays-ci. t Ou votre sceur est-elle nee ? t Elle est ne'e aux Etats Unis de l'Amerique du Nord. t Ou vos freres sont-ils nes ? t lis sont nes en France. Le gibier. La gibeciere. Un crin. Les plumes. Un oreiller. Un coussin, le duvet. Un coussin de crin. Un oreiller de duvet. Le pensionnaire . .. du gouverne- ment. Soixante-treizieme Theme. 2de Sec. A quoi lui sert de savoir le Franc ais, si elle ne le parle. ni ne le lit ; ni ne le pratique ? (§ 171 — 3.) II lui servira quand elle voyagera en Europe. — Se sert-il de sa gibeciere pour oreiller? Oui, lorsqu'il se couche sous les arbres a la campagne. — A quoi vous sert de vous amiger? Je ne peux m'empecher d'etre afnige du malheur arrive a mon ami. — Son cheval lui sert-il a quelque chose ? 11 se promene a cheval tous les jours. — Ou son fils est-il ne? II est ne a Philadel- phie. Sa fille y est-elle nee aussi? Oui, elle est nee dans la maison vis-a-vis. — Si vous etiez ne en Ecosse. mon petit bon homme, que seriez-vous ? Je serais ecossais, n 7 est-ce pas? C'est vrai. Et votre soeur que serait-elle, si elle y etait nee ? Elle serait ecossais aussi. Non pas ecossais, mais ecossaise. — De quoi le voleur s'est-il empare ? II s'est empare de tout ce qu 7 il a pu. — Qui a temoigne contre lui? Le bijoutier qui demeurait vis-a-vis de la poste, et I'aubergiste qui demeure au coin de la place ou se trouve la bibli- otheque de la ville. — Ne tournez personne en ridicule. Aimeriez- vous a etre tourne en ridicule ? — Ne ferai-je pas bien de le battre, s'il me tourne en ridicule ? Which is the shortest (court) way to the arsenal? (un arsenal?) Go down (suivez) this street, and when you come to the end (au bout,) turn to the left, and take the cross-way, (vous trouverez un — que vous traverser 'ez ;) you will then enter into a rather narrow (etroit) street, which will lead you to a great square, (la place,) where you will see a blind alley. — Through (par) which I must pass? No ; fot SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 389 there is no outlet, (une issue.) You must leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it. — And then % And then you must inquire, (further.) — I am very much obliged to you. — Do not mention it, {il n'y a pas de quoi.) — Are you able to translate an English letter into French? I am. — Who has taught you? My French master has enabled me to do it. — Was your French teacher born in France ? No, he was not. Your mother is wrong to fret about her eldest son ; for 7 although he is ( s N 151) in the army, (d Varmee,) he knows how to get out of a bad scrape. — A candidate (un candidat) petitioned (demander a) the king of Prussia [de Prusse) for an employment, (un emploi.) This prince asked him where he was born. " I was born at Berlin/ 7 answered he. " Begone !" said the monarch, (Je monarque^) " all the men of Berlin {un Berlinois) are good for nothing. 7 ' "I beg your majesty's pardon, ;; replied the candidate ; u there are some good ones, and I know two. 77 " Which are those twc V asked the king. 1 The first," replied the candidate, "is your majesty, and I am the second." The king could not help laughing (ne put s'empecher de rive) at this answer, and granted (accorder) the request, (la de- mande.) SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.— Soixante-quatorzieme Legon, 74me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To lose sight of. The sight. My sight is good. (I have good sight.) I wear spectacles because my sight is bad, (or I have a bad sight.) (24 2 , Obs. 55.) Are you near-sighted , or long-sighted ? I am near-sighted. The ship is so far off, that we shall soon lose sight of it. I have lost sight of that. As it is long since I was in England, I have lost sight of your brother. As it is long since I have read any | French, I have lost sight of it. I Perdre de vue. La vue. t Tai bonne vue. Je porte des lunettes parce que j'ai la vue mauvaise, (oumauvaise vue.) t Avez- vous la vue courte ou longue ? t J'ai la vue courte. Le batiment est si loin, que nous le perdrons bientot de vue. J'ai perdu ceia de vue. Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai ete en Angleterre, j'ai perdu votre frere de vue. Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai lude Frangais, je l'ai perdude vue. Obs. 160. Ought and should (when it means ought are rendered into French by the conditionnel {% 148) of the verb devoir, to owe. Ought to have, should have, by the conditionnel passe. (§ 149.) 33* 390 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) You ought to or should do that. He ought not to speak thus to his father. We ought to go thither earlier. They should listen to what you say. You should pay more attention to what I say. You ought to have done that. He should have managed the thing better than he has done. You should have managed the thing differently. They ought to have managed the thing as I did. We ought to have managed it differ- ently from what they did. You ought to have played on the flute while I was playing on the violin. I wished to do it, but my flute was out of order. He ought to have wished it to you. A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay. Do you intend to make a long stay in the town ? I do not intend to make a long stay in it. Vous devriez faire cela. II ne devrait pas parler ainsi a son pere. Nous devrions y aller de meilleure heure. lis devraient dcouter ce que vous dites. Vous devriez faire plus d'attention a ce que je dis. Vous auriez du faire cela. II aurait du s'y prendre mieux qu'il n'a fait. Vous auriez du vous y prendre d'une maniere differente. lis auraient du s'y prendre commo je m'y suis pris. Nous aurions du nous y prendre d'une autre maniere qu'ils ne s'y sont pris. Vous auriez du jouer de la flute pen- dant que je jouais du violon. Je souhaitais le faire, mais ma flute etait derangee. II aurait du vous le souhaiter. Un sejour. Faire un sejour. Comptez-vous faire un long sejour dans la ville ? Je ne compte pas y faire un long se- jour. Soixante-qttatorzieme ThiIme. Ire Sec. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu Pavocat? Oui, je Pai perdu de vue. — Voyez cet oiseau, comme il est haut ! II est presque a perte de vue, (out of sight.) — Pourquoi, lui qui a la vue courte, ne porte-t-il pas de lunettes'? II ne s'en soucie pas. — Vous devriez faire ce que voire mere desire. Je Paurais fait, si j'avais pu; mais quoique j'aie essaye trois fois, je n'ai pas pu reussir. — Vous voila deja de retour ! Vous auriez du faire un plus long sejour aupres de votre vieille tante. J'y en ai fait un assez long, ne vous deplaise, (please your honor.) — Quel sejour y avez-vous fait? Vous croirez a peine que j'y ai fait un sejour de six semaines et demie. — Ce n'est pas possible ! Si fait, c'est tres-possible. J'etais aupres d'elle le 14 Juin, et je ne Pai quittee que hier; et vous savez que c'est aujour- d'hui le 4 d'aout; ainsi comptez. Je ne me le serais pas imagine. Vous m'avez perdu de vue sans chagrin. A peasant, (paysan,) having seen that old men, (le vieillard,) whose sight was bad, used spectacles to read, went to an optician SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) (un opticien) and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and. having opened it, said the spectacles were not good, (fern.) The optician put another pair of the best which he could find in his shop (la boutique) upon his nose; but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to him : u My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all?" "If I could/' said the peasant, "I should not want your spectacles.' 7 — I thought that you would be thirsty; that is the reason I brought you to the apothecary's shop to take a glass of mineral water and syrup. Give us two glasses of mineral water. — What syrup, Miss? No matter which, (nHmporte le quel;) I like them all. I have seen six players (le joueur) to-day, who were all winning (gagner) at the same time, (en meme temps.) — That cannot be, for a player can only win when another loses. — You would be right if 1 were speaking of people who play at cards or billiards, (Obs. 118, 51 1 :) but I am speaking of flute and violin players, (de joueur s de flute et de violon.) — Do you sometimes practise (fait **) musie? (de la musiquel) Very often, for I like it much. — What instrument (Obs. 118, 51 l ) do you play? I play the violin, and my sister plays the piano. My brother, who plays the bass, (la basse.) accompanies (accompagner) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudir) us. — Does she not also play some musical instrument % (un instrument de musiquel) She plays the harp, (la harpe,) but she is too proud (fiere) to practise music with us. Vocabuxaire. 2de Sec. To suspect, to guess. I suspect what he has done. He does not suspect what is going to happen to him. To think of some one or of something. Of whom do you think ? I think of my friend. Do you think often of him — her ? I do, very often. Of what do you think ? To turn upon. To be the question. It is questioned, it turns upon. The question is not your pleasure, but your improvement. You play, Sir, but playing is not the thing, but studying. What is going on ? Se douter, 1, (de, av. l'inf.) Je me doute de ce qu'il a fait. II ne se doute pas de ce qui va lui arriver. Penser a quelqu'un ou d quelque chose. A qui pensez-vous ? Je pense a mon ami — amie. Y pensez-vous souvent ? (§ 50, 2.) J'y pense tres-souvent. A quoi pensez-vous ? t S'agirde. II s'agit de. II ne s'agit pas de votre plaisir, mais de vos progres. Vous jouez, Monsieur, mais il ne s'agit pas de jouer, il s'agit d'etu- dier. De quoi s'agit-il ? 392 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) The question is to know what we shall do to pass the time agreeably. On purpose. I beg your pardon, I have not done it on purpose, To be silent, being silent, been silent. Be silent, quit talking. Hush, I say. Are you silent? Do you cease talking? I am. I do. He is never silent. After speaking half an hour he was silent, he ceased speaking, &c. Obs. 161. Could (§ 149) is rendered by the conditionnel of pouvoir, (to be able.) Might, by the conditionnel modified by peut-etre, perhaps. Could have, might have, by the conditionnel passe. Pourriez-vous parler si vous es- sayiez ? II s'agit de savoir ce que nous ferons pour passer notre temps agreable- ment. Exp res. Je vous demande pardon, je ne l'ai pas fait expres. t Se taire,* 4. Se taisant — tu. t Taisez-vous. Taisez-vous done. t Vous taisez-vous? t Je me tais. II ne se tait jamais. Apres avoir parle pendant une demi- heure, il se tut. Could you speak if you tried ? 1 might, but I am sure he could. Could you sing before a large audi- ence ? / could not, but Miss B., (could,) might. Could they have danced the Polka ? They might, but I know she could {have danced it.) Could you have played before those great musicians ? We could not, but Henry might have played before them. Je pourrais peut-etre, mais je suis siir qu'il pourrait. Pourriez-vous chanter devant (49 s , Obs. 116) une grande audience? Je ne pourrais pas, mais Mile. B. (pourrait,) pourrait peut-etre. Auraient-ils pu danser le Polka ? lis auraie?it peut-etrepu, mais je sais qu'elle Vaurait pu. Auriez-vous pu jouer devant ces grands musiciens ? Nous n'aurions pas pu, mais Henri aurait peut-etre pu jouer devant Soixante-qttatorzieme Theme. 2de Sec. Savez-vous ce qu'il aurait fait si je n'avais pas ete ici? Je me doute de ce qu'il aurait voulu faire. — Aurait-il pu reussir? II y serait peut-etre parvenu. — A qui pensez-vous quand vous ne pensez a rien ? Je pense a la personne qui fait cette belle question. — De quoi s'agit-n"? II s'agit du musicien, de Phonneur de la famille. — De quoi s'agissait-il % De savoir s'il avait casse le chandelier expres ou non. — MoL je crois qu'il 1'avait fait expres. S'il P avait fait expres, il ne pleurerait pas de cette maniere. Ce n'est. que pour nous faire croire qu'il ne Pa pas iait expres. — Taisez-vous ; vous lui irnpntez toujours des torts. Je ne me tairai pas pour vous. Laissons eela, et racontez-nous une anecdote. — Une ville assez pauvre fit une depense considerable en fetes et en illuminations, a l'occasion du passage de sou prince. Celui-ci en paraissant etonne, un courtisan SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 391 (a courtier) dit, " Elle n'a fait que ce qu'elle devait a votre majeste." u C"est vrai.' ; reprit un autre, " mais elle doit tout ce qu'elle a fait. ;; — C ; est tres-bien, je ne me doutais pas que vous auriez si bien reussi. Je vous remercie du compliment. A thief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three cloaks, (le manteau.) — In going away he was met by one of the boarders, who had a fine laced (galonne) cloak. Seeing so many cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief answered boldly (froidement) that they belonged to three gentlemen of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, (d degraisser ) u Then you must also clean (degraissez done aussi) mine, for it is very much in need of it, (en avoir grand besoin,") said the boarder; "but/' added he, "you must return it to me at three o'clock. ,; "'I shall not fail, (y manquer,) Sir, ;; answered the thief, as he carried off (emporter) the four cloaks, with which he (qu'il) is still to return, (n'a pas encore rapport es.) You. are singing, (chanter.) gentlemen, but it is not a time for (il ne s'agit pas de) singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. We are at a loss. — What are you at a loss about? I am going to tell you : the question is with us how we shall pass our time agreeably. Play a game at billiards or at chess, (51 1 .) — We have proposed joining a hunting-party ; do you go with us? (etes-vous des notres?) I cannot, for I have not done my task yet; and if I neglect it, my master will scold me. Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. — Does Mr. B go with us? Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, (trop bavard.) excepting that, (dcela pres,) he is a clever man, a fine fellow, (un excellent homme.) SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSON, 75th.— Soixante-quinzieme Lecon, 75me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. Towards, 'physically,) (morally.) He comes towards me — us. He has behaved very well towards me. We must always behave well towards everybody. The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. If we behave well towards them, they will also Vers. Envers. II vient vers moi — nous. II s'est tres-bien comporte envers moi. II faut toujours nous bien comporter envers tout le monde. La conduite des autres n'est qu'un echo de la notre. Si nous nous comportons bien envers eux, ils so 394 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON (1 ) behave well towards us ; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. To treat or to use somebody well. To use somebody ill. As you have always used me well, I will not use you ill. As he has always used me well, I have always used him in the same manner. To delay, (to tarry.) Do not be long before you return. I shall not be long before I return. I long to or for. Obs. 162. The subject of the verb long, must be rendered in French by the indirect object, me, te, lux, nous, vous, or leur. (39 1 , Obs. 90.) comporteront bien aussi envers nous ; mais si nous en usons mal avec eux, nous ne devons pas at- tendre mieux de leur part. E?i user bien avec quelou* un. En user mal avec quelqu 'un. Comme vous en avez use toujours bien avec moi, je n'en userai pas mal avec vous. Comme il en a toujours bien use avec moi, j'en ai toujours use de la meme maniere avec lui. Tarder, 1, (takes a av. l'infj Ne tardez pas a revenir. Je ne tarderai pas d revenir. t ll me tarde . . . (unipersonnel.) I long to see my brother. He longs to receive his money. We long for dinner, because we are very hungry. They long to sleep, because they are tired. To postpone, to put off. Let us put that off until to-morrow. Let us put off that lesson until another time. t II me tarde de voir mon frere. t II lui tarde de recevoir son argent. t II nous tarde de diner, parce que nous avons bien faim. t II leur tarde de dormir, parce qu'ila sont fatigues. Remcltre,* a. Remettons cela a demain. Remettons cette lecon a une autre fois. Soixante-quinzieme Theme. Ire Sec. Comment Jacques se conduit-il envers ses parents? U ne se con- duit pas bien envers eux. — A-t-il des amis ici? II n'en a pas, car il se comporte mal envers tout le monde. — QiPaurait-ildu faire lors- qu^il me vit? II aurait du s ; avancer vers moi et me souhaiter une bonne cninee, (a happy new year.) — Ne leur tarde -t-il pas de se baigner? (to bathe?) Si fait, il leur tarde beaucoup : mais l'eau de la riviere est encore trop froide. — Ne vous tarde-t-il pas que le courrier arrive 1 (§ 151.) Si fait; maisil me tarderait beaucoup plus si je n'avais pas entendu parler de mon ami. — Ne tardez pas a revenir, entendez- vous? Je ne tarderai pas car il me tarde de partir. — Remettrons- nous PafFaire a demain'? Non, ne la remettons pas; car il nous tarde qu'elle soit finie. (§ 151.) — Que voudriez-vous savoir? II nous tarde de connaitre le resultat (the result) de Pelection. — Comment s'est il comporte envers sa femme ? Pendant la lune de miel, il s 7 est comporte comme il faut. Et ensuite ? Mal, comme il le fait envers toutes ses oonnaissances. SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 395 As you have always used me well, I will use you in the same manner. I will lend you the money you want, but on condition that you will return it to me next week. — You may depend upon it. — How has my son behaved towards you? He has behaved well towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His father told him often : The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. If we behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards us 5 but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. — May I see your brothers ? You will see them to-morrow. As they have just arrived from a long journey, (le voyage.) they long for sleep, for they are very tired. — What has my sister said % She said that she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do ? Very well, at your service. — And how are all at home ? Tderably well, thank God ! My sister was a little indisposed, (indisposee,) but she is well, (retablie ;) she told (charger de) me to give you her best compliments. — I am glad (char me) to hear that she is well. As for you, you are health itself, (la sante meme ;) you cannot look better, (vous avez la meillenre mine dn monde.) — I have no time to be ill : my business (mes affaires) would not permit me. Please (donnez- vous la peine) to sit down ; here is a chair. I will not detain (dis- traire) you from your business, (les occupations ;) I know that a mer- chant's time is precious, (que le temps est precieux d un negociant.) VOCABULAIRE To be at one' s ease. To be comfortable. To be uncomfortable. I am very much at my ease upon this chair. You are uncomfortable upon your chair. What can that be ? We are uncomfortable in that board- ing-house. That man is well off, for he has plenty of money. That man is badly off, for he is poor. To make one's self comfortable. Make yourself comfortable. To be uncomfortable. To inconvenience one's self. To put one's self out of the way. Do not put yourself out of the way. That man never inconveniences him- self; he never does it for anybody. 2de Sec. Etre a son aise. Etre mal d son aise. Je suis bien a mon aise sur cette chaise. Vous etes mal a votre aise sur votre chaise, t Qu'est-ce que cela peut £tre ? Nous sommes mal a notre aise dans cette pension. Cet homme est a son aise, car il a beaucoup d' argent. Cet homme est mal a son aise, parco qu'il est pauvre. Se mettre d son aise. Mettez-vous a votre aise. Etre gene. [ Se gener, 1. Ne vous genez pas. Cet homme ne se gene jamais ; il ne se gene jamais pour personne. 396 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) Can you, without putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me ten dollars and your gun ? To make entreaties. To beg with entreaty. I employed every kind of entreaty to engage him to it. To solicit, to press, to sue, to entreat. Here and there, up and down, all about. Now and then. From time to time. Indifferently, (as good as bad.) I have done my composition tolerably well. Pouvez-vous, sans vous gtmer, me preter dix gourdes, et sans incon- venient me preter votre fusil % Faire des instances. Frier avec instances. Je Ten ai sollicite avectoutes les in- stances possibles. Solliciter, 1. Par-ci, par-la ; ici et la. De loin en loin. De temps en temps. Tant bien que mal. J'ai fait ma composition tant bien que mal. Soixante-qtjinzieme Th^me. 2de Sec. Pai perdu de vue les enfants de Madame R . Sont-ils chez elle ? lis sont en pension. — Comment s'y trouvent-ils ? Le fils se trouve mal dans sa pension, il s'en plaint, il n'y est pas a son aise. — Et les filles, sont-elles a leur aise dans la leur? Elles s'"en plain- draient si elles ne s'y trouvaient pas bien, si elles n ; y etaient pas a leur aise. Si vous avez chaud, levez le chassis, (the sash,) mettez-vous a votre aise. — Ce medecin est-il a son aise ? II n'irait pas a pied s'il etait a son aise. — Ou allez-vous vous promener? Je vais par-ci, par- la. Quelque fois je monte la rue, d'autre fois je la descends. — Voyez-vous M. le general ? De temps en temps, de loin en loin. Comment avez-vous fait votre theme? Tant bien que mal. — Le commis du negociant fait-il son devoir ? II le fait tant bien que mal ; mais le negociant n'en est pas content. — Ou sont nos messieurs 1 lis ne se genent pas; ils sont a fumer dans le salon. — Les avez-vous pries d'aller fumer dehors? Je les ai pries avec instances de le faire, mais ils n'ont pas envie de se gener. Have you made your French composition ? I have made it. — Was your tutor pleased with it ? He was not ; for it was difficult, and I made it but indifferently, (tant bien que mal.) — Are you comfortable in your fashionable boarding-house ? I am. — Is there not too much etiquette there for you ? A little etiquette is necessary. I do not like to be always with people who put themselves too much at their ease, who use no ceremony, (sont sans ceremonie.) — When the dog was attacking you, did you not entreat them (frier avec instances de) to come to your assistance? I did earnestly beg them to come, but .hey would not, (time expired.) — Did the dog bite and hurt you much? He bit me a little here and there. — At what o'clock were they to '36 1 , Obs. 84) play off that game of billiards, before they (28 2 , Obs. 65) put it off? They were to play it at 6 o'clock in the morning. — Why SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 397 did they postpone it % They did so, because one of them was obliged to go to New York, but he will return in a day or two. Who got you that situation? Cousin James did. — How do you like to be a clerk ? I like it pretty well. — What does it bring you ? Not much now, because I am not thoroughly acquainted with the business, but when (46 3 ) I am I shall earn more. — Why are you going away so soon? Stay. I have nothing pressing (de presse d) to do now, my courier is already despatched, (mon courrier est dejd czpedie.) I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing (en passant par ici) to inquire about your health. You do me much honor. — It is very fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the pleasure of seeing you again (revoir*) this afternoon, (cette apres dinee } ) and if you have time we will take a little turn togetl. ti\ With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will come for you (venir prendre) about (vers) seven o'clock. Adieu, then, till I see you again. I have the honor to bid you adieu. Vocabtjlaire. 3me Sec. To impart something to somebody. Have you imparted that to your father ? I have imparted it to him. To look .... to speak in vain. In vain I looked all around, I saw- neither man nor house : not the least sign of settlement. A dwelling, habitation, settlement. In vain I speak, for you do not listen to me. In vain I do my best, I cannot do anything to his liking. You may say what you please, no- body will believe you. It is in vain that they earn money, they will never be rich. We search in vain, for what we have lost we cannot find. To salute, bid adieu, good day, bow. I have the honor to bid you adieu. Present my compliments to him, (to ' her.) Remember me to him, (to her.) J 34 Faire part de auelque chose a quel- qu'un. Avez-vous fait part de cela a votre pere ? Je lui en ai fait part, t Avoir beau regarder . . . avoir beau parler. J'avais beau regarder tout autour de moi, je ne voyais ni horn me, ni maison : pas la moindre apparence d' habitation. Une habitation. J'ai beau parler, vous ne m'ecoutez pas. J'ai beau faire de mon mieux, je ne peux rien faire a son gre. Vous avez beau dire, personne ne vous croira. lis ont beau gagner de l'argent, ils ne seront jamais riches. Nous avons beau chercher, nous ne pourrons pas trouver ce que nous avons perdu. Saluer, 1. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Dites-lui bien des choses de ma part. 398 SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSON. (3.) Pray present my compliments to your sister. Remember mo (present my compli- ments) to him, (to her.) I shall not fail. The present, (the present time or tense.) The past. The future. The loss of time. Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue permits. Je vous prie de faire mes compli- ments a Mademoiselle votre soeur. Presentez-lui mes civilites, (mes tres-humbles respects.) Je n'y manquerai pas. Le present. Le passe. L'avenir, le futur. La perte du temps. Jouissez de tous les plaisirs que la vertu permet. SoiXANTE-QuiNziiiME Theme. 3me Sec. Bon jour, Mile., j'espere que vous vous portez bien ! Pai Phon- neur de vous saluer, M. Je suis bien portante, je vous remercie. — En effect, vous avez tres-bonne mine. Et vous, vous etes la sante merae. Vous voulez-vous rnoquer de moi ! car, je suis a demi- mort. Non, vraiment, je trouve que vous avez tres-bonne mine. Vous avez beau dire. Mile., je sens que je ne suis pas la sante meme. Vous, M., vous avez beau dire, vous ne me ferez pas croire que je n'y vois pas. — Avez- vous fait part a quelqu'un de la nouvelle dont je vous ai fait part hier ? Oui, j'en ai fait part a mon cousin, et je me proposais d'en faire part a quelqu'autre personne. Etait-ce un secret? Non pas exactement. — M. F. est riche, est-il de la bonne societe ? Non, il a beau etre riche, on ne veut pas Vy admettre. — Le fils du consul a perdu beaucoup de temps; mais il peut le reparer s'il s'applique. Vous avez beau dire, la perte du temps est irreparable. On a dit avec verite : II n 7 est permis d'etre avare que du temps. That old woman is always scolding, (est toujours d gronder ;) in vain I do my best. No one can do anything to her liking. — You may say what you please; no one will believe you. It is true, nevertheless. — Can you, without putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me one hundred dollars ? As you have always used me well, I will treat you in the same manner, and will lend you that sum. — Have you imparted to your brother what I told you to tell him % As he was very tired, he longed to go to sleep ; so that I have postponed imparting it to him till to-morrow. — Will that do? Yes, it will. The loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute cannot be recovered (se recouvrer) for all the gold in the (du) world. It is, then, of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which consists (consister) only of (en) minutes, of which we must make good use. We have but the present ; the past is no longer anything, (nest plus rien,) and the future is uncertain, (incertain.) — A great many people ruin themselves (se miner) because they wish to SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 399 indulge themselves too much, (a force de vouloir se faire da bien.) If most men (la plupart des hommes) knew how to content them- selves (se content er de) with what they have, they would be happy ■ but their greediness (leur avidite) very often makes (rendre) them unhappy. — In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble ourselves about (ne pas s'inquieter de) the future, and enjoy the present. — I was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came to me, (vint me trouver.) " What is the matter with you ?" he asked me. " Oh, (ah!) my dear cousin," replied I, "in losing that money I have lost everything." "Do not fret," said he to me; "'for I have found your money." SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 76m.—Soixante-seizieme Legem, 76me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. Do you read ? Are you reading ? I do. I am. They Are they making a noise ? are (making one). Is she coming ? She is. Were you scolding ? I was so. Will he not be dressing himself? Yes, he will. To mean. What do you mean ? I mean what I was saying. What does that man mean ? Nothing. He means nothing. What does that mean ? What does : " Je suis d lire,''' mean ? That means : I am reading. That does not mean anything. I do not know what that means. To be close. To be particular. I do not like to deal with that man, for he is too particular. To grow impatient, to fret. Do not fret about that. To sit up, to watch. I am sitting up. I have sat up all night. | Lisez-vous? Je lis. Etes-vous a lire ($ 144 — 6.) Je suis a lire. Sont-ils a faire du bruit ? lis sont a en faire. Est-elle a venir ? Elle est a venir. Etiez-vous a gronder ? J'etais a le faire. Ne sera-t-il pas a s'habiller ? Si fait. Vouloir dire. t Que voulez-vous dire ? t Je veux dire ce que j'etais a dire. t Que veut dire cet homme ? Rien. t II ne veut rien dire. t Que veut dire cela ? Qu'est-ce que cela veut dire ? t Que veut dire : Je suis a lire ? t Cela veut dire : I am reading, t Cela ne veut rien dire, t Je ne sais pas ce que cela veut dire, t Y regarder de pres. t Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires avec cet homme, car il y regarde de trop pres. t S 1 impatient er de. Ne vous impatientez pas de cela. Veiller, 1. Je suis a veiller. J'ai veille toute la nuit. 400 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) To advise. He is advising him to . . . The dress, the costume. An elegant dress. To dress one's self. That man always dresses well. To find fault with something. That man always finds fault with everything he sees. Do you find fault with that ? I do not find fault with it. A trick, (a turn, a round.) To play a trick. To play a trick upon some one. To take a turn. I have taken a turn round the garden. He has taken a couple of turns round the garden. To take a little turn. To travel through Europe. More (meaning) besides. You have given me three books, but I want three besides. Less. Many less. Three less. Three too many. Conseiller, 1, de . . . II est a le con- seiller de . . . La mise. Une mise elegante. Se mettre* 4. Cet homme se met toujours bien. t Trouver a redire a quelque chose. t Cet homme trouve toujours a redire a tout ce qu'il voit. t Trouvez-vous a redire a cela? t Je n'y trouve rien a redire. Tin tour. Jouer un tour. Jouer un tour aquelqu'un. t Faire un tour, t J'ai fait un tour de jardin. t II a fait deux tours de jardin. t Faire un petit tour. t Faire le tour de 1' Europe. Be plus. (30 1 , Obs. 71.) (Apres m nom ou nomhre.) Vous m'avez donne trois livres, mais j'en veux trois de plus. De moins. Beaucoup de moins. Trois de moins. Trois de trop. Soixante-seizieme Theme. Ire Sec. Ah! vous voila. Oui, c'est moi-meme. Venez-vous de faire un petit tour ? Non, je viens du magasin de M. D., ou je voulais acheter des gants de peau (kid) mais je n'ai pas pu. Et pourquoi done'? n'en a-t-il pas? Si fait, il en a de superbes; mais il y regarde de trop pres. Que voulez-vous dire par cela? Ce que je veux dire? C'est tout simple 7 (it is plain.) Je veux dire qu'il vend cher et qu'il ne veut rien rabattre. Je sais qu'il n'a qu'un prix; mais je ne crois pas qu'il y regarde de trop pres. N'avez-vous pas trouve a redire a son prix % Si fait, et je lui ai dit qu'il demandait 12 sous et demi de plus que les autres marchands. Et vous lui avez peut-etre ofFert 25 sous de moins que son prix ? Non, mais 12 sous et demi. Alors, ne vous plaignez pas: ne trouvez pas a redire a sa conduite, car n'y regardez-vous pasd r aussi pres que lui? Moi ! y regarder d'aussi pres que lui ! — Jean, qu'es-tu a faire ? Je suis a nettoyer mon fusil. — Que fait Anne ? Ne Pentendez-vous pas? Elle est a pratiqu.er son piano et a chanter. Est-ce elle qui est a pratiquer? Je croyais que i'etait Julie qui etait a le faire. Anne a fait beaucoup de progres depuis que je ne l'ai entendue. SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 401 Did you mean to say that you and your cousin Henry are going (62 3 , Obs. 148) to make the tour of Europe ? No, I meant to say that he and I are going to make the tour of the United States of North America. De VAmerique du nord, are four words too many, United States is enough. — You like to find fault • but who is that young lady so elegantly dressed? (mise si elegamment?) Is it not the one who was drinking a glass of mineral water at the corner ? Oh I it is not the same. She looks like her. At any rate (apres tout) she has on an elegant dress. She is walking, (d marcher.) How well she walks ! Now she is laughing. How pretty are her teeth ! Hush ! hush ! you make me mad (vous m y impatient ez) with your exclama- tions ! Hush yourself. You have no taste. What does that mean, Sir? That means that although you dress (§ 151) well yourself, you are too particular about other people's dress. — Do not play a trick upon me. I will not play one upon you. Why have you played a trick upon that man ? Because he always finds fault with everything he sees. — What does that mean, Sir? That means that I do not like to deal with you, because you are too particular. — I wonder why your brother has not done his task. It was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to do it, because it was too difficult. — Why are you so sad ? You do not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fern.) Tell me, for I assure you that I share (partager) your sufferings (la peine) as well as your pleasures. — I am sure that you feel for me, (prendre* part a mes peines,) but I cannot tell you now (en ce moment) what makes me uneasy. I will, however, tell you when an opportunity offers, (d Voccasion.) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. My, his, her reach. The child's reach. Within my reach. Out of my reach Those things are not within the reach of everybody. Within gun-shot. A gun-shot, (meaning distance.) Two gun-shots, ( " .) How many shots have you fired ? I wonder why that man makes such a noise ? So long as. So long as you behave well, people will love you. To carry off. 34* A la portee de Ma, sa portee. 1' enfant. A ma portee. Hors de ma portee. Ces choses ne sont pas a la portee de tout le monde. A la portee du fusil. Une portee de fusil. Deux portees de fusil. Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous tires ? (48 2 .) Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cet homme fait un tel bruit ? Tant que. Tant que vous vous comporterez bien, on vous aimera. Enlever, 1. 402 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) A mouthful. A sweet mouthful. To overwhelm, to heap, to load. To overwhelm some one with joy. Generous. Charitable, beneficent. You have heaped benefits upon me. Sincere. Sincerely. An advantage. The disadvantage, prejudice. I shall never say anything to your disadvantage. To surrender. The enemies have surrendered. To prefer. I prefer the useful to the agreeable. Une bouchee. Une bonne bouchee. Combler, 1. Combler quelqu'un de joie. Genereux, genereuse, genereuses. Bienfaisant, charitable. Vous m'avez comble de bienfaits. Sincere. Sincerement. Un avantage. Le desavantage. Je ne dirai jamais rien a votre de savantage. Se rendre, 4. Les ennemis se sont rendus. Preferer. Je prefere Futile a l'agreable. Obs. 163. All adjectives and verbs used substantively are masculine. Ex. The drinking. The eating. To behold. Behold those beautiful flowers with their colors so fresh and bright. The color, the complexion. The lily. The violet. The forget-me-not. The rose. An emblem. Fresh verdure is salutary to our eyes. What was he doing when he was told of his cousin's arrival ? He was taking his music lesson. Le boire. Le manger. Regarder, 1. Regardez ces superbes fleurs au teint si frais et si eclatant. La couleur, le teint. Le lis. La violette. La germandree. La rose. Un embleme. La verdure fraiche fait du bien a nos yeux. Qu'etait-il a faire quand on vient lui annoncer Parrivee de son cousin ? II etait a prendre sa lecon de musique. Soixante-seizieme Theme. 2de Sec. Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cette petite fille fait tant de bruit % Elle crie de cette maniere parce qiPelle veut cette tasse verte et jaune, qui est hors de sa portee. Je suis presque sur que c 7 est une enfant tres-gatee ; car, si elle ne Fetait pas tant, elle aimerait mieux attendre que de crier. Mais comme la tasse est a votre portee, donnez-la-lui, pour combler ses souhaits, (satisfy.) Voyez, regardez, vous Pavez comblee de joie. Vous m'avez fait faire une action charitable. — Pourquoi ce petit garcon ne tire-t-il pas a Poiseau qui est sur Parbre ? Ne le voit-il pas ? II sait que Poiseau est hors de la portee de son fusil ; mais il est a le veiller, il s'approche pcudpeu, (little by little.) A present, regardez, il va tirer. II a touche Poiseau , mais il ne Pa pas tae. — L'amie de Sophie est-elle sincere'? Je la crois tres-charitable et tres-sincere. — Qui est genereux et bienfaisant? — Parle-t-il sincerement? — A-t-il trouve quelque chose a redire a la conduite de Favocat? — A-t-il parle a son desavantage ? — Marie vou- SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 40* drait bien savoir qui a enleve son portefeuille Francais. — Le teint de cette demoiselle est superbe, n ; est-ce pas? What do you think of the man who spoke to us at the concert ? He is a man of much understanding, (de beaucoup d' esprit,) and not at all proud (fier) of his merit. — As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me, he begins to speak English, in order to practise, and overwhelms me with politeness, (d'honnetete,) so that I often do not know what to answer. His brothers do the same, (en font autant.) However, they are very good people ; they are not only (non seulement) rich and amiable, but they are also generous and charitable. They love me sincerely, therefore I love them also, and consequendy (par consequent) shall never say anything to their disadvantage. I should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony, (tant de ceremonies ;) but every one has his faults, (le defaut,) and mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies. Behold, ladies, (Mesdames,) those beautiful flowers, with their colors so fresh and bright j they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the color of innocence, (V innocence ;) the violet indicates gentleness, (marque la douceur ;) you may see it in Louisa's eyes. The forget-me-not has the color of heaven, our future dwelling, and the rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. You see all that personified (personnifle) in seeing the beautiful Ame- lia, (Amelie.) How beautiful is the fresh verdure ! It is salutary to our eyes, and has the color of hope, (de Vesper once,) our most faith- ful (fidele) friend, (fem.,) who never deserts (quitter) us, not even in death, (d la mort.) — One word more, my dear friend. What is your pleasure ? I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your mother. I thank you for her, (de sapart ;) I shall not fail. Fare- wellj then. SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-septieme Lecon^me. Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. A silk gown. j Une robe de soie. A kitchen table. | Une table de cuisine. A mahogany table. j Une table d'acajou A brick house. A stone house. A windmill. A coffee-mill. Une maison de brique. Une maison de pierre. Un moulin a vent. Un moulin a cafe. Obs. 163i. We have seen (2 1 ) that the preposition de is put between two substantives, the latter of which expresses the substance of which the former :s made ; but the preposition a is made use of when the latter expresses the 404 SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) use of the former. In both cases the order of the two substantives is inverted in French when they make a compound in English. A velvet bonnet. A silver tankard. A water-mill. A steam-mill. Gunpowder. Fire-arms. A one-horse wagon. A four-horse carriage. A two-wheeled wagon. A four-wheeled carriage. A one-story house. A two-story house. A three-story house. To exaggerate, amplify, heighten. That man exaggerates all that he says and does. To take the 'place of, to be in stead of. That man is a father to me. 5 That umbrella serves him as a stick. 2 3n a small scale. On a large scale. Thereabouts, nearly. Alternately, turn by turn. To endeavor, to strive. To give one's self up to grief. To melt. To melt in tears. To shake. Shake that tree, and the fruit will fall down. Un chapeau de velours. Un pot d' argent. Un moulin a eau. Un moulin d vapeur. De la poudre a canon. Des armes a feu. Une voiture a un cheval. Une voiture a quatre chevaux. Une voiture d deux roues. Une voiture d quatre roues. Une maison d un etage. Une maison d deux etages. Une maison a trois etages. Outrer, 1. Exagerer, 1. Cet homme outre tci t ce qu'ii dit et tout ce qu'il fait. Tenir lieu de . . . . Servir de. (73 2 .) t Cet homme me tient lieu de pere. t Cet homme me sert de pere. t Ce parapluie lui tient lieu de canne. t Ce parapluie lui sert de canne. En petit. En grand. A peu pres. Tour a tour. t S'efforcer, 1, {de av. Pinf.) S'abandonner a la douleur. Fondre, 4. Fondre en larmes. Secouer, 1. Secouez cet arbre, et les fruits en tomberont. Soixante-dix-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. Demeurez-vous dans une maison de pierre ou de bois? Nous occupons une maison de brique. Presque toutes les maisons se batissent en brique dans ce quartier-ci, (quarter, district.) — Voulez- vous faire emplette d'un moulin a eau ou a vent % Je prefere les moulins a eau, et je presume que j'en acheterai un. — Madame, le moulin a cafe vient de se casser. Ah! c'est un malheur ! Avez- vous moulu (to grind, moudre,^ 4) assez de cafe ? Non, Madame, pas encore. Envoyez la petite Marguerite emprunter (R. 2) le rnonlin du voisin. — Les voitures a deux roues ne sont plus a ia mode. On a partout des voitures a 4 roues. — Est-il a voyager en voiture? Non. il est a voyager par la route de fer, (the railroad.) — Comment preferez-vous voyager? Par le bateau a vapeur. Sophie n'est-elle pas a coudre (coudre, # to sew) sa robe de soie ? Elle etait SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 405 a la coudre hier, mais maintenant elle doit etre d coudre 1 (she must be sewing) sa robe de satin. — Voulez-vous qu'elle couse quelque chose pour vous 1 Has your sister been out to-day? She has been out to buy seve- ral things. — What has she bought? She has bought (s'est achete) a silk gown, a velvet bonnet, and a lace veil, (un voile de dentelle.) — What have you done with (de) my silver tankard? It is on the kitchen-table, together w T ith (avec) the oil-bottle, the milk-pot, the pitcher, the mustard-pot, and the coffee-mill. — Do you ask for a wine-bottle 1 No, I ask for a bottle of wine, and not for a wine- bottle. — If you will have the goodness to give me the key of the wine-cellar, (la cave au vin,) I shall go for one. — What does that man want of me ? He exacts nothing; but he will accept what you will give him, for he is in want of everything. — I will tell you that I am not fond of him, for his behavior raises suspicions in my mind. He exaggerates all that he says and does. You are wrong in having such a bad opinion (une opinion) of him, for he has been a father to you. — I know what I say. He has cheated me ^n a small and on a large scale, and whenever he calls he asks me for something. In this manner he has alternately asked me for all I had : my fowling-piece, my fishing-line, my repeater, and my golden candlesticks. — Do not give yourself up so much to grief, else (sinon) you will make me melt in tears. Democritus and Heraclitus were two philosophers of a very different character, (d'un caractere bien different:) the first laughed at the follies (lafolie) of men, and the other wept at them. — They were both right, for the follies of men deserve to be laughed and wept at, (meritent qu'on en rie et qu'on en pleure.) 2 1 We have seen (06s. 90, 39 1 ,) that faut (must) can have no other nomi- native but il. If any other nominative is used, the English verb must is not to be translated by faut, but by some other verb, usually by devoir. Practice must, before this, have taught the student that: il faut, faut-il, que faut-il, &c, always stand at the head of the sentence, and that, of course, if any other nominative has been employed, the preceding direction is to be complied with. She must be sewing, the sentence above, might, beginning with il faut, have been correctly rendered by: il faut qu' elle soit d coudre, but, if elle is taken for subject, you are compelled to say as above : elle doit etre a coudre. 2 The follies deserve to be laughed and wept at. Les folies meritent qu'on en rie, et qu'on en pleure. N. B. The infinitive of a passive verb coming after another verb, is rendered by qu'on as nominative indefinite of the fol- lowing verb, which must be put in its proper tense. He hopes not to be laughed at, II espere qu'on ne se moquera pas de lui. It is very frequently followed by the subjunctive, as in the exercise. 406 SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To give birth to, (meaning to raise, to cause.) To raise difficulties. To cause quarrels. To cause suspicions. The behavior of that man raised sus- picions in my mind. To be in want of. To be short of. To want. That man is in want of everything. I am in want of nothing. To set the table, to lay the cloth. A cover. A table fo* four persons. A table for ten persons. A writing-table or desk. A dining-room. A sleeping or bed-room. A repeater. An oil-bottle. A mustard-pot. A pitcher. A fowling-piece. A fishing-line. To exact, to want of, to require. What do you want of me ? What do you exact of me ? I exact nothing of you. A milk-pot. Faire naitre. t Faire naitre des difficultes. t Faire naitre des querelles. t Faire naitre des soup§ons. t La conduite de cet homme a fait naitre des soup§ons dans mon esprit. S Manquer de. Cet homme manque de tout. Je ne manque de rien. t Mettre le couvert. Un couvert. 1 Une table de quatre couverts. Une table de dix couverts. Une table a. ecrire. Une salle a manger. Une chambre a coucher. Une montre a repetition. Une bouteille a l'huile. Un pot a moutarde. Un pot a l'eau. Un fusil de chasse. Une ligne a pecher. Exiger, 1. > Qu'exigez-vous de moi? Je n'exige rien de vous. Un pot au lait. Obs. 163f . When the second noun is used to determine the first more pre- cisely, or to show that the first contains a portion of the second, it is pre- ceded by au or d la for the singular, and aux for the plural. L'homme aux lapins. La femme aux huitres. La bouteille au vinaigre. La bouteille de vin. La bouteille au vin. La bouteille a vin. The rabbit-man. The oyster-woman. The bottle with vinegar in, (not full.) The bottle of wine, (full of.) The bottle with wine in. The wine-bottle, (none in.) These last three sentences express the precise distinction to be conveyed. 1 Couvert. Cover (Webster) means everything usually wanted to eat a meal with. Un couvert for dinner is not the same as un couvert for break- fast or tea. Cups and saucers being used at the latter, and not at the former meal. SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 407 Dainties. He is fond of dainties. At broad daylight. To sit down to a meal. Les bons morceaux. II aime les bons morceaux. En plein jour. Se mettre a table. Soixante-dix-septieme Th£me. 2de Sec. Restez a diner avec nous. Nous avons quelques bons morceaux. Vous voulez que nous dinions (§151) avec vous, puisque vous nous parlez de bons morceaux. Sans doute que (Dir. 6) je le veux, autrement je ne vous prierais pas de rester. Mais dinerez-vous bientot; car ; j ; ai bien des choses a acheter cet apres-midi. Laissez- moi voir l'heure. II est une heure moins un quart. La fille doit etre a mettre (must be setting, 77 2 , N.) le couvert; ainsi vous voyez que vous aurez apres diner, assez de temps pour faire vos em- plettes. Qu 7 avez-vous a acheter ? Des bois de lit, des oreillers de plume, des tables, et des toilettes d ; acajou, des armoires (walnut wardrobes) de noyer? Non, non, je suis a faire faire tout cela. Mais nous sommes a chercher un poele pour la cuisine, un moulin a cafe, des pots aPeau de differentes grandeurs, des cuvettes, (bowls.) des cafetieres (coffee-pots) des tasses a cafe. Ne vous faut-il pas aussi des tasses a the ? Non, je crois que nous ne prendrons pas de the, nous ne Paimons point. JVIessieurs, le diner est servi. Allons, ne faites point de difficultes. Venez vous mettre a table et gouter nos bons morceaux. Have you seen your niece ? Yes ; she is a very «rood girl. w T ho writes well, and speaks French still better- therefore, she is loved and honored by everybody. — And her brother: what is he doing? Do not speak to me of him ; he is a naughty boy, who writes always badly, and speaks French still worse: he is therefore laussi n'est-il) loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties, but h& does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad daylight, and pretends to be ill; but when we sit down to dinner he is generally well again, (retabli.) He is to study physic, (la medecine.) but he has not the slightest inclination for it, (aucune envie.) He is almost always talking of his dogs, which he loves passionately, (passtonnement.) His father is extremely sorry for it. The young simpleton (un imbecile) said lately to his sister, " I shall enlist as soon as a peace (la paix) is proclaimed, (publierP) My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with some friends at the Kin*? of Spain, (t'Espagne.) — Why do you always speak English and never French? Because I am too bashful, (timide.) You are joking : is an English- man ever bashful? — I have a keen appetite, (grand appilit;) &i v * me something good to eat. — Have you any money? No, Sir.— 408 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) Then I have nothing to give you. — Will you not let me have some (ne me donnez-vous pas) on credit? I pledge (engager) my honor. That is too little. — What ; (comment,) Sir! What do you mean? I mean what I say. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-huitieme Lego7i, 78me. Vocabtjlaire. Ire Sec. PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. Present du Subjonctif. For its use and formation see (§ 151.) That article is to be carefully studied. They lis, elles 11 faut qu'ils Je tu il nous vous Speak. Finish. parlewi. finissenZ. parlent. finissent. parle, finisse, paries, finis'ses, parle, finisse, parlions, fmissions, parliez. finissiez. Receive. Restore. recoiveni. render. recoivent. rendent. recoive, rende, recoives rendes, , recoive rende, recevions, rendions, receviez. rendiez. As the student is already acquainted with some of the persons of the irregular ones, (8 in all, by our rule, as may be seen at § 151,) we will at once introduce them, with some of the known antecedents. In going over the following, let the antecedent be repeated with every new person. As : II faut qu'il ait la bonte, &c. Il faut qu'ils aient la, &c. Yon must have the goodness to do that — he, they. . . . Must I be here early ? Is it necessary for him to be here ? You must be here early. It is not necessary that he should come. Is it the only one you know ? he knows ? they know ? It is the only one I know, he knows, they know. When will it be time for us to come ? for her ? for thee ? It will be time for you, for her, for me to come at 6 o'clock. Do you wish me to do that ? How do you wish me to do it ? 1 wish you to do it this way ; him, her to do it. II faut que vous ayez la bonte de faire cela, qu'il ait, qu'ils aient. Faut-il que je sois ici de bonne heure ? Faut-il qu'il soit ici? II faut que vous soyez ici de bonne heure. II n'est pas n^cessaire qu'il vienne. Est-ce le seul que vous sachiez ? qu'il sache ? qu'ils sachent ? C'est le seul que je sache, qu'il sache, qu'ils sachent. Quand sera-t-il temps que nous venions? qu'elle vienne? tu viennes ? II sera temps que vous veniez, qu'elle vienne, je vienne a 6 heures. Voulez-vous que jefasse cela? Com- ment voulez-vous que je le fasse ? Je veux que vous le fassiez comme ceci, qu'il le fasse, qu'elle le fasse. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 409 Although you can do it, I'd rather you wouii not do it. Is it not time for us to go to school ? for them ? for thee ? Il is high time for us, for them, for thee to go. Is he sorry I can ? we can ? she can ? thou canst ? He is not sorry you can, we can, she can, I can. Is she glad we are worth as much as they ? She is. Will he do it without our wishing it ? your, my wishing it ? He will not do it except you wish it, we, they wish it. Quoique vous puissiez le faire, je ne me soucie pas que vous le fassiez. N'est-il pas temps que nous allions a l'ecole ? qu'ils aillent ? tu ailles ? II est grand temps que nous y allions, qu'ils y aillent, que tu y ailles. Est-il fache que je puisse ? Nous puissions ? qu'elle puisse ? que tu puisses ? II n'est pas fache que vous puissiez, nous puissions, qu'elle puisse, je puisse. Est-elle contente ~ue nous valions autant qu'eux ? Elle Test. Le fera-t-il sans que nous le voulions ? vous le vouliez ? je le veuille ? II ne le fera pas sans que vous le vouliez, nous le voulions, qu'ils le veuillent. Soixante-dix-huitieme Theme, ire Sec. Ou voulez-vous que j'aille ? Allez chez le bijoutier.-— Ou voulez- vous qu'il aille? Je desire qu'il aille chez le menuisier.— Et, elle'? Je desire quelle aille chez la faiseuse de robes.— Ou faut-ii que je sois a huit heures ? II faut que vous soyez au magasin. Ou faut-ils qu'ils soient? II faut que Jean, Frederic, et Marie, soient a l'ecole. — Est-ce a dix heures ou a dix heures et demie qu'il faut que nous soyons au bateau a vapeur ? II faut que nous y soyons a dix heures et demie ; rnais il vaut mieux que nous y allions de meilleure heure. Sans doule.— Est-il necessaire que le cuisinier achete plus d'une tivre (a pound) de beurre ? Oui ; il faut qu'il en achete au moins trois livres. Trois livres 1 y pensez-vous 1 (are you thinking of what you say? are you in earnest ?)— Faut-il dire au boulanger d'apporter des petits-pains? (rolls?) Oui, il faut le lui dire, car il n ; en appor- tera pas sans que nous le lui disions.— Est-ce le seul medecin que vous connaissiez? — N ; est-il pas temps que je traduise, que j'ecrive, et que je lise mon theme?— Convient-il (is it suitable) qu'elle recoive ce billet, qu'elle le lise, et qu'elle y reponde ? Will you relate (raconter) something to me ? What do you wish me to relate to you? A little anecdote, if you like. A little boy one day at table (d table) asked for some meat: his father said that it was not polite to ask for any, and added : « You must wait till (jus- qu'd ce que, $ 151) some is given to you. ;; After a little while, the poor boy, seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to him, 35 410 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) said to his father : " My dear father, give me a little salt, if you please.' 7 " What will you do with it?" asked the father. " I wish to eat it with the meat which you will give me, 77 replied (repliquer) the child. Everybody admired (admirer) the little boy's wit; and his father, perceiving that he had forgotten him, gave him a piece of meat, some salt, and vegetables. Who was that little boy that asked for meat at table ? He was the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask for some meat? He asked for some because he had a good appetite. — Why did his father not give him some immediately ? Because he had forgotten it. — Was the little boy wrong in asking for some ? He was wrong, for he ought to have waited. — If it was impolite to ask for meat, was it not impolite also to ask for salt, or anything else ? And to be con- sistent, ought not the father to have told him again : "You must wait until some is given to you?" That may be; but although the father's conduct may be called inconsistent, the child's request was not the less witty, (n'm etait pas moins spirituelle.) — It is a pity (§151) the cook did not go to market, for I am afraid that the best fruit is sold by this time, (ne soit vendu (§ 151 — 6) a cede heure-ci.) 1 Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Is it extraordinary that we do not wish it ?— they do not wish it ? It is (extraordinary that you do not wish it — that they do not wish it). Is it not vexing (sad) that she loses them ? I lose them ? You lose some ? It is very sad for her to lose them ; for you to lose them ; for me to lose some. Is it right that I should get up and that you should not ? It is right for us both to get up. Is it not wrong that we should have some, and 'that they should not have any ? Yes, it is wrong that you should re- ceive some and they none. Est-il extraordinaire que nous ne le voulions pas? — qu'ilsne le veuill- ent pas ? II est extraordinaire que vous ne le vouliez pas — qu'ils ne le veuillent pas. N'est-ii pas facheux qu'elle les perde ? que je les perde ? vous en perdiez ? U est tres-facheux qu'elle les perde ; que vous les perdiez; que j'en perde. Est-il juste que je me leve et que vous ne vous leviez pas ? II est juste que nous nous levions tous deux. N'est-il pas injuste que nous en ayons, et qu'ils n'en aient pas? Si fait, il est injuste que vous en receviez et qu'ils n'en regoivent pas. 1 As the student knows the subjunctive present of the auxiliaries (avoir, itre), he can easily form the compound tenses. Although I have been ; Quaique faie ete. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 411 Is it not surprising that they go to bed ? we go to bed, so soon ? No, it is not surprising that they go to bed, that you go to bed so soon. Is it not better for her to start when her uncles start ? It is better she should not start at all. Will it do for us to say it, or for them ? It will not do for you to say it ; but for them, it will do. Is it possible that his horses should be worth more than his brother's ? It is not possible they should be worth more. Is it desirable that he should take board ? It is desirable that he, that you, that we should take board. N'est-il pas surprenant qu'ils se cou* chent ? que nous nous couchions, si tot ? Non, il n'est pas etonnant qu'ils se couchent, que vous vous couchiez si tot. Ne vaut-il pas mieux qu'elle parte quand ses oncles partiront ? II vaut mieux qu'elle ne parte pas du tout. Convient-il que nous le disions, ou qu'ils le disent ? II ne convient pas que vous le disiez, mais il convient qu'ils le disent. Est-il possible que ses chevaux vaill- ent mieux que ceux de son frere ? II n'est pas possible qu'ils vaillent mieux. Est-il a desirer qu'il prenne pen- sion ? II est a desirer qu'il prenne, que vous preniez,que nous prenions pension. Soixante-dix-htjitieme ThSme. 2de Sec. Est-il surprenant qu'il sache si bien l'allemand % Non, il n'est pas surprenant qu'il le sache si bien, puisque sa mere est allemaude. Aime-t-il qu'on le loue % II aime qu'on le loue. mais il n'aime pas que nous soyonsloues. Suppose-t-il que nousl'approuvions(§ 151 — 5) que vous l'approuviez '? II suppose que vous l'approuvez, que nous l'approuvons, (indicat.) — Que diriez-vous si je vous racontais une petite anecdote en Francais? Je dirais que vous etes aussi aimable qu'a l'ordinaire. Un jeune prince, de sept ans, etait admire par tout le monde a cause de son esprit. II entendit un jour un officier, qui parlait de lui, dire : cc Quand les enfants ont tant d'esprit dans leur enfance, ils en ont ordinairement fort peu quand ils sont avances en age." " S'il en est ainsi/' dit le jeune prince, " vous devez avoir eu infiniment d'esprit dans votre enfance!" — Y a-t-il long-temps que vous savez cette anecdote % II a fallu que je la tradnise hier, (I had to. . . . )— Desire-t-on qu'elle reussisse ou que vous reussissiez ? On ne desire pas que nous reussissions ; mais qu'elle reussisse. Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote ? You will greatly (beaucoup) oblige me. — Some one purchasing some goods of a shopkeeper, (un marchand.) said to him: "You ask too much; you must (§ 151) not sell so dear to me as to another, because I am a friend, (puisque je suis des amis de la maison") The merchant replied : " Sir, we must gain something by (avee) our friends, for our 412 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) enemies will never come to the shop." — An Englishman, on first visiting France, met with a very young child in the streets of Calais, who spoke the French language with fluency and elegance, (cou- vamment et avec elegance.) " Good heaven, (Mori Dieu!) is it possi- ble?"' exclaimed he, "that even children here speak the French language with purity, (la puret'eP) Let us seek (rechercker) the friendship of the good, and avoid (fruiter) the society of the wicked (le mediant;) for bad company corrupts (les mauvaises societes corrompent) good manners, (les bonnes mceurs.) — What sort of weather is it to-day? It snows continually, (toujoursj) as it snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances, will also snow to-morrow. — Do you think it will snow (§ 151 — 5) to- morrow also % I hope it will, for I am always very well when it is very cold. And I am (et moi, je me porte) always very well when it is neither cold nor warm. — It is too windy to-day, and we should do better if we stayed at home. Whatever weather it may be, (Quel- que temps qu'il fasse. § 151 — 11,) I must go out* for I promised to be with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word, (tenir^ parole.) Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. See ($ 151) and study it carefully, and make a list of the antecedents as they occur. It seems you are angry, (you appear.) 1 II semble 1 que vous soyez fache (R. 4.) You appear angry, (to be angry.) [ Vous semblez fache, (etre fache.) The subjunctive is employed in the first sentence because il sembleis used unipersonally ; but not being used so in the second, the indicative is employed. Is it sufficient that you and I should complain of it ? Yes, it is sufficient that we complain of it (for us to complain.) So that neither she nor they must complain. Let him come if he wishes. Let them wait if they have a mind. Let Julius write the letter, and you will carry it. Suffit-il que vous vous en plaigniez et que je m'en plaigne ? Oui, il suffit que nous nous en plai- gnions. Ainsi ni lui ni eux ne doivent s'en plaindre. (77 1 , N.) Qu'il vienne s'il veut. (§ 150 — 7.) Qu'ils attendent s'ils en ont envie. Que Jules ecrive la lettre, et vous la porterez. Obs. 164. We saw ($ 150 — 7) that the 3d pers. sing, and plur. of the impera- tive were like the same persons of the present of the subjunctive, conse- quently, we can now use those persons of the imperative without difficulty. 1 II semble, it seems, is also construed with the indicative when it has an indirect object, as : It seems to me that you are angry ; il me semble que vous ites fache. It seems to thee, il te semble, il lui semble, &c, to him or her, &c. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 413 Let him have the goodness to hold it. Let Sophia receive her reward. Where do you prefer him to buy the candy ? Let him buy it at the grocer's. Watch the bird. Take care it does not. run or fly away. Let them mind it. Ask Betsy to tell the cook to cook the salt fish. I doubt her being able to cook it, for her coal fire is almost out. ($ 151-2.) I wish you may succeed. I doubt that he is arrived. (R. 2.) I wish to be obeyed. I wish him to be told so. He wishes me to have patience. I doubt his being at home. (R. 2.) I fear we shall have a storm. He denies having done it. He complains of your having ill- treated him. I am very sorry for your having done it. I regret that you should have been obliged to wait. You will approve of my not going thither. He disapproved of your having said it. What do you wish these men to buy ? W r hat do you wish him to answer ? Do you expect him to give you his goods for nothing ? Whai do you want me to drink ? Soixante-dix-huitieme Theme. 3me Sec. Suffit-il que vous le disiez pour qu'on le croie ? iNPest-il pas suffi- sant que je le dise pour qu'on le croie ?— Merite-t-il qu'on Pattende ? ($ 151—2.) S'il merite qu'on Pattende ! Sansdoute qu'il le merite ! — S il a pe rdu le feuillet, qu'il le rctrouve : ] (find it again.) Qu'il le 1 The syllable re prefixed to a French verb, corresponds in English to~- bock, again, anew, or re. Venir, revenir, to come back ; porter, reporter to carry back or again ; trouver, retrouver, io find again ; voir, revoir, to see again; renouveler, to renew; doubler, redoubler, to redouble, &c. ; con- sidered reconsiderer, to consider again or anew 35* Qu'il ait la bonte de le tenir. Que Sophie reeoive sa recompense. Oii preferez-vous qu'il achete le candi ? Qu'il l'achete chez l'epicier. Veillez l'oiseau. Prenez garde qu'il wes'enfuie, (ne s'en aille, s'envole.) Qu'ils y prennent garde. Priez Lisette de dire a la cuisiniere de faire cuire le poisson sale. Je doute qu'elle puisse le faire cuire, car son feu de charbon est presque eteint. Je desire que vous reus sis siez. Je doute qu'il soit arrive. Je veux qu'on m'obeisse. Je souhaite qu'on le lui dise. II veut que j'aie patience. Je doute qu'il soit a la maison. Je crains que nous rfayons un orage. II nie qu'il V ait fait. II se plaint que vous Vayez mal- traite. Je suis au desespoir que vous Vayez fait. Je regrette que vous ayez ete oblige d'attendre. Vous trouverez bon que je n'y aille pas. II a trouve mauvais que vous Vayez dit. Que voulez-vous que ces hommes achetent ? Que voulez-vous qu'il reponde? Vous attendez-vous a ce qu'il vous donne ses marchandises pour rien ? Que voulez-vous que je boive ? 414 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (4.) retrouve ! c'est plus aise a dire qu ? a faire. Qu'il essaie. — Tenez- vous bien la flute ? Prenez garde qu'elle ne tombe. Je la tiens bien. Je prendrai garde qu'elle ne tombe. — 11 est impossible que le courrier ne soit pas encore arrive ! Pourquoi Salomon reste-t-il si long-temps? II est possible que la neige ait empeche le courrier d'arriver a Fheure ordinaire. II est possible que cela soit ; mais j'espere qu'il n'en est pas ainsi. ($ 151 — 2.) Je Fespere aussi. mais ayons patience jusqu'a ce que Salomon revienne. Quelque desir que vous ayez d'avoir vos lettres, et quelqu'importantes que les nou- velles puissent etre, il faut que nous attendions avec patience. Vous en parlez bien a votre aise. J'attends sans m'impatienter. Have you corrected Louisa's exercise ? Yes, I have. — How many mistakes had she? She had but three or four. But three or four! That is a good deal for her. — The exercise must have been *'?ry hard, (difficult.) (77 1 , N.) It was. She is the most attentive and studious pupil I have. — Are you not afraid we shaH have (§ 151 — 6) a storm? I am afraid we shall have a violent one. See. how black tne sky is at the west ! — Are you glad that I did it, and that he could not do it? (62 2 , N. 1.) I am glad you did it; but I am sorry that he could not do it. Let the girl go (Obs. 164) to the apothecary's. What do you wish her to purchase ? I want her to buy some perfumed soap, and to ($ 151 — 9) put it in my desk. What must we bring you from the country ? Is it necessary that you should go? We have promised to go. — Would you not be astonished if we did not keep our promise? (§ 148, N. 3.) — You come late; you have made us wait a long time. We regret that you have been obliged to wait. — How long have you been waiting? Never mind the time we have already lost, let us lose no more ; but .et us finish our affair quickly, so that (afin que, § 151) we may go home. It seems you are a little cross, (un peu de mauvaise humeur.) r t does not suit you, Sir, to find fault with me, when the fault is yours. Come. Let us have done. Vocabulaire. 4me Sec. believe he is in the right. Do you believe that horse is worth a hundred crowns ? I do not believe that it is worth a hundred crowns. I hope he will come. Do you hope he will come ? I think he has done it. Do you think he has done it ? If you think it will be fine weather, let us set out for the country. Ind. Je crois qu'il a raison. Subj. Croyez-vous que ce cheval vaille cent ecus ? (§ 151 — 5.) Subj. Je ne crois pas qu'il vaille cent ecus. Ind. J'espere qu'il viendra. Subj. Esperez-vous qu'il vie?me? Ind. Je pense qu'il l'a fait. Subj. Pensez-vous qu'il Yait lait ? Si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau temps, partons pour la campagne. SEVENTY-JPIGHTH LESSON. (4.) 415 I fear that they will come. ($ 151 — 6.) I am afraid you will speak of me. Does he not fear that you might speak of it? Do you fear to offend him ? (282. Obs. 65.) If I apprehended you would do it. I am not afraid that the man will come. (§ 151—7.) Do not doubt my being always your friend. (^ 151 — 8.) He does not deny your having done it. Je crains qu'ils ne viennent. J'ai peur que vous ne parliez de moi. Ne craint-il pas que vous n'en par- liez ? Craignez-vous de 1'ofTenser ? Si j'apprehendais que vous le fissiez. Je n'ai pas peur que I'homme vienne. Ne doutez pas que je ne sois toujours votre ami. II ne nie pas que vous ne Payez fait. afflicted. Enchante, enchanted. glad. Etonne, astonished. charmed. Faehe, sorry. satisfied. Surpris, surprised, &c. Remark. The subjunctive is further governed by an adjective or parti- ciple preceded by one of the verbs, ttre* to be; paraitre,* to appear; sembler, to seem. Some of such adjectives or participles are : Afflige, Bien aise, Charme, Content, I am sorry that she is ill. I am charmed that you are here. I am glad that he has received his money. She is angry that you are my friend. I am surprised that you are not more attentive. I am extremely glad that your sister has recovered. Your father is afflicted that you miss your lessons. I am surprised that you have not done your task. 06s. 165. In all these instances, if de ce should be placed before que or qui, the indicative follows. But the subjunctive, as above, is preferable. Je suis j ache qu'elle soit malade. Je suis charme que vous soyez ici. Je suis bien aise qu'il ait eu son ar- gent. Elle est fdchee que vous soyez mon ami. Je suis etonne que vous ne soyez pas plus attentif. Je suis enchante que votre sceur soit retablie. Votre pere est afflige que vous man- quiez vos legons. Je suis surpris que vous n'ayez pas fait votre devoir. I am charmed at your being here. He is glad that you have received your money. It is certain that you are in the wrong. It is not certain that you are in the right. (§151—4.) It is probable that he will do it. Is it probable that he will do it ? It is true that he is capable of it. If it be true that he is capable of it. Je suis charme de ce que vous etes ici. II est bien aise de ce que vous avez eu votre argent. Ind. II est certain que vous avez tort. Subj. II n'est pas certain que vous ayez raison. Ind. II est probable qu'il le fera. Subj. Est-il probable qu'il le fasse ? Ind. II est vrai qu'il en est capable. Subj. S'il est vrai qu'il en soit capable. 416 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) Soixante-dix-huitiIsme Theme. 4me Sec. Croyez-vous qu'il ait raison ou qu'eile ait raison ? Nous croyons qu'ils ont tort, tous deux. — Si le colonel est en ville, je crains bien qu ; il ne vienne nous voir. Et moi, je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. — Croi- ent-ils que leur maison vaille dix mille gourdes'? Qu'ils le croient ou non. ils en demandent ce prix-la. — Elle a peur que nous ne par- lions d'elle, n'est-ce pas ? Peu lui importe, (it is of little importance to her; she does not care,) que nous parlions d 7 elle ou que nous n'en parlions pas. — M. D a promis de venir. n'est-ce pas? Esperez- vous qu'il vienne malgre le mauvais temps ? J'espere qu'il viendra malgre le mauvais temps, car je ne doute pas qu'il ne tienne parole. Nous craignons beaucoup que cet homme ne revienne pendant votre absence. Je n'ai pas peur qu'il revienne, ainsi ne craignez rien. You have forbidden him to go to the wharf, (vous lui avez defendu de ;) do you think he went there ? (^ 151.) I do not think he went; but his sister thinks he did go. — Is he not afraid that you will busy yourself with it? I care very little whether he is afraid or not. (Peu mHmporte que y § 151.) — If you think that we can go to Burlington and come back in two hours, let us start. I do not think we can go and return in so short a time. ($ 200.) — As it is important that we should see the lawyer before Tuesday, suppose we go, (should go.) Very well, let us go. — Let John take care of the store during my absence. John or William ? No matter which, (nimporte lequel,) provided the store is taken (§ 151 — 2) care of. Are you not glad we have received the invitation we so much desired? I am very glad, on your account, that we have received it. On my account ! How ? don't you wish to go ? I care very little about it. That is something new. I thought that you were as anxious to go (vous aviez autant envie d'y aller) as I. I was as anxious to go as you at first; but now I think I would rather not go. It is asto- nishing that you change so ! — Sarah, I am glad you are here. Are you, indeed? I, for my part, am glad I am here. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) — Is not that clerk's uncle much afflicted that his nephew behaves so badly ? No, he cares very little now, whether he behaves well or not : at first, he was very much afflicted at it. I believe he was. SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-neuvieme Legm, 79me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT.— Subjonctif Imparfait. For its formation see § 152. i That article is to be carefully studied. After the following conjunctions use the subjunctive: SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 417 Afin que, A moins que . . ne, Au cas que, Avant que, Bien que, De crainte que . ne T)e peur que, En cas que, Encore que, Jusqii a ce que, Loin que, Non que, ] IS on pas que, Will you stay that, in order that to the end that, unless, if. before. though. [ — 6.) for fear, lest. (§ 151 lest. in case, if. though, till, until, far from. not that. here until I can go out with you ? . I will go out before he comes back. If you had what you have not, you would be rich. I sent you my book, that you might read it. Unless you accompany her, she will not go out. Though your children were idle, yet they improved. If a man had ever so little acquaint- ance with another, he was bound to take a part in the dispute, and venture his person as much as if he had himself been angry. Be it as it may, they will not go. Though she was little and bad-look- ing, she was nevertheless amiable. I would not have her for a wife, though she is rich, and has a great deal of wit, because she is not good-hearted. Provided you are my friend, I am satisfied. Whether you are right or wrong. Nonobstant que, Pose que, Pour que, Pour peu que, Pourvu que, Quoique, Sans que, Si peu que, Soit que, Suppose que, for all that, not- withstanding that, suppose that. that, in order that, if ever so little, how little soever, provided, save that, though . . . without . . . however little, whether, suppose that. Voulez-vous rester ici jusqv? a ce que je puisse sortir avec vous ? Je sortirai avant qu'il ne revienne. En cas que \cus eussiez ce que vous n'avez pas, vous seriez riche. Je vous envoyai mon livre, afin que vous le lussiez. A moins que vous ne Vaccompagniez, elle ne sortira pas. Bien que vos enfants fussent pares- seux, ils faisaient des progres. Pour peu qu'un horn me fut connu d'un autre, il fall ait qu'il entrdt dans la dispute, et qu'il pay at de sa personne, comme s'il avait ete lui-meme en colere. Quoiqu'W en soit, ils n'iront pas. Quoiqu 1 elle fut petite et qu'elle eut mauvaise mine, elle ne laissait pas d'etre aimable. Je ne la voudrais pas pour femme, quoiqu' elle soit riche, et qu' elle ait beaucoup d'esprit, parce qu'elie n'a pas bon coeur. Pourvu que vous soyez de mes amis, je suis content. Soit que vous ayez raison ou tort. Soixante-dix-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. Preferait-il que je le fisse? Non, il ne preferait pas que vous le fissiez. — Ne prefererait-il pas que vous y allassiez ? Non, mais il pre fere rait que ses neveux y allassent. Jerome n ; etait-il pas un assez bon domestique ? Si, quoiqu'il oubliat quelque fois de ferraer les portes. — Niait-il qu ; il ne Teut fait? Non. il ne le niait pas. — Se plaignit-il que vous. lui, et moi, nouseussions tout mange ? Non, 418 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) il ne se plaignit pas que nous eussions tout mange, mais il s'en etonna. — Ne se souciait-il pas que vous vinssiez ? II aurait, au contraire, beaucoup desire que je vinsse, mais il ne se souciait pas que ces enfants-la vinssent. — N'exigedtes-vous pas (require) que nous le promissions sur le champ ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Est-ce que j'exigeai que vous le promissiez'? — Etait-il a ecrire quand vous l'appelates ? — Pourquoi votre ami ne vient-il pas a cette heure- ci % II faut qu 7 il soit a etudier. M. de Turenne would never buy any thing on credit of tradesmen, {le marchand,) for fear, he said, they should lose a great part of their money, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were employed about his house had orders (avait ordre) to bring in their bills (un memoir e) before he set out (§ 152) for the campaign, (se mettre* en campagne,) and they were regularly paid. — You will never be respected (respecter) unless you forsake (abandonner) the bad company you keep. — You cannot finish your work to-night, unless I help you. — I will explain to you (expliquer) every difficulty, that you may not be disheartened (decourager) in your undertaking, (une enterprise.) Suppose you should lose your friends, what would become of you % In case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. — A wise and prudent man (un homme sage et prudent) lives with eco- nomy when yonng, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his labour when he is old. — Carry this money to Mr. N., in order that he may be able to pay his debts, (une dette.) — Will you lend me that money ? I will not lend it you unless you promise to return (rendre) it to me as soon as you can. — Did the general arrive ? He arrived yesterday morning at the camp, (le camp,) weary, (las,) and tired, (harasse,) but very seasonably, (tres-d propos;) he immediately gave his orders to begin the action, though he had not yet all his troops. — Are your sisters happy % They are not, though they are rich, because they are not contented. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. The Perfect of the Subjunctive {Parfait du Subjonctif) is formed by the present of the auxiliary and the past participle. It requires an ante- cedent. I must have sent them there. She must have come early. Although he has not dressed himself. Don't you hope the thief has been taken ? II faut que je les y ai envoyes, II faut qu'elle soit venue de bonne heure. Quoiqu'il ne se soit pas habille. N'esperez-vous pas que le voleur ait ete pris ? It combines wifh the present and the future of the Indicative. ($ 151 — 12.^ SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 419 He will not come although I have invited him. Shall {should) we go without being invited ? She always looks (looked) well, how- ever little she may (might) be dressed. I do not think he rejoiced at the good news we have received. II ne viendra pas quoique je l'aie invite. Irons-nous (irions-nous) sans que nous soyons (fussions) invites ? Elle a (avait) toujours bonne mine, sipeu g^'elle soit (fut) habillee. Je ne crois pas qu'il se soit rejoui de la bonne nouvelle que nous avons re§ue. The Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Plus que parf ait du Subjonctif) is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of ano- ther verb. (§ 151 — 12.) It combines with the past tenses and conditionnels. Before I had loved. Before she had departed. Before they had gone away. Although you had been seen. He deserved to have been punished. He was exercising the functions of consul, although his nomination had not been ratified by the senate. Avant que j'eussc aime. Avant qu'elle fut partie. Avant qu'ils s'en fussent alles. Quoique vous eussiez ete vus. II meritait qu'on l'eutpuni. II remplissait les fonctions de consul, quoique sa nomination n'eut pas ete sanctionnee par le senat. 06s. 166. Some conjunctions govern the indicative when the sentence affirms positively that the thing in question is or will be, and the subjunc- tive when it is not certain, or only wished for. They are the following: Defacon que. De maniere que. En sorte que. De sorte que. Tellement que. Sinon que. You behave in such a manner that you are loved by everybody. Behave in such a manner that you may be loved. So that, in so much that. Except that. Ind. Vous vous conduisez de fagon ^wevousetes aime de tout lemonde. Subj. Conduisez- vous de fagon que vous soyez aime. Soixantb-dix-neuvieme Theme. 2de Sec. Guillaume est-il a lire dans sa chambre % Non, il etait a jouer de la flute dans le jardin avant que vous entrassiez. — Qu'est-il a faire maintenanf? II faut qu'il soit a se promener dans le bosquet^ (grove.) — Faut-il que j'aille Pappeler? Non, qu'il s'y promene; mais en eas qu'il revienne bientot, vous lui direz que je desirerais qu'il s'habillat pour sortir avec moi. S'il eut su (had he known) que vous desiriez qu'il sortit avec vous, il se serait deja habille. Cela ne presse pas, (there is no hurry.) II aura le temps de se preparer avant que je sois prete moi-meme. — Pour peu que vous eussiez attendu ce matin, vous auriez pu voir le general, car vous etiez a peine sorti qu'il est rentre. Puis-je avoir le plaisir de le voir? Non, il est 420 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) encore sorti. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que vous attendiez ? Si fait, pourvu que vous soyez sur qu'il rentrera bientot. Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to learn any language whatever, (quelque langue que ce soit ;) they must make use of their judgment, (le jugeinent.) — Behold how amiable that lady is; for all that she (quoiquhlle) has no fortune, I do not love her the less. — Will you lend me your violin ? I will lend it you, provided you return it to me to-night. — Would your mother call upon me 1 She would, provided you would promise to take her to the concert. I shall not cease to importune (importuner) her, till she has forgiven me. — Give me that penknife. I will give it you, provided you will not make a bad use of it. — Shall you go to London ? I will go. pro- vided you accompany (accompagner) me ; and I will write again (recrire*) to your brother, lest he should not have received my letter Where were you during the engagement? I was in bed to have my wounds (une blessure) dressed, (panser.) Would to God (Plict a Dieu) I had been there ! I would have conquered (vahicre) or per- ished, (perir.) We avoided an engagement for fear we should be taken, their force being superior (superieure) to ours. — God forbid (d Dieu ne plaise ) with the subjunctive,) I should blame your conduct, but your business will never be done properly unless you do it your- self. — Will you set out soon ? I shall not set out till I have dined. — Why did you tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew the contrary? You are so hasty, (prompt^) that however little you are contradicted (contrarie) you fly into a passion (s 1 emporter) in an instant. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. Since you know him and are respon- sible for him. (§ 151—9.) Unless you are attentive, and do your task regularly, you will not learn. If your friend were here, and would call upon me. (§ 151 — 10.) If he loved me, and sincerely wished my welfare. If anybody come, and I should not be at home, send for me. If your brother writes to you, and you are satisfied with his letter, I beg of you to let me know it. Be industrious, that your parents may be satisfied. (§ 151 — 10.) Ind. Des que vous le connaissez et que vous repondez de lui. Subj. A moins que vous ne soyez attentif, et que vous nefassiez re- gulierement votre devoir, vous n'apprendrez pas. Si votre ami etait ici, et qu'il voulut venir me voir. 5"il m'aimait, et qu'il desirdt sincere- ment mon bonheur. Si quelqu'un venait, et que je ne fusse pas a la maison, envoyez-moi chercher. Si votre frere vous ecrit, et que vous soyez content de sa lettre, je vous prie de m'en faire part. Appliquez-vous, que vos parents soient contents, iafin que.) SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 421 Whether I lead or write, it is always found fault with. I can say nothing without your know- ing it. Do not begin before I give you no- tice. He is never punished unless he has deserved it. Wait till your father returns. Queje Use ou quefecrive, on y trouve toujours a redire, (soit que.) Je ne puis rien dire que tu ne le sach.es, (sans que.) Ne commencez pas que je ne vous avertisse, (avant que.) Jamais on ne le punit qu'il ne Vait merite, [d moins que.) Attendez que votre pere revienne, {jusqu'd ce que.) Soixante-dix-neutieme Th&me. 3me Sec. Puisque vous allez de ce coti-la, et que vous passez devant la boutique de Fapothicaire, arretez-vous-y et dites-lui de nous envoyer une boite de poudre minerale. Je le ferai avec plaisir. A quelle heure faut-il qu'il Fenvoie ? N'importe a quelle heure, pourvu que ce soit avant Phenre du coucher, (bed-time.) Quoiqu : il n'apprit pas facilement, et qu'il n ; eut guere de temps, il faisait des progres. Oui, parce qu'il etait attentif et studieux. Si vous eussiez ete aussi indus- trieux que votre cousine, et que vous vous fussiez mieux applique, n ; eussiez-vous pas appris davantage ? Quoiqu'il fut a faire une partie d : echecs, et qu'il eut presque gagne, il la quitta des qu'il apprit que sa soeur desirait qu'il l'accompagnat. — Ne commencez pas que je ne vous en avertisse, et que je ne vous envoie un autre crayon. Je n'y manquerai pas. Should your father not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will lend you some. I am much obliged to you. — Have you done your task ? Not quite ; if I had had time, and if I had not been so uneasy about (de) the arrival (Varrivee) of my father, I should have done it. — If you would study and be attentive, I assure you that you might learn the French language in a very short time. — He who wishes to teach an art, must know it thoroughly, (dfond;) he must give none but clear (precise) and well-digested (digerer) notions (la notion) of it; he must instil (faire entrer) them one by one into the minds (dans V esprit) of his pupils, and above all, (surtout,) he must not overburden (surcharger) their memory with useless or unimportant (insignifiant) rules. My dear friend, lend me a louis. Here are (en void) two instead of one. — How much obliged I am to you, (que oV obligations je vous at/) I am always glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in yours. — Is this house to be sold? Do you wish to buy it? — Why not? — Do you think it is a good house, and that it is worth 7000 dollars? I do not think it is. — Why was not your sister studying? d etudier?) She would have been studying if she were not always 36 422 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) so absent, (distrait.) — I like pretty anecdotes; they season (assaison- ner) conversation, (la conversation,) and amuse everybody. Pray relate me some. Look, if you please, at page 148 of the book which I lent you, and you will find some. EIGHTIETH LESSON, SOth.— Quatre-vingtieme Legon, SOme. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. SUBJONCTIF Continue. whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways, Quelque, ($151—11.) However good you are or may be, (1st way.) However cross (peevish) she may have been. However rich they were, (might be.) However rich she might have been. However elegant they thought them- selves. Whatsoever courage you may have, he has more than you. (§ 151 — 11.) Whatsoever patience we may have, we will never have enough. Whatsoever riches he may have, he will soon see the end of them. Whatsoever kindness I have had for him, I never shall have as much as he merits. Whatsoever faults you may make, I will take care to correct them. Whatever may be the happiness which you enjoy, I am happier than you. (§ 151— -11.) Whatsoever may be the fortune which you enjoy, you may lose it in an instant. Whatsoever may be the efforts which you make, you never can succeed. Whatsoever may be the pains which you take, no one will be under obligations to you for them. Whatever, whatsoever, (meaning all things soever. Quelque bon que vous soyez. Quelqu'acariatre qu'elle ait ete. Quelque riches qu'ils fussent. Quelque riche qu'elle eut pu etre. Quelqu' Elegants qu'ils se crussenl. Quelque courage que vous ayez, il en a plus que vous. Quelque patience que nous ayons, nous n'en aurons jamais assez. Quelques richesses qu'il ait, il en verra bientot la fin. Quelque bonte que faieeue pour lui, je n'en aurai jamais autant qu'il le merite. Quelques fautes que vous fassiez, j' aurai soin de les corriger. Quel que soit le bonheur dont vous jouissiez, je suisplus heureux que vous. Quelle que soit la fortune dont vous jouissiez, vous pouvez la perdre en un instant. Quels que soient les efforts que vous fassiez, vous ne pouvez jamais reussir. Quelles que soient les peines que vous preniez, on ne vous en aura aucune obligation. Quelque chose que, or quoi quece soit EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) 423 Whatsoever you may do for my fa- ther, he will reward you for it. (t 151—13.) I complain of nothing whatsoever. Of whomsoever you may speak, avoid slander. ($ 151—13.) I know nobody who is so good as you are. ($ 151—5.) I have seen nothing that could be blamed in his conduct. Whatever his projects might be, they did not succeed. (§ 151 — 11.) Quelque chose que (or quoi que) vous fassiez pour mon pere, il vous re- compensera. Je ne me plains de quoi que ce soit. De qui que ce soit que vous parliez, evitez la mCdisance. Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi bon que vous. Je n'ai rien vu qu'on puisse blamer dans sa conduite. Quels que fussent ses projets, ils n'ont pas reussi. Qtjatre-vingtieme Theme. Ire Sec. Qu'est il a faire secher 1 II est a faire secher ses souliers ; mais quelque soin qu ; il prenne a le faire, il ne reussira pas de long-temps. — De combien de manieres peut-on exprimer en Francais : Whatever riches you possess ? De deux manieres. je crois. Quelles sont- elles? Quelque richesse que vous, ne faut-il pas employer le sub- jonctif apres quelque? Si fait, il faut Femployer. Alors on doit dire: Quelque richesse que vous possediez. Quelle est la seconde maniere ? Quelle que soit la richesse que vous possediez. N 7 y a-t-il pas une autre maniere ? Pas que je sache. Comment peut-on exprimer en Francais, However rich you may be? Oh ! mais ce n ; est pas la meme chose que: whatever riches you possess? Non, ce ne sont pas les memes mots ; mais n'"est-ce pas la meme significa- tion? Alors, on peut dire: Quelque riche que vous soyez, n'est-ce pas 1 Sans doute. Un peu de jugement est la seule chose qui soit necessaire. You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it; for I must also wait till I receive my money. Should I (en cas que) receive it to-day, 1 will pay you all that I owe you. Do not believe that I have forgotten it; for I think of it every day. Or did you be- lieve, perhaps, that 1 had already received it? — I did not believe that you have already received it; but I feared that your other credit- ors (le creancier) had already received it. — You wish you had more time to study, and your brothers wish they did not need to learn. — Would to God you had what I wish you, and that I had what I wish. — Though we have not had what we wish, yet we have almost always been contented ; and Messieurs B. have almost always been discontented, though they have had everything a reasonable man (un homme raisonnable) can be contented with. — Do not believe, Madam, that 1 have had your fan, (un eventail.) Who tells you that I believe it ? — My brother-in-law wishes he had not had what he 424 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (2.) has had. Wherefore % He has always had many creditors, and no money. — I w i s h you would always speak French to me; and you must obey, if you wish to learn, and if you do not wish to lose your time uselessly, (inutilement.) I wish you were more industrious (assidu) and more attentive when I speak to you. Vocabttlaire. 2de Sec. The superlative followed by qui or que, ($ 151 — 3.) You are the most amiable lady I know. ($ 151—3.) He is the most extraordinary man that I have ever seen. You are the most studious pupils I have ever had. The best guard a king can have is the heart of his subjects. Vous etes la dame la plus aimable que je connaisse. C'est rhomme le plus extraordinaire que faie jamais vu. Vous etes les eleves les plus studieux que faie jamais eus. La meilleure gcjrde qu'un roi puisse avoir, c'est le cceur de ses sujets. An ordinal number followed by qui or que. (§ 151 — 3.) He is the first man who has dared to tell me so. You are the second amiable lady that I have met with in this town. C'est le premier homme qui ait ose me le dire. Vous etes la deuxieme dame aimable que faie rencontree dans cette ville. The words le seul, V unique, the only one, &c. {% 151 — 3.) You are the only one upon whom I can rely. I want an office the duties of which may be easy to fulfil. K% 151 — 14.) I have an office of which it is easy to fulfil the duties. I aim at a situation that may be agreeable and lucrative. I aim at a situation that is an agree- able and lucrative one. She is the handsomest woman of those that were at the opera. I do not know any of the persons who called on you this morning. I hope you will say nothing of what I have intrusted you with. f have read the second volume of the work which you have lent me. May heaven ever preserve you from such a misfortune. (§ 151 — 15.1 Would to God. Vous etes le seul sur qui je puisse compter. Je desire une place dont les fonctions soient aisees a remplir. J'ai un emploi dont il est aise de remplir les fonctions. J' aspire a une place qui soit agr£- able et lucrative. J' aspire a un emploi qui est agr6- able et lucratif. C'est la plus belle des femmes qui etaient a l'opera. (§ 151 — 14.) Je ne connais aucune des personnes qui sont venues chez vous ce matin. J'espere que vous ne direz rien de ce que je vous ai confie. J'ai hi le second volume de I'ouvrage que vous m'avez prete. Fasse le Ciel que pareil malheur ne vous arrive jamais. Pliit a Dieu. Pint au Ciel. EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) 425 Would to God it were so ! i Plut a Dieu qu'il en fat ainsi ! Would to God he had done it ! J Plut a Dieu qu'il l'eut fait ! Qtjatre-vingtieme Theme. 2de Sec. M. J. B. m ? a ecrit un billet, dans lequel il me dit: Quoique Par- gent soit rare et qu ; on n ; en obtienne que difficile ment, je vous envoie un bon (check) sur la banque, pour la somme dont vous avez besoin. Puisqu'il en agit ainsi, il s 7 ensuit qu ; il est mon ami. ( $ 151 — 4.) — Quel est le plus beau don que Dieu ait fait a Phomme 1 L/Evangile est le plus beau present que Phomme ait recu de Dieu. Si la vie et la mort de Socrate sont d ; un sage, que peut-on dire de la vie et de la mort de Jesus-Christ? Que ce sont celles d'un dieu. — Arrive-t-il souvent qu ; on soit trompe par ses amis? II n'ar- rive pas souvent qu'on soit trompe par eux. On est souvent trompe par de faux amis* mais il est rare qu'on le soit par de vrais amis. If I were not your friend, and if you were not mine, I should not speak thus to you. — Do not trust (mefiez-vous de) Mr. N., for he flatters you: do you think a flatterer (un fiatteur) can be a friend? — You do not know him as well as I, though you see him every day. — Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father has offended me. — Oh! here he is coming, (le voild qui vient,) you may tell him all yourself. — What do you think of our king ? I say he is a great man, but I add, that though kings be ever so powerful, (puissant,) they die as well as the meanest (vil) of their subjects.— Have you been pleased with my sisters? I have; for however plain (laide) they may be, they are still very amiable; aud however learned (savant) our neighbor's daughters may be, they are still sometimes mistaken. — Is not their father rich? However rich he may be, he may lose all in an instant. — Whoever the enemy may be whose malice (la malice) you dread, (apprehender,) you ought to rely (se reposer) upon your innocence ; but the laws (la loi) condemn (cojidamner) all criminals, (un criminel), whatever they may be. — Whatever your intentions (une intention) might be, you should have acted differently, (differ emment.) — Whatever the reasons (la raison) be which you may allege, (alleguer,) they will not excuse your action, blameable in itself. Vocabulaire. 3me See, Would to God that all great lords loved peace ! ($ 151 — 15.) Would to God we may never be more unhapy ! May you be happy ! Though it cost me all I have, I shall 36 * Plut a Dieu que tous les grands seigneurs aimasse?it la paix ! Plut au Ciel que nous ne fusshns jamais plus malheureux! Puissiez vous etre heureux ! Dut-il m'en couter tout ce que ie 26 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) know how to preserve myself from such a misfortune. (§ 151. — 15.) Should they be a hundred leagues hence, I would go for them. possede, je saurai me preserver d'un semblable malheur. 1 Fussent-ils a cent lieuesd'ici, j'irais les chercher. 2 Obs. 166|. It is essential for foreigners to observe, that in the French lan- guage the construction with the infinitive is preferable to that with the sub- junctive, whenever the former may be employed without ambiguity, that is, when the same English subject is repeated. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) Say, there- fore : I come (in order) to see you ; not : ( Je viens pour vous voir; and not : I come that 1 may see you. ( Je viens pour que je vous voie. Je ne crois pas pouvoir sortir demain ; I do not think I shall be able to go out to-morrow. I shall marry a woman who will please me. (§ 151 — 14.) I shall marry a woman who must please me : or, the woman I shall marry must please me. Here is a book for you which you may consult occasionally. Give me a book that I may be able to consult occasionally. Lend me that book, which you do not want. Lend me a book which you may not be in want of. Do not leave a place where you are comfortable, and whence you hear well. Choose a place where you may be comfortable, and whence you may hear well. Quatre-vingtieme Theme. 3me Sec. L'homme, en general, peut-il lever un fardeau (burden) de 300 livres t Quelques hommes peuvent lever des fardeaux beaucoup plus pesants (heavy) ; mais il y a peu d'hommes qui puissent en lever un de 300 livres. — Avons-nous du riz? Nous en avons un peu. mais je ne crois pas que nous en ayons assez. — Faut-il que j'en achete un sac ? Non, un boisseau (bushel) sera assez. Pensez-vous qu'un boisseau dure jusqu ; a ce que le riz nouveau parais'se % Je pense que oui. La recolte de riz (crop) peut etre mauvaise ; ne vaudrait-il pas and not : Je ne crois pas que je puisse sortir . demain. lnd. J'epouserai une femme qui me plaira. Subj. J'epouserai une femme qui me plaise. lnd. Voila un livre que vous pourrez consulter au besoin. Subj. Donnez-moi un livre que je puisse consulter au besoin. bid. Pretez-moi ce livre, dont vous n'avez pas besoin. Subj. Pretez-moi un livre dont vous n'ayez pas besoin. lnd. Ne quittez pas une place ou vous etes commodement, et d'ow vous entendez bien. Subj. Choisissez une place ou vous soyez commodement, et d'mi vous entendiez bien. 1 Instead of — Quand meme il devrait m'en confer tout ce que je possede, &c. Si meme il devaii m'eti cbuter, &c. 2 Quand meme Us seraient d cent lieues d'ici, <$-c. S'ils etaient. EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 427 mieux que nous en achetassions plus d 7 un boisseau 1 — Comme la recolte de ble et celle de mais ont ete bonnes, la difference de prix ne pourrait pas etre considerable, en cas ($151) meme que la recolte de riz vint a manquer. Cependant, faites comme vous voudrez. Non, je ferai comme il vous plaira, pourvu que vous me le disiez. Whatever may happen to you in this world, never murmur (mur- murer) against Divine Providence, (la divine providence :) for what- ever we may suffer, we deserve it. — Whatever I may do, you are never satisfied — Whatever you may say, your sisters shall be punished, if they deserve it, and if they do not endeavor to amend. (s'amender.) — Who has taken my gold watch ? I do not know. Do not believe that I have had it. or that Miss C. has had your silver snuff-box, (la tabatiere,) for I saw both in the hands of your sister when we weje playing at forfeits, (au gage louche.) — To morrow I shall set out for Dover; but in a fortnight I shall be back again, (revenir^) and then I shall come and see you and your family. — Where is your sister at present ? She is at Paris, and my brother is at Berlin. — That little woman is said (on dit) to be going to marry General (le general) K., your friend; is it true ? I have not heard of it. — W-hat news is there of our great army ? It is said to be lying (etre) between the Weser (le Veser) and the Rhine, (le Rhin.) — All that the courier told me seeming (paraitre) very probable., (vraisem- blable.) I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed for London. EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, 81st.— Quatre-vingt-unieme Legon, 81me. Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. Tant soit peu. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de me donner un morceau de pain ? En voulez-vous beaucoup ? Just a little, ever so little. Will you do me the favor of giving me a piece of bread ? Do you wish a great deal ? No, just a little. Non, tant soit peu. To turn to account i + Fajre Mfo . f , lo make the best of. ) That man does not know how to | t Cet homme ne sait pas faire valoir make the most of his talents. ses talents. That man turns his money to account t Cet homme fait valoir son argent in trade. dans le commerce. How do you employ your money ? | t Comment faites-vous valoir votre argent ? I employ it in the stocks. > t Je le fais valoir dans les fonds pub I turn it to account in the stocks. ) lies. 428 EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) Is it not proper that he should claim his rights ? Let him claim them. To boast, to brag. I do not like that man, because he boasts too much. Notwithstanding that. For all that, although. That man is a little bit of a rogue, but notwithstanding he passes for an honest man. Although that man is not very well, he notwithstanding works a great deal. Although that woman is not very pretty, still she is very amiable. Although that man has not the least talent, yet for all that he boasts a great deal. Although that tavern-keeper's wife is rather swarthy, yet for all that she turns the business to good account. Provided you write on the 3d, and put your letter in the post-office before 11 o'clock, I will receive it on the 5th. To go back, to return. The top, the upper part. Upper Canada. The bottom, the lower part. Lower Canada. Up to the top. To the very bottom. The eldest brother. The eldest sister. He is the eldest. She was the eldest. N'est-il pas a propos qu'iifasse valoir ses droits ? Qu'il les fasse valoir. t Sefaire valoir. t Je n'aime pas cet homme, parce qu'il se fait trop valoir. > Ne laisser pas de. Cet homme est tant soit peu fripon, mais il ne laisse pas de passer pour honnete homme. Quoique cet homme ne soit pas bien portant, il ne laisse pas de tra- vailler beaucoup. Quoique cette femme ne soit pas bien jolie, elle ne laisse pas d'etre fort aim able. Quoique cet homme n'ait aucun ta- lent, il ne laisse pas de se faire beaucoup valoir. Quoique la femme de cet aubergiste soit tant soit peu basanee, elle ne laisse pas de faire valoir le bouchon. Pourvu que vous £criviez le 3, et que vous mettiez votre lettre a la poste avant 11 heures, je la re- cevrai le 5. JRetourner, 1. Le haut. Le Haut Canada. Le bas. Le Bas Canada. Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. Le frere aine. La sceur ainee. C'est l'aine. C'etait l'ainee. Quatre-vingt-unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. Mori cafe n'est pas assez sucre, veuillez me dormer tant soit peu plus de sucre. Avec plaisir. II faut que vous aimiez votre cafe bien sucre, car je crois y avoir mis deux cueillerees (spoonfuls) de sucre. Que vous y ayez mis (§ 151 — 10) deux cueillerees ou non, le cafe n'etait pas assez sucre. II est possible que je n'y en aie mis qirune. Serait-il etormant que vous n ; y en eussiez pas mis du tout? Oni, vraiment; il serait tres etormant que j'eusse oublie d'y en met- tre Cela ne vous arrive-t-il jamais? Pas tres-souvent, je vous assure. Je le crois. Je peux dire, sans me faire valoir, que je suis an fait de ma besogne. (business.) Ce n'est pas d'aujourd'hui que je m/eri apercois. — Vous connaissez Mile. Eloise, n'est-ce pas? N'est- EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 429 elle pas aimable? Quoiqu'elle ne soit ni jolie ni spiritualle. (witty,) elle ne laisse pas d'etre tres-aimable. Where are the two Misses Vignette ? They have not yet returned from Europe. — You are acquainted with them, are you not? I know the eldest only. — Is it possible that you do not know both of them? When are they to return? They will not return before their com- pany has visited Italy and the upper and the lower Rhine. — Although Theodore B is younger than his brother Henry, for all that he is as talented (a autant de talents) as his elder brother, (son frere aim, or simply son aine.) — Whither shall you go next year ? I shall go to England, for it is a fine kingdom, (le royaume,) where I intend spending the summer on (a) my return from France. — Whither shall you go in the winter ? I shall go to Italy, and thence (de Id) to the West Indies, (aux Indes occidentales, ou aux colonies,) 1 but before that I must go to Holland to take leave of my friends. — What country do these people inhabit? (habiter?) They inhabit the south (le midi) of Europe ; their countries are called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and they themselves are Italians, Spaniards, or Portuguese ; but the people called Russians, Swedes, Poles, and Hungarians (Hongrois) inhabit the north and east of Europe ; and the names of their countries are Russia, Sweden, Poland, (la Pologne,) and Hungary. France is separated (separer) from Italy by (par) the Alps, (les Alpes,) and from Spain by the Pyrenees, (les Pyrenees.) Vo cab UL aire. 2de Sec. To appear, to seem, seeming, seemed, appear. Let him appear. I appear, thou appearest, he appears. To keep, to maintain. My keeping or maintenance. My keeping costs me six hundred francs a year. To drive in, to sink. To converse with. A conversation. To spare, save, lay up, put by lOOOf. Spare your money. To get tired. To be tired. To handle. To lean against. Paraitre,*4, paraissant, paru, par- aissez. Qu ; il paraisse. Je parais, tu parais, il parait. Entretenir,* 2. Mon entretien. Mon entretien me coute six cents francs par an. Enf oncer, 1. S'entretenir* avec. Un e-ntretien, une conversation. Epargner, 1. Sauver mille francs. Epargnez votre argent. Se lasser, {de bef. inf.) Etre las ; fern, lasse, {de bef. inf.) Manier, 1. S'appuyer, 1. 1 The word Colonies, is more used by the French than, Indes Occident ales, (West Indies,) which is the book-word; just as in New York they say the North instead of the Hudson river, &c. East Indies, (book-word) bidet orientates ; (colloquial) Les hides ou les Grandes Indes. 430 EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) Lean against me. Lean against the wall. To aim at. Short. To stop short. Virtue is amiable. (§ 15.) Vice is odious. Men are mortal. Gold is precious. Corn is sold at a crown a bushel. Beef costs four pence a pound. The horror of vice, and the love of virtue, are the delights of the wise man. England is a fine country. Appuyez-vous sur moi. Appuyez-vous contre la muraille. Coucher enjoue. Court. S'arreter tout court. La vertu est aimable. Le vice est odieux. Les hommes sont mortels. Z'or est precieux. Le b\6 se vend un e"cu le boisseau. Le boeuf coute quatre sous la livre. L'horreur du vice, et 1' amour de la vertu, sont les delices du sage. L'Angleterre est un beau pays. Obs. 167. The definite article is also used before the names of kingdoms, countries, and provinces. 1 (§ 15.) Italy is the garden of Europe. The dog is the friend and companion of man. L'ltalie est le jardin de TEurope. Le chien est Z'ami et le compagnon de Z'homme. Obs. 168. The articles are repeated in French before every substantive, and agree with it in gender and number. (Dir. 2.) Thessaly produces wine, oranges, lemons, olives, and all sorts of fruit. He ate the bread, meat, apples, and cakes ; he drank the wine, beer, and cider. Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are valuable endowments when heigh- tened by modesty. The longer the days the shorter the nights, and the longer the nights the shorter the days. (§ 200—12.) La Thessalie produit du vin, des oranges, des citrons, des olives, et toutes sortes de fruits. II a mange le pain, la viande, les pommes, et les gateaux ; il a bu le vin, la biere, et le cidre. La beaute, les graces, et V esprit, sont des avantages bien precieux, quand ils sont releves par la modestie. Plus les jours sont longs plus les ' nuits sont courtes, et plus les nuits sont longues plus les jours sont courts. Quatre-vingt-tjnieme Th&me. 2de Sec. Plus vous paraissez vous amuser, plus il parait s'amuser aussi. (§200 — 12.) — Le vaisseau a touche, (grounded.) n 7 est-ce pas dom- mage % II est dommage qu'il ait echoae, (echouer, 1 ? to ground,) mais je ne crois pas que nous courions aucun danger. Oh ! voyez comme il s'enfonce ! N'ayez aucune peur. Plus il s'enfoncera dans le sable moins nous courrons danger de chavirer. (upset.) C'est vrai ; plus il entrera dans le sable moins il y aura de danger qa'il 1 Except when preceded by en or de. Ex. Tirai en Allemagne d mon retour de Fra?ice, I shall go to Germany on my return from France. EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 431 chavire, a moins qu ; il ne s'enfonce entierement. Ne craignez pas cela. J'ai grand' peur. Appuyez-vous sur moi. Je vous lasserai je vous fatiguerai.— Qu ; est-ce qui est aimable. la vertu ou le vice ?— Qu ; est-ce qui estodieux? — Qirest-ce qui est precieux ?— Qu 5 est-ce qui se vend un ecu le boisseau ?— Vous avez visite FAngleterre ; c ; est un beau royaume, n ; est-ce pas ? Though the Mahometans (le Mahometan) are forbidden the use of wine, (defendre quelque chose d quelqwun.) yet for all that some of them drink it.— Has your brother eaten anything this morning? He has eaten a great deal: though he said he had no appetite, yet for all that he ate all the meat, bread, and vegetables, (Us legumes,) and drank all the wine, beer, and cider.— Are eggs (un asuf) dear at pre- sent? They are sold at six francs a hundred. In case they are cheaper to-morrow, buy § a hundred.— Do you like grapes? (le rai- sin?) I do not only (non settlement) like grapes, but also plums, (une prune.) almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit.— Though modesty, candor, and an amiable disposition (Vamabilite) are valuable endow- ments, yet for all that there are some ladies that are neither modest, nor candid, (candide,) nor amiable.— The fear of death and the love of life being natural to men, they ought to shun [fun*) vice, (le vice.) and adhere to (s'attacher a) virtue.— What does your living c-ost you a year?— Do you spend less than your eldest brother?— The less you will spend the more you will save : are vou not of my opinion % —■Are you taking aim at that small bird? Is it worth 'killing?— Was not the last scholar who recited obliged to stop several times, and finally to stop short?— Was it not a pity ?— Did he not appear very modest, although he was talented ? The more I sang the less embarrassed I felt, (etais. ou je me sentais.) Is it so with you ? EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. -Quatre-vingUdeuxieme Legon, 82me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To give occasion. Do not give him cause to complain. To leave it to one. I leave it to vou. A good bargain. To stick or to abide by a thing. I abide by the offer you have made me. I do not doubt but you are my friend. Donner lieu, (de before infin.) Xe lui donnez pas lieu de se plaindre. t S , e?i rapport er a quelqu'un. t Je m'en rapporte a vous. Un bon marche. t S' en tenir a. t Je m'en tiens a 1'ofTre que vous m'avez faite. Je ne doute pas que vous ne soyez mon ami. 432 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) Obs. 169. When the verb douter is negatively used, it requires ne before ihe subjunctive. I do not doubt but he will do it. To suffer, to bear. They were exposed to the whole fire of the place. To examine one artfully, or to draw a secret from one. I examined him artfully, and by that means I have made myself ac- quainted with all his affairs. To bear, or to put up with. You will be obliged to put up with all he wishes. Thick. A thick cloud. A thick beard. A burst. A burst of laughter. To burst out laughing. To burst out. To burst out a laughing. Splendor, brightness. To make a great show. To light. To suffer one's self to be beaten. To let or to suffer one's self to fail. To suffer one's self to be insulted. To suffer one's self to die. To let one's self be struck. To send back, to send away. To extol, to praise up. To boast, to praise one's self, to brag. Je ne doute pas qu'il ne le fasse. Essuyer, 1. lis essuyerent tout le feu de la place, Tirer les vers du nez a quelqu'un. Je lui ai tire les vers du nez, et par ce moyen je me suis mis au fait de toutes ses affaires. En passer par. Vous serez oblige d'en passer par tout ce qu'il voudra. Epais ; fern, epaisse. Un nuage epais. Une barbe epaisse. Un eclat. Un eclat de rire. Faire un eclat de rire. ficlater, 1. ficlater de rire. L'eclat. t Faire de l'eclat. £clairer, 1. Se laisser battre. Se laisser tomber. Se laisser insulter. Se laisser mourir. Se laisser frapper. Renvoyer, 1. Vanter, 1. Se vanter. Quatre-vingt-deuxieme Th^me. Ire Sec. II se plaint que nous le grondions, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, il s'en plaint. II dit que quelque chose qu'il fasse, on y trouve toujours a redire. — Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse mal, on y trouve a redire. Mais que fait-il de bien ] — Est-il possible que vous ayez fait un si bon marche? — Ne vous donnent-ils pas lieu de se plaindre d'eux? — A qui vous en rapportez-vous % — Doutez-vous encore que je sois votre ami? — Doutez-vous de leur arrived? — Doutent-ils que leur cousin soit arrive ? — Les Russes n'ont-ils pas essuye une perte considerable ? — S'il ne vous Pa pas prorais, vous serez oblige d 7 en passer par tout ce qu'il voudra, et je crains qu'il soit impossible que vous receviez vos fonds. — Comme les nuages sont epais ! Ne va-t-il pas neiger ? — Qui a fait cet eclat de rire ? Qui ? Cela peut-il etre quelqu'autre qu'Etienue? — Ce jeune homme se vante toujours de pouvoir tout faire ; il est vrai qu'il fait bien des choses. II se laisse tomber de sheval. II se laisse insulter, merne frapper. Enfin, l'autre jour il EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 438 s'est laisse battre. — Les Russes ne se sont-ils pas laisse battre? — Cet homme n'est-il pas ivre? (drunk?) Will you drink a cup of coffee ? I thank you ; I do not like cof- fee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ? I have just drunk some. — Let us take a walk. Willingly, (je le veux bien :) but where shall we go to ? Come with me into my aunfs garden : we shall there find very agreeable society. I believe it, (je le crois bien;) but the ques- tion is (c'est a savoir) whether this agreeable society will admit me, (voudra de moi.) You are welcome everywhere. — What ails you, (qu'avez-vous,) my friend'? How do you like that wine? I like it very well, (excellent ;) but I have drunk enough of it, (suffisamment.) - — Drink once more, (encore un coup.) No, too much is unwhole- some, (malsain ;) I know my constitution, (le temperament.) — Do not fall. What is the matter with you? I do not know; but my head is giddy, (fa tete me tourne ;) I think I am fainting, (tomber en de- f alliance.) I think so also, for you look almost like a dead person, (un mort.) — What countryman are you ? I am an Englishman. — You speak French so well that 1 took you for a Frenchman by birth, {Frangais de nation.) You are jesting. Pardon me; I do not jest at all. — How long have you been in France 1 A few days. In earnest ? (Serieusement?) You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak French; I knew it before I came to France. — How did you learn it so well 1 I did like the prudent starling. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. Go thither. Let us go thither. Go thou. Go there. Go away. Do not go away. Let him go thither. Let them go thither. Go away, begone. Let us begone. Let him go away, let him begone. Give me. Give it to me. Give it to him. Give him some. Get paid. Let us set out. Let us breakfast. Let him give it me. Let. him be here at twelve o'clock. Let him send it me. He may believe it. Make an end of it. Let him take it. 37 Let us not. Let me dine. Let him finish. Let her say so. Allez-y. Allons-y. Va. Vas-y. ($ 150—5.) Va-t 7 en. Ne t'en va pas. Qu'il y ailie. Qu'ils y aillent. Allez-vous en. Allons-nous en Qu'il s'en aille. Donnez-moi. Donnez-le-moi. Donnez-le-lui. Donnez-lui-en. Faites-vous payer. Partons. Ne partons pas. Dejeunons. Laissez-moi diner. Qu'il me le donne. Qu'il soit ici amidi. Qu'il me l'envoie. Qu'il le croie. Finissez. Qu'il finisse. Qu'il le prenne. Qu'elle le disc. 434 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) The starling. If I were to question you as I used to do at the beginning of our les- sons, what would you answer ? We found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of con- fidence in your method, we an- swered as well as the small quan- tity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were not long in finding out that those questions were calculated to ground us in the rules and to ex- ercise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. We can now almost keep up a con- versation in French. This phrase does not seem to us logically correct. We snould be ungrateful if we al- lowed such an opportunity to es- cape without expressing our live- liest gratitude to you. In all cases, at all events. The native. The insurmountable difficulty. Quatre-vingt-deuxieme Theme. 2de Sec. Jean veut s'en aller? Je croyais qu'il s'en etait deja alle. — Non, il est encore dans l'autre chambre. Qu'est-il a faire? II est a regarder les nuages. Occupation tres-instructive. vraiment ! II a peur qu'il pleuve, et comme il demeure loin, il voudrait savoir s'il peut s'en aller. — Qu'il s'en aille, s'il craint qu'il pleuve. Si vous le craignez aussi. pretez-lui un parapluie. Je n'en ai pas a lui preter. Faut-il que je prenne le votre 1 II ne faut pas que vous preniez le neuf. parce que vous savez que Jean est un etourdi, (giddy boy;) et il pourraitle perdre, mais prenez le vieux, et qu'il s'en aille bien vite, ou plutot qu'il attende, car la pluie a commence. Est-il probable que ce ne soit qu'une ondee ? (shower?) II me parait que ce ne sera qu'une ondee. — A quelle heure faut-il qu'il soit ici ?— - Ne faut-il pas que je finisse le paysage avant de m'en aller'* •* Le sansonnet. Si je vous posais maintenant dea questions comme je vous en ai pose au commencement de nos lecons, (comme j'avais d'abord l'habitude de le faire,) que repon- driez-vous ? Nous avons d'abord trouve ces ques- tions tant soit peu ridicules ; mais pleins de confiance en votre me- thode, nous y avons repondu aussi bien que la petite provision de mots et de principes que nous avions alors pouvait nous le permettre. Nous n' avons pas tarde a nous aper- cevoir que ces questions etaient calculees pour nous inculquer les principes et nous exercer a la con- versation, par les reponses contra- dictoires que nous etions forces d'y faire. Maintenant nous savons presque sou- tenir une conversation en Frangais. Cette phrase ne nous parait pas logiquement correcte. Nous serions des ingrats si nous lais- sions echapper une si belle occa- sion, sans vous temoigner la recon- naissance la plus vive. En tout cas. L'homme ne dans le pays. La difficulte insurmontable. EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 435 Qu'elle le dise ou non, je n T en crois rien, et vous? — N ? est-il pas a dejeuner? — N'etaient-elles pas a coudre ? — Si vous ne venez qu'a cinq heures au lieu de trois, ils ne pourront pas sortir avec nous, parce qu'a cette heure-la ils seront a reciter leurs lecons. Dialogue. The Master. — If I were now to ask you such questions as I did in the beginning of our lessons, viz. (telles que :) Have you the hat which my brother has 1 am I hungry 1 has he the tree of my brother's garden ? &c. What would you answer ? The Pupils. — We are obliged (etre force) to confess that we found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confidence in the method you follow, we answered as well as the small quantity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in fact, not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we can almost keep up a conversation in the beautiful language which you teach us, we should answer: It is impossible that we should have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot have one and the same thing. To the second question we should answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : that there is more than one tree in a garden : and in asking us whether he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logically correct. At all events we should be ungrateful (ingrat) if we allowed such an op- portunity to escape, without expressing (temoigner) our liveliest gra- titude to you for the trouble you have taken. In arranging those wise combinations, (la combinaison,) you have succeeded in ground- ing us almost imperceptibly (imperceptible-merit) in the rules, and exercising us in the conversation, of a language which, taught in any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.--Quatre-vingt'troisieme Lecon, SSme, Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. It lacks a quarter. It lacks a half. How much does it want ? It does not want much. It wants but a trifle. t II s'en faut d'un'quart. t II s'en faut de la moitie. Combien s'en faut-il ! II ne s'en faut pas beaucoup. II s'en faut de peu de chose. 436 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) It lacks but an inch of my being as tall as you. It lacked a great deal of my being as rich as you. In a foolish manner, at random. He talks at random like a crazy man, a fool, or a drunkard. To resort to violence. A fact. It is a fact. Else, or else. To make fun of. To contradict, to give one the lie. Should he say so, I would give him the lie. His actions belie his words. To scratch. To escape. I fell from the top of the tree to the bottom, but I did not hurt myself much. I escaped with a scratch. The thief has been taken, but he will escape with a few months imprisonment. By dint of. By dint of labor. By too much weeping. You will cry your eyes out. I obtained of him that favor by dint of entreaty. That excepted. That fault excepted, he is a good man. II s'en faut d'un pouce que je sois aussi grand que vous. II s'en fallait de beaucoup que je fusse aussi riche que vous. t A tort et d travers, II parle a tort et a travers comme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne. En venir aux voies de fait. Un fait. C'est un fait. Ou hien. Se moquer de. Dementir quelqu'un. S'il disait cela, je le dementirais. Ses actions dementent ses paroles. Egratigner, 1. t En itre quitte pour. J'ai tombe du haut de l'arbre en bas, mais je ne me suis pas fait beau- coup de mal. J'en ai ete quitte pour une egra- tignure. Le voleur a ete pris, mais il en sera quitte pour quelques mois de pri- son. t A force de. t A force de travail. t A force de pleurer. t A force de pleurer, vous perdrez les yeux. t J'obtins de lui cette faveur a force de prieres. t A cela pres. t A ce defaut pres, c'est un bon homme. Quatre-vingt-troisieme Theme. Ire Sec. Avez-vous toute la somrne ? II s'en faut d'un quart que je ne l'aie. D'un quart, avez-vous dit ? — II s'en faut presque de la moitie. Seriez-vous satisfait de la i de ce que je possede 1 Ce que j'ai et la i de ce que vous possedez, me rendraient riche. — Vous ne pensez pas a ce que vous dites, y pensez-vous ? Est-ce que je parle comme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne'? Pour peu que vous soyez ivre, vous parlez comme un sot ou comme un fou. Je vous remercie du compliment.- Vous etes le bienvenu, car vous le meritez autant que qui que ce soit. — Croyiez-vous etre aussi grand que Rochamp? Oui, je le croyais, mais l'autre jour, quand je me tinsdebout aupres de lui, je vis que j'etais de beaucoup plus petit. De combien de EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 437 pouces etes-vous plus petit ? II s'en faut de trois pouces au moins que je ne sois aussi grand que lui. Ne querellez plus avec lui, autrement vous en viendrez aux voies de fait. Si vous ne voulez pas que je me querelle avec lui, il faut Fempecher de se moquer de moi. Je tacherai de le faire. Do you not often contradict Henry when he relates something? I do only when he says incredible, (incroyable.) inconsistent, (incon- sistant.) or false things. ( § 200—7.) What do you think of Mrs. A— ? Her company, her conversation, is agreeable enough; only, she exaggerates too much ; that excepted, she is a pleasant lady. — Your uncle will not grant what you want. I hope he will, by dint of entreaty. — You will entreat in vain, (beau prier ;) you will not obtain it. Never mind, I will ask whether I obtain it or not. Will you be my guest? (manger avec quclqu'un.) I thank you; a friend of mine has invited me to dinner: he has ordered (faire pre- parer) my favorite dish, (un mets favor i.) — What is it? It is a dish of milk, (du laitage.) — As for me, I do not like milk-meat: there is nothing like [il ri'y a rien tel qu?) a good piece of roast beef or veal. — What has become of your younger brother? He has suffered shipwreck (faire naif rage) in going to America. — You must give me an account of that, (raconter quelque chose.) Very willingly, (volon- tiers.) Being on the open sea, (en pleine mer y ) a great storm arose. The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire, (le mit en feu.) The crew (V equipage) jumped into the sea to save themselves by swim- ming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learned to swim. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To vie with each other. ; t A V en vie, (Vun de V autre.) t Ces hommes travaillent a l'envie, (1'un de l'autre.) Propre. Du linge propre ou blanc. D' autant plus-~que. D' autant moins — que. Je suis aV autant plus mecontent de sa conduite, qu'ii m'a beaucoup d'obligations. Je suis oV autant morns satisfait de sa conduite, que j'avais plus de droits a son amitie. Je voudrais que . . . (§ 151 — 12.) Those men are trying to rival each other. Clean. Clean linen. The more — as. The less — as. I am the more discontented with his conduct, as he is under many obli- gations to me. I am the less pleased with his con- duct, as I had more right to his friendship. ] wish that, I should like . . . I wish that house belonged to me. ) t Je voudrais que cette maison rut [ should like to own that house. > a moi. 37* 438 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) To muse, to think. I thought a long time on that affair. To be naked. To have the head uncovered. To have the feet uncovered. Rever, 1, (a before noun.) J'ai reve long- temps a cette affaire. Etre nu — nue. t Avoir la tete nue. t Avoir les pieds nus. Obs. 169i. The adjective nu, like demi, (19 2 , N. 3) is indeclinable before the noun, but declinable after. To be barefooted. To be bareheaded. To ride barebacked. To have like to, or to think to have. I had like to have lost my money. \ I thought I had lost my life. We had like to have cut. our fingers. Etre ^w-pieds. Etre nu-tete. t Aller a poil. t Manquer ou penser. Obs. 1691. Manquer takes de before the infinitive, but penser does not. J'ai manque de perdre mon argent. J'ai pense perdre mon argent. Je pensai perdre la vie. Nous avons manque de nous couper les doigts. II a manque de tomber. II a manque d'etre tue. II a pense etre tue. w Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait ete tue\ II a pense mourir. A vos trousses. L'ennemi est a nos trousses. t Tomber. La foudre est tombee. La foudre tomba sur le vaisseau. He was very near falling. He was within a hair's breadth of being killed. He had liked to have died. At, on, or upon your heels. The enemy is at our heels. To strike, (in speaking of lightning.) The lightning has struck. The lightning struck the ship. Quatre-vingt-troisieme Theme. 2de Sec. J'ai plusieurs bons ecoliers dans cette classe. Est-ce qu'ils etudient a Penvie Tun de Pautre? Oui, ils etudient a Penvie. N ; avez-vous pas aussi des ecolieres qui etudient a Penvie Pune de Pautre ? Si fait, yen ai qui etudient a Penvie les unes des autres. — Etes-vous satisfait (are you pleased) de la maniere dont Leopold se conduit'? Non, yen suis d'autant moins satisfait qu'il avait promis davantage. — Ne sont-ils pas etonnes qu'elle ait agi de cette maniere? Si fait, ils en sont tres-etonnes, et ils sont d'autant plus mecontents, (so much the more displeased,) qu'elle connaissait parfaitement leur opinion. — Que pensez-vous de mon proces? Je ne nren suis pas encore occupe. Je voudrais que vous y revassiez un peu. Je suis a y rever. Mais vous voyez que je suis nu-pieds; il faut que je me chausse, (chausser, 1, to dress one's feet, to put on what is to go on the feet as a part of dress.) que je finisse de m'habiller, et j'y reverai. Je vous en avertis, je serai a vos trousses jusqu'a ce que vou.« vous en occupiez serieusement. — Savez-vous que Montcalrne a manque EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 439 d'etre tue 1 Non, je n ; en savais rien. Quel accident lui est-il arrive ? Comment a-t-il manque d'etre tue ? II est tombe de cheval. I wish that umbrella was mine. Have you none 1 No, I wish I had one. (62 2 .) Can you not afford to buy one % No, I cannot; for I was robbed, and was near being killed. — How so ? The robbers upset our carriage, and we were all very near being killed. (Peu s'en est fallu que nous n'ayons tous ete tues.) When were you so near being killed'? It was last week that we were so nearly killed. Were you all robbed ? Yes. but I was the only one who had much money. My companions had only a few dollars each. I entreated very hard, but it was in vain. (J'ai eu beau prier, tfa ete en vain.) My brother reflected in vain ; he found no means to save his life. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. — Well, {eh bien,) what has become of him? I do not know, having not heard from him yet. — But who told you all that? My nephew, who was there, and who saved himself. — As you are talking of your nephew, d propos de — ,) where is he at present % He is in Italy. — Is it long since you heard from him ? I have received a letter from him to-day. — What does he write to you ? I will tell you by and by. Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. The half, the third, the fourth. [ La moitie, le tiers, le quart. Obs. 170. These are irregularly formed, but from le cinquieme, the fifth, all others are regular. What is the half of 6 ? It is 3. What is the i of 7 ? It is 3 and h What is the third of 9 ? It is 3. What is the I of 10 ? It is 3 and |. That of 11 ? What is is the That of 13 ? That of 14 ? That of 15? It is 3 and §. of 12? It is 3. It is 3 and h It is 3 and |. It is 3 and f . The | of 12 are 8. The * of 12 are 9. While my brother was on the open sea, a violent storm arose unexpect- edly ; the lightning struck the ship, which it set on fire, and the whole crew jumped into the sea to save themselves by swimming. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. Quelle est la moitie de 6 ? C'est 3. Cellede7? C'est 3 et demi. Quelle est le tiers de 9 ? C'est 3. Quel est le i de 10 ? C'est 3 et un tiers. Celuide 11 ? C'est 3 et deux tiers (|.) Quel est le quart de 12 ? C'est 3. Celuide 13? C'est 3 etun quart (£.) Celui de 14 ? C : est 3 et demi (£.) Celui de 15 ? C'est 3 et trois quarts ($.) Les | de 12 sont 8. Les I de 12 sont 9. Mon frere e'tant en pleine mer, il sur- vint une grande tempete ; la foudre tomba sur le vaisseau, qu'elle mit en feu, et tout F equipage se jeta dans la mer, pour se sauver a la nage. II fut saisi de frayeur, voyant que le feu gagnait de tous les cotes. 440 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) He did not know what to do. He hesitated no longer. I have not heard of him yet. An angel. A masterpiece. Masterpieces. t II ne savait quel parti prendre. II ne balanga plus. t Je n'ai pas encore eu de ses nou- velles. Un ange. Un chef-d'oeuvre. Des chefs-d'oeuvre. Obs. 171. Of a word compounded by means of a preposition, expressed or understood, the first word only takes the mark of the plural. Four o'clock flowers. His or her physiognomy. His or her shape. Th) expression. Contentment. Admiration. Delightfully. Thin, (slender.) The look. Respect. Grace, charm. Fascinating. Uncommonly well. His or her look inspires respect and admiration. Des belles-de-nuit. Sa physionomie. Sa taille. L' expression. Le contentement. L' admiration. A ravir. L'aspect. Le respect. Les graces. Engageam. Svelte. Superieurement bien. Son aspect inspire du respect et de l'admiration. Quatre-vingt-tiloisieme Th^me. 3me Sec. Avez-vous eu des nou velles de votre ami, 1'avocat, depuis qu'il est parti pour la Calif ornie ? Oui, j'en ai eu. Sa lettre doit etre interessante ! que dit-il? II dit que For y est abondant; que ceux qui ont du bonheur, le ramassent en quantite ; que ceux qui ont du malheur, travaillent beacoup et ramassent peu. Du nombre des quels est-in De ceux des heureux ou des malheureux'? Des heureux, je presume, quoiqu'il se plaigne un peu. — Avez-vous vu le chef-d'oeuvre de Power, le sculpteur? Son esclave Grecque? Oui, cela meme. Oui, je Fai vu ce chef-d'oeuvre. Cette esclave ressemble a un ange. Cette statue moderne sera placee parmi les ehefs-d'ceuvre des sculp- teurs anciens. — Quand les belles-de-nuit s'ouvrent-elles ? Elles s'ouvrent a quatre heures, quand le soleil commence a baisser. Quelle odeur aimez-vous le mieux, celle des fleurs aV orange ou des tuber euses ? Je n'ai pas de choix. Plus je sens la fleur d 'orange plus j'en aime l'odeur; et plus l'odeur de la tubereuse frappe mon odorat, (sense of smell,) plus je voudrais la sentir. Quelle physionomie agreable et quelle taille admirable cette demoiselle a! My nephew, in his letter, which is an interesting one, writes to me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings him (qui lui apporte) a hundred thousand crowns. — Is she handsome ? Hand- some as an angel; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiog- nomy is mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in the (du) world, and her mouth is charming, et sa bouche est mignonne.) She is neither too tall nor too short; hei shape is slender; all her EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 441 actions are full of grace, and her manners are engaging. Her look inspires respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings delightfully. My nephew finds in her (lui trouve) but one defect. {un defaut.) — And what is that defect? She is affected, (avoir des pretentions.) — There is nothing perfect in the world. — How happy you are ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine house, and all you wish. Not all, my friend. — What do you desire more ? Contentment ) for you know that he only is happy who is contented. EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.— Quatre-vingt-quatrieme Legon, 84me. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. To unriddle, to disentangle. To find out. To disentangle the hair. To unravel difficulties. 1 have not been able to find out the sense of that phrase. A quarrel. To have differences (a quarrel) with somebody. To take good care, to shun, to be- ware. . I will take good care not to do it. Mind you do not lend that man money. He takes good care not to answer the question which I asked him. To ask a question. If you take it into your head to do that, I will punish you. Demeler, 1. Demeler les cheveux. Demeler des difficultes. Je n'ai pas pu demeler le sens de cette phrase. Un demele. Avoir des demeles avec quelqu'un. Se garder de. Je me garderai bien de le faire. Gardez-vous bien de preter votre argent a cet homme. II se garde bien de repondre a la question que je lui ai faite. t Faire une question. Si vous vous avisez de le faire, je vous punirai. Seoir,* 3. Seyant or seant. To become, to fit well. Fitting well. Obs. 172. This verb is used only in the third person, singular and plural. Does that become me ? That does not become you. It does not become you to do that. That fits you wonderfully well. Her head-dress did not become her. It does not become you to reproach me with it ! To fast. To be fasting. Cela me sied-il ? Cela ne vous sied pas. II ne vous sied pas de faire cela. Cela vous sied a merveille. Sa coiffure lui seyait mal. II vous sied bien de me le reprocher ! {an ironical expression. \ Jeu??er, 1. fitre a jeun. 442 EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) To give notice to. ) To let anybody know. > Avertir quelqu'un de quelque chose. To warn some one of something. ) Give notice to that man of his bro- I Avertissez cet homme du retour de ther's return. I son frere. QUATRE-VINGT-QTTATRIEME THEME. Ire Sec. Un certain roi devant, un jour, faire son entree dans une ville a deux heures de Papres-midi, le senat envoya quelques deputes (deputies) pour le complimenter. Celui qui devait porter la parole, n'etant pas accoutume a parler en public, commenca ainsi: " Alex- andre le Grand, le Grand Alexandre," et s'arreta tout court. Le roi, qui avait grand'faim, (32 2 ,) dit : " Ah ! mon ami, Alexandre le Grand avait dine, et moi, je suis encore a jeun. ?; Ayant dit ces paroles, il continua son chemiu vers Photel de ville, ou on lui avait prepare un diner magnifique. Savez-vous deviner les enigmes (enigmas?) Je ne les devine pas tres-aisement; cependant, il m'arrive quelque fois de le faire. Vou- lez-vous que je vous en dise une courte ? Voyons, dites-la. — La voici. Plus il y en a moins ga pese. — Plus il y en a moins ca pese. Qu'est-ce que cela peut etre ? Je ne peux m'imaginer ce que c'est. — Vous rendezvous ? (do you give it up ?) Oui, je me rends. Et moi aussi. The emperor Charles the Fifth (Charles-Quint) being one day out a hunting lost his way in the forest, and, having come to a house, entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pre- tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the emperor, told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his sur- tout fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took his purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around the emperor's neck a small gold chain to which a whistle (un sijflet) was attached, which he wished to rob him of. But the em- peror said : " My good friend, before depriving me (priver quelqu'un de quelque chose) of this trinket, (le bijou,) I must teach you its virtue." Saying this he whistled, (siffler, 1.) His attendants, (ses gens,) who were seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck (frappe d'etonnement) to behold his majesty in such a state. But the emperor, seeing himself out of danger, (hors de danger.) said: "These men (voici dcs hommes qui) have dreamed all that they liked. T wish in my turn also to dream.'' And after having mused a few seconds, he said : " T have dreamed that you all four deserve EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 443 to be hanged :" which was no sooner spoken than executed before the house. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. To follow from it. It follows from it that you should not do that. How is it that you have come so late ? 1 do not know how it is. How is it that he had not his gun ? I do not know how it happened. To clear, to elucidate, to clear up. The weather is clearing up. To refresh. Refresh yourself, and return to me immediately. To whiten, to bleach. To blacken. To turn pale, to grow pale. To blush, to redden. To grow old. To grow young. To make merry. Gay, merry. Mirth. To make one's self merry. Cheer up. He makes merry at my expense. To feign, counterfeit, dissemble, pretend. Never pretend. I feign, thou feignest, he feigns. He knows the art of dissembling. To procrastinate, to go slow about. I do not like to transact business with that man, for he always goes very slow about it. A proof. This is a proof. To stray, to get lost, to lose one self, to lose one's way. Through. The cannon-ball went through the wall. I ran him through the body. S' ensuivre,* 4. II s'ensuit que vous ne devriez pas faire cela. t Comment se fait-il que vous soyez venu si tard ? t Je ne sais pas comment cela se fait, t Comment se faisait-il qu'il n'eut pas son fusil ? t Je ne sais pas comment cela se faisai. ficlaircir, 2. Le temps s'eclaircit. Rafraichir, 2. Rafraichissez-vous, et revenez tout de suite. Blanchir, 2. Noircir, 2. Palir, 2. Rougir. Vieillir, 2. Rajeunir, 2. figayer. Gai. La gaiete. S'egayer, 1. figayez-vous II s'egaie a mes depens. Feindre,* 4, feignant, feint. Ne feignez jamais. Je feins, tu feins, il feint. II possede Tart de feindre. t Trainer les choses en longueur. Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires avec cet homme, parce qu'il traine tou- jours les choses en longueur. Une preuve. C'est une preuve. S \ S'egarer, 1. A travers le, or Au travers de. Le boulet a passe* a travers la mu- raille. Je lui ai passe* mon epee au travers du corps. QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIEME THEME. 2de Sec Un bon vieillard, etant fort malade, fit appeler son epouse, qui etait encore fort jeune, et lui dit: "Ma chere, vous voyez que ma derniere heure s'approche ; et que je suis force de vous quitter. C'est pourquoi, si vous voulez que je meure en paix. il fant que vous me 444 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) fassiez une grace. Vous etes encore jeune, et sans doute vous vom remarierez, je le sais : mais je vous prie de ne pas prendre M. Louis-. car j'avoue que j'ai toujours ete tres-jaloux de lui, et que je le suis encore. Je mourrais done desespere, si vous ne me promettiez pas cela." La femme repondit : u Mon cceur, je vous supplie, que cela ne vous empeche pas de mourir en paix* car je vous assure que quand meme je voudrais Fepouser, je ne le pourrais pas, etant deja promise a un autre." It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a nevi soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions ; viz. " Hov old are you? How long have you been in my service? Are you satisfied with your pay and treatment?" It happened that a young soldier, born in France, who had served in his own country, desired to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused him to be im- mediately accepted; but he was totally ignorant of the German dia- lect; and his captain giving him notice that the king would question him in that tongue the first time he should see him, advised him at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to make to the king. Accordingly he learned them by the next day : and as soon as he appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to inter- rogate him : but he happened to begin with him by the second ques- tion, and asked him, " How long have you been in my service V } "Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with his youth, which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket so long as that, said to him, much astonished, " How old are you ?" "One year, an't please your majesty, (n'en deplaise a Voire Majes- te") Frederick, more astonished still, cried, "You or I must cer- tainly be bereft of our senses." The soldier, who took this for the third question, replied firmly, (avec aplomb,) " Both, an't please your majesty." EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON .-^uatre-vingt-cinquieme Legon, 85?ne. Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. To double. The double. Your share, your part. That merchant asks twice as much as he ought. You must bargain with him ; he will give it you for the ! 1 You have twice your share. Doubler, 1. Le double. Votre part,' (fern.) t Ce marchand surfait du double. t II faut que vous marchandiez avec lui ; il vous rabattra la moitie. Vous avez double part. EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 445 Yon have three times your share. To renew. To stun. Wild, giddy. Open, frank, real. To shake somebody's hand. I told him yes. I told him no. To squeeze, press. To lay up, to put by. Put your money by. As soon as I have read my book I put it by. I do not care much about going to the play to-night. To satisfy one's self with a thing. I have been eating an hour, and I __ cannot satisfy my hunger. To be satisfied. To quench one's thirst. I have been drinking this half hour, but I cannot quench my thirst. To have one's thirst quenched. To thirst for, to be thirsty or dry. That is a blood-thirsty fellow. Qtjatre-vingt-cinquieme Th&me. Ire Sec. Un homme avait deux fils : Pun aimait a dormir la grasse ma- tinee, et Pautre etait tres-laborieux, etse levait toujours de tres-bonne heure. Celui-ci etant un jour sorti de grand matin, trouva une bourse remplie d'argent. II courut a son frere, lui faire part de sa bonne fortune, et lui dit: " Voyez-vous, Louis, ce qu 7 on gagne a se lever de bonne heure V u Ma foi," repondit son frere, " si celui a qui elle appartient ne s'etait pas leve de meilleure heure que moi, il ne laurait pas perdue. " On demandait a un jeune faineant, ce qui le faisait rester au lit si long-temps. " Je suis occupe," dit-il, "a tenir conseil tous les matins. Le travail me conseille de me lever, la paresse de rester couche ; et ils me donnent ainsi vingt raisons pour et contre. C'est a moi d'entendre ce qu'on dit des deux parts; et a peine la cause est-elle entendue qu^ le Hiner est pret." Tt was a beautiful turn given by a great lady, who, being (on ra- conte un beau trait d' — ) asked where her husband was, when he lay concealed (etre cache) for having been deeply concerned in a con- spiracy, (pour avoir trempe dans une conspiration.) resolutely (coura- geuscment) answered, she had hid him. This confession (un aveu) Vous avez triple part. Renouveler, 1. £tourdir, 2. Etourdi — e. Franc — franche. Serrer la main a quelqu'un. t Je lui dis qu'oui. t Je lui dis que non. Serrer. Serrez votre argent. Aussitot que j'ai lu mon livre, je le serre. Je ne me soucie pas beaucoup d'aller a la comedie ce soir. t Se rassasier, 1. t II y a une heure que je mange, et je ne puis me rassasier ; or, t Je mange depuis une heure, et je ne peux pas me rassasier. Etre rassasie. t Se desalt erer, 1. II y a une demi-heure que je bois, A mais je ne puis me desalterer. Etre desaltere. Etre alt ere. t C'est un homme altere de sang. 446 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but her discovering where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture, (qu'elle ne pouvait echapper a la torture qu'en decouvrant la retraite de son epoux.) " And will that do?" (suffire*) said the lady. " Yes," says the king, "I will give you my word for it." "Then," says she, " I have hid him in my heart, where you will find him." Which surprising answer (cette reponse admirable) charmed her enemies. Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. On both sides, on every side. On all sides. Allow me, my lady, to introduce to you Mr. G., an old friend of our family. I am delighted to become acquainted with you. I shall do all in my power to deserve your good opinion. Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B., whose brother has rendered such eminent services to your cousin. How happy we are to see you at our house ! It is the prerogative of great men to conquer envy ; merit gives it birth, and merit destroys it. It is the finest country in Europe. De part et d' autre. De toutes parts. Permettez, Madame, que je vous pre- sente Monsieur de G., comme an- cien ami de notre famille. Je suis charmee, Monsieur, de faire votre connaissance. Je ferai tout ce qui seraenmonpou- voir, pour me rendre digne de vos bonnes graces. Mesdames, permettez que je vous presente M. de B., dont le frere a rendu de si eminents services a vo- tre cousin. Ah ! Monsieur, que nous sommes en- chantees de vous recevoir chez nous! C'est le privilege des grands hommes de vainere l'envie ; le merite la fait naitre, le merite la fait mou- rir. C'est le plus beau pays deV Europe. Obs. 173. The preposition in, connected with a relative superlative, is rendered in French by : de. Candia is one of the most agreeable islands in the Mediterranean. He lives in his retreat like a real philosopher. Obs. 174. Like is rendered by en when it means equal to. Vous vivez en roi. Candie est une des iles les plus agrea- bles de la Mediterranee. II vit dans sa retraite en vrai philo sophe. Ex. You live like a king. He acts like a madman. To behave like a blunderbuss. Who, where I am, knocks as if he were master ? II agit en furieux. Se conduire en etourdi. Qui frappe en maitre oii je suis? EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 447 QuATRE-VINGT-CINQTJIEME THEME. 2de S^C. Quel est le pays le plus etendu, dans lequel, exactement le raeme langage est employe par la masse de la nation? Ce sont les Etats- Unis. Y parle-t-on le meme langage depuis le Nord jusqu'au sud ; et de Pest a Pouest? Oui, la masse de la langue est la meme. ce- pendant il y a des mots caracteristiques de presque toutes les locali- tes. Les habitants du Nord peuvent-ils comprendre sans difficulte, le langage de ceux du midi, qui demeurent quelque fois a 2500 milles? Oui, ils le comprennent tout de suite * mais ils ne laissent pas de reconnaitre immediatement la partie des Etats-Unis ou lin- dividu qui leur parle, a recu son education. En est-il de meme en Europe? Non, pas a beaucoup pres, (far from it.) Chaque pro- vince, chaque comte, chaque district presque, a son langage jarti- culier, que les voisins n'entendent pas plus que nos indiens ameri- cains ne s ; entendent les uns les autres. Nos indiens ne s'entendent- ils pas tous ? Non, chaque tribn a sa langue exclusive, et ces tribus different autant par le langage que par le costume, (dress.) Cornelia, the illustrious (illustre) mother of the Gracchi, (des Grac- ques.) after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve children, applied herself to (se vouer d) the care of her family, with a wisdom (la sagesse) and prudence that acquired for (acquerir*) her universal esteem, (Vestime universelle.) Only three out of (Centre) the twelve lived to years of maturity, (Vdge mur ;) one daughter, Sempronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Afri- canus; and two sons, Tiberius and Cai'us, whom she brought up (elever) with so much care, that, though they were generally ac- knowledged (savoir generalement) to have been born with the most happy dispositions, (la disposition .) it was judged that they were still more indebted (etre redevable) to education than nature. The answer she gave (faire*) a Campanian lady (une dame de Campanie) con- cerning them (d leur sujet) is very famous, (fameux — se,) and includes in it (renfermer) great instruction for ladies and mothers. That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show, (etre passionne pour le faste et Veclat.) having displayed (etaler) her diamonds, (le diamant.) pearls, (la perle,) and richest jewels, earnestly desired Cornelia to let her see her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously (adroit ement) turned the conversation to another subject, to wait the return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When they returned, and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the Campanian lady, pointing to them, (monirer :) "These are my jewels, and the only ornaments (la parure) I prize, (priser. v ) And such ornaments, which are the strength (la force) and support (le 448 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) soutien) of society, add a brighter lustre (un plus grand lustre) to the fair (la beaute) than all the jewels of the East, (de V Orient.) EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, 86th.— Quatre-vingt-sixieme Legon, 86me. PRESENT OR ACTIVE PARTICIPLE. Participe present. For its use and formation, see (§ 156£). Study it carefully. Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. The house being built, we occu- pied it. Having studied, I recited well. Not having studied, my cousin did not recite as well as I did. Not knowing the name of the gentle- man, I could not write it. The note becoming due on Sunday, it must be paid on Saturday. His brother-in-law's coat fitting him, he put it on. Understanding the language they spoke, I learned their secret. How did you find it out ? By listening to their conversation. "Where did you find her purse ? In the bushes, while looking for birds' eggs. We saw the fire while crossing. How is the plural of nouns and of adjectives formed ? By adding an s to the singular. How is the present participle formed ? By changing the ons of the first per- son plural into ant. How can they improve their writing ? By copying good copper-plate models. How does it happen that . . . ? How does it happen that he is so small, his parents being so tall ? Ir is one of those facts we see, but for which we cannot account. As mesmerism, I suppose. La maison etant batie, nous Poccu- pames. Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. N'ayant pas etudie, mon cousin ne recita pas aussi bien que moi. Ne sachant pas le nom du M., je ne pus pas l'ecrire. Le billet echeant dimanche, il faut le payer samedi. L'habit de son beau-frere lui seant, il le mit. Comprenant la langue qu'ils par- laient, j'appris leur secret. Comment le decouvrites-vous? En ecoutant leur conversation. Ou trouvates-vous sa bourse ? Dans les buissons, en cherchant des ceufs d'oiseaux. Nous vimes le feu en traversant. Comment forme-t-on le pluriel des noms et des adjectifs ? En ajoutant s au singulier. Comment forme-t-on le participe present ? En changeant le ons de la premiere personne du pluriel en ant. Comment peuvent-ils bonnifier leur ecriture ? En copiant de bona modeles graves. Comment se fait-il que ...?(§ 151.) Comment se fait-il qu'il soit si petit, son pere et sa mere etant si grands ? C'est un de ces faits qu'on voit, mais qu'on ne peut expliquer. Comme le mesmensme, je suppose The more you study the more you learn. Do not people learn by studying ? Yes, the more one studies the more one learns. Go up stairs and get me a silk hand- kerchief. Will you choose a good steel pen and write a letter to Julia ? EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, (l.) 449 Plus vous etudiezplus vous apprenez. N'apprend-on pas en etudiant ? Si fait, plus on etudie plus on ap- prend. Allez en haut me chercher un mouchoir de soie. Voulez-vous choisir une bonne plume d'acier pour ecrire a Julie ? Qtjatre-vingt-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. La voiture etant cassee, que nous faut-il faire? II nous faut attendre qu ; elle soit raccommodee. Plus nous attendrons plus nous nous reposerons, et je vous assure que j'ai grand besoin de repos, car je suis tres-fatiguee ; ne Petes-vous pas ? Non, je ne le suis pas du tout. Comment se fait-il que vous ne le soyez pas ? Je ne sais pas comment cela se fait; mais, je ne me sens pas fatiguee, pas le moms du monde. II parait que plus vous voyagez, moins vous souffrez, et moi, au contraire, plus je voyage, plus je souftre. C 7 est peut-etre, parce que vous aviez peur des derniers chevaux que nous avons eus. C ; est vrai ; j'en ai eu peur; ils etaient vigoureux et fnngants, (frisky,) et je craignais qu'ils ne prissent le mors aux dents, (would run away.) Moi, je les ai trouves beaux, et voila tout. J'ai trouve qu'ils allaient vite, mais je n'ai pas eu la moindre peur. Quoi ! N ; avez-vous pas eu peur quand ils ont pris le galop? (began to gallop.) Non ; ce n'etait que le petit galop (hand-gallop or canter.) — Votre peur vous a plus fatiguee que le voyage. The more I look at her, the more I admire her, don't you 1 (62 s , N. 1.) No, on the contrary, the more I look at her, the less I admire her face, her manners and voice; but whose handsome carriage is this? Which one do you mean? for I see several. That dark green carriage, with the drivers seat (le siege du cocher) in white cloth.— I see it now, you are right, it is elegant; but I do not know whose it is.— Do you see it, Theodore? Yes. I do. Whose is it? I do not know. Do you, Aletta? I neither. ($171 — 9.) Does your cousin Eloise ? She neither.— Does any one? (62 3 , N. 1.) No, no- body here knows it. It looks like a new carriage, and is very tasty, {d'un gout exquis.)—} came down without my parasol: I must go back for it.— No. no. cousin, I will go up and get it for you. (monter le chercher.) Where shall I find it ? I had it in my hand, so that I must have left it either on the bed, the bureau, the toilet, or a chair; yon will certainly find it somewhere in the room. I shall be back in a minute. I cannot play that new polka. You will learn it by practising.— 450 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Can you speak while playing on the piano % Yes, I can speak while playing a tune I know. Could you not speak while playing on the violin? No, I cannot; but I have seen a good many persons that could. Ladies can generally talk while playing the piano, can they not 1 ? Yes, as they frequently sing while playing; they do not find it more difficult to speak than to sing. Qijatre-vingt-sixieme Theme. 2de Sec. POLITENESS. When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis XIV. his man- ners, address, and conversation gained much on the esteem and friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of his courtiers, talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy manners, the king offered to lay a wager he would name an English nobleman that should excel in those particulars any Frenchman of his court. The wager was jocularly accepted, and his majesty was to choose his own time and place for the experiment. To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some months, till the courtiers thought he had forgotten it ; he then chose the fol- lowing stratagem : he appointed Lord Stair, and two of the most polished noblemen of his court, to take an airing with him after the breaking up of the levee ; the king accordingly came down the great staircase at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and com- ing up -to the side of the coach, instead of going in first, as usual, he pointed to the French lords to enter; they, upon this unusual ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honor; he then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and instantly sprang into the coach : the king and the French lords followed. When they were seated, the king exclaimed: " Well, gentlemen, I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager." " How so, sire ?" u Why," continued the king, " when I desired you both to go into the coach, you declined it : but this polite foreigner (point- ing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands of a king, though not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed. 7 ' The courtiers hung down their heads in confusion, and acknowledged the justness of his majesty's claim. I cannot see the justness of that decision. The French lords, by refusing the honor proffered by the king, (que le roi leur offrait,) dis- played (monlrerent) less obedience, but more politeness. MILDNESS. The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the course of bis life, commanded admiration from all who knew him ; but in no EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 45a one instance, perhaps, more than the following. Sir Isaac had a favorite dog, which he called Diamond; and being one day called out of his study into the next room. Diamond was left behind. When Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a few minutes, he had the mortification to find that Diamond having thrown down alighted candle among some papers, the nearly finished labor of many years was in flames, and almost consumed to ashes. This loss, as Sir Isaac Newton was then very far advanced in years, was irretrieva- ble ; yet. without once striking the dog, he only rebuked him with this exclamation : " ! Diamond ! Diamond ! thou little knowest the mischief thou hast done." Zeuxis entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius. The former painted grapes so truly, that birds came and pecked at them.. The latter delineated a curtain so exactly, that Zeuxis, coming in, said : li Take away the curtain, that we may see this piece." And finding his error, said : " Parrhasius, thou hast conquered : I only deceived birds, thou an artist. 7; Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes; the birds came again and pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a passion, and saying, " My boy must be very badly painted/''* daubed his face, (lui barbouilla la figure.) The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne a hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered them : " As your town is not on the road I intend to march, I cannot accept the money you offer me." A corporal of the life-guard of Frederick the Great, who had a great deal of vanity, but at the same time was a brave fellow, wore a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket-bullet instead of a watch, which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined one day to rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must have been very frugal to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell me what it is by yours'?*' The soldier, who guessed the king's intention, instantly drew out the bullet from his fob, and said : " My watch neither marks five nor six o'clock; but it tells me every moment, that it is my duty to die for your majesty.*' " Here, my friend," said the king, quite affected, " take this watch, that you may be able to tell the hour also." And he gave him his watch, which was adorned with brilliants. AN AFFECTING NARRATIVE OF THE RECOVERY OF EYESIGHT. The operator. Mr. Grant, having observed the eyes of his blind patient, and convinced his friends and relations, among others the 452 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Rev. Mr. Kerswell, that it was highly probable he should be able to remove the obstacle which prevented the use of his sight; all who knew and had any regard for the young man. or curiosity to be pre- sent when one of full age and understanding received a new sense, assembled themselves on this ocasion. Mr. Kerswell, being particu- larly interested, desired the whole company, in case the blindness should be cured, to let the patient make his own observations, with- out enabling him to discover his friends by their voices. Among several others, the mother, brother, sisters, and a, young lady for whom he had a passion, were present. The work was performed with great skill and dexterity. When the patient first received the dawn of light, there appeared such an ecstasy in his action, that he seemed ready to swoon away in the surprise of joy and wonder. The surgeon stood before him with his instruments in his hands. The young man observed him from head to foot, after which he su/veyed himself as carefully, and seemed to compare himself, and think they were exactly alike, except the instruments, which he took for part of his hands. When he had continued in this amaze- ment some time, his mother could no longer bear the agitations of so many passions, but fell upon his neck, crying out, u My son, my son." The young man knew her voice, and could speak no more than, a Oh! me, are you my mother?' 7 — and fainted. The whole room were, you will easily conceive, busily employed in recovering him, except the young lady who was attached to him, whose agitation was so great that she shrieked in the loudest man- ner; — that voice seemed to have had a sudden effect upon him, as he recovered; and he showed a double curiosity in observing her, as she spoke and called to him, till at last he exclaimed : " What has been done to me ? — Whither am T carried ? — Ts all this about me ? — The thing I have so often heard of, is this the light? — Is this see- ing ? — Were you always thus happy, when you said you were glad to see each other'? — Where is Tom who used to lead me? But I could now, methinks, go anywhere without him." He offered to move, but seemed afraid of everything around him. He was told that for some time he must suffer his eyes to be covered, and Tom to lead him as usual, which he consented to with great reluctance. He was at last prevailed on to have his eyes bound, in which situation they kept him in a dark room, until it was judged proper to let the organ receive its objects without further precaution. During the time of this darkness, he bewailed himself in the most distress- ful manner, and accused all his friends, complaining that some incantation had been wrought on him. and some strange magic used to deceive him into an opinion that he had enjoyed what they called EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 453 6ight. He added j that the impression then let in upon his soul, would certainly distract him, if he were not so at that present time. After some days, it was thought proper to take the bandage from his eyes, and the young lady whom he loved was instructed to do it ; as well to endear herself to him by such a circumstance, as to moderate his ecstasies, by the persuasion of a voice which had so much power over him as hers ever had. _ When this beloved object began to take off the binding from his eyes, she spoke to him as follows : "My dear William, I am now taking the binding off, though, when I consider what I am doing, I tremble with the apprehension, that though I have from my very childhood loved you, dark as you were, and though you have conceived so strong a love for me, yet you will find there is such a thing as beauty , which may ensnare you into a thousand passions of which you are innocent, and take you from me for ever : but before I hazard this, tell me in what manner the love you always professed to me entered into your heart, for its usual admission is at the eyes. ;? The young man answered — " Dear Lydia — If I am to lose by sight the soft emotions which I have always felt when I have heard your voice : if I am no more to distinguish the step of her I love when she approaches me, but to change that sweet and frequent pleasure for such an amazement as I knew the little time I lately saw ; or, if I am to have anything besides which may take from me the sense I have, of what appeared most pleasing to me at that time, the sight of you, pull out these eyes, before they lead me to be ungrateful to you, or undo myself. I wished for sight only to behold you; pull them out if they are to make me forget you. ;; With these assurances, Lydia was well satisfied. In all his con- versation with her he showed but very faint ideas of anything which had not been received at the ears. INTERESTING NARRATIVE. The following is an extract from a letter written by a young mar- ried lady in India, to her mother in England, and must be consi- dered as a beautiful specimen of affection, fortitude, and piety. " About three o'clock we left Rose farm, and at half past five saw the ship coming towards us with many sails set; but before I pro- ceed to say another syllable, I must caution you strongly, and par- ticularly, my dear mamma, against giving way to your feelings, but continually bear in mind that all is past, and I am, thank God. now safe and well, as is my dear brother Frank. The story 1 must relate is certainly disastrous, and might have been dreadful ; but for the 454 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) mercy of Providence, who in this instance appears to have stretched forth his omnipotent arm to rescue us from a precipitate and shock- ing end (namely, a watery grave), almost miraculously. The cir- cumstances were nearly, as the terrible agitation I underwent would permit my memory its exercise, as follows : — The ship was going with a fine breeze at the rate of four miles an hour over (or against) a strong ebb tide running nearly at the same rate ; and, as it was in our favour, we soon came close to the ship, and the officer, keeping watch on deck, seeing who it was, ordered a rope to be thrown, which our boatman caught and fastened to a part of the boat, in order that the men in the ship (as is customary) might pull us to the side; but Frank, when they began to do so, finding the tide too strong, and the progress the ship was making against it, too great for it to be accomplished with facility, called to his chief officer, Mr. G., to request the pilot to let fly some particular sail, which request, after a little hesitation, was complied with 3 but Frank, perceiving the difficulty of our coming along side continuing to exist, ordered Mr. G. again to tell the pilot to back the topsails; Mr. G. returned for answer, " The pilot won't, Sir. ;? Brother then called out to the pilot, John, to whom he personally repeated his request, adding, " For God's sake comply, for there is a lady in the boat, and you will certainly pull us under water. ;; I, through the Venetian, saw the pilot shake his head, and heard Frank call out to let go the rope, which had been thrown from the ship to us; but the men not executing imme- diately their order, what he had foretold actually occurred ; we were dragged under water. Oh ! what a dreadful moment ; no words can express the feelings such a moment creates, and no one, except those who have been placed in a similar situation, can conceive the agony, the horror of it. The boat we were in is called a boleah ; it is a large boat with a thing like a house on the top of it; therefore, instead of the cabin being below, as in English pleasure yachts, it is on the deck. When the accident happened I was alone in the cabin with all the baggage, beds, &c. ; my maid was silting near the door, and brother was at the further extremity of the boat. He, when under water, let go the rope which fastened us to the ship, and by this means saved every soul but one from perishing, for the boat, instead of sinking, upset and floated with the bottom upwards. Poor Frank with great difficulty (he cannot swim), from the in- cumbrance of a great coat, got above water, and held on to the bottom of the b< >at. My proceedings inside were attended with more difficulty. I possessed during the whole time entire presence of mind, which, though it saved me, added trebly to the dreadfulness EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 455 of my situation. I was as composed as I am at this moment. 1 felt death to be inevitable, and resigned myself to the mercy of God. I saw my poor servant sink (I thought for ever), and heard with firmness, though with agonized despair, her last faint exclama- tion of Oh Ma ; Oh Ma. the funeral or death cry of the natives. The boxes. &c, in the cabin had fallen to the ceiling, which had of course, from the situation of the boat, become the undermost part; they fell fortunately without injuring me: and I stood on the same floor with them, and made an effort to open the door, but, from the unusual position, it resisted my attempt. The water now began to rush through the Venetians all round into the cabin, and I felt that I was consuming fast the air of which any further supply was totally impossible; therefore, two dreadful deaths presented themselves, — drowning and suffocation. Perfectly sensible and collected, I made another more violent attempt to open the door, in which I succeeded, and the prospect before me made my fate appear more certain even than before, and undoubtedly more dreadful ; for the ceiling the boat made over my head, rendered it only sufficiently light for me to behold the dismally dark green of the water all round. Even in this horrible state my recollection never failed me for an instant ; indeed, the effect was contrary, for my memory was almost cruelly retentive; and actually while I was deliberating which course to take, or rather which death to die, I thought of you all. of my home, my country, my husband: and indeed every circumstance of my life passed in review before me. Beginning to gasp a little, I found the horrors of drowning diminish, and being perfectly aware that either way my sufferings would soon be over, 1 again commended myself to the Almighty, and placing my hands close down to- my sides (not a drop of water had yet touched me), I resigned myself to that element, knowing that the tide would soon carry me from underneath the boat, and that there was a possibility of my being able to get at the top of it. From my perfect composure, even when immersed, I was convinced that any action of my body would counteract the buoyant effect of the water, therefore I remained per- fectly still : my eyes were open, and I soon perceived, from the color of the water becoming lighter, that I was rising. When my head came above, I saw I was only a few yards from the boat, to which the tide carried me ; and, with an effort so natural to a drowning wretch, endeavored to seize it: but the bottom was coppered, and so perfectly smooth that I only could hold by pressing my extended hands, arms, and cheek, to its slippery surface ; this was no hold, and the next wave carried me off again with my head the second time 456 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) under water. Though nearly exhausted, my presence of mind never forsook me ; I was buoyed up again, and reached the boat as before \ and as I now saw Frank ; s head above water, with some of the dan- dies (boatmen), I increased my efforts to hold on, for the desire of life was become stronger, though struggling with the water. I called out, u Frank, I am safe, do not be alarmed. ?; At this moment he got on the top of the boat, and, crawling to the place where I was holding on, entreated me to give him my hands that he might pull me up; but I knew the impossibility of his doing so, and felt that even to quit my precarious hold would be ruin, for my strength was too much exhausted to permit me to use any further exertion of body : my mind was as vigorous as at first. Danger levels all distinction. A poor dandy rose near me j and, partly to support myself and save him, I grasped his hand, and at the same time got a finger through a small hole which was bored for the purpose of letting the water off the deck of the boat; these holds were better, and I kept them for a considerable time, though up to my throat in water. In short, my woman was saved, and, with the boatman, like brother, got on the top. The ship meanwhile was going on, and, the tide drifting us in a contrary direction, we were soon three or four miles apart. Frank's officers were much concerned, as were his men, of whom all the best, headed by the Syrang, jumped over- board, and swam on shore. Shame to say, the ship was not pro- vided with one boat fit for use ; that which they lowered down sunk immediately, and the second officer, who had got into her, was saved by a rope thrown to him from the ship. The men who swam on shore had three or four miles to run before they came to the spot where we were, therefore imagine our situation. Brother, when I could hold no longer, seized my hands, and with herculean strength pulled me up, and seated me near him. We now began the mourn- ful task of numbering our people, and found only one man missing; all the remainder (twelve souls, including ourselves) being seated at the top of the boat. Night was fast approaching, and the melancholy cry of the poor creatures, in this perilous situation, of u Oh Ma, Oh Ma," uttered at regular intervals, increased the wretchedness of the scene. Frank, in a state of distraction on my account, hallooed repeatedly for assistance, but none came till quite night, and for more than three hours were we in this miserable condition, when boats came, and brother's ship's crew appeared on the shore." V. VALUE'S GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. GRAMMAIRE SYNOPTIQUE. DIRECTIONS. Direction 1. — The pupil must be informed that, in English, to the ques- tion : Have you read the book ? he may answer, Yes, Sir, / have ; No, Miss, / have not. To the question : Would they buy the paper ? he may answer: Yes, they would, or No, they would not. But the same liberty is not allowed in French, and he must then either stop after Yes, or Yes, Sir, Oui, or Oui, M., or Non, or Non, Mile. ; otherwise he must give an answer containing the subject, the verb, and the objective. To the first question : I have it, or I have not got it ; to the second, They would buy it, or they would not buy it. Do you see the fans ? I do. f Voyez-vous les eventails ? Je les vois. Has he taken them ? He has not. ! Les a-t-il pris ? II ne les a pas pris. Would you have bought them ? I j Les auriez-vous achetes ? Je would. Taurais fait. Dir. 2. — Every attending word, whether article or pronoun, showing the gender and number of nouns, must be repeated before every noun in the same sentence. II re$ut un chapeau, une epee, des pistolets, &c. Nous vimes Z'homme, la femme, les enfants, et les domestiques. Cette grammaire, cet encrier, et ces crayons sont a raoi. He received a hat, a sword, pistols, &c. We saw the man, woman, children, and servants. This grammar, this inkstand, and these pencils are mine. And likewise the preposition governing several nouns or verbs must be repeated before every one of them, although it is not in English. He speaks of his brother, sister, and cousins. He likes to write, read, and play. Tell the cook to go to market, to buy eggs, to bring them here, and to make an omelet with them. 39 II parle de son frere, de sa soeur, et de ses cousins. II aime d ecrire, a lire, et a jouer. Dites au cuisinier d'aller au marche, d'y acheter des ceufs, de les ap- porter ici , et eTen faire une omelette. ($ 4, 20, 25.) (457) *0O GRAMMATICAL S1NOPSI8. Dm. 3,— On Objective Pronouns. The French word lui, translating, sometimes, to him, to her, and sometimes merely him or her, is a source of constant difficulty. Should to him or to her be always used, when implied, in English, the difficulty would, in a great measure, be removed ; for, it would be easy to remember that, send an apple to him, and send an apple to her, are both translated by, envoy ez-ixsi une pomme. But, instead of using the preposition to, the Americans usually suppress it, and say : Send him an apple ; send her an apple. Hence arises the difficulty. As him, unconnected with the preposition, is translated by le, and her, by la, the learner is induced, whenever the preposition is omitted, (as in the last two Ex.) to use le or la instead of lui, and very naturally too. One way to overcome this difficulty, is to examine mentall* whether the preposition could be used in English; for instance, if, instead si send him an apple, it would be correct to say : send an apple to him. If so, then lui must be used. But a still better dependence is to be placed on the French verb itself, If it requires the preposition a to govern its indirect object, lui must be used, not otherwise. How is this to be ascertained ? By consulting the list of verbs, ($ 156—5.) N. B. The same direction applies to the indirect pronoun leur, which translates both them, and to them. The other objective pronouns do not present the same difficulty, because they are the same, whether direct or indirect, (me, te, nous, vous, $47.) Dir. 4. — On Objective Nouns. The preposition connected with an objec- tive pronoun, is sometimes suppressed, or at least connected with the pro- noun so as to form a single word. Ex. Me, is used for a moi, to me. Lui, for d lui, a elle, to him, to her, &c. — and then both in English and French there is an inversion or change in the position of the pronoun ; which, in English, is placed before the objective case ; while, in French, it is put still nearer the beginning of the sentence, viz : before the verb. Will you give a pencil to me? is the grammatical construction, which, by the suppression of the preposition to, and the inversion it necessitates, becomes will you give me a pencil ? in which me and pencil appear in an inverted order. Voulez-vous me donner un crayon, is the only way the French have to trans- late both the grammatical and inverted construction ; because the sup- pression of the preposition a, which necessarily takes place, (there being only one object, 51,) forces the pronoun me to be placed before the infinitive donner. But mark this carefully. The preposition connected with the objective noun is never suppressed in French, although it is frequently done in English by means of an inversion. (§5H.) The phrase : Give Mary an apple, in which there is an inversion, is more used than give an apple, to Mary, although the latter is the true grammatical construction. But in French it is only the last order that is to be translated, and never the former. Donnez une pomme a Marie ; and never: donnez Marie une pomme. I will send John the knife, (the knife | J'enverrai le couteau a Jean. to John.) She wrote her mother a letter, (a let- EUe gcrivit une lettre a sa mere. ter to her mother.) GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 459 Show Sarah the present I made you. Montrez a Sara le present que je vous ai fait. Tell Andrew the French of : His I Dites a Andre le Fran§ais de : His horse. horse. Whenever you meet with a similarly constructed sentence, give it its full grammatical extent and translate it. Dm. 5. — When you do not know the infinitive of a verb, find it in a dic- tionary, and any of its persons may be formed by the rules given for the for- mation of the different tenses. Dm. 6. — A simple sentence consists of a verb and its nominative ; I ad- mire, is a simple sentence. You do so well, is another. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by a conjunction or a relative pronoun. I admire what you do so well ; I suppose that you know it. He speaks and writes eloquently. In English, the conjunction that, and the relative pronouns whom, which, that, are usually omitted, as: 1. I believe you know it, {that omitted.) 2. I know the person you call, {whom left out.) 3. I read the book he has written, {which.) 4. He learns the lesson you gave him, {that.) In French, neither the relative pronoun nor the conjunc- tion is omitted. Hence, translate the four sentences above by: 1. Je crois que vous le savez. 2. Je connais la personne que vous appelez. 3. Je lis le livre Qu'il a ecrit. 4. II apprend la lecon que vous lui avez donnee. Avez-vous mon couteau ? Je crois que oui; que is used because oui is equivalent to : j'ai votre couteau ; which, being a simple sentence, must be connected by que with the former, je crois, to form the compound sentence* Je crois que f ai votre couteau, or je crois que oui. (21 1 .) Dm. 7. — Much, many, enough, little, &c, are called adjectives in English, when connected with nouns. In French, combien, beaucoup, assez, peu, trop, autant, plus, moins, guere, un peu, &c, are considered as adverbs of quantity; and as such, having no affinity with nouns, they require a con- necting link, which is the preposition de. Hence, always use de after beau- coup, combien, &c, before the following noun, and repeat it before every one. When the noun is left out, the partitive pronoun en, placed before the verb, and repeated before every one, takes its place and that of the pre- position de. {% 47, N. 4. 12 1 - 2 &c.) Dm. 8. — In English, to form an interrogation with the verbs to be and to have, the pronoun nominative is placed after the verb ; for instance, I have, affirmation; by transposition becomes have I? interrogation. You have; have you ? — I am ; am I ? — You are ; are you ? &c. This way of forming the interrogation tallies with the general rule in French, which is to put the pronoun nominative after the verb, not only with the two verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to be ; but with every other verb. So : J'ai, becomes ai-je ? Je suis, suis-je ? Je dois, dois-je ? Je regois, recois-je ? &c. Should the Americans use the same mode of interrogation with other verbs as they do with to have and to be, students would meet with no diffi- culty; but instead of transposing the pronouns, they.retain the affirmative form and use auxiliaries, such as do, did, shall, &c. For instance : I owe, does not become interrogative by saying : owe I ? but by putting do before 460 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. I owe, as, do I owe? do I receive ? &c, for the present tense. Did I owel did I receive? for the imperfect. Shall and will, for the future tense ; should, would, &c, for the potential, &c. So that when the student wishes to form an interrogation, in French, he naturally looks out for a word cor- responding to the auxiliary, do, or did, or shall, &c, and feels much disap- pointed when told there is none. It is for a long time with him a source of perplexity. When he discovers that do is sometimes translated by fait, he is constantly using fait wherever does occurs ; when told it is wrong, he naturally feels dispirited. It is hoped that the full explanation, here given, will convince the learner that the principal use of do, did, &c. is to form interrogations and negations in English, 1 and that since he can, with the verbs to have and to be, interrogate without using do, did, &c, so he can in all French verbs. If he is once convinced of this idea, a great cause of per- plexity will be removed. The French, however, have another mode of interrogating, which consists inputting: est-ce que (28 1 ) before the affirmative form of every person, which can be used interrogatively. Ex. J'ai, I have. Est-ce que fail have I? Tu es, thou art. Est-ce que tues? art thou? II lit, he reads. Est-ce qxCil lit ? does he read? Nous devons, we owe. Est-ce que nous devons? do we owe? Vous savez, you know. Est-ce que vous savez? do you know ? lis aiment, they love. Est-ce qu'ils aiment ? do they love ? From these examples it is evident that this mode of interrogation may be used in every case, but it must be employed in the first person singular of some verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would produce a diffi- cult or an unpleasant sound. 1st. When that first person is a monosyllable, as : je sens, je prends, je tends, jefonds. 2d. When the last syllable sounds like je, such as: je mange, je range, &c. ; and others, such as : funis,je permets, j' off re, &c. Dm. 9. — 'The student may easily notice that the parfait is formed by merely adding the past participle to the well known expressions f ai, je Vai, je neVaipas, je n'ai rien, f en ai, je les ai, &c. As je l'ai eu, (31 2 ) je ne l'ai pas eu, je n'ai rien eu, j'en ai eu, je les ai eus, -fee, and so of any other past participle. Je l'ai vu, je les ai don7ies,yen ai envoye, &c. RULES. Rule 1. — Every preposition governs the infinitive mood, except the pre- position en (in) which governs the present participle. (20 1 .) Note 1. Apres, (after) like every other preposition, (except en,) must be followed by the infinitive mood in French, but there is this peculiarity respecting apres, that it can be followed only by the infinitive of the auxi- liaries avoir or Hre ; as, Apres avoir parle, after havi?ig spoken. Apres etre parti, after having departed. Apres vous etre leve, after having l To form a neg-ative, do, did, &c, are invariably used, for instance; I go, does not become negative by saying : I go not ; but by : I do not go. I went is not I went not, but I did not go, &c, &c. As the French form their negations in a different way, the student must not looAi for any tiling corresponding to do, did, &c, in tho French negatives. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 461 risen. Now, although in English you may omit the auxiliary having, and say : after speaking ; after departing ; after rising ; it cannot be done in French. ^O 1 .) R. 2. — When two verbs come together, the second is in the infinitive mood, voulez-vous faire, (18 1 ,) if the first is neither to have (avoir; or to be (.etre) used as auxiliary of a past tense. Of course, if the two verbs are connected by a preposition, such as : d, to, de, of, from, &c, it governs the second verb in the infinitive, according to R. 1., and the preposition must be repeated before every verb. (20 1 .) R. 3. — Do you speak before you listen ? There are in this sentence two verbs, speak and listen, connected by a preposition and having the same nomi- native, you. Whenever that is the case, the French dispense with the second nominative by using the infinitive mood after the preposition, (R. 1,) and say : Parlez-vous avant d' ecouter ? which corresponds to : Do you speak before listening ? (28 2 , Obs. 65.) R. 4. — When the nominatives are different, as: He writes after you hs re spoken, the French use the English construction, and say : 1 1 ecrit apres que vous avez parle. They, of course, insert the conjunction que, left out in English, but never omitted in French. Note. — After that conjunction que the verb is frequently in the subjunc- tive mood. ^§ 151.) R. 5. — When two or more nouns, two or more adjectives, or two or more verbs govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposition, or with the same. If they require different prepositions, see (§ 140 — 9.) R. 6. — Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never separated from it, and is repeated before every word. (§ 117, 163, &c.) ARTICLES. § 1. — Articles are used in French to show the gender and number of nouns. Although French grammarians admit of but one article, viz : the definite, le, la, les, (the), two others are usually introduced in English- French grammars, i. e. the indefinite, un or une, a, an, 1 and the partitive, du. de la. des, some. It seems to me that the name of Article might appropriately be given to all the words which point out the gender or number of nouns. Accordingly, we might call : 1. Man % ma, mes, my, (§29,) &c, possessive articles, (because, besides 1 And likewise the following : Aucun, tout, any, &c. Indefinite Articles. Tout homme I peu t le faire. Toute femme ) Avez-vous aucun ami (aucune connaissance,) a Paris ? 39* 462 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. showing the gender and number, they indicate possession,) instead of naming them possessive adjective pronouns. 2. Ce, cet, cette, ces, this, these, &c, demonstrative articles or adjectives, instead of demonstrative adjective pronouns. (§36.) 3. Quel ? quels ? quelle ? quelles ? which ? interrogative articles, instead of interrogative adjective pronouns. 4. Deux, trois, &c, numeral articles. 1 §2. In English, articles are not, as in French, used to show the gender and number, but to limit the signification of the noun. From this funda- mental distinction arises the great difference in the use of the articles in the two languages. INDEFINITE ARTICLE.— Article Indefini. Singulier. — Tin, masculin. feminin. Pour un, avec une, d'un, a une. Pluriel. — Des. Quelques (14 1 .) Pour des. Pour quelques. Avec des. A quelques. De quelques. Une, §3.— Singular. A or an, (12 3 ,8i, &c.) For a, with a, of a, to a. Plural. — Some, any, a few. For some. For a few. With some. To a few. Of, or from some, or a few. And so it unites with every other preposition, both in the singular and plural. §4. — Some, any, a few, are frequently understood or left out in English, but never in French. Ex. He admires some modern authors. II admire quelques auteurs modernes. We have friends in town. Have you received letters ? Nous avons des amis en ville. Avez-vous recu quelques lettres ? §5. — In the singular it is generally used alike in both languages, and re- peated before every noun, so as to mark its gender. As : He has a pencil, a ruler, and a book. | II a un crayon, une regie, et un livre. §6. — -1st Exception. Cent, (14 2 ,) a hundred ; mille, a thousand; long-temps (36 2 ,) a long time ; beaucoup, (13 1 ,) a great deal, a great many, in French have no article. §7. — 2d Exception. Before a noun of weight, measure, and number, connected with its price, use the definite le, la, les, not the indefinite article. Butter sells at twenty cents a pound. This cloth is worth three dollars a yard ; the metre (65 2 .) Coal sells at five dollars a ton. Le beurre se vend vingt cents la livre. Ce drap vaut trois dollars la verge ; le metre. Le charbon se vend cinq dollars le tonneau. l This classification may be new in an English-French grammar, although long ago thought of by some of the best French grammarians. See Gram, des Gram, on Articles. Note 234. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 463 ARTICLE DEFINITE. §8. — The. Singular masculine before a consonant: le. Singular feminine before a consonant : la. Singular mas. or fern, before a vowel or k mute: V . Plural mas. or fem. before vowels or consonants : les. For the, Pour le, pour la, pour P, pour les. Before the, Avant le, la, 1' or les. And so on with every preposition, except de, (of or from,) and a, (to, at, &c.) ; and every preposition ending with de and d. These two prepositions, in their connexion with the definite article, present an exception which is easily explained and understood, but which much practice alone cui enable the student to use with accuracy. Of the, from the, sing, fem., is de la, (the preposition and article remain- ing separated before a consonant.) Of, from the, sing. mas. or fem., before a vowel or h mute is: de V Thus far the connexion is formed regularly, as in English, that is, the pre- position de and the article la or V remain separate : de la, de V . But it is different with the masculine singular. Of, from the, sing, mas., regularly, would be de le, but those two words are, before a consonant, always contracted into du. 1 Of, from the: plur, mas. or fem., instead of de les, is contracted into des. 1 To the, fem. sing., remains in two words : (regular) a la. mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute, is (regular) a V . mas. sing, instead of: ale in two words, contracts irregularly 'into an. 2 plur. mas. and fem. instead of d les, contracts irregularly into aux. 2 § 9. — The contraction du, being the union of the preposition de and the article le, ought never to be used when that article is not required. Then, translate of my friend, by de mon ami, and never by du mon ami, which would be equivalent to de le mon ami, of the my friend, in which the article le is unnecessarily introduced. But, translate of yours, by du votre, because, yours without article in English, being le votre, with the article, in French, of yours becomes de le votre, or its contraction, du votre. And so it must be, whenever the article le is admitted by the French construc- tion, although it may be rejected from the English. Near being pres de, near the becomes pres de le, or, contracted, pres du. Near the castle, is then pres du chateau. The very same process applies to des, which is the contraction of de 1 When m French you meet with : de le, de les, jfc is as a preposition and a pro- noun objective : II parle de le faire, he speaks of doing it il parle de les faire, he speaks of doing them; and not a preposition and article. In the latter case, de le, singular, before a consonant, de les, plural, are never used, but their contractions, du, des. II parle du capitaine, des capitaines. He speaks of the captain, of the captains. 2 "When you meet with a le, d les, it is as a preposition and pronoun objective : II pense a U Oiire, a les faire; he thinks of doing it, of doing them; and not as a pre- position nnd article. Instead of a le, use au. Instead of a les, use aux. II parle iu capitaine. aux capitaines; he speaks to the captain, to the captains. 464 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. les. Then, of my friends, (plur.,) must not be des mes amis, which would be equivalent to of the my friends ; but de mes am\$. § 10. — Des (contraction of de les, preposition and article plural) is not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of de, which, being a preposition, is inva- riable ; but that of du (contraction of dele, preposition and article masculine singular.) § 11. — Near the, pres du, pres de la, pris de V , pres des. Let this be the model for every preposition ending with de, when it is to be connected with the definite article, but not otherwise. (51 K] $ 12, — To the, for the masculine, should be a le, but it p always con- tracted into au, before a consonant. To the dictionary, au dictionnaire. To my dictionary, is not au mon dictionnaire, which would be equivalent to d le mon dictionnaire, to the my dictionary ; but d mon dictionnaire, leaving out the article. To mine, must be au mien ; because mine, is le mien, &c. § 13, — As far as, being : jusqu'a ; as far as the, will be jusqu 1 au, jusqu'd la, jusqu'd V , jusqu 1 aux. As far as the castle, literally jusqu' d le chateau, which, contracted, becomes jusqu' au chateau. Take jusqu 7 au, &c, as the model of every preposition ending with d, in its connexion with the definite article, but not otherwise. (38 1 .) To the, in the plural, should be d les, but it is always contracted into aux. To the children ; aux enfant s. To my children, should be d mes enfant* , and not aux mes enfants, which would be equivalent to d les mes enfant*, (to the my children.) § 14. — The function of the article being to show the gender and number of French nouns, and not merely to limit their signification, (§ 2,) we deduce from it these general principles. § 15. — The definite article must be placed before every noun, if that noun is not determined by some other qualifying, determining, or limiting word. (14 1 , Ex.) See (§ 140 — 6) for an exception. § 16. — Proper names of countries require a French gender or number ; hence the article that accompanies each one. Le Bresil. La France. Les Etats-Unis. Those ending in e mute are mostly feminine, all others mas- culine. (§ 140 — 8.) Exceptions among nouns. § 17. — Proper names of individuals, pointing out their own gender, require no article. Alexandre, Jeanne, Philadelphie. $ 18. — When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, the article is not repeated before each. The old and brave soidier. Le vieux et brave soldat. Le vieux et le brave soldat, would indicate that there are two ; one old and one brave. PARTITIVE ARTICLE. Although there is in English grammars no article so called, yet, as the English-French grammars have it, and as it has some or any for correspond- ent in English, we insert it here. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 465 §19. — First Partitive, before a noun. Some or any, before sing. mas. beginning with a consonant : du. " % " " sing. fern. '* " " de la. " " " sing. m. or f. " " a vowel: de V. " the plural " u " des. §20. — It has exactly the same form as the definite article connected with the preposition de. And it is repeated before every noun. § 21. — For some or any. Pour du. I With some or any. Avec de la. Before some or any. Avant de V . \ To some or any. A du, a des. § 22. — When connected with of or from, as : Of, or from some, it is (not de du, de de la, de des, but) simply de. Of some authors. Dictionaries. I D'auteurs. De dictionnaires. §23. — Some or any. For some. With some. Of, from some. To some. Quelque, sing. Quelques, plur. Pour quelque. Avec quelques. De quelques. A quelque. §24. — Near some. I Pres du (sing.) Pres de quelque. (Model for the prepositions with de.) I Pres de (plur.) Pres de quelques. §25. — Obs. Some or any, is frequently omitted in English, but never in French. We have soup and beef for dinner. Nous avons de la soupe et du bceuf pour diner. Nous avons de Tor de Californie. Avez-vous mange des chataTgnes, des pommes, et des noix ? §26. — Second Partitive Article, before an adjective, or after a negation. We have California gold. Have you eaten chestnuts, apples, and nuts ? De or d\ (not des, mind it.) Nous avons du pain, (1st partitive.) Nous avons de bon pain, de bonne viande, de bons poulets. (2d partit.) II a du pain, il n'a pas de beurre. Some or any : Mas. fem. sing. plur. We have some bread. We have some good bread, good meat, good chickens. (II 2 .) He has bread, he has no butter. (II 1 .) i He has amiable children, (some, a II a d'aimables enfants. few.) §27. — N. B. If the adjective is placed after the noun, instead of the 2d, use the 1st partitive article. He has amiable children, may be translated in French by: II a d'aimables enfants. 2d partitive, the adjective being before. II a des enfants aimables. 1st partitive, the noun being before. §28.— I have some more, orothers. | J'en ai d'autre, ou d'autres; not des autres, because the partitive comes immediately before the adjective. §29.— POSSESSIVE ARTICLES, OR ADJECTIVES, USUALLY CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, [flj §30. — The following words are usually classed among pronouns, but as, m English as well as in French, they merely refer to nouns; as they are 466 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. always prefixed to them, and never take their place; the term Possessive Articles, instead of Possessive Pronouns, does not seem inappropriate. 31. Before a consonant. Before a vowel or h mute. Before all. Sing. Mas. Sing. Fern. M.$ F. Plur. M. $ F. My mon ma mon mes. Thy ton ta ton tes. His, her, its l son sa son ses. Our notre notre notre nos. Your votre votre votre vos. Their 2 leur leur leur leurs. As its function is to show the gender and number : §32. — Rule. The Possessive Article, in French, agrees with the object possessed, and not with the possessor, as it does in English. Or else : It agrees with the noun to which it is prefixed, not that it refers to ; and it must be repeated before every noun. The father, his son, and daughter. The mother, her son, her daughter, and friends. Le pere, son fils, et sa fille. La mere, son fils, sa fille, et ses amies. i What is its infinitive? is translated by: Quel en est Vinfinitif? because the words, its infinitive, can be changed to : the infinitive of it, corresponding to the French: en est Vinfinitif. Hence this rule. (302.) Its is not translated by son, sa, ses, but by le, la, ou les . . . en, when it can be changed to : the ... of it. Ex. 1. I like Philadelphia; its markets i J'aime Philadelphie; les marches en are excellent. sont excellents. When that inversion cannot be made without destroying the sense, use : son, sa, ses. Ex. 2. The country has its delights, must be translated by: La campagne a ses agrements, because the sentence does not admit of the inversion : the country has the delights of it. 2 Their, is not translated by leur or leurs, but by le, la, les . . . en, when their can be changed to : the . . . of them. These languages are copious; I admire [ Ces langues sont copieuses ; j 'en admire their beauties (the . . . of them). ' les beautes. But use leur or leurs, when the inversion is inadmissible. Those languages have their beauties. As we cannot say : have the beauties of them, we must use leurs, and say : Ces langues ont letjrs beautes. The above rule being derived from the English construction, will be found more practical than the rule of French Grammarians, which is : When the possessor is nominative of the sentence in which its or their is used, translate by : son, sa, ses, or leur, leurs. If the possessor is not the nominative, translate by : le, la, les . . . en. (See examples above.) Exception. — When the thing possessed is governed by a preposition, use : son, sa, ses, leur, leurs. The Philadelphia water-works are admi- I Les machines hydrauliques de PhiladeV- rable ; everybody wonders at their sim- phie sont admirables; tout le monde plicity. s'etonne de leur simplicity. But if you employ a verb that requires no preposition, the rule must be used. As : tout le monde en admire Jar "simplicity. This formis an exception to both rules. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 467 My cousin's brother and sister. 1 My cousin's sister and brother. Le frere de mon cousin et sa sceur. 1 La sceur de mon cousin et son frere. $33.— DEMONSTRATIVE. ARTICLES OR ADJECTIVES. § 34. — Always prefixed to a noun, and repeated before every one. (See § 30.) This, that. These, those. Before a consonant. Before h aspirated. Before a vowel. Before a silent h. Before all letters. (4 1 , 8 1 , 9 2 , 10 l .) Masculine. Singular. Ce, before a consonant, or h aspirated. Cet, before a vowel or h mute. Ces, for the Plur. Mas. and Fem. before all letters. Femmine. Cette. This hat, that hat. This hero, that hero. This, that child. This, that man. This, that table. This, that needle. These, those men. These, those women. Ce chapeau. Mas. Sing. Ce heros. Cet enfant. Cet homme. Cette table. Fem. Sing. Cette aiguille. Ces hommes. Mas. Plur. Ces femmes. Fem. Plur. But when much precision is required, -ci and -la are added ; as : This hat. (8 1 .) This child. This table. These men. Ce chapeau-ci. Cet enfant-ci. Cette table-ci. Ces hommes-ci. That hat. That child. That table. Those women. Ce chapeau-la, Cet enfant-la. Cette table-la. Ces femmes-la. § 35. — When one says : If you read this book, I will read that or that one, it is evident that the word this connected with book, takes the place of no other word previously expressed, and that, consequently, it is not a pronoun, but a mere attendant on the noun book, to limit its signification, in the same manner as the article does ; and that it may then be considered as a demon- strative article or adjective, but not a pronoun. In every similar case, it must be translated by : ce, or cet, cette, ces. It is also evident that the word that, or that one, takes the place of a noun previously named, viz : book, and that, of course, it is not an article or adjective, but a true pronoun demonstrative, (§ 36,) to be translated by : celui- la, &c. PRONOUNS. $36.— DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Masc. Sing. This, this one. > n , . The latter. \ Celul " cl - That, that one. The former. Celui-la. These. Those. Masc. Plur. Ceux-ci. Ceux-ia. l My cousin's brother and sister, is an ellipsis for my cousin's brother and my cou- sin's sister ; which in French would be : Le frere de mon cousin et la sozurde mon cou- sin; but instead of putting the second ftoun in the possessive case, use a possessive article (§ 31), and say : Le frlre de mon cousin et sa saetcr. (§ 140.) 468 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Obs. -Ci and -la are omitted when other words (such as : de, of; qui, ou que, which ;) are added to complete the sense. Celui de Henri. Celui que j'ai. Celle-ci. Celle-la. Celle de Celle qui .... Henrietta's, those Ceux de Hem iette. ofH. Those which are . . Ceux qui sant . . . Fern. Plur. These. Those. Those of Those which . Celles-ci. Celles-la. Celles de . . . . Celles que . . . Henry's, that of H. The one which I have. Fern. Sing. This, this one. The latter. That, that one. > The former. ) That of, the one of. That, the one which .... § 37. — Obs. As these are pronouns, they always come after a i antecedent noun to which they refer and with which they agree. And therefore when you have an English sentence like : this or that book, the noun, in French, must be put in the first part of the sentence, to serve as an antecedent to the pronoun (that) which follows. This book or that . . . Ce livre-ci ou celui -la. Celui-la referring to : book ; whilst ce, cet, cette, (this or that, same Eng- lish as above;, ces (these or those), are always placed before the noun of which they point out the gender and number, without referring to anything pre- viously mentioned. $38.— PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES. Pronoms Personnels. Nominatifs 1st class. Ire classe. Connected with the verb, in French. i Singular. I. Je,j\ Thou. Tu. He, she, it. II, elle — il, elle. 2d class. 2de classe. Separated from the verb, in French. 1 Singulier. I. Moi.2 Thou. Toi. He, she. Lui, elle. One, some or any one. On. (Always connected with a verb of the 3d pers. sing., although the English pronoun may be plur. See below, 3d plur.) i The negative ne, n\ and any objective pronouns, le, me, &c, (§ 47,) may intervene between a nominative of the 1st class and the verb, without destroying the connex- ion; but no other word. As: il donne, il me donne, il ne donne pas, il ne me le donne pas, donne-t-il ? But to translate : he who gives, do not say : il qui donne ; but : lui qui donne, because who separates he, and gives : He \ Can he do it ? Lui ! peut-il le faire ? Can he do it ? He J Peut-il le faire ? Lui ! 2 The separated nominative is frequently left out in English, or, if expressed, it is by as for me, as to me, &c. The French moi, toi, &c, is evidently an abridgment of as to me, and, consequently, is nothing but the objective case used as a nominative : As for me, I do not know anything about it. He ! He did not do it. (As to him ) Didst thou go ? We believe it. (As to us.) Quant a moi, or simply moil je n'en sais rien. (Je n'en sais rien, moi .') Lui ! il ne Pa pas fait. Y as-tu et6, toi ! 'Nous! nous le croyon*. Nous le croy- ons, nous . GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 469 Pluriel. Nous. Vous. Eux, m. Elles,/. People, they, we, you. On. People seek happiness. On cherche ie bonheur. In the 3d pers. sing, and plur. may be classed the following expressions, which remain the same, whether connected with, or separated from the verb. Plural. We. Nous. 1 We. You or ye. Vous. 1 Ye or you. They. lis, m. elles,/. They. Singulier. He, she, it. Ce, c'. 2 This, that, it. 4 Ceci, cela, 5 §a, ce, c , Pluriel. They, (it). 4 Ce. 2 Ce. 3 These, those, Ces choses-ci. Ces they. choses-la. 1 The uniting pronoun nous or vous, must be placed before a verb, when it has two or more nominatives of different persons. Ex. at (171 Exercise.) 2 Instead of: il, elle, ils, elles, use ce or c' with the verb to be, when it has a nomi- native predicate, as some grammarians say, or two nominatives according to others. As : He is an Englishman ; c'est un Anglais : because Englishman, un Anglais, is used as a predicate noun to he. But you must translate he is English, by il est Anglais, and not : c'est Anglais ; because, English is then used as an adjective, and not as a second nominative or a noun predicate . (261, Obs. 59.) Cest une Anglaise. Elle est Anglaise. Ce sont des Francais. lis sont Francais. She is an English girl. She is English. They are Frenchmen. They are French. 3 $39. — It is, is translated by ce sont; is it? by sont-ce? (261, 065. 59.) only when followed by a 3d person plural. As : Is it they who sell those beautiful shawls ? Sont-ce eux qui vendent ces beaux chales ? Yes, it is they. Oui, ce sont eux. But it is we who have that; is rendered by Cest nous qui avons cela; not ce sont nous, because, we, although plural, is not a 3d person, (473, Obs. 110.) 4 When you say : take this, pointing to an object without naming it, or without applying the word this to a noun previously mentioned, it is evident that, in such a case, the word this means this thing, or this object, or this article, and that, of course, it is used as the name of the object itself, or as a noun, (although usually called a demonstrative adjective pronoun.) In every similar case, translate as above. Hence, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, ceux-ld, should never be connected with nouns, although this, that, these, those, in English, can be used with or without a noun. This admi- nistration, is, Cette administration, not ceci ou cela administration. (243, 392.) 5 When former and latter apply to actions, translate by cela and ceci, not by celui- la and celui-ci, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. As : Have you my book ani his ? I have the former, but not the latter, (here former and latter apply to the noun book,) then say : J'ai celui-ld, mais non pas celui-ci. Have you taken my book and torn his ? I did the former, but not the latter, (they here apply to actions,) then say : J'ai fait cela, mais non pas ceci. (N. pa. 271.) 6 Ce, cannot be used immediately before an objective pronoun. It is not correct to translate it pleases me, by ce me plait, but by cela me plait, cd ou ceci me plait. Ce is mostly used with the verb to be, seldom with others. It is suitable, c">est convenable ; but, it suits, must be cela convient, not ce convient. It is suffi- cient, c-est sumsant, or else, cela suffit, and not ce suffit. (473, 663 ) This is good, that is, or it is good. Ceci est bon. cela ou c'est bon. That's it. it is that. C'est cela. j That's not it, 'tis not so. Ce n'est pa» Qd is a contraction of cela. | cela. 36 * 470 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Singulier. This one, that one. Celui-ci, celui-la.m The latter, the for- Celle-ci, celle-la./. mer. This one . . That one. Celui-ci . . cet autre. The one who, that, Celui qui, celle qui. which . Some one, any one. Quelqu'un. Nobody, not anyone. Personne ne. No one, not anyone. Nul ne, nulle ne. None, no one. Aucun ne, aucune ne. Each one, every one. Chacun, chacune. The one or the other. L'un ou 1' autre. Pluriel. These, those, some. \ The latter, the for- I Ceux-ci, ceux-la.m. mer, (some do, | Celles-ci, celles-la./, some do not.) Some . . . others. Those who, that, which. Some, a few. ^All. J Ceux-ci . . d'autres. Ceux qui, celles qui. Que.ques uns. Tous. The one . . the other. L'un . . . l'autre. Neither. Ni l'un ni l'autre, The one and the L'un et l'autre. other, both. i Some . . . others. Les uns . . les autres. )Both. Tous deux, toutes ( les deux. Neither of them. Ni les uns, ni les autres. Neither these nor Ni ceux-ci ni ceux- those. la. All. Tous. (the i of qui is never cut off.) A few,some .. others. Quelques uns .... d' autres. Neither this one nor Ni celui-ci ni celui- that one. la. Nothing, not any. Rien ne . . . . Who (pour les pers.) Qui. Qui est-ce qui ? What ? (pour les Qw'est-ce qui ? choses.) N. B. The nominative case and the verb are frequently left out in English. As: This, when followed by . . ., Those, where preceded by . . ., That, on the side-board ; My gloves, in my pocket, &c. In all similar sentences, the pronoun and verb must be expressed in French : Ceci, quand il est.,,, PERSONAL PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Personnels, Separated from the verb. § 40. NOMINATIVES. NOMINATIFS. I who, I that. Moi qui. Thou who, thou that. Toi qui. He who, he that. Lui qui. 1 (o Celui qui, 2 ! * She who, she that. Elle qui, 1 |° Celle qui, 2 1 3 § 41. OBJECTIVES. I whom, I that. Thou whom. He whom, he that, She whom, she that REGIMES. Moi que. Toi que. Lui que. 1 Celui que. 2 Elle que. 1 ( | Celle que. 2 i Lui, elle, apply not to people in general, but to particular persons, and require no complement. Qui est appele le Pere de sa PatrieT Lui (montrant Washington). Elle (Mile. D.) qui ecrit si bien. Who is called the Father of his Country ? He (pointing to Washington). She (Miss D.) who writes so well. The plurals, eux, elles, apply to particular persons. They (the kings) who had promised so | Eux (les rois) qui avaient tant promis. much. They (the Misses R.) who speak French I Elles (les Demoiselles R.) qui parlent si so prettily. joliment le Francais. Lui, elle, eux, &c, apply only to persons, not to things. 2 Celui, celle, ceux, celles, apply to nouns having a general sense, or to nouns that require mmplements. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 471 Nominatives. The person who. La personne qui. Plural. We who, we that. You who, you that. They who, they that. Those who, that. They who, that. Those who, that. John and Louis who. Pluriel. Nous qui. Vous qui. Eux qui. 1 Ceux qui. 2 Elles qui. 1 Celles qui. 2 Jean et Louis qui. Objectives. The person whom. La personne Plural. We whom, that. You whom. They whom, that. Those whom, that. They whom. that. Those whom, that. J. and L., whom. que. Pluriel. Nous que. Vous que. Eux que. 1 Ceux que. 2 Elles que. 1 Celles que. 2 Jean et Louis que. *41*«— COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Myself, moi-meme. Thyself, toi-meme^ Himself, lui-meme. Herself, elle-meme. Itself, lui, elle,soi-meme. nominatives and objectives. Oneself, Ourselves, Yourself, Yourselves, Themselves, soi-meme. nous-memes. vous-meme. vous-memes. eux-memes. elles-memes. Among compound pronouns may be included : We, (nom.,) among us, (obj.) i Nous autres. You, (nom.,) among you, (obj.) I Vous autres. When objectives, they unite with every preposition. The French use them frequently in familiar discourse ; but only in the 1st and 2d per. plur. We citizens like country air. Among you merchants are there no rogues ? Nous autres citoyens nous aimons l'airde la campagne. Parmi vous autres marchands n'y a-t-il pas de fripons ? § 42.— OB JECTIVE PRONOUNS. $ 43. — The French have two kinds. 1st. Those which are immediately governed by the verb, and called Direct Objectives, or Regimes Directs. They correspond to the objective case of an English verb. § 44. — 2d. Those which are governed by a preposition, and called Indi- rect Objectives, or Regimes Indirects. These correspond to the objec- tive case of an English preposition. The latter are subdivided into two classes. He (any one) who practises virtue is I Celui qui pratique la vertu est heureux. happy. They (all ladies) who study French . have the book of him who is sick. i See note 1, preceding page. 2 See note 2, preceding page. Celles qui etudient le Frangais . . . J'ai le livre de celui qui est malade. 472 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. § 45. — The 1st class includes those which, in a single word, express both the preposition and the pronoun. Ex. : To him, is expressed in French by the single word lui, (Dir. 2); to her, by the same word, lui; to them, by the single word leur ; of it, of them, by (§47; en, &c. § 46. — The 2d class includes those that are attended by a preposition expressed. Ex. : For her, pour elle ; with them, avec eux, avec elles ; with- out me, sans moi ; to me, a moi ; of me, de moi. $47.— OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Objectifs ou Regimes. MONOSYLLABLES. Before the verb, except with the Imperative commanding. Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirects. 1. Me, me, m\ To me, me, m\ 2. Thee, te, t\ To thee, te, t'. 3.m.Him, le, P. To him, /. of, from him, 771. lui, en. /. Her, la, 1'. To her, of, from her (persons), f. lui, en. n. It, le,la,P. To it,there,of it,from it (things) ,n. 3 ■ en. 1. Us, nous. To us, nous. 2. You, vous. To you, vous. 3. m. Them, les. To them, of them, m. leur, en. /. Them, les. To them, from them, /■ leur, en. n. Them, les. To them, of them (things), n. y, en. §47i. Pronouns having, by themselves, a definite signification, ought never to represent a noun taken in an indefinite sense, that is, a noun used without article or without some limiting word. When, then, the question, Parlez-vous Frangais ? is answered by, je le parte, that le relates to a word used without any limiting article ; hence, the answer seems incorrect. It is correct, however ; but the question ought to be, Parlez-vous le Francais ? using the article after parlez-vous, in the same manner as it is used after etudiez-vous, apprenez-vous, lisez-vous, &c. Custom, nevertheless, reiects le after the verb parler. (26 1 .) §48. — AFTER THE VERB. APRES LE VERBE. A l'lmperatif commandant. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirects. To me, To thee, To him, To her, To it, To us, To you, To them, To them, To them, §49. Any objective pronoun followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, Ex. : 1 wish you to come, must be turned to / wish that you would come, requiring, in French, the subjunctive nood : Je desire que vous veniez. In the Imperative commanding. Direct objectives. Regimes directs. 1. Me, moi. Thee, toi. m. Him, le. /• Her, la, n. It, le, la. Us, nous. You, vous. 171. Them, les. /• Them, les. 11 Them, les 1I1U1 . toi. of him, lui, en. of her, lui. en. of it, nous, vous. en. of them, leur, en. of them, leur, en. of them, y, en. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 473 § 50. When the English objective pronoun it or them, alone, or governed by in, with, of, or any other English preposition, is to be translated by a French verb requiring the preposition d, use y. II y repond ; he answers it : il y reussit ; he succeeds in it : il y pense ; he thinks of it. The verbs repondre, reussir, penser, requiring a, the English pronoun it, by itself, or with any English preposition, must be translated by y. (§48.) And by en, if the French verb requires the preposition de. II en est fache ; he is sorry for it: on Yen blame; he is blamed for it; on en doute ; they doubt it. (§ 48.) We have seen (l 1 , &c.) nouns connected with the definite article ; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require a definite pro- noun ; in English it or them; in French, le, la, les. I have it; je l'ai: I have them ; je les ai. (§48.) We have seen (12 1 , 2 , §4, &c.) nouns connected with the indefinite or par- titive article ; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require an indefinite or partitive pronoun ; in English, some, or any of it, of them, in French, en, meaning, of the thing or things, person or persons spoken of. As, in French, the article is never left out, neither is the pronoun en ever omitted. PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. The direct and indirect of a single word, or monosyllable. § 51. — Rule 1st. When the verb has but one regime direct, or indirect, (§47,) or else one double regime, (§57,) that regime goes before the verb, except in one mood, (§§ 54, 64.) When it has several objectives, (§56.) I give. I give you. | Je donne. Je vous donne. I see my friend. I see him. I have given an apple away. I have given an apple to her. He is devoted to her. Je vois mon ami. Je le vois. J'ai donne une pomme. Je lui ai donne une pomme. II lui est devoue\ § 5l£. — The objective noun is always placed after the verb, as in Eng- lish ; but not the pronoun. And the preposition which governs the noun is never understood in French, although it is frequently left out in English. As : Give John an apple ; for, Give an apple to John. Donnezune pomme a Jean. Follow this last construction. (Dir. 4.) § 52. — When the verb to have, or to be, is used as auxiliary, the objec- tive pronoun is always placed before it ; never after : that is, not imme- diately before the past participle. Ex. : translate 7 have seen you, by : Je vous ai vu (1 you have seen), placing vous before ai, and not by fai vous vu, vous being wrongly placed after ai, and immediately before the past part, vu. I have had it ; Je l'ai eu ; not J'ai V eu. II leur parla. II leur a parle, (not il a leur parle\) He spoke to them, (he to them spoke.) He has spoken to them, (he to them has/ § 53. — Hint. He spoke to them (English imperfect tense), may be trans 40* 474 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. lated by il leur parla, the French preterit, (§ 153,) or else by il leuraparU, French parfait, ($ 145,) corresponding to the perfect tense of the English con- jugation. The latter is the tense generally used in colloquial intercourse, by the French. Did he lend it to you ? (you it did he? &c.) He lent it to me, (he to me, &c.) I will not speak to them, (I not to them, &c.) If you want the book, I must not keep it any longer. He was afraid I would not lend it to him, (I not it to him, &c.) He amuses himself. It is impossible for me to go, (it to me v § 54. — 2d. The objective pronouns are placed after the imperative mood, commanding or used affirmatively, except in the 3d person sing, and plur. Vous le preta-t-il ? ou mieux, Vous Z'a-t-il prete ? II me le preta; ou il me l'a prete. Je ne leur parlerai pas. Si vous voulez le livre, il ne faut pas que je le garde plus long-temps. II avait peur que je ne le lux pre- tasse pas. II se divertit. II m'est impossible d'y aller. Ex.: Give me. Let me speak. Give it to me. Let me see. Ex. : Donnez-moi. Donne z-le-moi. Laissez-moi parler. Laissez- moi voir. 'Envoy ons-leur- en un. Habille-foi. Vante-^era. Let us send them one. Dress thyself. Boast of it. But, in the 3d person, place it before : Let him give it to me. Qu'il me le donne. Let them speak to them. I Qu'ils leur parlent. Exception. — When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction and, the objective pronoun connected with the second verb is frequently placed before it, although the mood is affirmative ; as : Cherchez macanne, et me Z'apportez, instead of: et apportez-la-moi. Look for my cane, and bring it to me. Both ways are correct, (§ 150 — 12.) § 55. But when the imperative mood forbids or is used negatively, they are placed before, according to Rule 1st. Do not give me. Do not give it to me. Let us not send them away. Let me not speak. Do not dress thyself. Do not boast of it. Do not take them. Do not (thou) disturb me. Send her but two. Send them nothing. Do not trust to it. Do not boast of it. Do not deceive yourself. Ne me donnez pas. Ne me le don- nez pas. Ne les envoyons pas. Ne me laissez pas parler. Ne t'habille pas. Ne t'en vante pas. Ne les prenez pas. Ne me derange pas. Ne lui en envoyez que deux. Ne leur envoyez rien Ne vous y fiez pas. Ne vous en vantez pas. Ne vous trompez point. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 475 And in the 3d person, also before. Let him not give it to me. : Qu'il ne me le donne pas. Let them not speak to her. I Qu'ils ne lui parlent pas. § 56. — 3d. When the French objective pronoun is attended with a preposi- tion expressed, they both (that is, the preposition and the pronoun) go after the verb, and the preposition must be repeated before every pronoun. Ex. : Come with me. I cannot go without you. He speaks of him, you, and them. We speak of her and her sister. Does he not speak of them too ? Yes, he speaks of him, her, them, you, and of me also. Do you think of me or him ? Do not apply to her nor to him, but to me. (§64—2.) I will apply neither to her, nor to him, but to you. Venez (or viens) avec moi. Je ne peux y aller sans vous. II parle de lui, de vous, et d'eux. Nous par Ions d' elle et de sa soeur. Ne parle-t-il pas d'eux aussi ? Si fait, il parle de lui, d' elle, d'eux, de vous, et de moi aussi. Pensez-vous d moi ou d lui ? Ne vous adressez ni a elle, ni d lui, mais d moi. Je ne m'adresserai ni a elle, ni a lui. mais a vous. DOUBLE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.— Doubles Regimes. Regimes directs et indirects. § 57. — Monosyllables. Avant le Veebe. § 58. — Apk.es L'Imperatif. It to me, me it, them to me. jf Me le, me la, me P, me les. It to thee, thee it, them to f Te le, te la, te P, te les. thee. It to him, them to him. Le lui, la lui, les lui. It to her, them to her. Le lui, la lui, les lui. It to as, them to us. f Nous le, nous la, P, nous les. Ittoyou,youit,themtoyou.fVous le, vous la, P, vous j les. It to them, them to them.) Le leur, la leur, les leur. -le-moi, -la-moi, -les-moi -te-le, -te-la, -te-les. -le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. -le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. -le-nous, -la-nous, -les- nous. -le-leur, -la-leur, -les-leur. BEFORE THE VERB. AVANT LE VBRBE AFTER THE VERB. APRES LE VERBE. Singular. Singulier. Singular. Singulier . Me to it, there, m'y. Me to it, there, y moi. Thee to it, there, t'y Him to it, there, Py. Him to it, there, Py. Her to it, there, Py. Her to it, there, Py. It to it, there, Py. It to it, there, Py. John there, to it, y . . . Jean. John there, to it. y Jean. Plural. Pluriel. Plural. Pluriel. Us to it, there, nous y. nous y. You to it, there, vous y. vous y. Them to it, there, les y. les y. My friends there, y . . . . mesamis. y mes amis. N. B. When the pronouns are both of the 3d person, as : It to him, them to him, it to them, them to them, they have the same order in French, viz : le lui, les lui, le leur, les leur ; but when the pronouns are of different persons, 1st and 3d, or 2d and 3d, reverse the English order, and instead of: it to me, it to you, &lc, say: to me it, to you it, &c., me le, vous le, &c. 476 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. § 59.— PERSONAL AND PARTITIVE.— Personnels et Partitifs. BEFORE AND AFTER AVANT ET APRES THE VERB. LE VERBE Singular. Singulier. Me, some, or any, (§ 62,) \ Some to me, or any to > m'en. me, ) Thee some, some to thee, t'en. Some to him, him some, lui en. Some to her, her some, John some, some to John lui en. en (the verb) a Jean. §60.- Sing. Me some there Some to me, -Avant § 61. — Apres LE VERBE. Sing. my en, Thee some there, t'y en. Him some there, lui y en, Her some there, lui y en, Some to J . there, y en . . . . y-en-moi. y en lui y en lui. a Jean. Pluriel. ) nous-y-en. y-en- nous. Plural. Pluriel. Plural. Some to us, us some. nous-en. Us some tL-ere, some to us, You some, some to you, vous-en. You some there, vous-y-en. Them some, some to them, leur-en. Them some there, leur-y-en, y-en-leur. § 62. — Some, in English, is used for the affirmation, and any for the interrogation and negation ; and consequently en corresponds both to some and any. Ex. : I have some, (of a thing referred to.) Have you any ? He has not given me any. Ex.: Pen ai. En avez-vous? pas donne. II ne m'erc a § 63.— OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS ; With a preposition always placed after the verb, as in English. Singular. To me, from me, of me, near me. To thee, from or of thee, far from thee To him, of him, from him, without him, To her, of, from her, for her. Singulier. A moi,(§64i,)de moi,(§64i,)pres demo;. A toi, de toi, loin de toi. A lui, de lui, sans lui. A elle, d'elle, pour e le. A soi, de soi, envers soi To one's self, of one's self, towards one. To it, of it, from it, with it, are not translated after the verb. Pluriel. de nous, avec nous, avant vous Plural. To us, from or of us, with us. To you, of, from you, before you. To them, from, of them, after them. To them, from, of them, in the midst of them. A eux, a elles, &c, apply to persons, not to things. § 64. — 1. Moi, toi, lui, elle, &c, connected with the two prepositions d and de, are only used after some verbs, such as : A nous, A vous, de vous, A eux, ($642,) d'eux, A elles, (§ 642,)d'elles, apres eux. au milieu d'elles. Presenter a, Penser a, (74 2 ,) Accourir a, (64 3 ,) Se ner a, <62 2 ,) Be souvenir de, (51 2 ,) To introduce to. He thinks of me. She hastened to us. Do you trust them ? He remembers you. Quand me presenterez vous a lui ? II pense a moi. Elle accourut a nous. Vous fiez-vous a eux ? II se souvient de vous. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 477 In other instances, to me, to him, &c. : of me, of them, &c, must be trans Iated as directed ($ 54). Renoncer a . . . . Compter sur. Se souvenir de . . . . Se ressouvenir de . . Penser a . . . . Accourir a . . . . Se fier a . . . . S'en tenir a S'en rapporter a . Se metier de . . . Se defier de . . . . S'adresser a . . . . Se plaindre de . . . 2. When there are two or more objective cases connected with the same verb. — Do you speak to me? Me parlez-vous ? Me is placed before, because there is but one objective case ; but, as in the following answer, there are more than one object, say : I speak to you, to him, and his brother; je parle d vous, d lui, et d son frere. The three objective cases coming after the verb, the preposition d must be used and repeated before each, (§56.) § 65. — But when the preposition is expressed in French, whether it be a, de, sans, avec, &c, both the preposition and pronoun come after the verb, ($ 56.) $ 66.— REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. (43 1 .) Fully to explain this subject, we will give it a new form. The French Reflective Verbs, Verbes Reflechis, may be divided into three classes. § 67. — 1st Class. Those that admit of one direct, but of no indirect objective. Ex. : I dress myself. § 68. — 2d Class. Those which, beside the direct, admit also of an indi- rect objective, governed by the preposition d. Ex. : I apply myself to study. § 69. — 3d Class. Those in which the indirect objective is governed by the preposition de. Ex. : I blame myself for that action. § 70. — Observe that when the indirect objective is a noun, it goes after the verb, as in English ; but, when the indirect objective is the pronoun it or them, that pronoun is incorporated with the French preposition d or de, and both are expressed by a single word, placed as directed (§ 50, § 54, and following.) Hence there are three classes of $ 71.— REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.- 1st Class. No indirect objective. -Pronoms Reflechis. Myself, me, m'. To cure myself, me guerir. To dress mys., m'habiller Thyself, te, t\ To cure thyself, te guerir. To dress thys., t'habiller. Himself, se, s\ To cure himself, se gu«rir, To dress hims. s'habiller. Herself, se, s\ To cure herself, se guerir. To dress hersf. s'habiller. Ourselves, nous. To cure ourselves, nous guerir. To dress ours., nous habil ler. ,vous habil- ler. , s'habiller. Yourselves, vous. To cure yourselves, vous guerir. To dress yours. Themselves se, s\ To cure themselves, se guerir, To dress thems One's self, se, s\ To cure one's self, se guerir, To dress one's s'habiller. 478 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. § 72.— 2d Class. With the preposition a. When the objective pronoun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be trans- lated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition d, translate as follows :— * • Myself to it, m'y. (Thyself) into it, t'y. (Himself) to it, them, s'y. with them, ) s ^' it, to them, to it, to it, j in them. \ nousy vousy. nousy. s'y. I apply myself to it. Thou glidest into it. He opposes it, them. She understands it. She is acquainted with them. We expect it. Go to them. Let us submit to it. They retired to it. > They withdrew in them. > nth > Je m'y applique. Tu t'y glisses. II s'y oppose. Elle s'y connait. Nous nous y attendons. Rendez-vous-y. Soumettons-nous-y. lis s'y retirerent. § 73. — 3d Class. With the preposition de. When the objective pro- noun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be translated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition de, trans- late as follows : — Myself of it, at it, at it, with them, m'en. t'en. > s'e it, them, s'en. upon it, nous en. I assured myself of it. Thou wilt wonder at it. He takes offence at it. He is displeased with J them. She remembers it, them. We can seize upon it. Je m'en assurai. Tu t'en etonneras. II s'en offense. Elle s'en souvient. Nous pouvons nous en saisir. Vous en moquez-vous ? lis ne s'en soucient pas. Elles s'en occupent. at it, vous en. Do you laugh at it ? about it, s'en. They do not care about it. to it, s'en. They attend to it. § 74. — It is evident, from the examples above, that the use of the French pronouns m'y, Vy, &c, m? en, fen, &c, does not depend on the English pre- position used, but on the French one, which is incorporated with the pronoun. When the French verb requires d, you must use, m'y, t'y, &c. When it requires de, use m'en, t'en, &c. But no such incorporation takes place, if the French preposition is avec, pour, sans, &c, instead of de or d. RELATIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Belatifs. § 75. — Nominatives, Who, that, which, whoever. The man who speaks. The lady that smiles. The hat which becomes you. Whoever {who) studies, improves. § 76. — The nominative relative pronoun is never understood in English, Tior in French. Nominatif. Qui. L'homme qui parle. La dame qui sourit. Le chapeau qui vous convient. Qui etudie, fait des progres. % 77. — Objective. Without a pre- position. Whom, that, which, ($81.) Regime. Sans preposition. Que, qu\ GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 479 $ 78.— The objective relative pronoun is frequently left out in English, but never in French. The gentleman (whom) you call. The girl (that) he admires. The history (which) you relate. § 79. — Objective. With a prepo- sition. of which. Of whom, whom, To whom, ■ whom, For whom, From whom, With whom, to which, to which, for which. from which. with which. Sing. Plur. S. P. S. P. s. p. s. p. Le monsieur que vous appelez. La fille qu'il admire. L'histoire que vous racontez. Regime. Avec une preposition. De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles. A qui, auquel, a laquelle. auxquels, auxquelles. Pour qui, pour lequel, pour laquelle. 1 ' pour lesquels, pour lesquelles. De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle. desquels, desquelles. Avec qui, avec lequel, avec laquelle. avec lesquels, avec lesquelles. § 80.— Although the pronoun can be omitted, and the preposition trans- posed, in English, it cannot be in French. The man of whom we speak, or the man whom we speak of, or the man we speak of The woman we speak of. The employer she works for. L'homme de qui nous parlons, ou l'homme dont nous parlons, ou l'homme du quel nous parlons. La femme de qui, ou dont, ou de laquelle nous parlons. Le patron pour qui (ou lequel) elie travaille. § 81. — When the relative whom, or that, or which, is immediately pre- ceded by its antecedent, it is never translated by lequel, laquelle, &c, but by que. In this case, it may be omitted in English, but never in French. The cases (which) you have men- tioned. The ideas he has suggested. The statesmen (whom) he employed. § 82. — But, when which is separated from its antecedent, translate by lequel, laquelle, &c. ; not by que. Les cas que vous avez mentionnes. Les idees qu'il a suggerees. Les hommes d'etat qu'il employa. He told me which he wanted. I know which will suit him. I know whom she prefers. This is a plant found in America, which is worthy of attention. II me dit lequel il voulait. Je sais laquelle lui conviendra. Je sais lequel elle prefere. j C'est une plante trouvee en Ame- rique, laquelle merite attention. § 83.— In this case, which means which one, and cannot be omitted, even In English. § 84.— Except in similar sentences, the French words lequel, laqudle, &c, which, which one, are interrogative, and not relative pronouns, if employed without a preposition. 480 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. § 85. — Qui, nominative, relates to persons and things. -3. qui, de qui, pour qui, &c, (or qui, with any preposition,) relates to persons only. The man (the book) which suits him. I L'homme (le livre) qui lui convient. Without whom are you going ? I Sans qui allez-vous ? § 86. — Dont, duquel, de laquelle The child (the dog) whose name you know. The grammar you spoke to me of. Which, meaning which one, or the Celui qui, (nom.) celui que, (obj.) Celle qui, celle que. I know which one he speaks of. I spoke to her he admires. He sees the one you speak to. &c, relate to persons and things. L' enfant (le chien) dont (duquel) vous savez le nom. La grammaire dont (de laquelle) vous avez parle. one which, is translated by : Ceux qui, (nom.) celles que, (obj.) Celles qui, celles que. Je sais celle dont il parle. Je parlai a celle qu'il admire. II voit celui auquel vous parlez. § 87. — 1. The one in the garden : which is is evidently understood, but it must be expressed in French. Then say, Celui qui est dans le jardin, never Celui dans, &c. I know which is first, (that is, which one, or the one which.) I know which (which one, or the one) you will choose. Speaking of a house : Can you guess which will suit me ? f Je sais celui qui est premier. lies sais celle qui est premiere. Je sais celui que "\ Je sais celle que I Je sais ceux que C , Je sais celles que J vous choisirez. Can you guess which I have taken ? Pouvez-vous deviner celle qui me conviendra ? Pouvez-vous deviner celle que j'ai prise ? 2. The one, or those, followed by a preposition or present participle, generally means, that which is, (sing.,) those which are, (plur.) The one on the table. Here, the one evidently means that which is, and must be translated by: celui qui est. I The one coming, celui qui vient. Those in the vessel, ceux qui sont . . I Those speaking, ceux qui parlent. 3. When a nominative case is immediately followed by a preposition or par- ticiple, as the relative pronoun and verb are then understood in English, they must be supplied in French. (§ 39, N. B.) Le balai qui est sur le plancher. L'homme qui balaie. Le garcon qui a ete pris est innocent. The broom on the floor. The man sweeping. The boy caught is innocent {who has been,) 4. What is, {that which is,) as relative, when followed by a prepositi >n, is translated by, ce qu'il y a, (47 2 , Obs. 108,) or any other tense of the same verb. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 481 I know what is in that trunk. Where is what was in my desk f Je sais ce qu'il y a dans cette malle. Ou est ce qu'il y avail dans mon pupitre ? § 88, — Dont. French relative, indirect object, is followed by a nomina- tive case in French, whether it is so in English or not. The country whose government pleases you. The country whose government you admire. I know her (the one) he speaks of. I do not trust the man whose horse you have borrowed. Le pays dont le gouvernement vous plait Le pays dont vous admirez le gou- vernement. Je connais celle dont il parle. Je ne me fie pas a l'homme dont vous avez emprunte le cheval. And not, dont le cheval vous avez emprunte. The construction would be the same, if, in English, of whom was used instead of whose. As : The man gf whom you have borrowed the horse. §89.-— The compound relative pronoun What, without a preposition. What is called a compound relative pronoun when it means that which, and is translated by, ce qui, when nominative, and ce que, when objec- tive. Ex. ; I know what will suit. 1 Je sais ce qui conviendra. I know what you say. I Je sais ce que vous dites. § 90. — Which has sometimes a clause of a sentence for its antecedent ; in such a case the French consider it as equivalent to the compound relative what, and translate it as above, by ce qui or ce que. Ex. : He went away, which grieved us. I II s'en alia, ce qui nous chagrina. The law is such, which you know. I La loi est telle, ce que vous savez. § 91. — All that, or the single word all, meaning all that which, is often used as a relative pronoun, and translated all that by tout ce qui, (nom.,) and generally all by tout ce que, (obj.) You know all that which is wanted. Vous savez tout cequi est necessaire. I know all that will suit. Je sais tout ce qui conviendra. I know all you say. Je sais tout ce que vous dites. After all, the word which, or that which, may be omitted in English, as shown above, but ce qui or ce que must always be expressed in French. $92. — What, governed by a preposition, when that preposition can be transposed. For what or what fcr. Pour quoi . . . ce pour quoi. Of what or what (is he speaking) ot. ■ De quoi ce dont. (§ 93.) To what or what to. A quoi ce a quoi. From what or what from. De quoi ce dont. {% 93.) In what or what in. Dans quoi . . . ce dans quoi. With what or what with. Avec quoi . . . ce avec quoi. §93.— When the preposition of, governing what, is rendered in French by de, ce dont is more generally used than de quoi. 41 482 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, I know what he speaks of Je sais de quoi, (mieux) ce dont il parle. II sait ce dont j'ai besoin. Dites-moi ce a quoi vous pensez. Sait-il pourquoi je n'y vais pas ? Je vais vous dire ce avec quoi je vais le faire. He knows what I have need of. Tell me what you are thinking of. Does he know why I do not go there ? I will tell you what I am going to do it with. §94. — In the third example, the preposition of, connected with the parti- ciple thinking, is not translated by tne French preposition de, but by a ; because the verb penser requires a and not de, (and, as we have already noticed, l§ 50,) it is the French preposition that must be attended to, and not the English.) Accordingly, ce dont cannot be used, but ce a quoi, as in the example. It will easily be noticed that when what is governed by any other prepo- sition than de, that preposition is placed between ce and quoi. Ex. : This is what he applies to. | C'est ce a quoi il s' applique. We know what he is running after. J Nous savons ce apres quoi il court. §95. — English grammarians say that the preposition ought not to be sepa- rated from the pronoun it governs, and that in, I know what he speaks of, the preposition of ought to be placed before what, instead of being placed at the end of the sentence, and that the correct expression is, I know of what he speaks. Yet general custom disregards that rule, and the preposition usually ends the sentence as exemplified here. In French, however, the preposition cannot be transposed : it must always precede the pronoun, as shown in the above examples. § 96. — What, connected with the preposition of or to, changes its meaning according to the place of the preposition. §97. — Of what, meaning of that which, de ce qui, (nominatif,) de ce que f (reg.) (The English preposition cannot be transposed.) He speaks of what was found. \ II parle de ce qui fut trouve. It would not be correct to say, what was found of. He speaks of what I know. | II parle de ce que je sais. §98. — To what, meaning, to that which, a ce qui, (nom.,) a ce que, (reg.' No transposition in English. You apply to what is useful. | Vous vous appliquez d ce qui est utile. Attend to what I tell you. | Faites attention d ce que}e vous dis. § 99. — What ...of, meaning that of which, ce dont ... ce de quoi. What you speak of is not just. You do not know what I informed him of. § 100. — What . . . to, meaning that to which, ce d quoi, a quoi. Ce dont vous parlez n'est pas juste, (ce de quoi.) Vous ne savez pas ce dont je Tin- form ai. I see what he pretends to. Who knows wJiat he applies himself to. Je vois ce a quoi il pretend, (ou, a quoi.) Qui sait d quoi (ou ce a quoi) il s'ap^ plique. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 483 $101.. — What of it? is an irregular expression, translated by Qu'en resulte-t-il ? What of his opinion ! Qu 1 importe son opinion ! $102 — PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH THE RELATIVES, governed by prepositions. I to whom, I whose. Thou of whom, thou whose. He of whom, he whose. She from whom. He or the one without whom. She or the one without whom. The person of whom, (from whom.) The thing of which. The object for which. Julius after whom. Clara after whom. We to whom. You of whom, or whose. They from whom, (m.) They from whom. (/.) They for whom, (m.) They near whom. (/.) Those in the midst of which, (m.) Those, far from which. (/.) Moi a qui, moi auquel, moi a. laquelle. Toi de qui, toi dont, toi duquel, toi de laquelle. Lui de qui, lui dont, lui duquel. Elle de qui, elle dont, elle de laquelle. Celui sans qui, celui sans lequel. Celle sans qui, celle sans laquelle. La personne de qui, dont, de laquelle. La chose de laquelle. L'objet pour lequel. Jules apres qui, apres lequel. Clara apres qui, apres laquelle. Nous a qui, nous auxquels, auxquelles. Vous de qui, vous dont, desquels, &c. Eux de qui, eux dont, eux desquels. Elles de qui, elles dont, elles desquelles. Ceux pour qui, ceux pour lesquels. Celles pres de qui, pres desquelles. Ceux au milieu de qui, desquels. Celles loin de qui, loin desquelles. Whose thimble is this ? §103.— POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. They are generally divided into two classes : 1st. Those which are always connected with nouns, viz : my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their. As these never take the place of nouns, they will be found under the head of Posses- sive Articles. ($30, 31, 32.) $104. — 2d. Those which, taking the place of nouns, are properly called pronouns. It is mine. A qui est ce de ? C'est le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes. la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. la sienne, les siens, les siennes. la sienne, les siens, les siennes. la sienne, les siens, les siennes. ' la notre, les notres, les notres. la votre, les votres, les votres. la leur, les leurs, les leurs. The priest's, celui du pretre, celle du pretre, ceux du pretre, celles du p. The friend's, celui de 1'ami, celle de l'ami, ceux de l'ami, celles de l'ami, Mr. Petit's, celui de M. P., celle de M. P., ceux de M. P., celles de M. P. To mine, au mien, a la mienne, aux miens, aux miennes. Mine, le mien, Thine, le tien, His, le sien, Hers, le sien, Its, le sien, Ours, le notre, Yours, le votre, Theirs, le leur, 4b* GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Of,frommine,du mien, de la mienrie, des miens, des miennes. With mine, avec le mien, avec la mienne,avec les miens, avecles miennes. Near mine, pres du mien, pres de la m., pres des miens, pres des m. As to mine, quant au mien, quant a la m., aux miens, aux miennes. § 105. The above pronouns are used as objectives and nominatives with every verb, and even after the verb itre, to be, when the personal pronoun ce is nominative before. Give me mine. Yours looks well. Where is his, theirs, ours ? Ours are here, and his also. It is theirs, (ce being nom. before.) It was not mine, but thine. Is it hers, yours, mine, or theirs? Donnez-moi le mien. Le votre a bonne mine. Oii est le sien, le leur, le notre ? Le notre est ici, et le sien aussi. C'est le leur. ($39.) Ce n'etait pas le mien, mais le tien. Est-ce le sien, le votre, le mien, le leur? Sont-ce les votres ou les notres ? Are they yours or ours ? (§ 39.) § 106. — But when etre, to be, has for its nominative either a noun or the pronoun il, elle, Us, elles, the French do not use the above pronouns, but the following : Plural. Ours, a nous. Yours, a vous. Theirs, a eux. (m.) Theirs, a elles. (/.) My brothers'. A mes freres. A qui est ce livre ? Singular. Mine, a moi. Thine, a toi. His, a lui. Hers, a elle. John's, a Jean. Whose, a qui Whose book is this ? It is mine. Whose pen is that? It is thine. Whose gloves are these ? They are hers. Whose boots are those ? They are his. Are they Mr. Lebon's ? No, they are not his. Whose are they? I do not know whose they are. Is this yours ? That is mine. II est a moi. A qui est cette plume-la ? Elle est a toi. A qui sont ces gants? Us sont a elle. A qui sont ces bottes-la ? Elles sont a lui. Sont-elles a M. Lebon ? Elles ne sont pas a lui. A qui sont-elles ? Je ne sais pas a qui elles sont. Ceci est-il a vous ? Est-ce a vous ? Cela est a moi. C'est a moi. $ 107. — The expression a book of mine, a friend of hers, &c, is frequently used in English. The French do not use this phraseology, but say, One of her friends. TJnede ses amies. A pen of ours. Une de nos plumes. A ... of yours. Une de ros I A ... of theirs. Une de leurs Un des amis de Jean, or Une des amies de Jean. $108. — When, instead of a book of mine, the English use, this, that: One of my books. Tin de mes livres. A book of mine. Un de mes livres A book of thine. Un de tes livres. A book of his, hers. Un de ses livres. A friend of John's, is expressed by GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 485 these, or those, saying, this book of mine, those gloves of hers, &c, no regular French can be given of them, except using the possessive article. $ 31.) This book of mine is spoiled. \ ™ on r Iivre est ** . ( Le livre, qui m appartient, est gate. f Ces pilules, de son invention, gueris- Thase pills of his cure the headache. < sent le mal de tete. ( Ses pilules guerissent le mal de tete. § 109. — Whose, possessive pronoun, requires a particular explanation. It is used in English in two different ways. 1st. When it means to whom, translate by d qui. 1. I, whose horse this is, means, I, to whom this horse belongs. Whose book is this ? or, to whom does this book belong ? 2. I, whose horse you have. Here, whose means not I, to whom, but I, of whom you have the horse. Whose opinion do you adopt ? Moi, d qui ce cheval est ou appar- tient. A qui est ce livre ? ou A qui ce livre appartient-il ? Moi, dont vous avez le cheval. Moi, de qui vous avez le cheval. De qui adoptez-vous Topinion ? § 110. — 2d. Whose, governed by a preposition. Du titre de qui, duquel, de la- quelle, &c. Au nom de qui, duquel, desqueb, Of whose title, or the title of whom, to the name of To whose name whom. From whose race, from the race of whom. In whose states. For whose daughter. Through whose hands. Under whose protection. &.C. des- De la race de qui, duquel quelles. Dans les etats de qui, de laquelle, &c Pour la fille de qui, &c. Par la main de qui. Sous la protection duquel, de la quelle, &c. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 111.— Who ? (nom.) Whom ? (obj.) I Qui ? (nom.) Qui ? (regime.) (91*.) Who is good ? Whom do you see ? I Qui est bon ? Qui voyez-vous ? Qui never loses its i, say then, qui y va ? not Qu'y va ? Who goes there? Qui aimez-vous ? Whom do you like ? and not Qu'aimez-vous, which means What do you like ? § 112. — What or Which ? 1st. When connected with a noun ex- pressed, is translated by the interrogative articles or adjectives, (§ 1,) quel, quels, quelle, quelles. What government do you prefer ? What is the authority of the mayor ? What or which articles has he sent? What or which plants do you prefer ? Quel gouvernement preferez-vous ? Quelle est I'autorite du maire ? Quels articles a-t-il envoyes ? Quelles plantes preferez-vous? $113. — 2d. What, interrogative, meaning what thing, when not con 41* GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. nected with a noun, but with a verb, (2i,) is translated by que, qu\ ou quelle chose. ($ 114.) It is then objective to the verb, and placed before it. ($ 115.) Que preferez-vous ? Que fait le maire ? Qu'a-t-il envoye ? What (what thing) do you prefer ? What does the mayor ? What (what things) has he sent ? § 114.— Or else by qu'est-ce que ? (28 1 .) What do you prefer ? i Qu'est-ce que vous preferez ? What does the mayor ? Qu'est-ce que le maire fait ? What has he sent ? ' Qu'est-ce qu'il a envoye ? Then the verb retains the affirmative form, because the interrogation is found in Qu'est-ce que . . . ? § 115. — When placed after the verb, it is translated, not by que, but by quoi, (21 1 ,) and the verb retains, as in English, the affirmative form. What does the mayor ? The mayor does what ? What does he say ? He says what ? What has he sent ? He has sent what? Que fait le maire ? Le maire fait quoi ? Que dit-il ? II dit quoi ? Qu'a.-t-il envoye ? II a envoye quoi? § 116. — 3d. What, when nominative to a verb, is translated by: Qu'est-ce qui? What pleases you ? What is agreeable ? What makes you laugh ? What grieves that child ? Qu'est-ce qui vous plait ? Qu'est-ce qui est agreable ? Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rire ? Qu'est-ce qui chagrine cet enfant? § 117. — 4th. What, unconnected with a noun, and governed by a prepo- sition, is expressed by quoi. (R. 6.) What is he speaking of? That is : Of what is he speaking ? (21 1.) What is she going to draw with ? What does the child cry for ? (for what ?) What is she thinking of? (of what ?j To what does he apply ? He applies to reading, writing, and arithmetic. There is in it something pleasing. I have enough {wherewith) to live upon, It is sufficient (enough) to frighten him. § 118. — 5th. What, in the collocations, (47®, ) what is, what was, what will be, &lc, followed by in, on, or any other preposition, is expressed by : Qu'y a-t-il dans . . . . ? Qu'y avait-il dans . . . . ? Qu'y aura-t-il dans . . . . ? What is on the table ? I Qu'y a-t-il sur la table ? What may be (may there be) for mo ? Quepeut-il y avoir pour moi ? What was under it ? I Qu'y avait-il dessous ? Be quoi parle-t-il ? Avec quoi va-t-elle dessiner ? Pourquoi l'enfant crie-t-il ? A quoi pense-t-elle ? A quoi s'applique-t-il ? U s' applique a la lecture, a l'ecriture et au calcul. II y a unje ne sais quoi qui plait. J'ai de quoi vivre. 11 y a de quoi 1'enrayer. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 487 § 119. — What, expressing admiration ; as : What can be more agreeable ! What can there be more agreeable ! or, What more agreeable ! is trans- lated by que, with the verb; as: Que peut-il y avoir de plus agreable! by quoi de ! without the verb ; as : Quoi de plus agreable ! What can be (there be) sweeter ! (64 1 .) I Que peut-il y avoir de plus doux ! What sweeter ! | Quoi de plus doux ! § 120. — 6th. What, when a compound relative pronoun, is translated by ce qui, (nom.,) ce que, (obj.) 131. — What, interjection, is: Quoi! Comment! What ! he is not here ! | Quoi ! (Comment !) il n'est pas ici ! § 122. — Which, in the same manner as what, when connected with a noun, is used as an adjective, or an article, and translated by quel, quelle, quels, quelles. Which dictionary "^ Which grammar I , _ . Which dictionaries f do 5™ P refer ? Which grammars J Quel dictionnaire -^ Quelle grammaire I ,-. /i 7 j • • > preferez-vous? Quels dictionnaires f r Quelles grammairesj And likewise when it is governed by a preposition. (R. 6.) A quel dictionnaire donnez-vous la preference ? Pour quelle grammaire avez-vous donne un dollar ? Avec quel crayon avez-vous ecrit ? De quelles montagnes venez-vous ? Pres de quelle rue demeurez-vous ? Pour quel candidat voterez-vous ? $ 123. — When which becomes a pronoun, and takes the place of the noun, or, in other words, when which means which one, which of them, it must be translated not by quel, &c, alone, but by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- quelles, the article le, la, les, being used, in French, before the pronoun, to translate the word one, or of them, placed after, in English, or understood. So, in French, the expression is, the which, instead of which one, which of them. To which dictionary do you give the preference ? For which grammar did you give a dollar ? Which pencil did you write with? Which mountains do you come from ? Near which street do you live ? Which candidate will you vote for ? There are several candidates ; which (or which one, or which of them,) do you prefer ? Which of these ladies is your cousin ? Among these young men, which learn French ? (which ones f) Among these young ladies, which learn French? (which ones ?) II y a plusieurs candidats ; lequet (not quel un) preferez-vous ? Laquelle de ces dames est votre cou- sine ? Parmi ces jeunes gens, lesquels ap- prennent le Frangais ? Parmi ces demoiselles, lesquelles ap- prennent le Francois ? $ 124. — N. B. Although one, or of them, may not be expressed aftet which, as is usually the case, translate as above, whenever it is implied. 488 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS* Lequel est pren ier ? (6*.) Which is the first? (that is, which one ?) Which is the last ? Which are the best? (speaking of boys.) Which are the best? (speaking of girls.) ' § 125. — To which, meaning to which one, to which of them, is expressed by auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles. Laquelle est derniere ? Lesquels sont les meilleurs ? Lesquelles sont les meilleures ? De ces trois hotels, auquel irez- vous? Of these three hotels, to which (one) will you go ? (or which will you go to?) Of the four seasons, to which (one) does he give the preference ? (or which .... to ?) Of all those gentlemen, to which (ones) shall we send invitations? To which of them (ladies) will you send presents ? (or which .... to ?) % 126. — Of which one, or ones, of which of them, duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles. Des quatre saisons, d laquelle don- ne-t-il la preference? De tous ces messieurs, auxquels en- verrons-nous des invitations ? Auxquelles enverrez-vous des pre- sents ? Which do you speak of? (which one ?> Which do you speak of? (one lady?) Which do you speak of? (boys.) Which ones do you speak of? (girls.) Duquel parlez-vous ? De laquelle parlez-vous ? Desquels parlez-vous ? Desquelles parlez-vous ? $ 127. — With which of them, is avec lequel, avec laquelle, &c. Which of these young ladies are you I Avec laquelle de ces demoiselles al- going to sing with ? j lez-vous chanter ? And so, of every other preposition. $ 129. — N. B. Forget not that the preposition, in French, must always precede the word it governs, although it may be separated from it in Eng- lish. ($95.) Which are you going to apply to ? I Auquel allez-vous vous adresser ? Which did you come through ? (road.) I Par laquelle etes-vous venu ? (route.) § 130. — When which is a relative, not an interrogative pronoun, it is Bometimes translated by lequel, laquelle, &c, ($82,) when anything inter- venes between the antecedent and pronoun. I can see which (one) you prefer. I Je peux voir lequel vous preTerez. This is the history of W. S., which I • "est l'histoire de W. S., laquelle contains so many fictions. contient tant de fictions. OF THE FRENCH PRONOUN ON. § 131. — The pronoun On (37^) invariably governs the 3d person singular, whatever may be the English by which it is represented (§ 38 ) GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 48& §132. — 1. That pronoun corresponds to any English pronoun taken in an indefinite sense, as one, any one, some one, we, they, people, men, &c, whether singular or plural. (442.) § 133. — 2. It corresponds also to the passive verb, expressing an idea i% an indefinite manner. (44 2 .) Silver is found everywhere, is general in its acceptation, and translated by n trouve V argent partout, for it means one finds, or people find, or men find silver everywhere. But when we say : Silver is found by the Peruvians, there is evidently a restriction, which causes the rejection of on, and the French is, L' argent est trouve par les Peruviens, or still better, Les Peru- viens trouvent 1' argent. A naval asylum is to be established. As it is not said by whom, on becomes the nominative of the active phrase. People will establish, &c, translated by on etablira un hopital de marine. But if the sentence is, A naval asylum is to be established by government, then, government becoming nominative of the active phrase Government will establish, &c, on is rejected, and the translation is: Le gouvurxement etablira un hopital de marine. % 134. — By the above examples, it will be seen that whenever on is used, the sentence must assume the active form. It is said that a comet is seen. Now, instead of translating literally, by il est dit qu'une comite est vue, the French change the construction, and say: On dit qu'on voit un comete. On trouve l'or. On lui a dit de venir. Que dit-on ? People say they see a comet. Gold is found ; turn, one finds gold. He was told to come : One told him . . What is said ? What do people say ? A bridge is to be made over the river. ) r\ j ■•* e ■ * i m & i ' , • j > On doit faire un pont sur la riviere. I hey are to make a bridge .... > § 135. — Von is used instead of on for the sake of euphony, after the words ce que, si, ou, ou, et, que, qui. That I has no particular meaning, and is not to be translated. What you were told is not true. Ceque Von vous a dit, n'est pas vrai. If I am wanted, call me. (70 2 .) Si Von me veut, appelez-moi. It is a place where everybody is seen, j C'est un lieu ou Von voit tout le i monde. We do not like to see those to whom On n'aime pas a voir ceux a qui Von we owe so much. doit tant. Y"ou are seen and heard. On vous voit et Von vous entend. §136. — The student should be exercised to turning the English passive phrase into the active before he translates. ADJECTIVES. §137. — 1. Adjectives have a plural like nouns, (9 1 , 2 ,) and form it in the same manner. The fine horse. The fine horses. I Le beau cheval. Les beaux chevaux. My new; friend. My new friends. I Mon nouvel ami. Mesnouveaux amis. 490 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 2. Much, many, more, less, little, too much, how much, how many, &c, considered as adjectives in English, are adverbs in French, and require a connecting link when they are united to a noun ; that connecting link is the preposition de. (13 1 .) More than, not separated by a noun, is expressed by plus que, except before a number, it is then plus de. More than you, plus que vous ; More than two, plus de deux. (16 2 .) 3. Cardinal numbers are used for dates and the designation of sovereigns : Charles quatre ; Le 31 Mai. 4. Adjectives agree in number with the noun or pronoun they qualify. (18 2 , 22 2 ,) and also in genders. (55 2 .) 5. All adjectives, without exception, end in e mute in the feminine sin- gular, and in es in the feminine plural. Young, sing, jeune, plur. jeunes. Small, petit, petite, petites. 6. Two or more masculine nouns, require the adjective to be masculine plural. The father and son are polite. | Le pere et le fils sont polls. 7. Two or more feminine nouns require the adjective to be feminine plural. The mother and daughter are polite. | La mere et la fille sont polies. 8. Two or more nouns of different genders, require the adjective to be masculine plural. The preceding lessons and exercises. I Lesle§onsetlesexercices;>recedett fine. > handsome. Meilleur, better. Belle,/. Meme, same. Bon, bonne, good. Moindre, less. Grand, great, tall. Petit, little, small Gros, grosse, big^ulky. Plusieurs, several. Jeune young. Saint, holy. Joli, pretty. Tout, all. Mauvais, bad. Vieux, vieil, m '|okU Mechant, wicked. Vieille,/. A pretty little dog. Un jo.'i petit chien, 2. But if any of these adjectives is connect with another that cannot be placed before the noun, both go after, joined by a conjunction. A handsome, amiable woman. 2 Une femme aimable et belle. A good, complaisant husband. A young, rich, and virtuous woman. Un mari bon et complaisant. Une demoiselle, j eune, riche, et ver- tueuse. 3. Adjectives of nations, color, and shape, follow the noun. (26 2 , Obs. 61.) NOUNS. § 140. — 1. Nouns in French not being, as in English, used as an adjective to another noun, as, a cloth coat, a preposition is used to show the relation between the two nouns, the second of which in English becomes the first in French. Be is used between the name of the thing and that of the substance of which it is made: Tin habit de drap ; un chandelier a" argent. If several nouns are used as adjectives, the French construction is the same; the last in English becomes first in French. Silver, gold, and steel jewels ; des bijoux d 1 argent, d' or, et deader. 2. De shows also the possession marked in English by 's. John's book. The French construction remains the same : Le livre de Jean. The boy has a stick : is it the gene- i Le garcon a un baton : est-ce celui du raVs, the lawyer's, or the doctor's ? | general, de Vavocat, ou du docteur ? i The adjective cher, dear, also stands before the noun, except when it denotes the price of a thing. Ex. Mon cher ami, my dear friend ; ma chere sozur, ray dear sis- ter ; but un fusil cher, a dear gun; une table chere, a dear table. 2 In the following examples, the peculiarity with respect to the place of the adjec- tive should be observed : Un grand homme means a great man, and un homme grand, a tall man ; une grosse femme, a fat woman, and une femme grosse, a woman with child; une sage-femme, a midwife, and une femme sage, a wise or modest woman un galant homme, a man of honor, and un homme galant, a courtier. 42 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. The child's and the laker's dog. The grocer's butter, biscuits, and cof- fee. The grocer's butter, his biscuits and coffee. Le chien du garcon et du boulanger. Lt beurre, les biscuits, et le cafe de V epicier. Le beurre de 1' epicier, ses biscuits, et son cafe, (§ 32, N., at page 467.) To translate a double possessive case, take the last noun in English for the first in French, and then retrograde regularly. My brother's friend's book. The grocer's clerk's father's horse. Le livre de Vami de mon frere. Le cheval du pere du commis de 1' epicier. 3. De is also used in French to translate of, placed in a like situation in English. A barrel of flour. i Un baril de farine. A bag of rice. I Un sac de riz. 4. A is used when the last French noun expresses the use of the first. A coffee-mill. Un mouiin a cafe. (77 1 .) Gunpowder. A flour-barrel. De la poudre a canon. Un baril a farine. A la, a V , au, aux, are used, when the first French noun contains a por- tion of the second. Le baril a la farine. (77 2 .) La bouteille au vinaigre. Le sac aux pommes. The barrel with flour in (but not full.) The bottle with vinegar in. The bag with apples. 5. Proper names, used as such, have no plural. Your friends, the Clintons, are here. | Vos amis, les Clinton, sont ici. But if used as common nouns, they take an s. Washingtons are rare. | Les Washingtons sont rares. 6. In an enumeration, nouns are frequently used without articles. You have what you want to eat with, | Vous avez ce qu'il vous faut pour a knife, fork, plate, napkin, &c. manger, couteau, fourchette, &c. You may likewise say, un couteau, une fourchette, une assiette, &c, repeating the article before every noun, if placed before the first; but it is better not to use it. Men, women, children, were out. | Hommes, femmes, enfants, etaient I dehors. 7. Compound nouns are formed by connecting: A noun with a noun : as, un chou-fleur, a cauliflower ; des choux-fleurs. A noun with an adjective : as, une basse-taille, a bass-voice ; des basses- tailles. In such nouns, both the substantive and adjective become plural. A noun with a verb : as, un port e- crayon, a pencil-case ; des port e- crayons. In such nouns, the substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits of plurality. The case may have one or two -pencils in. A noun with a noun by a preposition : as, un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece ; des chefs-d'oeuvre. Here, the first substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits of plurality. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. A compound noun, formed from a verb, preposition, or adverb, is invariable, because its component parts are themselves invariable. Tin passe-partout, a dead-latch key ; des passe-partout. 8. The feminine of substantives ending in er is regularly formed, by add- ing an e to the masculine, and changing the e mute into e grave. As : A milkman. A baker. A merchant. A milkwoman. A bakerwoman. A female merchant. Un laitier. Un boulanger. Un marchand. Une laitiere. Une boulangere. Une marchande. As there are many nouns and adjectives, (§200,) which, although incor- porated in the Vocabularies, are not used in the Exercises, contrary to our fundamental principle, viz: to make an immediate and continued use of expressions introduced, I place in the Synopsis an English alphabetical list of them, which may be consulted when necessary. The following substantives have a distinct form for individuals of the female sex : — Masculine. un abbe, un accusateur, un acteur, un ambassadeur, un apprenti, un baron, un berger, un biCnfaiteur, un chanoine, un chanteur, un chasseur, un chasseur, un comte, un danseur, un dieu, un due, un electeur, un empereur, un fondateur, un jouvenceau, un lion, un p alien, un paon, un paysan, un prieur, un prince, un protecteur, un roi, An abbot, An accuser, An actor, An ambassador, An apprentice, A baron, A shepherd, A benefactor, A canon, A singer, A hunter, -, (in poetry,) A count, A dancer, A god, A duke, An elector, An emperor, A founder, A lad, A lion, A heathen, A peacock, A peasant, A prior, A prince, A protector, A king, 9. When a noun is the object of two or more verbs, those verbs mual govern that noun, without preposition, or with the same preposition. Feminine. une abbesse. une accusatrice. une actrice. une ambassadrice. une apprentie. une baronne. une bergere. une bienfaitrice. une chanoinesse. une chanteuse. une chasseuse. une chasseresse. une comtesse. une danseuse. une deesse. une duchesse. une electrice. une imperatrice. une fondatrice. une jouvencelle. une lionne. une paienne. une paonne. une paysanne. une prieure. une princesse. une protectrice. une reine. 496 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. He buys and sells cloth, {no prep.) We promise and give to the people, {&.) II achete et vend du drap. Nous promettons et donnons aux gens. She speaks and boasts of her beauty. | Elle parle et se vante de sa beaute. But in French the sense cannot be suspended after a preposition as in English ; for instance, you must not say, Rien n'est plus agreable que de converser avec et que de jouir de la societe de nos amis, Nothing is more agreeable than to converse with and to enjoy the company of our friends. The sense cannot be suspended after the French preposition avec, as it can be after the English preposition with. Hence we have this rule : When the two verbs require different prepositions, do not suspend the sense, but make the noun the regime (§ 44) of the first preposition (or regime indirect of the first verb), and place an objective pronoun (§ 48) with the second verb. The above sentence is translated thus : Rien n'est plus agreable que de converser avec nos amis et que de jouir de leur societe. 10. The nouns of multitude, in French, noms collectifs, are divided by them into two classes. 1st Class. Collectif general, when it represents the entire collection. La foule des hommes est vouee au malheur, the bulk of mankind is doomed to misfortune. The following verb is in the singular, and agrees with the collective. 2d Class. Collectif partitif when it repre- sents only a part of the collection. Tine foule de pauvres recoivent nos secours, a crowd of poor receive our assistance. A crowd of poor, contains but a portion of all the poor. The verb is in the plural, and agrees with the noun that follows the collective. 1st cl. The army of the Americans. The multitude of the stars. 2d cl. A troop of robbers. A multitude of stars. L'armee des Americains est . La multitude des etoiles est . . Une troupe de voleurs sont . . Une multitude d'etoiles sont . 11. Of the farmer's hay, cabbages, I Du foin du fermier, de ses choux, de butter, and cheese. I son beurre, et de son fromage. This is an elliptical expression for the hay of the farmer, the cabbage of the farmer, the butter of the farmer, &c. ; but instead of using the noun in the possessive case a second time, the French use a possessive pronoun. (§ 32, N. page 367.) 12. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS, TAKEN FROM THE LATIN AND GREEK. 1. Proper names of men ending in English in a are the same in both lan- guages ; but those of women and goddesses having that ending become French by changing the final a into e mute. Caligula. Dolabella. I Caligula. Dolabella. Cleopatra. Diana. Julia. | Cleopatre. Diane. Julie. 2. Most proper names ending in English in as or es become French by changing these finals into e mute. Eneas. Pythagoras. f iSnee. Pythagore. Ulysses. Socrates. [ Ulysse. Socrate. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 497 3. Proper names ending in o change it in French into on. Cicero. Dido. | Ciceron. Didon. 4. Most proper names ending in us are the same in both languages when they have but two syllables ; but when they are composed of three or more syllables, they become French by changing it into e mute. Cyrus. Venus. I Cyrus. Venus. Camillus. Orpheus. I Camille^ Orphee. 5. Most of those ending in al or is are the same in both languages. Juvenal. Sesostris. ] Juvenal. Sesostris. 6. Those ending in English in ander change it in French into andre. Alexander. Lysander. | Alexandre. Lysandre. Remark. — The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, and towns, ending in English in a, become French by changing the ending a into e mute, and those of towns ending in burg, change it into bourg. 1 Arabia. Asia. I 1/ Arabic L'Asie. Friburg. Hamburg. I Fribourg. Hambourg. $ 141.— CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. Nombres Cardinal Cardinaux. Numbers. Un. m. une j /*.-.. — .--.-. .- .-.-.- 1. Deux (2) ^ .- 2. Trois 3. Quatre ~~ — . — — 4. Cinq . .^ ~ ~ 5. Six -. ~ ~ 6. Sept -. 7. Huit ~ .- - . . - 8. Neuf 9. Dix 10. Onze 11. Douze — 12. Treize 13. Quatorze 14. Quinze 15 . Nombres Ordinal Ordinaux. Numbers. Premier, m. premiere, f. L . — . . .. 1st. Deuxieme, second, seconder.-.-. 2d. Troisieme « . 3d. Quatrieme ~«-. 4th. Cinquieme.., - . .- 5th. Sixieme - . . ► 6th. Septieme -. ... .-, -. ., 7th. Huitieme _...-. 8th. Neuvieme ~. 9th. Dixieme .. ~. - - 10th. Onzieme — 11th. Douzieme .. 12th. Treizieme . , 13th . Quatorzieme ... — 14 th . Quinzieme 15th i Such proper names as deviate from this rule are either separately noted, or are the same in both languages. 2 From 2 to 10 there is an irregularity in the pronunciation of the numbers, whick it is well to notice. At the end of a sentence. Before a consonant. Before a vowel. Deux is pronounced deu, x silent. deu. deu-z amis. Trois " troi, 5 silent. troi. troi-z amis. Cinq u cinq, q sounded. cin. cin-q amis. Six << sis, x like s. si. si-z arms. Sept ( sept, t sounded. se. se-t amis. Huit u huit, t sounded. hui. hui-t amis. Neuf (( neuf,/ sounded. neu. neu-v amis. Dix <; dis, x like s. di. di-z amis. And in th e same manner wherever they occur. 42 * GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Nombrat Cardinal Cardinaux. Numbers. Seize ~ — 16. Dix-sept 17. Dix-huit -. -. • 18. Dix-neuf 19. Vingt(i) 20. Vingt etun 21. Vingt-deux 22. Vingt-trois 23. Vingt-quatre 24. Vingt-cinq • 25. Vingt-six - • 26. Vingt-sept ..!...;.... 27. Vingt-huit .- 28. Vingt-neuf - 29. Trente . ~ 30. Trente et un . . . . -••-'. 31. Trente-deux - . 32. Trente-trois -.....-.. 33. Quarante 40. Quarante et un. . ... — • 41. Quarante-deux. ..-..« 42. Quarante-trois 43. Cinquante 50. Cinquante et un 51. Cinquante-deux -.-. ~ 52. Soixante -. 60. Soixante et un 61. Soixante-deux - 62. Soixante et dix 70. Soixante-onze - -....-. 71. Soixante-douze 72. Soixante-treize - . . . 73. Soixante-quatorze . . 74 . Soixante-quinze „ 75. Soixante-seize ....... 76. Soixante-dix-sept 77. Soixante-dix-huit 78. Soixante-dix-neuf 79. Quatre-vingts( 2 ) - 80. Quatre-vingt-un 81. Quatre-vingt-deux -...-. 82. Quatre-vingt-dix 90. Quatre-vingt-onze 91. Quatre-vingt-douze 92. Quatre-vingt-treize 93. Quatre-vingt-quatorze 94. Quatre-vingt-quinze 95. Quatre-vingt-seize 96. Quatre-vingt-dix-sept 97. Quatre-vingt-dix-huit 98. Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf 99. Nombrea Ordinal Ordinaux. Numbers. Seizieme 16th. Dix-septieme - 17th. Dix-huitieme 18th. Dix-neuvieme ++.-. .- 19th. Vingtieme 20th. Vingt et unieme 21st. Vingt-deuxieme - . . 22d. Vingt-troisieme 23d. Vingt-quatrieme 24th. Vingt -cinquie me h. .- .^ 25th. Vmgt-sixieme .- .^ 26th. Vingt-septieme 27th. Vingt-huitieme — - 28th. Vingt-neuvieme — .-. — — 29th. Trentieme -. • 30th. Trente et unieme 31st. Trente-deuxieme -. -. .-. 32d. Trente-troisieme 33d. Quarantieme 40th. Quarante et unieme — 41st. Quarante-deuxieme 42d. Quarante-troisieme 43d. Cinquantieme . . .-^.- .- 50th Cinquante et unieme - 51st Cinquante-deuxieme - 52d. Soixantieme 60th Soixante et unieme 61st. Soixante-deuxieme 62d. Soixante et dixieme 70th . Soixante-onzieme 71st. Soixante-douzieme . . -. 72d. Soixante-treizieme 73d. Soixante-quatorzieme 74th. Soixante-quinzieme — 75th. Soixante-seizieme 76th. Soixante-dix-septieme 77th. Soixante-dix-huitieme 78th. Soixante-dix-neuvieme 79th. Quatre-vingtieme 80th. Quatre-vingt-unieme 81st. Quatre-vingt-deuxieme 82d. Quatre-vingt-dixieme 90th. Quatre-vingt-onzieme 91st. Quatre-vingt-douzieme 92d. Quatre-vingt-treizieme 93d. Quatro-vingt-quatorzieme 94th. Quatre-vingt-quinzieme 95th. Quatre-vingt-seizieme ^ ... .. 96th. Quatre-vingt-dix-septieme 97th. Quatre-vingt-dix-huitieme 98th. Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme 99th. i In vingt the t is silent, but sounded in vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c. 2 In uatre-vingts the t is never sounded. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 499 Nombres Ordinal Ordinaux. Numbers. Centieme 100th. Cent-unieme 101st. Cent-deuxieme 102d. Cent-troisieme 103d. Cent-dixieme 110th. Cent-onzieme 111th. Cent-vingtieme 120th. Cent vingt et unieme 121st. Deux centieme 200th . Deux cent-unieme 201st. Millieme 1000th. Mille-unieme 1001st. Mille-deuxieme, &c 1002d. Mille-centieme, (onze-centieme 1100th. Mille-neuf-centieme, (dix-neuf- centieme ... .. 1900th. After which the French do not count any more by hundreds, as the English do. They do not say : Vingt, vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c, cents ; twenty, twenty-one, twenty-two, &c, hundred, but : Deux mille - 2000. i Deux millieme 2000th. Deux mille cinq cents 2500. Deux mille cinq-centieme 2500th. Un million .. .- ~ 1,000,000. | Millionieme millionth. In dates, Mille is spelt Mil. Mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776. Mil huit cent quarante-neuf, ou Dix-huit cent quarante-neuf, 1849. Nombrei Cardinal Oardinaux. Numbers. Cent - ~ ~ . . 100. Cent un (not cent et un) — 101. Cent deux 102. Cent trois ^.. 103. Cent dix - -.*. . 110. Cent onze 111. Cent vingt . « - 120. Cent vingt et un ...-..- 121. Deux cents 200. Deux cent un 201. Mille (not dix cents) .. 1000. Mille un 1001. Miile deux, &c 1002. Mille cent (onze cents) 1100. Mille neuf cents (dix-neuf cents) 1900. The whole. A part. The half. The third, h The two-thirds, |. The three-thirds. The fourth part, the £. The |. The fifth part, the 1-5. The 4-5. The sixth part, the 1-6, and so forth, ' by adding iime to the cardinal. What is the half of 4 ? It is 2. What is that of 5 ? It is 2 and a half. What is the f of 8 ? It is 5 and Which is the fourth of 11? It is 2*. The * are 8i. $142. — The seasons of the year are : The spring. The summer. The autumn, or fall. The winter. §143. — Names of the months of the year. The first month is January. Is not the second month February? The third is March. Le tout, 1' unite. Une partie. La moitie, la demie. Le tiers, i. Les deux-tiers, f. Les trois-tiers. Le quart, le £. Les trois quarts, f. Le cinquieme, le 1-5. Les 4 cin- quiemes. Le sixieme, le 1-6, et ainsi de suite, en ajoutant ieme au cardinal. Quelle est la moitie de 4? C'est 2. Quelle est celle de 5? C'est 2 et demi. Quels sont les f de 8 ? C'est 5 et un tiers, 5i. Quel est le quart de 11 ? C'est 2 et £. Les $ sont 8£. Les saisons de l'annee, sont : Le printemps, (382.) L'ete, (36*.) L'automne. L'hiver. Noms des mois de l'annee. Le premier mois est Janvier. Le second n'est-il pas Fevrier? Le troisieme est Mars. 500 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. April. May. June. Jub August. September. October. November. December. Next January. Last January. The coming February. Last March. In April. On the first of May. On the 4th of July, 1776. New Year's day. On New Year. I wish you a happy New Year. Christmas day. On Christmas. Is not June the 6th month ? Yes, it is ; arid September is the 9th. How many days are there in July ? There are 31. How many are there in August ? Are there as many in October ? There are just as many. Has September as many ? No, it has but 30, the same as April, June, and November. The shortest month is February, which, in common years, has but 28 days, and 29 in leap (bissextile) years. Avril. Mai. Jain. Juillet. Aout. Septembre. Octobre. Novembre. Decembre. Janvier prochain. Janvier dernier. Fevrier qui vient. Mars dernier. En Avril. Le premier de Mai. Le quatre de Juillet, 1776. Lejourdel'an. Le premier de l'an. Je vous souhaite une bonne annee. Le jour de Noel. Juin n'est-il pas le 6me mois ? [9me. Si fait, ce Test ; et Septembre est le Combien de jours y a-t-il dans Juillet ? II y en a 31. Combien y en a-t-il en Aoul t Y en a-t-il autant en Octobre ? II y en a tout autant. Septembre en a-t-il autant ? Non, il n'en a que 30, de meme que Avril, Juin, et Novembre. Le mois le plus court est Fevrier, qui, dans les annees communes, n'a que 28 jours, et 29 dans les annees bissextiles. VERBS. $ 144.— INDICATIVE PRESENT.— lndicatif Present. To find the present tense of a verb, its present participle must be known, as it serves to form the three persons plural. It always ends in ant : and, as all grammars and dictionaries give it, it is easily learned. 1 The first, second, and third persons plural, of the present tense, are formed by changing the termination ant, of the present participle, into ons, for the first person ; into ez, for the second, and into ent, for the third. 2 Ex. : — 1 The formation of the indicative present from the infinitive, although it would be preferable, presents too many exceptions, and is consequently too difficult for beginners. 2 The second person singular always ends in 5.* In the first conjugation, the third person singular ends in e, and is the same as the first person ; in the second and third conjugations, it ends in t ; first and second have s. In the fourth conjugation, it adds nothing to the root.f * Except in the imperative of the first conjugation, and of some verbs of the ser ri'l. where the s is dropped. Ex. : Parle, speak, (thou.) When the imperative, however, is followed by one of the pronouns, en, y, the letter 5 is not dropped; as: ilanihs-en a ton frere, give some to thy brother; portes-y tes livres, take thy books thitber. f By root we understand that part of the verb which precedes the terminations «r, ir, otr, r«, of the infinitive : for example, in the verb finir, to finish, fin is the root GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 501 FIRST CONJUGATION. Infinitive. Present 'participle. To speak. Speaking. Present tense. We speak, you speak, thej speak. I speak, thou speakest, he speaks. SECOND CONJUGATION. To finish. Finishing. We finish, you finish, they finish. I finish, thou finishest, he finishes. THIRD CONJUGATION. To receive. Receiving. We receive, you receive, they receive. I receive, thou receivest, he receives. FOURTH CONJUGATION. To sell. Selling. We sell, you sell, they sell. I sell, thou sellest, he sells. PREMIERE CONJUGAISON. Infinitif. Participe present. Parler. Parlant. Present. Nous parlons, vous parlez, ils parlent, Je parle, tu paries, il parle. SECONDE CONJUGAISON. Finir. Finissant. Nous finissons, vous finissez, ils fi- le finis, tu finis, il finit. [nissent. TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. Pecevoir. Pecevant. Nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re- Je recois, tu recois, il regoit. fcoivent. QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. Vendre. Vendant. Nous vendons, vous vendez, ils ven- Je vends, tu vends, il vend. [ dent. Hint. — From the third person plural, the scholar can easily learn the singular. For the first conjugation, change the pronouns, but pronounce the verb just like the third person plural: Ils parle?it, je parle, tu parle, il parle. For the second, third, and fourth conjugations, drop the last mute sylla- ble of the third person plural ; then the remainder will be the sound of the singular. lis finissent, jejini, tu fini, il fini. lis recoivent, je recoi, tu regoi, il regoi. Ils vendent, jeven, tu ven, il ven. The scholar has only the sounds here ; the correct spelling is to be learned by the written directions in {% 144, N. 2), and by translating the exercises. This answers for the regular conjugations, and many of the irre- gular ones. Exceptions to the general rule at (§ 144.) Etre,* ttant. Nous sommes, vous etes, ils sont. Avoir,* ayant. Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. S a voir,* sachant. Nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. To be, being. We are, you are, they are. To have, having. We have, you have, they have. To know, knowing. We know, you know, they know. To do, make, doing. You do, they do. To say, tell, saying, telling. You say, tell. 1 The third person plural of the third conjugation offers, as may be seen, an excep tion ; as the present participle is changed to recoivent. Faire,* faisant. Ire rtg. vous faites, ils font. Dire,* disant. Ire rtg. vous dites. %me rsg 602 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. In (§ 144, N. 1,) it was observed, that the third person plural of the 3d conjugation was irregularly formed ; so it is with the following conjugations : 1st. Aller, 2d. Venir, Tenir, Acquerir, Mourir, 3d. JRecevoir, 1 Devoir, Mouvoir, Pouvoir, Vouloir, 4th. Boire, Prendre, to go ; allant : Us vont, they go. to come ; venant : Us viennent, they come, to keep, hold; tenant : Us tiennent, they hold, to acquire ; acquerant : Us acquierent, they acquire. to die (lose life) ; mourant , to receive ; recevant : to owe ; to move ; to be able ; to be willing ; to drink ; to take ; Us meurent, lot, regoivent, Us doivtnt, Us meuvent, Us peuvent, Us veulent, Us boivent, Us prennent, they die. they receive, they owe. + hey move, they can. they will, they drink, they take. devant : mouvant : pouvant : voulant : buvant : prenant : 1. In recevoir, or any other verb in which the c is soft in the infinitive, the c must remain so throughout, hence, it takes a cedilla (§), when followed by a, o, u. Ex. Je regois, I receive ; regu, received ; forcer, to force ; forgant, forcing, &c. (24 1 .) 2. In verbs ending in ger, the letter e, for the softening of the sound, is retained in all those persons where g is followed by a or o. (24 2 .) 3. In verbs ending in ayer, oyer, uyer, the letter y is changed into i, in all persons where it is followed by e mute. (24*.) 4. In verbs having e(mute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, the letter e has the grave accent (e) in all persons, where the consonant immediately after it, is followed by e mute, as in mener, to guide, to take ; promener, to walk ; acliever, to finish, &c. As : I buy, thou buyest, he buys. I lead, thou leadest, he leads. Do you take him to the play ? I do take him thither. J'achete, tu achetes, il achete. Je mene, tu menes, il mene. Le menez-vous au spectacle ? Je l'y mene. (25 1 .) N. B. Except with the terminations eler, eter, in which the consonant is doubled. (333.) 5. In verbs having e (acute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, that e becomes i (grave) when followed by a mute syllable. As, seeker, to dry ; je seche, I dry ; lis sechent, they dry. Ceder, to yield ; il Me, he yields, &c. (28 2 .) 6. The English present tense, expressed (24 1 ) in three ways, Hove, I do love, I am loving, is translated by only one French expression : faime. Hence, Je lis, corresponds to, I read, I do read, I am reading. The French have, however, another way much used by them, although unnoticed in grammars. The true, the real present in English is 1 am readi?ig ; the corresponding French is je suis d lire. It consists of two parts. The 1st, as in English, is the verb to be v (etre,) in all its persons ; the 2d is, not the pre- 1 And all in evoir, as apercevoir, to perceive; concevoir, to conceive, &c. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 503 §ent participle, (reading,) but the preposition a, followed, of course, by the infinitive, (lire;) for recollect — Rule 1st. Every preposition, except en, governs the infinitive. Then je suis d lire corresponds exactly to / am reading, although, if translated literally, it would mean, I am to read, which signifies a very different thing. But never mind the literal sense, take only the common acceptation attached to the expression, (76 *,) viz : — I am reading. I read. I Je suis a lire. Je lis. We are reading. We read. | Nous sommes a lire. N. lisons. The component parts of this expression are quite familiar to the student, and but little practice will enable him to use them with ease. This mode of forming the present applies to every other tense. Etiez-vous a lire ? J'etais a lire. Etait-il a ecrire ? II etait a ecrire. Quand ils seront a manger. Appelez-nous quand meme nous serions a prendre le the. Ne seront-ils pas a jouer ? Si fait, ils seront a jouer. Elle est a voyager, n'est-ce pas ? Est-ce qu'ils sont a voyager ? (64 2 , N. 2.) Tu es a ecouter, n'est-ce pas ? Were you reading ? I was. Was he writing ? He was. When they will be eating. Call us, even if we were taking tea, (even should we be, &c.) Will they not be playing ? Yes, they will. She is travelling, is she not ? They are not travelling, are they ? Thou art listening, art thou not ? PARFAIT 1 ou PRESENT COMPOS^. Study carefully the article, and the example at (33 1 , §53.) §145. — The English Perfect invariably conveys an allusion to the present ; the Parfait not only conveys an allusion to the present, but also refers to actions past at a time wholly expired, or to actions expressed by the English imperfect. Hence, it corresponds to the English perfect and imperfect tenses. The French use it to express the daily occurrences of life. 1. How long is it since you tasted coffee? It is three mo7iths sincel tasted any. Since I wrote to him, France has become a republic. (§ 49 2 .) In these sentences, and all similarly formed, although no negative is used, one is evidently implied, or, at least, a negative turn may be given to them, for the first means, You have not tasted coffee for how long a time ? The second means, I have not tasted any these three months. And the third, 1 have not written to him for some time, during which France has become a republic It is evident that the same negative turn cannot be given to, How long is it since your cousin set out ? since you dined ? you cannot say, has not set \fut, you did not dine. Consequently, as no negative is implied, say, without the ne, Combien y a-t-il que votre cousin est parti ? que vous avez dine ? In translating the sentences in which a negative is implied, but not ex- * Frequently called PrHtrit Indifini. But as the word is foreign to the English conjugation, it has no definite sense for the American pupil, while the word Parfait, corresponding to his own Perfect, offers at once a clear idea. 504 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. pressed, the French use ne, but suppress pas (that is, they suppress only a part of the negative, instead of suppressing it altogether as the English do. Hence, the first is translated by Combien y a-t-il que vous N'avez goute de cafe ? The second, by II y a trois mois queje N'en ai goute. The third, by Depuis que je ne lux ai ecrit, la France est devenue republique. This con- struction takes place only after il y a and depuis que, followed by a definite period of time, and when the French verb is in the parfait, (English perfect tense.) In the present tense, pas is used : as, II y a trois mois que je ne goute pas de cafe, It is three months since I taste no coffee, or, I have tasted no coffee these three months. Depuis que je ne lui ecris pas, la France est, &c. Since I do not write to him, France has, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 114.) 2. The English perfect, formed from the present of the auxiliary and the past participle, as, I have spoken; We have written letters; He has exa- mined your cloth ; is the only one usually given in grammars; but there is another, formed by the verbs to have and to be, prefixed to the present par- ticiple ; as, I have been speaking ; we have been writing letters ; he has been examining your cloth ; which, although not commonly found in grammars, and not quite synonymous with the other perfect, is, nevertheless, constantly used in conversation. Some grammarians have introduced it, and call it the compound form of the perfect. As the French have no tense similarly constructed, they use the parfait, and say: Taiparle; nous avons ecrit des lettres ; il a examine votre drap. 3. The English say, I come from my store, to express that the action of coming- has just taken place. But, when any other verb is used, such as, to speak, to write, &c, instead of saying, I come from speaking, from writing, &c, they change it to, 1 have just spoken, written, &c. The French say : Je viens de mon magasin, to signify that the action of coming has just been performed, and they apply the same mode of expression for any other action. Hence, they say: Je viens deparler, oV ecrire, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 115.) It is hoped that this brief explanation will remove a difficulty, which, in this case, the great difference of construction presents to many pupils. FIRST FUTURE.— Futur. § 146. — 1. The Future Tense, in all French verbs, ends as follows : rax, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Therefore, as soon as we know one person, we also know the others. (46 1 .) 2. The first person singular is formed from the infinitive by changing the final r of the first and second conjugations ; the oir, of the third, and the re of the fourth, into rai. Ex. : — Infinitive. To love, To finish, To receive, To restore, Future. I shall or will love. I shall or will finish. I shall or will receive. I shall or will restore. Infinitif 1st Conj. Aimer, 2d " Finir, 3d " Recevoir, 4th " Rendre, Futur. j'aimerai. je finirai. je recevrai. je rendrai. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 505 Tu aimeras. II aimero. Nous aime rons, Vous aimer ez. lis aime rout. Tu recevnzs. II reeevra. Nous recewrons. Vous recevrez. JFVlttrs. Tu finiras. II finir«. Nous Qnirons. Vous finirez. lis finiraraJ. Tu rendras. II rendra, Nous rendrons. Vous rendrez. lis iecevro7it. (46 1 .) lis rendraTtf. Tfaou shalt or wilt love, thou shalt or wilt finish. He shall or will love, he shall or will finish. We shall or will love, we shall or will finish. You shall or will love, you shall or will finish. They shall or will love, they shall or will finish. Thou shalt or wilt receive, thou shalt or wilt restore. He shall or will receive, he shall or will restore. We shall or will receive, we shall or will restore. You shall or will receive, you shall or will restore. They shall or will receive, they shall or will restore. The future tense is sometimes connected with if; sometimes with when. 3. In English, you may say: I will go, if he lends me his horse; or, If he will lend me his horse. In the first: if he lends me, &c, lends is in the present. In the second : If he will lend me, &c, will lend, appears to be in the first future tense, although it is actually in the present ; for, will lend, in that case, does not mean shall lend, but is willing to lend, or agrees to lend. Scholars are very apt, in similar sentences, to take the word will as a sign of the future, and to use that tense in French, while they should use the present. I will go if he lends me his horse, is readily and correctly translated by: J'irai s'il me prete son cheval. But, I will go if he will lend me his horse, is as readily but incorrectly translated by: Tirai s'z'Z me pretera son cheval. It ought to be: T irai s' il veut me preter son cheval; using the present tense of vouloir. Si, in all similar phrases, must be fol- lowed in French by the present tense, never by the future. (46 2 , Obs. 105, and N.) N. B. Translate if he, if they, by s'il and s'ils. In no other case is the i of si cut off by an apostroph'3. 4. On the contrary, the verb following quand, when, must be in the future tense, although the English present is then used; as, I will go when you do, (or when you go.) J'irai quand vous irez, (not vousallez.) He will write it if you do. He will write it when you do, I will tell you of it, if you are here. I will tell you of it, when you are here. II l'ecrira si vous Vecrivez. II l'ecrira quand vous Ttcrirez. Je vous le dirai, si vous etes ici. Je vous le dirai, quand vous serez ici. (46 2 , Obs. 106.) 5. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce qui, ce que, as soon as, 43 506 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. aussitot que, des que, after apres que ; as, comme, where, ou, are used, the French future must be employed. She will sing what you please. (463, Obs. 107.) He will return as soon as you start. We will do it after you have done it. He will put it where you please. He will do it as you wish. §147.— OF THE IMPERFECT.— Be VImparfait. 1. The Imperfect of the Indicative, in all French verbs, ends as follows: ais, ais, ait, io?is, iez, aient. (59 1 .) Hence, as soon as one person is known, all the others may be formed. 2. The first person singular is formed from the present indicative by changing the final ons of the first person plural to ais. As : Elle chantera ce qui vous plaira. Elle chantera ce que vous voudrez. II reviendra aussitot que vous par- tirez. Nous le ferons apres que vous l'au rez fait. II le mettra ou vous voudrez. II le fera comme vous le souhaiterez. Nous J', je tu il, elle, on nous VOUS ils, elles Avows, avais, avais, avait, avions. aviez, avaient^ 1 ) Croy ons, croyais, croyais, croyait, croyions, croyiez, croyaient. Disons, disais, disais, disait, disions, disiez, disaient. Fais vendions, IMPARFAITS. parlais, parliez, finissais, finissiez, recevais, receviez, vendais, vendiez, etais, etiez, parlait. parlaient, finissait. finissaient. recevait. recevaient. vendait. vendaient. etait. etaient. i The orthography of the first and second persons singular, and of the third person singular and plural, of the imperfect, was formerly je parlois, tu parlois, il parlolt, ils parloient. Some authors still persist in this way of spelling, but they ought not to be imitated. The orthography we follow was first proposed in 1675, by a lawyer of the name of Berain, and has since been adopted by the generality of French au- thors. According to the ancient orthography, the conditionals, and other words, as j^aimerais, paraztre, disparaitre, faible, monnaie, Anglais, Francais, Hollandais, Irlandais, Sec, were written: j'aimerois, paroztre, disparottre, foible, monnoie, Anglois, Francois, Hollandois, Irlandois, &c. 2 Faisais, fesais, whether spelt fai or fe, the first syllable in the plural of tha present, in all the imperfect future, and conditionnel , is pronounced fe, the e bei^ mute. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 507 4. The imperfect expresses an action begun, but not ended at the past time spoken of— or else as yet going on. 1 was writing at noon, means, 1 had begun to write, but I had not finished at noon. I used to ride when I was in the country, means, i continued to ride, &c. The English given above, corresponds to the French imperfect, and if it were always employed, there would be no difficulty in the use of the French tense ; but the other form of the English imperfect, viz : 1 spoke, I finished, I received, 1 sold, is fre- quently used ; and thence the difficulty arises ; for, 1 spoke, I finished, &c, must be translated by the French imperfect, only when they mean I was speaking, or used to speak; was finishing , or used to finish, &c. (59 1 , &c.) 5. When the first person plural of the present indicative ends in ions, as nous oublions, we forget ; nous rions, we laugh ; nous prions, we pray ; the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, have double i. (60 1 .) Ex. Nous oubliions, nous riions, &c. 6. When the same person plural ends in yons, put an i after the y. As, Nous croyons, we think ; nous croyions, we were thinking ; nous employ ons, use ; nous employions, were using. And likewise, nous nous asseyions, nous envoyions, essayions, and fuyions, voyions, &c. (60 l .) § 148.— POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT.— Conditional. 1. In every French verb it ends in : rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raient. 2. Its first person singular is formed by adding s to the first person singular of the French futur. (See 46 1 , 2 , &c. — § 146.) Futur, rai ; conditionnel, rais, J'aurai, j'aurais. Consequently the conditionnel is irregular when the future is. ($ 146.) I should have, thou wouldst have, lie or she would have. We should have, you would have, they would have. I should be, thou wouldst be, he or she would be. We should be, you would be, they would be. I should speak, thou wouldst speak, he or she would speak. We should speak, you would speak, they would speak. J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait. Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou elles auraient. Je serais, tu serais, il ou elle serait. Nous serions, vous seriez, ils ou elles seraient. Je parlerais, tu parlerais, il ou elle parlerait. Nous parlerions, vous parleriez, ils ou elles parleraient. 3. As its name implies, the conditionnel is always connected with a con- dition either expressed or understood. When si (if) accompanies it, that si must be followed by the French imperfect, 1 regardless of the English tense. 1 We have already seen (46X Obs. 105) that 5«, (if, meaning granting, that, &c.) connects the futur and present. Now, we add, that si connects the conditionnel and imparfait. When si, however, means whether, it is followed by the condi- tionnel. I do not know if (whether) I would go, even if (supposing that) I were invited. Je ne sais pas si j'iraig (cond.) meme si j'etais (imparf.) invite. 508 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. If I had money I would have a new coat. If thou couldst do this thou wouldst do that. If he could he would. If he would he could. Si j'avais de P argent j'aurais un habit neuf. Si tu savais faire ceci tu voudraia faire cela. S'il pouvait il voudrait. S'il voulait il pourrait. 4. Could and would, connected with the potential, always allude to a future action, and are then translated by the conditionnel or by the imper- fect after si. But could and would, alluding to a past, instead of a future action, are not to be rendered by the conditionnel, but by a past tense. I could, by fax pu—je pouvais, &c. I would, by fai voulu—je vou- lais, &c. I would go if I could. J'irais, (cond.) si je pouvais. (impa.) Did John and his sister go to the Jean et sa sceur sont-ils alles a la party last night ? No ; John could partie hier soir ? Non ; Jean ne not go, consequently she would pouvait pas y aller, consequem- not go. (62 2 , N. at page 326.) ment elle n'a pas voulu y aller. 5. When I wish is followed by the English imperfect, it usually means: I should like to, and must be translated by je voudrais, (62 2 , N. 2.) I wish I knew it — I had it. Je voudrais le savoir — 1* avoir. (R. 3.) (28 2 , 06s. 65.) I wish he knew it. (§ 151—12.) Je voudrais qu'ii le sut. § 149.— POTENTIAL MOOD, PERFECT TENSE.— Conditionnel Compose. 1. This is formed from the present of the conditional of the auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (60 2 .) I should, thou wouldst, he or she would have spoken We should, you would, they would have spoken. X should, thou wouldst, \ he or she would > departed. have ) We should, you) would, they would S departed. have ) If I had received my money, I would have bought new shoes. If you had risen early, you would not have caught a cold. If she had come, >» gone ? Had he been seen, been taken. rould you have he would have J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait parle. Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou elies auraient parle. Je serais, tu serais, il ou elle serait , > parti ; ) fern, partie. Nous serions, vous ) pi. mas. partis ; seriez, ilsou ellesS pi. fern, par- seraient ) ties. Si j'avais recu mon argent, j'aurais achete des souliers neufs. Si vous vous etiez leve de bonne heure, vous ne vous seriez pas en- rhume. Si elle etait venue, seriez-vous parti ? S'il avait ete vu, il aurait ete pris. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 509 2. With the conditionnel compose, si, (if,) is generally followed by the pluperfect, as seen above. 3. Although grammarians usually give the imperfect of the potential with its four signs, would, could, should, might, as a translation of the con- dition?^, students must not infer that the single French expression corre- sponds accurately to the four English ones. Would usualljfcstands for the conditionnel, and so does should, when it does not mean ought to; but could and might ought always to be expressed by the French verb pouvoir. I would or should go, if I could. I should or ought to go, if I could. I could go, if I would. I might go, if I would. I ought to write, if I could. (§ 146.) J'irais si je pouvais. Je devrais y aller si je pouvais. Je pourrais y aller si je voulais. Je pourrais peut-etre y aller, &c. Je devrais ecrire si je pouvais. Let these be models of those different acceptations, and for the compose i J'y serais alle si favais pu. I would or should have gone, if I had been able. I should (ought to) have gone, had I been able. I could have gone, if I had wished. I might have gone, if I had wished. J'aurais du y aller si favais pu. Vaurait pu y aller si j'avais voulu. Taurais peut-etre pu y aller si j'avais voulu. 4. When I wish is followed by the English pluperfect, it means I should have liked, and must be translated by faurais voulu . . . I wish I had been able to go. I wish I had known it. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) We wish she had been able to go. Yom \i sh we had known it sooner. Taurais voulu pouvoir y aller. J'aurais voulu le savoir. (R. 3.) Nous aurions voulu qu'elle peut y aller. Vous auriez voulu que nous le sussions plus tot (que nous V eus- sions su.) $150.— OF THE IMPERATIVE.--!^ VImperatif 1. In English, by omitting the nominative you of the second person of the indicative mood, present tense, you obtain the second person plural of the Imperative. As: Indicative present, you come, imperative, come ; you go, go; you write, write, &c. It is the same in BVench. Hence, from vous venez, by omitting the nominative, vous, you obtain venez for the imperative, second person plural. From vous allez, allez ; from vous e'crivez, ecrivez, &c. How do you obtain the 2d person plu- ral of the imperative ? By omitting, as in English, the nomi- native, you, of the present indi- cative. Are there any exceptions to this rule ? 43* Comment obtenez-vous la 2de per- sonne plur. de l'iinperatif ? En omettant, comme en Anglais, le nominatif vous de 1'indicatif present. Y a-t-il des exceptions a cette regie t 510 GRAMMATICAL S1NOPSIS. Yes, there are four in French, viz: Indicatif. Imperatif. Vous avez, you have. Ayez, have. Vous savez, you know. Sachez, know. Oui, il y en a quatre en Frangais, savoir : Indicatif. Imperatif. Vous etes, you are. Soyez, be. Vous voulez, you will. Veuillez, be willing. N. B. In reflective verbs there are two pronouns, vous, of the same per- son, a nominative and objective one ; Vous vous habillez, you dress your- self. When, to form the imperative, you omit the nominative vows, you, the objective vous, yourself, remains with the verb, viz : habillez-wws, dress yourself ; amusez-wms, enjoy yourself. (43 1 .) Hint. — We have in this article put a few questions and answers in French, to show the teacher and student how easily it can be done, and to induce them to attempt it. 2. The first person plural is in French obtained by dropping the nomi- native nous, we. Hence, nous venons, we come, becomes venons, let us come ; nous allons, we go : allons, let us go ; nous ecrivons, we write ; ecrivons, let us write, &c. Comment obtenez-vous la Ire per- j En omettant le nominatif nous du sonne plurielde 1' imperatif? | present de P indicatif. 3. Ayons, let us have ; soyons, let us be ; sachons, let us know ; veuillons, let us be willing, are the four exceptions to this rule. 4. Let me, laissez-moi, followed both in English and French by an infini- tive, as, Let me see, laissez-moi voir ; let me go, laissez-moi aller ; let me be, laissez-moi etre ; let me have, laissez-moi avoir ; let me read, laissez- moi lire, &c, may be considered as the first person singular of the impera- tive. This is an innovation, I know, therefore I merely suggest its adoption. If introduced in the imperative of every verb, the expression, let me, laissez- moi, so frequently used in both languages, will soon become perfectly familiar. But if not placed there, as it has no other appropriate situation, it is usually overlooked and not learned. What can be considered as the first person singular of the imperative ? Let me, followed by the infinitive of the verb to be conjugated. Let me do it — tell it to them. Que peut-on considerer comme la Ire pers. sing, de P imperatif ? Laissez-moi, suivi par Pinfinitif du verbe qu'on conjugue. Laissez-moi le faire — le leur dire. 5. The second person singular is obtained, in all French verbs, from the first person singular of the indicative, by omitting the pronoun je, I. Present. Imperative. I Present. Imperat. 2d pers. sing. I speak, speak thou. I Je parle, parle. 1 i When the second person singular of the imperative ends in e, it takes 5 after it, before the relative pronouns en, y. Ex. Offr-es en a ta sceur, offer some to thy sister, portes-y tes livres, carry thy books thither. But when en is a preposition, the impe- rative takes no 5. Ex. Donne, en cette occasion, des preuves de ton zele ; Give, on this occasion, proofs of thy zeal. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 511 Present I come, I perceive, I take, Imperative. come thou, perceive thou, take thou. Present. Je viens, J'apercois, Je prends, Imperat. 2d per s. sing. viens. apercois. prends. The five following verbs must be excepted from this rule : fat, I have , imperat. aie, have thou ; je suis, I am ; sois, be thou ; je vais, I go ; va, go thou; je sais, I know; sache, know thou ; je veux, I am willing; veuille, be thou willing. The imperative va takes s, when it is followed by the relative pronoun y. Ex. Yas-y, go thou thither ; but when there is another verb after the pro- noun y, va must be written without an s. Ex. Va y donner Vordre, go thither to give the order ; va y /aire un tour, go thither to take a turn. In the expression va-fen, go away, an apostrophe must be placed after the letter t, and not a hyphen, as it is not here the euphonic t, but te, an apos- trophe supplying the place of e before a vowel. 6. The third persons singular and plural are like the same persons of the subjunctive present, (§ 151 — 1,) omitting the antecedent which governs that mood, but retaining the que, and the pronouns il, Us, elle, elles, on. The other persons admit of no pronouns before them. Let him go, qu'il aille ; let them come, qu'ils viennent ; let anyone speak, qu J on parle ; come, viens ; let us see, voyons ; know, sachez. 7. Imperative of the five irregular verbs : — Let me have, have (thou), let him have, j Laissez-moi avoir, aie, Ayons, ayez, Laissez-moi etre, sois, Soyons, soyez, Laissez-moi aller, va, Let us have, have (ye) Let me be, be (thou), be (ye), go (thou), go (ye), Let us be, Let me go Let us go, Let me know, Let us k., Let me be willing, Let us be w.,be willing let them h. let him be. let them be. let her go. let them go. know(thou) , let one know. know (ye), be willing, let all know, let him will. You let them will 8. Examples for the regular verbs : — Present. Let me Laissez-n> i parler, Allons, L.-moi savoir, Sachons, Laissez-moi vouloir, Veuillons, allez, sache, qu'il ait. qu'ils aient. qu'il soit. qu'ils soient. qu'elle aille. qu'elles aillent. qu'on sache. sachez, que tous sachent. veuille, qu'il veuille. veuillez,qu'ils veuillent. vous parlez, finish, finissez, receive, recevez, lose, perdez, finir, recevoir, perdre, Imperative. thou Let us you parle, parlons, parlez. finis, finissons, finissez. recois, recevons, recevez. perds, perdons, perdez. NEGATIVELY. Let me not Nemelaissezpas Do (thou) not. . break, casser, ne casse pas, build, batir, nebatispas, owe, devoir, ne dois pas, restore, rendre, ne rends pas, NEGATIVEMENT. Let us not Do (you) not.... ne cassons pas, ne cassez pas. nebatissons pas, ne batissezpas ne devons pas, ne devez pas. ne rendons pas, ne rendez pas. 512 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Affirmatively, the objective pronouns are placed after : (§§ 54, 55, &c.) Let me look for it, punish them, perceive some, sefl it to yon, go there, to it, take him there, Py mener, Laissez-moi Do (thou)... le chercher, cherche-le, les punir, punis-moi, en apercevoir, apercois-en, vous le vendre, vends-le-lui y aller. Let us cherchons-le, punissons-les, apercevons-en, Bo.... cherehez-1'y. punissez-nous, apercevez-en-un vendons-la-leur, vendez-nous-en. vas-y, (0&.at5 .) allons-y, allez-y. menes-y-moi, rnenons-y-en, menez-nous-y. Negatively Let me not bring it, go there, to it, lend him any, owe them, to them, Let me dress myself, cure myself, sit down, put myself, go away, the objective pronouns are placed before. Ne me laissez pas Do not Let us not I'apporter, ne les apporte ne leur appor- tons rien, n'y allons pas, ne le lui pretons plus, ne leur en de- y aller, lui en preter, pas, n'y va pas, ne m'en prete pas, les leur devoir, ne lui dois rien, vons pas Imperatif des Verbes Re'flechis. Laissez-moi m r habiller, me guerir, m'asseoir, me mettre, m'en aller, thyself, habille-toi, gueris-toi, assieds-toi, mets-toi, ourselves, habiMons-nous, guerissons-nous, asseyons-nous, mettons-nous, va-t'en,(N.B. at l.) allons-nous-en, Do not n'en apportez plus, n'y allezplus. ne *a leur pretez pas. ne la lui devez pas. yourself-ves, habillez-vous. guerissez-vous. asseyez-vous. mettez-vous. allez-vous-en. Let me not go to bed, run away, laugh at, go away, NEGATIVEMENT. Ne me laissez pas Do not Let us not Do not.... me coucher, ne te couche ne nous cou- ne v. couchezp. pas, chons pas, m'enfuir. ne fenfuis pas, ne nous enfuyons ne v. enfuyez p. me rire de. . . ne te ris pas de, ne n. rions p. de, ne v. riez p. de m ? en aller, ne t'en va pas, ne n. en allons p. ne v. en allez pas. 9. Let him kave r qu*il ait, Let us have, ayons, having always been used in English- French grammars, is it not strange, that let me have, should not have been introdu red ? 10. Let me may also be translated by the second person singular, viz : laisse-moi aller, let uhou) me go ; laisse-moi prendre, let (thou) me take, &c. 11. Let him have it, may be translated in two ways: first, by qu'il Vait, as it is generally in grammars, or, secondly, by laissez-le V avoir. Let us write them ; may be rendered, first, by ecrivons-les y or laissezmous les ecrire. These expressions, however, are not synonymous. The first, meaning, we must set about writing them, the second, requesting leave to do it. 12. Come and see me, do. Take your pencil and write, are expressions frequently used in English. The French sometimes translate them literally, and say: prenez votre crayon et ecrivez ; but they more frequently put the second verb in the infinitive mood instead of the imperative, as : Prene2 votre crayon pour ecrire ; ventz me voir, je vous en prie, &c. (§ 54, Except. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 513 $ 151.— SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.— Mode Subjonctif. Present Tense. — Present. 1. In all French verbs, it ends in e, es, e, ions, iez, ent. To form it, attend to this Rule : — 1. 1st part. — The thied person plural is exactly like that of the present indicative ; from which, by dropping the nt, you obtain the first and third persons singular. An 5 added to either, gives the second. 2d part. — The first and second persons plural are exactly like those of the imperfect. The following are regularly formed : — They ils quoiqu' lis je tu il nous vous come, viennent, viennent, vienne vienne s, vienne, venions, veniez. drink, boivent, boivent , boive, boives, boive, buvions, buviez. Exceptions, eight in all — 1. It is time for them to go ; me to go, thee to go, him to go us to go, you to go. II est temps quails aillent; j'aille, tu ailles, il ailles, n. allions, v. alliez. 2. Although they can ; I can, thou canst , he, we, you can. Quoiqu' Us puissent; puisse, puisses. puisse, puissions puissiez. 3. In case they are worth; I am, thou art, he is, we are, you are. En cas c^w'ils vaillent ;J vaille, vailles. vaille, valions, valiez.i 4 . He ivishes them to have ; me to, thee to. her to, us to, you to. II veut gw'ils aient ; aie, aies, ait, ayons, ayez. 5. On condition they will ; I, thou, he, her. we, you. A co?idition qu'ilsveuillent ; veuille, veuilles, veuille, voulions, vouliez. 6. Not that they know of; I know of, thou, he, she, we, you. Pas qu y i\s sachent ; sache, saches, sache, sachions, sachiez. 7. Without their b&ing so ; my, thy, his, her, our. your. Sans quHls le soient ; le sois, le sois, le soit. le soyons le soyez. 8. They had better do it ; I had, thou, he, we, you. II vaut mieux gw'ils le fassent le fasse, le fasses, le fasse, fassions, fassiez. 2. The use of the subjunctive mood as its name implies) depends in French, on some antecedent, ending with que or qui, which antecedent governs that mood. The antecedent may be a verb or a conjunction. 2 As the indicative is the mood of affirmation, the subjunctive is the mood of indecision, of doubt. If then the verbal antecedent affirms with precision, with positive7iess, the indicative must be used after que or qui ; but if the verbal antecedent expresses indecision, doubt, then the subjunctive is to be used after the connecting word que or qui. For instance, when we say : I know he ts here, I am certain that he is here, a positive affirmation is expressed, by the antecedent, and on that account no other turn could be given to the second verb, is ; it would be coniradictory to say : J am certain he may be here. Hence, the indicative is used after; and we must say: Je sais, je • Prevaloir* to prevail, is regular in the present of the subjunctive, and formed from prevalent, they prevail. 2 The conjunction if (si) is the most frequent attendant of the English subjunc- tive ; but in French that mood is seldom governed by si, which is, we know, usually connected with the present find imperfect indicative, {462, Obs. 105 — § 148, N. I.) 514 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. suis certain qu'il est id. But when you say : It is possible, it is doubtful that he is here, indecision, doubt, is expressed by the antecedent, and another turn may be given to the second verb, such as: It is possible he may be here, for him to be here — It is doubtful whether he is here or not ; his being here is doubtful, and consequently the subjunctive must be used after it. ll est possible, il est douteux, qu'il soit id. Certainty or uncertainty is then the great theoretical criterion by which the use of the subjunctive is deter- mined or ascertained. This, however, does not apply to the antecedents that always require the subjunctive, but merely to some particular cases that will be further explained. Grammarians have given rules based on the signification of verbs, saying that the subjunctive is to be used if the antecedent expresses surprise, de- spair, complaint, admiration, will, wish, consent, forbidding, hindrance, doubt, fear, ignorance, apprehension, order, command, and they generally wind up this comprehensive enumeration by the very definite expression, or any affection of the mind. To find the true sense of a verb, requires a gram- matical acumen, not generally possessed by pupils; therefore, as something more practical is desirable, let pupils attend to the following Rule, as calcu- lated, in most cases, to direct them accurately. Rule 2. When the verb in the second part is connected with 1. May, 2. should, 3. whether, \ or, if not connected, can 4. forme to be, thee to be, or any other infinitive, \ be turned to any of them, 5. my being, thy being, or any other present par- C as shown above, then ticiple or noun ; ) that second part must be in the subjunctive mood in French ; but in the indicative, if no such alteration can be made. As a further illustration, let us examine the following sen- tences. „ T . . , _ T ( The second part, to be laughed at, 1. I deserve to be laughed at. 1 b(j ahered but mark ^ differ . 2. I hope to be laughed at. [ ence - m ^ aUemion 1. I deserve that people should laugh at me. 2. I hope that people will (not should) laugh at me. The word will gives to the second sentence a decisive, a precise meaning, which is not conveyed by the word should in the first. Hence the second is translated in French by the future of the indicative, the first by the sub- junctive present. 1. Je merite qu'on se moque de moi. (sub.)) Do the two verbs, I deserve 2. J'espere qu'on se moquerade moi. (ind.) ) and I hope, express affections of the soul or not ? How inadequate are those wholesale rules ! And how perplexed must the student be when he has no other guide ! As a first corollary to Rule 2, we say that, after a French verb, followed by que or qui, if the fourth or fifth English form above is to be translated, it must be by the French subjunctive. He wishes me to laugh, il veut que Je He. He is pleased at our speaking, il est content que nous parlions. As a second corollary, that, after a French verb followed by que or qui, the infinitive of a passive verb, that can be changed to should, must be trans- lated by the French subjunctive, with the indefinite pronoun on as a nomi- native, as in the example*, / deserve to be laughed at. (77 1 , Note.) GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 515 3. When the antecedent is a superlative, or a word having a superlative meaning; such as le seul, V unique, the only one ; le premier, the first; le dernier, the last, and any ordinal number, deuxieme, &c, the subjunctive follows. The gospel is the finest present that L'fivangile est le plus beau present God has made to man It is the first, the last volume that we have. que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. the only C'est le premier, le dernier, le seul volume que nous ayons. 4. When the antecedent is a unipersonal verb, or used unipersonally : — He must come. It is suitable he should do it. It is right for him to know it. II faut qu'il vienne. II convient qu'il le fasse. II est juste qu'il le sache. Except: II s'ensuit, it follows; il resulte, it results; il arrive, there happens, and il est, accompanied by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, probability ; such as ; clair, clear : certain, certain ; evident, evident ; vrai, true ; probable, probable, &c, which govern the indicative, when affirma- tively used, but follow, when interrogative, negative, or conditional. It follows from it that you are my friend. It often happens that one is deceived. II s'ensuit, il resulte, que vous etes mon ami. II arrive souvent qu*on est trompe. 5. When the antecedent is interrogative, negative, or conditional. (The words peu, little ; a peine, hardly, having a negative meaning, come under this rule.) I believe we have some. Do you believe we have any? I do not think that we have any. We have but few men who can do it. He has hardly a scholar who can translate it. If it be true that you have it, is : If it is true that you have it, is : Je crois que nous en avons. Croyez-vous que nous en ayons ? Je ne crois pas que nous en ayons. Nous avons peu d' hommes qui puis- sent le faire. II a a peine un e'colier qui puisse le traduire. •S'il est vrai que vous Vayez ; while S'il est vrai que vous i'avez; the in- dicative is used because there is no supposition, no condition implied, the meaning being positive, Since you have it, and not conditional, as in the first sentence, which means: Should you have it. It is not certain, true, sure, that you II rc'est pas certain, vrai, sur que be my friend. vous soyez mon ami. One is not frequently deceived by I II n' arrive pas souvent qu'on soit one's friends. trompe par ses amis. 6. Any verb expressing fear, such as craindre, to fear ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; when used affirmatively, governs the subjunctive with ne before it. But ne is not used if the phrase is interrogative, negative, or condi- tional. (78 1 .) 7. When the verbs mentioned at 6 are used negatively, they govern th« subjunctive without ne. (78 4 .) 516 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 8. The verbs douter, to doubt, and nier. to deny, when negative, require ne before the subjunctive. (78 4 .) 9. The conjunction que employed in the second member of a sentence* to avoid the repetition of a conjunction used in the first, governs the same mood as the word it stands for. ^78 3 .) 10. The word que, used to avoid the repetition of si and of other con- junctions, such as afin que, soit que, sans que, avant que, &c, governs the subjunctive. (78 3 .) 11. Quelque, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways, and always governs the subjunctive. 1st way. Quelque (before an adjective, used without a noun) is indecli- nable. (80 1 .) 2d way. Quelque before a noun (accompanied or not by an adjective) agrees with that noun. (80 1 .) 3d way. Immediately before a verb, whatever, whatsoever, is rendered, in French, by two words, quel and que. And then, quel, alone, agrees with the subject of the verb — que is invariable. (80 1 .) 12. As the antecedent belongs to the indicative mood, it is necessary to give rules for the correspondence of the tenses of the indicative and sub- junctive. 1. If the antecedent is present or future, it governs the present or perfect of the subjunctive. You must come. You will have to come, (be necessary for you.) You must have come when I was out. Ilfaut que vous veniez. llfaudra que vous veniez. 11 faut (ilfaudra) que vous soyez, venu quand f etais dehors. If a condition is annexed, then use the imperfect and pluperfect. I do not think you would do it if you were not compelled. I do not think you would have done it had you not been compelled. Je ne crois pas que vous le fissiez si Von ne vous y contraignait . Je ne crois pas que vous l'eussiez fait si Ton ne vous y exit contraint. 2. The imperfect, the past tenses,) rr, u . r . , , x . , w ,. , . ,-T . ' *7 > 1 ne imperfect and pluperfect. (79 z .) d the conditionnels require S and I was not certain you would come. I was not sure you would have come. I wish you had more fortitude. (62 2 , N. 2.) Je n'etais pas sur que vous vinssiez. Je ri etais pas sur que vous fussiez venu. Je voudrais que vous eussiez plus de fermete. 13. Whatever or whatsoever (meaning all things soever) is generally ex- pressed by quelque chose que ou quoi que, quoi que ce soit que, when at the beginning of a sentence, and only by quoi que ce soit oufut, after a verb. The subjunctive follows that French antecedent. (80 1 .) Whoever, whomsoever, qui que ce soit, qui que ce fut, also governs th« subjunctive. (80 l .) GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 51? 14. If the verb which follows qui, que, dont, de ce, ou ; expresses doubt, uncertainty, &c, use the subjunctive. If not, the indicative. (80 2 .) 15. The subjunctive is employed at the beginning of a sentence, to express surprise, a desire, or an imprecation ; and also instead of quand meme, though, or si, if, suppressed. (80 2 .) Imperfect. — lmparfait. (79 1 .) §152. — The Imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the preterit, (68 1 , § 153,) by changing the final ai into asse, for the verbs of the first con- jugation, and by adding se to those of the other three conjugations. As the preterit has four sets of terminations: 1st, ai; 2d, is ; 3d, us ; 4th, ins ; this imperfect has also four. The first set, as with the preterit, belongs exclusively to the first conjugation. Those sets are : — 1st set, asse, asses, at. assions, assiez, assent. 2d " isse, isses, it, issions, issiez, issent. 3d " usse, usses, (it, ussions, ussiez, ussent. 4th « insse, insses, int, inssions, inssiez, inssent. Connecting them with verbs, we will have 1st. Although I spoke, quoique je parlasse, (from parlai.) Tu parlasses, il parlat, nous parlassions, vous parlassiez, Us parlassent. 2d. I had to say, to tell, il fallait que je disse, (from dis.) Tu disses, il dit, nous dissions, vous dissiez, Us dissent. 3d. Whether I had, soit que ]'eusse, (from peus.) Tu eusses, il eut, nous eusssions, vous eussiez, Us eussent. 4th. Provided I held, I kept, pourvu que je tinsse, (from tins.) Tu tinsses, il tint, nous tinssions, vous tinssiez, Us tinssent. No exception. Attend to your list of antecedents. This imperfect is used after the indicative imperfect, all past tenses, and the conditionnels. (§ 151 — 2.) Perfect, page 418.) I Parfait. Pluperfect, ip. 419.) j Plusqueparfait. $ 153.— INDICATIVE, SECOND IMPERFECT. 1 — Preterit. 2 The Preterit of the indicative mood has, for regular verbs, three sets of 1 Lindley Murray defines it thus : " The imperfect tense represents the action or event, either as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a certain time past: as, " I loved her for her modesty and virtue," " They were travelling post -when he met them." The French Preterit corresponds only to the first clause, viz: to the action or event past and finished, or to R. C. Smith's definition, which is: The im- perfect tense expresses what took place in time past, however distant: as, "John died." 2 I merely use the word PritSrit without the adjective d&fini (usually added) be- cause the pupil will more easily distinguish the two tenses; one being the Preterit, another the Preterit antSrieur, (68 3 ). If those terms, definite and indefinite, were applied to the English tenses, it would be advisable, perhaps necessary to retain them in French, but as they ;ire new to the.American student, they are more per- plexing than useful. The French themselves, in speaking of that tense, call it more frequently Preterit, than Pretirit difini. After all, as the adjective dSfini would tonvey but an indefinite idea to the pupil, its use may be indefinitely postponed. 44 518 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. terminations, formed from their past participles. By changing, for the first conjugation, e to ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, event, you have the first set. For the second and fourth conjugations, i and u to is, is, it, imes, ites, irent, you have the second set. For the third conjugation, u to us, us, ut, times, utes, urent, you have the third set. The preterit of all regular verbs, without exception, may be formed by the rules given above. The first set belongs exclusively to the first conju- gation. There is a fourth set, viz : ins, ins, bit, inmes, intes, invent, which belongs exclusively to the irregular verbs tenir, venir, and their compounds. EXAMPLES FOR THE REGULAR VERBS. Infin. Part. Passis. Je tu il, on Preterits. nous vous ils, elles Parler, parU. parlat, parlas, parla, parlames, parlates, pari erentj Finir, fini. finis, finis, finii, finmesj Unites, %xdrent, Recevoir, iecu. TBQUSj recus. recut, recumes, reciites, recurent, Vendre, vendu. vendis, vendis, vendit, vendtmes, vendues. vendirent. that their past participles in i, is, it, take the second set, viz : is, is, it, &c, while those ending in u take the third set, viz: us, us, ut, &c, if not found in the list we will give of irregular formations. EXAMPLES FOR IRREGULAR VERBS FORMED BY THE RULES. Infin. Sentir,* Mettre,* Prendre, Dire,* Part. Passes senti. mis. pris. dit. Courir,* couru. Connaitre,* connu. Vivre,* vecu. tenu. venu. Priterits of the second set, (de la 2de s£rie.) Je tu il, on nous vous ils, elles sentis, sentis, sentit, sentimes, sentites, sentirent. mis, mis, mit, &c. pris, pris, prit, &c. dis, dis, dit, &c. Priterits de laSme sSrie. courus, courus, courut, courumes, courutes, coururent. connus, connus, connut, &c. vecus, &c. Fourth set, exclusively for tenir, venir, and their compounds. tins, tins, tint, tinmes, tintes, tinrent. vins, vins, vint, vinmes, vintes, vinrent. Tenir,* Venir,* The following irregular verbs are exceptions to the rules : Infinitive . Couvrir,* Offrir,* Ouvrir,* Souffrir,* Mourir,* Vetir,* Voir,* Pre voir,* Ceindre,* Astreindre,* Craindve,* to cover, to offer, to open, to suffer, to die, to clothe, to see, to foresee, to gird, to restrain, to fear, Past Part. couv ^rt. offert. ouvert. souffert. mort. vetu . vu prevu ceint. astreint. craint. Je couvris, J'offris, J'ouvris, Je souffris, Je mourus, Je vetis, Je vis, Je previs, Je ceignis, J'astreignis, Je oraignis, Preterit Definite. is, it, imes, ites, us, ut, is, it, ilraes, utes, urent imes, ites, irent GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 519 Infinitive . Past Part. Preterit Defini te. Empreindre,* to imprint, empreint. J'empreignis, is , it, imes, ites, irent Enfriendre,* to infringe, enfreint. J'enfreignis, ' c 5 cc cc cc Epreindre,* to squeeze, epreint. J'epreignis, ' CC cc cc cc Feindre,* to feign, feint. Je feignis, ' a cc cc cc Joindre,* to join, joint. Je joignis, * n 11 cc cc Oindre,* to anoint. oint. J'oignis, l cc (I cc cc Feindre,* to paint, peint. Je peignis, * cc cc cc (C Plaindre,* to lament, plaint. Je plaignis, ' a cc cc cc Restreindre,* to restrain, restreint. Je restreignis, f n cc cc cc Teindre,* to dye, teint. Je teignis, * <( cc cc cc Cuirs,* to cook, cuit. Je cuisis, ' a cc cc cc Conduire,* to conduct, conduit. Je conduisis, ' ( a cc cc cc Construire,* to construct construit. Je construisis, { a cc cc cc Detruire,* to destroy, detruit. Je detruisis, ' (( cc cc '.t Enduire,* to lay over, enduit. J'enduisis, l u re a re Induire,* to induce, induit. J'induisis, ' a cc cc cc Instruire,* to instruct, instruit. J'instruisis, ' a Cf cc cc Introduire,* to introduce introduit. J'introduisis, " a cc cc cc Reduire,* to reduce, reduit. Je reduisis, ( a cc cc cc Seduire,* to seduce, seduit. Je seduisis, ' a cc cc cc Traduire,* to translate, traduit. Je traduisis, ' EC cc cc cc Luire,* to shine, lui. Je luisis, ' u cc cc cc Nuire,* to hurt, nui. Je nuisis, ' (( cc cc cc Coudre,* to sew, cousu. Je cousis, ' cc cc cc cc Ecrire,* to write, 6crit. J'ecrivis, l a cc " cc Etre,* to be, ete. Je fus, fu 3, fat, umes, utes, urent Faire,* to do, fait. Je fis, fis , fit, fimes fites firent Naitre,* to be born, ne. Je naquis, is it, imes, ites, irent Vaincre,* to vanquish, vaincu. Je vainquis, ' cc c-c cc cc REMARK. The learner will remark, that in the above list some irregular vierbs follow the conjugation of others ; thus we see three verbs conjugated exactly like couvrir, to cover, viz : offrir, to offer ; ouvrir, to open ; souffrir, to suffer : venir, f o come, we see conjugated like tenir, to hold; twelve verbs after cei?idre, to gird ; ten after cuire, to bake, to cook ; and one after luire, to shine, viz : nuire, to hurt. Now this is not only the case with respect to the preterit defini of these verbs, but for all the other tenses. It would therefore be of essential importance to the learner to commit them to memory in the order we have given them, as by their help the greatest difficulties of the irregular verbs are almost overcome. USE OF THE PR£T£RIT. 2. We saw (33 1 ) that the parfait not only conveys an allusion to the pre- sent, but also refers to actions past at a time wholly expired. Now the student must be informed that the preterit has no connexion with the present, but only refers to " actions and events past and finished :" (Murray.) It cannot be used in connexion with this century, this year, this month, this day or to-day. i/iis morning, because the time is not wholly expired ; but it may be used in connexion with last century, last year, &c. and with yester- day, because the time is then wholly past. Hence, yesterday, limits its approach to the present. Accordingly we may say: Je le vis V annie der- 520 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. niere, I saw him last year ; le mois dernier, last month ; il y a quinze jours, a fortnight ago ; hier, yesterday ; and there stops the use of the 'preterit. To express I saw him to-day, this morning, this week, &c., say : Je V ax vu aujourd'hui, ce matin, cette semaine, &c, and not je le vis ; because the time is not fully past. In colloquial intercourse, when the time is wholly past, the 'preterit and par/ait may be used the one for the other, that is : I saw him last week — Caesar conquered Gaul ; may be translated either by : Je le vis ou je Vai vu la semaine passee — Cesar conquit ou a conquis la Gaule. But when the time is unexpired, the preterit cannot replace the parfait. So, 1 sold my house this year, must be rendered by j'ai vendu (§145) ma maison cette annee-ci, itime unexpired,) and not by je vendis (§153) ma maison cette annee-ci. 3. On the other hand, in narrating events long past, or historical facts, the preterit is the tense to be used, to the exclusion of the parfait. As soon as he saw his enemy, he drew his sword and began with him, &c. Des qu'il vit (not a vu) son ennemi, il tira son epee et commenca avec lui, &c. $ 153.) N. B. The French, to give more animation to the narration, frequently use the present tense instead of the preterit, and say: Dis qu'il voit son ennemi, il tire son epee et commence avec lui, &c. It is in English usually translated by the imperfect, although they, themselves, use the present tense for the same purpose. § 154.— PLUPERFECT m*)— Plusqueparfait. is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary with the past participle, and used pretty much like the English pluperfect. Had you not spent your money when ; N'aviez-vous pas depense votre ar- you asked me for some ? gentquandvous m'endemandates? Besides the plusqueparfait (68 2 ) formed by the French imparfait and past participle, there is another tense formed by the preterit and past participle, called Preterit A nterieur, (anterior,) viz : J'eus fini, I had finished ; Nous eumes dine, we had dined. As the English have no tense corresponding to it, they have to translate both this tense and the plusqueparfait exactly in the same way ; consequently, the American student is frequently at a loss, to know which of the French tenses he is to select. We will try, by explanations and examples, to lessen the difficulty. The imparfait (59 1 ) expresses an action begun but not ended, or, as going on at the past time spoken of. The preterit, (68 1 , on the contrary, refers to an action or event past and finished, or of which the time is fully expired ft is this distinction of the simple tenses, which, passing into the compound, must be kept in view, and which, in many instances, will enable the learnei to choose the proper French tense. As there is no English tense corresponding to the French, I offer § 155.— The 2d PLUPERFECT.— Preterit Anterieur. The Preterit Ante'rieur (68 3 ) is formed by the preterit of the auxiliary and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 521 It expresses an action quickly or instantaneously done, and is seldom used, except after the adverbial conjunctions, Aussitot, or sitot que, des que, d'abord que. Apres que. Lorsque, quand. Pas plutot. A peine. EXAMPLES. II eut fini en un moment (instanter.) Aussitot que feus fini mon ouvrage, je le lui portai. Quand je me fus habille, je sortis. As soon as, After. When. No sooner. Scarcely. He has done in a moment. As soon as 1 had done my work, I carried it to him. When I had dressed myself, I went out. For its practical use, the student may be governed by the following plain directions. In similar sentences, there are usually two tenses, one simple, and one compound. Rule 1. — If the adverbial conjunction, when, as soon as, &c, is before the simple tense, the compound tense is necessarily the plusqueparfait. (68 2 .) Rule 2. — If the conjunctive adverb is before the compound tense, that compound tense must again be the plusqueparfait, provided the simple tense is an imparfait, but should the simple tense be a preterit, then the compound tense must be the preterit anterieur. (68 3 .) $ 156.— INFINITIVE.— lnfinitif 1. Prepositions, in English, govern the present participle, except to, which governs the infinitive. On the contrary, the infinitive is governed by every French preposition, except the preposition en, which governs the present participle. He speaks of coming. We like to walk, after we have done our duty. After coming, he rested. After dressing, we went out. II parle de venir. Nous aimons d promener, apres avoir fait notre devoir. Apres etre arrive, il se reposa. Apres nous etre habilles, nous sor- times. Remark that the French preposition apres is always followed by the infi- nitive of the auxiliary avoir or etre ; while in English the present participle of those auxiliaries having and being, are usually left out and replaced by the present participle of the following verb. For instance, instead of After having drunk his tea, he felt I Apres .avoir bu son the, il se trouva better ; I mieux ; (40 1 ), (R. 1, N. 1.) You may say : After drinking his tea, &c. ; but the French cannot be con- tracted. 2. When two verbs come together, without being joined by a conjunction, the latter is governed by the former in the infinitive, sometimes with and sometimes without a. preposition. Important Remark. — If the verb has no preposition, it may receive any one the sense requires ; but, if it has a particular one, that particular one rejects every other, and must invariably attend the verb. It is so in English 44* 522 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. as well as in French. For instance, as the ^erbs will, dare, let, &c, have no preposition, we must say without preposition, / will say, 1 dare say, 1 iet go ; and not with the preposition to, or any other, 1 will to say, &c. On the contrary, to like, to have, &c, requiring the preposition to, we must say, / like to see, 1 have to write, &c, and not, without any, Hike see, I have write, &c. It is the same in French. The verbs vouloir, oser, laisser, &c, requiring no preposition, we must say, je veux dire, fose dire, je laisse alter ; and not je veux a dire, fose pour dire, &c. On the contrary, aimer, avoir, &c, taking a, we must say, faime d voir, fai a ecrire, &c, and not faime voir, fai ecrire, &c. 3. Sometimes the English verb requires no preposition, while the French has one — To answer, repondre a, (21 1 .) Sometimes the English has one, and the French none-^To listen to, ecouter, (25 3 .) At other times the English has of, and the French a — To think of, penser d, (532.) Then the English has to, and the French de — To permit to, permettre de, (65 2 .) But in every case each English and each French verb retains its own particular struc- ture. ($50.) 4. French Verbs that govern others without a preposition: — Aimer mieux ; Aller ; Apercevoir ; Assurer ; Croire ; Compter ; Daigner ; Declarer ; Devoir ; Entendre ; Envoyer ; Esperer ; Faillir ; Faire ; Falloir ; s^Imaginer ; Laisser ; Nier; Oser ; Paraitre ; Penser ; Pr&tendre; Pouvoir ; Reconnaitre ; Regarder ; Retourner ; Savoir ; Sembler ; Souhaiter : J'aime mieux lefaire.i Allons nous promener. Je l'apercois mouvoir. II assure V avoir fait. II croit me tromper. II compte partir sous peu. Daignez me dire quand. II declare le savoir. II doit me Venvoyer. Je 1'entends parler. Envoyez-le chercher. J'espere le rencontrer. II a failli me voir. Qu'avez-vous fait venir ? II faut lui aider. Je m'imagine y etre. Laissez-le dire et faire. II nie Vavoir. II n'ose Vavouer. II parait V entendre. II a pense tomber. Pretend-il le faire ? II n'a pas pu me le dire. Je reconnais Vavoir dit. Je vous regarde faire. Elle retourna la voir. II sait ou la trouver. Elle semble avoir peur. Je souhaite la voir? I would rather do it. Let us go to take a walk. I perceive it move. He asserts to have .done it. He thinks to deceive me. He purposes to go soon. Deign to tell me when. He declares he knoivs it. He is to send it to me. I hear him speak. Send for it, or to fetch it. I expect to meet him. He missed seeing me. What did you send for ? It is necessary to help him. I fancy myself to be there. Let him say and do. He denies having it. He dares not confess it. He seems to understand it. He had like to have fallen. Does he pretend to do it? He could not tell it me. I acknowledge to have said it. I am looking at you doing it. She returned to see him. He knows where to find her. She seems to be afraid. I wish to see her. l Aimer mieux. valcf'r mieux, followed by another verb in the infinitive, require de before the second infinitive ; as, 1 would rather stay than go. I J'aimerais mieux rester que d'y aller. It is better to go than stay alone. I II vaut mieux y aller que de rester seul. 2 Souhaiter may also be used with de ; as, Je souhaite de voir, or de le voir, I wish to see him. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 523 Soutenir ; Valoir mieux ; Venir ; Voir; Vouloir ; II soutient V avoir vu. II vaut mieux lui icrireA Viendrez-vous me voir . ? 2 Je vois venir votre sceur. Elle ne veut pas rester. He maintains he kas seen it. It is better to write to her. Will you come to see*me ? I see your sister coming. She will not stay. 5. French Verbs and Adjectives that govern the following infinitive by means of the preposition a. N. B. This usually takes place after nouns, used in a partitive sense ; as : He has pleasure in seeing her. Is there vanity in thinking so ? s'Abaisser d, Accoutumer a, Admettre d, Admirable d, de,3 Affreux d, de,3 Agreable d, d*e,3 Aider d, Aimer d, Aise a, Amuser a. Animer d, s'Appliquer d, Apprendre a, s'Appreter a,' Aspirer d, Assidu d, s'Attacher a, Autoriser d, Avoir d, Beau d, de,3 Bon d, de,3 Charmant d, Chercher d, Condamner d, Condescendre d, Consister d, Contraindre d, de,4 Compel to, (X^.tribuer d,4 Contribute to Demander d, .4sfc to. Depenser d, Spend to, in. Dernier d, Las* to. Stoop to. Accustom to. Admit to . Wonderful to. Dreadful to. Agreeable to. iJeJp to. Z,ifce to. _Z?as7/ to. Amuse to, with. Animate to. Apply to. Learn to. CreJ rea<2y to. Aspire to. Assiduous to. SJicfc to. Authorise to. Have to. Fine to. Good* to. Charming to. Seefc to. Condemn to. Condescend to, Consist to, in. II a du plaisir a la yoir. (21 2 , 25 2 .) Y a-t-il de la vanite a le penser ? Desagreable d, d*e, 3 Disagreeable to. Destiner d, Determiner d, Difficile d, d*e,3 Diligent d, Disposer d, Donner d, s'Echauffer d, s'Efforcer d, Effroyable d, d*e,3 Employer d, Encourager d, Enclin d, Engager d, Enhardir d, Enseigner d, s'Etudier d, Etre d, Exact d, Exercer d, Exciter d, Exposer d, Facile, d, d*e,3 seFatiguer d, Forcer d, d*e,4 Gagner d, Habile d, Habituer d, Hesiter d, Horrible d, de,3 Inciter d, Destine to. Resolve upon. Difficult to. Diligent to. Dispose to. Give to. JTeaJ to. Spend one's self to, in. Frightful to. Employ to, Z7se to. Encourage to. Inclined to. Induce to. Embolden to. Teach to. Study to. .Be to. Exact to. Exercise to. Excite to. Expose to. .Easy to. Cre£ fired with. Force to. Gain to. Clever to. jiccwsJom to. Hesitate to. Horrid to. Incite to. 1 See Note 2, page 522. 2 FewtV used for Jo 6e ./wsJ, Jo Aave ./wsJ, requires de before the following infinitive ; and in the sense of Jo happen, it requires d; as : I have just seen her. I Je views de Za voir. If she should happen to know it. I Si elle venait a le savoir. 3 These adjectives require d, when the verb which precedes them has a personal nominative; they require de, when the nominative is impersonal • Ex. Cela est agreeable, bon, beau, a voir, a. dire, afaire. That is agreeable, fine to see, &c II est agreeable, bon, beau, de voir, de dire, defaire. It is agreeable, fine to see, &c 4 De or d, as it sounds best, in the active sense ; always de in the passive ; as, Dn m'a oblige" de or a lefaire. I They have obliged me to do it. Vai 6t& obligt de le faire. I have been obliged to do it. 524 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Ingenieux d, Inviter d, Laid d, Lent d, Manquer d, seMettre d, Montrer d, Obliger a, de,\ s'Obstiner a, Occupe d, s'Opiniatrer d, Parvenir d, Passer d, Penser d, Perdre d, Persister d, sePlaire d, Porter d, Premier d, Ingenious to. Invite to. tfgtfy to. SZow to. Omi* to. £e£ a&ow£ to. Show to. Oblige to. Obstinate to. iJwsy to. Obstinate to. Arrive to. Spend in. Think of. £ ose in. Persist in. Delight in. Induce to. FirsJ to. Preparer d, Pret d, Prompt d, Propre d, Recommencer d, Renoncer d, Resoudre d, Rester d, Reussir d, Servir d, Soigneux d, Songer d, Sujet d, Tacher d, Tarder d, Tendre d, Terrible d, de,2 Travailler d, Venir d, Prepare to. Ready to. Quick to. Fi* to. 'Begin again to. Renounce to. Resolve to. Stay to. Succeed to, in. Serve to. Careful to. Think of. Subject to, Jj?£ to. .Aim at. Belay to. Tend to. Terrible to. WorA; to. Come to. 6. French Verbs and Adjectives which govern the following infinitive by means of the preposition de. N. B. This usually happens after nouns used in a definite sense. He has the pleasure of seeing her. She has the vanity to think so. II a le plaisir de la voir. Elle a ia vanite de le croire. s'Abstenir de, Accuser de, Achever de, Affecter de, Afflige de, Aise de, Apprehender de, s'Attendre, de, d,3 Avertir de, s'Aviser de, Blamer de, Capable de, Cesser de, Chare >r de, Abstain from. Accuse of. Finish to. Affect to. Afflicted to. Glad to. Fear to. Expect to. Warn to. Bethink to. Blame to. Capable of, to. Cease to. Charge to. Charme de, Ravi de, Delighted with. Commander de, Command to. Commence r de, d,3 Begin to. Conjurer de, Conseiller de, Consoler de, Content de, Continuer de, d,3 Convaincre de, Convenir de, Craindre de, Curieux de. Entreat to. Advise to. Console for. Content to. Continue to. Convince of. Agree to. Fear to. Curious to. Decourager de, Defendre de, seDepecher de, Desesperer de, Desirer de, Determiner de, Detourner de, Differer de, Dire de, Discontinuer de, Disconvenir de, Dispenser de, Dissuader de, Doux de, Ecrire de, s'Efforcer de, Enjoindre de, Empecher de, s'Empresser de t Ennuye de Enrage de, Entreprendre de, Essayer de, d,3 E tonne de, Eviter de, Excuser de, Discourage with. Forbid to. ikfafce ^as^e to. Despair to. TFts/i, to. Determine to. Divert from. De/er to, Delay to. TeM to. Discontinue to. Disown to. Dispense with. Dissuade from. Pleasant to. Write to. Endeavor to. Enjoin to. Prevent to. Eager to. Tzred of. Enraged at. Undertake to. Try to. Astonished at. Avoid to. Excuse to. i See Note 4, page 523. 2 See Note 3, page 5S3. 3 As it sounds best, i. e., d' to avoid the sound of several d, and d to avoid th« gound of several de GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 525 Exempter de, Exhorter de, d,l Fache de, Feindre de, Finir de, Be Flatter de, seGarder de, Gronder de, se Hater de, Heureux de, Impossible de, Incapable de, Inspirer de, Juger a propos de, Jurer de, Juste de, Lasse de, Libre de, Mander de, Manquer de, Menacer de, Meriter de, Necessaire de, Negliger de, Offrir de, Omettre de, Ordonner de, Oublier de, Pardonner de, Permettre de, Persuader de, sePiquer de, Exempt from. Exhort to , Sorry to. Feign to. Finish to. Flatter to. Take care to. Scold for. Haste to. Happy to. Impossible to. Incapable of. Inspire to. Think proper to. Swear to. Just to. Tired of, with. At liberty to. Send word to. Fail to. Threaten to. Deserve to. Necessary to. Neglect to. Offer to. 0?m£ to. Order to. Forget to. Forgive for. Permit to. Persuade to. Pretend to. Plaindre de. Possible de, Prescrire ete, Presser rfe, Prier <2e, Promettre <2e. Proposer rfe, Recommandei tfe, Refuser dte, Regretter de, seRejouir de, Remercier de, seRepentir de, Reprocher de, Resoudre de, Risquer de, Rougir de, Satisfait de, Solliciter de, Sommer de, se Soucier de, Souhaiter de, Soup conner de, se Souvenir de, Suffire de, Suggerer de, Supplier de, Sur de, Surpris de, Tacher de, Tarder de, seVanter de, Pity to, for. Possible to. Prescribe to. Press to. Request to. Promise to. Propose to. Recommend to. Refuse to. Regret to. Rejoice to Thank for. Repent of, to. Reproach for. Resolve to. jRis& to. Blush to. Satisfied to, with. Solicit to. Summon to. Care to. Wm/i to. Suspect to. Remember to. Sufficient to. Suggest to. Entreat to. jSwre to. Surprised to. Endeavor to. iowg- to. Boast of. 7. The French infinitive preceded present participle after the verb £o fce. Am I writing ? You were reading. Wilt thou be working ? We would be walking. Who can be ringing ? They may be sleeping. People might be fishing. Let her be cfoi^g- no matter what, she must come. She must be practising. by a, is used to translate the English (76 1 , § 144—6.) Suis-je a e'crire ? Vous etiez a ZiVe. Seras-tu a travailler ? Nous serions a nous promener. Qui peut etre a sonner ? lis peuvent etre a dormir. On pourrait etre a pecher. Qu'elle soit d faire n'importe quoi, il faut qu'elle vienne. II faut qu'elle soit d pratiquer. $ 157.— PAST PARTICIPLE.— Participe Passe. 1. At (31 1 ) we saw that the Past Participle, (Participe Passe,) was usually placed after the auxiliaries avoir, to have, etre, to be, to form the past or compound tenses. [Young pupils, attend carefully to this direction.] I have seen. Hadst thou given ? [ J'ai vu. As-tu donne ? He shall have written. (58 1 .) II aura ecrit. i See Note 3, page 524. 526 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. <44\ ap- She may have left. We would have gone out. (60 2 .) They would have arrived sooner. Would you have dressed yourselves I Those young ladies would have ap- plied themselves to music. Although she made a mistake. Thou must have been afraid. He did not think you would have spoken so well and so long. 2. Since the past participle is connected sometimes with etre, sometimes with avoir, we must give rules on the subject. When connected with etre, the participe passe is considered as an adjec- tive, and agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb etre, to be. That takes place in passive verbs, (42 1 ,) and in the neuter verbs that take etre for an auxiliary, (34 1 .) In passive verbs, A gentleman must translate I am known, by A lady must translate I am known, by Boys must translate We are praised, by Girls must translate We are praised, by Elle pent avoir laisse. Nous serions sortis. lis seraient arrives plus toi. Vous seriez-vous habilles ? § 160—2.) Ces demoiselles se seraient pliquees a la musique. Quoiqu'elle se soit trompee. II faut que tu aies eu peur. (792.) II ne croyait pas que vous eussiez parle si bien et si long-temps. (79 2 .) Je suis connu. Je suis connue. Nous sommes loues. Nous sommes louees. With neuter verbs having etre for auxiliary, say : Elle est nee. Ces dames sont nees. Jean, seras-tu revenu a 9 heures? He was born. She was born. II est ne. They were born, (m.) These ladies lis sont nes. were born. John, wilt thou have returned by 9 o'clock ? She would not have died so soon. Elle ne serait pas morte si tot. 3. Connected with avoir, the participe passe agrees, not with the nomi- native or subject, but with the direct object (regime direct, $43) of the par- ticipe, when that regime precedes the participe, but not when it comes after. The regime indirect (§ 44) has no influence on the participe. Have you received my letters ? | Avez-vous recu mes lettres ? The regime, mes lettres, coming after regu, the participe does not change. But, in: The letters which you have received, the regime, which, preceding the participe, the latter must agree with the former, and be feminine plural. Hence the French phrase is : Les lettres que vous avez regues. Nous avons corrige les themes que vous avez ecrits et envoy es. Combien de coups avez-vous tires ? We have corrected the exercises that you have written and sent. How many shots did you fire? Combien de coups, the regime, being before, the participe is declinable. I have fired six. | J' en ai tire six. Here the regime is six ; and as it comes after the participe, the latter is indeclinable. (31 1 .) 4; The objective pronoun en may be regime direct ($43) or indirect, GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 527 (J 44,) but the participe is never declinable after it ; because en has neither gender nor number, and consequently, when regime direct, it cannot change the participe. As regime indirect, it has no influence on it. Have you gathered any flowers? I have gathered some. He has not answered the two letters Avez-vous cueilli des fleurs ? yen ai cueilli. (§43.) II n'a pas repondu aux deux lettres he has received from them. qu' il en a recues. (§ 44.) Here the participe is recues, fern, plur., not on account of en, regime indi- rect, but of que, its regime direct, which precedes, and with which it must agree, independently of en. 5. The rule given at 3 is easily observed in plain and ordinary cases in which the regime direct is easily distinguished ; but there are sentences, in which even grammarians can hardly decide. Without presenting those knotty points to the student, I will give him the principle by which he is to be guided, and leave the rest to his judgment. Sometimes after the participle, preceded by an object^ there is a verb in the infinitive ; then it is necessary to consider whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it. If the object is governed by the participle, the participle must be of the same gender and number as that object. Ex. : The letter I have given him to copy. ] La lettre que je lui ai donnee a copier. If the object is governed by the injinitive which follows the participle, the participle has no agreement with the object. As : The letter I have told him to copy. | La lettre que je lui ai dit de copier. 1 The participles plu, pleased ; du, owed, ought ; pu, been able, and voulu, been willing ; do not agree with the object that precedes them, because the infinitive of the foregoing verb is understood after them. Ex. : I have done him all the services that 1 Je lui ai rendu tous les services que I have been able, {to do understood.) I que j'ai^w, (lui rendre understood.) §157| .—PRESENT PARTICIPLE.— Participe Present. The Present Participle in English is used after every preposition except the preposition to, and it enters in the formation of every tense of almost every verb, as : I am speaking, I was, have been, had been, shall be, shall have been, &c. &c, speaking ; while in French, it is excluded from those tenses, and is much used only in connexion with the preposition en, the i If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object may more properly be placed. If the object can be placed after the participle, as in the first instance, The letter I have given him to copy, which may be turned, J have given him the letter to copy ; the participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it. If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in the second instance, The letter I have told him to copy, which might be turned, I have told him to copy the letter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed by the infinitive to cepy, and the participle has no agreement with it. 528 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. only one which in that language governs the present participle. In conse quence of that radical difference, it was thought inexpedient to direct the attention of the pupil to that part of the verb, for fear that its knowledge should lead him into constant errors, whilst a want of it could not be felt, since the French construction does not require it. But now that he has gone through the various portions of the verb, and that the same danger is not to be apprehended, we proceed to its introduction. As the present participle always ends in ant, and is invariable, it is attended with no difficulty. 1. It is formed from the first person plural of the present indicative, by changing its termination ons into ant. Ire Conj. We speak, Nous parlons. Speaking, Parlant. 2de Conj. We finish, Nous finissons. Finishing, Finissant. 3me Conj. We receive, Nous recevons. Receiving, Recevant. 4me Conj. We sell, Nous vendons. Selling, Vendant. 2. The five following verbs form exceptions to this rule : — To have, having. Avoir, ayant. To be, being. Etre, etant. To become due, 1 becoming due. £choir, echeant. To know, knowing. Savoir, sachant. To become, becoming. Seoir, seant. 3. It is used when an agent performs two actions at the same time, as in the following examples : The man eats while running. I correct while reading. I question while speaking. You speak while answering me. I improve by reading. Take exercise by walking, (walk for exercise.) Let us go leisurely to the store. When must he do it ? In going, (as he goes.) Call there as you come. Do they sing while dancing ? People ruin themselves by gambling. L'homme mange en courant. Je corrige en lisant. Je questionne en parlant. Vous parlez en me repondant. Je m'instruis en lisant. Prends de l'exercice en marchant. Allons au magasin en promenant. Quand faut-il qu'il le fasse ? En s'en allant. Passez-y en venant. Chantent-ils en dansant ? On se ruine en jouant. 4. En being the only French preposition which governs the present par- ticiple, as we have said, (R. 1,) it follows that, whatever may be the Eng- lish preposition connected with the present participle, it can be translated only by en, if the French participle is used. While digging the foundation, they found a skeleton. The house being built, we occupied it. Having studied, I recited well. En creusant les fondements, on trouva un squelette. (67 1 , N. 1.) La maison etant batie, nous l'occu- pames. Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. 1 In speaking of a lease, or a given portion of time. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 529 5. The present participle qualifying a noun, is considered as an adjective, (English, participial adjective; French, adjectif verbal,) and agrees with the noun in gender and number. A charming man. A charming woman. Charming men. Charming women. Un homme charmant. Une femme charmante. Des hommes charmants. Des femmes charmantes. 6. The English present participle, showing the action of a nominative case, is translated in French by the present participle, which is of course invariable. This actor, dancing gracefully, is much admired. Those actresses, dancing gracefully, are much admired. Cet acteur, dansant avec graces, est tres-admire. Ces actrices, dansant avec graces, sont tres-admirees. 7. The English present participle, relating to an objective case, may be translated by the French present participle, but the indicative is preferable. I found her coming here. See those children playing in the shade. Je la trouvai qui venait ici. Vois ces enfants se jouant (ou qui jouent) sous Tombrage. 8. The English present participle, governed by a verb or a preposition, {en excepted,) is translated by a French infinitive. I see her reading, and I am tired of I Je la vois lire, et je suis fatigue de waiting for her. Vattendre. 9. The English present participle, used as a nominative in a general sense, is never translated by the French present participle, but by an infinitive, or a noun, if there is one synonymous to the verb. Playing is the delight of children. I Jouer est le delice des enfants ; or, I Le jeu est le delice des enfants. 10. If not taken in a general sense, use a noun; or, if no synonymous noun can be found, give the sentence another turn. II donne tout son temps a V etude. Leur chant fut fort admire". Est-ce la cause de sa pauvrete t Pourquoi venez-vous si tard ? He gives all his time to studying. Their singing was much admired. Is that the cause of his being poor ? What is the reason of your coming so late? 11. The present participle, after to be, is translated by the infinitive. (See * 156—7.) * 158.— NEUTER VERBS.— Verbes Neutres. 1. In neuter verbs the action is intransitive, that is, it remains in the agent. They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always form their past tenses with the auxiliary avoir* to have ; on the contrary, some neuter verbs take etre* to be, and others avoir,* for their auxiliary, others again take sometimes avoir * and sometimes it re* according as action •r state is more particularly meant. 45 530 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 2. When conjugated with etre, their past participles agree with the nomi native of that verb. But, when conjugated with avoir, their past participles are invariable, for they have no regime direct with which they can agree. 3. Verbs which without being reflective, take itre, to be, as auxili- ary. (34 1 .) To To arrive, happen, arriver. die, deceder. attain, parvenir. disagree, disconvenir. be born, naitre. fall, tomber. become, devenir. g°> aller. come, venir. go out, sortir. come back, revenir. happen, come to come in, entrer. pass, survenir. decay, dechoir. intervene, intervenir. die, mourir. set out, partir. $159. PASSIVE VERBS.— Verbes Passifs. 1. Those verbs, although extensively used in English, are not so in French. In both languages they are formed, as taught (42 1 ), by means of the auxiliary verb to be, etre, joined to the past participle of any active verb. 2. The past participle being then used as an adjective, agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb to be. The boy is praised by his friends. The girl is praised by them. The boys are all blamed. Are not these girls admired ? Le garcon est loui par ses amis. Lajille est louee par eux. Les gargons sont tous blames. Ces jilles ne sont-elles pas admirees ? 3. The French, instead of the passive voice, use the active form with on for nominative, or else the reflective verb. The student should then be able to change any one form to another with ease. Active voice. J shut the door. Passive voice. The door is shut by me. J Jeferme la porte. Laporte est fermee par mot. The preposition by and the pronoun it governs are frequently left out ; for example, the passive voice of, people say, is, it is said, without adding by the people. — People know, it is Known. — They believe, it is believed. It is advisable to exercise the scholar on these alterations, principally from the English passive to the French active form with the pronoun on; as : Is it expected ? Is it believed ? I Le croit-on ? We are told. On nous dit. \ It will be seen. On verra. And to the reflective form. As : The church will be opened soon. Their house was sold yesterday. Water is carried everywhere. I/eglise s'ouvrira bientot. Leur maison se vendit hier. L'eau se conduit partout. 4. The infinitive of a passive verb coming after another verb, is rendered by on, as nominative indefinite of the following verb, which must be put in its proper tense. (77 J , N. B.) I fear to be laughed at. (Subj.) I Je crains qu' on ne se moque de moi. He is certain to be laughed at. (Ind.) I II est certain qu'ora se moquera de lui. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 531 ($ 71, &c.) I . . . myself, Je me . Thou . . . thyself, Tu*e. He . . . himself, 11 She . . . herself, Elle It . . . itself, 11, elle One . . . one* s self, On $160.— REFLECTED VERBS.— Verbes Mflechis. 1. When the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to the same person as the nominative, the verb is called Reflective. The French use nearly all their active verbs under a reflective form. They are as fond of that kind of verbs as the English are of the passive form, (% 159,) and frequently translate the latter by it. 2. In reflective verbs, the pronoun of the object is of the same person as that of the subject. Each person is therefore conjugated with a double personal pronoun. One is nominative ; the other objective, or reflective. We . . . ourselves. Nous nous. You . . . yourselves. Vous vous. They . . . themselves. lis se . . . They . . . themselves. Elles se. [se. The men . . themselves. Leshommes The girls . . themselves. Les filles se. N. B. The third person reflective is always sefor both genders and numbers. 3. In the imperative there is but one pronoun, the reflective or objective one. (§ 150, N. B.) Habillez- vous, dress yourself. Ne te trompe pas, do not make a mistake. Allons-wows-en, let us go away. {En, there, means from here, from there.) 4. In French, all reflective verbs form their compound tenses with the auxiliary verb etre, while, in English, they take to have. As, in this case, the verb to be is used in place of to have, the past participle of a reflective verb does not, as in neuter verbs, (34 l , § 158,) and passive verbs, (42 1 , § 159,) agree with the subject, but with the direct object, when that object is before, in the same manner as when to have (avoir) is the auxiliary. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) Hence the French write, Nous nous sommes coupes ; the past participle taking an s, because nous, its direct object, is before ; but in Nous nous sommes coupe les doigts, the participle coupe has no s, because its object (les doigts) comes after. 5. Most passive verbs having an inanimate object for their nominatives are reflected in French ; as, Les mauvaises nouvelles se repandent plus promptement que les bonnes, Bad news is sooner spread than good. On s' etonne de l'accroissement rapide des Etats-Unis, People are astonished at the rapid increase of the United States. (§ 159 — 3.) ADVEKBS. § 161. — 1. Adverbs qualifying verbs, are on that account placed as near the verb as possible. The French say: V aime mieux le boeuf que le mouton ; not, yaime le bceuf mieux, because the adverb mieux qualifies the verb j'aime, and not the noun, boeuf. (51 3 .) 2. Adverbs, expressed in a single word, are usually placed after the verb, in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in a com pound one ; as : 532 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. He writes well. II ecrit bien. He has written well II a bien ecrit. He has written badly. 11 a mal ecrit. 3. If the adverb is expressed in two or more words, it goes after the verb, whether the tense is simple or compound. He writes properly. He will write tolerably well. She sang well, as usual. II ecrit comme ilfaut. II ecrira passablement bien. Elle a bien chante, comme a V ordi- naire. 4. Combien, how much, many ? ne . . . que, only, but ; trop, too much, &c. ; beaucoup, much, many; assez, enough; ne . . . guere, but little, are called by the French adverbs of quantity. (Dir. 7 — 13 1 .) In English, to form adverbs from adjectives, the final ly is added ; as, wise, wisely. In French, that final is ment. 5. Adjectives which end in a vowel, become adverbs by adding ment to it ; as, sage, poli, ingenu, adjectives ; sagement, poliment, ingenument, adverbs. 6. Adjectives ending in nt, change that final to mment ; as, constant, pru- dent, patient, adjectives ; constamment, prudemment, patiemment, adverbs. 7. Adjectives which end neither in a vowel, nor in nt, become abverbs by adding ment to their feminine termination ; as, grand, doux, heureux, adjectives masculine ; grande, douce, heureuse, adjectives feminine ; grande- ment, greatly ; doucement, softly, slowly y sweetly; heureusement, happily, luckily, adverbs. NEGATIONS. § 162. — La connaissance que nous avons deja de la negation nous met a meme de deduire les neuf articles suivants : — Art. 1. La negation est generalement en deux mots, dont Tun est inva- riablement neon n 1 , et 1' autre un complement, qui change selon les circon- stances. 1 2. Ne se place toujours avant le verbe, et avant les pronoms objectife, s'il y en a. 3. Dans les temps simples, ne est avant, et le complement apres le verbe. 4. Dans les temps composes, le complement se place quelque fois avant le participe passe : Je ne l'ai pas vu. 5. Quelque fois apres. Je ra'ai vu personne. 6. Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composes, quand la negation forme le nominatif. Rien ne le d^courage, nothing discourages him. l The word complement means here completing the sense. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 7. Avant rinfinitif ne et son complement sont joints, et se placent gen6- ralement avant : Ne rien avoir. 8. Quand le verbe est omis, le complement seul exprime la negation : Fas lui, not he. 9. Neither, non plus. Art. 3. Ne, avant, le complement apres. — Liste alphabetique des nega- tions avec les temps simples : Ne que . . . Ne guere, pas beaucoup, qu'un peu. Ne ni ni. Ne .... ni ne .... ni ne. Je Ti'ecris, ne lis, ni ne traduis l'Allemand. Ne jamais. Ne .... jamais plus, or plus jamais. Ne .... jamais rien. But, only. (13 1 .) But little, only a little. (13i.) Neither . . . nor . . (before nouns. (5 1 .) Neither . . . nor . . (before verbs, sim- ple tenses.) Never. (3R) Never any more. Never anything. No, not . any. (2 1 .) Nobody, no one, no person, not any- body. No longer, no more, not any longer, more. No longer, anything, nothing more, &c. None, not any. In no manner, no wise, by no means. No sooner. (682, § 155.) Not. Not anything, nothing. (3 1 .) Not anywhere, nowhere. (46 2 .) Not at all, not in the least. Not in the least. Not much more, not many more, only a little more. Nothing but. Only a little, not much. (13 1 .) Only a little more, a few more. Ne... . pas de, point de. 1 Ne... . pas un, pas une. Ne... . aucun, aucune. Ne.. . nul, nulle. Ne.. . personne. (72.) Ne... . plus. (36 2 .) Ne.. . plus rien. N'en. . pas, point — aucun, ne, Ne... . d' aucune maniere. Ne.. . pas plutot. Ne.. . pas ou point. 1 Ne... . rien. Ne.. . nulle part. Ne... . pas du tout, point du tout Ne... . pas le moins du monde. Ne.. . guere plus — plus guere. Ne que — rien que. Ne .... qu'un peu, guere, pas beau- coup. Ne guere, pas beaucoup, qu'un peu, plus. l Purists find out some difference between pas and point. There is some, but it ia only one well acquainted with the language that could find use for the distinction Use at pleasure, the one or the other, merely consulting euphony. (412 ) 45* 534 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. NEGATIONS AVEC LES TEMPS COMPOSES. 4. Liste des negations, dont le complement est place avant le participe Je rf en ai guere vu. (31 l .) Je w'en ai pas beaucoup vu. Je w'en ai pas vu beaucoup. Je ne Pai ni vu, ni entendu. Je ne Vm jamais vu. Je ne l'ai jamais plus (ou plus jamais) vu. Je ne lui ai jamais rien dit. Je ne lui ai pas donne d' argent. Je ne lui en ai plus donne. Je ne lui ai plus rien donne. Ne lui en ai-je pas donne ? II ne l'eut pas plutot dit qu'il . . . Ne le lui avez-vous pas donne ? Ne leur avez-vous rien dit? Je ne lui en ai guere plus donne. Je ne lui en ai pas donne beaucoup plus. Je ne lui en ai pas du tout donne. Je ne lui en ai point donne du tout. dement est place apres le participe. Je ra'ai vu que cela. Nen a-t-il pris qu'unpeu ? IV' a-t-il vu ni 1'un ni 1' autre ? IV'en avez-vous appris aucun ? Qui ra'a vu per sonne ? Je ne l'ai fait d'aucune maniere. Ne l'avons-nous laisse nulle part ? II w'a fait que chanter, {rien que.) Je ft'en ai apporte qu'xrn peu plus. II ne l'a point change le moins du monde. 6. Negations employees comme nominatifs ou sujets. Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composes. But a little, only a little. Neitner . . nor . . nor . . (before verbs.) Never. Never . . . more or any more. Never . . . anything. No. No longer, no more, not any longer, &c. No longer, anything, &c. None, not any. No sooner. Not. Nothing, not . . . anything. Not much more. None at all, not . . . the least bit. 5. Liste des ne'gations dont le compl But, only. But a little, only a little. Neither . . . nor . . . nor . . . No, not any. Nobody, no one, not . . any one, &c. In no manner, nowise, by no means. Nowhere, not . . . anywhere. Nothing but. Only a little more. Not ... in the least . . . not ... a bit. Neither: Neither suit him. Neither could suit her. (past.) Nobody: No one will do it. Nobody did it. None, not one: None will go. Not one went. Ni l'un ni 1' autre ne lui conviennent. Ni l'un ni 1' autre w'ont pu lui con- venir. Personne ne le fera. Per sonne ne l'a fait. Aucun w'ira. Nulle 7i'ira. Nul w'ya e^e. Aucune w'y est allee. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Rien ne lui deplait. Rien ne l'a derangee. Jamais rien ne lui plait. Rien jamais ne lui a plu. Jamais personne ne lui a plu. Nothing : Nothing displeases him. Nothing disturbed her. Nothing ever : Nothing ever pleases him. Nothing ever pleased her. Nobody ever pleased her. 7. Avec l'infinitif. JVe et son complement son joints et places avant. He likes to do nothing. I II aime a ne rien faire. (43 2 .) He fears he shall have none. I II craint de ne pas en avoir. II y a quelques exceptions, que nous allons presenter. He has a mind to take but one. I II a envie de n 1 en prendre qu'un. He is afraid to have none, I II a peur de n' en avoir aucun. Tell him to invite nobody. I Dites-lui de %'inviter personne. He has a mind to go nomhere. II a envie de Waller nulle part. Les autres suivent la 7me regie generale. II est essentiel cependant d'ajouter que tres-souvent l'infinitif peut se mettre entre ne et le comple- ment. S II craint de ne jamais V avoir. ( II craint de ne P avoir jamais. 8. Quand le verbe est omis, (omitted or understood,) ne, se trouvant avant Test aussi ; consequemment le complement seul exprime la negation. Veut-il du pain et du fro mage ? II veut du pain, mais pas de fromage, (no cheese.) Le verbe veut etant omis ; il ne, qui sont avant, le sont aussi. Qu'a-t-il ? Rien. Quand viendra-t-il? Jamais ? Qui aimez-vous? Personne. Que leur faut-il 1 Rien de plus. 9. We have seen that neither „ . . nor, was translated by ne . . . ni . . . nx, (5 1 , § 162 — 3, 4, 6.) When neither is unconnected with nor, translate it by non plus, which means no more, not any more. (Page 169.] He fears he can never get it. I neither. Thou neither. Lui non plus. Ceci non plus. Le general non plus. Neither do I. Neither do you. Elle non plus. Cela non plus. Moi non plus. Nous non plus. Toi non plus. Vous non plus. Eux non plus. Elles non plus. Ceux-ci non plus. Celles-la nonplus, Les generaux non plus. PREPOSITIONS. % 163.— 1. French prepositions, except en, govern the infinitive of verbs, while in English they govern the present participle. (Rule 1.) They speak of coming without wri- ting to you, and before sending the present. We improve by reading and medita- ting. lis parlent de venir sans vous ecrire, et avant d'envoyer le present. On s'instruit en lisant et en medi- tant. ($ 157£.) 536 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 2. In French the preposition is always placed before the word it governs, and must be repeated before every one. In English, on the contrary, the preposition is placed either before or after, and need not be repeated. With whom were you speaking ? Whom were you speaking with ? I come from France, Italy, and Spain. Avec qui parliez-vous ? never Qui parliez-vous avec? Je viens de France, d'ltalie, et d'Espagne. 3. The preposition, and the verb it governs, may be separated by any negation or objective pronoun. I am sorry I did not know it. Has he sold the house without telling you of it ? Je suis fache dene pas V avoir su. A-t-il vendu la maison sans vous en avertir ? REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 4. Of, from ; De. We have noticed (§ 8, &c.) the contraction of de with the definite article le, les, into du, des ; and refer to those paragraphs. 5. To, at, in ; A. We have seen 1&% 8, 12, &c.) how a, connected with le, les, contracts into au, aux, and refer to those paragraphs. 6. As far as. Jusqu'a. (§ 13.) 7. At, in, to, relating to a person's residence, is chez. (18 1 .) I must go to my sister's. I II faut que j'aille chez ma soeur. They live at or in our house. I lis demeurent chez nous. Chez, means to, in or at the house of, consequently, its complement must be an objective personal pronoun, instead of the English possessive, and the word maison, house, is not used. At my house, (turn, tothehouseofme.) Chez moi. Chez lui, nous, vous, toi, elle, eux, elles, soi. Dechez quelqu'un, de chez moi. Rester chez or avec quelqu'un. To his, our, your, thy, her, their, one's house. From a person's house , my house. To live, stay with somebody. Chez sometimes relates to the character of a person, and means in. This virtue is a vice in you. ] Cette vertu est chez vous un vice. Chez, applied to nations, is translated by among. Among the Greeks and Romans. | Chez les Grecs et chez les Romains. 8. From ; De la part. From, with the verbs to go, to come, not fron^ the house, but from a person, is de la part, de la part de. Allez de ma part chez mon ami. De la part de qui venez-vous ? Go from me to my friend's. Whom do you come from ? Who sent you ? 9. Before ; Avant, devant. Avant relates to time or order, and is th* opposite of apres, after, Devant relates to situation, and is the opposite ot derriere, behind. (49 3 .) If you arrive before me, I will arrive after you. Walk before, he will walk behind. Si vous arrivez avant moi, j'arriveraj apr£s vous. Marchez devant, i\ marchera derriere. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 537 N. B. — Without an object, before is auparavant. I had bought it before. | Je l'avais achete auparavant! 10. By ; Pres de, a cote de. In the sense of near, by is pres de. By the, Pres de V , pres de la, pres du. ($$ 9, 11.) He was sitting by me. i II etait assis a cote de moi, (pres de.) We passed by them. | Nous passames pres d'eux, {dcdted\) N. B. By, joined to myself, thyself, &c, is equivalent to alone, and is expressed by the adjective seul. Was she by herself? | fitait-elle seule ? (312.) 11. In, into ; Dans, en. Bans is usually followed by a definite noun. I have read that in the Bible. I J'ai lu cela dans la Bible. We saw that in Racine. I Nous avons vu cela dans Racine. En is followed by an indefinite noun. There are many in France. | II y en a beaucoup en France. 12. In ; Dans, en. Speaking of time, in is expressed by dans, to denote the time after which an action will be performed. I will answer you in three days, that is, after three days, Je vous repondrai dans trois jours. (71 2 .) En, the time that will be employed in performing it. We shall be at Washington in 6 | Nous serons a Washington en 6 hours, (shall be 6 hours going.) heures. 13. At, in, to; a, en. Before a city, a ; before a country, en. (38 1 .) He goes to Madrid, in Spain. I II va a Madrid, en Espagne. She resides in Ireland, at Dublin. I Elle reside en Irlande, a Dublin. 14. In, on, not translated before nouns denoting any part of the day, or before the names of the days, or before dates. In the morning. — In the evening. j Le matin. — Le soir. (22 2 .) On Tuesday in the evening. I Mardi soir. (32 2 .) CONJUNCTIONS. §164. — 1. We have seen that the subjunctive mood (§151 — 2) required an antecedent which was frequently a conjunction. See at (79 1 ) a list of those which govern the subjunctive mood. Of course the others govern the indicative. A moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require ne before the verb which they govern. ($ 151 — 6). Jusqud, being a preposition, is used before a noun or pronoun, but not be- fore a verb. Until to morrow, jusqu' d demain, (37 1 .) Before a verb, jusqu'd ce que, the conjunction, is to be used. Until he come, (should come.) | Jusqu'd ce qu'W vienne, (79 1 .) 2. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first verb only, and que is used before the other verbs, and governs the same mood as the conjunction does. 538 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. As he is diligent and takes pains. Comme il est diligent et qu'il prend v de la peine. Unless he be diligent and take pains. A moins qu'A ne soit diligent et qu 1 il ne prenne de la peine. 3. When si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before the second verb, use que, and after it the subjunctive, although the verb which follows si, may govern the indicative. You will learn if you are diligent and | Vous apprendrez si vous ites diligent take pains. » et que vous preniez de la peine. 4. In (Dir. 6) we have seen that the conjunction that is frequently used to form two simple sentences into one, and that, although frequently omit- ted in English, it was always expressed in French. We here repeat it. I know he intends writing one. | Je sais qu'il compte en ecrire un. 5. Whether, used in the sense of if, is translated by si with the following verb in the indicative. As : Does she know whether he will go ? ] Sait-elle s'il ira ? Whether, in the sense of let, is translated by que, or soit que, with the following verb in the subjunctive. As : Whether she comes or not, or let her I Soit ^w'elle vienne ou non, nous come or not, we will go. | irons. Quelle vienne ou non, &c. 6. But for, were it not for, correspond to sans, and so does if it had not been. As : But for his friends. Had it not been for his friends, he \- Sans ses amis, il aurait et6 renvoye. would have been dismissed. §170.— See (§ 161. &c.) § 171 — See (§ 162, &c.) §180.— See (§160, &c.) § 200.— See (§ 137, &c.) nds, he )■* I. J CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 539 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB A VOIR, TO HAVE. Infinitive Mood. Avoir, to have. | Avoir eu, Participles. to have hadi present. Ayant, having. PAST. past. Ayant eu, having had. Eu, m. ; eue, /. had. Indicative Mood. present. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. J'ai. J have. J'ai eu, I have had. Tuas, thou hast. Tu as eu, thou hast had. 11 a, he has. 11 a eu, he has had. Nous avons, we have. Nous avons eu, we have had. Vous avez, you have. Vous avez eu, you have had. lis ont, they have. Ds ont eu, they have had. imperfect. PLUPERFECT. JPavais, I had. J'avais eu, I had had. Tu avals, thou hadst. Tu avais eu, thou hadst had. 11 avait, he had. 11 avait eu, he had, had. Nous avions, we had. Nous avions eu, we had had. Vous aviez, you had. Vous aviez eu, you had had. lis avaient, they had. lis avaient eu, they had had. preterit definite. PRETERIT ANT OR. J'eus, I had. J'eus eu, I had had. Tu eus, thou hadst. Tu eus eu, thou hadst had. H eut, he had. n eut eu, he had had. Nous eumes, we had. Nous eumes eu, we had had. Vous eutes, you had. Vous eutes eu, you had had. lis eurent, they had. Ds eurent eu, they had had. future. PAST ] JPaurai, I shall have. J'aurai eu, I shall have had. Tu auras, thou ehalt have. Tu auras eu, thou shcdt have had. 11 aura, he shall have. 11 aura eu, he shall have had. Nous aurons, we shall have. Nous aurons eu, we shall have had. Vous aurez, you shall have. Vous aurez eu, you shall have had. lis auront, they shall have. lis auront eu, they shall have had. conditional present. CONDITIONAL PAST. J'aurais, I should have. J'aurais eu, I should have had. Tu aurais, thou shouldst have. Tu aurais eu, thou shouldst have had. 11 aurait, he should have. 11 aurait eu, he should have had. Nous aurions, we should have. Nous aurions eu, we should have had. Vous auriez, you should have. Vous auriez eu, you should have had. lis auraient, they should have. lis auraient eu, they should have had. Imperative Mood. Aie, have {thou.) Ayons, let us have. Ayez, have (you.) Subjunctive Mood. present. that I may have, that thou mayst have, that he may have, that we may have. that you may have, that they may have. IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse, that I might have. Que tu eusses, that thou mightst have. Qu'il eut, that he might have. Que nous eussiona, that we might have. Que vous eussiee, that you might have. Qu'ils eussent, that they might have. Que j J aie, Que tu aies, Qu'il ait, Que nous ayons, Que vous ayez, Qu'ils aient, preterit. Que j 'aie eu, that 1 may have Que tu aies eu, that thou mayst have Qu'il ait eu, that he may have Que nous ayons eu, that we may have Que vous ayez eu, that you may have Qu'ils aient eu, that they may have pluperfect. Que j'eusse eu, that I might Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst Qu'il eut eu, that he might Que nous eussions eu, that we might Que vous eussiez eu, that you might Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might had. had. had. had. 1 . 540 CONJUGATION OF ETRE. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, TO BR Infinitive Mood. PRESENT. PAST. Etre, to be. Avoir ete, to have been, Participles. PRESENT. Etant, being. PAST. PAST. Ayant ete, having been. Ete, been. Indicative Mood. PRESENT. preterit indefinite. Je suis, / am. J'ai ete, J have been. Tues, thou art. Tu as ete, thou hast been. 11 est, he is. 11 a ete, he has been. Nous somnies, we are. Nous avons ete, we have been. Vous etes, you are. Vous avez ete, you have been. Hs sont, they are. lis ont ete, they have been. IMPERFECT PLUPE J'etais, I was. J'avais ete, I had been. Tu etais, thou wast. Tu avais ete, thou hadst been. 11 etait, he was. 11 avait ete, he had been. Nous etions, we were. Nous avions ete we had been, Vous etiez, you were. Vous aviez ete, you had been. lis etaient, they were. lis avaient ete, they had been. PRETERIT DEFINITE. preterit anterior. Je fus, I was. J'eus ete, I had been. Tufus, thou wast. Tu eus ete, thou hadst been. Ilfut, he was. II eut ete, he had been. Nous fumes, we were. Nous eumes ete, we had been. Vous futes, you were. Vous eutes ete, you had been. lis furent, they were. lis eurent ete, they had been. FUTURE. PAST FUTURE. Je serai, I shall be. J'aurai ete, I shall have been. Tu seras, thou shalt be. Tu auras ete, thou shalt have been. 11 sera, he shall be. 11 aura ete, he shall have been, Nous serons, we shall be. Nous aureus ete, we shall have been. Vous serez, you shall be. Vous aurez ete, you shall have been. lis serout, they shall be. lis auront ete, they shall have been. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. CONDITIONAL PAST. Je serais, I should be. J'aurais ete, I should have been. Tu serais, thou shouldst be. Tu aurais ete, thou shouldst have been. 11 serait, he should be. 11 aurait ete, he should have been. Nous serions, we should be. Nous aurions ete, we should have been. Vous seriez, you should be. Vous auriez ete, you should home been. lis seraient, they should be. Ds auraient ete, they should have been. Imperative Mood. Sois, be (thou.) Soyons, let us be. Soyez, be (you.) Subjunctive Mood. Que je sois, Que tu sois, Qu'il soit, Que nous soyons, Que vous soyez, Qu'ils soient, Que je fusse, Que tu fusses, Qu'il flit, Que nous fussions, Que vous fussiez, Qu'ils fussent, present. that I may be. that thou mayst be. that he may be. that we may be. that you may be. that they may be. imperfect. that I might be. that thou mightst be. that he might be. that we might be. that you might be. that they might be. preterit. Que j'aie ete, that I may have been. Que tu aies ete, that thou mayst have been. Qu'il ait ete. that he may have been. Que nous ayonsete, that we may have been. Que vous ayez ete, that you may have been. Qu'ils aient ete, that they may have been. pluperfect. Que j'eusse ete, that I might ~\ Que tu eusses ete, that thou mightst § Qu'il eut ete, that he might { £ Que nous eussions ete, that we might ( g Que vous eussiez ete, that you might j a Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might) "** FIRST CONJUGATION ER. 541 FIRST CONJUGATION— in ER. Infinitive Mood. PRESENT. PAST. Parler, to speak. Avoir parle, to have spoken. Participles. PRESENT. Parlant, speaking. PAST. PAST. Ayant parle, having spoken* Parte, spoken. Indicative Mood. PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. Je parle, J speak. J'ai parle, I have spoken. Tu paries, thou speakest. Tu as parle, thou hastspoken. D parle, he speaks. II a parle, he has spoken. Nous parlons, we speak. Nous avons parle, we have spoken. Vous parlez, you speak. Vous avez parle, you have spoken. lis parlent, they speak. lis ont parle, they have spoken. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Je parlais, I was speaking: J'avais parle, / had spoken. Tu parlais, thou wast speaking. Tu avais parle, thou hadst spoken. n purl ait, he was speaking. 11 avait parle, he had spoken. Nous parlions, we were speaking. Nous avions parle, we had spoken. Vous parliez, you were speaking. Vous aviez parle, you had spoken. [Is parlaient, they were speaking. Ds avalent parle, they had spoken. PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je parlai, I spoke. J'eus parle, I had spoken. Tu parlas, thou spokest. Tu eus parle, thou hadst spoken. 11 parla, he spoke. 11 eut parle, he had spoken. Nous parlames, we spoke. Nous eiimes parle, we had spoken. Vous parlates, you spoke. Vous elites parle, you had spoken. Ds parlerent, they spoke. Us eurent parle, they had spoken. FUTURE. PAST FUTURE. Je parlerai, I shall speak. J'aurai parle, / shall have spoken. Tu parleras, thou shalt speak. Tu auras parle, thou shalt have spoken. 11 parlera, he shall speak. 11 aura parle, he shall have spoken. Nous parlerons, we shall speak. Nous aurons parle, we shall have spoken. Vous parlerez, you shall speak. Vous aurez parle, you shall have spoken. lis parleront, they shall speak. lis auront parle, they shall have spoken. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. CONDITIONAL PAST. Je parlerais, I should speak. J'aurais parle, / should have spoken Tu parlerais, thou shouldst speak. Tu aurais parle, thou shouldst have spoken 11 parlerait, he should speak. 11 aurait parle, he should have spoken Nous parlerions, we should speak. Nous aurions parle, we should have spoken. Vous parleriez, you should speak. Vous auriez parle, you should have spoken. lis parleraient, they should speak. Imperati lis auraient parle, they should have spoken, ve Mood. Parle, sj )eak or do speak (thou.) Parlons, le t us speak. Parlez, sp SUBJUNC1 eak or do speak (you.) ^ive Mood. PRESENT. PRETERIT. Que je parle, that I may speak. Que j'aie parle, that I may "j ^ Que tu aies parle, that thou mayst £ Que tu paries, that thou mayst speak. Qu'il parle, that he may speak. Qu'il ait parle, that he may ! ^ Que nous parlions, that we may speak. Que nous ayons parle, that we may f £ Que vous parliez, that you may speak. Que vous ayez parle, that you may J | Qu'ils parlent, that they may speak. Qu'ils aient parle, that they may J •< IMPERF ICT. PLUPERFECT. Que je parlasse, that ri ^ that thou j § that he ! £■ Que j'eusse parle, that I might ' i Que tu parlasses. Que tu eusses parle, that thou mightst Qu'il pariat, Qu'il eut parle, that he might i Que nous parlassions, that we ( •* Que nous eussions parle, that we might Que vous parlassiez that you J ~t,. Que vous eussiez parle, that you might g Qu'ils paiiassent, that they 1 g 46 Qu'ils eussent park-, that they might -5 542 SECOND CONJUGATION— IR. SECOND CONJUGATION— in IR. Infinitive Mood. Finir, PRESENT. to finish. \ Avoir fini, Participles. "past. to have finished. Finissant, Fini, PRESENT. PAST. finishing. \ Ayantfini, finished. \ Indicative Mood. past. having finished. PRESENT. Je finis, I finish. Tu finis, thoufinishest. II finit, he finishes. Nous finissons, we finish. Vous finissez, you finish. Us finissent, they finish. IMPERFECT. Je finissais, I was finishing . Tu finissais, thou wast finishing. II finissait, he was finishing. Nous finissions, we were finishing. Vous finissiez, you were finishing. lis finissaient, they were finishing. PRETERIT DEFINITE. Je finis, I finished. Tu finis, thou finis hedst. II finit, he finished. Nous finimes, we finished. Vous finites, you finished. lis finirent, they finished. FUTURE. Je finirai, I shall finish. Tu finiras, thou shalt finish. II finira, he shall finish. Nous finirons, we shall finish. Vous finirez, you shall finish. Us finiront, they shall finish. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. Je finirais, I should finish. J'aurais fini, Tu finirais, thou shouldst finish. Tu aurais fini, II finirait, he should finish. II aurait fini, Nous finirions, we should finish. Nous aurions fini, Vous finiriez, you should finish. Vous auriez fini, lis finiraient, they should finish. lis auraient fini, Imperative Mood. Finis, finish (thou.) Finissons, let us finish. Finissez, finish (you.) Subjunctive Mood. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. J'ai fini, I have finished. Tu as fini, thou hast finished. II a fini, he has finished. Nous avons fini, we have finished. Vous avez fini, you have finished. lis ont fini, they have finished. PLUPERFECT. J'avais fini, I had finished. Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished. II avait fini, he had finished. Nous avions fini, we hadfinished. Vous aviez fini, you hadfinished. lis avaient fini, they hadfinished. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. J'eus fini, I had finished. Tu eus fini, thou hadst finished. II eut fini, he hadfinished. Nous eiimes fini, we hadfinished. Vous eutes fini, you had finished. lis eurent fini, they hadfinished. PAST FUTURE. J'aurai fini, / shall have finished. Tu auras fini, thou shalt have finished. II aura fini, he shall have finished. Nous aurons fini, we shall have finished. Vous aurez fini, you shall have finished. lis auront fini, they shall have finished. CONDITIONAL PAST. I should] ^ thou shouldst « he should I g we should '«£ you should £ they should J j| PRESENT. Quejefinisse, that I may finish. Que tu finisses, that thou mayst finish. Qu'il finisse, that he may finish. Que nous finissions, that we may finish. Que vous finissiez, that you may finish. Qu'ils finissent, that they may finish. IMPERFECT. Quejefinisse, that I might finish. Que tu finisses, that thou mights t finish. Qu'il finit, that he might finish. Que nous finissions, that we might finish. Que vous finissiez, that you might finish. Qu'ils finissent, that they might finish. PRETERIT Que j'aie fini, that I may ' Que tu aies fini, that thou mayst Qu'il ait fini, that he may Que nous ayons fini, that we may Que vous ayez fini, that you may Qu'ils aient fini, that they may PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse fini, that I might Que tu eusses fini, that thou mightst Qu'il eut fini, that he might Que nous eussions fini, that we might Que vous eussiez fini, that you might Qu'ils eussent fini, that they might THIRD CONJUGATION OIR. 543 THIRD CONJUGATION— in OIR. Infinitive Mood. Recevoir, Recevant, Recu, to receive. | Avoir recu, Participles. PBESENT. PAST. receiving. received. Indicative Mood. Ayant recu, to have received. having received. Fe recois, ru recois, II recoit, Nous recevons, Vous recevez, JOs recoivent, Je recevais, Tu recevais, H recevait, Nous recevions, Vous receviez, lis recevaient, IMPERFECT. / receive. thou receivest. he receives. we receive. you receive. they receive. I was receiving. thou wast receiving. he was receiving. we were receiving. you were receiving. they were receiving. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. J'ai recu, I have Tu as recu, thou hast II a recu, he has Nous avons recu, we have Vous avez recu, you have lis ont recu, * they have PLUPERFECT. J'avais recu, Tu avais recu, II avait recu, Nous av ions recu, Vous aviez recu, lis avaient recu, I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had Je recus, Tu recus, II recut, Nous recumes, Vous recu tea, lis recurent, ] Je recevrai, Tu recevras, II recevra, Nous recevrons, Vous recevrez, Us recevront, PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je recevrais, Tu recevrais, II recevrait, Nous recevrions, Vous recevriez, Ite recevraient, / received. J'eus recu, / had thou receivedst. Tu eus recu, thou hadst he received. II eut recu, he had we received. Nous eufnes recu, we had you received. Vous eutes recu, you had they received. lis eurent recu, they had E. PAST FUTURE. / shall receive. J'aurai recu, / shall have thou shalt receive. Tu auras recu, thou shalt have he shall receive. H aura recu, he shaU have we shall receive. Nous aurons recu, we shall have you shall receive. Vous aurez recu, you shall have they shall receive. lis auront recu, they shall have CONDITIONAL PAST. I should receive. J'aurais recu, I should have thou shouldst receive. Tu aurais recu, thou shouldst have he should receive. rj aurait recu, he should have we should receive. Nous auriorls recu, tee should have you should receive. Vous auriez recu, you should have they should receive. Us auraient re^u, they should have Imperative Mood. Recois, receive (thou.) Recevons, let us receive. Rec«vez, receive {you.) Subjunctive Mood. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. received, received, received, received, received, received. received, received, received, received, received, received. received received received received received received received received received received received received received, received received received received, received. PRESENT. Que je recoive, that J may receive. Que tu recoives, that thou mayst receive. Qu'il recoive, that he may receive. Que nous recevions, that we may receive. Que vous receviez, that you may receive. Qu'ils recoivent, that they may receive. IMPERFECT. Que je recusse, that I) c Que tu recusses, that thou "g Qu'il reCHt, that he \ 8 Que nous recussions, that we ( t Que vous recusaiez, that you I "^ Qu'ils recussent, that they J I PRETERIT. Quej'aie recu. that I may) ">j Que tu aies recu, that thou mayst Qu'il ait recu, * that he may Que nous ayons recu, that we may Que vous ayez recu. that you may Qu'ils aient recu,* that they may PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse recu, that I might \ "§ Que tu eusses recu. that thou mightst | •§ Qu'il eut recu, * that he might ! S Que nous eussionsrecu, that me. might ( *• Que vous eussiez recu, that you might •£ Qu'ils eussent recu, * that they might) % 544 FOURTH CONJUGATION RE. FOURTH CONJUGATION— in RE. Infinitive Mood. Vendre, Vendant, Vendu, to sell. | Avoir vendu, Participles. Je vends, Tu vends, II vend, Nous vendons, Vous vendez, lis vendent, Je vendais, Tu vendais, II vendait, Nous vendions, Vous vendiez, lis vendaient, PRESENT. PAST. PRESENT. sold. Ayant vendu, to have sold* having- sold. Indicative Mood. I sell. thou sellest. he sells. we sell. you sell. they sell. imperfect. / was selling-. thou wast selling. he was selling. we were selling. you were selling. they were selling. preterit definite. Je vendis, Tu vendis, U vendit, Nous vendimes, Vous vendites, lis vendirent, ] Je vendrai, Tu vendras, II vendra, Nous vendrons, Vous vendrez, Us vendront, / sold. thou soldest. he sold. we sold. you sold. they sold. I shall sell. thou shalt sell. he shall sell. we shall sell. you shall sell. they shall sell. conditional present. Je vendrais, Tu vendrais, II vendrait, Nous vendrions, Vous vendriez, lis vendraient, / should sell. \ thou shouldst sell. he should sell. we slwuld sell. you should sell. they should sell. Imperativ Vends, Vendons, Vendez, SUBJUNCTI Que je vende, Que tu vendes, Qu'il vende, Que nous vendions, Que vous vendiez, Qu'il s vendent, PRESENT. that I may sell. that thou mayst sell. that he may sell. that we may sell. that you may sell. that they may sell. imperfect. Que je vendisse, that I might sell. Que tu vendisses, that thou mightst sell. Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. Que nous vendissions, that we might sell. Que vous vendissiez, that you might sell. Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell. preterit indefinite. J'ai vendu, / have sold. Tu as vendu, thou hast sold. 11 a vendu, he has sold. Nous avons vendu, we have sold. Vous avez vendu, you have sold. lis ont vendu, they have sold. pluperfect. J'avais vendu, / had sold. Tu avais vendu, thou hadst sold. II avait vendu, he had sold. Nous avions vendu, we had sold. Vous aviez vendu, you had sold. lis avaient vendu, they had sold. preterit anterior. J'eus vendu, I had sold. Tu eus vendu, thou hadst sold. II eut vendu, he had sold. Nous eumes vendu, we had sold. Vous eutes vendu, you had sold. Us eurent vendu, they had sold. PAST FUTURE. J'aurai vendu, / shall have Tu auras vendu, thou shalt have II aura vendu, he shall have Nous aurons vendu, we shall have Vous aurez vendu. Us auront vendu, CONDITIONAL PAST. J'aurais vendu, / should have Tu aurais vendu, thou shouldst have II aurait vendu, he should have Nous aurions vendu, we should have Vous auriez vendu, lis auraient vendu, e Mood. sell {thou.) let us sell, sell (you.) ve Mood. preterit. Que j'aie vendu, that I may Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst Qu'il ait vendu, that he may Que nous ayons vendu, that we -may Que vous ayez vendu, that you may Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse vendu, that I might Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightst Qu'il eut vendu, that he might Que nouseussions vendu, that we might Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might you shall have they shall have you should have they should have sold, sold, sold, sold, sold. sold, sold, sold, sold, sold, sold. u REFLECTED VERB. 545 CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTED VERB. Infinitive Mood. Se lever, Se levant, Leve, to rise. | S'etre leve. Participles. present, past. rising. S'etant leve, to have risen* having risen. PRESENT. Je me leve, Tu te leves, II se leve, Nous nous levons, Vous vous levez, Us se levent, Je me levais, Tu te levais, n se levait, Nous nous levions, Vous vous leviez, lis se levaient, MPERFECT. / was rising. thou wast rising. he was rising. we were rising. you were rising. they were rising. PRETERIT DEFINITE, Indicative Mood. preterit indefinite. I rise, Je me suis leve, I have risen, thou riseet. Tu t'es leve, thou hast risen. he rises. II s'est leve, he has risen. we rise. Nous nous sommes leves, we have risen. you rise. Vous vous etes leves, you have risen. they rise, i lis se sont leves, they have risen. PLUPERFECT. i Je m'etais leve, / had risen. Tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen. ' II s'etait leve, he had risen. Nous nous etions leves, we had risen. Vous vous etiez leves, you had risen. j lis s'etaient leves, they had risen. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je me fus leve, / had risen. Tu te fus leve, thou hadst risen. II se fut leve, he had risen. Nous nous fumes leves, we had risen. Vous vous Rites leves, you had risen. lis se furent leves, they had risen. PAST FUTURE. Je me serai leve, / shall have risen, thou shalt have risen. II se sera leve, he shall have risen. Nous nous serons leves, we shall have risen. Vous vous serez leves, you shall have risen. lis se seront leves, they shall have risen, CONDITIONAL PAST. Je me leverais, I should rise, j Je me serais leve, I should) . Tu te leverais, thou shouldst rise, j Tu te serais leve, thou shouldst I II se leverait, he should rise, j II se serait leve, he should { -~ Nous nous leverions, we should rise, j Nous nous serions leves, we should f ^ Vous vous leveriez, you should rise. Vous vous seriez leves, you should § lis se leveraient, they should rise. I lis se seraient leves, they should J "** Imperative Mood. Leve-toi, rise (thou.) Levons-nous, let us rise. Levez-vous, rise {you.) Subjunctive Mood. Je me levai, Tu te levas, II se leva, Nous nous levames, Vous vous levates, lis se leve rent, futi Je me leverai, Tu te leveras, Ilselevera, Nous nous leverons, Vous vous leverez, lis se leveront, i" rose. thou rosest. he rose. we rose. you rose. they rose. I shall rise. thou shalt rise. \ Tu te seras leve, he shall rise. we shall rise. you shall rise. they shall rise. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. PRESENT. Que je me leve, that I may rise. Que tu te leves, that thou mayst rise. Qu'il se leve, that he may rise. Que nous nous levions, that we may rise. Que vous vous leviez, that you may rise. O^ils se levent, that they may rise. IMPERFECT. Que je me levasse, that I) Que tu te levasses, that thou | Qu'il se levat, that he \ t Que nous nous levassions, that we ( apres eux. Afterwards, ensuite, 88. Agree, (to\ to a thing, convenirde quelque chose, 276 ; consentir a, 354. Again, anew), de nouveau, 344. Aimers, to like to, &c, 114; aimer mieux, to like better, to prefer, 263. Ainsi, thus or so, 152 ; ainsi que, as, as well as, 331. Aise, bien aise de, glad, 317; etre a so?i aise, to be comfortable, well off, at one's ease ; etre mal a son aise, etre gene, to be uncomfortable, 395. Alight, (toJ from one's horse, to dismount, descendre de cheval, 270; de voiture, 303. All, every, tout, tous, toute, toutes, 110; all at once, all of a sudden, &c. ; tout a coup, tout a la fois, soudaine ment, 287; all that which, all which, all, § 91. Never omitted in French, tout ce qui, ce que. Aller, to go, 84 ; alle, gone, 165; present tense, 88 to 96; ete, past participle of etre, with the auxiliary avoir used for alle, past participle of aller, which is always connected with etre as auxiliary, 160 ; aller en voiture a cheval, a pied, 214 ; aller, to travel to a place, 213 ; aller bien, to fit, to go right, 239. Aller and venir, followed by infinitive, 374. S'en aller, to go away, 219, 242, 243. Almost, presque, 180. Alone, by one's self, seul, e, 367. Along, le long du, de la, &c, 378. Aloud, haut, d haute voix, 264. Already, dejd, 152. Always, toujours, 142. Amuse, .to,) one's self, (to enjoy, to divert, s'amuser a, 217. An, annee, year, their difference, 289, N. 3. Anecdotes : Witty answer of a young prince, 411. The French lan- guage, 412. A shopkeeper's answer, 411. The Emperor Charles V., 442. The entrance of a king into a town, 442. The last request of an old man, 443. The three questions, 444. An- swer of a lazy young man, 445. Hearing counsel, 445. Noble answer of a lady, 445. Cornelia, 447. Po- liteness, 450. Mildness, 447. The contest of art, 451. Zeuxis, 451. The corporal of Frederick the Great, 451. Marshal de Turenne, 451. An affect- ing narrative, 451. Interesting nar- rative, 453. Angry (to be) with somebody, etre fdche contre quelqu 'un ; about some- thing, de quelque chose, 319. Any, some, (before a noun,! du, de la, des, 55, 281 ; before an adjec- tive, de, 57, 281. See Some. § 62, en. Anybody, somebody, any one, some one, quelqu 1 un, 39. INDEX. 561 Anything, something, quelque chose, 28 ; good, de bon, 28. Appear, to,) to look like, avoir Vair, la mine ; she looks angry, ap- pears to be angry, elle a Vair fdche, 332. Apply, (to,) §64, s'adresser d. Apres, § 63, after ; always fol- lowed by the infinitives avoir or etre. Are you hungry, 28 ; thirsty, 28 ; sleepy, 29. Articles, 461. Their distinction ; general obs., 463 ; difference in the use of the article in French and English, § 2, 5 ; Indefinite, from § 3 to 7 ; when the definite le, la, les, is used for the English indefinite, § 7. Definite, §8; their functions, § 14; placed before every noun, &c, § 15 ; before proper names of countries, § 16 ; not of individuals, § 17 ; when two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, do not repeat the article, § 18 ; 1st Partitive, before nouns, § 19 to 25 ; 2d Partitive, before an adjective or after a negation, § 26 to 28; Possessive, my, thy, &c, §29, 31 ; Demonstrative, this, that, these, those, Ce, cet, cette, ces. As far as, jusqu' a, a la, d V , qu'au, aux, § 13. As much ... as many ... as, § 138 — 1, autant de . . . que de . . . As . . . as, § 138 — 1 ; aussi . . . que. Assez de, § 137—2, enough ; § 161 —4. At, to, in, § 163 — 5, d, 7 ; chez ; d, before a city, 13 ; en, before a country. Au, § 8 ; aux, a la, &c, to the. Au mien, d la mienne, aux miens, aux miennes, § 104 ; to mine. Au milieu d'eux, §63, in the midst of them. Aucun, aucune, none, not any, §162. Auparavant, § 163 — 9 ; before. Autant de ..., &c. See As much. Auquel, §79; to whom, which, auxquels, auxquelles , § 125. Autre, d'autres, § 28. Auxiliary. Verbs which in Eng- lish generally take to have for their auxiliary, while in French they take etre, § 158—3. Avant, before, takes de before the infinitive, 142 ; pas avant, not until, 310. Avec, with, § 63. Avoir, to have ; eu, had, 160, 162, Obs. 75. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. When speaking of dimension we use in French avoir when the English use to be, 338. Il y a, there is, there are, 180, 238, 246, 247, 248, 338. 11 y a cannot be rendered into English by there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question, How long is it since ? 246 ; nor when it is used in reply to the question, How far ? Quelle dis- tance ? 252. AvoiE, mal, to ache, to feel a pain, 284. Awake, (to,) reveiller, se reveiller, 269. B. Be, (to,) etre ; been, ete, N. 2, 3, 157 l Obs. 74, 160; to be at home, etre d la maison, 84; to be in the country, etre d la campagne, 289. To Be, is rendered by devoir, when it expresses obligation, 185. To Be, translated by avoir. Are you hungry? Avez-vous /aim ? I am thirsty, fai soif, 28: avez-vous sommeil ? sleepy, 29 ; chaud, froid, peur, warm, cold, afraid, 31. What is the matter? Qu' avez-vous ? 34. Am I afraid, ashamed? Ai-je peur ? i honte ? 45. Am I right, wrong ? Ai- \je raison? tort 1 ? 36. How old are I you ? Quel age avez-vous ? 180. How I high is his house ? Combien sa maison a-t-elle de haut ou de hauteur ? It is nearly fifty feet high , elle a environ cinquante pieds de haut, 338. i To Be under obligations to some 562 INDEX. one, avoir des obligations d quel- qu'un, 336. My feet are cold, fai froid aux pieds ; her hands are cold, elle a froid aux mains, 110. To Be in want of, avoir besoin de, 112. To Be, translated by se porter, 275. To Be, translated by faiee. Is it windy ? Fait-xl du vent ? It is stormy, ilfait de Vorage. Is it foggy ? Fait-il du brouillard? 208, 215, 301. (See Weather, Warm, Cold, Dark, &c.) Is it good travelling ? Fait-il bon voyager ? 213, 227, 228. Be, (to,) followed by a present par- ticiple, is translated by etre with d and an infinitive; I am reading, je suis d lire, § 156 — 7. Beau, bel, fine, handsome ; how these two words must be employed, 192, 287. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. Beaucoup de, much, many, a good deal of, very much, 65, 147, 376. Dir. 7—459, § 137—2. Never say un beaucoup, a great many. Because, parce que, N. 1, 80, 187. Become, (to,) devenir* What has become of him? Qu'est-il devenu? 225. What will become of him ? Que deviendra-t-il ? 242. What has become of your aunt? Qu' est deve- nue votre tante? 316. To become ridiculous, tomber dans le ridicule, 388. Before, avant de. Do you speak before you listen ? Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? 142. Before, devant,Obs. 65, 250. The day before, la veille ; the day before Sunday, la veille de dimanche, 340. Avant, devant, au- paravant, their difference, § 163 — 9. Beg, (to,) prier de, 304. To beg some one's pardon, demander pa'-don a quelqu" 1 un, 383. Behave, (to,) se comporter, 270, 393. Believe, (to,) croire,* 149 175. (See Crotre.*) Below, or down stairs, en has, 193. Besides, outre; besides that, ou* tre cela ; besides, (moreover,) en outre, 378. Better — than, mieux~ quede,263. To be better, valoir mieux, 199. 13 it better ? Vaut-il mieux ? 270. Between, entre, 329. Bien, well, 140, 147, 319. Bien, well, a great deal, a great many, is always followed by the partitive ar- ticle, but beaucoup is followed by the preposition de, 376. Bientot, soon, shortly, 185 ; soon, very soon, 259. Blow, (a,) un coup, 244. Blow, (to,) to blow out, souffler, 342; to blowout one's brains, bru- ler la cervelle d quelqu'un; he has blown out his brains, il s 1 est brule la cervelle, 368. Board, (to,) with any one or any- where, etre en pension, se mettre en pension, 385. Boarding-house, (a,) a boarding- school, une pension; to keep a board- ing-house, tenir* pension, 385. Boast, (to,) to brag, sefaire valoir, 428. Boire,* to drink ; bu, drunk, 172. Bon, good, 26, 284 ; etre bon a quel- que chose, to be good for something. A quoi cela est-il bon ? Of what use is that? Cela n' est bon d rien. it is good for nothing, 251. Fait-il bon vivre d Paris ? Is it good living in Paris ? 213. Born, (to be,) itrene, nee ; where were you born ? Ou etes-vous ne, {nee?) 388. Bring, apporter, amener ; differ- ence between these two verbs, 303. Burst, (a,) un eclat. A burst of laughter, un eclat de rire ; to burst out, eclat er ; to burst out laughing, eclater de rire, f aire un eclat de rire, 432. Business, noms,)§14:0 — 10. (See Nouns.* Combien de ? 65, § 137—2, how much ? how many ? § 161 — 4. Come, (to,) venir, 175. iSee Ve- nir.) Comment! interj., §121, what ! Comparatives of equality, autant de . . . que de . . . , aussi . . . que, § 138 — 1 ; of inequality, plus de . . . que de . . . , moins de . . . que de . . . , plus . . . que . . . , moins que. Comparison of adj. and adv., 144 ; irreg., 147. Compassion, compassion, 372. Complain, (to,) seplaindrede, 254. Compound form of the perfect, § 145—2. Comprendre, to understand, 182. Comptant, for cash ; acheter comp- tant, to buy for cash, 239. Compter, no prepos.,) to intend, 135 ; compter sur, to depend on, § 64. Conditionnel, 310, §148. (See Potential.) Compose, §149. (See Potential.) Conduct, (to,) conduire, 136 ; con- ducted, conduit, 175 ; one's self, se conduire, 270. Conjugations, conjugaisons, §144, 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th. Conjunctions, conjonctions. (See at '79 1 ) a list of those that govern the eubj. ; all others govern the indicat.) A moins que, de crainte que, &c, require ne. Jusqu 1 d, jusqu 1 a ce que, their difference, § 164 — 1. When a conjunct, governs several verbs, — 2 ; when si, if, governs two verbs, — 3 ; que, that, not omitted in French; whether, si; whether, soit que, how used, —4 ; but for, were it not for, had it not been for, sans, — 5. Conj. With, preterit anterieur, 521. CoNHAiTRE, to be acquainted with, (to know,) 112, 140, 172, 329. Consent, (to,) consentir, 278. I consent to it, fy consens, 354. Consentir, to consent, 278, 354. Convenir, to suit, 237; de, to agree to, 273. Converse (to) with, s' 'entretenir avec, 429. Cote, a cote de, by, by the side of, 266. De ce cote-ci, &c, this side, &c, 193. Countryman (what) are you ? de quel pays etes-vous ? 252, 318. Coup, (un,) a blow, a kick, a knock, a stab, a shot, a glance, a clap, a slap, 244. Craindre, to fear, to dread, &c, 220, 260. Credit, (on,) a credit, 239. Croire, to believe, 144, 175; en Dieu, in God, 226. CroTtre, to grow, croissant, cru, 354. Cueillir, to gather; du fruit, fruit, 346. Curtain, (the,) le rideau, la toile ; the curtain rises, falls, la toile se live, se baisse, 352. Cut, (to,) couper, 80; one's self, se couper, 217, 219, 254. D. Dans, en, 63, 105, 228, in, into ; § 163—11—12. Dark, sombre, obscur. 208. It grows dark, il sefaittard, nuit, 352. Davantage, more, never precedes a noun, 198. De, (partitive,^ some or any, 57, 284. Of, from, §8; de, betweer nouns, 27, 404 ; locutions that re- quire de before an infinitive, 80, 112, 228 ; de qui, of, from whom , § 79. INDEX. 865 Deceive, (to,) tromper, 219. Defaire, to undo ; se defaire, to get rid of, 268. Defier, to distrust, $64. Deja. already, 152. Delay, Uo,) to tarry, tarder ; re- turn soon, ne tardez pas a revenir, 394. Demeurer, to dwell, &c, takes avoir and etre as auxiliaries, 187, Jf. 1. Demi, e, half, moitie, §141, inva- riable before the noun, 90. De laqcjelle, duquel, &c, of which, § 79. Depend, (to, upon, compter sur, s' en rapporter a, § 64. Depit, yen; de, notwithstanding, 364. Depuis, since, from, 342; depuis que, since ; depuis quand ? since what time ? When it requires ne before the verb, 248, Obs. 134. Des, some, any, §3; is never omitted, § 4 ; not the plur. of de, § 10. Des, from, since, 356; des que, as soon as, governs the preterit ante- rieur, 521. Desquels, desquels, &c.,of, from whom, which, §79. Descendre, to go, to come, down ; it takes avoir and etre, 303. Detruire, to destroy. Devant, avant, before, their dif- ference, 163. Devenir, to become, 225, 242, 316. Devoir (see Duty, 115), to owe, 80 ; are you to ? devez-vous ? 184, 185. Dialogue between a master and his pupils, 435. Dte, mourir, 317. (See Mourir. 1 ) \ Dire, to tell, say; dit, said, 108, 121, 170. Direct, (regime,) object, of a verb, §47. Direction 1. On short English answers. 457. 47 Dir, 2. Repetition of attending words, articles, pronouns, &c, 457. Dir. 3. On the obj. pron. lui, to him, to her ; leur, them, to them, 458. Dir. 4. On obj. nouns. The pre pos. never understood. Dir. 5. Find an infinit. in a die tionary, and for.n the tenses by the rules, 459. Dir. 6. On simple and compound sentences. Conjunct, que, never omitted, 459. Dtr. 7. Much, many, enough, &c, adverbs in French requiring de as a link. Dir. 8. On the formation of inter- rogations, 459. Dir. 9. Formation of the parfait, 460. Distrust, (to,) se defter de, §64. Do, (to,) to make, faire ; done, made, fait, 168. To do one's best, faire de son mieux, 249; — one's duty, son devoir, 348 ; — good to somebody, du bien a quelqu'un, 223, 372. Shall you soon have done writing ? Aurez-vous bientot fini d J e- crire ? He has just done writing, il vient d'e'erire, 229, 232, 249. To do without, se passer de, 346. To do, translated by se porter, 275. Dont, of which, of whom, whose ; ce dont, that of which, 228. The past participle preceded by dont does not agree with it, 229. Always fol- lowed by the nominative of the next verb. Dormir, to sleep, 121. Dress, (to,) habiller, to undress ; deshabiller, 269, 338, 400. Drink, (to,) boire, 86, 121, 172, 332 ; coffee, prendre le (du) cafe, 132. Drive, (toj to ride. See Aller, 214. Dry, sec ; il fait sec, 208. Du, some, any. §3: when used, 463. Duquel. &c., of whom, &c, §79, 86, 87, 126. 566 INDEX. Duty, devoir, 348. Dye, (to,) to color, teindre, (en noir,) 195. E. E (mute) changed to e (grave) § 144 — 4 ; e (acute) to grave, § 144 — 5. Each, chaque, each one ; chacun, 217, § 38. Each other, VunVautre,&c, 331. Early, de bonne heure, earlier, de meilleure heure, plus tot, 150. Ecrire, to write, ecrit, written, ecrivez, write, 89, 111, 121, 172. Elle, she, § 38. When ce must replace elle, N. 2; elle-meme, her- self, §4H, &c, oV elle, of, from her, -n, §47, 48— § 63. Elle requires no complement. Possessive, d elle, &c, €106. Et sb (what), quoi encore, otherwise, autrement, 113. En, some, any of it, of them, 59, 61, 63, § 62. Yen, 87, 88. Its place with personal pronouns-, 96 ; of him, &c, en, 113. Past participle does not agree with en, 162, Obs. 76 ; from it, them, &c, 185, §47, 48; §50. En, in, at, to, 375, 407, before the name of a country. (§ 163 — 11 to 13.) Encore, still, yet, &c, some, any more, 73. Encrier, inkstand, 41 ; ecritoire, (fern in.) Endeavor, (to,) tdcher, 342. S' ef- forcer, 404. Enfuir (s'), to fly, run away, 253, 262. Enlist, (to,) se /aire soldat, s'en- rdler, 226. Ennuyer (s'), to want amusement, 376. Ensuitk, afterwards, 88. Entrer, (to,) dans, to go \n, come in, &c, 302. Entretenir, to keep, s' entretenir avec, to converse with, 429. feiciER, grocer, 36. Et, and, 35 ; 372, 374. jferEiNDRE, to extinguish, 175. Etre, to be ; ete, been, 84, 157, 160. Ou en etions-nous ? where did we stop ? 383. Verbs that take etre as auxiliary, 530 ; past part, agrees with nomin., 530. C'esi, ce sont, it is, &c, 241, 327, 338, 348; etre followed by the preposition a and an infinitive, corresponds to the verb to be followed by a present participle, § 156—7. (See Is it not ?) Event ail, fan, eventails, 45. Eyer, jamais, 157. Every, all, tout, toute, &c, 110, 289, 219, 356. Eux, § 38, they ; more than they, 73. Eux-memes, themselves, §41£; a eux, to them, §63, oV eux, deux, theirs, §106. Faire, to make, to do ; faisant, fait, 83, 131, 168; you had better, 240 ; it is all over with me, 332 ; the soup will be warmed, 348 ; I cannot help it, 381 ; it grows dark, 352; to think much of one, 354 ; to do one' s best, 249. Fait, (si,) yes, 51, 06s. 26. Fall, (to,) tomber, 270. Baisser. The day, stocks fall, lejour baisse, le change baisse, 352. Falloir, to be necessary, must. All verbs expressing necessity, obli- gation, or want, are in French trans- lated by falloir, 197. Far, loin. How far ? Quelle dis- tance ? 252 ; far off, de loin, 317 ; from thee, de toi, §63. Farmer, fermier, 38. Fault, la faute. Whose fault is it ? A qui est la faute ? 381 ; to find fault with . . . trouver d redire d . . ., 400. Favor, (a,) un plaisir. Faireun . . 110. Fear, (to,) craindre, 220, 260. For fear of, de crainte (peur de, 356 ; d§ crainte(peur) que . . ne, 417, § 164 — 1. INDEX. 567 Feel, (to,) sentir, 278. 1\\ feel a pain, souffrir de, 334 ; sleepy, avoir envie de dormir, 220. Few, (a,) books, quelques livres ; a few (of them,) en . . quelques uns, 69. Fier (se) d, to trust to, § 64. Fifth, 1-5, cinquieme, §141. Fill, (to,) remplir, 302. Fire, (to,) tirer ; a gun, a pistol, un coup de fusil, de pistol et ; to some one, a sur quelqu'un, 244. First, 1st, premier, ler, 70; d'abord, 88. Firstly, \§\\y, premier ement,\ment, 363, §161—7. Fit, (to,) aller lien, 239. (See Aller.) Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; to nourish, irregular, 354. Fluently, couramme?it, 321. Fly, (to,) to run away, s'enfuir, 253, 262. For, car, 107; during, pendant, 186. For and at, when used to ex- press the price of a thing, not ren- dered in French, 276 ; rendered by de, 276 ; by pour, for more bad luck, pour surcroit de malheur, 334. For what, what for, pourquoi, ce pourquoi, § 92. Former, celui-ld, § 36 ; cela, when applied to actions, 469, N. 5. Formerly, autrefois, 155. Fortnight, (a,) quinze jours ; a fortnight ago, il y a quinze jours, 247. Frighten, (to,) effrayer, s J effrayer; la moindre chose V effraie, 374. From, de, 252, 318 ; des, 356 ; de temps en temps, 356. From the, du, §8. Future, (1st,) futur, §146; its terminations. Not used after si, if, but the present is, — 3 ; used after quand, when, § 146 — 4 ; ce qui, ce que, aussitot que, &c, — 5 ; 2d fut., its formation, 299. Game, a,) une partie, at chess; d'echecs ; at billiards, de billard ; at cards, de cartes ; faire une partie de..., 342. Ge^er, (se,) to inconvenience one's self, 395. Gather, (to,) cueillir, 346. General, general, generaux, 46. Get, (te,) one's livelihood by, gagner sa vie a, 307; made, faire faire ; dyed, faire teindre, 177, 1 96 ; beaten, (whipped,) se faire battre ; paid, payer ; one's self invited to dinner, inviter a diner, 363 ; rid of something, se defaire de quelque chose ; of somebody, se debarrasser de quelqu'un, 268. Give, (to,) donner, 94 ; rise to difficulties, quarrels, suspicions, faire naitredes difficultes, des querelles, des soupgons, 406 ; up, renoncer a, § 64. Go, (to,) aller, 84, 165; there, y aller, 102, 165 ; round the house, autour de la maison, faire le tour, &c, 367; down, alight, descendre, 303 ; on foot, aller a pied, 214 ; on a journey, faire un voyage, 295 ; to bed, aller se coucher, semettre au lit, 222 ; to the country, a la campagne, 289 ; to some one's house, chez quel- qu'un, 84; to see some one, voir quelqu'un, 332 ; a walking, seprome- ner, 222; to go away, s' 'en aller; vous en allez-vous ? 219, 242, 243 ; to go for, aller chercher, 105 ; go out, sortir, 110, 121, 150, 175; to be going to, aller, see it.) Are you coming ? Allez-vous venir? 90, N. 1. Je vais, used instead of je veux, 88, N. 1. Grocer, epicier, 36. Grow, (to,) croitre, 354. It grows dark, late, il sefait nuit, tard, 352. H. Habiller, to dress, 269. Had it not been, § 164, sa?ts. Hail, (to,) greler, 228. Hair, to hate, 213. Half demi, demie. (See Demi, §141.i 568 INDEX. Happen, (to,) arriver, takes itre, 254. Hardly, a peine, 180. Haut, \en,) above, up stairs ; en has, below, down stairs, 193. Have, (to,) avoir, had, eu, 160 ; a cold, un rhume, 293 ; sore ftnger, mal au doigt, aux yeux, d Vceil, d la main, aux dents, d la tete, 126, 234; d la gorge, au cote, 295, 284. To have just, venir de, 249, § 145 — 3. Health, sante, 332. Hear, (to . . . of,) entendre parler de, 246 ; apprendre, 253. He, il, ce, lui; who, qui, that, que, §38. Her, son, sa, ses, 38, 44, 282,$ 31 ; la ; to her, lui, § 47, 48 ; herself, elle-meme, § 41£ ; it, (them,) to her, le, la, les lui ; -le-lui, -la-lui, -les- lui, §58; her there, Vy, §57, 58; her some, any, lui en, § 59 ; her any there, lui y en, § 60. To her, d elle, of, from her, d? elle, &c, §63; her- self, ^reflective,) se, s'y, §71; hers, le sien, la sienne, &c, § 104 ; d elle, §106. Here, id, (y,) 110. Here and there, 396. Here is, void, 312. Heure. (See Hour.) Him, lui, being the masculine of her, see the same paragraphs. Home, (at,) d la maison, 84. Hors de, out ; out of the city ; de- hors, out of doors, 301, 307. Hour, v the,) Vheure, at what o'clock, at one o'clock, at half past one, d une heure et demie, 90. At 9 in the morning, in the evening, d neuf heures du matin, du soir., 185. Early, earlier, sooner, 150. To ask the hour, 110. How, how much, many, before an exclamation, que. How good you are ! que vous etes bon ! &c, 335. How far, juxquou, 193, 252. How long, comhien de temps, 246 ; since what time, depuis quand ? 248 ; jusqu'd quand, 189. How much, many, comhien de, 65. How many times, how often ? comhien de fois ? Once, une fois, deux fois, plusieurs fois, 165, § 137, 2 ; § 161—4. However, cependant, 134 ; quel- que . . .que, quel que . . . , quels que . . . , que, &c, 422, 516. Hundred, cent, 184. (See Cent.) Hurt, Uo,) somebody, faire du mal dquelqu'un, 223, 224; one's feel- ings, faire de la peine d quelqu'un, 333. I. . I, je, f ', 25, 469. I who, that, mot qui, que, 470. Ici, (y,) here, 110. Idioms, after Index. If, si, 107; when it losei the t, 372, § 146—3 ; when followed by the present tense, 233, Ohs. 105 ; by the imperfect, 507, N. 1 ; when it governs two verbs, 538, § 164 — 3. II, Us, he, it, they, §38; when replaced by ce, 469, N. 2. Immediately, tout de suite, sur le champ, 237. Impart, (to,) faire part de quelque chose d quelqu'un, 397. Imperative, imperatif, 509, § 150 ; its formation, 1 to 6 of § 150. Five irregular ones, — 7; regular ones, with objectives and negation, — 8. How to translate, Come and see me, &c, —12. Imperfect (the) of the Indicative, 506, §147. Translated by French parfait and preterit. Its terminations, — 1; how formed, — 2; regular verbs, exceptions, — 3; when used, — 4; when it ends in iions, — 5; in yions, —6 ; used after si, 507, § 148—4 ; of the Potential, Conditionnel, its ter- minations ; its formation, 507. Could, would, how to translate them, 508 — 4. I wish, when it is, je voudrais, — 5. Second Imperfect, Preterit, its terminations. 517, 518, § 153 ; re- gular and irregular verbs, list of the INDEX. 569 'alter ; use of the preterit, 519, 520 : of the subjunctive, its formation ; its terminations, 416, 517. Impersonal verbs govern the subjunctive, 515, § 151—4. Improve, (to,) to profit, faire des pr ogres, 313. In, dans, 63, 105 ; in, dans, en, their difference, 375. In, translated by a, 242, 367, 289 ; by de, 338 ; by de, after a superlative ; c' est le plus beau pays de V Europe, 446. In this manner, de cette maniere, 180. In a short time, dans peu de temps, 375. In, at, to, by a, 535, § 163 — 5 ; not translated, 537 — 14. In the midst of . . ., au milieu de . . . , 476, § 63. Indefinite, (article,) never omitted in the plural ; when not used in the singular ; when replaced by the defi- nite, 462. Indicative, lndicatif. Present, 500, §144; Imperfect, 507, §147; Second Imperfect, Preterit, 517, §153; Pluperfect, 520, §154; Se- cond Pluperfect, Preterit anterieur, § 155 ; conjunctions after which it is used, 521, (see those tenses;) Fu- ture, 504; Second Future, 299. Indifferently, tant bien quemal, 396. Indirect (regime) objective of a preposition, §43. Infinitive, 79 ; words which re- quire it, with the preposition de, 80. Infinitive, with its 4 terminations, 79, 80; words requiring it with the preposition de, 80 ; governed by every preposition except en, 521, § 156 — 1 ; remark on apres, after, — Infinitive governed by another verb, — 2; im- portant remark on it ; different prepo- sition in F/nglish and French ; verbs that govern it without a preposition, —4 ; adj. and verbs that take a, — 5 ; those that take de, — 6. After d, the French infinitive translates the present participle coming after the verb to be, 399, 502, § 144—6. 47* Inquire (to) after some one, de- mander quelqu'un; qui demandez- vous ? 204. Instantly, d V instant, sur le champ, (this instant,) 237. Instead of, au lieu de, 124. Instruire, to instruct, instruisant, instruit, 266. Introduce, (to,) presenter d, in- troduire a, 476, §64. It, le, V, 26; it, nomin., il, elle, ce, §38; it is, c'est, ce sont, 469, N. 2, 3 ; them, les, it, (to it, to them,) y, 101 ; it, them, (of, from,) en, §47, 48, 50; it to me, before the verb, me le, la, &c, te le, la; le lui, la lui, &c, §57; after the verb, -Ze- moi, -la-moi, &c, §58; it to it, there, Vy, §57, 58; to it, of it, with it or with them, applying to things, are not translated after the verb, § 63 ; it, (with reflective verbs,) fen, s' en, nous en, vous en, m 'en, 478, § 73. Its, son, sa, ses. What is its in- finitive ? Quel en est Vinjinitif? 466, §31, N. 1. Jamais, ever ; ne . . .jamais, never, 157. Je, I, and before a vowel or h mute,j', 25. Jest, (to,) plaisanter, badiner, vous vous moquez, you are jesting. He is no joker, il rf entend pas raillerie, 381. Jeter, to throw, throw away, 173, 06s. 73. John some, en ... a Jean, 476, §59. Jour, day, en pleinjour, in broad daylight, 407. Jour, journee, their difference 283, N.2. Jouer, to play, takes de when an instrument, and a when a game is spoken of, 259; un tour, to play a trick, 400. 570 INDEX. Judge (to be a) of something, se connaitre en quelque chose, 351. Jusque, up to, as far as, 189, 193 ; jusqu'd ce que, until, 537, § 164. Just, (to have,) venir de. He has but just come, il ne fait que oVar- river, 249, 504, § 145—3. K. Keep, /to,) garder, 239 ; tenir, 274. To keep warm, cool, clean, se tenir chaud, frais, propre, 365 ; one's self ready, pret, 274; on one's guard against one, en garde contre quelqu'un, 366 ; to maintain, entre- te?iir, 429 ; keep a boarding-school, house, tenir pension, 385. Kill, (to,) tuer, 92; to kill by- shooting, tuer d'un coup oVarme d feu, 367. Know, (to,) savoir, connaitre, 112, 140, 172; how to swim, nager, 135. Difference of savoir and connaitre, 329, N. 1. L. La, (article feminine,) the, 281, 463. La, (objective pronoun,) her, it, 281, 472. La, (y,) there, 110. Laquelle, (relative,) which, 479, §82; (interrogative,) § 84. Last, dernier, ere, 71. Late, tard; too late, troptard, 110. Lately, the other day, V autre jour, dernier ement, 375. Latter, celui-ci, 468, §36; ceci, when applied to actions, 469, N.5. Former, celui-ld ; cela. Laugh, (to,) rire, 325. (See Rire.) Lay to) to one's charge, imputer a auelqiCun ; ne me Vimputezpas, 381. Le, the, V , before a vowel or silent h, 25, 463. Le, him, it, so, 168, 472; le lui, les lui, it, them to him ; -le-lui, -les- lui, 475. Le, relating to a noun, an adjective, or even a whole sentence, is rendered by so, and frequently omitted in English, 171, 173. League, (a,) une lieue ; to walk or travel a league, faire une lieue, 295. Learn, (to,) apprendre, 127, 179; leFrangais, 129; by heart, par coeur, 208. Left, to, on the left side or hand, a gauche, sur la gauche, 378. Left, (to have,) rester. When I have paid for the horse, I shall have only ten dollars left, quand faurai, &c. They have one louis left, il leur reste un louis, 300. Le mien, la mienne, &c, 484, § 104 to 109 ; mine, used even after etre when ce is nominative, § 105. Lequel ? which one ? lesquels, 35, 44, 230, 283, 488. Less, moins, the least, le moins, 147 ; less, fewer, moins, 272. (See Moins.) Lest, for fear, de peur (crainte) que . . . ne, 537, § 164. Leur, s, their, 44, 282 ; le (la) leur, les leurs, theirs, 49, 291. When it must be translated by en . . . les, 466, N. 2. Leur, them, to them, for persons, 282, 0&s.l28,472. Leur, (le, la, les,) it or them, to them, 475, §57. Leur en, them some, 476, § 59. Leur y en, some to them, there, §60. Level (on a) with, even with, d fleur de, 354. Lieu (au) de, instead of, 124 ; tenir lieu de, 404. Lighten, (to,) faire des eclaires, 227. Like, (to,) aimer; I like fish, f aime le poisson ; to like, trouver ; how do you like that wine ? comment trouvez-vous ce vin ? I like it well, je le irouve Ion, 208. As you like, comme il vous plaira, 325. Like better, (to,) prefer, aimer mieux, 263, 264 ; to my liking, d mon gre, 385. Lire, to read, lisant, lu, lisez, 110, 121, 148, 172. INDEX. 571 Little, small, petit, 47; little, peu, 147, peu de ; a little, un peu de, 67; but or only a little, ne . . . guere de, 67 ; just a little, tant soipeu, 427. Live, (to,) demeurer, 187, N. 3. Long, (to,) tarder de ; I long to see my brother, il me tarde de voir mon frere, 394. Long, (so,) as, tant que, 401. How long ? combien, combien de temps ? 246. How long since ? (since what time ?) depuis quand ? 248. How (ong ? jusqu'd quand? 189. Long-temps, (never un long- lemps,) a long time, 462, §6. Look, (to,) upon, donner sur ; the window looks upon the street, lafe- %etre donne sur la rue, 364. (See Appear.) To look pleased with somebody, faire bonne mine d quel- fu'un ; displeased with, mauvaise nine d, 332; — avoir V air ; to look ^ad, avoir V air triste, 384. Lorsque, quand, when, 242; used with the preterit anterieur, 521. [Lorsque is never used to ask a question.) Lose, (to,) perdre, 182; one's wits, perdre la tete, 334; sight of ', perdre de vue, 389. LuiRE, to shine, glitter, luisant, lui, 228. M. Ma, my, mon, mes, 282, 466, §31. Mais, but, 42. Maison, d la,) home ; (see it.) Make, (to,) do, faire, faisant, 121 ; faites, 134; made, fait, 168. Faire present de quelque chose d quelqiCun, 376. To make sick, rendre malade, 293; one's self understood, se faire comprendre. 370; comfortable, se mettre d son aise, 395. To make entreaties, faire des instances, 396. Mal. bad ; worse, pire, the worst, le pire, 147 ; badly, 140 : wrong, bad, 319. (See Hurt.) Manage, (to,) to go about a thing, s'y prendre, 352; faire en sorte de, 364. Many, (much,) beaucoup de, 65, not many, ne ... : guere de, n'en. . .: guere, 67, 459. Marcher, to march, walk, step, go, must not be mistaken for se pro- mener, 295. Matin, matinee, morning, their difference, 289. Me, me, m\ §47; moi, §48. It or them to me, me le, la, les, §57. Me to it there, m'y, §57; -y-moi, §58. Me some, m? en, 59. Me some there, m'y en, §60. Me, (to me,) d moi ; from me, demoi; near me, pres de moi, §63; me, (reflective,) myself, § 71 ; m'en, myself of it, § 73. Mean, (to,) vouloir dire. What do you mean? que voulez-vous dire? 399. Meddle (to) with a thing, se me- ter de quelque chose. De quoi vous melez-vous ? what are you meddling with ? 295. Mefier, (se,) de, to mistrust, 476, 477, §64. Meme, mimes, self, selves ; moi- mime, myself; eux-mimes, elles-me- mes. themselves — even, (adv.,) 344, 471. Mener, to take, to lead, not to be used for porter, 303. Mentir, to utter a falsehood, to lie, mentant, menti, ne mentez pas, 226. Mettre, to put, put on ; mettant, mis, mettez, 149, 168; au net, to transcribe fairly, 356 ; d meme de, to enable, 378 ; se mettre d table, to sit down to a meal, 407 ; d quelque chose, to set about a thing, 340 ; d Vabri de to shelter one's self from, 356. Midst (in the) of them, au milieu d'elles, 476. Mieux, better, 147. De mon, ton, son, &c, mieux, in the best way I, thou, he, &c, can, 217, 249. (See Better.) 572 Might, how translated, 509, § 149. Mile, (a,) un mille. To walk or travel a mile, /aire un mille, 295. Milieu, (Ze,) the middle; au mi- lieu. (See Midst.) Mille, a thousand ; not un mille, 462, § 6. Mien, (Ze,) Za mienne, &c, mine, 30, 49, 291. Mine, Ze mien, la mienne, &a, 30, 49, 291, 483, 484, §104 to 110. A brother of mine, 203, 484. Mistake, (to,) to be mistaken, se tromper, vous vous trompez, 219. Mistrust, (to,) se mefier de, se de- fer de, 477. Moi, I, §38; me, to me, §47; moi-meme, myself, § 4H ; moi qui, I who ; moi que, I whom, 470; a moi, de moi, always used after certain verbs, 476. A moi, mine, 484, § 106. Moins, less, serves to form the comparative and superlative of in- equality, 146. Moins de, less, fewer, (before a noun,) 78, 490, 492. When there is a comparison between two sentences, the verb which follows plus or moins, requires the negative ne. Cet homme a moins oV amis qu'il ne pense, 272. The less . . . the less, moins . . . moins, 492. Moitie, (la,) the half, 499 ; demi. Mon, ma, mes, my, 25, 44, 282, 466. Monter, to go up, mount, ascend ; takes avoir and etre as auxiliaries, 304, N. 1. Moonlight, clair de lune. It is moonlight, il fait clair de lune, 208. Month, (a,) un mois ; their names, 499, § 143. More, plus ; more . . . than, (be- fore an objective, plus de . . . que de ; plus de (before a number ; phis que, (before a nominative,) 78. One more book, encore un livre ; a few books more, encore quelques livres, 73. More, plus; the most, Ze plus, 146. More, davantage, 198. The more . . . the less, plus . . . moins, 492, § 138 —2. Mouchoir, (Ze,) the handkerchief, 41. Motjrir, to die, (lose life,) mou- rant, mort. L'hommeest mort, safem* me ri* est pas morte, 317; d'une ma- ladie, of a disease, 323. Much, many, a good deal, very much, beaucoup de, (before a noun.) Much of it, en . . . beaucoup ; not much, ne . . .guere de, 65, 376, 490. Much more, encore beaucoup, beau- coup plus. So much, tant, 78, 210, 293. Dir. 7, 459. Multitude, (nouns of.) (See Nouns, 496—10.) Must, falloir, (see it.) 11 being its only nominative, see 197, Obs. 90. My. (See Mon.) Myself, moi- meme, 471. Myself, (reflective,) me, m\ 478, §71; myself to it, m'y, % 72 ; myself of it, m' en, % 73. N. Name, nom ; proper names, noms propres, 496, 497, Names of the months, noms des mois, 499. What is your name ? Comment vous appe- lez-vous ? Je m'appelle Charles, 320. Native, (the,) I' homme ne dans le pays, 423. Ne, part of the French negative, 532, 3 4, 5, § 162, an important sec- tion. Ne is used without pas, with the verbs cesser, to cease ; oeer, to dare ; pouvoir, savoir, to be abl.\ 322. Ne . . . guere de, n' en . . . guer » ne . . . pas beaucoup de, ri en . . . pc beaucoup ; ne . . . que peu de, but li* tie, only a little, not much, &^., 6? Ne . . . ni, neither, ni, nor ; Je n't. ni celui-ci ni celui-ld, 32. Ne . . mille part, nowhere, not anywhere 89. Ne . . . pas, ne . . . point, not, 28 Ne . . .pas encore, not yet, 152. IV* . . . plus, no longer, no more, not any more, 74, 187. Ne . . . plus guere de . . , (n'en . . . plus guere ) not INDEX. 573 much, many, more, 74. Ne . . . que, only, but, Je rCai qu'un ami, je rC en ax qu'un, 65 ; ne . . . que, nothing but, 225. Ne . . . rien, nothing, not any- thing, 28, requires de before an ad- jective, 29, Obs. 7. When the verb is understood, use rien without ne, left out with the verb, 34. Ne, when used without pas, in comparison of inequality, 492, § 138—3 ; when not used, § 138 — 4; and when implied, 503, § 145 — 1. It is used when the negation is implied, 503, § 145 — 1; 248, Obs. 114. (See Negations.) Near, pres de ; near me, pres de moi, 124; near six, pres de six, 180 ; near going, pres dialler, 260. Nearly, pres de, 180 ; therea- bouts, a peu pres, 404. Negations, negations, 532, 3, 4, 5, § 162 ; its formation, 1 ; place of ne and its complement, 2, 3, 4, 5 ; when nominative, — 6 ; with the in- finitive mood, — 7 ; when the verb is omitted, — 8. Neither, nonplus, — 9. List of negations and examples for, 6 ; 4 ; 5 , 6 ; 7 ; 8 and 9. Neither . . . nor, ne . . . ni . . . ni . . . , 32. Ni Vun ni V autre ; ni les uns ni les autres, % 162. I, neither, moi non plus, § 162 — 9. Neuf, nouveau, nouvel, new. Their difference, 191, N. 1. Neuter Verbs, verbes neutres, 529, § 158 ; what they are, and how formed, — 1 ; take etre and avoir, — 2. Verbs that take etre, — 3. Never, ne. . .jamais, 157, 533. New, neuf, nouveau, {nouvel, be- fore a vowel or h mute, 191,) N. 1. Nier, to deny, takes ne before subjunctive, § 516 — 8. No, not any, ne...pas de, 55. None, not any, ne . . . aucun, pas un. No one, nobody, ne . . . personne, 422. Nobody, not anybody, (nominative,) personne ne ; nul ne, &lc, 39. No 'onger, ne . . .plus, 187. No sooner, pas plutof, 521. Not, ne . . .pas, ne . . .point, 377, 378. Not any more, no more, ne . . . plus de. Not much more, ne . . . plus guere de, 74. Not quite, pas tout a fait, 180. Not until, pas avant, 310. Not yet, ne . . . pas en- core, 152. Not so much . . . as, ne . . . pas tant de . . . que de. Not so . . . as, ne . . . pas si . . . que, 492, § 138 — 1. Noms, nouns, names. Les noms des mois, of the months, 499. (See Name.) Nominative, nominatif: 1st class, with the verb ; 2d, separated from it, 468, § 38. Nominative frequently left out in English ; not in French, 470. N.B., 480, §87—1. Nothing, ne . . . rien, (objective,) 422, 533; rien ne, (nominative,) 535. Rien de bon, 29, Obs. 7. Nothing but, ne . . . que, ne . . . rien . . . que, 225. Notre, plural, nos, our, 44, 282. Notre, {le, la,) les notres, ours, 30, 49, 291, 483. Notwithstanding, malgre; not- withstanding that, malgre cela, 364 ; for all that, although, ne laisser pas de : II ne laisse pas de passer pour honnete homme, 428. Nouns, ?ioms, substantifs, 493, § 140. Not used as adjectives, and connected by some preposition, § 140 — 1 ; functions of de, a, &c, — 2, 3, 4 ; no plural to proper names, except when used as common, — 5; articles left out in enumerations, — 6 ; formation of compound nouns, — 7; of the feminine, — 8, 495 ; when a noun is the object of two or three verbs, — 9; nouns of multitude, — 10; possessive case, — 11. Proper names from the Greek and Lalin , of kingdoms, provinces, &c, 496, 497. Cardinal and ordinal numbers, &c, with Notes and Obs., 497 to 199. Names of the seasons, of months, 499. 574 INDEX. Nous, we, us ; nous qui, we who ; nous que, we whom, 469, 470 ; nous- memes, ourselves ; nous autres, we, among us, 471 ; nous, us, to us, 472 ; nous le, la, les, it, them to us, 475 ; nous en, some, any to us, §59; nous yen, us some there, § 60 ; a nous, to us ; de nous, of, from us, §63, 476; nous, (reflective,) our- selves, § 71 ; nous y, ^reflective,) our- selves, (it,; § 72 ; nous en, ourselves at it, § 73, 478 ; d nous, (possessive,) ours, 484, § 106. Now, maintenant, a present, 356 ; now and then, de loin, en loin, 396. Numbers, nombres, (cardinal,) 65, N. 1, 497; when used, 70, Obs. 32; 321, Obs. 146, 426 ; (ordinal,) 70, Obs. 33. Adverbs, premierement, en pre- mier lieu, first, firstly, &c, 363, 426. O. Objective Pronouns, regimes, 471, § 43 to 47. Objective pronouns before infinitives are turned into the subjunctive, 472, §49 ; their p'aces, §48 to 65; one exception, §51; double objectives, it to me, to thee, &c, me le, la ; te le, la, &c, always before auxiliaries, 473, § 52 ; when attended by a preposition, go after verbs, 475, §56 ; N. B. on their or- der, § 57. Personal and partitive, me some, thee any, &c, m 'en, fen, &c. ; me some there, m'y en, &c, § 59 to 61. Objective pronoun, with a preposition, goes after the verb, §63 to ^66, 476; two or more ob- jective cases, with a verb, go after, §64 — 2. Reflective, me, te, se ; nous, vous ; m'y, fy, s'y, &c. ; ra' en, t J en, s'en, &c, 477, §71, 72, 73. Objective Nouns, their place ; the preposition never omitted before them, and it is repeated before every ftne, 473, §5H. Obliged, (to be,) or indebted to some one for . . . etre oblige, (redeva- ble,) d quelquunde . . . , 336. (Eil, (Z\) the eye; les yeux, the eyes, 47. Of, de ; of, from the, du, 27, 82, 112, 204, 229, 403. A book of mine ; turn, one of my books, un de mes limes, 203, 484, §107, 108. Offrir, to offer ; off rant, offert, offrez, 255. Often, souvent ; as often as, aussi souvent que ; not so often as, moins souvent que ; oftener than, plus sou- vent que, ]37. Ombre, (une,) a shadow ; d V om- bre de . . . , under the shade of, 356. On, upon, sur ; upon it, dessus, 175. On a small scale, en petit ; large scale, en grand, 404. Not translated. On, not translated before dates, &c, 537. On, one, the people, they; any one, 191 ; when used, 224, Obs. 101 ; when it takes V before et, oil, ou, si, que, &c, 372, 488, 489. Once, une fois ; once a day, une fois par jour, 210. One, (people,) they or any one, 191, 224; one, un ; the one, celui, 30; both, Vun et V autre, 72. Never translate theoneby Vun, except when it is connected with the other; as, the one and the other. One's self, soi-meme, 471 ; one's self, (reflective,) se, 531 ; to one's self, d soi ; from one's self, de soi, 476. Only, but, ne . . . que, 65 ; seule- ment, 324; not only, non seulement. Opposite, vis-a-vis de, 387. Or, ou, 30; or people, ou Von, 372, Ordinal, (numbers,) nombres or- dinaux, 497 to 499. Other, autre ; another dollar, un autre dollar; some other dollars, d' autres dollars. No other, ne. . pas d } autre. I have no other, je rf en ai pas d? autre, 69. Others other people, autrui, 295. Otherwise, else, autrement, 113, INBSX, 575 Ou, or, 30 ; ou V on, or people, 372. Ou, where, whither, whereto, 86, 184. D'oii, whence, where from, 200, 252. Ought and Should, (I,) renderec by the conditionnel of devoir, je de- vrais, &c, 372, 509. Our, notre, nos, 44, 282 ; 466, $31, 32. Ours, le, la notre, les notres, 30, 49, 291. Out, hors de ; out of doors, de- hors, 301, 307. Outre, besides; outre cela, be- sides that ; en outre, moreover, 378. Ouvrir, to open, ouvrant, ouvert, ouvrez, 117, 175. Pain, mal, 48, 284. Par, by, 210, 212, 213; par-ci, par-Id, here and there, 396. Paraitre, to appear, to seem, 429. Parce que, because, 80, 187. Parfait, Perfect. (See the latter word.) Parfait or present compost. (See the latter.) Parlee. Fra?igais,to speak French, 472, § 47£. Parmi, among, 272. Part, [de la. . .de,) from, 536 — 8. Fair e part de, to impart, 397. Participial Adjective, adjectif verbal, 529 — 5. Participle past, participe passe, its formation, 157, 257; when used, 156, 525; when connected with ttre, it agrees with the nominative, 212, 530 ; with avoir, it agrees with the direct object, &c, 162, Obs. 75, 212, 286, 299, 525. It does not agree with the pronouns en and dont, be- cause they are not direct objects, 163, 06s. 76 ; 229, Obs. 103, 526. Serves to form the passive voice, 212. Some difficulties explained, 527— -5. Participle, (present,; participe present, its foimation and excep- tions, 528. Difference in its use in English and French, 527 ; en alone governing it, what follows, 528 — 4; when it qualifies a noun, 529 — 5; when translated by a present parti- ciple, — 6 ; when by the indicative, — 7 ; by the infinitive, — 8, or by a noun, — 9, — 10; after to be, — 11. How the present participle is to be translated, 201, 280. Particular, i,to be,) y regarder de pres, 399. Partir, to depart, to set out, par- tant, parti, 142, 175. Partitive, (article,) article parti- tif : 1st, before a noun, 465, § 19 to 25 ; 2d, before an adjective or after a negation, § 26 to 28. Parvenir, to succeed, 237. Pas, with ne before the verb, not, 27 ; pas tout, not all ; pas du tout, not at all, 115. Passer, [se . . . de,) to do without, 346. Passive Verbs, verbes passifs, how formed, 212 ; not so much used as in English, 530, § 159 ; past par- ciple agrees with nominative, — 2; on, as nominative, — 3 ; the infini- tive rendered by on, — 4. Pay to, for, payer ; to pay a man for a horse, payer un cheval a un liomme, 201, 06s. 293. To pay some one a visit, /aire une visite prendre visite) a Quelau 1 un, 332. Peine, (a,) scarcely, with preterit anterieur, 521. Pendant, during, for, 186. Penknife, canif, 32. Penser o, to think of, 476 ; y pen- ser. Pension, boarding-house, school, 385. People, they, one, on, 468, § 38 ; 488, 489. Perfect tense of the indicative, parfait or present compose, t.see the 576 INDEX. latter ;) of the subjunctive, its forma- tion and use, 418. Perfect, parfait, 503, §145 ; when ne is to be used, — -1 ; compound form of the perfect, — 2; I have just, Je viens de . . . , — 3. Permettre, to permit, to allow, 371. Personal Pronouns, pronoms personnels, 468, § 38 : 1st class, with the verb, je, tu, il, &c. ; 2d class, separated from the verb, moi, toi, lui, &c. Personne ne, nobody, (nomina- tive,) 39, 468 ; ne . . . personne, (ob- jective,) 422. Personne as a pronoun is masculine ; as a substantive, it is feminine, 286, N. 1. Ne . . .personne qui, que, nobody who, that, governs the subjunctive, 515 — 5. Peu, little, 147, 490 ; peu de, (be- fore a noun,) 67; un peu de, a little, 67 ; d peu pres, thereabout, nearly, 404. Peur, fear, afraid. Are you afraid ? Avez-vous peur ? 31. De peur que . . . ne . . . , (governs subjunctive,) for fear, lest, 537, § 164. Place, d ma, votre, sa place, in my, your, his or her place, 367; of objective pronouns, 473 to 477 ; of adjectives, 493 ; of adverbs, 531, 532. Platndre, to pity; plaignant, plaint ; se plaindre, to complain, 254, 476. Plaire, to please, to be pleased, plaisant , plu ; se plaire, 240, Obs. 109. Plaisanter, (badi?ier,) to jest, 381. Plaisir, {avec,) with pleasure, 47, 48. Play, (to,) jouer, 126 ; upon an instrument, d'un instrument; at cards, aux cartes, 259 ; a trick on some one, un tour a quelqu'un, 400. Please, (to,) plaire, se plaire; some one, d quelqu'un. How are you pleased here ? Comment vous plaisez-vous ici? 241. If you please, «'z7 vous plait, 325. Pleased with, content de, 317. Pleasure, to give pleasure, faire plaisir, 110. Pleasure, (with,) avec plaisir, 47, 88. Pleuvoir, to rain ; il pleut, it rains, 227. Pluperfect (the) of the indica- tive ; its formation and use, 360, 520; of the subjunctive, its forma- tion and use, 416 to 419 : 2d pluper- fect, preterit anterieur, (see it,) 520, §155. Pluperfect of the subjunctive, plusque parfait, its formation, &c, 419. Plural, its formation in nouns and adjectives, 44, 46, 47, 107, N. 1. Plus, more, serves to torm the comparative of inequality of adjec- tives and adverbs ; leplus, the most, forms the superlative, 144. Differ- ence between plus and davantage, 198. Plus de, more, (before a noun,) 78. When there is a comparison between two sentences, the verb which follows plus or moins requires ne, 272. Plus de, plus que, when used, 490. Plut a Dieu, plut au del, would to God, require the subjunctive, 424. Plutot que, rather ; plutot que de, rather than, 321 ; pas plus tot, no sooner, 521. Pont, bridge, 157. Porte-crayon, pencil-case, 37 ; porte-feuille, pocket-book, 41 ; their plural, 494, § 140—7. Porter, to carry, to take ; not to be mistaken for mener, 303, Obs. 143. Possessive articles or pronouns, my, thy, &c, mon, ton, &c, 44, 108; ma, ta, &c, 282; 466, mine, thine, &c, le mien, le tien, &,c. 483. Possessive case of nouns, 30, 32; 493, §140—2—11. Potential, (imperfect,) condition- nel, 507, § 148, ends in rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raient, §148—1; INDEX. 577 how formed, — 2 ; after si, if, use the imperfect instead of the conditionnel, — 3. Potential, (perfect,) conditionnel compose, 508, § 149 ; its formation, — 1 ; with it si, if, is followed by pluperfect, — 2 ; how to translate would, should, could, might, — 3 ; I wish I knew it, je voudrais le sa- voir; I wish I had known it, faurais voulu le savoir. Potential. (See Imperfect.) Pour, to, in order to, 92, 364. Pour (to) out, verser ; to pour out some drink for, verser d boire d . . . , 323. Pourquoi, why? 81, 184; for what, or what ... for ? 481. Poursuivre, to pursue, 344. PouvoiR,to be able, (can,) pouvant, pu, 92, N. 1, 175; puis-je? not peux-je ? can I ? Premier, ler, first, 1st, 70; pre- mierement, en premier lieu, 363, § 161 —7. Prendre, to take, prenant, pris, prenez, 132, 175, 352, 366 ; prendre, to drink, 132; soin, care, 256; la fuite, to make one's escape, to run away, &c, 346 ; s'y prendre, to ma- nage, to go about a thing, 352. Propositions govern the infinitive in French, except en, which governs the prese it participle, 92, 201, 215, 460, 535.. The English preposition for, with .he verbs to ask, demander, to pay, payer, is not rendered in French, 201, Obs. 93. At and for not translated when used to express the price of a thing, 276. Prepositions formed with d and a noun take de after them ; almost all others have no preposition, 266. Use of d, 100, 193, 404, 406, 464 ; use of de, 27, 403, 404; place of the preposition in the sentence : always before the word it governs, (488, § 129,) 536 ; not transposed in French, 482, § 95 ; pre- positions never omitted before objec- tive nouns, 458, 473, Dir. 4 ; d and 48 de, connected with reflected verbs, variously translated, 477, ($ 71 to 74;) not transposed in English, when of what means of that which, de ce qui, que, 482, § 97 ; to what, meaning to that which, d ce qui, que, § 98, may be separated by the negation or objec- tive pronoun, 536, § 163 — 3 as far as, jusqu'd, 464,536; at, in, to, chez 84, 536 ; from, de la part de ; before, avant, devant, auparavant, 536 ; by, pris de, d cote de ; by myself, seul, e, &c. ; in, into, dans, en; at, in, to, d, en ; in, on, not translated before dates, &c. Pres de, near, 260, 465, 537. Present (the) tense, indicative ; its formation, 500, § 144 ; three Eng- lish present tenses expressed by one in French, 114 ; verbs that take a cedilla under the, (g,) 502, § 144—1 ; those that take e after g, — 2 ; those that change y into i, when it is fol- lowed by e mute, — 3; e mute changed to e grave, — 4 ; excepting the terminations eler, eter, N.B., 4 (acute) into e (grave), — 5 ; true pre- sent tense explained : I am reading, je suis d lire, — 6. Do and am, &c, used to interrogate, may be translated by est-ce que. In some verbs, est-ce que must be used, 139, N. 1, (459, Dir. 8.) Present Compose or Far- fait, English perfect, its formation, 167; its use, 168; 503, §145. When ne, without pas, is used with it, 503, 504 ; it translates the compound form of the perfect, viz : I have been reading, fai lu. I have just written, is not rendered by the parfait, but by je viens d'ecrire. Present of the Subjunctive, (78 1 ,) 408, 513, $ 151 ; its terminations ; its formation and exceptions, § 151 — 1 ; its use, — 2, 513 to 515 ; different antece- dents that require the subjunctive, 515 to 517. In English, the state of existence or of action, when in its duration, is always expressed by the 578 INDEX. compound perfect, while the French use the present tense. He has been in Paris these three years, il y a trots ans qu'il est d Paris, 274. Present used after si, in connexion with the future, (233, Obs. 105,) 505, $146—3. Presenter a, to present to, intro- duce, 476, $64. Presently, tout a Vheure, 237. Pretend, (to,) /aire semblant de, 356. Preterit, (le,) English second im- perfect, 358. (See Imperfect.) Preterit Anterieur, second plu- perfect, its formation, 520, $ 155 ; its use ; conjunctions after which it is used ; practical rules, 362, 521. Trier de, to desire, beg, pray, re- quest, 304. Promener, (se,) to take an airing, a walk for pleasure ; aller se prome- ner, to go walking ; en carrosse, to go in a carriage ; d cheval, to ride on horseback, to take a ride, 222. Promettre de, to promise, 179. Pronouns, (possessive or articles,) my, thy, &c., 466, $ 31 ; rule for their use, $ 32 ; demonstrative, $ 33 ; always prefixed to a noun and repeat- ed, $ 34 ; true demonstrative, $ 36, 37. Personal, 468, $ 38 to 40 ; no- minatives, separated from the verb, I who, moi qui, thou who, toi qui, &c. Objectives the same, followed by que, 470, $40, 41. Compound Per- sonal, myself, moi-meme, &c, 471, $ 41£. Objective Pronouns, $ 42 to 50; their place, $51 to 56, Dir. 4. Double objective pronouns, $57 to 63 ; examples at p. 94, &c. ; with a preposition, d moi, de toi, &c, $63 to 66. Reflective, 1st class, 477, $ 67, 71 ; 2d class, $ 68, 72 ; 3d class, $ 69, 73, 74. Relative, qui, who, nominative, never omitted either in French or English, 478, $75, 76. Objective que, whom, that, which, $75 to 80; personal, connected with relatives, 483, $102. Possessive, i whose, a qui? $103, mine, thine, &c, le mien, le tien, &c, used with every verb, even etre, when ce is no- minative, 484, $ 104, 105 ; but when il, elle, Us, elles, are nominatives, use the following: d moi, a toi, &c, a ces Messieurs. A book of mine, turn to, one of my books, $ 107. In- terrogative, who? qui; whom? qui? 485, $111. Qui never loses its i. What ? quel, quelle, &c, que, qu'est-ce que; after the verb, by quoi? $112,115. What? nomina- tive, qu'est-ce qui? 486, $116; go- verned by a preposition, quoi? d quoi, $ 117. What is in ? &c. Qu J y a-t-il dans . . ,$ 118 ; see to $ 130. In- definite, on, one, people, &c. 488, 489; examples at 87, 94, 281, 107, 328, 38, 44, 108, 281, 30, 48, 276, 44, 283, 41, 43, 100, 283, 229, 39. Proper Names, noms propres, 494, 496, 497. Properly, comme ilfaut, 204. Proposer (se) de, to propose, in- tend ; je me propose de /aire ce voy- age, I propose going on that journey, 341. Proverbial forms of expression, (at the end of Index.) Pull, (to,) tirer, 244 ; to pull out, arracher, s'arracher ; he pulls out his hair, il s'arrache les cheveux, 219. Purchase (to) anything, faire em- plette de quelque chose, faire des em- plettes, 256. Put, (to,) to put on, mettre, 168 ; to put off, postpone, remettre a, 394 ; to inconvenience one's self, se gtner, 395. Q. Quand, lorsque, when, 88, 242 ; with the preterit anterieur, 521. Quand meme, though, followed by conditionnel, 425, 517. Quant d, as to, as for ; quant a moi, as to me, 322. Quatre-vingts, eighty, loses its INDEX. 579 * when followed by another numeral, 184. Que, that, which, (relative pro- noun,) 43 ; que de, than, (before a noun,) 78 ; que, qui, take a euphonic I before on, 372 ; que, used to avoid the repetition of a conjunction, go- verns the same mood as that conjunc- tion; when the conjunction is si, &c, que governs the subjunctive, 516. Qu'est-ce que Jest que cela? what is that ? Je ne sais pas ce que Jest que cela, 319. Qu'est-ce que cela peut-etre? what can that be? 395. Que! exclamation! what! how! 335, 487. Qu'est-ce que c'est ? what is it ? 129, 171. Quel? what, which? (interroga- tive,) 25; quels, 44; quelle, &c, 283, 286, 485, 487. Quel que, quelle que, whatever, in two words, govern the subjunc- tive, 422, 516, 3d way. Quelque, 1st way, however ; 2d way, whatever, govern subjunctives, 422, 516. Quelque, s, some, any, a few, 68. Quelque chose, some, anything; de bon, good, 88, 462, (takes de be- fore an adjective.) Quelque chose que, whatever, governs the subjunctive, 423, 516—13. Quelque part, some, anywhere, 89, Obs. Quelqu'-jn, sorae, anybody, 39. Quelques uns, (en . . . ,) a few, some, 68. Question, (to be the,) to turn upon, s'agirde: the question is, il s^agit de, 391. Qu'en resulte-t-il ? what of it ? 483. Qui, who ? 100, 470, 230. A qui, whose? 147, 483; to whom? 230, N. B. The t is never cut off. Qui que ce soit, whoever, governs the subjunctive, 422, 516 — 13. Quick, fast, vite, 264. Quite (just) as much, as many, tout autant, 74, 76; tant de...que, so much ... as, 78. Quoi, (after the verb or a preposi- tion,) que, (before,) what ? 100. Quoi! admirative, what ! 487. Quoi encore ? what else, more ? 113. Quoique, whatever, 422 ; though, 417, governs the subjunctive. R. Rain, (to,) pleuvoir, 227. Does it rain? pleut-il? fait-il de la pluie? 301. Il pleut d verse, it rains very hard, it pours, 227. Rappeler, (se,) to recollect. Vous rappelez-vous cela ? do you recollect that ? I do,^*e me le rappelle, 261. Rather than, plutot que de, 321. Read, (to,) lire, lu, 172. (See Lire.) Recollect, (to,) se rappeler, se souvenir, se ressouvenir, 262. Reconnaitre, to recognise, to acknowledge, 272. Reduire. to reduce, reduisant, re- duit, 344. Rejouir (se) de quelque chose, to rejoice at something, 223. Rely, (to,) sejier a; you may rely upon him, vous pouvez vousjier a lui, &c, 348. Remain, (to,) rester, 182, N.l; demeurer, 187, N. 1. Remettre a, to postpone, put off, 394. Rendre, to return, give back, re- store, 80, 199; rendre visite, to pay a visit, 332. Rester, to remain, stay, 110; takes avoir and etre as auxiliary, 182, N. 1. Rester, to have left, 300. Restore, rendre. (See it.) Retenir, to hold back, retain, re- tenant, retewj. retenez, 260. Return, to give back, restore; rendre, 80, 199. Betourner, to go back, 428; revenir, to come back, 185. Reussir d, to succeed, 342. 580 INDEX. Revenir, to come back, to return, 185. Ride (to) on horseback, aller (mon- ter) d cheval, 214. To take a ride, se promener a cheval, 222. Rien, (ne. . . ,) qui, que, nothing that, governs the subjunctive, 423. Right, (to be,) avoir raison, 36. To the right, on the right side or hand, d droite, sur la droite, 378. It is right, c'est bien, 319. Rire, to laugh, riant, ri, riez. Se rire (moquer) de quelqu'un, to laugh, to deride one ; rire au nez de quel- qu'un, to laugh in a person's face, 325. Room, (the,) la chambre ; the front room, la chambre de devant, sur le de- vant ; the back room, de derriere, sur le derriere ; the upper room, du haut, oV en haut, 284. Rules: 1. Ail prepositions govern the infinitive, N. 1, on Apres, after, 460. R. 2. Of two verbs, the second is in the infinitive, &c, 461. R. 3. Do you speak before you listen ? Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? The French dispense with the second nominative, when it is the same as the first, 461. R. 4. When the nominatives are different, use ths English construc- tion, 461. R. 5. When two or more nouns, &c, govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposi- tion or with the same, 461. R. 6. Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never separated from it, and is repeated be- fore every word, 461. S. Sa, son, ses, his, her, 282, 466, $32. Sail, (a,) une voile. To set sail, mettre d la voile, 350, N. 1. To set sail for, /aire voile pour ; under full sail, marcher dpleines voiles, 350. Salt, (to,) saler, 92. Salir, to soil, dirty, 220. Salutations, (daily,) salutations journalieres. At pp. 26, 29, 32, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 63, (N. B. On composing an exercise on daily salutations, 70, 71, 73,) 104, 107, 112, 114, 119, 121, 123, 130, 134, 136, 139, 142. Same ; the same thing, la meme chose; the same man, le mime homme ; it is all one, (the same,) c'est egal, c'est la meme chose, 168, 307. Sans, without, 215 ; sans doute, without doubt, to be sure, 108. Sante, (la,) the health, 332. Savoir, to know ; sachant, su, sa- chez, takes no preposition after it, 135, 175. Satisfied (to be) with some one or something, itre content de quelqu'un ou de quelque chose, 210. Scarcely, d peine, 521. Seasons, (the,) les saisons, 499. Second, second, e, 70. Secondly, 2d, secondement, 363, 532 — 7. See, (to,) voir, voyant, vu, 172. Seem, (to,) paraitre, sembler, 429. Self, selves, meme, mimes; my- self, moi-mime ; themselves, eux- mimes, elles -mimes ; one's self, soi- mime, 154, 471. Selon, according to ; selon les circonstances ; c'est selon, it depends, 31\ Sentir, to feel ; sentant, senti, 278 ; to smell, 353. Servir, to serve, wait upon, ser- vant, servi, 254 ; se servir de, to make use of, to use, 266 ; servir la soupe, le dessert, to serve up the soup, the dessert, 348. To be of use, d quoicela vous sert-il ? of what use is that to you ? Servir de, to stand instead, to be as ; monfusilme INDEX. 581 $ert de baton, I use my gun as a stick ; servir de, to avail ; a quoi vous sert-il de pleurer ? what avails you to cry ? cela ne me sort d rien, it avails me nothing, 386. On a servi, the meal is on the table, (is served up;* vous servirai-je de la soupe? shall I help you to some soup ? do you choose any soup ? Set (to) out, to depart, leave, par- tir, 142, 175. Seul, e, alone, by one's self, 137, 159, 367 ; seuleme?it, non seulement, not only, 324. Shawl, (a,) un chdle, 34. Shortly, (soon.) bientot, 108, 185. Should or Ought. (See Ought.) Show, /aire voir, montrer, 134. To show a disposition to, faire mine de, 331 ; the show, (splendor, bright- ness,) V eclat ; to make a great show, faire de V eclat, 432. Si, if; the i is cut off before il, Us, but nowhere else ; after si, the pro- noun on takes V, 372. Si usually attends the conditionnel, and is fol- lowed by the imparfait, 310, 507. Que, used to avoid the repetition of si, governs the subjunctive, 516 — 10. Si, meaning granting, connects the future with the present, 233, Obs. 105. Si, so ; si Men, so well, 165. Sien, (le,) la sienne, &c, his or hers, 39, 49, 291, 483; a lui, d elle, 484. Side, cote ; by the side of, a cote de, 266; this side, de ce cote-ci ; on that side, de ce cote-la, 193. Silent, (to be,) to stop speaking, se taire, 392. Since or From, depuis ; from that time, depuis ce moment ; my child- hood, ma jeunesse ; from here there, depuis ici jusque Id. Since, (consi- dering, puisque, 342. Sit (to) down, s'asseoir, 262; to te seated, etre assis, assise, 302. Sleep, (to,) dormir, 121 ; 215. Are 48* you sleepy ? avez-vous sommeil ? 29. To feel sleepy, avoir envie de dor- mir, 220. Slow, slowly, lentement, 264. Snow, (to,) neiger, 227 ; it snows, ilfait de la neige, 301. So, (it,) le, 171, Obs. 77; so, thus, ainsi ; so, so, comme cela; so that, de sorte que, 230 ; so much, tant de ; so much as, tant que, 11, 210, 260. Soir, soiree, evening, their differ- ence, 289, N. 2. Some or Any, (before a noun,) du, de la, des ; (before an adjective or after a negation,) de, 55, 284. Some of it, of them, en, before the verb, 59 ; some or anymore, encore, used affir- matively ; encore du vin, encore des boutons, 75. N. B. {Encore is placed immediately after the verb.) Some- thing, quelque chose ; anything good, quelque chose de bon, 29, 191 ; some- times, quelque fois, 153 ; some, any- where, quelque part ; nowhere, not anywhere, ne . . . nullepart, 89. So much, many, tant, 11, 210, 260. Son, sa, ses, his or hers, 38, 44, 282, 466, % 32. Soon, very soon, bientot, 108, 185. Aussitot que, as soon as, aussitot que, 215. No sooner, pas plus tot, with preterit anterieur, 521. Sore, mal ; a sore foot, mal au pied, 110. Sortir, to go out, sortant, sorti, 110, 121, 150, 175. Soudainement, suddenly, all of a sudden, 290. Souffrir, to suffer, souffrant, souffert, 334. Sous, under ; dessous, under it, 177. Souvenir (se) de, se ressouvenir de, to remember, to recollect, 262. Souvent, often ; aussi souvent que, as often as ; plus souvent que, oftener than; moins souvent que, not so often as, 137. 582 INPXX. Speak (to) French. (See Parler.) Speech, (a,) un discours. To make a speech, /aire un discours, 295. Spend (to) time at something, pas- ser le temps a quelque chose, 250. Spite, (in . . . of,) en depit de, 346. Steel, acier, 55. Step, (a,) unpas. To walk a step, faire unpas ; to take a step, (mea- sures,) /aire une demarche, 295. Store, store -house, magasin, 63. Strike, (to,) J rapper, 323. To be struck with a thought, venir en pensee, d Videe, d V esprit. A thought strikes me, il me vient une pensee, 366. Subject. (See Nominative.) Subjunctive, subjonctif. (See Present, Imperfect, &c, 408.) Present ; how it ends, 513, § 151 — 1 ; how it is formed, — 2 ; eight excep- tions. Its use, — 2 ; important ob- servation on it. When the antecedent is a superlative, — 3 ; when imper- sonal, —4; interrogative, negative, or conditional, — 5 ; it expresses/ear, &c, takes ne, — 6, — 7 ; douter, nier, take ne, — 8 ; what, que, governs, — 9, — 10; whatever, however, — 11, quelque que, &c. ; its connexion with indicative, — 12 ; whatever, whatso- ever, — 13 ; quelque chose que, quoi que, quoique ce soit ; whomsoever, qui que ce soit ; when it must follow qui, que, dont, &c, — 14; when it must begin the sentence, — 15. Im- perfect, 517; its formation. Per- fect, (p. 418,) parfait. Pluperfect, (p. 419,) plusque parfait. Substantives, substan'ifs, noms, formation of plural, 44. Exceptions, 46, N. 1, 2, 3, 281. Feminine, 281. Genders, 194 ; 402, Obs. 163 ; 187, Obs. 85 ; 297, Obs. 140 ; 314 ; 239, N. 1; 284; 356. Compound sub- stantives, 47, N. 1, or 4S4— 7; 183, Obs. 82; 440, Obs. 171. De is put between the name of the thing and that of the substance of which it is made, 27, 403, 493; a, when the lat- ter expresses the use of the former, 404, 494 ; d la, au, aux, to determine it more precisely, 406, 494. Sub- stantives having a distinct form for the feminine, 495 ; used for both sexes, 298. Succeed, (to,) parvenir a. Have you succeeded in learning it 1 etes- vous parvenu d V apprendre ? 237. reussir a ; avez-vous reussi a V ap- prendre ? 237, 342. Such, un tel, une telle, pareil, pareille, 307, 490 — 9, — 10 ; un si bon livre. Suffer, (to,) souffrir, 334; to suffer one's self to be beaten, se laisser battre ; to let one's self fall, se laisser tomber; to suffer one's self to be in- sulted, se laisser insulter, 432. Suffire a, to suffice, be suffi- cient, suffisant, suffi, 349. Suit, (to,) convenir a, 237. Suite, (tout de,) immediately, 237. Suivre, to follow; suivant, suivt, 334. Suivre un conseil, to follow advice, 384. Sun, (the,) le soleil. We have too much sun, ilfait trop de soleil, 208. Superlative, superlatif, a new explanation on its formation, 144; followed by que or qui, requires the subjunctive, 515 — 3. Sur, on, upon, 175 ; dessus, upon it, 177. Surfaire, to overcharge, ask too much, 344. Surprendre, to surprise, 374. Surprise, (to,) etonner. To be surprised at, s 1 etonner de, 374. Sweet, doux, douce, 491. Sweeten, (to,) sucrer f adoucir, 92. Ta, ton, tes, thy, 282, 108, 466. Taire, (se,) to hold one's tongue, be silent, taisant ; tu ; taisez-vous, be silent, 392. Take (to) place, avoir lieu t 165 ; 583 care of something, prendre (avoir) soin de quelque chose, 256 ; of some one, to beware of one, prendre garde a quelqu'un, 366 ; an airing in a car- riage, se promener en carrosse, 222. Tant, so much ; par an, a year ; partite, a head, 210, 293; tant que, so long as, 401 ; tant soi peu, just a little, ever so little, 427; tant bien que mal, indifferently, 396 ; tant que vous voudrez, so, as long as you please, 401, 492. Tarder, to delay. (See the latter.) Taste, (to,) gouter, 129, 208; the taste, le gout ; each man has his taste, chaque homme a son gout, 217. Te, thee, to thee, te le, les, 108, 472. T'' en, thee some; Vy en, thee some there. Te, Ven, t'y, (reflective,) 478, $71, 72, 73. Teach, (to,) enseigner ; to teach some one something, enseigner quel- que chose d quelqu'un ; some one to do something, apprendre d quelqu'un a f aire quelque chose, 266. Tear, (a,) une larme ; to shed tears, verser des larmes ; with tears in his, her, our, &c, eyes, les larmes aux yeux, 323. Teindre, to dye, color; teignant, teint; en noir, en rouge, to dye black, red, 195. Tel, telle, tels, telles, such ; un tel homme, une telle femme, such a man, woman ; de tels hommes, de telles femmes, such men, women, 307. Tel is not used with another adjec- tive. Such a kind friend, un si bon ami, 490—9, —10. Tell, (to,) to say, dire ; told, dit, 168. Tenir, to hold ; tenant, tenu ; te- nez. Tenez, the imperative, is used as an exclamation, 203, 06s. 94. Se tenir prit, to keep one's self ready, 274. Tenir pension, keep a boarding- house, school, 385. Lieude, to take the place of, be instead of, 404. (See Keep.) S'en tenir d, to abide by, 477. Tenses, (the,) les temps. Present, 114, 500 to 503, including true pre- sent, je suis d lire, 502. Perfect, 167, 503, 504. First future, 231, 504 to 506 ; second future, 299. Im- perfect, 305, 506. Imperfect of the potential, conditionnel, 310, 507, 508. Perfect of the potential, 311, 508, 509. Imperative, 369, 509 to 513. Subjunctive present, 408, 513 ; subjunctive imperfect, 416, 517. Per- fect, 418. Pluperfect, 419. Prete- rit or second imperfect of the indica* tive, 368, 517 to 520. Pluperfect of indicative is formed like the English tense, by the imperfect of the auxi- liary and past participle of the verb to be conjugated, 520. Examples after the 59th lesson, p. 305. Second pluperfect, preterit anterieur, 362, 520, 521. Infinitive, four termina- tions of it, 80 ; explanations, 521 to 525. Past participle, 156, 525 to 527. Present participle, 114, 448, 500. Than, que de, (before nouns,) 78. Than, before a number, is rendered by de, and not by que ; more than nine, plus de neuf, 246. That or Which, que, (relative,) 43, 478. That, (meaning that thing,) cela, 168, 467, 469, N. 4. That, (the one,) celui, plural, ceux, celle, celles, 30, 48, 286, 467. That which, the one which, those which, celui que, ceux que, &c, 43, 48, 286, 467, 468. That which, (the thing which,) ce que, (objective,) ce qui, (nomina- tive,) 124, 481. That book of mine, 485. The, le, la, les, 25, 44, 281 ; its connexion with prepositions, 463. Their, leur, leurs, 44, 282 ; when it must be translated by en . . . les, 466, N. 2. Theirs, le (la) leur, les leurs, 49, 684 INDEX. 291, 483 ; after il, die, &c, a eux, a dies 484. Them, to them, leur. (See it.) Themselves, eux-memes, elles- memes, 471 ; (reflective,) se, s'y, s 1 en, 477, 478. Then, alors ; until then, jusqu 1 - alors, 189. There, to it, at it, in it, 87, 101. To go, to be, there, y alter, y etre, 87. There, Id, y, 110. There is, il y a, 180, 238, 246, 7, 8, 338. There is, (behold,) voild ; there it is, le voild, la voild ; they are, les voild, (here is, void,) 310, 312. Thine, lelien, latienne, &c., 108, 291,483; after il, elle, &c, d toi, 484. Think (to) of, penser d, 476. Third, troisieme, 70; tiers, 499. Thirdly, troisiemement, 363 — 7. This, That, these, those, ce, cet, cette, ces. This one, that one, these, those, celui-ci, celui-ld, &c, 30, 41, 44, 50, 286. Thou, tu, 107. Though, quoique, (see it,) 417. Thousand, (a,) mille, does not take un, 462. Throw, (to,) jeter, 173, 502, N. B. Thunder, le tonnerre. It thun- ders very much, il fait beaucoup de tonnerre, 215. Thus, So, ainsi, 179. Thy, ton, ta, tes, 108, 282, 466. Thyself, toi-meme, 471 ; (reflec- tive,) te, tfy, fen, 477, 478. Tien, (le,) la tienne, les ttens, les tiennes, thine, 108, 291, 483; d toi, 484. Till, until, jusque ; till noon, iusqu'd midi, 189; not until, pas avant de, 310. Tired, (to be,) etre las, lasse, 429 ; to get tired, s 'ennuyer, 376. Tirer, to pull, draw, shoot, fire, 244. To, d, 101, 102; to the, au, d la, &c, 463; in order to, pour, 92. Toi, thou ; toi qui, que, 468, 470 ; d toi, to thee, 476 ; d toi, thine, 484. Ton, ta, tes, thy, 108, 282, 466. Too, trop, 150 ; too much, many, trop, 66, 67 ; too late, trop tard ; soon, early, trop tot; large, great, trop grand; little, trop peu ; too small, trop petit, 150. Tour a tour, alternately, by turns, 404. Tout, tous, all. Tout le vin ; tous les livres, 110. Tout autant, quite (just) as much, 76. Tout de suite, immediately, 108 ; pas du tout, not at all, 115. Tout d coup, all at once, 290. Towards, envers, vers, 270, 393. Travel, (to,) voyager, 194, 213; through Europe, faire le tour de V Europe, 400. Treat, (to ) use somebody well, (ill,) en user Men, (mal,) avec queU qu'un, 394. Trick, (to play a,) jouer un tour, 400. Tromper, to deceive, cheat ; se tromper, to make a mistake, 219. Trop, too, too much, many, 65, 150. Trust (to) one, sejier d quelqu'un; to distrust one, se defter de quel- qu'un, 325. Truth, (the,) la verite ; in truth, indeed, en verite ! 47, 105. Tu, thou, 107, N. 1. Turn, (to,) a soldier, se faire sol- dat, 225 ; to account, (make the best of,) faire valoir, 427 ; one into ridi- cule, tourner quelqu'un en ridicule, 388. Turn, (the,) le tour. To take a turn, (a walk,) faire un tour, 242, 400. T'y, thee to it there, 475 ; Vy en, thee some there, 476 ; t'y, (reflec- tive,) thyself, 478. U. Un, une, a, an, one, 63, 68, 70, 285, 129 ; not used before cent, &c. v INDEX. 585 462. Pas un qui, que, not one that, governs the subjunctive, 515 — 5. L'un Vautre, Vune Vautre, each other ; etes-vous contents Vun de Vautre ? are you pleased with each other ? Nous le sommes, we are, 331. The one, (when not in apposition to the other,) not Vun, but celui, 43. Under, sous; under it, dessous, 177. Understand, (to,) comprendre, compris, 182; to make one's self understood, sefaire comprendre, 370. Unipersonal Verbs govern the subjunctive, 515 — 4. Unless, d moins que . . . ne ... , govern the subjunctive, 537. Until, jusqu'd ce que, governs the subjunctive, 537; jusqu'alors, 189. Up, to get up, (to rise,) se lever, 222. To go up, monter, 304, N. 1 ; to stand up, etre debout ; to remain up, r ester debout, 373. Up stairs, en haut, 193. Up to the top, jusqu 1 en haut, 428. Upon, sur ; upon it, dessus, 175. Us, nous, d nous. See Nous. User, to wear out, 180. En user bien (mal) avec quelqu'un. To treat sne well, (ill,) 394. V. Valoir, to be worth ; valant, valu, valoir mieux, to be better, 199 ; la peine, to be worth while. Cela en vaut-il la peine ? Is it worth while ? 270. Faire valoir, to turn to account, 427. Veille, (la,) the day before, 340. Venir, to come, venant, venu, 88, 121, 175. Venir de, to have just, 248, 504 — 3. Venir en pensee, (d Videe, d V esprit,) to have a thought, 366. Venir and alter, are in French followed by an infinitive, and the conjunction cm/? is not rendered, 374, 512—12. Verbs, verbes. The four conjuga- tions, 80. Compound and derivative verbs are conjugated like their primi- tives, 179. Auxiliaries, See Avoir, Etre. Verbs requiring etre, to be, as auxiliary, 175,530. Active verbs, 167. Neuter, 175, 530. Passive, 212, 530. Reflective, 217, 531. Always conju- gated with the auxiliary etre, — 4- They always have two pronouns of the same person, — 2. Impersonal, 227. They usually govern the sub- junctive, 515 — 4. Do, am, &c, when used to interrogate, may be rendered by est-ce que ? With some verbs est-ce que must be used, 139. When ne is used without pas, 322; etre connected by d with an infinitive expresses the present tense, as Je suis a lire, I am reading, 399, 502 — 6. Most passive verbs may be made reflected, 531 — 5. Vers, envers, towards, 270 ; the former is used physically, the latter morally, 393. Vis- a- vis de, opposite to, 387. VrvRE, to live, vivant, vecu, 214; Fait-il bon vivre d Paris ? Is the living good in Paris ? 315. Voila, there is ; void, here is ; voild pourquoi, that is the reason why; voild pourquoi je ledis, there fore I say so, 312. Voile, (un,) a veil, is masculine ; une voile, a sail, feminine, 350, N. 1. | A pileines voiles, d toutes voiles,) un ' der full sail, 350. Voir, to see, voyant, vu, voyez, 92, 121, 172. Votre, plural vos, your, 25, 44, 282. 466. Votke, de, la.) les votres, yours, 30, 291, 483. Vouloir, to be willing, to wish, voulant, voulu, 83, 175. Vous, you, 25, 409. Vous qui, you who, vous-meme, s, yourself, 471. Objective vous, you, to you, 472; vous y, you there, 475 ; vous en, you some, vous y en, you some there ; d vous, to you, 476 ; vous (reflect.) 1st 586 INDEX. class, 477, vous y ; 2d class, vous en ; 3d class, yourselves, 478 ; d vous, yours, 484, § 106. Voyager, (to travel,) 194, voya- geant, 502—2. W. Wake, (to,) eveiller, reveiller, 369. Walk, (to,) marcher, 295 ; to take a walk, se promener ; to go walking ; aller se promener, 222. To walk or travel a mile, faire un mille, 295. Want, (to,) to be in want of, to have need of, avoir besoin de, 112; falloir, ilfaut, 197, 06s. 89; vouloir, 83, 175. Warm, chaud. Are you warm? avez-vous chaud ? 31. Is it warm ? fait-il chaud ? 53. Way, chemin, 105; on the way, en chemin, 121 ; in this way, de cette maniire, 180 ; about asking the way, 378. We, nous, 67, 409; we, nous au- tres, 471. Weather, (the,) le temps. How is the weather ? what weather is it ? quel temps fait-il ? 53, 208. Welcome, (to be,) itre le bien venu, 376. Well, bien, 26, 147, ?19. To be well, etre bien portant, e, etre en bonne sante ; she is well, elle est bien por- tante, elle se forte bien, elle est en bonne sante, 330. Wet, damp, humide. Is the wea- ther damp ? Fait-il humide ? 208. What? que? ^before a verb,) 29; after verbs and prepositions, quoi? 100; que, quoi, qu 'est -ce que? what, nominative, qu 1 est-ce qui? what is, was, &c, (interrogative,) followed by a preposition, qu'y a-t-il . . . ? qu'y avait-il? 486. What, (or the thing which,) ce qui, ce que, 124, 48] § 89 ; what is, (relative,^ followed by a pre- position, ce qu'il y a. 480 — 4. What? qu 'est-ce que c' est ? qu' est-ce que c' est que cela? 129, 171. What! que ! quoi ! 487. Whatever, whatsoever, quelque, quel que, quelle que, &c, quelque chose que, quoique, quoi que ce soit, 422, 423, 516. When, quand, lorsque, 88, 242; used with the preterit anterieur, 521. When connects two future tenses, 235, Obs. 106. Where? r the use of schools, the author has borne in mind, that many of the learners of French are adults, therefore, while it is adapted for youthful students, in endeavor has also been made to make it acceptable to those of more advanced age. IN PREPARATION. A NEW DICTIONARY OF THE FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. Part I. FRENCH AND ENGLISH | Part II. ENGLISH AND FRENCH. Based on the recent Dictionary of A. Spikrs with many valuable Addition* and Improvements. On* volume, large 8vo. Uniform with " Adler's German Lexicon." 23 <0?rrara. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. Reprinted from the Frankfort edition, to which is added a Systematic Outline of the differeri Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with full Paradigms, and a complete List of the Irregular Verbs. BY GEORGE J. ADLER, A. B., Professor of German in the University of the City of New- York. One volume, 12mo. 81 50. (Cr A KEY TO THE EXERCISES, in a separate volume. 75 cts. ** Ollendorff's new method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Lan- guage, with a systematic outline ofGerman Grammar, by George J. Adler, is one of those rare works which leave nothing to be desired on the subjects of which they treat. The learner's dif- ficulties are so fully and exactly provided for, that a constant sense of satisfaction and progress is felt from the beginning to the end of the book. A bare inspection of one of the lessees will satisfy any one acquainted with the elements ofGerman grammar, that it adapts itself perfectly to his wants. With the systematic outline of grammar by Prof. Adler, the new method is sub- stantially perfect, and it is probably second in its advantages only to residence and intercourse with educated Germans." " The study of the German is becoming so essential a part of an ordinary education, that every work tending to facilitate the acquisition of the language should be welcomed. An Ameri- can edirion of Ollendorff has been much wanted. His system is bayed upon natural principles. He teaches by leading the student to the acquisition of phrases, from which he deduces the rules of the language. The idioms are also carefully taught, and the entire construction of the system is such that, if adhered to with fidelity and perseverance, it will secure such a practical know- ledge of the German as can be acquired by no other mode, so rapidly and thoroughly. We heartily commend the book to all who really wish to understand a tongue which contains so many treasures. NEW GRAMMAR FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE THROUGH THE MEDIUM OF THE GERMAN \ Arranged and adapted for Schools and Private Instruction, BY P. G ANDS. One volume, 12mo. Key to the same, uniform with the above. Price 75 cts. u My compilation of the French Grammar after the method of Ollendorff; has made the Ger man public so thoroughly acquainted with this highly practical system of instruction, that it will net be necessary to add any further recommendation in this place. It was so universally ac- knowledged and adopted, that I was induced to compile a similar Grammar for Germans to Learn English, and I did this the more willingly because I was urged to do so by many from all quarters. u In carrying out the plan, I endeavored to introduce exe- rises in questions and answers suited to familiar and social conversation, so as to do away with lhe antiquated Phrase-books still in use. The frequent application and repetition of the* rules set forth in this book. I have sought to make as lree from dull monotony as possible, by giving the sentences a new turn, and by arranging them in different order, so as not to repeat the same over and over again. " A practical routine of instruction carried on for many years, has taught me the wants o/ the student ; I feel therefore perfectly confident in bringing this book before the public. "P. GANDS." 24 tak auii Mb. ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. OPINIONS OF SCHOLARS From A. B. Atkins, Baltimore. " I have introduced Arnold's First and Second Latin Book as a Text-book in ray institution, my classes have already made great proficiency ; indeed I cannot express in too high terms my admiration of ihe Series ; it is the only method of teaching the classics, and no books have evei been published which seem to be so admirably adapted to teach Latin and Greek as they." From E. S. Dixwell, Public Latin School, Boston. " I have caused both ' Arnold's Greek and Latin Prose Composition,' as well as ' Arnold's First and Second Latin Book,' to be introduced into this School, which is the best proof of the estimation in which I hold them." From William A. Ely, University of Michigan. "I have made considerable use of 'Arnold's Latin Book/ ' Cornelius Nepos,' and 'Greek Reader,' &c, in my Classes, and can from experience say that they are the best Text-books of the kind with which I am acquainted.' Gentlemen,— In reply to your letter, I have to say that I can, from the most satisfactory experience, bear testimony to the excellence of your series of Text-Books for Schools. I am in the daily use of Arnold's Latin and Greek Exercises, and consider them decidedly superior to any other Elementary Works in those Languages. LYMAN COLEMAN, D. D., Prof, of the German, Greek, and Latin Languages, Princeton. Dear Sir, — I am much pleased with Arnold's Latin Books. A class of my older boys have just finished the first and second books. They had studied Latin for a long time before but never understood it, they say, as they do now. CHAS. M. BLAKE, Classical Teacher in Brown's Prince-street Academy, Philadelphia. After having in constant use since their first appearance Arnold's Series of both Latin and Greek Books, my experience enables me confidently to pronounce upon their unrivalled merits. I state, without fear of contradiction, that, even with greater labor and pains on the part of the teacher, equal progress cannot be made without as can be with them. And they succeed admirably in awakening an interest in the pupil, and in making a lasting impression upon his memory. It is an application of Bacon's principle for forming an accurate man. R. B. TSCHUDE, Prof, of Ancient Languages, Norfolk, Va. Arnold's Latin and Greek Composition. In the skill with which he sets forth the idiomatic peculiarities, as well as in the directness and simplicity with which he states the facts of tne Ancient Languages, Mr. Arnold has no superior. I know of no books so admirably adapted to awaken an interest in the study of language, or so well fitted to lay the foundation of a correct scholarship and refined taste. N. WHEELER, Principal Worcester County High School From N. W. Benedict, A. M., Prof, of Languages in the Rochester Collegiate Institute Gentlemen, — I am under obligations to you by D. Hoyt for a copy of Arnold's First and Second Latin Book, and for a copy of Arnold's Greek Reading Book. Other volumes of Arnold's Serit^ have been forwarded to me; and after a careful examination of the works, directed more particularly to their plan, I am convinced of their superior merits and have introduced them into the Institute. I am specially pleased with the kind of help afforded in his Cornelius Nepos, which is such as to give the student a critical and accurate understanding of the text, and at the same time to stimulate his mind to greater exertion to apprehend the beauties of the lan- guage. The plan is designed and well adapted to make the knowledge obtained the property of the scholar. Extract ft am a Report of an Examination of the Male Department of the Parochial School of St. Paul's Church, Rome. N. Y. * * * * " But were we to single out any part of the examination as worthy of special notice. it would be i h;ii upon ' Arnold's First Book in Latin.' Many an Academician, who has studied Latin in trie ordinary way for two years, could not sustain an examination as did the lads of thi0 claw, who have studied Arnold's First Lessons only about six months. Arnold's method is ad- mirable for making thorough scholars and accurate grammarians." 31 ^Trunin ' A DICTIONARY GERMAN AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, INDICATING THE ACCENTUATION OF EVERY GERMAN WORD, CONTAINING SEVERAL HUNDRED GERMAN SYNONYMS, TOGETHER. WITH A CLASSIFICATION AND ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VERB6, AND A DICTION- ARY OF GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. COMPILED FROM THE WORKS OF HILPERT, FLUGEL, GREIB, HEYSB, AND OTHERS. I N TWO P A RTS : I GERMAN AND ENGLISH — II. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. BY G. J. ADLER, A. M., Professor of the German Language and Literature in the University of ike City of New- York. Oas large volume, 8vo , of 1100 pages. Price $5. Strongly and neatly bonni Extract from the Preface. In preparing this volume, our principal aim was to offer to the American student ol tted German a work whicn would embody all the valuable results of the most recent fat, instigations in German Lexicography, and which might thus become not only a relia- ble guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not iorsake him in the higher walks of his pursuit, to which its literary and scientific treasures would naturally invite him. The conviction that such a work was a desideratum, and one which claimed immediate attention, was first occasioned by the steadily increasing inter- est manifested in the study of the German by such among us as covet a higher intellect- ual culture, as well as those who are ambitious to be abreast with the times in all that concerns the interests of Learning, Science, Art, and Philosophy. in comparing the different German-English Dictionaries, it was found that all of them were deficient in their vocabulary of foreign words, which now act so important a pari net only in scientific works, but also in the best classics in the reviews, journals, news- papers, and even in conversational language of ordinary life. Hence we have endeav- oured to supply the desired words required in Chemistry, Mineralogy, Practical Art, Commerce, Navigation, Rhetoric, Grammar, Mythology, both ancient and modern. The ta^entuation of the German words, first introduced by Hernsius, and not a little improved by flilpert and his coadjutors, has also been adopted, and will be regarded as a most de- sirable and invaluable aid to the student. Another, and it is hcped not the least, valu- able addition to the volume, are the synonyms, which we have generally given in an abridged and not unfrequently in a new form, from Hilpert, who was the first that offered to the English student a selection from the rich store of Eberhard, Maas, and Gruber. Nearly all the Dictionaries published in Germany having been prepared with special reference to the German student of the English, and being on that account incomplete in the German-English part, it was evidently our vocation to reverse the order for this side of the Atlantic, and to give the utmost possible completeness and perfection to the Ger- man pari. This was the proper sphere of our labor. Morning Courier and New- York Enquirer. The Applstons have just published a Dictionary of the German Language, containing Eng!br names of German words, and German translations of English words, by Mr. Adlk.r, Professor of Gerrsao in the University of the City of New-York. In view of the present and rapidly increasing disposition of American students to make themselves familiar with the Language and Literature of Germany, the publication ol this work seems <. specially timely and important. It is in form a large, substantial octavo volume of 1400 pages, beautifully printed in clear and distinct type, and adapted in every way to the constant services for which a lexicon is made. The purpose aimed at by the editor cannot be more distinctly stated than in his own words, quoted from the preface, in which he Mates that he sought u to embody all the valuable results of the most recent investigations in German Lexicography, so that his work might thu? become not only a reliable guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not forsake him m the higher walks of his pursuits, to which its literary treasures would naturally invite him." All who are in any degree familiar with German, can bear wttr uess to the necessity mat has long been felt for such a work. It is needed by students ol the language at every stage of their progress. None of those hitherto in use have been satisfactory — the best of them, that published in Philadelphia, in 1845, lacking verv many of the essentials of a reliable and servicable lexicon. From a somewhat close examina- tion of its contents, we are satisfied that Mr. Adler's Dictionary will be universally re- garded as the best extant. Its great superiority lies in it» completeness, no word in any department of science or literature being omitted. We cannot doubt that it will beooma at once the only German lexicon in use throughout the country. 3tali(tB. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. With Additions and Corrections by Felix Foresti, Prof, of the Italian Language in Columbia College, New-York City. One volume. 12mo. $1 50. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. One vol. 12mo. 75 cts. "Ollbndorff's Italian Grammar. — The system of learning arxl teaching the living lan- fuages by Ollendorff is so superior to all other modes, that in England and on the continent oJ Jurope, scarcely any other is in use, in well-directed academies and other institutions of learning. To those who feel disposed to cultivate an acquaintance with Italian literature, this work will prove invaluable, abridging, by an immense deal, the period commonly employed in studying the language." ACCOMPANIMENT TO OLLENDORFF'S ITALIAN GRAMMaR. CRESTOMAZIA ITALIANAI A COLLECTION OF SELECTED PIECES IN ITALIAN PROSE, DESIGNED AS A CLASS READING BOOK FOR BEGINNERS IN THE STUDY OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. BY E. FELIX FORESTI, LL. D., PROFESSOR OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN COLUMBIA COLLFSE AND IN THE UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY OF NEW- YORK. One volume, 12mo. Price $1. " The Italian Reader is compiled by Mr. Foresti, Professor of the Italian Language in the Columbia College and the University of New- York. It appears to be designed to follow the study of Ollendorff's Italian Grammar, on which work many correct judges have pronounced thai no important improvement can well be made. In making selections for the book before us, Mr. Foresti has preferred modern Italian writers to the old school of novelists, historians, and poets. In this he has done a good thing ; for the Italian Reader contains the modern language. True, there are some innovations, some changes which many would deem a departure from original purity, but nevertheless it is the language which one finds and hears spoken in Italy. These chaag *3 have gone on under the eye and against the stern authority of the Academy delta Crusca. vrA in their magnificent new dictionary, new in process of publication, they have found them- wives compelled to insert many words which are the growth not only of modern necessity, but if caprice. " The selections in the Italiau Reader are from popular authors, such as Botta, Manzoni Wachiavelli, Villani, and others. They are so made as not to constitute mere exercises, but con- am distinct relations so complete as to gratify the reader and engage his attention while they instruct. This is a marked improvement on that old system which exacted much labor without enlisting the sympathies of the student. The selections from Manzoni, for example, are from the " Prutntssi Sj)osi" one of the noblest works of fiction ever issued from the press— a work BO popular as to have gone through an incredible number of editions in Italy, while it has been translated into every language of Europe. There have been, we believe, no less than three die* tinct English translations made, two ol which were done in this country. The Reader contains six extracts from this novel, among which are the beautiful episodes of Father Cristoforo and the Nun of Monza, and a description of the famine and plague of Milan in the year 1630, The account of the plague rivals the celebrated one of Boccacio in his Decameron. The idioms that occur in the selections are explained by a glossary appended to each. The Italian Reader can with confidence be recommended to students in the language as a safe anil sure guide. After mastering it, the Italian poets and other classicists may be approached with confidence. v — Savant tta/i Republican. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE, UTith an Appendix, containing a brief, but comprehensive Recapitulation of the Rules as well a* of all the Verbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to render theii use ea&y and familiar to the most ordinary capacity. TOGETHER WITH PRACTICAL RULES FOR SPANISH PRONUNCIATION, AND MODELS OF SOCIAL AND COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. The whole designed for young learners and persons who are their own instructors. 8y M. VELAZQUEZ and T. SIMON NE, Professors of the Spanish and French Language* One volume, 12mo. of 560 pages. Price SI 50. ^ KEY TO THE SAME IN A SEPARATE VOLUME, 75 cts. "Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. — This is another number cf the admirable ser.es of elementary books of instruction in the language of Modern Europe, for tfhich the public is in- debted to the Appletons. Ollendorff's method of teaching languages, especially living languages H now in universal use, and enjoys a very decided pre-eminence over any other now in use, in •emuch as it combines the merits, and avoids the faults of all others, and has, besides, many very marked and admirable peculiarities. No other books are now in general use, and his elementary treatises have won a unanimous favor not often accorded to any work in any department of hu man knowledge. Their chief peculiarity consists in this, that they lead the learner, by gradual ■teps, each perfectly simple and easy, from the first elements even to the nicest idioms of the Tarious languages, comprehending, in the process, a complete mastery of Grammatical rules and colloquial phrases. They are in common use, not only in this country, but throughout Europe, and are likely to supersede, every where, all similar books. "This method of learning Spanish, which has just been issued, is likely to be even more widely useful, especially in this country, than those which have preceded it, since recent events have rendered a knowledge of Spanish more than usually important to all classes of our people. The editors of the work are widely known as accomplished scholars and distinguished teachers, and the book derives still higher authority from their connection with it. We commend it with great confidence to all who desire to become acquainted with the Castilian tongue." — New- Yjrk Courier and Enquirer. %m Grammar far Ipaittartis to tan (Knglistt. IN PREPARATION. GRAMMATICA 1NGLESA SEGUN EL SISTEMA DE OLLENDORFF, Iccompafiado de un Appendice que comprende en compendio las reglas contenidas en el cuerpc Hincipal de la obra: un Tratado sobre la pronunciacion, division y formacion de las palabraa ngWsas ; una lista de los verbos regulares e irregulares, consus conjugaciones y las distintaa preposiciones que ngen : model :s de correspondencia, &c, &c, todo al alcance de la capacidad us mediana. POR RAMON PALENZUELA, AbagadQ) Boctor en Derecho Civil de la Universidad de Car&cas ( Venezuela} y Pro/war de lenguas en Neuva- York. One vol. 12mo. A NEW SPANISH READER. CONSISTING OF PASSAGES FROM THE MOST APPROVED AUTHORS, IN PROSE AND VERSE ARRANGED IN PROGRESSIVE ORDER J For the vse of those who wish to obtain easily, a Practical Knowledge of tne Castilian Language ; with Plain Rules, for its Pronun- ciation, Notes Explanatory of the Idioms and difficult Constructions, and a Copious Vocabulary. BEING A SEQUEL TO OLLENDORFF'S METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. BY MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, Editor of Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. One volume. 12mo. Price $1.25. This book being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been prepared with three objects in view, namely ; to furnish the learner with pleasing and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and difficulties of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds »vith select instruction ; and thirdly, to form their character, by ins: lling correoi Erineiples into their hearts. Tn order, therefore, to obtain the desired effect, the extract* ave been carefully selected from such classic Spanish writers, both ancient and modern whose style is generally admitted to be a pattern of elegance, combined with idiomatir purity and sound morality. — Extract from Preface. A NEW SPANISH PHRASE BOOK. AN EASY INTRODUCTION TO SPANISH CONVERSATION. Containing all that is necessary to make a rapid progress in it. PARTICULARLY DESIGNED FOR PERSONS WHO HAVE LITTLE TIME TO STUDY OR ARE THEIR OWN INSTRUCTORS. BY MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. One volume. 18mo. 100 pages. 38 cents. " The author of this little volume has long been favorably known as a teacher of the Spanish language. He has supplied, in this volume, one of the best and must useful booki for learners of Spanish we have yet seen. It will prove a very efficient help to conversation in Spanish ; and there is much more information in it than the size of the book wonld «oad one to expect." — Commercial Advertiser. In preparation, A DICTIONARY OF THE SPANISH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. IN TWO PARTS! I. SPANISH AND ENGLISH. II. ENGLISH AND SPANISH B\ MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, Editor of Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar, and M. SEOANE, M. D. In one large 8vo. volume, uniform with " Adler's German Lexicon.' -^ ^ ,< I \^- *K- ^ t • -P ,/v ^r < -p. ^ ^ ** ^ ^ Deacidified using the Bookkeeper p Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxij Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 PreservationTechnolcfl A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESER 1 1 1 Thomson Parte Drive Cranberry Township, PA 1601 (724)779-2111 Hi LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 003 117 625 6